This is a modern-English version of The Central Eskimo: Sixth Annual Report of the Bureau of Ethnology to the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, 1884-1885, Government Printing Office, Washington, 1888, pages 399-670, originally written by Boas, Franz.
It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling,
and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If
you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.
Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.
This text uses characters that require UTF-8 (Unicode) file encoding, including:
This text uses characters that require UTF-8 (Unicode) file encoding, including:
χ (Greek chi, see below)
ā ē ī ō ū (long vowels)
œ (“oe” ligature)
⅔ (see List of Illustrations)
χ (Greek chi, see below)
ā ē ī ō ū (long vowels)
œ (“oe” ligature)
⅔ (see List of Illustrations)
In the main text, all but χ are rare. Long-vowel marks are used in Figure captions and in the Glossary; œ occurs only in scientific terms.
In the main text, all except χ are uncommon. Long-vowel marks are used in figure captions and in the glossary; œ appears only in scientific terms.
If any of these characters do not display properly—in particular, if a diacritic does not appear directly above its letter—or if the apostrophes and quotation marks in this paragraph appear as garbage, you may have an incompatible browser or unavailable fonts. First, make sure that your browser’s “character set” or “file encoding” is set to Unicode (UTF-8). You may also need to change the default font.
If any of these characters aren't showing up correctly—in particular, if a diacritic isn't appearing directly above its letter—or if the apostrophes and quotation marks in this paragraph look like garbage, you might have an incompatible browser or missing fonts. First, check that your browser’s “character set” or “file encoding” is set to Unicode (UTF-8). You may also need to change the default font.
Parenthetical question marks (?) are in the original.
Parenthetical question marks (?) are in the original.
Orthography is explained early in the article. Modern (ICI) forms should be deducible from Boas’s spellings. These are based on Kleinschmidt, but with q in place of ĸ (kra). Note that long vowels are rarely marked, except in the Glossary and in figure captions. Words are often written with nasalized finals: n for t sometimes, ng for k almost always, irn (only) for iq. Medial q is usually written χ (chi), representing the fricative pronunciation: “Eχaluin” and similar.
Orthography is explained early in the article. Modern (ICI) forms should be derivable from Boas’s spellings. These are based on Kleinschmidt, but with q instead of ĸ (kra). Note that long vowels are rarely indicated, except in the Glossary and in figure captions. Words are often written with nasalized endings: n for t sometimes, ng for k almost always, irn (only) for iq. Medial q is generally written as χ (chi), representing the fricative pronunciation: “Eχaluin” and similar.
Missing punctuation in Figure captions and the Glossary has been silently supplied. Other typographical errors are shown with mouse-hover popups.
Missing punctuation in figure captions and the glossary has been quietly added. Other typographical errors are indicated with mouse-hover popups.
The music section (pages 648-658) includes sound files in midi format. Depending on your browser, they will either play as-is or will need to be downloaded to your computer. Some browsers will offer two “Music” links; use the one that works best for you.
The music section (pages 648-658) includes sound files in MIDI format. Depending on your browser, they will either play directly or need to be downloaded to your computer. Some browsers will provide two “Music” links; use the one that suits you best.
BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY SIXTH ANNUAL REPORT PL. II
BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY SIXTH ANNUAL REPORT PL. II
I. Oqo and
Akudnirn
II. Frobisher
Bay
III. Eclipse Sound and
Admiralty Inlet
IV. Repulse Bay and
Lyon Inlet
V. Boothia Isthmus and
King William Land
I. __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
II. __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
III. __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__
IV. __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__
V. __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__
CONTENTS.
405
ILLUSTRATIONS.
Illustrations have been placed as close as practicable to their discussion in the text. The List of Illustrations shows their original location. Plates II and III, the color maps, are shown at the beginning and end of the text, respectively. Plates II-IV and Figures 544-546 are shown as thumbnails. Click to see a larger version.
Illustrations have been positioned as close as possible to their discussion in the text. The List of Illustrations indicates their original placement. Plates II and III, the color maps, are displayed at the beginning and end of the text, respectively. Plates II-IV and Figures 544-546 are shown as thumbnails. Click to view a larger version.
A few figures have notation such as “½” or “⅔”, referring to actual size. In this e-text, “actual size” generally corresponds to a resolution of 100dpi:
A few figures have notations like “½” or “⅔”, indicating actual size. In this e-book, “actual size” typically corresponds to a resolution of 100dpi:
Images may come out slightly larger or smaller on your screen.
Images may appear a bit larger or smaller on your screen.
Page. | ||
Plate II. | Map showing in detail the geographical divisions of territory occupied by the Eskimo tribes of Northeastern America Map showing in detail the geographical divisions of territory occupied by the Inuit tribes of Northeastern America |
(*) |
1. Oqo and Akudnirn. 2. Frobisher Bay. 3. Eclipse Sound and Admiralty Inlet. 4. Repulse Bay and Lyon Inlet. 5. Boothia Isthmus and King William Land. |
||
III. | Map of the territory occupied by the Eskimo tribes of North America, showing the boundaries Map of the area occupied by the Eskimo tribes of North America, showing the borders |
(*) |
IV. | Map of Cumberland Peninsula, drawn by Aranin, a Saumingmio | 643 |
V. | Eskimo drawings | 648 |
VI. | Eskimo drawings | 650 |
VII. | Eskimo drawings | 651 |
VIII. | Eskimo carvings | 652 |
IX. | Eskimo carvings | 653 |
X. | Modern implements | 654 |
* In pocket at end of volume. * In pocket at the end of the volume. |
||
Fig. 390. | Harpoon from Alaska | 472 |
391. | Modern unang or sealing harpoon | 472 |
392. | Old style naulang or harpoon head | 473 |
393. | Modern naulang or harpoon head | 473 |
394. | Qilertuang or leather strap and clasps for holding coiled up harpoon lines Qilertuang, or leather straps and clasps for securing coiled harpoon lines. |
474 |
395. | Siatko or harpoon head of the Iglulirmiut | 475 |
396. | Siatko found at Exeter Sound | 475 |
397. | Eskimo in the act of striking a seal | 476 |
398. | Tutareang or buckle | 477 |
399. | Eskimo awaiting return of seal to blowhole | 478 |
400. | Tuputang or ivory plugs for closing wounds | 479 |
401. | Wooden case for plugs | 480 |
402. | Another form of plug | 480 |
403. | Qanging for fastening thong to jaw of seal | 480 |
404. | Qanging in form of a seal | 481 |
405. | Qanging in form of a button | 481 |
406. | Qanging serving for both toggle and handle | 481 |
407. | Qidjarung or whirl for harpoon line | 481 |
408. | Simpler form of whirl | 481 |
409. | Old pattern of hook for drawing out captured seal | 483 |
410. | Seal hook of bear’s claw | 483 |
411. | Modern form of seal hook | 483 |
412. | Eskimo approaching seal | 484 |
413. | Frame of a kayak or hunting boat | 486 |
414. | Kayak with covering of skin | 487 |
406 415. | Model of a Repulse Bay kayak | 487 |
416. | Sirmijaung or scraper for kayak | 488 |
417. | Large kayak harpoon for seal and walrus | 488 |
418. | Tikagung or support for the hand | 488 |
419. | Qatirn or ivory head of harpoon shaft | 489 |
420. | Manner of attaching the two principal parts of the harpoon Manner of attaching the two main parts of the harpoon |
489 |
421. | Tokang or harpoon head in sheath | 489 |
422. | Tokang or harpoon head taken from a whale in Cumberland Sound Tokang or harpoon head taken from a whale in Cumberland Sound |
490 |
423. | Ancient tokang or harpoon head | 491 |
424. | Teliqbing, which is fastened to harpoon line | 492 |
425. | Qatilik or spear | 492 |
426. | Avautang or sealskin float | 492 |
427. | Different styles of poviutang or pipe for inflating the float Different styles of poviutang or pipes for inflating the float |
493 |
428. | Agdliaq or spear for small seals | 494 |
429. | Agdliaq points | 494 |
430. | Spear heads | 495 |
431. | Large spear head | 495 |
432. | Anguvigang or lance | 496 |
433. | Nuirn or bird spear | 496 |
434. | Nuqsang or throwing board | 496 |
435. | Sealing at the edge of the ice | 498 |
436. | Model of sakurpāng´ or whaling harpoon | 500 |
437. | Niu´tang, with floats | 500 |
438. | Wooden bow from Iglulik | 502 |
439. | Wooden bow from Cumberland Sound | 502 |
440. | Bows of reindeer antlers | 503 |
441. | Bow of antlers, with central part cut off straight, from Pelly Bay Bow of antlers, with the center cut off straight, from Pelly Bay |
503 |
442. | Arrows with bone heads | 504 |
443. | Arrows with metal heads | 504 |
444. | Arrowhead from Boothia | 505 |
445. | Showing attachment of arrowhead vertically and parallel to shank Showing the attachment of the arrowhead vertically and parallel to the shank. |
505 |
446. | Various forms of arrowhead | 506 |
447. | Socket of spear handle from Alaska | 506 |
448. | Slate arrowhead | 506 |
449. | Flint arrowheads from old graves | 507 |
450. | Various styles of quiver | 507 |
451. | Quiver handles | 508 |
452. | Whalebone nooses for catching waterfowl | 511 |
453. | Kakivang or salmon spear | 512 |
454. | Ivory fish used as bait in spearing salmon | 513 |
455. | Quqartaun for stringing fish | 514 |
456. | Salmon hook | 515 |
457. | Salmon hook | 515 |
458. | Bait used in fishing with hooks | 516 |
459. | Butcher’s knife with bone handle | 516 |
460. | Pana or knife for dissecting game | 517 |
461. | Form of ulo now in use | 518 |
462. | Old ulo with top of handle broken off, from Cape Broughton, Davis Strait Old ulo with the top of the handle broken off, from Cape Broughton, Davis Strait |
518 |
463. | Fragment of an ulo blade of slate | 518 |
464. | Ulo handle from recent grave | 518 |
465. | Modern tesirqun or scraper | 519 |
466. | Old style of tesirqun or scraper | 519 |
407 467. | Seligoung or scraper used for softening skins | 520 |
468. | Old stone scrapers found in graves | 521 |
469. | Stretcher for lines | 522 |
470. | Ivory needle | 523 |
471. | Ivory needle-case from Cumberland Sound | 523 |
472. | Common pattern of needle-case | 523 |
473. | Tikiq or thimble | 524 |
474. | Instrument for straightening bones | 525 |
475. | Drill for working in ivory and bone | 525 |
476. | Driftwood used in kindling fire | 526 |
477. | Eskimo graver’s tool | 526 |
478. | Framework of Eskimo boat | 527 |
479. | Kiglo or post | 527 |
480. | Umiaq or skin boat | 528 |
481. | Umiaq or skin boat | 528 |
482. | Qamuting or sledge | 529 |
483. | Sledge shoe | 530 |
484. | Clasp for fastening traces to sledge | 531 |
485. | Artistic form of clasp for fastening traces to sledge Artistic design of a clasp for securing traces to a sled |
531 |
486. | Uqsirn, for fastening traces to pitu | 532 |
487. | Ano or dog harness | 532 |
488. | Sadniriaq or clasp | 532 |
489. | Tube for drinking | 535 |
490. | Various styles of snow knife | 539 |
491. | Ground plan of snow house of Davis Strait tribes | 541 |
492. | Snow house of Davis Strait, sections | 542 |
493. | Section and interior of snow house | 543 |
494. | Ukusik or soapstone kettle | 545 |
495. | Plan of double snow house | 546 |
496. | Plan of Iglulik house | 547 |
497. | Plan of Hudson Bay house | 547 |
498. | Plan and sections of qarmang or stone house | 548 |
499. | Plan of large qarmang or stone house | 549 |
500. | Plan of stone house in Anarnitung, Cumberland Sound Plan of stone house in Anarnitung, Cumberland Sound |
549 |
501. | Plan of group of stone houses in Pangnirtung, Cumberland Sound Plan of a group of stone houses in Pangnirtung, Cumberland Sound |
550 |
502. | Plan and sections of qarmang or house made of whale ribs Plan and sections of a house made from whale ribs |
550 |
503. | Storehouse in Ukiadliving | 551 |
504. | Plan and sections of tupiq or tent of Cumberland Sound Plan and sections of tupiq or tent of Cumberland Sound |
551 |
505. | Plan and sections of tupiq or tent of Pond Bay | 553 |
506. | Plan and sections of double winter tent, Cumberland Sound Plan and sections of double winter tent, Cumberland Sound |
553 |
507. | Qaturang or boot ornament | 554 |
508. | Woman’s jacket | 555 |
509. | Ivory beads for women’s jackets | 555 |
510. | Girdle buckles | 556 |
511. | Infant’s clothing | 557 |
512. | Child’s clothing | 557 |
513. | Ivory combs | 559 |
514. | Buckles | 560 |
515. | Manner of tattooing face and wearing hair | 561 |
516. | Manner of tattooing legs and hands | 561 |
517. | Forks | 563 |
518. | Ladle of musk ox horn | 563 |
519. | Skull used in the game ajegaung | 565 |
408 520. | Ivory carving representing head of fox, used in the game ajegaung Ivory carving of a fox's head, used in the game ajegaung. |
565 |
521. | Ivory carvings representing polar bear, used in the game ajegaung Ivory carvings of polar bears, used in the game ajegaung |
566 |
522. | Figures used in playing tingmiujang, a game similar to dice Figures used in playing tingmiujang, a game similar to dice |
567 |
523. | Game of nuglutang | 568 |
524. | The sāketān or roulette | 569 |
525. | Ajarorpoq or cat’s cradle | 569 |
526. | Ball | 570 |
527. | Dolls in dress of the Oqomiut | 571 |
528. | Dolls in dress of the Akudnirmiut | 571 |
529. | Modern snow goggles, of wood | 576 |
530. | Old form of snow goggles, of ivory | 576 |
531. | Diagram showing interior of qaggi or singing house among eastern tribes Diagram showing the interior of a qaggi or singing house among eastern tribes. |
600 |
532. | Plan of Hudson Bay qaggi or singing house | 601 |
533. | Kilaut or drum | 602 |
534. | Plans of remains of supposed qaggi or singing houses Plans of the remains of supposed qaggi or singing houses |
603 |
535. | Qailertetang, a masked figure | 606 |
536. | Model of lamp from a grave in Cumberland Sound | 613 |
537. | Qaudjaqdjuq is maltreated by his enemies | 631 |
538. | The man in the moon comes down to help Qaudjaqdjuq The man in the moon comes down to help Qaudjaqdjuq. |
631 |
539. | The man in the moon whipping Qaudjaqdjuq | 632 |
540. | Qaudjaqdjuq has become Qaudjuqdjuaq | 632 |
541. | Qaudjuqdjuaq killing his enemies | 633 |
542. | Tumiujang, or lamp of the Tornit | 634 |
543. | Cumberland Sound and Frobisher Bay, drawn by Itu, a Nugumio Cumberland Sound and Frobisher Bay, sketched by Itu, a Nugumio |
644 |
544. | Cumberland Sound and Frobisher Bay, drawn by Sunapignang, an Oqomio Cumberland Sound and Frobisher Bay, drawn by Sunapignang, an Oqomio |
645 |
545. | Cumberland Sound, drawn by Itu, a Nugumio | 646 |
546. | Peninsula of Qivitung, drawn by Angutuqdjuaq, a Padlimio Peninsula of Qivitung, illustrated by Angutuqdjuaq, a Padlimio |
647 |
409
THE CENTRAL ESKIMO.
INTRODUCTION.
The following account of the Central Eskimo contains chiefly the results of the author’s own observations and collections made during a journey to Cumberland Sound and Davis Strait, supplemented by extracts from the reports of other travelers. The geographical results of this journey have been published in a separate volume.1 A few traditions which were considered unsuitable for publication by the Bureau of Ethnology may be found in the Verhandlungen der Berliner Gesellschaft für Anthropologie, Ethnologie und Urgeschichte, 1887. The linguistic material collected during the journey will be published separately.
The following account of the Central Eskimo mainly includes the author's observations and collections made during a trip to Cumberland Sound and Davis Strait, along with excerpts from other travelers' reports. The geographical findings from this journey have been published in a separate volume.1 A few traditions that the Bureau of Ethnology deemed unsuitable for publication can be found in the Verhandlungen der Berliner Gesellschaft für Anthropologie, Ethnologie und Urgeschichte, 1887. The linguistic material gathered during the trip will also be published separately.
Owing to unfortunate circumstances, the larger portion of the author’s collections could not be brought home, and it has therefore been necessary, in preparing this paper, to make use of those made by C. F. Hall, 1860–1862 and 1865–1869; W. Mintzer, 1873-’74, and L. Kumlien, 1877-’78. Through the kindness of Professor Otis T. Mason, I was allowed to make ample use of the collections of the National Museum and have attached its numbers to the specimens figured. The author’s collection is deposited in the Museum für Völkerkunde at Berlin. I am indebted to the American Museum of Natural History; to Mr. Appleton Sturgis, of New York; to Captain John O. Spicer, of Groton, Conn.; and to Mrs. Adams, of Washington, D.C., for several figures drawn from specimens in their possession.
Due to unfortunate circumstances, the majority of the author's collections couldn't be brought home, so it has been necessary, in preparing this paper, to use those gathered by C. F. Hall, 1860–1862 and 1865–1869; W. Mintzer, 1873-’74, and L. Kumlien, 1877-’78. Thanks to the generosity of Professor Otis T. Mason, I was able to use the collections from the National Museum extensively and have attached its numbers to the specimens illustrated. The author's collection is housed in the Museum für Völkerkunde in Berlin. I am grateful to the American Museum of Natural History; to Mr. Appleton Sturgis of New York; to Captain John O. Spicer of Groton, Conn.; and to Mrs. Adams of Washington, D.C., for several figures taken from specimens in their possession.
AUTHORITIES QUOTED.
In citing the various authorities, I have used abbreviations as indicated at the end of titles in the following list of works consulted:
In citing the different authorities, I used abbreviations as shown at the end of titles in the following list of works consulted:
De | Martini | Forbisseri | Angli navigati | one in regiones occi | dentis et septen | trionis | Narratio historica, | Ex Gallico sermone in La | tinum translata | per | D. Joan. Tho. Freigivm. | [Design.] | Cum gratia & privilegio Imperiali, ciↄ. iↄ. xxc. [Colophon:] Noribergæ | Imprimebatur, in officina Ca | tharinæ Gerlachin, & Hære | dum Iohannis Mon | tani. Anno ciↄ iↄ xxc. (Cited, Frobisher.)
De | Martini | Forbisseri | Angli navigators | one in regions west | and north | Historical account, | Translated from French into | Latin by | D. Joan. Tho. Freigivm. | [Design.] | With grace & privilege of the Emperor, ciↄ. iↄ. xxc. [Colophon:] | Nuremberg | Printed at the workshop of Catharina Gerlachin, & | heirs of Iohannis Mon | tani. Year ciↄ iↄ xxc. (Cited, Frobisher.)
A | voyage of discovery, | made under the orders of the Admiralty | in | His Majesty’s ships | Isabella and Alexander, | for the purpose of | exploring Baffin’s Bay, | and inquiring into the probability of a | north-west passage. | By John Ross, K.S. Captain Royal Navy. | London: | John Murray, Albemarle-street. | 1819. (Cited, Ross I.)
A | voyage of discovery, | ordered by the Admiralty | on | His Majesty’s ships | Isabella and Alexander, | to explore Baffin’s Bay | and investigate the chances of a | north-west passage. | By John Ross, K.S. Captain Royal Navy. | London: | John Murray, Albemarle-street. | 1819. (Cited, Ross I.)
Journal | of a voyage for the discovery of a | north-west passage | from the Atlantic to the Pacific; | performed in the years 1819–20, | in His Majesty’s ships | Hecla and Griper, | under the orders of | William Edward Parry, R.N., F.R.S., | and commander of the expedition. | With an appendix, containing the scientific | and other observations. | Published by authority of the lords commissioners | of the admiralty. | London: | John Murray, | publisher to the admiralty, and board of longitude. | 1821. (Cited, Parry I.)
Journal | of a voyage to discover a | north-west passage | from the Atlantic to the Pacific; | undertaken in the years 1819–20, | on His Majesty’s ships | Hecla and Griper, | under the direction of | William Edward Parry, R.N., F.R.S., | and leader of the expedition. | With an appendix including scientific | and other observations. | Published with the authority of the lords commissioners | of the admiralty. | London: | John Murray, | publisher for the admiralty, | and board of longitude. | 1821. (Cited, Parry I.)
Journal | of a | second voyage for the discovery of a | north-west passage | from the Atlantic to the Pacific; | performed in the years 1821–22–23, | in His Majesty’s ships | Fury and Hecla, | under the orders of | Captain William Edward Parry, R.N., F.R.S., | and commander of the expedition. | Illustrated by numerous plates. | Published by authority of the lords commissioners | of the admiralty. | London: | John Murray, | publisher to the admiralty, and board of longitude. | 1824. (Cited, Parry II.)
Journal of a second voyage to find a north-west passage from the Atlantic to the Pacific, carried out in the years 1821-22-23, on His Majesty’s ships Fury and Hecla, under the command of Captain William Edward Parry, R.N., F.R.S., leader of the expedition. Illustrated with many plates. Published with permission from the lords commissioners of the admiralty. London: John Murray, publisher for the admiralty and board of longitude. 1824. (Cited, Parry II.)
The | private journal | of | Captain G. F. Lyon, | of H.M.S. Hecla, | during | the recent voyage of discovery under | Captain Parry. | With a map and plates. | London: | John Murray, Albemarle-Street. | 1824. (Cited, Lyon.)
The | private journal | of | Captain G. F. Lyon, | of H.M.S. Hecla, | during | the recent discovery voyage led by | Captain Parry. | With a map and illustrations. | London: | John Murray, Albemarle-Street. | 1824. (Cited, Lyon.)
A | brief narrative | of | an unsuccessful attempt | to reach | Repulse Bay, | through | Sir Thomas Rowe’s “Welcome,” | in | His Majesty’s ship Griper, | in the year | 1824. | By Captain G. F. Lyon, R.N. | With a chart and engravings. | London: | John Murray, Albemarle street. | 1825. (Cited, Lyon, Attempt to reach Repulse Bay.)
A | brief story | of | an unsuccessful attempt | to reach | Repulse Bay, | through | Sir Thomas Rowe’s “Welcome,” | in | His Majesty’s ship Griper, | in the year | 1824. | By Captain G. F. Lyon, R.N. | With a chart and engravings. | London: | John Murray, Albemarle street. | 1825. (Cited, Lyon, Attempt to reach Repulse Bay.)
Narrative | of a | second voyage in search of | a | north-west passage, | and of a | residence in the Arctic regions | during the years 1829, 1830, 1831, 1832, 1833. | By | Sir John Ross, C.B., K.S.A., K.C.S., &c. &c. | captain in the Royal Navy. | Including the reports of | Commander, now Captain, James Clark Ross, R.N., F.R.S., F.L.S., &c. | and | The Discovery of the Northern Magnetic Pole. | London: | A. W. Webster, 156, Regent street. | 1835. (Cited, Ross II.)
Narrative of a second voyage in search of a north-west passage and a stay in the Arctic regions during the years 1829, 1830, 1831, 1832, 1833. By Sir John Ross, C.B., K.S.A., K.C.S., etc. Captain in the Royal Navy. Including the reports of Commander, now Captain, James Clark Ross, R.N., F.R.S., F.L.S., etc. and The Discovery of the Northern Magnetic Pole. London: A. W. Webster, 156, Regent street. 1835. (Cited, Ross II.)
A narrative | of some passages in the history of | Eenoolooapik, | a young Esquimaux who was brought to Britain in 1839, in the ship “Neptune” | of Aberdeen. | An account of the | discovery of Hogarth’s Sound: | remarks on the northern whale fishery, | and suggestions for its improvement, &c. &c. | By Alexander M’Donald, L.R.C.S.E. | Member of Cuvieran Natural History Society of Edinburgh. | Edinburgh: Fraser & Co. | And J. Hogg, 116 Nicolson Street, | 1841. (Cited, Eenoolooapik.)
A narrative | of some events in the history of | Eenoolooapik, | a young Eskimo who was brought to Britain in 1839 on the ship “Neptune” | from Aberdeen. | An account of the | discovery of Hogarth’s Sound: | comments on the northern whale fishery, | and suggestions for its improvement, etc. | By Alexander M’Donald, L.R.C.S.E. | Member of the Cuvieran Natural History Society of Edinburgh. | Edinburgh: Fraser & Co. | And J. Hogg, 116 Nicolson Street, | 1841. (Cited, Eenoolooapik.)
Narrative | of | the discoveries | on | the north coast of America; | effected by the | officers of the Hudson’s Bay Company | during the years 1836–39. | By Thomas Simpson, esq. | London: | Richard Bentley, New Burlington Street. | Publisher in Ordinary to Her Majesty | 1843. | (Cited, Dease and Simpson.)
Narrative | of | the discoveries | on | the north coast of America; | made by the | officers of the Hudson’s Bay Company | during the years 1836–39. | By Thomas Simpson, esq. | London: | Richard Bentley, New Burlington Street. | Publisher in Ordinary to Her Majesty | 1843. | (Cited, Dease and Simpson.)
Narrative | of an | expedition to the shores | of | the Arctic sea | in 1846 and 1847. | By John Rae, | Hudson Bay Company’s service, commander of the expedition.| With maps. | London: | T. & W. Boone, 29, New Pond Street. | 1850. (Cited, Rae I.)
Narrative of an expedition to the shores of the Arctic Sea in 1846 and 1847. By John Rae, Hudson Bay Company’s service, commander of the expedition. With maps. London: T. & W. Boone, 29, New Pond Street. 1850. (Cited, Rae I.)
Further papers | relative to the Recent Arctic expeditions | in search of | Dr. John Franklin, | and the crews of | H.M.S. “Erebus” and “Terror.” | Presented to both houses of Parliament by command of Her Majesty, | January, 1855. London: | Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, | Printers to the Queen’s most excellent Majesty. | For Her Majesty’s stationery office. | 1855. (Cited, Rae II.)
Further papers | regarding the Recent Arctic expeditions | in search of | Dr. John Franklin, | and the crews of | H.M.S. “Erebus” and “Terror.” | Presented to both houses of Parliament by command of Her Majesty, | January, 1855. London: | Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, | Printers to the Queen’s most excellent Majesty. | For Her Majesty’s stationery office. | 1855. (Cited, Rae II.)
Same volume: Observations on the Western Esquimaux and the country they inhabit; from Notes taken during two years at Point Barrow, by Mr. John Simpson, Surgeon R.N., Her Majesty’s Discovery Ship “Plover.” (Cited, Simpson.)
Same volume: Observations on the Western Eskimos and the country they live in; from notes taken during two years at Point Barrow, by Mr. John Simpson, Surgeon R.N., Her Majesty’s Discovery Ship “Plover.” (Cited, Simpson.)
The voyage of the ‘Fox’ in the Arctic seas. | A narrative | of the | discovery of the fate | of | Sir John Franklin | and | his companions. | By Captain M’Clintock, R.N., LL.D. | honorary member Royal Dublin Society. | [Portrait.] | With maps and illustrations. | London: | John Murray, Albemarle street, | publisher to the admiralty. | 1859. (Cited, M’Clintock.)
The journey of the 'Fox' in the Arctic seas. | A story | about the | discovery of what happened | to | Sir John Franklin | and | his crew. | By Captain M’Clintock, R.N., LL.D. | honorary member of the Royal Dublin Society. | [Portrait.] | With maps and illustrations. | London: | John Murray, Albemarle Street, | publisher for the admiralty. | 1859. (Cited, M’Clintock.)
Life with the Esquimaux: | a narrative of Arctic experience in search of | survivors of Sir John Franklin’s | Expedition. | By | Captain Charles Francis Hall, | of the whaling barque “George Henry,” | From May 29, 1860, to September 13, 1862. | Popular Edition. | With Maps, | Coloured illustrations, and one hundred wood cuts. | London: | Sampson Low, son, and Marston, | Milton House, Ludgate Hill. | 1865. (Cited, Hall I.)
Life with the Eskimos: | A story of Arctic adventure in search of | survivors of Sir John Franklin’s | expedition. | By | Captain Charles Francis Hall, | of the whaling ship “George Henry,” | From May 29, 1860, to September 13, 1862. | Popular Edition. | With maps, | colored illustrations, and a hundred woodcuts. | London: | Sampson Low, Son, and Marston, | Milton House, Ludgate Hill. | 1865. (Cited, Hall I.)
Tales and traditions | of the | Eskimo | with a sketch of | their habits, religion, language | and other peculiarities | by | Dr Henry Rink | knight of Dannebrog | Director of the Royal Greenland board of trade, and | formerly Royal Inspector of South Greenland | author of ‘Grönland geographik og | statistick beckrevest,B etc. | Translated from the Danish by the author | Edited by | Dr Robert Brown | F.L.S., F.R.G.S. | author of ‘The races of mankind,’ etc. | With numerous illustrations, drawn and | engraved by Eskimo | William Blackwood and Sons | Edinburgh and London | 1875. | All rights reserved. (Cited, Rink.)
Tales and Traditions | of the | Eskimo | with a sketch of | their habits, religion, language | and other unique aspects | by | Dr. Henry Rink | knight of Dannebrog | Director of the Royal Greenland Board of Trade, and | formerly Royal Inspector of South Greenland | author of ‘Grönland geographik og | statistick beckrevest,B etc. | Translated from the Danish by the author | Edited by | Dr. Robert Brown | F.L.S., F.R.G.S. | author of ‘The Races of Mankind,’ etc. | With numerous illustrations, drawn and | engraved by Eskimo | William Blackwood and Sons | Edinburgh and London | 1875. | All rights reserved. (Cited, Rink.)
Eskimoiske | Eventyr og Sagn | oversatte | efter de indfødte fortælleres opskrifter | og meddelelser | af | H. Rink, | inspektør i Sydgrønland. | Kjøbenhavn. | C. A. Reitzels Boghandel. | Louis Kleins Bogtrykkeri. | 1866. (Cited, Rink, Eventyr og Sagn.)
Eskimo Stories | Tales and Legends | translated | from the indigenous storytellers' narratives | and communications | by | H. Rink, | inspector in South Greenland. | Copenhagen. | C. A. Reitzels Bookstore. | Louis Klein's Printing House. | 1866. (Cited, Rink, Tales and Legends.)
Eskimoiske | Eventyr og Sagn. | Supplement | indeholdende | et Tillæg om Eskimoerne | af | H. Rink. | Kjøbenhavn. | C. A. Reitzels Boghandel. | Louis Kleins Bogtrykkeri. | 1871. (Cited, Rink, Eventyr og Sagn, Supplement.)
Eskimo Stories and Legends. | Supplement | containing | an Appendix about the Eskimos | by | H. Rink. | Copenhagen. | C. A. Reitzel's Bookstore. | Louis Klein's Printshop. | 1871. (Cited, Rink, Stories and Legends, Supplement.)
Narrative | of the | second Arctic expedition | made by | Charles F. Hall: | his voyage to Repulse Bay, sledge journeys to the Straits [sic] of Fury | and Hecla and to King William’s Land, | and | residence among the Eskimos during the years 1864-’69. | Edited under the orders of the Hon. Secretary of the Navy, | by | Prof. J. E. Nourse, U.S.N. | U.S. Naval Observatory, | 1879. | Trübner & Co., | Nos. 57 and 59 Ludgate Hill, | London. (Cited, Hall II.)
Narrative | of the | second Arctic expedition | made by | Charles F. Hall: | his trip to Repulse Bay, sled journeys to the Straits [sic] of Fury | and Hecla and to King William’s Land, | and | time spent among the Eskimos during the years 1864-’69. | Edited under the orders of the Hon. Secretary of the Navy, | by | Prof. J. E. Nourse, U.S.N. | U.S. Naval Observatory, | 1879. | Trübner & Co., | Nos. 57 and 59 Ludgate Hill, | London. (Cited, Hall II.)
Als Eskimo unter den Eskimos. | Eine Schilderung der Erlebnisse | der | Schwatka’schen Franklin-Aufsuchungs-Expedition | in den Jahren 1878–80. | Von | Heinrich W. Klutschak, | Zeichner und Geometer der Expedition. | Mit 3 Karten, 12 Vollbildern und zahlreichen in den Text gedruckten Illustrationen | nach den Skizzen des Verfassers. | Wien. Pest. Leipzig. | A. Hartleben’s Verlag. | 1881. | Alle Rechte vorbehalten. (Cited, Klutschak.)
Als Eskimo unter den Eskimos. | Eine Schilderung der Erlebnisse | der | Schwatka’schen Franklin-Aufsuchungs-Expedition | in den Jahren 1878–80. | Von | Heinrich W. Klutschak, | Zeichner und Geometer der Expedition. | Mit 3 Karten, 12 Vollbildern und zahlreichen in den Text gedruckten Illustrationen | nach den Skizzen des Verfassers. | Wien. Pest. Leipzig. | A. Hartleben’s Verlag. | 1881. | Alle Rechte vorbehalten. (Cited, Klutschak.)
Schwatka’s Search | sledging in the Arctic in quest of | the Franklin records | By | William H. Gilder | second in command | with maps and illustrations | London | Sampson Low, Marston, Searle, and Rivington | Crown Buildings, 188, Fleet Street. | All rights reserved. (Cited, Gilder.)
Schwatka’s Search | sledging in the Arctic in quest of | the Franklin records | By | William H. Gilder | second in command | with maps and illustrations | London | Sampson Low, Marston, Searle, and Rivington | Crown Buildings, 188, Fleet Street. | All rights reserved. (Cited, Gilder.)
Eskimoisches Wörterbuch, | gesammelt | von den Missionaren | in | Labrador, | revidirt und herausgegeben | von | Friedrich Erdmann. | Budissin, | gedruckt bei Ernst Moritz Monse. | 1864. (Cited, Wörterbuch des Labradordialectes.)
Eskimo Dictionary, | collected | by the missionaries | in | Labrador, | revised and published | by | Friedrich Erdmann. | Budissin, | printed by Ernst Moritz Monse. | 1864. (Cited, Dictionary of the Labrador Dialects.)
In the following two items, umlauts (äöü) were printed as a small “e” above the letter.
In the next two items, umlauts (äöü) were printed as a small “e” above the letter.
David Cranz | Historie | von | Grönland | enthaltend | Die Beschreibung des Landes und | der Einwohner &c. | insbesondere | die | Geschichte | der dortigen | Mission der | Evangelischen | Brüder | zu | Neu-Herrnhut | und | Lichtenfels. | Mit acht Kupfertafeln und einem Register. | Barby bey Heinrich Detlef Ebers, und in Leipzig | in Commission bey Weidmanns Erben und Reich. | 1765. (Cited, Cranz.)
David Cranz | History | of | Greenland | including | The Description of the Country and | the Inhabitants &c. | especially | the | History | of the local | Mission of | the Evangelical | Brethren | to | New Herrnhut | and | Lichtenfels. | With eight copper plates and an Index. | Barby by Heinrich Detlef Ebers, and in Leipzig | on Commission by Weidmann's Heirs and Reich. | 1765. (Cited, Cranz.)
Bruchstükke | eines Tagebuches, | gehalten in | Grönland | in den Jahren 1770 bis 1778 | von Hans Egede Saabye, | vormaligem ordinierten Missionar in den Destrikten Claushavn | und Christianshaab, jetzigem Prediger zu Udbye | im Stifte Füthnen. | Aus dem Dänischen übersetzt | von | G. Fries, | beabschiedigtem königlich dänischen Capitaine. | Mit einer Vorrede des Uebersetzers, | enthaltend einige Nachrichten von der Lebensweise der | Grönländer, der Mission in Grönland, samt andern damit | verwandten Gegenständen, und einer Karte | über Grönland. Hamburg. | Bey Perthes und Besser. | 1817. (Cited, Egede.)
Bruchstücke | eines Tagebuchs, | gehalten in | Grönland | in den Jahren 1770 bis 1778 | von Hans Egede Saabye, | ehemaligem ordinierten Missionar in den Distrikten Claushavn | und Christianshaab, jetzt Prediger zu Udbye | im Stifte Füthnen. | Aus dem Dänischen übersetzt | von | G. Fries, | ehrwürdigem königlichen dänischen Kapitän. | Mit einer Vorrede des Übersetzers, | die einige Informationen über die Lebensweise der | Grönländer, die Mission in Grönland, sowie andere | verwandte Themen und einer Karte | von Grönland enthält. Hamburg. | Bei Perthes und Besser. | 1817. (Cited, Egede.)
Baffin-Land. | Geographische Ergebnisse | einer | in den Jahren 1883 und 1884 ausgeführten Forschungsreise. | Von | Dr. Franz Boas. | Mit zwei Karten und neun Skizzen im Text. | (Ergänzungsheft No. 80 zu »Petermanns Mitteilungen«.) | Gotha: Justus Perthes. | 1885. (Cited, Baffin-Land.)
Baffin Land. | Geographic Results | of a | research trip conducted in 1883 and 1884. | By | Dr. Franz Boas. | With two maps and nine illustrations in the text. | (Supplement No. 80 to "Petermann's Mittteilungen.") | Gotha: Justus Perthes. | 1885. (Cited, Baffin Land.)
Die Amerikanische | Nordpol-Expedition | von | Emil Bessels. | Mit zahlreiche Illustrationen in Holzschnitt, Diagrammen und | einer Karte in Farbendruck. | Leipzig. | Verlag von Wilhelm Engelmann. | 1879. (Cited, Bessels.)
Die Amerikanische | Nordpol-Expedition | von | Emil Bessels. | Mit zahlreichen Illustrationen in Holzschnitt, Diagrammen und | einer Karte in Farbendruck. | Leipzig. | Verlag von Wilhelm Engelmann. | 1879. (Cited, Bessels.)
Contributions | to the | Natural History of | Arctic America, | made in connection with | the Howgate Polar expedition, 1877-’78, | by | Ludwig Kumlien, | Naturalist of the expedition. | Washington: | Government Printing Office. | 1879.
Contributions | to the | Natural History of | Arctic America, | made in connection with | the Howgate Polar expedition, 1877-’78, | by | Ludwig Kumlien, | Naturalist of the expedition. | Washington: | Government Printing Office. | 1879.
Report | of the | Hudson’s Bay expedition, | under the command of | Lieut. A. R. Gordon, R.N., | 1884.
Report | of the | Hudson’s Bay expedition, | led by | Lieut. A. R. Gordon, R.N., | 1884.
Traditions indiennes | du | Canada nord-ouest | par Émile Petitot | Ancien missionnaire. | Paris | Maisonneuve frères et Ch. Leclerc, | 25, Quai Voltaire, | 1886.
Traditions indiennes | of | Northwest Canada | by Émile Petitot | Former missionary. | Paris | Maisonneuve frères et Ch. Leclerc, | 25, Quai Voltaire, | 1886.
The following is a list of the papers published by the author on the results of his journey to Baffin Land and of studies connected with it. The ethnological remarks contained in these brief communications have been embodied in the present paper. The method of spelling in the first publications differs from that applied in the present paper. It was decided to use the latter after a conference with Dr. H. Rink.
The following is a list of the papers published by the author on the results of his journey to Baffin Land and related studies. The ethnological observations in these brief communications have been included in this paper. The spelling used in the earlier publications differs from that used in this paper. It was decided to adopt the latter after a discussion with Dr. H. Rink.
“Reiseberichte aus Baffin-Land.” Berliner Tageblatt, August 4, October 28, November 4, November 25. 1883; September 28, October 19, November 2, November 9, November 16, November 23, December 28, 1884; January 4, April 3, April 27, 1885.
“Travel Reports from Baffin Land.” Berliner Tageblatt, August 4, October 28, November 4, November 25, 1883; September 28, October 19, November 2, November 9, November 16, November 23, December 28, 1884; January 4, April 3, April 27, 1885.
“Unter dem Polarkreise.” New-Yorker Staats-Zeitung, February 1, February 22, March 2, 1885.
“Under the Polar Circle.” New-York State Newspaper, February 1, February 22, March 2, 1885.
“The configuration of Ellesmere Land.” Science, February 27, 1885.
“The configuration of Ellesmere Land.” Science, February 27, 1885.
“A journey in Cumberland Sound and on the west shore of Davis Strait in 1883 and 1884, with map.” Bull. Am. Geogr. Soc., pp. 241–272, 1884.
“A journey in Cumberland Sound and on the west shore of Davis Strait in 1883 and 1884, with map.” Bull. Am. Geogr. Soc., pp. 241–272, 1884.
“Die Wohnsitze und Wanderungen der Baffin-Land Eskimos.” Deutsche geogr. Blätter, p. 31, 1885.
“Living places and migrations of the Baffin Land Eskimos.” German geographical sheets, p. 31, 1885.
“Cumberland Sound and its Esquimaux.” Popular Science Monthly, p. 768, May, 1885.
“Cumberland Sound and its Eskimos.” Popular Science Monthly, p. 768, May, 1885.
“Die Eskimos des Baffin-Landes.” Verh. des V. deutschen Geographentags zu Hamburg. Berlin, 1885.
“Die Eskimos des Baffin-Landes.” Verh. des V. deutschen Geographentags zu Hamburg. Berlin, 1885.
“Reise im Baffinlande, 1883 und 1884.” Verh. der Ges. für Erdkunde zu Berlin, 1885, Nos. 5, 6.
“Journey in Baffinland, 1883 and 1884.” Proceedings of the Society for Geography in Berlin, 1885, Nos. 5, 6.
“Die Sagen der Baffin-Land Eskimos.” Verh. der Berlin, anthrop. Gesellschaft, 1885, p. 161.
“Die Sagen der Baffin-Land Eskimos.” Verh. der Berlin, anthrop. Gesellschaft, 1885, p. 161.
“The Eskimo of Baffin Land.” Transactions of the Anthropological Society of Washington, Vol. 3, pp. 95–102.
“The Eskimo of Baffin Land.” Transactions of the Anthropological Society of Washington, Vol. 3, pp. 95–102.
“Sammlung aus Baffin-Land.” Original Mittheilungen aus der ethnol. Abtheilung der Kgl. Museen zu Berlin, 1886, p. 131.
“Collection from Baffin Land.” Original Communications from the Ethnological Department of the Royal Museums in Berlin, 1886, p. 131.
ORTHOGRAPHY.
In the spelling of Eskimo words the author has adhered as closely as possible to Kleinschmidt’s orthography, as he did not deem it proper to introduce a linguistic alphabet after so much has been published in another and almost sufficient one.
In spelling Eskimo words, the author has followed Kleinschmidt’s orthography as closely as possible, as he believed it wouldn’t be appropriate to introduce a new linguistic alphabet after so much has already been published using another, which is nearly sufficient.
Accents and lengths have been marked where it seemed to be desirable. In quotations Eskimo words are spelled according to this system where it is possible to recognize their meaning and derivation. In other cases the original spelling of the authors has been retained. The alphabet used in this paper is as follows:
Accents and lengths have been noted where it seemed appropriate. In quotations, Eskimo words are spelled using this system to make their meaning and origin clear. In other cases, the original spelling of the authors has been kept. The alphabet used in this paper is as follows:
Vowels: a | — | a in father. |
e | — | ey in they. |
i | — | ee in feel. |
o | — | o in nose. |
u | — | oo in pool. |
au | — | ow in how. |
ai | — | i in hide. |
Consonants: q | — | a hard, guttural sound (Kleinschmidt’s ĸ). |
r | — | the German guttural r. |
rn | — | a guttural and nasal r. |
χ | — | the German ch in Buch; Scotch ch in loch. |
g | — | English g in go. |
k | — | English k. |
ng | — | English ng in during. |
b | — | English b. |
p | — | English p. |
v | — | pronounced with the lips only. |
f | — | pronounced with the lips only. |
m | — | English m. |
d | — | English d. |
t | — | English t. |
s | — | English s in soul. |
n | — | English n. |
(g)dl | — | ḏ of Lepsius’s standard alphabet. |
(g)dtl | — | ṯ of Lepsius’s standard alphabet. |
l | — | English l. |
j | — | German j in jung; English y. |
ss | — | š of Lepsius’s standard alphabet, sounding between s and sh. š of Lepsius’s standard alphabet, sounding between s and sh. |
GEOGRAPHY OF NORTHEASTERN AMERICA.2
The Eskimo inhabit almost the whole extent of the coast of Arctic America. A large part of this country is occupied by the Central Eskimo, one of the great groups into which that people is divided. They live in the northeastern part of the continent and on the eastern islands of the Arctic-American Archipelago. In Smith Sound they inhabit the most northern countries visited by man and their remains are even found at its northern outlet. The southern and western boundaries of this district are the countries about Fort Churchill, the middle part of Back River, and the coast west of Adelaide Peninsula. Along the whole extent of this line they are the neighbors of Indian tribes, with whom they are generally on very bad terms, a mutual distrust existing between the two races.
The Eskimo live along almost the entire coast of Arctic America. A significant portion of this region is home to the Central Eskimo, one of the major groups within that population. They reside in the northeastern part of the continent and on the eastern islands of the Arctic-American Archipelago. In Smith Sound, they inhabit the northernmost areas visited by people, and their remains are even found at its northern outlet. The southern and western boundaries of this area include the regions around Fort Churchill, the central part of Back River, and the coast west of Adelaide Peninsula. Throughout this area, they are neighbors to Indian tribes, with whom they generally have a poor relationship, marked by a mutual distrust between the two groups.
The geography of the whole country is known only in outline, and a great portion of it awaits its explorer. Following is a sketch of what is known about it, so far as it is of importance to the ethnologist.
The geography of the entire country is only understood in broad strokes, and a large part of it is still waiting to be explored. Here’s an overview of what we know so far, as it relates to the study of different cultures and ethnicities.
The vast basin of Hudson Bay separates two large portions of the American continent: Labrador and the region of the large Arctic rivers. The southern shore of the bay is inhabited by Indian tribes who interrupt the communication between the Eskimo of both regions. Hudson Bay, however, has the character of a true mediterranean sea, the northern parts of its opposite shores being connected by a number of islands and peninsulas. The low and narrow Rae Isthmus, which presents an easy passage to the Arctic Ocean, unites Melville Peninsula to the main body of the continent. From this peninsula Baffin Land stretches out toward the north of Labrador, with only two narrow channels intervening: Fury and Hecla Strait and Hudson Strait. Another chain of islands, formed by the parts of Southampton Island and Mansfield Island, stretches from Repulse Bay to the northwest point of Labrador, but the distances between the islands and the roughness of the sea prevent communication.
The vast basin of Hudson Bay separates two large parts of the American continent: Labrador and the area of the big Arctic rivers. The southern shore of the bay is home to Indigenous tribes who disrupt communication between the Eskimos from both regions. Hudson Bay, however, has the feel of a true inland sea, with the northern parts of its opposite shores connected by several islands and peninsulas. The low and narrow Rae Isthmus, which offers an easy passage to the Arctic Ocean, links Melville Peninsula to the main part of the continent. From this peninsula, Baffin Land extends north toward Labrador, separated by only two narrow channels: Fury and Hecla Strait and Hudson Strait. Another chain of islands, made up of parts of Southampton Island and Mansfield Island, stretches from Repulse Bay to the northwest point of Labrador, but the distances between the islands and the rough seas hinder communication.
On the western part of the continent the great bays, Chesterfield Inlet and Wager River, are of importance, as they allow the Eskimo, though they are a coast people, to penetrate into the interior of the continent. A narrow isthmus separates the head of the bays from the lakes of Back River. At Coronation Bay the latter approaches the Arctic Ocean very closely, and it is probable that the coast west of Adelaide Peninsula, which is skirted by innumerable islands, is indented by deep inlets extending towards the lakes of Back River. Thus communication between the Arctic Ocean and Hudson Bay is facilitated by this large river, which yields an abundant supply of fish. From Wager River an isthmus leads to its estuary.
On the western part of the continent, the significant bays, Chesterfield Inlet and Wager River, are important because they allow the Eskimo, even though they are a coastal people, to move into the interior of the continent. A narrow isthmus separates the heads of the bays from the lakes of Back River. At Coronation Bay, the latter comes extremely close to the Arctic Ocean, and it's likely that the coastline west of Adelaide Peninsula, which is lined with countless islands, has deep inlets that extend toward the lakes of Back River. This large river facilitates communication between the Arctic Ocean and Hudson Bay, providing a plentiful supply of fish. From Wager River, an isthmus leads to its estuary.
Boothia Felix, the most northern peninsula of the continent, is united to it by two narrow isthmuses, the former extending from 415 Pelly Bay to Shepherd Bay, the latter from Lord Mayor Bay to Spence Bay. It is separated from North Somerset by the narrow Bellot Strait. Farther west Adelaide Peninsula and King William Land form the continuation of the continent toward the western extremity of Boothia, thus outlining a spacious bay sheltered from the currents and the pack ice of Melville Sound and the adjoining bays. The eastern sides of Boothia and North Somerset and the western coasts of Melville Peninsula and Baffin Land form a gulf similar to Fox Basin.
Boothia Felix, the northernmost peninsula of the continent, is connected to it by two narrow isthmuses: one stretching from Pelly Bay to Shepherd Bay, and the other from Lord Mayor Bay to Spence Bay. It's separated from North Somerset by the narrow Bellot Strait. Further west, Adelaide Peninsula and King William Land continue the continent toward the western edge of Boothia, creating a spacious bay that's protected from the currents and pack ice of Melville Sound and the nearby bays. The eastern sides of Boothia and North Somerset, along with the western coasts of Melville Peninsula and Baffin Land, form a gulf similar to Fox Basin.
Farther north, between Baffin Land and Greenland, North Devon and Ellesmere Land are situated. Thus Baffin Land forms a connecting link for three regions inhabited by Eskimo: the Hudson Bay Territory, Labrador, and Greenland.
Farther north, between Baffin Island and Greenland, North Devon and Ellesmere Island are located. Thus, Baffin Island acts as a connecting link for three regions inhabited by the Inuit: the Hudson Bay Territory, Labrador, and Greenland.
The orography of the western coast of Hudson Bay is little known. Most of this coast seems to form a hilly land, consisting generally of granite. Between Wager River and Chesterfield Inlet it rises to a chain of hills of about one thousand feet in height, extending to a plateau farther north. Another chain seems to stretch in a northeasterly direction from Back River to the source of Hayes River. West of Back River Silurian strata prevail. The granite hills form a favorite haunt for the musk ox and reindeer.
The landforms of the western coast of Hudson Bay are not well-known. Most of this coast appears to be hilly terrain, primarily made up of granite. Between Wager River and Chesterfield Inlet, it rises to a series of hills around one thousand feet high, leading to a plateau further north. Another range seems to extend northeast from Back River to the source of Hayes River. To the west of Back River, Silurian rock layers dominate. The granite hills are a popular habitat for musk oxen and reindeer.
Melville Peninsula consists chiefly of a chain of granite hills, sloping down to a Silurian plain in the eastern part of the peninsula. The northeastern part of Baffin Land is formed by a high chain of mountains stretching from Lancaster Sound to Cape Mercy. Long fjords and deep valleys divide them into many groups. Bylot Island, which stands high out of the sea, is separated from the mainland by Pond Bay and Eclipse Sound. The next group stretches from Pond Bay to the fjord of Anaulereë´ling. Farther to the southeast the groups are smaller, and in Home Bay they are separated by wide valleys, particularly near Eχalualuin, a large fjord on the southern side of that bay.
Melville Peninsula mainly consists of a series of granite hills that slope down to a Silurian plain in the eastern part of the peninsula. The northeastern section of Baffin Land is characterized by a high mountain range running from Lancaster Sound to Cape Mercy. Long fjords and deep valleys cut through these mountains, dividing them into multiple groups. Bylot Island, which rises prominently above the sea, is separated from the mainland by Pond Bay and Eclipse Sound. The next group extends from Pond Bay to the fjord of Anaulereë´ling. Further southeast, the groups become smaller, and in Home Bay, they are separated by wide valleys, especially near Eχalualuin, a large fjord on the southern side of the bay.
From this fjord an enormous highland, which I named Penny Highland, extends as far as Cumberland Sound, being terminated by the narrow valley of Pangnirtung. The eastern boundary runs through the fjords Maktartudjennaq and Narpaing to Nedluqseaq and Nudlung. In the interior it may extend to about fifteen miles east of Issortuqdjuaq, the most northern fjord of Cumberland Sound. The whole of the vast highland is covered by an ice cap sending forth numerous glaciers in every direction. In Pangnirtung and on Davis Strait they reach the level of the sea.
From this fjord, a vast highland that I called Penny Highland stretches all the way to Cumberland Sound, ending at the narrow valley of Pangnirtung. The eastern boundary goes through the fjords Maktartudjennaq and Narpaing to Nedluqseaq and Nudlung. Inland, it may reach about fifteen miles east of Issortuqdjuaq, the northernmost fjord of Cumberland Sound. This entire expansive highland is covered by an ice cap, which sends out numerous glaciers in every direction. In Pangnirtung and along Davis Strait, they reach sea level.
Penny Highland, which forms the main body of Cumberland Peninsula, has attached to it a few mountain groups of moderate extent: the peninsula of Nudlung and the highland of Eχalualuin and that of Qivitung.
Penny Highland, which makes up the main part of Cumberland Peninsula, is connected to a few moderately sized mountain groups: the Nudlung peninsula and the highlands of Eχalualuin and Qivitung.
Farther southeast, between the valleys of Pangnirtung and Kingnait-Padli, 416 is situated the highland of Kingnait, with sharp peaks emerging from the ice cap which covers the lower parts of the plateau. The rest of Cumberland Peninsula is formed by the highland of Saumia, which much resembles that of Kingnait. Near Cape Mercy the ice covered highland slopes down to a hilly region, which falls abruptly to the sea.
Farther southeast, between the valleys of Pangnirtung and Kingnait-Padli, 416 is the Kingnait highland, with jagged peaks rising from the ice cap that covers the lower areas of the plateau. The rest of Cumberland Peninsula is made up of the Saumia highland, which is quite similar to Kingnait. Close to Cape Mercy, the ice-covered highland slopes down to a hilly area that drops sharply to the sea.
The southern parts of this range of mountains are composed of gneiss and granite. It may be that Silurian strata occur in some places, but they have not yet been found anywhere in situ. The northern parts are too imperfectly known to enable us to form an idea of their geological character.
The southern sections of this mountain range are made up of gneiss and granite. There might be Silurian layers in some areas, but they haven't been discovered in their original position yet. The northern parts are not well enough understood for us to determine their geological characteristics.
The mountains just described slope down to a hilly region, which farther to the west levels off to a plain. The hills are composed of granite, the plains of Silurian limestone, which extends from Prince Regent Inlet to the head of Frobisher Bay.
The mountains mentioned earlier slope down to a hilly area, which further to the west flattens out into a plain. The hills are made up of granite, while the plains consist of Silurian limestone, stretching from Prince Regent Inlet to the head of Frobisher Bay.
The peninsula between Cumberland Sound and Frobisher Bay is formed by a plateau, which slopes down gradually to the northwest. It is drained by a great river flowing into Auqardneling, a fjord on the western shore of Cumberland Sound. Near Lake Nettilling the country is very low, the level of the lake being only forty feet above that of the sea. Here the watershed between Cumberland Sound and Fox Basin closely approaches the eastern shore, coming within five miles of the head of Nettilling Fjord. It is formed by a narrow neck of land about a quarter of a mile wide and sixty-five feet above the level of the sea.
The peninsula between Cumberland Sound and Frobisher Bay consists of a plateau that gradually slopes down to the northwest. It is drained by a large river that flows into Auqardneling, a fjord located on the western shore of Cumberland Sound. Near Lake Nettilling, the land is quite low, with the lake's surface only forty feet above sea level. Here, the watershed separating Cumberland Sound and Fox Basin comes very close to the eastern shore, just five miles from the head of Nettilling Fjord. This watershed is created by a narrow strip of land about a quarter of a mile wide and sixty-five feet above sea level.
From Eskimo reports I conclude that the plateau of Nugumiut, as we may call the peninsula between Frobisher Bay and Cumberland Sound, is comparatively level. Only a single mountain south of Qasigidjen (Bear Sound) rises into the region of eternal snow.
From Eskimo reports, I conclude that the Nugumiut plateau, which we can refer to as the peninsula between Frobisher Bay and Cumberland Sound, is relatively flat. Only one mountain south of Qasigidjen (Bear Sound) reaches the area of eternal snow.
The peninsula between Frobisher Bay and Hudson Strait is formed by a granite highland, the Meta Incognita of Queen Elizabeth. It is covered with ice and sends a few glaciers into the sea. Farther west, near Lesseps Bay and White Bear Sound, the country becomes lower. The narrow isthmus leading from Hudson Strait to Amaqdjuaq cannot be very high, as the Eskimo carry their kayaks to the lake, which I believe is about two hundred feet above the level of the sea.
The peninsula between Frobisher Bay and Hudson Strait is made up of a granite highland, known as the Meta Incognita of Queen Elizabeth. It’s covered in ice and has a few glaciers that flow into the ocean. Further west, around Lesseps Bay and White Bear Sound, the land becomes flatter. The narrow isthmus connecting Hudson Strait to Amaqdjuaq can’t be very high since the Eskimos transport their kayaks to the lake, which I think is about two hundred feet above sea level.
Last of all I have to mention the highlands of King Cape. The rest of the land is taken up by a vast plain in which two large lakes are situated; the southern, Amaqdjuaq, empties by a short river into Lake Nettilling, whence the long and wide Koukdjuaq runs to the shallow sea. From observations made by Captain Spicer, of Groton, Conn., and information obtained from the Eskimo, we learn that the whole of the eastern part of Fox Basin is extremely shallow and that there are many low islands scattered about in those parts of the sea. The plains of Baffin Land, Fox Basin, and the eastern half of Melville 417 Peninsula may be considered a wide basin of Silurian strata bordered by granitic elevations on every side.
Last but not least, I need to mention the highlands of King Cape. The rest of the land is covered by a vast plain where two large lakes can be found; the southern lake, Amaqdjuaq, drains through a short river into Lake Nettilling, from which the long and wide Koukdjuaq flows into the shallow sea. Based on observations by Captain Spicer from Groton, Conn., and information gathered from the Eskimo, we learn that the entire eastern part of Fox Basin is very shallow and that there are many low islands scattered throughout those areas of the sea. The plains of Baffin Land, Fox Basin, and the eastern half of the Melville 417 Peninsula can be seen as a broad basin of Silurian rock formations surrounded by granitic elevations on all sides.
Besides the configuration of the land, the extent of the land ice formed during the winter is of vital importance to the inhabitants of the Arctic region, because during the greater part of the year it affords the only means of communication between the tribes, and because in winter the seal, which constitutes the principal food of the Eskimo, takes to those parts of the coast where extensive floes are formed. Therefore the state of the ice regulates the distribution of the natives during the greater part of the year and must be considered in studying the habits of the Eskimo. The extent of the land ice principally depends on the configuration of the land and the strength of the currents. On a shore exposed to a strong current an extensive floe can only be formed where projecting points of land form deep bays. We find the distribution of ice regulated in accordance with this fact all around the shores of the Arctic Ocean.
Besides the layout of the land, the amount of sea ice formed during the winter is crucial for the people living in the Arctic region. For most of the year, it provides the only way for the tribes to communicate with each other, and in winter, seals—which are the main food source for the Eskimo—move to areas along the coast where large ice floes are created. So, the condition of the ice influences where the native people go for most of the year and is important for understanding the habits of the Eskimo. The extent of the sea ice mostly depends on the shape of the land and the strength of the ocean currents. On a coastline that's exposed to strong currents, large ice floes can only form where jutting land creates deep bays. We can see the distribution of ice around the shores of the Arctic Ocean follows this pattern.
The strong current setting out of Lancaster Sound and Smith Sound generally prevents ice from forming under the steep cliffs of the land. Sometimes the pack ice of the sounds is stopped and freezes together into rough floes; a smooth plain is never formed. By far the largest land floe is formed from Bylot Island to Cape Dyer (Okan). In Home Bay it extends to a distance of about eighty miles from the mainland. The formation of this floe is favored by a number of shoals which extend from the peninsulas of Cape Eglinton (Aqojang), Cape Aston (Niaqonaujang), and Qivitung, for the large floes drifting south are stopped by the icebergs aground on these banks. The greater part of the floe is very rough, smooth ice prevailing only in the bays.
The strong current flowing out of Lancaster Sound and Smith Sound usually keeps ice from forming beneath the steep cliffs of the land. Sometimes, the pack ice in the sounds gets trapped and freezes together into rough floes; a smooth surface is never created. The biggest land floe stretches from Bylot Island to Cape Dyer (Okan). In Home Bay, it reaches about eighty miles out from the mainland. This floe forms thanks to several shoals that extend from the peninsulas of Cape Eglinton (Aqojang), Cape Aston (Niaqonaujang), and Qivitung, as the large floes drifting south are halted by the icebergs grounded on these banks. Most of the floe is very rough, with smooth ice occurring only in the bays.
The strong southerly current passing through the narrowest part of Davis Strait between Cape Walsingham (Idjuk) and Holsteinborg breaks up the ice all along the shore from Cape Dyer to Cape Walsingham, Exeter Sound alone being covered by a larger floe. The bay between Cape Mickleham (Nuvuktirpang) and Cape Mercy is well covered with ice, which extends to the islands farthest out toward the sea.
The powerful southern current flowing through the narrowest section of Davis Strait between Cape Walsingham (Idjuk) and Holsteinborg breaks up the ice along the shore from Cape Dyer to Cape Walsingham, with only Exeter Sound being covered by a larger floe. The bay between Cape Mickleham (Nuvuktirpang) and Cape Mercy is heavily covered with ice, extending out to the islands farthest from the shore.
Near Cape Mercy the strong tides caused by Cumberland Sound prevent the ice from consolidating in the entrance of the gulf. As the sound widens greatly behind the narrow passage formed by Nuvukdjuaq and Qaχodluin, the tide sets in with great force. For this reason the floe never extends beyond that narrow entrance. Often the head of the open water runs from Qeqerten to Nuvujen, and instances are known where it even reaches the line of Pujetung-Umanaq.
Near Cape Mercy, the strong tides from Cumberland Sound prevent the ice from forming solidly at the entrance of the gulf. As the sound widens significantly behind the narrow passage created by Nuvukdjuaq and Qaχodluin, the tide rushes in with great force. Because of this, the ice floe never extends beyond that narrow entrance. Often, the open water stretches from Qeqerten to Nuvujen, and there have been cases where it even reaches the line of Pujetung-Umanaq.
The southwestern shore of Cumberland Sound from Qaχodluin to Cape Brevoort (Qeqertuqdjuaq) is always washed by water, because 418 a strong current, which often breaks up the ice of Field and Grinnell Bay (the bays of Ukadliq and Nugumiut), sets along the coast.
The southwestern shore of Cumberland Sound from Qaχodluin to Cape Brevoort (Qeqertuqdjuaq) is constantly affected by water because 418 a strong current often breaks up the ice in Field and Grinnell Bay (the bays of Ukadliq and Nugumiut) as it moves along the coast.
The floe seldom extends to Lady Franklin and Monumental Islands (Kitigtung and Taχolidjuin), but usually runs from point to point, compelling the natives to pass across the land in order to reach the floe of the neighboring bay. Most of the time the edge of the floe covering Frobisher Bay extends to a line from Countess of Warwick Sound (Tuarpukdjuaq) to about fifteen miles southeast of Gabriel Island (Qeqertuqdjuaq), whence it runs south to Kingnait. Sometimes Aqbirsiarbing (Cape True) is the most eastern point inclosed by the ice. A dangerous current sets through the strait between Resolution Island (Tudjaqdjuaq) and the mainland, forming whirlpools which menace every ship that attempts the passage.
The ice floe rarely reaches Lady Franklin and Monumental Islands (Kitigtung and Taχolidjuin), but usually connects point to point, forcing the locals to travel over land to get to the floe in the nearby bay. Most of the time, the edge of the floe covering Frobisher Bay stretches from Countess of Warwick Sound (Tuarpukdjuaq) to about fifteen miles southeast of Gabriel Island (Qeqertuqdjuaq), and then it goes south to Kingnait. Sometimes, Aqbirsiarbing (Cape True) is the farthest east point surrounded by ice. A dangerous current flows through the strait between Resolution Island (Tudjaqdjuaq) and the mainland, creating whirlpools that threaten every ship that tries to pass through.
Hudson Strait never freezes over. The greater part of the year it is filled with an immense pack which never consolidates into a continuous floe. As there are no large bays along the northern shore of that strait, no land floes of great importance are formed. Only the Bay of Qaumauang, North Bay, and Behm Bay (the bay of Quaiirnang and that east of Akuliaq) are covered with floes which are of importance to the natives. The bays east of Akuliaq and the large fjords of that region form a comparatively large body of ice.
Hudson Strait never freezes. For most of the year, it’s filled with a massive pack of ice that never turns into a solid floe. Since there are no large bays along the northern shore of the strait, no significant land floes are formed. Only the Bay of Qaumauang, North Bay, and Behm Bay (the bay of Quaiirnang and the one east of Akuliaq) have floes that matter to the locals. The bays east of Akuliaq and the large fjords in that area create a relatively large body of ice.
Probably no land ice is formed between King Cape (Nuvukdjuaq) and the northern parts of Fox Basin. According to Parry and the reports of the natives, Fury and Hecla Strait and the bay which forms its eastern outlet are covered by land ice which is connected with the floe of the bays of Fox Basin as far as Piling.
Probably no land ice forms between King Cape (Nuvukdjuaq) and the northern parts of Fox Basin. According to Parry and reports from the locals, Fury and Hecla Strait and the bay that makes up its eastern outlet are covered by land ice connected to the floes in the bays of Fox Basin up to Piling.
In Hudson Bay there are very few places in which the land ice extends to a considerable distance from the shore. Neither Frozen Strait nor Rowe’s Welcome freezes over, each being kept open by the swiftly running tides. The most extensive floes are formed in Repulse Bay, Wager Bay, and Chesterfield Inlet.
In Hudson Bay, there are very few spots where the land ice stretches far from the shore. Neither Frozen Strait nor Rowe’s Welcome freezes over, as both are kept open by the fast-moving tides. The largest ice floes form in Repulse Bay, Wager Bay, and Chesterfield Inlet.
The drifting ice of the Gulf of Boothia never consolidates and even Committee Bay is rarely covered by a smooth land floe. Pelly Bay and the sea on the east coast of Boothia as far as Victoria Harbor (Tikeraqdjuq) freeze over, since they are sheltered by numerous islands. Still larger is the sheet of ice which covers the bay formed by the estuary of Back River, King William Land, and Boothia. The western shore of this peninsula farther north is skirted by a border of land ice the extent of which is unknown.
The drifting ice in the Gulf of Boothia never packs together, and even Committee Bay is seldom blanketed by a smooth ice floe. Pelly Bay and the sea along the east coast of Boothia all the way to Victoria Harbor (Tikeraqdjuq) freeze over since they're protected by many islands. The ice sheet that covers the bay formed by the Back River estuary, King William Land, and Boothia is even larger. The western shore of this peninsula, further north, is lined with a stretch of land ice whose size is still unknown.
It is a remarkable fact that, although the extreme western and eastern parts of the country abound with extensive floes, the Hudson Bay region and the Gulf of Boothia are almost devoid of them.
It is a noteworthy fact that, while the far western and eastern parts of the country are filled with large ice floes, the Hudson Bay area and the Gulf of Boothia have very few of them.
This brief sketch will enable one to understand the geographical distribution and the migrations of the Eskimo tribes who inhabit this country.
This short overview will help you understand the geographic spread and migrations of the Eskimo tribes living in this country.
DISTRIBUTION OF THE TRIBES.
GENERAL OBSERVATIONS.
The mode of life of all the Eskimo tribes of Northeastern America is very uniform; therefore it is desirable to make a few general observations on the subject before entering into a detailed description of each tribe. All depends upon the distribution of food at the different seasons. The migrations or the accessibility of the game compel the natives to move their habitations from time to time, and hence the distribution of the villages depends, to a great extent, upon that of the animals which supply them with food.
The way of life for all the Eskimo tribes in Northeastern America is quite similar; therefore, it's helpful to make a few general observations on the topic before diving into a detailed description of each tribe. Everything relies on the availability of food during different seasons. The migrations or accessibility of game force the locals to relocate their homes periodically, and so the location of the villages largely depends on where the animals that provide their food are found.
As the inhospitable country does not produce vegetation to an extent sufficient to sustain life in its human inhabitants, they are forced to depend entirely upon animal food. In Arctic America the abundance of seals found in all parts of the sea enables man to withstand the inclemency of the climate and the sterility of the soil. The skins of seals furnish the material for summer garments and for the tent; their flesh is almost the only food, and their blubber the indispensable fuel during the long dark winter. Scarcely less important is the deer, of whose heavy skin the winter garments are made, and these enable the Eskimo to brave the storms and the cold of winter.
As the harsh landscape doesn't produce enough plants to support human life, people are completely reliant on animal food. In Arctic America, the abundance of seals in the sea allows humans to survive the harsh climate and barren land. Seal skins are used to make summer clothing and tents; their meat is nearly the only food source, and their blubber is vital fuel during the long, dark winter. Equally important is the deer, whose thick skin is made into winter clothing, enabling the Eskimo to endure the storms and cold of winter.
That the mode of life of the Eskimo depends wholly on the distribution of these animals will therefore be apparent, for, as already observed, they regulate their dwelling places in accordance with the migrations of the latter from place to place in search of food.
That the way of life of the Inuit depends entirely on the distribution of these animals will be clear, because, as noted before, they adapt their living locations based on the movements of these animals as they migrate in search of food.
When the constraint of winter is broken the natives leave their old habitations. The warm rays of the sun melt the roofs of their snow houses, the strong vaults which afforded shelter and comfortable warmth during the long cold winter begin to break down, and new houses must be built. They therefore exchange the solid snow houses for light tents, which are very small and poor, until a sufficient number of sealskins for better structures is secured.
When winter's grip finally eases, the locals abandon their old homes. The sun's warm rays melt the roofs of their snow houses, and the sturdy structures that provided shelter and comfort during the long cold winter start to collapse, so they need to build new places to live. They swap the solid snow houses for small, flimsy tents until they gather enough sealskins to make better shelters.
As at this time seals are found in abundance everywhere, basking in the warm sunshine and enjoying the beginning of the spring, a great supply is easily secured. As the season advances food becomes more plentiful, and with the breaking up of the rivers and ponds the salmon leave the latter and descend to the sea. About this time the Eskimo establish their settlements at the head of the fjords, where salmon are easily caught in the shallow rivers. In July the snow, which has covered the land for nine months, has melted away and the natives undertake hunting trips inland, in order to obtain the precious skins of the reindeer and the meat of the fawns, which is always highly prized. With the breaking up of the ice the variety 420 of food is further increased by the arrival of the walrus and the ground and harp seals, which leave the country during the winter. Birds are also found in abundance, and no cares afflict the natives.
As seals are abundant everywhere right now, lounging in the warm sunshine and enjoying the start of spring, it's easy to gather a large supply. As the season progresses, food becomes more available, and when the rivers and ponds start breaking up, the salmon leave these areas and head to the sea. Around this time, the Eskimo set up their communities at the heads of the fjords, where salmon are easily caught in the shallow rivers. By July, the snow that has covered the land for nine months has melted, and the locals go on hunting trips inland to get the valuable skins of reindeer and the meat of fawns, which is always in high demand. As the ice breaks up, the variety of food increases with the arrival of walrus and ground and harp seals, which leave during the winter. Birds are also abundant, and the locals live without worries.
Before the sea begins to freeze over again the Eskimo return from deer hunting and gather at places where there are the best chances for obtaining food in the autumn. A few weeks are spent in making short excursions near the settlements, as longer journeys would be too dangerous during this tempestuous season. The colder it grows the more the natives are confined to their huts and the more they become dependent on the seal. While in summer shrubs of various kinds are available for cooking purposes, in winter blubber affords the only fuel for cooking and for heating their huts.
Before the sea starts to freeze over again, the Eskimos come back from deer hunting and gather in places where they have the best chances of finding food in the autumn. They spend a few weeks going on short trips near their settlements, as longer journeys would be too risky during this stormy season. As it gets colder, the locals are more confined to their huts and increasingly dependent on seals. While summer provides various shrubs for cooking, in winter, blubber is their only fuel for cooking and heating their huts.
At last the smaller bays are sufficiently frozen to permit a new way of pursuing the game. The hunters visit the edge of the newly formed floe in order to shoot the seals, which are secured by the harpoon.
At last, the smaller bays are frozen enough to allow for a new way to hunt. The hunters go to the edge of the newly formed ice floe to shoot the seals, which they catch with a harpoon.
The process of freezing goes on quickly and the floating pieces of ice begin to consolidate. Only a few holes are now found, in places where icebergs, moved by the tides or the strong currents, prevent the sea from freezing. During a short time these openings form the favorite hunting ground of the natives. Though the walrus and the ground seal migrate to the edge of the floe as soon as the ice begins to form, the common seal (Pagomys fœtidus) remains, and this is always the principal food of the natives. In the autumn the fjords and the narrow channels between the islands are its favorite haunt; later in the season it resorts to the sea, frequently appearing at the surface through breathing holes, which it scratches in the ice. As winter comes on it is hunted by the Eskimo at these holes.
The freezing process happens quickly, and the floating chunks of ice start to merge. Only a few gaps remain, in spots where icebergs, pushed by tides or strong currents, stop the sea from freezing. For a short while, these openings become the prime hunting ground for the locals. While the walrus and the ground seal move to the edge of the floe as soon as the ice begins to form, the common seal (Pagomys fœtidus) sticks around, which is always the main food source for the locals. In the fall, the fjords and narrow channels between the islands are its preferred spots; later in the season, it heads out to sea, often surfacing through breathing holes that it creates in the ice. As winter sets in, the Eskimo hunt it at these holes.
The foregoing observations will serve as a preliminary to the description of the distribution of the tribes of Northeastern America. The object of this section is to treat of the immediate relations between the country and its inhabitants, and a detailed account of their habits will be found in subsequent pages.
The previous observations will set the stage for describing the distribution of the tribes in Northeastern America. This section aims to discuss the direct relationships between the land and its people, with a detailed account of their habits provided on the following pages.
According to Dr. H. Rink, the Inuit race may be divided into five groups: the Greenlanders; the central tribes of Smith Sound, Baffin Land, the west shore of Hudson Bay, the Back River region, and Boothia; the Labradorians, on the shores of that peninsula; the Mackenzie tribes of the central parts of the north shore of America; and the tribes of Alaska. I am somewhat in doubt whether the central tribes and those of Labrador differ enough to justify a separate classification, as the natives of both shores of Hudson Strait seem to be closely related. A decisive answer on the division of these tribes may be postponed until the publication of Lucien M. Turner’s excellent observations and collections, which were made at Fort Chimo.
According to Dr. H. Rink, the Inuit people can be divided into five groups: the Greenlanders; the central tribes from Smith Sound and Baffin Land, the west coast of Hudson Bay, the Back River area, and Boothia; the Labradorians along the shores of that peninsula; the Mackenzie tribes from the central regions of the northern shore of America; and the tribes of Alaska. I'm not entirely sure if the central tribes and those from Labrador are different enough to warrant separate classifications, since the natives on both sides of Hudson Strait appear to be closely related. A definite decision on how to classify these tribes can wait until Lucien M. Turner’s excellent observations and collections, made at Fort Chimo, are published.
BAFFIN LAND.
The Sikosuilarmiut.—
I shall begin with the enumeration of the tribes in the southwestern part of Baffin Land. This country is inhabited by the Sikosuilarmiut, i.e., the inhabitants of the shore without an ice floe. They are settled in two places: Nurata, east of King Cape, and Sikosuilaq, within the peninsula (or island?) which projects east of King Cape. The large fjords Sarbaq and Sarbausirn, which belong to their territory, are known to me only by a description which I received in Cumberland Sound. In summer they visit the upper parts of this long fjord to hunt deer on the plains which reach to the shore of Fox Basin. Probably they do not extend their migrations very far to the north or northeast; otherwise, they would reach Lakes Amaqdjuaq and Nettilling, the region about the latter being the hunting ground of the natives of Cumberland Sound.
I will start with a list of the tribes in the southwestern part of Baffin Land. This area is home to the Sikosuilarmiut, meaning the people of the shore without an ice floe. They live in two locations: Nurata, east of King Cape, and Sikosuilaq, on the peninsula (or island?) that extends east of King Cape. The large fjords Sarbaq and Sarbausirn, which are part of their territory, I only know from descriptions I received in Cumberland Sound. In the summer, they travel to the upper parts of this long fjord to hunt deer on the plains that stretch to the shore of Fox Basin. They probably don’t migrate too far north or northeast; otherwise, they would reach Lakes Amaqdjuaq and Nettilling, with the area around the latter being the hunting ground for the natives of Cumberland Sound.
I know of only a single meeting between the Eskimo visiting Lake Nettilling and others who are supposed to have come from Hudson Strait. It occurred in 1883 south of the lake.
I’m aware of only one meeting between the Eskimo visiting Lake Nettilling and others who are believed to have come from Hudson Strait. It took place in 1883, south of the lake.
The Akuliarmiut.—
This tribe is settled on the northern shore of Hudson Strait. Their winter resort lies west of Qeqertuqdjuaq (Parry’s North Bluff). In summer they travel through White Bear Sound or Lesseps Bay to Lake Amaqdjuaq, which they reach after crossing a neck of land about ten miles in width. The exact direction of the road cannot be ascertained, as the position of their starting point, which is called Tuniqten, is doubtful. Crossing a short portage they ascend to Lake Amitoq, whence on a second portage they pass the watershed between Lake Amaqdjuaq and Hudson Strait. From the small Lake Mingong a brook runs into Sioreling and thence into Lake Amaqdjuaq (Baffin-Land, p. 67). On the southern shore of the large lake they erect their summer tents. Farther east, in North Bay, there is another winter residence of the same tribe. Unfortunately, I cannot specify the place of this settlement, which is called Quaiirnang.
This tribe is settled on the northern shore of Hudson Strait. Their winter camp is located west of Qeqertuqdjuaq (Parry’s North Bluff). In summer, they travel through White Bear Sound or Lesseps Bay to Lake Amaqdjuaq, which they reach after crossing a narrow strip of land about ten miles wide. The exact route cannot be determined, as the location of their starting point, known as Tuniqten, is uncertain. After crossing a short portage, they move up to Lake Amitoq, and from there, a second portage takes them over the divide between Lake Amaqdjuaq and Hudson Strait. A stream from the small Lake Mingong flows into Sioreling and then into Lake Amaqdjuaq (Baffin-Land, p. 67). On the southern shore of the large lake, they set up their summer tents. Further east, in North Bay, there is another winter home of the same tribe. Unfortunately, I cannot specify the location of this settlement, which is called Quaiirnang.
The Qaumauangmiut.—
East of the Akuliarmiut live the Eskimo so frequently met near Middle Savage Islands. Their principal residence is near Lake Qaumauang, from which they take their name Qaumauangmiut. My investigations concerning these tribes were much embarrassed by the want of trustworthy charts. If charts are tolerably well delineated, the Eskimo understand the meaning of every point and island and can give detailed accounts of the situation of the settlements and the migrations of the inhabitants.
East of the Akuliarmiut live the Eskimo who are often found near Middle Savage Islands. Their main settlement is close to Lake Qaumauang, which is where they get their name, Qaumauangmiut. My research on these tribes was quite challenging due to the lack of reliable maps. When maps are fairly accurate, the Eskimo can understand the significance of every point and island and can provide detailed information about the locations of settlements and the movements of the people.
Between Sikosuilaq and Akuliaq but a moderate amount of intercourse is kept up, as the settlements are separated by a wide and uninhabited stretch of land. Notwithstanding this many members of one tribe are found to have settled among the other. An American 422 whaling station which was established in Akuliaq a few years ago may have had some influence upon the distribution and the life of these tribes. The greater importance of Akuliaq, however, cannot be ascribed to the presence of the whalers alone, as a few harbors near Sikosuilaq are also frequently visited by them. The whalers report that there are about fifty inhabitants in Sikosuilaq, about two hundred in Akuliaq, and farther east fifty more. Thus the population of the north shore of Hudson Strait probably amounts to three hundred in all.
Between Sikosuilaq and Akuliaq, there is a fair amount of interaction, as the settlements are separated by a large, uninhabited area. Despite this, many members of one tribe have settled among the other. An American 422 whaling station that was set up in Akuliaq a few years ago may have influenced the distribution and lifestyle of these tribes. However, the greater significance of Akuliaq cannot be attributed solely to the presence of the whalers, as a few harbors near Sikosuilaq are also frequently visited by them. The whalers report that there are about fifty people living in Sikosuilaq, around two hundred in Akuliaq, and another fifty further east. Therefore, the total population of the north shore of Hudson Strait is likely around three hundred.
The Qaumauangmiut are probably closely related to the Nugumiut of Frobisher Bay.
The Qaumauangmiut are likely closely related to the Nugumiut of Frobisher Bay.
The Nugumiut.—
I can give a somewhat more detailed description of this tribe, among the families of which Hall passed the winters of 1860-’61 and 1861-’62 (Hall I). Unfortunately, he does not give any coherent account of their life, only meager information being furnished in the record of his journeys. Besides, generalizations cannot be made from his two years’ experience. My own observations in Cumberland Sound may serve as a complement to those of Hall. As he gives only a few native names of places, it is sometimes difficult to ascertain the exact position of the localities to which he alludes.
I can provide a slightly more detailed description of this tribe, among the families with whom Hall spent the winters of 1860-’61 and 1861-’62 (Hall I). Unfortunately, he doesn’t give a clear account of their lives, offering only sparse details in his journey records. Furthermore, his two years of experience don’t allow for broad generalizations. My own observations in Cumberland Sound can complement Hall’s findings. Since he only lists a few native names for places, it can be challenging to determine the exact locations he refers to.
According to Hall and my own inquiries four places are inhabited by this tribe almost every winter: Tornait (Jones Cape of Hall), about thirty-five miles above Bear Sound, in Frobisher Bay; Operdniving and Tuarpukdjuaq, in Countess of Warwick Sound; Nugumiut, in (Cyrus W.) Field Bay; and Ukadliq, in (Cornell) Grinnell Bay. As these bays open into Davis Strait the formation of the ice is retarded and its extent diminished, and consequently some peculiarities in the arrangement of the life of the Eskimo are observed here. The only occupation of the Nugumiut and the inhabitants of Ukadliq is sealing with the harpoon on the floe of the inner parts of the bay. Near Ukadliq the tide holes east and west of Allen Island abound with seals. In winter, when the seals take to the open ice, the village of this group of families is established near Roger’s Island, where the floe of the bay forms the hunting ground of the natives.
According to Hall and my own research, there are four places where this tribe lives almost every winter: Tornait (Jones Cape of Hall), about thirty-five miles above Bear Sound in Frobisher Bay; Operdniving and Tuarpukdjuaq in Countess of Warwick Sound; Nugumiut in (Cyrus W.) Field Bay; and Ukadliq in (Cornell) Grinnell Bay. Since these bays open into Davis Strait, the ice forms more slowly and covers a smaller area, which leads to some unique aspects of the Eskimo way of life here. The only activities for the Nugumiut and the residents of Ukadliq revolve around sealing with harpoons on the ice floes in the inner parts of the bay. Near Ukadliq, the tide holes to the east and west of Allen Island are full of seals. In winter, when seals move onto the open ice, this group of families sets up their village near Roger’s Island, where the bay’s floe serves as the hunting ground for the locals.
During the autumn the Nugumiut stay in Field Bay. The women are then busy preparing the deerskins; for, on account of the requirements of their religion, the walrus hunt cannot be begun until the deerskins which were taken in summer have been worked up for use. As soon as this is done they travel across Bayard Taylor Pass (so called by Hall) to Frobisher Bay, and in the latter half of December or in the beginning of January settle on Operdniving or on Tuarpukdjuaq in company with the natives who stay here during the fall. In Cumberland Sound I learned that this changing of the habitations takes place almost regularly and that sometimes the settlement is moved to Aqbirsiarbing (Cape True) if the bay is frozen 423 over beyond Operdniving. In traveling to Aqbirsiarbing the tide holes of Ikerassaqdjuaq (Lupton Channel) are avoided by using the pass of Chappell Inlet. Here and in Tornait the natives go sealing on the ice or walrusing at the edge of the floe, which in most cases is not very far off.
During the fall, the Nugumiut stay in Field Bay. The women are busy preparing the deerskins because, due to their religious practices, they can't start the walrus hunt until the deerskins taken in summer have been processed for use. Once that's done, they travel across Bayard Taylor Pass (named by Hall) to Frobisher Bay and settle on Operdniving or Tuarpukdjuaq with the locals who are here during the fall, usually in the latter half of December or the beginning of January. In Cumberland Sound, I learned that this relocation happens almost regularly, and sometimes the settlement moves to Aqbirsiarbing (Cape True) if the bay is frozen over near Operdniving. When traveling to Aqbirsiarbing, they avoid the tide holes of Ikerassaqdjuaq (Lupton Channel) by using the Chappell Inlet pass. Here and in Tornait, the locals go sealing on the ice or walrus hunting at the edge of the floe, which is typically not very far away. 423
About the latter half of March part of the Eskimo begin to travel up Frobisher Bay. In the middle of April, 1862, Hall found a settlement on Qeqertuqdjuaq (Gabriel Island), from which island the floe edge was visited and young seals were caught in the narrow channels between the numerous islands. Towards the end of the month a portion of the natives went farther to the northwest in pursuit of the basking seals (I, p. 470), intending to reach the head of the bay in July. Hall found summer habitations at Ukadliq (I, p. 468); on Field Bay (p. 296); and on Frobisher Bay at Agdlinartung (p. 308), Opera Glass Point (p. 341), Waddell Bay (p. 341), and Nuvuktualung, on the southern point of Beecher Peninsula (p. 348).
About the latter half of March, some of the Eskimo begin to travel up Frobisher Bay. In mid-April 1862, Hall found a settlement on Qeqertuqdjuaq (Gabriel Island), from which the floe edge was visited, and young seals were caught in the narrow channels between the many islands. Towards the end of the month, some of the natives went farther northwest in search of basking seals (I, p. 470), planning to reach the head of the bay by July. Hall found summer homes at Ukadliq (I, p. 468); on Field Bay (p. 296); and on Frobisher Bay at Agdlinartung (p. 308), Opera Glass Point (p. 341), Waddell Bay (p. 341), and Nuvuktualung, on the southern point of Beecher Peninsula (p. 348).
A very important hunting ground of the inhabitants of Tiniqdjuarbiusirn (Frobisher Bay), of which I received some detailed accounts, is Lake Amaqdjuaq. In the foregoing remarks on the Akuliaq tribe I described the course which leads from Hudson Strait to the lake. Another route is followed in traveling from the head of Frobisher Bay to Lake Amaqdjuaq, a distance of about fifty miles. Probably the men leave Sylvia Grinnell River and ascend to Lake Amartung, from which lake a brook runs westward to Lake Amaqdjuaq (Baffin-Land, p. 68). The women take a different route and arrive at Aqbeniling after a tramp of six days, near a small bay called Metja. Here the summer huts are erected and birds and deer are killed in abundance.
A very important hunting ground for the people of Tiniqdjuarbiusirn (Frobisher Bay), about which I received detailed accounts, is Lake Amaqdjuaq. In the previous comments about the Akuliaq tribe, I described the path that goes from Hudson Strait to the lake. Another route is taken when traveling from the head of Frobisher Bay to Lake Amaqdjuaq, which is about fifty miles away. The men likely leave Sylvia Grinnell River and head to Lake Amartung, from which a stream flows west to Lake Amaqdjuaq (Baffin-Land, p. 68). The women take a different path and reach Aqbeniling after a six-day trek, near a small bay called Metja. Here, summer huts are set up, and they hunt birds and deer in large numbers.
The facility in reaching the lake from Hudson Strait and Frobisher Bay is a very important consideration, as the Akuliarmiut and the Nugumiut meet here, and thus an immediate intercourse between the tribes is opened. The inhabitants of Hudson Strait leave Tuniqten in spring, arrive at the head of Frobisher Bay in the fall, and after the formation of the ice reach the Nugumiut settlements by means of sledges. When Hall wintered in Field Bay a traveling party of Sikosuilarmiut which had accomplished the distance from King Cape in one year arrived there (I, p. 267).
The ease of getting to the lake from Hudson Strait and Frobisher Bay is a really important factor since the Akuliarmiut and the Nugumiut meet up here, creating a direct connection between the tribes. The people from Hudson Strait leave Tuniqten in the spring, get to the head of Frobisher Bay in the fall, and after the ice forms, they travel to the Nugumiut settlements using sleds. When Hall spent the winter in Field Bay, a traveling group of Sikosuilarmiut who had made the journey from King Cape in a year arrived there (I, p. 267).
Another route, which is practicable only for boats, connects Qaumauang with Nugumiut. It leads along the shore of Hudson Strait. The traveler sails through the dangerous passage between Tudjaqdjuaq (Resolution Island) and the mainland and crosses Frobisher Bay either at its entrance or in the shelter of the group of islands farther up the bay.
Another route, which only works for boats, links Qaumauang with Nugumiut. It goes along the shore of Hudson Strait. The traveler sails through the risky area between Tudjaqdjuaq (Resolution Island) and the mainland and crosses Frobisher Bay either at its entrance or in the safety of the islands further up the bay.
In their intercourse with the Nugumiut, the inhabitants of Cumberland Sound generally follow the long coast between Ukadliq and Naujateling, passing through the numerous sounds formed by long, 424 narrow islands. I can describe this region from personal observations.
In their interactions with the Nugumiut, the people of Cumberland Sound usually travel along the extended coast between Ukadliq and Naujateling, navigating through the many sounds created by long, narrow islands. I can describe this area from firsthand experience.
The Oqomiut.—
The Eskimo of Davis Strait call the tribes of Cumberland Sound and Saumia by the name of Oqomiut. The whole of the land from Prince Regent Inlet to the plateau of Nugumiut is divided by the Eskimo into three parts, Aggo, Akudnirn, and Oqo—i.e., the weather side, the center, and the lee side—and accordingly the tribes are called the Aggomiut, Akudnirmiut, and Oqomiut.
The Eskimo of Davis Strait refer to the tribes of Cumberland Sound and Saumia as Oqomiut. They divide all the land from Prince Regent Inlet to the Nugumiut plateau into three sections: Aggo, Akudnirn, and Oqo—meaning the weather side, the center, and the leeward side. As a result, the tribes are called the Aggomiut, Akudnirmiut, and Oqomiut.
Unquestionably the whole of Cumberland Sound and the coast of Davis Strait from Cape Mercy to Exeter Sound belong to the Oqo of the Northern Eskimo. Farther north, the inhabitants of Padli extend their migrations from Qarmaqdjuin to Qivitung. These people occupy an intermediate position between the Akudnirmiut and the Oqomiut, having easy communication with both, and consequently it is doubtful to which they belong, so that the determination of the boundary between Oqo and Akudnirn remains arbitrary. In regard to their customs and from the position of the land, however, they may be more properly joined to the Akudnirmiut, of whom they would form a subdivision.
Unquestionably, all of Cumberland Sound and the coast of Davis Strait from Cape Mercy to Exeter Sound belong to the Oqo of the Northern Eskimo. Further north, the people of Padli extend their migrations from Qarmaqdjuin to Qivitung. These individuals occupy a middle ground between the Akudnirmiut and the Oqomiut, maintaining easy communication with both groups. As a result, it’s unclear to which they truly belong, making the determination of the boundary between Oqo and Akudnirn somewhat arbitrary. However, considering their customs and the geographical layout, they may be more appropriately categorized with the Akudnirmiut, forming a subdivision within that group.
The names Oqo, Akudnirn, and Aggo must not be understood as respectively meaning a region strictly limited: they denote rather directions and the intervals between the localities situated in these directions. In asking for the position of Oqo one would be directed southeast, as this is considered the lee side; in the same way, if asking for Aggo, one would be directed to the shore of Prince Regent Inlet, the farthest land in the northwest, the weather side. In Cumberland Sound the natives of Iglulik are considered Aggomiut, while in Pond Bay they are known as a separate tribe. In the southern parts the whole of the northern region is comprised in the name Aggo; in the north Oqo means the whole of the southeastern regions.
The names Oqo, Akudnirn, and Aggo shouldn't be interpreted as referring to specific, limited areas; instead, they represent directions and the spaces between the locations in those directions. When someone asks about the location of Oqo, they would be directed southeast, as that is seen as the sheltered side; similarly, if someone asks about Aggo, they would be pointed to the shore of Prince Regent Inlet, the furthest land in the northwest, which is the exposed side. In Cumberland Sound, the people from Iglulik are considered Aggomiut, while in Pond Bay, they are recognized as a distinct tribe. In the southern areas, the entire northern region is included under the name Aggo; in the north, Oqo refers to all the southeastern regions.
Formerly, the Oqomiut were divided into four subtribes: the Talirpingmiut, on the west shore of Cumberland Sound; the Qinguamiut, at the head of it; the Kingnaitmiut, on the east shore; and the Saumingmiut, on the southeastern slope of the highland of Saumia. The names are derived from the districts which they inhabit, respectively. As the head of every fjord is called “qingua” (its head), the upper part of the large Cumberland Sound is also so named. The Qingua region may be limited by Imigen on the western shore and Ussualung on the eastern shore, though the name is applied to a region farther north; indeed, the name covers the whole district at the head of the sound. In looking from the head to the entrance of the sound the coasts are called according to their position: the southwestern Talirpia, i.e., its right one, and the northeastern Saumia, i.e., its left one; between Saumia and Qingua the highland Kingnait, 425 i.e., the higher land as compared to the opposite shore, is situated.
The Oqomiut were once divided into four subtribes: the Talirpingmiut on the west shore of Cumberland Sound, the Qinguamiut at the head of it, the Kingnaitmiut on the east shore, and the Saumingmiut on the southeastern slope of the highland of Saumia. Their names come from the areas they live in. The upper part of Cumberland Sound is called “qingua,” which means its head, just like the head of every fjord. The Qingua region is bordered by Imigen on the western shore and Ussualung on the eastern shore, although the name is also used for a region further north; it actually covers the entire area at the head of the sound. When looking from the head to the entrance of the sound, the coasts are named by their positions: the southwestern Talirpia, meaning the right side, and the northeastern Saumia, meaning the left side; between Saumia and Qingua lies the highland Kingnait, meaning the higher land compared to the opposite shore. 425
Although at the present time this division is hardly justifiable, the names of these four tribes are often mentioned on the shore of Davis Strait. Their old settlements are still inhabited, but their separate tribal identity is gone, a fact which is due as well to the diminution in their numbers as to the influence of the whalers visiting them.
Although this division is hardly justifiable today, the names of these four tribes are still often mentioned along the shore of Davis Strait. Their old settlements are still inhabited, but their distinct tribal identity is gone, a fact that is due both to the decrease in their population and the impact of the whalers who visited them.
In my opinion a great difference between these tribes never existed. Undoubtedly they were groups of families confined to a certain district and connected by a common life. Such a community could more easily develop as long as the number of individuals was a large one. When the whalers first wintered in Cumberland Sound the population may have amounted to about 1,500. In 1840, when Penny discovered the sound, he met 40 Eskimo in Anarnitung (Eenoolooapik, p. 91). The greater number of the inhabitants were at the head of the fjords fishing for salmon, others were whaling in Issortuqdjuaq, and some were inland on a deer hunting expedition. The whole number at that time probably amounted to 200. A few years later the Kingnaitmiut of Qeqerten were able to man eighteen whaleboats. Assuming five oarsmen and one harpooner to each boat, the steersman being furnished by the whalers, and for each man one wife and two children, we have in all about 400 individuals. The inhabitants of Nettilling Fjord may have numbered as many, and 100 are said to have lived in Imigen. Penny found in Ugjuktung about 30 individuals who belonged to the Saumingmiut and had come thither from Davis Strait. Accordingly I estimate the whole tribe at 150 individuals. On the southwestern coast of the sound between Nuvujen and Naujateling a large number of natives were reported. They lived in three settlements and numbered about 600. These estimates are not absolutely reliable, as they are compiled largely from hearsay and conjecture. Many of the natives being away in the summer, at the time when these estimates were made, accuracy in their preparation was impossible. From inquiries which were made among American whalers who had visited this sound since 1851, the population of Qeqerten must have been larger than that of any of the settlements contiguous to the sound. The estimation is the more difficult as a few settlements were sometimes deserted; for instance, Ukiadliving, in Saumia, and Qarmaqdjuin (Exeter Bay). Probably eight settlements, with a population of 200 inhabitants each—i.e., 1,600 in the sound—would be about the true number in 1840. At first I was inclined to believe in the existence of a larger number, but from later reports I should consider this number too large rather than too small. Since that time the population has diminished at a terrible rate. In 1857 Warmow, a Moravian missionary who accompanied Penny, estimated it at 300. If this was correct, the rapid diminution must have occurred during the first years after the rediscovery of the 426 sound. In December, 1883, the Talirpingmiut numbered 86 individuals, the Qinguamiut 60, the Kingnaitmiut 82, the Saumingmiut 17; total, 245. These were distributed in eight settlements. Beginning with the most southern settlement, the Talirpingmiut lived in Umanaqtuaq, Idjorituaqtuin, Nuvujen, and Qarussuit; the Qinguamiut, in Imigen and Anarnitung; the Kingnaitmiut, in Qeqerten; the Saumingmiut, in Ukiadliving. Accordingly the population of the settlements numbered as follows:
In my opinion, there was never a significant difference between these tribes. They were simply groups of families living in a specific area and connected by a shared way of life. Such a community could develop more easily as long as it included a sizable population. When the whalers first spent the winter in Cumberland Sound, the population might have been about 1,500. In 1840, when Penny discovered the sound, he encountered 40 Eskimo in Anarnitung (Eenoolooapik, p. 91). Most of the residents were at the heads of the fjords fishing for salmon, some were whaling in Issortuqdjuaq, and others were inland hunting deer. At that time, the total population probably reached around 200. A few years later, the Kingnaitmiut of Qeqerten were able to manage eighteen whaleboats. Assuming five oarsmen and one harpooner per boat, with the steersman provided by the whalers, plus one wife and two children for each man, we estimate around 400 individuals in total. The inhabitants of Nettilling Fjord may have numbered as many, and about 100 are said to have lived in Imigen. Penny found around 30 individuals in Ugjuktung who belonged to the Saumingmiut and had come from Davis Strait. So, I estimate the entire tribe at 150 individuals. On the southwestern coast of the sound between Nuvujen and Naujateling, a large number of natives were reported. They lived in three settlements and numbered about 600. These estimates are not entirely reliable, as they're mostly based on hearsay and assumptions. Many natives were away during the summer when these estimates were made, making accuracy impossible. According to inquiries made among American whalers who visited this sound since 1851, Qeqerten's population must have been larger than any of the nearby settlements. Estimation is tricky since a few settlements were sometimes abandoned; for example, Ukiadliving in Saumia and Qarmaqdjuin (Exeter Bay). It's likely that around eight settlements, with 200 residents each—totaling 1,600 in the sound—would be a more accurate count for 1840. Initially, I thought the number might be higher, but based on later reports, I now think this figure is probably too high rather than too low. Since then, the population has decreased drastically. In 1857, Warmow, a Moravian missionary who was with Penny, estimated it at 300. If that number is correct, the rapid decline must have occurred in the initial years after the rediscovery of the 426 sound. By December 1883, the Talirpingmiut numbered 86 individuals, the Qinguamiut 60, the Kingnaitmiut 82, and the Saumingmiut 17; totaling 245. They were distributed across eight settlements. Starting with the most southern settlement, the Talirpingmiut lived in Umanaqtuaq, Idjorituaqtuin, Nuvujen, and Qarussuit; the Qinguamiut in Imigen and Anarnitung; the Kingnaitmiut in Qeqerten; and the Saumingmiut in Ukiadliving. Thus, the population of the settlements was as follows:
Name of the settlement. |
Married. | Unmarried. | Total | ||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Men. | Women. | Widowers | Widows | Men. | Women. | Boys. | Girls. | ||
Naujateling | 6 | 6 | 1 | 1 | 3 | 3 | 20 | ||
Idjorituaqtuin | 3 | 3 | 1 | 1 | 2 | 1 | 11 | ||
Nuvujen | 8 | 8 | 1 | 2 | 1 | 4 | 2 | 26 | |
Qarussuit | 10 | 10 | 2 | 2 | 5 | 29 | |||
Imigen | 6 | 6 | 4 | 1 | 17 | ||||
Anarnitung | 12 | 12 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 8 | 8 | 43 | |
Qeqerten | 26 | 26 | 6 | 4 | 9 | 1 | 82 | ||
Ukiadliving | 6 | 6 | 1 | 1 | 2 | 1 | 17 | ||
Padli | 11 | 13 | 2 | 2 | 1 | 7 | 7 | 43 | |
Akudnirn | 8 | 12 | 2 | (18) | 40 | ||||
Total | 96 | 102 | 5 | 15 | 10 | 2 | (98) | 328 |
I have included in the foregoing table the inhabitants of Davis Strait and may add that the Nugumiut number about 80, the Eskimo of Pond Bay about 50 (?), those of Admiralty Inlet 200, and of Iglulik about 150. The total number of inhabitants of Baffin Land thus ranges between 1,000 and 1,100.
I have included in the table above the people living in Davis Strait and can add that the Nugumiut number around 80, the Eskimo of Pond Bay about 50 (?), those from Admiralty Inlet 200, and those from Iglulik about 150. The total population of Baffin Land is therefore estimated to be between 1,000 and 1,100.
The reason for the rapid diminution in the population of this country is undoubtedly to be found in the diseases which have been taken thither by the whalers. Of all these, syphilis has made the greatest ravages among the natives. Of other diseases I am unable to give a full account and can only refer to those which came under my observation during the year that I passed in this region. In Qeqerten a man died of cancer of the rectum, two women of pneumonia, and five children of diphtheria, this disease being first brought into the country in 1883. In Anarnitung I knew of the death of two women and one child. On the west shore a number of children died of diphtheria, while the health of the adults was good. In the year 1883-’84 I heard of two births, one occurring in Qeqerten, the other in Padli. At Qarussuit and Anarnitung there were two abortions.
The reason for the rapid decrease in the population of this country is clearly linked to the diseases brought over by the whalers. Among these, syphilis has caused the most damage to the native population. I can't provide a complete account of other diseases but can only mention those I observed during the year I spent in this area. In Qeqerten, a man died from rectal cancer, two women from pneumonia, and five children from diphtheria, which first entered the country in 1883. In Anarnitung, I heard about the deaths of two women and one child. On the west shore, several children died from diphtheria, while the adults were generally healthy. During the year 1883-’84, I heard of two births, one in Qeqerten and the other in Padli. In Qarussuit and Anarnitung, there were two abortions.
The opinion that the Eskimo are dying out on account of an insufficient supply of food is erroneous, for, even though the natives slaughter the seals without discrimination or forethought, they do 427 not kill enough to cause any considerable diminution in numbers. The whalers do not hunt the seal to any extent, and when one realizes how small the population of the country is and how vast the territory in which the seal lives it is easy to understand that famine or want cannot arise, as a rule, from the cutting off of the natural food supply. In fact, in the spring enormous numbers of seals may be seen together basking in the sun or swimming in the water.
The idea that the Eskimo are dying out because of a lack of food is incorrect. Even though the locals hunt seals indiscriminately and without much thought, they don't kill enough to significantly reduce their population. The whalers don’t really hunt seals either, and when you consider how small the human population is compared to the vast territory where seals live, it's clear that food shortages typically don't occur from diminishing their natural food supply. In fact, in the spring, you can see huge numbers of seals lounging in the sun or swimming in the water.
The causes of the famines which occur somewhat frequently among the Eskimo must be sought in another direction. Pressing need often prevails if in the latter part of the autumn the formation of the floe is retarded; for in that case hunters are not able either to go hunting in boats or to procure the necessary food at the edge of the floe, as new ice is attached to its more solid parts and the seals do not yet open their breathing holes. Such was the case at Niaqonaujang, on Davis Strait, in the fall of 1883. Gales of wind following in quick succession broke the floe. The new ice which had formed immediately prevented the natives from sealing, and in November and December a famine visited the settlement. Very soon the supply of blubber was exhausted, and being unable to feed the dogs the inhabitants were obliged to kill them one after another and to live upon their frozen carcasses. Only two dogs survived these months of need and starvation. Consequently the hunting season was a very poor one, since the natives missed the services of their dogs, which scent the breathing holes, and could not leave their settlement for any great distance.
The reasons for the famines that happen pretty often among the Eskimo need to be looked at from a different perspective. A pressing situation often occurs if the ice forms late in the autumn; during this time, hunters can't go out in boats to hunt or gather food at the edge of the ice, as new ice forms and seals don’t yet make their breathing holes. This happened in Niaqonaujang, on Davis Strait, in the fall of 1883. Strong winds came one after another, breaking up the ice. The new ice that formed right away stopped the locals from sealing, and during November and December, the settlement faced a famine. The supply of blubber quickly ran out, and without enough food for the dogs, people were forced to kill them one by one and survive on their frozen bodies. Only two dogs made it through those months of hardship and hunger. As a result, the hunting season was very poor, since the locals were missing their dogs, which can sniff out the breathing holes, and they couldn't travel far from their settlement.
In winter a long spell of bad weather occasions privation, since the hunters are then prevented from leaving the huts. If by chance some one should happen to die during this time, famine is inevitable, for a strict law forbids the performance of any kind of work during the days of mourning. When this time is over, however, or at the beginning of good weather, an ample supply is quickly secured. I do not know of any cases of famine arising from the absolute want of game, but only from the impossibility of reaching it.
In winter, long periods of bad weather lead to hardship because the hunters can't leave their huts. If someone happens to die during this time, starvation is unavoidable since a strict law prohibits any kind of work during mourning days. However, once this period is over or when good weather begins, a good supply of food is quickly obtained. I haven't heard of any famines caused by a total lack of game, but only from the inability to access it.
Sometimes traveling parties that are not acquainted with the nature of the country which they visit are in want of food. For instance, a large company, consisting of three boat crews, were starved on the eastern shore of Fox Basin, their boats being crushed by the heavy ice and the game they expected to find in abundance having left the region altogether. On one of the numerous islands of Nettilling a number of women and children perished, as the men, who had been deer hunting, were unable to find their way back to the place in which they had erected their huts.
Sometimes, traveling groups that are unfamiliar with the area they’re visiting find themselves in need of food. For example, a large group made up of three boat crews faced starvation on the eastern shore of Fox Basin when their boats were crushed by thick ice, and the game they expected to find in abundance had completely left the area. On one of the many islands of Nettilling, several women and children died because the men, who had gone deer hunting, couldn’t find their way back to where they had set up their huts.
Another case of starvation is frequently mentioned by the Eskimo. Some families who were traveling from Akuliaq to Nugumiut passed the isthmus between Hudson Strait and Frobisher Bay. When, after a long and tedious journey, they had reached the sea, the men left 428 their families near Qairoliktung and descended with their kayaks to Nugumiut in order to borrow some boats in which they could bring their families to the settlements. On the way they were detained by stormy weather, and meanwhile the families were starved and resorted to cannibalism. One woman especially, by the name of Megaujang, who ate all her children, was always mentioned with horror.
Another case of starvation is often talked about by the Inuit. Some families traveling from Akuliaq to Nugumiut passed through the isthmus between Hudson Strait and Frobisher Bay. After a long and difficult journey, they reached the sea, and the men left their families near Qairoliktung while they took their kayaks to Nugumiut to borrow some boats that would help bring their families to the settlements. On the way, they were held up by stormy weather, and in the meantime, the families faced starvation and turned to cannibalism. One woman in particular, named Megaujang, who ate all her children, was always mentioned with horror.
Generally food is plentiful between the months of April and October and an ample supply may be secured without extraordinary exertion. During the winter sealing is more difficult, but sufficiently successful to prevent any want, except in the case of continuous bad weather.
Generally, food is abundant between April and October, and a good supply can be obtained without too much effort. In winter, hunting seals is harder, but still successful enough to avoid any shortages, except during prolonged bad weather.
I shall now proceed to a description of the single settlements of Cumberland Sound. Separated from the Nugumiut by a long and uninhabited stretch of land we find the settlement of Naujateling, the most southern one of the Talirpingmiut. In the fall the natives erect their huts on the mainland or on an island near it, as the seal, at this season, resort to the narrow channels and to the fjords. Besides, the shelter which is afforded by the islands against the frequent gales is an important consideration, and in these protected waters the natives can manage their frail boats, which would not live for a moment in the tempestuous open sea. Later in the season the ice consolidates in the shelter of the islands, while beyond the bays and channels drifting floes fill the sea.
I will now describe the individual settlements of Cumberland Sound. Separated from the Nugumiut by a long stretch of uninhabited land, we find the settlement of Naujateling, the southernmost location of the Talirpingmiut. In the fall, the locals set up their huts on the mainland or on a nearby island, as seals tend to gather in the narrow channels and fjords during this time. Additionally, the shelter provided by the islands against frequent storms is a significant factor, allowing the locals to manage their fragile boats in these protected waters, which wouldn’t survive for even a moment in the rough open sea. Later in the season, the ice builds up in the sheltered areas of the islands, while beyond the bays and channels, drifting ice floes fill the ocean.
After the consolidation of the pack ice the natives move their huts to the sea. They leave Naujateling about December and move to Umanaqtuaq. I do not know exactly where they live if the water reaches that island. Should this happen, the floe between Qaχodluin, Umanaqtuaq, and Idjorituaqtuin would offer a productive hunting ground.
After the pack ice settles, the locals move their huts to the sea. They leave Naujateling around December and head to Umanaqtuaq. I'm not sure exactly where they live if the water reaches that island. If it does, the ice between Qaχodluin, Umanaqtuaq, and Idjorituaqtuin would provide a great hunting area.
About the middle of March the season for hunting the young seal opens. The hunt is prosecuted with much energy over the entire extent of Cumberland Sound, because the white coat of the young animal is of prime importance for the inner garments. The pregnant females take to the rough ice, where deep snowbanks have been formed by the winter gales, and dig large excavations, in which parturition takes place. Another favorite place is the ground ice on gradually declining shores, where large caves are found between the broken pieces of ice. Therefore the fjords and islands which offer a long coast line furnish a good hunting ground, and in the latter part of March and in April the Eskimo either visit these regions or the floes of rough ice. At such times they sometimes live for a long period on the ice of the open sea in order to be nearer to their hunting ground. As the success of the hunt depends on the extent of ice visited, the Eskimo scatter over a large area, almost every one traveling over a separate tract.
Around mid-March, the season for hunting young seals begins. The hunt is carried out with great enthusiasm throughout Cumberland Sound because the white fur of the young seals is highly prized for inner garments. Pregnant females make their way to the rough ice, where deep snowdrifts have built up from winter storms, and they create large dens for giving birth. Another popular area is the ground ice along gently sloping shores, where there are big caves between the broken ice. As a result, the fjords and islands with extensive coastlines provide excellent hunting grounds, and in late March and April, the Eskimos either travel to these areas or the rough ice floes. During this time, they sometimes spend extended periods on the ice of the open sea to be closer to their hunting spots. Since the success of the hunt relies on the amount of ice explored, the Eskimos spread out over a wide area, with nearly everyone covering a different section.
At this time the winter settlements are almost totally broken up. 429 Some of the natives of Naujateling go bear hunting instead of “young sealing,” but only a few polar bears lose their way into Cumberland Sound. They are generally found within a few miles of the floe edge, and even if the water reaches pretty far up the sound they do not travel beyond Qaχodluin and Miliqdjuaq, nor does the pack ice carry them far up the sound in summer. On one occasion, in the year 1880, three bears were seen near Qeqerten, about five years earlier one was killed in Qingua, and almost twenty years earlier another one near Anarnitung. Every occurrence of this kind is considered an event of such importance that it is talked about for years afterwards. I myself saw bear tracks in Kouaqdjuaq in March, 1884, and also at Miliqdjuaq. In February a bear was killed between Kautaq and Naujateling.
At this time, the winter settlements are almost completely abandoned. 429 Some of the locals from Naujateling go bear hunting instead of hunting for young seals, but only a few polar bears wander into Cumberland Sound. They are usually found just a few miles from the edge of the ice, and even when the water extends far up the sound, they don’t venture beyond Qaχodluin and Miliqdjuaq, nor does the pack ice carry them far up the sound in summer. Once, in 1880, three bears were spotted near Qeqerten, about five years earlier one was killed in Qingua, and nearly twenty years earlier another one was taken near Anarnitung. Every sighting like this is seen as such a significant event that people talk about it for years. I myself saw bear tracks in Kouaqdjuaq in March 1884, as well as at Miliqdjuaq. In February, a bear was killed between Kautaq and Naujateling.
If the water washes the foot of the cliffs between Kautaq and Sulung, the Eskimo cross the isthmus which lies between Ijelirtung, the eastern branch of Qasigidjen, and Qaχodluin Bay on a sledge road and hunt among the islands that are scattered along the shore south of Qaχodluin. In summer they visit the same region on their hunting excursions.
If the water washes the feet of the cliffs between Kautaq and Sulung, the Eskimo cross the narrow land connection between Ijelirtung, the eastern branch of Qasigidjen, and Qaχodluin Bay on a sledding path and hunt among the islands that are scattered along the shore south of Qaχodluin. In summer, they visit the same area for their hunting trips.
The principal summer settlements are at the head of Qasigidjen and Kangertlung Fjords, which are situated near Idjorituaqtuin and Qimissung.
The main summer settlements are located at the heads of Qasigidjen and Kangertlung Fjords, which are near Idjorituaqtuin and Qimissung.
From here they ascend the plateau of Nugumiut and hunt on the level highlands. I think it takes them but a day to travel to the top of the plateau. They travel from Qasigidjen to Agdlinartung, a fjord of Frobisher Bay, whence the Nugumiut ascend the highland. Another route leads from Kangertlung to Eχaluin, near the head of Frobisher Bay.
From here, they climb up to the Nugumiut plateau and hunt on the flat highlands. I think it only takes them a day to reach the top of the plateau. They travel from Qasigidjen to Agdlinartung, a fjord of Frobisher Bay, where the Nugumiut go up to the highland. Another route goes from Kangertlung to Eχaluin, near the head of Frobisher Bay.
Farther up the sound we find the winter settlement of Idjorituaqtuin. The same relation exists between this place and Qimissung as between Umanaqtuaq and Naujateling. On Qimissung, which lies near the mainland, the natives gather in the fall after returning from deer hunting, and only move to Idjorituaqtuin after the freezing up of the sea. Deer are hunted inland, the summer settlements being at the head of one of the numerous fjords of the west shore. Favorite places are Kangertlung, which is also visited by the Naujateling Eskimo; Eχaluin, which can be reached from Kangertlung by a short overland road; Auqardneling; and Utiqimitung, at the entrance of Nettilling Fjord. A large river, which, according to Eskimo reports, runs through the greater part of the peninsula, empties into Auqardneling. As it is very deep and wide it cannot be crossed without a vessel of some character, and thus it puts a stop to the migrations from Kangertlung and Eχaluin. In traveling from Kangertlung to Frobisher Bay the river must be crossed. To accomplish this the natives fill a deerskin with shrubs, sew it up, and float themselves across. Only the road leading from Qasigidjen to Frobisher Bay avoids the river.
Farther up the sound, we find the winter settlement of Idjorituaqtuin. The same relationship exists between this place and Qimissung as between Umanaqtuaq and Naujateling. In Qimissung, which is close to the mainland, the locals gather in the fall after returning from deer hunting and only move to Idjorituaqtuin after the sea freezes. Deer are hunted inland, with summer settlements located at the head of one of the many fjords along the western shore. Popular spots include Kangertlung, which is also visited by the Naujateling Eskimo; Eχaluin, which can be reached from Kangertlung via a short overland route; Auqardneling; and Utiqimitung, at the entrance of Nettilling Fjord. A large river, which according to Eskimo reports runs through most of the peninsula, flows into Auqardneling. As it is very deep and wide, it cannot be crossed without some kind of vessel, which stops migrations from Kangertlung and Eχaluin. When traveling from Kangertlung to Frobisher Bay, the river must be crossed. To do this, the locals fill a deerskin with shrubs, sew it up, and float themselves across. Only the route from Qasigidjen to Frobisher Bay avoids the river.
North of Idjorituaqtuin we find the winter settlement of Nuvujen with the fall settlement, Nuvujalung, a high cliff at the entrance of Nettilling Fjord, belonging to it.
North of Idjorituaqtuin, we find the winter settlement of Nuvujen, along with the fall settlement, Nuvujalung, which is a high cliff at the entrance of Nettilling Fjord that belongs to it.
By far the most interesting branch of the Talirpingmiut are the inhabitants of Nettilling Fjord. Among all the tribes of Baffin Land this one claims particular attention, as it is the only one whose residence is not limited to the seashore. From Greenland to the mouth of the Mackenzie only two Eskimo tribes are known who do not live all the year round on the coast of the sea. These are the Talirpingmiut and the Kinipetu of Chesterfield Inlet. Back and Anderson and Stewart say that the latter tribe spend a great part of the year at the lakes of Back River.
By far the most interesting group of the Talirpingmiut are the people living in Nettilling Fjord. Among all the tribes in Baffin Land, this one stands out because it’s the only one that doesn’t stay exclusively by the coast. From Greenland to the mouth of the Mackenzie, only two Eskimo tribes are known to not live on the sea year-round. These are the Talirpingmiut and the Kinipetu of Chesterfield Inlet. Back, Anderson, and Stewart mention that the Kinipetu spend much of the year around the lakes of Back River.
Formerly the Talirpingmiut had three or four settlements on Lake Nettilling: at Tikeraqdjung, near the south point of the lake; at the outlet of Koukdjuaq, on the left bank of the river, opposite to Nikosiving Island; at Qarmang; and probably a fourth one, on the north shore. As the lake abounds with seals, they could live here at all seasons. Its western part seems to have been particularly fitted for winter stations. In the winter of 1877-’78, three families staid near Koukdjuaq without encountering any considerable difficulty in procuring food. This was the last time that natives passed the winter at the lake; the greater portion of the tribe may have retreated to Nettilling Fjord about twenty years ago.
Previously, the Talirpingmiut had three or four settlements on Lake Nettilling: at Tikeraqdjung, near the south end of the lake; at the outlet of Koukdjuaq, on the left bank of the river, across from Nikosiving Island; at Qarmang; and possibly a fourth one on the north shore. Since the lake is full of seals, they could live there year-round. The western part of the lake seems to have been especially suitable for winter camps. During the winter of 1877-’78, three families stayed near Koukdjuaq and didn’t have much trouble finding food. This was the last time that natives spent the winter at the lake; most of the tribe likely moved to Nettilling Fjord about twenty years ago.
Though the Eskimo assert that the discovery of Lake Nettilling is of recent date, naming two men, Kadlu and Sagmu, as those who first reached it, this assertion is not trustworthy, for with them almost every historical tradition is supposed to have originated a comparatively short time ago. I was told, for instance, that an event which is the subject of the tale Igimarasugdjuqdjuaq the cannibal occurred at the beginning of this century, and yet the tradition is told almost word for word in Greenland and in Labrador.
Though the Eskimos claim that Lake Nettilling was discovered recently, naming two men, Kadlu and Sagmu, as the first to reach it, this claim isn't reliable. Almost every historical tradition seems to have started around the same time. I was told, for example, that an event featured in the story Igimarasugdjuqdjuaq the cannibal happened at the start of this century, yet the same tradition is recounted nearly word for word in Greenland and Labrador.
Just so with Kadlu and Sagmu. According to the assertion of the natives the lake was discovered by the generation before the last—i.e., about 1810—and yet an old woman about seventy-five years of age told me that her grandfather when a young man, starting from Nettilling, had visited Iglulik and that he had lived on the lake. The customs and habits of the Eskimo would have led to the discovery of the lake very soon after the first visit to Cumberland Sound, and no doubt their attention was then called to the abundance of game in this region.
Just like with Kadlu and Sagmu. According to local accounts, the lake was discovered by the generation before the last—around 1810—and yet an old woman who is about seventy-five years old told me that her grandfather, when he was young, had traveled from Nettilling to Iglulik and lived by the lake. The customs and habits of the Eskimo would have led to the discovery of the lake shortly after the first visit to Cumberland Sound, and it’s likely that their attention was drawn to the abundant game in this area.
The greater part of the natives spent the winter in Nettilling Fjord, starting on their way inland about the beginning of May, and returning to the sea about December. I suppose that cases in which men spent their whole life on the lake were exceptional, for they are referred to by the natives as remarkable events. For instance, a man called Neqsiang, who had two wives, lived on a small island near 431 Koukdjuaq and never descended to Cumberland Sound. A few times only he is said to have sent his son to barter with the Talirpingmiut of Nettilling Fjord. He came to Qarussuit in the spring, but returned after a short stay. It may be remarked here that the total absence of salt does not prevent the natives from staying on Lake Nettilling.
Most of the locals spent the winter in Nettilling Fjord, heading inland around early May and returning to the sea around December. I think cases where people lived their entire lives on the lake were rare, as the locals refer to them as extraordinary occurrences. For example, a man named Neqsiang, who had two wives, lived on a small island near 431 Koukdjuaq and never visited Cumberland Sound. He reportedly only sent his son a few times to trade with the Talirpingmiut of Nettilling Fjord. He came to Qarussuit in the spring but returned after a brief visit. It is worth noting that the complete lack of salt does not stop the locals from staying on Lake Nettilling.
About 1850 the mode of life of the Talirpingmiut was as follows: In November they gathered in Isoa, the easternmost bay of the lake, descended toward the sea, and lived during the following months at the entrance of Nettilling Fjord. There they lived in the same manner as the other Oqomiut, pursuing the seals at their breathing holes. In the spring they hunted young seals; but, when the other natives began to prepare for whaling, they traveled on sledges westward. They avoided the large tide holes of the long fjord by making use of a few passes. Although the fjord is impassable in spring, a safe road leads along its northern shore to its northern branch, Kangertlukdjuaq, where the water hole Sarbaqdualung may be avoided by crossing the land at Tunukutang. In the spring large water holes are formed near Neqemiarbing and at the entrance of Audnerbing, compelling travelers to pass over the island which separates the two passages of Sarbaqdualung. The pass Tunukutang, which is used in winter, consists of a steep and narrow neck of land, which separates a small lake from Kangertlukdjuaq, and a short and winding river, the outlet of the lake. The second tide hole of the fjord may be passed by the branches Qasigidjen and Sarbaqdjukulu and the adjoining flat isthmus. The holes of Qognung, yet farther up the fjord, do not hinder the natives, as they do not occupy the whole width of the floe.
About 1850, the Talirpingmiut’s way of life was like this: In November, they gathered in Isoa, the easternmost bay of the lake, moved toward the sea, and spent the following months at the entrance of Nettilling Fjord. There, they lived similarly to the other Oqomiut, hunting seals at their breathing holes. In the spring, they hunted young seals, but when the other natives started getting ready for whaling, they headed west on sledges. They avoided the big tide holes of the long fjord by using a few passes. Although the fjord is impassable in spring, a safe route runs along its northern shore to its northern branch, Kangertlukdjuaq, where they could avoid the water hole Sarbaqdualung by crossing the land at Tunukutang. In the spring, large water holes form near Neqemiarbing and at the entrance of Audnerbing, forcing travelers to go over the island that separates the two passages of Sarbaqdualung. The Tunukutang pass, used in winter, consists of a steep and narrow stretch of land that separates a small lake from Kangertlukdjuaq, along with a short and winding river that is the lake's outlet. The second tide hole of the fjord can be navigated by the branches Qasigidjen and Sarbaqdjukulu and the adjoining flat isthmus. The holes of Qognung, further up the fjord, don’t block the natives since they don’t cover the entire width of the floe.
At length they reached Kangia, and from here a chain of small lakes was ascended, the watershed Ujaraqdjuin was crossed, and finally they arrived at Amitoq. Cairns are everywhere erected on prominent points for way marks. After they had come to Lake Nettilling, they rested a short time at Isoa, where the skin boats and the necessary household goods had been left the preceding fall. These were lashed upon the sledges and then they traveled as quickly as possible to the west. After following the southeastern shore to Tikeraqdjuaq they crossed the lake to a point near Tikeraqdjung, whence they went along the southern shore of the lake, reaching Koukdjuaq in about a fortnight. Here their tents were established on the left bank of the river, opposite to Nikosiving, where they staid until the breaking up of the ice. Then the men descended the river in their kayaks. Four days they followed the coast, passing the bay of Aggirtijung before they reached Qudjitariaq, a long and deep river, which they ascended. For a few weeks they hunted deer among the lakes of this region, which is called Majoraridjen, and then slowly turned southward. At last, about the latter half of 432 August, they reached Qarmang, where at the beginning of summer the women and old men had arrived in their large boats. Here the whole party stopped until the lake was frozen up. Then they returned on sledges to Isoa and to the sea.
At last, they arrived at Kangia, and from there, they climbed a series of small lakes, crossed the Ujaraqdjuin watershed, and finally reached Amitoq. Cairns were set up everywhere on high points as landmarks. After getting to Lake Nettilling, they took a short break at Isoa, where they had left the skin boats and necessary household items the previous fall. These were secured to the sledges, and then they traveled as fast as they could to the west. After following the southeastern shore to Tikeraqdjuaq, they crossed the lake to a spot near Tikeraqdjung, where they proceeded along the southern shore of the lake and arrived at Koukdjuaq in about two weeks. Here, they set up their tents on the left bank of the river, across from Nikosiving, where they stayed until the ice began to break up. Then, the men navigated down the river in their kayaks. They spent four days following the coast, passing the bay of Aggirtijung before reaching Qudjitariaq, a long and deep river, which they then ascended. For a few weeks, they hunted deer among the lakes in this area known as Majoraridjen, before slowly heading south. Finally, in the latter half of 432 August, they arrived at Qarmang, where, at the beginning of summer, the women and older men had arrived in their large boats. The whole group stayed here until the lake froze over. Then, they returned on sledges to Isoa and then to the sea.
It would be very interesting to learn how far the natives formerly extended their migrations along the shore of Fox Basin and whether a regular intercourse existed between Iglulik and Cumberland Sound. According to reports of some old Eskimo, who had themselves passed the winter on the lake, there was always a small settlement at Qarmang. From here the shore of Fox Basin was reached with great ease. If, however, the route through Koukdjuaq had to be taken, a long, roundabout way was necessary. According to all reports, even in olden times expeditions to Iglulik were very rare. It is said that one was made about 1750 by a party under the leadership of an Eskimo, Makulu. About 1800 another party left, in which Kotuko assumed the leadership. About these a more detailed account exists. With a few boats and four kayaks they left Nettilling and followed the coast. Alone in his kayak, Kotuko visited Sagdlirn, an island east of Iglulik, but he did not see any people, as they were on a hunting excursion. He found one hut and a large dog. There were a great number of deerskins and walrus tusks, which proved the existence of an abundance of game. He returned, but on account of the prevailing fog could scarcely find his kayak. The absence of the party is said to have lasted three years.
It would be really interesting to find out how far the locals used to migrate along the shore of Fox Basin and whether there was regular contact between Iglulik and Cumberland Sound. According to some old Eskimos who spent the winter on the lake, there was always a small settlement at Qarmang. From there, it was easy to reach the shore of Fox Basin. However, if the route through Koukdjuaq was necessary, it meant taking a long, roundabout way. All reports suggest that even back in the day, trips to Iglulik were quite rare. It’s said that one was made around 1750 by a group led by an Eskimo named Makulu. Another group, led by Kotuko, set out around 1800. There’s more detailed information about them. With a few boats and four kayaks, they left Nettilling and followed the coast. Kotuko, alone in his kayak, visited Sagdlirn, an island east of Iglulik, but he didn’t see anyone because they were out hunting. He found one hut and a large dog. There were a lot of deerskins and walrus tusks, which indicated there was plenty of game. He returned but had a tough time finding his kayak due to the thick fog. The group was reportedly gone for three years.
About 1820 another party left for Iglulik, among whom two women, Amaroq and Sigjeriaq, were the most prominent. When they returned, after an absence of three years, they praised the country (Piling), where they had spent some time, as a land of plenty and abundance, and by these tales, in 1835, induced three boat crews to leave Nettilling in order to visit this happy land. They were grievously disappointed and after many misfortunes they perished on the narrow isthmus of Ipiuting. Their bodies were found by the Iglulik Eskimo, who related that the poor fellows had resorted to cannibalism. Among those who perished was a sister of the famous Hannah (Taqulitu), the companion of Hall in his travels in the Arctic. I must mention here that Hall, in 1868, met a native at Iglulik who was said to belong to Cumberland Sound. As, however, in Iglulik Cumberland Sound and Davis Strait are often confounded, I am inclined to think he was a native of the latter region.
About 1820, another group set out for Iglulik, among whom two women, Amaroq and Sigjeriaq, stood out the most. When they returned after being gone for three years, they spoke highly of the land (Piling), where they had spent some time, describing it as a place of plenty and abundance. Their stories encouraged three boat crews to leave Nettilling in 1835 to explore this promising land. They were met with severe disappointment and, after many struggles, they died on the narrow isthmus of Ipiuting. The Iglulik Eskimo found their bodies and reported that the unfortunate men had resorted to cannibalism. Among those who died was a sister of the famous Hannah (Taqulitu), who was Hall's companion in his Arctic travels. I should also mention that Hall met a native at Iglulik in 1868, who was reported to come from Cumberland Sound. However, since people often confuse Cumberland Sound and Davis Strait in Iglulik, I lean towards believing he was from the latter region.
From these facts it appears that a regular intercourse between the tribes along the shore of Fox Basin never existed, though formerly interviews were more frequent than they are at present. Since the last mentioned expedition no Eskimo has visited Piling, nor have any gone by the way of Lake Nettilling to Iglulik. Accordingly the ideas of the Oqomiut about that region are very indefinite. An old man 433 was the only person whom I could find who knew Iglulik by name and remembered Ingnirn and Piling, two places which had been inhabited by many Eskimo. He mentioned another inhabited region beyond Iglulik, Augpalugtijung, which I was not able to identify. It was described as a large peninsula.
From these facts, it seems that there was never consistent contact between the tribes along the shore of Fox Basin, even though meetings were more common in the past than they are now. Since the last mentioned expedition, no Eskimo has visited Piling, nor have any traveled via Lake Nettilling to Iglulik. As a result, the Oqomiut's understanding of that area is quite vague. An old man 433 was the only person I could find who knew Iglulik by name and remembered Ingnirn and Piling, two locations that had been home to many Eskimo. He also mentioned another inhabited area beyond Iglulik, Augpalugtijung, which I couldn't identify. It was described as a large peninsula.
It is worth remarking that the Talirpingmiut seem never to have traveled over the country south of Koukdjuaq. I have not even heard mentioned a single hunting excursion made in this direction.
It’s notable that the Talirpingmiut never seem to have traveled through the area south of Koukdjuaq. I haven’t even heard of a single hunting trip taken in that direction.
In the foregoing paragraphs I have described the mode of life of the greater part of the Talirpingmiut. Still another part staid in Cumberland Sound until the ice had gone and went away in the latter half of July. The passage through the rapids of the fjords was very dangerous, as in the whirlpools and overfalls the bulky boats were easily capsized. Therefore the changing of the tides had to be considered in order to effect a safe passage. The men preferred carrying the kayaks over the passes in order to avoid the dangers imminent to their frail crafts. Even up to this day tradition tells of a disaster which happened when the stubborn owner of a boat, against the warning of his friends, tried to pass Sarbaqdualung when the spring tide was running swiftly. The boat was upset and the crew were drowned, with the exception of one woman, who was saved on a bundle of deerskins.
In the previous paragraphs, I described the lifestyle of most of the Talirpingmiut. Another group stayed in Cumberland Sound until the ice melted and left in the second half of July. The passage through the rapids of the fjords was very risky because the heavy boats could easily capsize in the whirlpools and overfalls. So, they had to consider the changing tides to make a safe trip. The men preferred to carry the kayaks over the passes to avoid the dangers posed to their fragile crafts. Even today, there's a tale about a disaster that happened when a stubborn boat owner, ignoring his friends' warnings, tried to navigate Sarbaqdualung during the swift spring tide. The boat capsized, and the crew drowned, except for one woman who was rescued on a bundle of deerskins.
From Kangia boats had to be carried over the portages Igpirto, Igpirtousirn, and Ujaraqdjuin. The rapids of Angmartung were also avoided by a portage over the level bottom of the valley. After passing Taquirbing, Lake Nettilling was reached, on the shore of which the huts were erected. In the fall the party returned before the beginning of the cold season. It has been already mentioned that only a few of the natives staid at the lake during the entire year, and even among these there were some who descended to the sea in March to take part in the young sealing, for the skins of the young seal cannot be altogether replaced by deerskins.
From Kangia, boats had to be carried over the portages Igpirto, Igpirtousirn, and Ujaraqdjuin. The rapids of Angmartung were also avoided by portaging over the flat bottom of the valley. After passing Taquirbing, Lake Nettilling was reached, where huts were built along the shore. In the fall, the group returned before the cold season began. It has already been noted that only a few of the locals stayed at the lake throughout the year, and even among these, some went down to the sea in March to take part in the young sealing, since the skins of the young seals can't fully be replaced by deerskins.
At the present time it is exceptional for any one to remain inland during the entire year. There may be seals enough in the lake to prevent hunger or starvation, but they are taken much more easily from the sea. In case of a lack of blubber, deer’s marrow may be used for fuel. It is probable that the high mortality of recent years has induced the Eskimo to band together more closely than they formerly did and to adopt the plan of returning to Nettilling Fjord at the beginning of winter. In the fall the boats and other articles which are of no use in winter are left in Isoa, and some time is spent in Kangia, where snow houses are built. Here the kayaks are left, and in December, when the sealing begins to be more successful near the sound, the Eskimo turn to the entrance of Nettilling Fjord, where Tininiqdjuaq and Neqemiarbing are favorite places. Seals are hunted there with the harpoon in the same way as in the other settlements 434 or Sarbaqdualung is visited for the purpose of shooting seals which frequent the tide holes. This, however, is not a favorite way of hunting, as the ice near the tide holes is very rough and treacherous.
Currently, it's uncommon for anyone to stay inland for the entire year. There might be enough seals in the lake to avoid hunger or starvation, but they're much easier to catch from the sea. If there’s a shortage of blubber, deer marrow can be used as fuel. It's likely that the high death rates in recent years have led the Eskimo to come together more closely than before and adopt the strategy of returning to Nettilling Fjord at the beginning of winter. In the fall, boats and other items that aren’t useful in winter are left in Isoa, and some time is spent in Kangia, where snow houses are built. The kayaks are left there, and in December, when sealing becomes more successful near the sound, the Eskimo head toward the entrance of Nettilling Fjord, where Tininiqdjuaq and Neqemiarbing are popular spots. Seals are hunted there with harpoons just like in other settlements or Sarbaqdualung is visited to shoot seals that gather around the tide holes. However, this isn't a preferred hunting method, as the ice near the tide holes is very rough and dangerous. 434
In March and April young seals are caught on the shores of the numerous islands between Tininiqdjuaq and Nuvujalung, and at the same time the old settlements are left, as large water holes begin to appear. Qarussuit and Qingaseareang are the favorite places about this time of the year.
In March and April, young seals are caught on the shores of the many islands between Tininiqdjuaq and Nuvujalung. At the same time, the older settlements are abandoned as big water holes start to form. Qarussuit and Qingaseareang are the preferred spots during this time of year.
As soon as the young sealing is finished the hunt of the basking seal is opened, which is very successful here. Nowhere else did I see such large numbers of animals enjoying the warmth of the sun as in Nettilling Fjord. In April, when on the east shore scarcely any dared to leave the water, hundreds might be seen here. By the first of May all the natives have procured a sufficient number of sealskins for their summer dress, the skins being then in the best condition, as the first moulting has just occurred. This done, they eagerly prepare for the journey to the lake.
As soon as the young seal hunt wraps up, the hunt for basking seals begins, and it’s really successful here. I’ve never seen so many animals soaking up the sun anywhere else as I have in Nettilling Fjord. In April, while hardly anyone on the east shore would venture out of the water, hundreds could be spotted here. By May 1st, all the locals have gathered enough seal skins for their summer clothing since the skins are in prime condition after the first shedding. With that taken care of, they excitedly get ready for the journey to the lake.
The natives start in the first week of May, and in two or three days arrive at Kangia, whence they reach Isoa in one day’s journey. Following the southern shore of Lake Nettilling they sleep the first night on Tikeraqdjuausirn, the second on the island Manirigtung, near Tikeraqdjuaq, and five days after leaving Qarussuit arrive at Tikeraqdjung, where they settle for the summer. As numerous deer are found in this region, they live without any care or trouble. Very soon after their arrival the birds return. While moulting great quantities of these are caught. The geese are so abundant here that they are fed to the dogs. Many deer are caught while passing the deep river which runs from Lake Amaqdjuaq to Lake Nettilling. Frequently they visit the southern plains, which are filled with lakes and lakelets. Sometimes they go as far as Amaqdjuaq, which, as the older natives report, was formerly a summer settlement.
The natives set off in the first week of May, and within two or three days, they reach Kangia, then make it to Isoa in just one day. Following the southern shore of Lake Nettilling, they spend the first night at Tikeraqdjuausirn, the second on the island of Manirigtung, near Tikeraqdjuaq, and five days after leaving Qarussuit, they arrive at Tikeraqdjung, where they settle for the summer. There are plenty of deer in this area, so they live without much worry. Shortly after arriving, the birds come back. During their molting season, they catch a large number of them. The geese are so plentiful here that they're even given to the dogs. Many deer are caught while crossing the deep river that flows from Lake Amaqdjuaq to Lake Nettilling. They often visit the southern plains, which are filled with lakes and smaller bodies of water. Occasionally, they venture as far as Amaqdjuaq, which, according to older natives, was once a summer settlement.
In the river whose outlet is near Padli salmon are caught in abundance. In this district the Talirpingmiut stay until the eastern part of the lake is frozen over.
In the river that flows out near Padli, salmon are caught in large numbers. The Talirpingmiut people stay in this area until the eastern part of the lake freezes over.
In the shelter of the islands the floe is more quickly formed than in the open water of the western part, and in November the natives return by sledges to Isoa.
In the protection of the islands, the ice forms faster than in the open waters of the western area, and in November, the locals head back to Isoa using sleds.
As they take with them heavy loads of deerskins they make very slow progress and generally arrive at their place of destination after six days of traveling. Sometimes they make a short trip to Isoa in March or April to hunt deer or to look for the things which were left behind in Kangia and Isoa at the time of their last departure.
As they carry heavy loads of deerskins, they move very slowly and usually reach their destination after six days of travel. Sometimes they take a quick trip to Isoa in March or April to hunt deer or to search for items they left behind in Kangia and Isoa during their last departure.
Besides the Talirpingmiut quite a number of Cumberland Sound natives visit the lake by means of boats. They cross the sound after the breaking up of the ice and go to Nettilling, carrying the boats over the portages between Kangia and Isoa. As the Talirpingmiut 435 have no boats they stay at Tikeraqdjuaq; the other natives, however, sometimes change their habitations and even visit Qarmang and the north shore of the lake. These journeys, however, are rare, for in the eastern part an inexhaustible supply of food may be obtained; therefore long excursions are quite unnecessary. At the beginning of October the boats leave the lake and the natives return to the fall settlements in the sound.
Besides the Talirpingmiut, quite a few natives from Cumberland Sound visit the lake by boat. They cross the sound after the ice breaks up and go to Nettilling, carrying the boats over the portages between Kangia and Isoa. Since the Talirpingmiut 435 don't have boats, they stay at Tikeraqdjuaq; however, the other natives sometimes move to different places and even visit Qarmang and the north shore of the lake. These trips are rare, though, because in the eastern part there's an endless supply of food available; thus, long excursions aren't really necessary. At the beginning of October, the boats leave the lake and the natives return to their fall settlements in the sound.
Nettilling Fjord, with its numerous islands, forms the northern boundary of Talirpia. Farther north we come to Qingua, the head of Tiniqdjuarbing (Cumberland Sound). It extends from Imigen to Ussualung. The winter settlement on the island of Imigen is situated in the midst of one of the best winter hunting grounds, for the southern portion of the island, on which the huts are erected, projects far out into the sea. The hunt is often rendered somewhat difficult by the rough ice which is due to the strong currents between Pujetung, Imigen, and Nettilling Fjord. Towards spring the natives sometimes resort to a place yet nearer the open sea, the largest island of the Pujetung group. Young seals are caught near Imigen, at the Kilauting Islands, and in Qaggilortung. This district, however, cannot be visited every year, as almost every spring the whole area west of a line from Imigen to Anarnitung is covered with very deep and soft snow, which prevents the Eskimo from using their dog sledges. When this condition prevails the natives settle on the sea ice between Augpalugtung and Imigen, or a little farther north, and remain there from the middle of March until the latter part of April.
Nettilling Fjord, with its many islands, marks the northern boundary of Talirpia. Further north is Qingua, the head of Tiniqdjuarbing (Cumberland Sound). It stretches from Imigen to Ussualung. The winter settlement on Imigen is located in one of the best winter hunting areas, as the southern part of the island, where the huts are built, extends far into the sea. Hunting can be a bit tricky because of the rough ice caused by strong currents between Pujetung, Imigen, and Nettilling Fjord. As spring approaches, the locals sometimes go to a spot even closer to the open sea, on the largest island of the Pujetung group. Young seals are hunted near Imigen, at the Kilauting Islands, and in Qaggilortung. However, this area isn’t accessible every year, as almost every spring, the whole region west of a line from Imigen to Anarnitung gets covered with deep, soft snow, making it impossible for the Eskimo to use their dog sleds. When this happens, the locals settle on the sea ice between Augpalugtung and Imigen, or a bit further north, and stay there from mid-March until late April.
These natives go deer hunting either to Issortuqdjuaq—where they live at Eχaluaqdjuin, Sirmiling, or Midlurieling—or to Eχaluqdjuaq, near Ussualung, where they hunt in the hilly land adjoining the ice-covered Penny Plateau. As the land farther northwest is said to consist of irregular hills and disconnected valleys, the skins and the meat of the killed deer would have to be carried up and down hills before the settlement was reached. Therefore the natives dislike hunting in this part of the country.
These natives go deer hunting either to Issortuqdjuaq—where they live at Eχaluaqdjuin, Sirmiling, or Midlurieling—or to Eχaluqdjuaq, near Ussualung, where they hunt in the hilly areas next to the ice-covered Penny Plateau. Since the land further northwest is described as having uneven hills and scattered valleys, they would have to carry the skins and meat of the deer up and down hills before reaching their settlement. Because of this, the natives prefer not to hunt in that region.
Eχaluaqdjuin and Eχaluqdjuaq, as is denoted by the names, are productive salmon rivers. In starting from the former and ascending a narrow valley, Lake Eχoleaqdjuin is reached, whence a pass leads to the valley adjoining Eχaluaqdjuin. Taking another road the long Lake Imeraqdjuaq is reached, which borders upon the glaciers of the highland. From here, after a four days’ tramp following a large river, the traveler comes to Midlurieling. From Issortuqdjuaq a narrow isthmus offering a good sledging road is used in visiting the head of Qaggilortung. Another route, which is suitable only for foot passengers, leads by a chain of lakes to the head of Kangertlukdjuaq. It is not necessary to enumerate the overland routes in this district, as numerous valleys permit the traveler to pass from the east to the west and from the south to the 436 north. In the fall the natives resort to Saunirtung or to Saunirtuqdjuaq, two islands northwest of Imigen, where they stay until January, when they return to the sea.
Eχaluaqdjuin and Eχaluqdjuaq, as their names suggest, are productive salmon rivers. Starting from the former and going up a narrow valley, you reach Lake Eχoleaqdjuin, where a pass leads to the valley next to Eχaluaqdjuin. Taking another path, you arrive at the long Lake Imeraqdjuaq, which borders the glaciers of the highland. From here, after a four-day hike along a large river, travelers reach Midlurieling. From Issortuqdjuaq, a narrow isthmus providing a good sledding trail is used to visit the head of Qaggilortung. Another route, which is only suitable for pedestrians, leads by a chain of lakes to the head of Kangertlukdjuaq. It’s not necessary to list all the overland routes in this area, as numerous valleys allow travelers to move from east to west and from south to north. In the fall, the locals go to Saunirtung or Saunirtuqdjuaq, two islands northwest of Imigen, where they stay until January, when they return to the sea.
The second settlement of the Qinguamiut is Anarnitung, at the northern entrance of Qaggilortung. The small island and the neighboring point of Igdlungajung are, next to Qeqerten, the seat of the most important settlement of Cumberland Sound. On the southern and eastern declivity of the low hills which form this island are a number of very old stone foundations (see p. 549), such as are found everywhere on the Arctic shores of North America (Baffin-Land, p. 77).
The second settlement of the Qinguamiut is Anarnitung, located at the northern entrance of Qaggilortung. The small island and the nearby point of Igdlungajung are, after Qeqerten, the main site of the most significant settlement in Cumberland Sound. On the southern and eastern slopes of the low hills that make up this island, there are several very old stone foundations (see p. 549), similar to those found all over the Arctic shores of North America (Baffin-Land, p. 77).
If the ice in the upper parts of the sound is smooth, families belonging to this community settle on Kilauting, the largest island of a group running from northwest to southeast a few miles north of Imigen. Here they go sealing with the harpoon. If the ice, however, is rough (as it happened to be during my stay in Cumberland Sound), they remain in Anarnitung, whence some go to the water holes at the entrance of Issortuqdjuaq and shoot the blowing seals, while others go hunting on the ice near Anarnitung.
If the ice in the upper parts of the sound is smooth, families from this community settle on Kilauting, the largest island in a group that stretches from northwest to southeast a few miles north of Imigen. Here, they go sealing with harpoons. However, if the ice is rough (as it was during my time in Cumberland Sound), they stay in Anarnitung. From there, some head to the water holes at the entrance of Issortuqdjuaq to shoot the seals that are surfacing, while others go hunting on the ice near Anarnitung.
During the young sealing season they almost always leave the island. The favorite resort at this season is Sakiaqdjung, near Manituling, in Qaggilortung, but heavy snowfalls often compel them to exchange this region for the open sea. If they insist upon stopping there, snowshoes are used as the only means of traveling in the deep and soft snow. In 1878, when the Florence wintered in Anarnitung Harbor, the greater part of the natives remained near the ship; but her presence is accountable for this exception, as some of the families were in her service and others staid near her in order to barter seals, skins, &c.
During the young sealing season, they almost always leave the island. The favorite spot during this time is Sakiaqdjung, close to Manituling, in Qaggilortung, but heavy snowfall often forces them to swap this area for the open sea. If they choose to stay there, they use snowshoes as the only way to travel through the deep, soft snow. In 1878, when the Florence spent the winter in Anarnitung Harbor, most of the locals stayed close to the ship; however, her presence explains this exception since some families were working for her while others stayed nearby to trade seals, skins, etc.
Of some importance are the passes leading around the numerous water holes at the head of Cumberland Sound. The narrow island of Nudnirn, which separates Sarbuqdjuaq from Putukin, offers a good passage by way of a deep valley. Should the passage be made in a mild winter or in spring, when the water holes of Sarbuqdjuaq have enlarged, they must avoid the latter by passing over the inconvenient isthmus of Itidliaping, west of the steep cliff Naujan.
Of some importance are the routes around the many water holes at the head of Cumberland Sound. The narrow island of Nudnirn, which separates Sarbuqdjuaq from Putukin, provides a good passage through a deep valley. If the passage is taken during a mild winter or in spring, when the water holes of Sarbuqdjuaq have expanded, travelers should avoid it by going over the inconvenient isthmus of Itidliaping, west of the steep cliff Naujan.
In spring the tide holes of Kangidliuta extend over the passage between that island and Surosirn, preventing sledges from passing to Issortuqdjuaq or to Tessiujang. Then Qaχodlualung is crossed by the way of Naqoreang or the more southerly Tappitariaq, which leads into the sound near Siegtung. Both passes are very inconvenient. From Tessiujang, Issortuqdjuaq may be reached by the fjords Ugjuktung and Itijareling and by the adjoining passes.
In spring, the tide holes of Kangidliuta cover the route between that island and Surosirn, blocking sledges from getting to Issortuqdjuaq or Tessiujang. At that time, you can cross Qaχodlualung via Naqoreang or the more southern Tappitariaq, which connects to the sound near Siegtung. Both routes are quite inconvenient. From Tessiujang, you can reach Issortuqdjuaq through the fjords Ugjuktung and Itijareling, along with the nearby passes.
Lastly, I have to mention the road formerly used by the natives of Anarnitung in traveling to Nettilling. They crossed the entrance of Qaggilortung and ascended Tarrionitung, whence they came by the Lakes Qamusiojodlang and Irtiujang to Missirtung, in Nettilling 437 Fjord, thus avoiding a much longer journey around the large peninsula projecting to the eastward. A similar pass farther east connects Tornait and Kangertlukjuaq.
Lastly, I have to mention the route once used by the locals of Anarnitung to get to Nettilling. They crossed the entrance of Qaggilortung and climbed Tarrionitung, from where they traveled by the lakes Qamusiojodlang and Irtiujang to Missirtung, in Nettilling 437 Fjord, thus skipping a much longer trip around the large peninsula that extends to the east. A similar path farther east connects Tornait and Kangertlukjuaq.
The ruins of a third settlement of the Qinguamiut are found at Tulukan on Qeqertelung.
The remains of a third settlement of the Qinguamiut can be found at Tulukan on Qeqertelung.
The next subtribe to be treated is the Kingnaitmiut, who are now located exclusively upon Qeqerten. Formerly they lived in several places—for instance, near Pangnirtung and on Miliaqdjuin—but for a long time they have gathered on Qeqerten, as two whaling stations are established here, many natives being in the service of the whalers. The island is the largest settlement of the sound. It is a favorite resort during the fall and the first part of winter. In November and December, before the ice of the sound consolidates, the ice east of the islands is the best hunting ground. Later that west of the islands is preferred. There is one disadvantage peculiar to Qeqerten which is not shared by the other settlements, namely, the fohn-like winds which often blow for many days from Kingnait Fjord with irresistible violence. These confine the natives to their huts, though a few miles north or south calm weather prevails. Should fair weather ensue, the snow, which has been firmly packed by these gales, affords a good hunting ground; but if, on the other hand, long spells of bad weather follow, want and hunger may be the result. The young seals are eagerly pursued all about Qeqerten.
The next group we'll talk about is the Kingnaitmiut, who now live exclusively on Qeqerten. They used to inhabit several places, like near Pangnirtung and on Miliaqdjuin, but for a long time now, they’ve gathered on Qeqerten, where there are two whaling stations and many locals work for the whalers. The island is the largest settlement in the area. It's a popular spot during the fall and early winter. In November and December, before the ice in the sound freezes solid, the ice east of the islands is the best place for hunting. Later, the area west of the islands becomes more favorable. One downside unique to Qeqerten, which other settlements don’t have, is the fohn-like winds that often blow for days from Kingnait Fjord with overwhelming force. These winds can keep the locals stuck in their huts, even though calm weather exists just a few miles north or south. If nice weather comes, the snow that has been compressed by these strong winds provides good hunting opportunities; however, if bad weather lingers, it can lead to hunger and scarcity. Young seals are hunted eagerly all around Qeqerten.
In Pangnirtung and in the little valley Niutang, in Kingnait, well up in these fjords, are the ruins of two large, ancient settlements. The conditions which formerly enabled the natives to live here will be mentioned later.
In Pangnirtung and in the small Niutang valley, in Kingnait, deep within these fjords, are the remains of two large, ancient settlements. The factors that once allowed the natives to thrive here will be discussed later.
The Kingnaitmiut go deer hunting to Kitingujang, at the head of Kingnait Fjord; to Nirdlirn, in the bay behind Augpalugtung and Sednirun; to Pangnirtung; or to the more southern fjords Eχaluaqdjuin and Kangertlukdjuaq.
The Kingnaitmiut go deer hunting to Kitingujang, at the head of Kingnait Fjord; to Nirdlirn, in the bay behind Augpalugtung and Sednirun; to Pangnirtung; or to the more southern fjords Eχaluaqdjuin and Kangertlukdjuaq.
I shall describe the districts occupied by the Kingnaitmiut, Saumingmiut, and Padlimiut together, as they all bear a uniform character.
I will describe the areas occupied by the Kingnaitmiut, Saumingmiut, and Padlimiut together, since they all have a similar character.
From Nirdlirn the mountains of Ussualung or the highland near Ukiuqdjuaq are visited. The same country is traveled over from Pangnirtung, where the settlement is established either above Qordlubing or opposite Aulitiving. The deep valley, with its numerous glaciers, adjoining Pangnirtung and connecting Cumberland Sound and Davis Strait is rarely visited.
From Nirdlirn, the mountains of Ussualung or the highlands near Ukiuqdjuaq can be explored. The same region is accessed from Pangnirtung, where the settlement is located either above Qordlubing or across from Aulitiving. The deep valley, with its many glaciers, next to Pangnirtung and linking Cumberland Sound and Davis Strait, is seldom visited.
The favorite place for the settlement is Kitingujang in Kingnait. In the river which empties here many salmon are caught, and the declivities of the neighboring highlands, which are less steep than those of Pangnirtung, afford ample opportunity for long hunting excursions. Deer are found on the mountains, for here they escape 438 the mosquitoes which swarm in the valleys. The natives do not go beyond Padli, but most of them have been there. They often travel through the valleys of Nerseqdjuaq and Tunussung to Pangnirtung, of Davis Strait, down the eastern shore of which they go a considerable distance. Sometimes they make boat excursions during the summer from Kitingujang, visiting the brooks which empty into Kingnait Fjord, or they settle in Tornait, whence Tupirbikdjuin in Pangnirtung is accessible by the wide valleys surrounding Angiuqaq.
The main settlement area is Kitingujang in Kingnait. Many salmon are caught in the river that flows here, and the slopes of the nearby highlands, which are less steep than those in Pangnirtung, provide plenty of opportunities for long hunting trips. Deer can be found on the mountains, where they can escape the mosquitoes that swarm in the valleys. The locals don’t go beyond Padli, but most of them have been there. They frequently travel through the valleys of Nerseqdjuaq and Tunussung to reach Pangnirtung, located along the eastern shore of Davis Strait, where they travel quite a distance. Sometimes, they take boat trips during the summer from Kitingujang, visiting the streams that flow into Kingnait Fjord, or they settle in Tornait, from which Tupirbikdjuin in Pangnirtung is accessible through the wide valleys surrounding Angiuqaq.
I may omit the description of the separate summer habitations farther south, for the head of every fjord and every valley that is a means of reaching the interior are used for erecting the tents. The interior of the region, which is covered with ice, remains unvisited, no game being found there. Therefore it may be said in general that the Eskimo are limited to the peninsulas formed by the numerous fjords.
I might skip describing the separate summer homes farther south because every fjord and valley leading into the interior is used for setting up tents. The interior, which is covered in ice, is untouched since there's no game there. So, it's safe to say that, in general, the Eskimo are confined to the peninsulas created by the many fjords.
The Saumingmiut visit the southern fjords of Cumberland Peninsula, where I have marked the settlements on the chart. Here they pursue deer and polar bears, which frequently come down to Cape Mercy during the summer.
The Saumingmiut travel to the southern fjords of Cumberland Peninsula, where I've marked the settlements on the map. Here, they hunt deer and polar bears, which often come down to Cape Mercy in the summer.
An important summer settlement of the Saumingmiut is Touaqdjuaq, from which place they visit the peninsula limited by Exeter Sound and Touaqdjuaq. An important summer station of both Saumingmiut and Padlimiut is Qarmaqdjuin, while Eχaloaping (Durban Harbor of the whalers), near the entrance of Padli, is visited only by the latter tribe.
An important summer settlement of the Saumingmiut is Touaqdjuaq, from which they visit the peninsula bounded by Exeter Sound and Touaqdjuaq. A key summer location for both the Saumingmiut and Padlimiut is Qarmaqdjuin, while Eχaloaping (Durban Harbor of the whalers), near the entrance of Padli, is only visited by the Padlimiut tribe.
The number of deer on Cumberland Peninsula is so variable that the result of the hunt is often unsatisfactory. Although in some seasons numerous herds are met, in others scarcely enough animals are killed to afford a sufficient stock of skins for the winter clothing. Early in the spring the deer pass quite regularly through Itidlirn (the lower part of Padli Valley, between Ikaroling and Padli), in their migrations from Narpaing to Qarmaqdjuin. I was told that in both the latter districts many deer can be found at all times.
The number of deer on Cumberland Peninsula varies so much that the outcome of the hunt is often disappointing. While there are some seasons when you come across numerous herds, in others, not enough animals are taken to provide a decent supply of skins for winter clothing. Early in the spring, the deer regularly pass through Itidlirn (the lower part of Padli Valley, between Ikaroling and Padli) during their migration from Narpaing to Qarmaqdjuin. I was informed that in both of those areas, many deer can be found all year round.
Lastly, I have to describe the winter settlements of the Saumingmiut. They are in the habit of separating in the fall, part of them staying during winter on Qeqertaujang, in Ugjuktung, and the remainder at Ukiadliving, on Davis Strait.
Lastly, I need to describe the winter settlements of the Saumingmiut. They usually split up in the fall, with some staying during the winter on Qeqertaujang, in Ugjuktung, and the rest at Ukiadliving, on Davis Strait.
Strange as it may seem, walrus are not found in the upper part of the sound, while farther south they are abundant. Akuliaχating, east of Qeqerten, is the most northern point that they visit. It is said that in former times they were met with everywhere in the sound, and indeed some of the local names give evidence of the truth of these traditions; for instance, the name of Uglirn (which is always applied to walrus islands), in the fjord Qaggilortung, and that of Anarnitung (a place having a bad smell from walrus excrement), at the head of the sound.
Strange as it may seem, walruses aren't found in the upper part of the sound, but they're abundant further south. Akuliaχating, east of Qeqerten, is the northernmost point they visit. It's said that in the past, they were everywhere in the sound, and some local names support these stories; for example, the name Uglirn (which is always used for walrus islands), in the fjord Qaggilortung, and Anarnitung (a place that has a bad smell from walrus excrement), at the head of the sound.
Before Cumberland Sound begins to freeze up, the Eskimo of Ugjuktung take walrus on the islands Uglirn, south of Qeqertaujang, and at Qeqertaq in Anartuajuin. The animals killed during the fall are buried under stones, and with this stock of provisions the Saumingmiut do not suffer want during the winter. In addition, however, they go sealing at the entrance of Ugjuktung, or travel overland to Kangertloaping, a branch of Kouaqdjuaq, as Nuvukdjuaq is almost always washed by water and cannot be passed in winter. The young sealing is here of little importance, as the bears visit the fjords about this season and frighten the animals away. In March the natives go bear hunting or move up the sound to join the Kingnaitmiut during the time of young sealing. In the spring the settlement is always abandoned, as most of them go to Davis Strait and join the other part of the tribe. Crossing the country, they travel over a pass leading from Anartuajuin to Ujaradjiraaitjung.
Before Cumberland Sound starts to freeze, the Inuit of Ugjuktung hunt walrus on the islands Uglirn, south of Qeqertaujang, and at Qeqertaq in Anartuajuin. The animals they kill in the fall are buried under stones, and with this supply of food, the Saumingmiut don't go hungry during the winter. Additionally, they go sealing at the entrance of Ugjuktung or travel overland to Kangertloaping, since Nuvukdjuaq is almost always flooded and can't be crossed in winter. The young seals here aren’t very important because the bears frequent the fjords around this time and scare the animals away. In March, the locals go bear hunting or head up the sound to join the Kingnaitmiut during the young sealing season. In the spring, the settlement is always deserted as most of them head to Davis Strait to join the other part of the tribe. Crossing the land, they travel over a pass that connects Anartuajuin to Ujaradjiraaitjung.
The favorite settlement on the east coast is Ukiadliving. There are several stone foundations in this place which are frequently reconstructed and used as dwellings. Here walrus are hunted in the summer and in the fall and a great stock of provisions is laid up. In winter the floe offers a good hunting ground for sealing and in the spring the bears visit the land and the islands to pursue the pupping (i.e., pregnant or parturient) seals. At the same time the she bear brings forth her young, the meat and skin of which are highly prized. Many old bears and cubs are killed at this season and the precious skins are prepared for sale.
The favorite settlement on the east coast is Ukiadliving. There are several stone foundations in this area that are often rebuilt and used as homes. Here, walrus are hunted during the summer and fall, and a large supply of food is gathered. In winter, the ice provides a good hunting spot for seals, and in spring, bears come to the land and islands to hunt for mother seals with their pups. At the same time, the female bears give birth to their young, which are highly valued for their meat and skin. Many adult bears and cubs are caught during this season, and the valuable skins are prepared for sale.
Besides the beforementioned route another and longer one leads to Cumberland Sound. In taking this course the sledges start from Nedluqseaq, west of Ukiadliving, and follow a river which rises in a small lake whence the inland ice is ascended. Farther on the valley leading to Eχaluaqdjuin and Kangertlukdjuaq is reached. This is the only overland route on which the inland ice is crossed. Cape Mercy can be passed by a number of short isthmuses. In the shelter of the bay formed by the cape and Muingmang a floe is formed reaching to the foot of Uibarun (Cape Mercy). The pass Tappitaridjen, which cuts off two peninsulas, leads into the sound. The bays farther west are frozen up and the projecting points are avoided by short passes. Unfortunately this road was unknown to me during my stay in Saumia, else I could have easily visited Cape Mercy. At last Anartuajuin is reached. The water rarely extends to Nuvukdjuaraqdjung, the point between Anartuajuin and Ugjuktung. It may be passed by a difficult road leading across the peninsula. If the water extends to Iliqimisarbing a pass is used which is ascended from Eχalualuin, in the bay of Naujaqdjuaq.
Besides the previously mentioned route, there's another, longer one that leads to Cumberland Sound. Taking this path, the sledges start from Nedluqseaq, west of Ukiadliving, and follow a river that rises in a small lake, where the inland ice can be accessed. Further along, the valley leading to Eχaluaqdjuin and Kangertlukdjuaq is reached. This is the only overland route where the inland ice is crossed. Cape Mercy can be navigated through several short isthmuses. In the shelter of the bay formed by the cape and Muingmang, a floe extends to the foot of Uibarun (Cape Mercy). The pass Tappitaridjen, which separates two peninsulas, leads into the sound. The bays further west are frozen over, and the projecting points are avoided by short routes. Unfortunately, I didn't know about this route during my time in Saumia, otherwise I could have easily visited Cape Mercy. Finally, Anartuajuin is reached. The water rarely reaches Nuvukdjuaraqdjung, the point between Anartuajuin and Ugjuktung. It can be crossed by a difficult path that goes over the peninsula. If the water reaches Iliqimisarbing, a pass is used that leads up from Eχalualuin, in the bay of Naujaqdjuaq.
On Davis Strait a few important isthmuses must be mentioned. One is used by the inhabitants of Ukiadliving in traveling to Exeter Sound. They leave the sea at the head of Touaqdjuaq and by a 440 difficult overland route cross to the southern shore of Exeter Sound. Much of the time the ice and snow near Udlimaulitelling make the route almost impassable in that direction. If, therefore, this route is impracticable or that through Touaqdjuaq is too difficult on account of the absence of snow, the journey is postponed until late in spring, when the hummocks begin to be leveled off and the snow becomes harder as it settles; then the rough ice can be passed, and after reaching Ituatukan, a fjord near Cape Walsingham, the Eskimo ascend it, so as to avoid the cape, which is always washed by water. If snow and ice are in a suitable condition the passage by way of Ituatukan is always preferred.
On Davis Strait, a few important isthmuses should be noted. One is used by the people of Ukiad when traveling to Exeter Sound. They leave the sea at the head of Touaqdjuaq and, via a 440 challenging overland route, cross to the southern shore of Exeter Sound. Most of the time, the ice and snow near Udlimaulitelling make the route almost impossible in that direction. If this route is not feasible or the path through Touaqdjuaq is too tough because there isn’t enough snow, the journey is delayed until late spring, when the hummocks are starting to flatten and the snow becomes harder as it settles; then the rough ice can be traversed, and after reaching Ituatukan, a fjord near Cape Walsingham, the Eskimos navigate through it to avoid the cape, which is always surrounded by water. If the snow and ice are in good condition, the route through Ituatukan is always preferred.
From Exeter Sound Kangertlukdjuaq, in Padli Fjord, may be reached by a pass of short extent; but the snow is always so deep here that the passage cannot be effected until June. The peninsulas between Padli Fjord and Exeter Sound, which have no ice foot, can be crossed by narrow isthmuses near the head of the bays.
From Exeter Sound, Kangertlukdjuaq in Padli Fjord can be accessed through a short pass; however, the snow is always so deep here that you can't get through until June. The peninsulas between Padli Fjord and Exeter Sound, which don't have an ice foot, can be crossed by narrow isthmuses near the head of the bays.
Before leaving Cumberland Sound and its inhabitants, the Oqomiut, altogether, I wish to add a few remarks on the whale fishery, which the Eskimo formerly carried on in their bulky skin boats. They pursued the monstrous animal in all waters with their imperfect weapons, for a single capture supplied them with food and fuel for a long time. I do not know with certainty whether the natives used to bring their boats to the floe edge in the spring in order to await the arrival of the whales, as the Scotch and American whalers do nowadays, or whether the animals were caught only in summer. On Davis Strait the Padlimiut and the Akudnirmiut used to erect their tents in June near the floe edge, whence they went whaling, sending the meat, blubber, and whalebone to the main settlement. In Cumberland Sound whales were caught in all the fjords, particularly in Kingnait, Issortuqdjuaq, and the narrow channels of the west shore. Therefore the Eskimo could live in the fjords during the winter, as the provisions laid up in the fall lasted until spring. If, therefore, there is a perceptible diminution in the supply of their food it is due to the fact that the whale fishery has been abandoned by them or rather has been yielded up to Europeans and Americans. It is not probable, however, that a sufficient number of whales were ever caught to support the entire population during the whole of the winter. The whaling is still kept up by the Eskimo of Hudson Strait and Hudson Bay, though only to a limited extent, owing to the visits of whaling ships and the establishment of whaling stations.
Before leaving Cumberland Sound and its people, the Oqomiut, I want to add a few points about the whale fishery that the Eskimo used to conduct in their large skin boats. They hunted these massive animals in various waters with their basic tools, as catching just one whale would provide them with food and fuel for a long time. I’m not sure if the locals brought their boats to the edge of the ice in the spring to wait for the whales, like modern Scottish and American whalers do, or if they only caught them during the summer. In Davis Strait, the Padlimiut and Akudnirmiut would set up their tents in June near the ice edge and go whaling, sending the meat, blubber, and whalebone back to the main settlement. In Cumberland Sound, whales were caught in all the fjords, especially in Kingnait, Issortuqdjuaq, and the narrow channels along the west shore. This allowed the Eskimo to stay in the fjords during winter, as the food they stored in the fall lasted until spring. If there is a noticeable drop in their food supply, it's because the whale fishery has been abandoned by them, or rather, it has been taken over by Europeans and Americans. However, it’s unlikely that enough whales were ever caught to feed the entire population throughout the winter. The Eskimo in Hudson Strait and Hudson Bay still engage in whaling, but only to a limited extent due to the presence of whaling ships and the establishment of whaling stations.
The Padlimiut and the Akudnirmiut.—
The next tribes to be described are the Padlimiut and the Akudnirmiut, but this may be done very briefly, as the nature of this region is similar to that of Saumia. A peculiarity of the Akudnirmiut is their more decided migratory character as compared with the Oqomiut. They do not spend every winter at the same place, as we observed that the Oqomiut do, but 441 are more inclined to visit, in turn, the different winter stations of their country.
The next tribes to be discussed are the Padlimiut and the Akudnirmiut, but this will be done briefly since their region is similar to that of Saumia. One unique aspect of the Akudnirmiut is their stronger tendency to migrate compared to the Oqomiut. They don't stay in the same place every winter like the Oqomiut do; instead, they tend to visit various winter spots in their area. 441
In summer the following places are almost always inhabited: Qarmaqdjuin, Eχaloaping in Padli Fjord, Qivitung, and Niaqonaujang. The deer hunting season opens here at the same time as farther south, but it is much facilitated from the fact that the ice breaks up later. The deer visit the numerous islands scattered along the mainland and thus their pasturing ground is easily reached. As the islands of Home Bay constitute a good hunting ground the Eskimo sometimes settle there for a few weeks.
In summer, the following places are almost always occupied: Qarmaqdjuin, Eχaloaping in Padli Fjord, Qivitung, and Niaqonaujang. The deer hunting season starts here at the same time as it does further south, but it's much easier because the ice breaks up later. The deer come to the many islands along the mainland, making their grazing areas easy to access. Since the islands of Home Bay are a great hunting spot, the Eskimo sometimes stay there for a few weeks.
The long, low peninsula Pamiujang, near Nedluqseaq, and the head of Nudlung are the favorite summer settlements of the Padlimiut. Nudlung, Eχalualuin, Ijelirtung, and Inugsuin are visited by the Akudnirmiut. An abundance of deer is found along the southern part of Home Bay, where the plains extend to the sea. It is remarkable that all along this shore there is no island on which birds build their nests. Though fowls do not form an important constituent of the food of the Oqomiut and the more southern tribes, the egg islands are frequently visited. On Davis Strait it is only by chance that ducks &c. are caught, and eggs can scarcely be obtained. The only island which is visited by birds is Avaudjelling, in Home Bay. In July, however, large flocks of eider ducks descend Itirbilung Fjord and many are caught near its head. From this fjord an overland route, which is practicable only in summer, leads to Piling, a district on the shore of Fox Basin, which may be reached in three days. Though the route is well known, it seems to be passing into disuse; at least I do not know any natives who have crossed the land by it. Another interesting road leading overland must be mentioned, namely, the one which leads from Nudlung and Eχalualuin to Majoraridjen and Nettilling. The former region is still visited by the Akudnirmiut, but I know of but one family who went to Nettilling and wintered there.
The long, low peninsula of Pamiujang, near Nedluqseaq, and the head of Nudlung are the preferred summer spots for the Padlimiut. Nudlung, Eχalualuin, Ijelirtung, and Inugsuin are frequented by the Akudnirmiut. There’s a lot of deer along the southern part of Home Bay, where the plains stretch out to the sea. It’s interesting that there are no islands along this shore where birds build their nests. Although birds aren’t a major part of the diet for the Oqomiut and the more southern tribes, the egg islands are often visited. In Davis Strait, ducks, etc., are only caught by chance, and eggs are hard to come by. The only island where birds visit is Avaudjelling in Home Bay. However, in July, large flocks of eider ducks come down Itirbilung Fjord, and many are caught near the head of it. From this fjord, there’s an overland route that can only be used in summer, leading to Piling, a district on the shore of Fox Basin, which can be reached in three days. While this route is well-known, it seems to be falling out of use; I don’t know any locals who have crossed the land by it. Another interesting overland route is one that goes from Nudlung and Eχalualuin to Majoraridjen and Nettilling. The Akudnirmiut still visit the former area, but I only know of one family that went to Nettilling and spent the winter there.
As a rule, about the beginning of August the Akudnirmiut move to Niaqonanjang in order to have an opportunity of meeting the whalers on their way south. For the same reason the southern families gather at Qivitung.
As a rule, around the beginning of August, the Akudnirmiut move to Niaqonanjang to have a chance to meet the whalers on their way south. For the same reason, the southern families gather at Qivitung.
As soon as the sea is frozen up, part of the natives of Qivitung move southward and settle on Qeqertuqdjuaq, where they stay until February, while in spring some stay here or move farther up the bay, where they establish their huts on Qeqertaq; the rest travel to Padli Fjord and live with the families who had passed the winter there on Padloping. As the floe edge approaches the land here, the country is favorable for bear hunting, which is pursued in March and April. In June the natives move up Padli Fjord to catch salmon, which are found in enormous numbers at Padli. A few visit Agpan, where flocks of loons nest. The natives who intend to return to Qivitung in summer leave about the end of May or the beginning of June.
As soon as the sea freezes over, some of the people from Qivitung head south to settle on Qeqertuqdjuaq, where they stay until February. In the spring, some choose to remain there, while others move further up the bay to set up their huts on Qeqertaq. The rest travel to Padli Fjord to live with families who spent the winter at Padloping. As the ice edge gets closer to the land, the area becomes ideal for bear hunting, which takes place in March and April. In June, the locals move up Padli Fjord to catch the large quantities of salmon found at Padli. A few visit Agpan, where flocks of loons nest. Those planning to return to Qivitung in the summer usually leave around the end of May or the beginning of June.
Those who remain at Qivitung during the winter go sealing in the bay east of the peninsula and subsist upon the product of this occupation, as well as on the walrus meat which was stored up in the summer and autumn. A few leave Qivitung after the consolidation of the floe and settle on Nanuqtaqdjung, an island in Home Bay, near the northern point of Qeqertalukdjuaq.
Those who stay at Qivitung during the winter go seal hunting in the bay east of the peninsula and live off the results of this work, as well as the walrus meat that was stored during the summer and fall. A few leave Qivitung after the ice has frozen solid and settle on Nanuqtaqdjung, an island in Home Bay, near the northern tip of Qeqertalukdjuaq.
In the winter the Akudnirmiut of Niaqonaujang generally remove to Ipiutelling, on the southern shore of Koukteling, and in May go farther south, to the island Avaudjelling. In the spring they go bear hunting on Koukteling and the peninsula of Niaqonaujang, where the she bears dig holes in the snow banks, in which they whelp.
In the winter, the Akudnirmiut of Niaqonaujang usually move to Ipiutelling, on the southern shore of Koukteling, and in May, they head further south to the island of Avaudjelling. In the spring, they go bear hunting on Koukteling and the peninsula of Niaqonaujang, where female bears dig holes in the snowbanks to give birth.
Though the isthmuses are of great value in facilitating the intercourse between the separate settlements of Cumberland Sound and Davis Strait, as their headlands are washed by water, they are not indispensable for the tribes of Davis Strait, for the ice is passable at all points. The low peninsulas are crossed by the natives in their travels in preference to rounding their headlands. Thus they not only shorten their journey, but they avoid the rough ice often found off the points.
Though the isthmuses are very useful for connecting the different settlements of Cumberland Sound and Davis Strait since their headlands are surrounded by water, they aren't essential for the tribes of Davis Strait, as the ice is crossable at all points. The local people prefer to travel across the low peninsulas instead of going around the headlands. This not only makes their journey shorter but also helps them avoid the rough ice that is often found off the points.
For example, a pass leads from the western bay of Padli Fjord to Kangertloaping, and another from Tessiujang, near Qivitung, across the narrow and low isthmus into Home Bay. Similar passes are used in crossing Koukteling, the peninsulas of Niaqonaujang, Aqojang, and Aqojartung.
For example, there’s a route from the western bay of Padli Fjord to Kangertloaping, and another from Tessiujang, close to Qivitung, across the narrow and low isthmus into Home Bay. Similar routes are used to cross Koukteling, the peninsulas of Niaqonaujang, Aqojang, and Aqojartung.
At Niaqonaujang I reached the limit of my travels and have only to add reports which I obtained from other tribes and in other settlements. River Clyde and Aqbirtijung are not always inhabited, but are visited at irregular intervals by the Akudnirmiut, the same who usually stay at Niaqonaujang. It is probable that Aqbirtijung and Kangertlualung are sometimes visited by the Tununirmiut of Pond Bay.
At Niaqonaujang, I reached the end of my journey and only need to include information I got from other tribes and settlements. River Clyde and Aqbirtijung aren’t always occupied, but the Akudnirmiut, who usually reside at Niaqonaujang, visit them at irregular times. It's likely that Aqbirtijung and Kangertlualung are occasionally visited by the Tununirmiut from Pond Bay.
The Aggomiut.—
I can say but little about the two subtribes of the Aggomiut (the Tununirmiut and the Tununirusirmiut), as the reports are scanty and the chart of the region is too incorrect to convey any exact information. A few statements may be derived from the Eskimo charts published by Hall (II, pp. 356 and 370). It appears that the natives winter near the entrance of Navy Board Inlet and in the back of Eclipse Sound. Settlements of the Tununirusirmiut at the western entrance of Admiralty Inlet and near its head are mentioned by Hall. Besides seals these natives also pursue the white whales and narwhals which frequent the sound. In summer the Tununirmiut live at the entrance of Pond Bay.
I can say very little about the two subtribes of the Aggomiut (the Tununirmiut and the Tununirusirmiut) because the reports are limited and the map of the area is too inaccurate to provide any precise information. A few details can be taken from the Eskimo maps published by Hall (II, pp. 356 and 370). It seems that the locals spend the winter near the entrance of Navy Board Inlet and at the back of Eclipse Sound. Hall mentions settlements of the Tununirusirmiut at the western entrance of Admiralty Inlet and near its upper end. In addition to seals, these natives also hunt white whales and narwhals that are found in the sound. In the summer, the Tununirmiut stay at the entrance of Pond Bay.
Although I am not informed as to the position of the settlements, and for this reason am unable to judge of the details of the life of the Aggomiut, I can give the more general facts of their relations to the neighboring tribes. Of the greatest importance is their connection 443 with the Iglulirmiut, for through them a regular intercourse is kept up between the continent of America and the eastern shore of Baffin Land. One road leads through Kangertlukdjuaq, a fjord east of Parry’s Murray Maxwell Inlet, to the head of Anaulereëling. I received a detailed description of this road from a native whom I met at Niaqonaujang. Hall’s statement that this way leads to Pond Bay is very likely erroneous, as the natives probably said that it led to Tununirn, which comprises the whole district of Eclipse Sound and the region east of it. It is possible that another road leads to Eχaluin, a fjord of Eclipse Sound. Another route which is often used leads from Kangertlung, Parry’s Gifford River, to Angmang, and farther west to Tununirusirn. This route has already been described by Parry, who attempted to reach the north shore of Baffin Land by it (II, p. 449). Parry’s description was confirmed in 1869 by Hall (II, p. 356). I am somewhat doubtful whether Fury and Hecla Strait, which is often filled with rough ice, can be passed regularly, and whether a route leading to Tununirusirn follows the shore of the Gulf of Boothia, as stated by some of the natives of Davis Strait. This uncertainty did not occur to me until after I had read Parry’s description. Communication between Tununirn and Tununirusirn is by way of the isthmus between Kangertlung and Navy Board Inlet.
Although I don't know the exact location of the settlements, and because of that I'm unable to understand the details of the Aggomiut's life, I can share more general information about their relationships with nearby tribes. Their connection with the Iglulirmiut is extremely important because it allows for regular trade between the continent of America and the eastern shore of Baffin Land. One route goes through Kangertlukdjuaq, a fjord east of Parry’s Murray Maxwell Inlet, leading to the head of Anaulereëling. I got a detailed description of this road from a local I met at Niaqonaujang. Hall's claim that this path leads to Pond Bay is likely incorrect, as the locals probably meant that it leads to Tununirn, which includes the entire area of Eclipse Sound and the region east of it. There might be another way to Eχaluin, a fjord of Eclipse Sound. Another path that is frequently used goes from Kangertlung, Parry’s Gifford River, to Angmang, and further west to Tununirusirn. Parry previously described this route when he tried to reach the north shore of Baffin Land (II, p. 449). Parry’s details were confirmed in 1869 by Hall (II, p. 356). I'm a bit skeptical about whether Fury and Hecla Strait, which is often covered in rough ice, can be passed regularly, and if a route leading to Tununirusirn follows the coast of the Gulf of Boothia, as some locals from Davis Strait have claimed. I didn't consider this uncertainty until after I read Parry’s description. The communication between Tununirn and Tununirusirn is through the isthmus connecting Kangertlung and Navy Board Inlet.
The journeys of the Aggomiut are not at all confined to Baffin Land. In favorable winters they cross Lancaster Sound, passing the small island Uglirn, and winter on the eastern half of Tudjan (North Devon). While here they keep up some intercourse with the inhabitants of Umingman Nuna (Ellesmere Land).
The journeys of the Aggomiut aren't limited to Baffin Land. In good winters, they cross Lancaster Sound, passing the small island Uglirn, and spend the winter on the eastern part of Tudjan (North Devon). While they are there, they maintain some contact with the people of Umingman Nuna (Ellesmere Land).
It is said that they cross the ice covered island on sledges. In four days they reach the northern shore, whence a long, narrow peninsula, Nedlung, stretches toward Ellesmere Land. Through the narrow passage which separates Tudjan from Nedlung runs a very swift tide which keeps open a water hole throughout the winter. All around this place the ice wastes quickly in the spring and a large basin is formed which abounds with seals. Only that part of the peninsula which lies nearest North Devon is high and steep, presenting a bold face. Farther north it is rather low.
They say they travel across the ice-covered island on sleds. In four days, they reach the northern shore, where a long, narrow peninsula, Nedlung, extends toward Ellesmere Land. A very fast tide flows through the narrow channel separating Tudjan from Nedlung, keeping a water hole open all winter long. All around this area, the ice melts quickly in the spring, creating a large basin filled with seals. Only the part of the peninsula closest to North Devon is high and steep, presenting a striking face. Further north, it becomes quite low.
Having reached Umingman Nuna, the Eskimo who gave me this information affirm that they fell in with a small tribe who resided on this shore. Here they lived for some time, as there was an abundance of seals during the whole year. Farther northwest is a large fjord, Kangertluksiaq, off which an island is found, Qeqertakadlinang by name. The Eskimo do not visit the land on the other side of this fjord, as bears are said to be very numerous and large there. Though these migrations to Jones Sound do not occur very frequently, they have by no means been discontinued. For instance, a family which was well known to me has visited Smith Sound, and 444 the father of some friends of a resident of Cumberland Sound returned about fifteen years ago from a long stay on Tudjan and Nedlung.
Having reached Umingman Nuna, the Eskimo who shared this information confirmed that they came across a small tribe living along this shore. They stayed there for a while because there was plenty of seals all year round. Further northwest lies a large fjord, Kangertluksiaq, near which is an island called Qeqertakadlinang. The Eskimo do not go to the land on the other side of this fjord, as it's said to be full of large bears. Although these migrations to Jones Sound aren't very common, they haven't completely stopped. For example, a family I know well has visited Smith Sound, and the father of some friends of a Cumberland Sound resident came back about fifteen years ago from a lengthy stay at Tudjan and Nedlung. 444
The Iglulirmiut.—
The last group of natives belonging to Baffin Land are those of Iglulik. Our knowledge of this tribe is due to Parry and Hall. As soon as the sea begins to freeze up, the natives gather on Iglulik, where they hunt the walrus throughout the winter. According to the position of the floe edge, Iglulik, Pingitkalik, or Uglit Islands are the favorite settlements. Later in the winter, when new ice is frequently attached to the floe, part of the families move to the ice northeast of Igluling, where seals are caught with the harpoon. Another winter settlement seems to be near Amitoq. In April young seals are hunted in the bays and fjords, particularly in Hooper Inlet. According to Hall the western coast of Melville Peninsula is sometimes visited during the winter for walrusing and bear hunting (II, p. 343). An overland route leads to this district, crossing the long Grinnell Lake and Brevoort River, thus named by Hall (II, p. 342). As soon as the warm season approaches the natives go deer hunting on Melville Peninsula or more frequently on Baffin Land. From the reports of Parry and Hall and from my own inquiries, there can be no doubt that they visit the eastern shore of Fox Basin.
The last group of natives from Baffin Land are those of Iglulik. We know about this tribe thanks to Parry and Hall. As soon as the sea starts to freeze, the locals gather at Iglulik, where they hunt walrus all winter long. Depending on where the floe edge is, Iglulik, Pingitkalik, or Uglit Islands are the preferred places to settle. Later in the winter, when new ice often forms at the floe, part of the families move to the ice northeast of Igluling, where they catch seals with harpoons. Another winter settlement seems to be near Amitoq. In April, they hunt young seals in the bays and fjords, especially in Hooper Inlet. According to Hall, the western coast of Melville Peninsula is sometimes visited in winter for walrus and bear hunting (II, p. 343). There is an overland route that leads to this area, crossing the long Grinnell Lake and Brevoort River, named by Hall (II, p. 342). As soon as the warm season starts, the natives go deer hunting on Melville Peninsula or, more often, on Baffin Land. Based on the reports from Parry and Hall and my own inquiries, it’s clear they also visit the eastern shore of Fox Basin.
The Pilingmiut.—
Two tribes were settled on the eastern coast of Fox Basin, the Pilingmiut and the Sagdlirmiut, who had but slight intercourse with the Iglulirmiut. I heard both mentioned at times when traveling along Davis Strait. According to my information I should say that Piling is about 74° west and 69° north. From Parry’s reports it appears that the intercourse between these tribes and Iglulik was not very active; for, although he had staid two years at Aivillik and Iglulik, the Pilingmiut when visiting the latter tribe did not know anything about this fact, which was one of the greatest importance to all the natives (II, p. 430). Sometimes the Talirpingmiut of Cumberland Sound meet the Pilingmiut, for both tribes go deer hunting northwest of Nettilling. I heard of one such meeting between hunting parties in that district.
Two tribes lived on the eastern coast of Fox Basin: the Pilingmiut and the Sagdlirmiut, who had little interaction with the Iglulirmiut. I heard both names mentioned sometimes while traveling along Davis Strait. From what I gathered, Piling is located around 74° west and 69° north. Based on Parry’s reports, it seems that the communication between these tribes and Iglulik was not very strong; even though he spent two years in Aivillik and Iglulik, the Pilingmiut visiting the latter tribe had no knowledge of this important detail, which was significant to all the natives (II, p. 430). Occasionally, the Talirpingmiut from Cumberland Sound encounter the Pilingmiut, as both tribes hunt deer northwest of Nettilling. I heard about one such encounter between hunting parties in that area.
The Sagdlirmiut.—
The information as to the Sagdlirmiut is yet more scanty than that relating to the inhabitants of Piling. Parry learned that Sagdlirn is about east-northeast of Iglulik (II, p. 549). The description which I received on Davis Strait confirms this opinion, for the direction was denoted as qaningnang, i.e., east-northeast; besides, Sagdlirn was described as a long and narrow island.
The information about the Sagdlirmiut is even more limited than that about the people of Piling. Parry found out that Sagdlirn is located about east-northeast of Iglulik (II, p. 549). The description I got in Davis Strait supports this view, as the direction was mentioned as qaningnang, meaning east-northeast; additionally, Sagdlirn was described as a long and narrow island.
WESTERN SHORE OF HUDSON BAY.
A remarkable difference exists between the customs of the western tribes who live on the continent of America and those of the tribes that inhabit Baffin Land and Melville Peninsula. This is chiefly 445 due to the difference in the nature of their territorial surroundings and to the presence of the musk ox, which they frequently hunt. In addition, the tribes of the continent do not hunt the seal in the winter, laying up instead their supply of meat and blubber in the fall. The information in regard to two of these tribes is quite complete, as they have been visited by explorers frequently and at all seasons. The two tribes referred to are the Aivillirmiut, of the northwestern part of Hudson Bay, and the Netchillirmiut of Boothia Felix. Unfortunately the information in respect to the others, the Kinipetu or Agutit, the Sinimiut, Ugjulirmiut, and Ukusiksalirmiut, is less complete.
A significant difference exists between the customs of the western tribes living on the continent of America and those of the tribes inhabiting Baffin Land and Melville Peninsula. This is mainly 445 due to the differences in their territorial environments and the presence of the musk ox, which they often hunt. Additionally, the tribes on the continent do not hunt seals during winter, instead stockpiling their meat and blubber in the fall. The information about two of these tribes is quite detailed since they have been frequently visited by explorers at all seasons. The two tribes mentioned are the Aivillirmiut from the northwestern part of Hudson Bay and the Netchillirmiut from Boothia Felix. Unfortunately, the information regarding the others, the Kinipetu or Agutit, the Sinimiut, Ugjulirmiut, and Ukusiksalirmiut, is less comprehensive.
The Aivillirmiut.—
In order to describe the mode of life of the Aivillirmiut I shall give an abstract of Dr. John Rae’s observations in 1846-’47 and 1854-’55, of C. F. Hall’s life with these natives from 1864 to 1869, and of Lieut. F. Schwatka’s residence among them from 1877 to 1879. A pretty correct idea of the migrations and favorite resorts of this tribe at the different seasons may be obtained from the journals of these travelers.
To describe the way of life of the Aivillirmiut, I will summarize Dr. John Rae’s observations from 1846-’47 and 1854-’55, C. F. Hall’s experiences with these natives from 1864 to 1869, and Lieut. F. Schwatka’s time among them from 1877 to 1879. You can get a pretty accurate picture of this tribe’s migrations and preferred spots at different times of the year from the journals of these travelers.
When Rae arrived in Repulse Bay in the latter part of July, 1846, he met with twenty-six natives who were deer hunting among the numerous lakes of Rae Isthmus (I, pp. 35, 40, 48). Another part of the tribe had resorted to Akugdlit, where they hunted the musk ox near Point Hargrave (I, p. 49). Committee Bay (Akugdlit) was filled with a heavy pack about that time, and the natives hunted walrus in their kayaks (I, p. 58). Wherever they killed a deer or musk ox they made deposits of the meat and carefully put up the walrus blubber in sealskin bags for use during the winter. When, about the end of September, the deer were migrating southward and new ice was forming on the lakes, the natives settled in the center of that part of the country which had been their hunting ground during the summer, in order to be near their depots. For this reason they were well scattered all over the country, some establishing their tents on the lakes of the isthmus, others staying on the shore of Repulse Bay, where large deposits of deer meat and blubber had been made. During the winter most of the natives gathered in one settlement east of Fort Hope (near Aivillik), whence they started to bring in their deposits. About the 20th of February they scattered all over the bay (I, p. 91), but it is doubtful whether they did this in order to be nearer their depots or to go sealing. In March the first deer of the season were seen. (I, p. 93), but it was not until April that larger herds passed Repulse Bay on their migration northward (I, p. 99). At this time a small supply of trout was procured from Christie Lake, but it was not sufficient for the support of the natives (I, p. 99). Caches of venison were made and frequently visited until late in June (p. 166). The sealing had begun in the beginning of May (p. 135), when the first animals were seen basking on the ice. But 446 the Eskimo were now almost independent of their old food supply. When the salmon left the lakes and the deer were roaming among the hills the time of plenty was at hand. The salmon creeks were visited, deer were caught, and seals pursued on the ice (p. 170). Although the first deer were caught in traps in May, the principal season for deer hunting opened after the breaking up of the ice, when they were easily taken while crossing the lakes.
When Rae arrived in Repulse Bay in late July 1846, he encountered twenty-six locals who were deer hunting among the many lakes of Rae Isthmus (I, pp. 35, 40, 48). Another part of the tribe had gone to Akugdlit, where they hunted musk ox near Point Hargrave (I, p. 49). Committee Bay (Akugdlit) was packed with ice around that time, and the locals were hunting walrus in their kayaks (I, p. 58). Whenever they killed a deer or musk ox, they stored the meat and carefully packaged the walrus blubber in sealskin bags for winter use. Around the end of September, as the deer migrated south and new ice formed on the lakes, the locals settled in the center of their summer hunting ground to be close to their food supplies. For this reason, they were spread out across the area, with some setting up tents on the lakes of the isthmus and others staying on the shore of Repulse Bay, where there were significant deposits of deer meat and blubber. During winter, most of the locals gathered in one settlement east of Fort Hope (near Aivillik), from where they began retrieving their stored food. Around February 20, they dispersed all over the bay (I, p. 91), but it’s unclear whether they did this to be closer to their food supplies or to go sealing. In March, the first deer of the season were spotted (I, p. 93), but it wasn’t until April that larger herds migrated north past Repulse Bay (I, p. 99). At this time, a small amount of trout was caught from Christie Lake, but it wasn’t enough to support the locals (I, p. 99). Caches of venison were created and regularly checked until late June (p. 166). Sealing started in early May (p. 135), when the first animals were seen lounging on the ice. But 446 the Eskimos had become almost independent of their traditional food sources. As the salmon left the lakes and deer roamed the hills, times of abundance were near. The salmon streams were visited, deer were caught, and seals were hunted on the ice (p. 170). Although the first deer were captured in traps in May, the main deer hunting season began after the ice broke up, making it easier to catch them while crossing the lakes.
When Rae wintered the second time in Repulse Bay (1854-’55) he was much surprised to find no natives there. They had wintered farther south, and did not come to the bay until May, 1855, when they could catch seals on the land ice. In 1864, when Hall arrived at Wager River, Repulse Bay was again deserted. This year of Hall’s stay in Hudson Bay is very instructive, as we learn from his account the particulars of the migration of the Aivillirmiut from Nuvung to Repulse Bay. The following facts are taken from his journal:
When Rae spent the winter a second time in Repulse Bay (1854-’55), he was surprised to find no locals there. They had wintered further south and didn’t arrive at the bay until May 1855, when they could hunt seals on the land ice. In 1864, when Hall reached Wager River, Repulse Bay was once again empty. Hall’s time in Hudson Bay that year is very informative, as his account reveals details about the migration of the Aivillirmiut from Nuvung to Repulse Bay. The following facts are taken from his journal:
In June, 1865, a traveling party arrived in Repulse Bay (Hall II, p. 177), where numerous deer were met with. Their tents were erected on Uglariaq, whence seals were pursued, and they began at once to make blubber deposits (p. 179). They were very eager to store as much provision as possible, as there was no chance of obtaining a fresh stock at Repulse Bay during the winter. Some of the party brought their boats to the floe edge in order to follow the seal and walrus, which were swimming in the water or lying on the drifting ice in great numbers, while others preferred sledging on the land floe and shooting the basking seals (p. 181). After the breaking up of the ice, whales were seen, and kayaks and boats were made ready for their pursuit. In September most of the natives returned to North Pole Lake to hunt deer at the lower narrows (p. 202), where the meat was deposited for winter use (p. 204).
In June 1865, a group of travelers arrived in Repulse Bay (Hall II, p. 177), where they encountered many deer. They set up their tents on Uglariaq, from which they pursued seals, and immediately started to store blubber (p. 179). They were very eager to stock up on food because there would be no opportunity to get fresh supplies at Repulse Bay during the winter. Some members of the group brought their boats to the edge of the ice to follow the seals and walruses swimming in the water or resting on the drifting ice in large numbers, while others preferred to sled on the land floe and shoot the seals basking in the sun (p. 181). After the ice broke up, they spotted whales, and they prepared kayaks and boats for the hunt. In September, most of the locals returned to North Pole Lake to hunt deer at the lower narrows (p. 202), where they stored the meat for winter use (p. 204).
On the 19th of October the last deer was killed (p. 205), and most of the natives returned to the bay. They located at Naujan, the men in the party numbering 43 (p. 216). During the winter no kind of hunt was kept up, only a few salmon and trout being caught in the lakes (p. 210). Towards the latter part of March the settlement was broken up and its members scattered for the purpose of hunting and fishing (p. 227). Salmon were caught in North Pole Lake and deer shot in the narrow passes (p. 227). The sealing did not begin until the first of April (p. 239). In the summer, deer, seal, walrus, and salmon were caught in great abundance. In the following years the mode of life was about the same, but it maybe remarked that in August the natives lived at Pitiktaujang and afterwards went to Lyon Inlet (Maluksilaq) to hunt deer (p. 323). Part of them returned to Repulse Bay, where walrus were caught on the drifting ice during September. In the ensuing winter (1867-’68) 55 natives had gathered in a village about twenty miles east of Fort Hope (p. 333), where they 447 lived on the stores deposited during the preceding summer. After the breaking up of the ice they succeeded in killing several whales, which afforded an ample supply of meat and blubber (p. 363). Subsequently, they hunted deer west of Repulse Bay (p. 364) and near Lyon Inlet, where probably the greater part of the families had staid since the previous year.
On October 19th, the last deer was killed (p. 205), and most of the natives returned to the bay. They settled at Naujan, with 43 men in the group (p. 216). During winter, no significant hunting took place; only a few salmon and trout were caught in the lakes (p. 210). Towards the end of March, the settlement was disbanded, and its members scattered for hunting and fishing (p. 227). Salmon were caught in North Pole Lake, and deer were shot in the narrow passes (p. 227). Sealing didn’t begin until April 1st (p. 239). In summer, deer, seal, walrus, and salmon were caught in large quantities. In the following years, the way of life remained similar, but it should be noted that in August, the natives lived at Pitiktaujang and then moved to Lyon Inlet (Maluksilaq) to hunt deer (p. 323). Some returned to Repulse Bay, where walrus were caught on the drifting ice during September. In the winter of 1867-’68, 55 natives gathered in a village about twenty miles east of Fort Hope (p. 333), where they survived on the supplies stored from the previous summer. After the ice broke up, they managed to kill several whales, which provided plenty of meat and blubber (p. 363). Later, they hunted deer west of Repulse Bay (p. 364) and near Lyon Inlet, where most of the families likely had stayed since the previous year.
In November, Hall found near the head of this inlet a number of natives who came to Repulse Bay towards the end of the year, having heard that a whale had been taken there. By this addition the village of Repulse Bay suddenly increased in population to 120 inhabitants (p. 369). This was the only winter in which the natives, began sealing in January (p. 371). In March they built their huts upon the ice and scattered early in the spring for sealing and catching salmon.
In November, Hall discovered a group of natives near the entrance of this inlet who arrived at Repulse Bay towards the end of the year after hearing that a whale had been caught there. This boosted the village population of Repulse Bay to 120 residents (p. 369). This was the only winter when the natives began sealing in January (p. 371). In March, they constructed their huts on the ice and spread out early in the spring to seal and catch salmon.
From these reports and some more general accounts of these travelers, an idea can be formed of the mode of life of this part of the Aivillirmiut during the different seasons. In the spring, when the seals commence to bask upon the ice, the tents are established on the floe of Repulse Bay, the large winter settlements being broken up into a number of smaller ones. During this season they begin to store away blubber, which is carefully put into sealskin bags. Besides, reindeer are killed in the deer passes. In July a great number of the natives leave the ice and resort to the salmon rivers, where an abundant supply of food is secured, but the sealing is also continued until the breaking up of the ice. At this time of the year (i.e., in August), walrus and seal are taken in large numbers, and thus an ample stock of provisions for winter use is collected. In some seasons a few whales are caught and stored away at once. In September, most of the natives move to the lakes or rivers, particularly North Pole Lake, to hunt deer as well as the musk ox on the hills. Other favorite localities for deer hunting are west of Repulse Bay or near Lyon Inlet. Large deposits of venison are made, and when the deer go south the natives settle in the center of their summer’s hunting ground, building their snow houses on the lakes in order to have a supply of water near at hand. About January most of them gather in one settlement, which is established at Uglariaq, Naujan, or Inugsulik. Those who come from Lyon Inlet do not always join the Repulse Bay tribe, but may be identical with Parry’s Winter Island Eskimo, who move to the bay south of Lyon Inlet in winter. They go sealing in winter only in case of need, for the hunt seems to be unproductive, and they subsist on the stores deposited during the preceding summer. Towards the latter half of March the settlements are broken up and some of the natives go to the lakes to fish for trout and salmon, while others begin the sealing.
From these reports and some additional general accounts of these travelers, we can get an idea of the way of life in this part of Aivillirmiut during the different seasons. In the spring, when the seals start to sunbathe on the ice, tents are set up on the ice floes of Repulse Bay, and the large winter settlements are divided into several smaller ones. During this time, they start to store blubber, which is carefully packed into sealskin bags. Additionally, reindeer are hunted in the deer passes. In July, many of the locals leave the ice and head to the salmon rivers, where there’s plenty of food, but sealing continues until the ice breaks up. Around this time of year (August), a large number of walrus and seals are caught, providing a good stock of food for the winter. In some years, a few whales are caught and stored away immediately. In September, most of the natives migrate to the lakes or rivers, especially North Pole Lake, to hunt deer as well as musk oxen on the hills. Other popular deer hunting spots are west of Repulse Bay or near Lyon Inlet. They stockpile a lot of venison, and when the deer migrate south, the natives settle in the middle of their summer hunting grounds, building snow houses on the lakes to have easy access to water. By January, most of them gather in one settlement, which is located at Uglariaq, Naujan, or Inugsulik. Those coming from Lyon Inlet don't always join the Repulse Bay tribe, but might be the same as Parry's Winter Island Eskimo, who move to the bay south of Lyon Inlet in winter. They only go sealing in winter if necessary because the hunt tends to be unproductive, and they rely on the supplies stored from the previous summer. Towards the latter half of March, the settlements break up, and some of the natives go to the lakes to fish for trout and salmon, while others start sealing.
Another winter station of the Aivillirmiut is Akugdlit, which, however, has never been as important as Aivillik itself. Rae found 448 some families here in August, 1846. They hunted the musk ox on the western shore of the bay, and later in the season, upon the pack ice which filled the sea, they hunted the walrus (Rae I, p. 58). They reported that the bay was very unfavorable for any kind of chase, as it is usually filled with closely packed ice, which prevents the visits of animals and endangers the boats of the natives (p. 49). In July the salmon creeks of Akugdlit (Committee Bay) were visited by these families, who extended their hunting ground from Colville Bay to the most northern parts of Melville Peninsula (p. 145). According to Hall a number of families live here at times. They were in the habit of staying at Repulse Bay during the early part of the summer and went to Akugdlit in the autumn to hunt the musk ox and deer. In the winter they transferred their deposits of blubber from Aivillik across the lakes to their settlement. Probably these families returned to Repulse Bay about the first of March, at which time their deposits were always exhausted (Hall II, p. 383). In some seasons the natives journey much farther south, that is, to the country between Cape Fullerton and Wager River. Klutschak’s report upon this subject, which is extracted from his observations during Schwatka’s search for the Franklin records, will be found tolerably correct (Deutsche Rundschau für Geographie und Statistik, III, 1881, p. 422). The report contains the following statement:
Another winter stop for the Aivillirmiut is Akugdlit, although it has never been as significant as Aivillik itself. Rae found 448 some families here in August 1846. They hunted musk ox on the western shore of the bay, and later in the season, on the pack ice that filled the sea, they hunted walrus (Rae I, p. 58). They reported that the bay was not great for hunting since it’s usually packed with ice, which keeps animals away and puts the natives' boats at risk (p. 49). In July, the salmon streams of Akugdlit (Committee Bay) were visited by these families, who expanded their hunting area from Colville Bay to the northern parts of Melville Peninsula (p. 145). According to Hall, several families stay here at times. They usually spent early summer at Repulse Bay and moved to Akugdlit in the fall to hunt musk ox and deer. In winter, they transported their blubber supplies from Aivillik across the lakes to their settlement. These families probably returned to Repulse Bay around the beginning of March when their supplies were typically depleted (Hall II, p. 383). In some years, the natives traveled much farther south, to the area between Cape Fullerton and Wager River. Klutschak’s report on this topic, based on his observations during Schwatka’s search for the Franklin records, is fairly accurate (Deutsche Rundschau für Geographie und Statistik, III, 1881, p. 422). The report includes the following statement:
In the spring of every year these Eskimo live on the land floe of Hudson Bay, at some distance from the point where the tides and winds carry the pack ice past the shore. Here is the favorite feeding place of the walrus, and the Eskimo confine themselves to the pursuit of this animal. They settle near one of the numerous islands situated near the shore.
In the spring of each year, these Eskimos live on the land floe of Hudson Bay, away from where the tides and winds push the pack ice along the coast. This area is a prime feeding spot for the walrus, and the Eskimos focus exclusively on hunting this animal. They set up their camp near one of the many islands close to the shore.
Later in the season they live in tents, and the hunting of seals and walrus is continued as long as the presence of ice permits. The greater part of the Aivillirmiut live near Depot Island (Pikiulaq). Here, on Cape Fullerton, and near the northern entrance of Chesterfield Inlet, the natives deposit their stores for winter use. As soon as the ice is gone they resort to the mainland, where deer, which descend to the shore at this season, are hunted. When the snow begins to cover the country they move inland, where they continue the deer hunt. In October they settle near a deer pass or a lake which is crossed by the herds migrating southward. In December all the deer have left the country and the natives live upon the stores deposited in the fall. Towards the beginning of the new year part of them return to the sea and live upon the deposits of walrus meat or disperse over the land floe, where seals are killed in their breathing holes. Another part take to the hills near Chesterfield Inlet and Wager River, a favorite feeding ground for the musk ox. They only return to the bay in March or April, to hunt seals until the breaking up of the ice. If the supplies of walrus meat are very abundant the Eskimo gather in one large settlement.
Later in the season, they live in tents, and they continue hunting seals and walrus as long as the ice allows. Most of the Aivillirmiut live near Depot Island (Pikiulaq). Here, on Cape Fullerton and near the northern entrance of Chesterfield Inlet, the locals store their supplies for winter. As soon as the ice melts, they head to the mainland, where they hunt deer that come down to the shore at this time. When the snow starts to cover the land, they move inland to continue hunting deer. In October, they settle near a deer crossing or a lake that the migrating herds pass through on their way south. By December, all the deer have left the area, and the locals rely on the supplies they stored in the fall. Around the beginning of the new year, some of them return to the sea and survive on walrus meat or spread out over the land ice, where they hunt seals in their breathing holes. Others go to the hills near Chesterfield Inlet and Wager River, which is a favorite feeding ground for musk ox. They only come back to the bay in March or April to hunt seals until the ice breaks up. If there’s a lot of walrus meat available, the Eskimo gather in one large settlement.
It appears from Klutschak’s own journal that this report is not quite complete, and I shall therefore add those of his own observations which seem to be important:
It seems from Klutschak’s own journal that this report is not fully complete, so I will add his observations that seem significant:
The natives who had hunted deer in the fall returned in December to Depot Island, where ten inhabitants lived at that time. They hunted walrus at the edge of the floe during the whole winter, but did not exclusively use their old stores (Klutschak, p. 32). In summer whales were hunted by means of kayaks, the blubber and meat being immediately stored for future use (p. 269). It is interesting to learn that a single family spent a whole year in the interior of the country, about two or three days’ journey west of Depot Island, living on the flesh of the musk ox most of the time (p. 196). He does not say what kind of fuel they used.
The natives who had hunted deer in the fall returned in December to Depot Island, where ten people lived at that time. They hunted walrus at the edge of the ice floe all winter, but didn't rely solely on their old supplies (Klutschak, p. 32). In the summer, they hunted whales using kayaks, with the blubber and meat being stored immediately for later use (p. 269). It’s interesting to note that one family spent an entire year in the interior, about two or three days’ journey west of Depot Island, mostly living on the meat of the musk ox (p. 196). He doesn’t mention what kind of fuel they used.
In Klutschak’s chart of Hudson Bay, which is published with his essay, a winter settlement is marked on Wager River, where the natives probably lived on seals caught in the breathing holes.
In Klutschak’s chart of Hudson Bay, which is included with his essay, a winter settlement is indicated on Wager River, where the natives likely lived off seals trapped in the breathing holes.
The mode of life of this tribe, as observed by Hall during his stay among them in 1864, differs in some material points from Klutschak’s account. It is particularly important that Hall found them at Wager River.
The way of life of this tribe, as noted by Hall during his time with them in 1864, differs in some significant ways from Klutschak’s description. It is especially important that Hall encountered them at Wager River.
About forty Eskimo are said to have lived in Nuvung during that year, while others were at Depot Island. Large depots of deer meat were scattered over the country around the settlement (Hall II, p. 76) and were brought in by the natives one by one. In the middle of November, after having finished the work of currying their deerskins, they commenced the walrus hunt, but meantime they frequently fed on deer meat from their depots (Hall II, pp. 102, 128, 132, 133). Towards the end of February they commenced to disperse, at first moving southward in order to be nearer the floe edge (p. 144). In the beginning of March an advance party of natives moved to Wager River, where they intended to catch salmon through the ice and to visit depots in that part of the country (p. 149). In April all the former inhabitants of Nuvung had settled on the ice of Wager River, where salmon in moderate numbers were caught (p. 164), but the main subsistence was the seals, which were at first watched for at the breathing holes, while later on they were killed when basking on the ice.
About forty Eskimos were reportedly living in Nuvung that year, while others were at Depot Island. Large supplies of deer meat were spread throughout the area around the settlement (Hall II, p. 76) and were brought in by the locals one by one. In mid-November, after finishing the work of treating their deerskins, they began the walrus hunt, but during this time, they often ate deer meat from their supplies (Hall II, pp. 102, 128, 132, 133). Toward the end of February, they started to spread out, initially moving southward to be closer to the edge of the ice (p. 144). In early March, a group of locals went to Wager River, where they planned to catch salmon through the ice and check supplies in that area (p. 149). By April, all the former residents of Nuvung had settled on the ice of Wager River, where they caught moderate amounts of salmon (p. 164), but their main source of food was seals, which they first hunted at breathing holes and later killed while basking on the ice.
As a summary of the foregoing statements, we may say that the five principal settlements of the Aivillirmiut are Pikiulaq (Depot Island), Nuvung and Ukusiksalik (Wager River), Aivillik (Repulse Bay), Akugdlit (Committee Bay), and Maluksilaq (Lyon Inlet). They may be divided into two groups, the former comprising the southern settlements, the latter the northern ones. Every one of these settlements has certain well known sites, which are frequented at the proper seasons.
As a summary of the previous statements, we can say that the five main settlements of the Aivillirmiut are Pikiulaq (Depot Island), Nuvung and Ukusiksalik (Wager River), Aivillik (Repulse Bay), Akugdlit (Committee Bay), and Maluksilaq (Lyon Inlet). They can be divided into two groups: the first includes the southern settlements, while the second includes the northern ones. Each of these settlements has specific well-known sites that are visited at the right times of the year.
It yet remains to describe the roads which are used in the intercourse between these settlements. From Pikiulaq to Nuvung the natives travel by means of sledges. In the winter of 1864-’65 two journeys were made, the first in December, the latter in January. Besides, boats are used in traveling along the shore in summer. Sledge journeys from Nuvung to Ukusiksalik cannot be accomplished on the ice, as in the entrance of the bay large water holes are formed. The sledges follow a chain of long, narrow lakes beginning near Nuvung and running almost parallel with the coast through a deep gorge. The bay is but a short distance beyond this gorge. I am not acquainted with the sledge road from Nuvung to Aivillik. Rae was visited at Fort Hope by a number of Eskimo, who came by sledges from Nuvung in June (I, p. 169). Hall traveled with the natives in boats, passing the narrows and following the edge of the land ice, while the rest of the families sledged on the shore or on the land ice (II, p. 177). The principal road across Rae Isthmus leads over North Pole Lake and is described by Rae and Hall. The latter accompanied the natives on two sledge roads, the one leading from Sagdlua, in Haviland Bay, to Qariaq, in Lyon Inlet, the other crossing the land farther south. I am not sure whether a road leading from Nebarvik to Committee Bay connects Maluksilaq with Akugdlit. It is doubtful whether the coast between Aivillik and Gore Bay is visited by the natives.
It still needs to be discussed the routes used for travel between these settlements. From Pikiulaq to Nuvung, the locals travel using sledges. During the winter of 1864–65, there were two trips made—one in December and the other in January. In addition, boats are used for traveling along the shore in the summer. Sledge trips from Nuvung to Ukusiksalik can't be done on the ice because large water holes form at the entrance of the bay. The sledges follow a series of long, narrow lakes that begin near Nuvung and run almost parallel to the coast through a deep gorge. The bay is just a short distance beyond this gorge. I don’t know the sledge route from Nuvung to Aivillik. A number of Eskimo visited Rae at Fort Hope, having arrived by sledges from Nuvung in June (I, p. 169). Hall traveled with the locals in boats, passing through the narrows and following the edge of the land ice, while the other families used sledges along the shore or on the land ice (II, p. 177). The main route across Rae Isthmus goes over North Pole Lake, as described by Rae and Hall. Hall traveled with the locals on two sledge routes, one from Sagdlua in Haviland Bay to Qariaq in Lyon Inlet, and the other further south across the land. I'm not certain if there is a road connecting Nebarvik to Committee Bay that links Maluksilaq with Akugdlit. It's unclear whether the coast between Aivillik and Gore Bay is frequented by the locals.
It is remarkable that the Aivillirmiut very rarely go to Southampton Island, though they are sometimes carried across Frozen Strait or Rowe’s Welcome by drifting ice. Scarcely ever of their own accord do they visit the island, which they call Sagdlirn. They know that it is inhabited, but have very little intercourse with its people.
It’s surprising that the Aivillirmiut hardly ever go to Southampton Island, even though they are occasionally transported across Frozen Strait or Rowe’s Welcome by drifting ice. Almost never do they make the trip on their own, to the island they call Sagdlirn. They know it has residents, but they have very little interaction with the people there.
The Kinipetu or Agutit.—
The reports upon the Kinipetu or Agutit of Chesterfield Inlet are very scanty as compared with those of the beforementioned tribe. All authors agree that they differ materially in their habits from the Aivillirmiut, and it has often been affirmed that they scarcely ever descend to the sea. As there is, however, no other tribe mentioned south of the Aivillirmiut besides this one and as in every voyage to these shores, even far south of Chesterfield Inlet, Eskimo are met with who frequently visit Fort Churchill, the most northern station of the Hudson Bay Company, there can be no doubt that they also visit the shore and the islands and hunt seals. Probably the greater part of the tribe live inland from July to March, hunting deer and the musk ox, and in winter only descend to the sea in order to procure blubber and sealskins during the season in which these are most easily obtained. It may be that another part stay near the head of Chesterfield Inlet all the year round or remain in the hilly country between the deep gulf and Back River hunting the musk ox. According to all reports, they are rather independent of the hunt of sea animals, and they do not even use their 451 skins for garments (Klutschak, Deutsche Rundschau für Geographie und Statistik, III, p. 419). For this reason they would afford interesting material for investigation, and it is unfortunate that no trustworthy accounts of the tribe exist. Back, on his journey to the shores of the Arctic Ocean, found traces of the Eskimo on the lakes of Back River, ample proof that they were in the habit of visiting this region every summer. He found the first traces near 107° west longitude, and farther down, at the mouth of Baillie River. He did not see the natives whom Anderson and Stewart met in the summer of 1855 near McKinley River and later between Pelly and Garry Lakes. Their clothing and even the covers of their kayaks were made of deer and musk ox skins. They observed among these natives such articles of European make as the Hudson Bay Company used for barter and which were traded to the most southern Eskimo tribes of Hudson Bay. Therefore it is likely that these natives belonged to Chesterfield Inlet. This opinion is supported by Klutschak’s remark that a native of the mouth of Back River knew an overland route leading from the lakes at its upper course to Chesterfield Inlet.
The reports on the Kinipetu or Agutit of Chesterfield Inlet are quite limited compared to those of the previously mentioned tribe. All sources agree that their habits are significantly different from the Aivillirmiut, and it has often been stated that they rarely go down to the sea. However, since there are no other tribes noted south of the Aivillirmiut besides this one, and because every trip to these shores, even far south of Chesterfield Inlet, encounters Eskimos who frequently visit Fort Churchill, the northernmost station of the Hudson Bay Company, it’s clear that they also come to the coast and the islands to hunt seals. Most likely, a large part of the tribe lives inland from July to March, hunting deer and musk ox, and only goes to the sea in winter to get blubber and sealskins during the availability season. It’s possible that another group stays near the head of Chesterfield Inlet year-round or remains in the hilly region between the deep gulf and Back River hunting musk ox. According to all sources, they are quite self-sufficient regarding sea animal hunts and don’t even use their 451 skins for clothing (Klutschak, Deutsche Rundschau für Geographie und Statistik, III, p. 419). For this reason, they would provide interesting material for research, and it’s unfortunate that reliable accounts of the tribe do not exist. Back, during his journey to the Arctic Ocean shores, found signs of the Eskimo around the lakes of Back River, which clearly showed they used to visit this area every summer. He noticed the first signs near 107° west longitude and further down at the mouth of Baillie River. He did not encounter the natives that Anderson and Stewart met in the summer of 1855 near McKinley River and later between Pelly and Garry Lakes. Their clothing and even the covers of their kayaks were made from deer and musk ox skins. They noted that these natives possessed European-made items used for trade by the Hudson Bay Company and that these were exchanged with the southernmost Eskimo tribes of Hudson Bay. Therefore, it’s likely that these natives were from Chesterfield Inlet. This notion is backed by Klutschak’s comment that a native from the mouth of Back River was aware of an overland route leading from the lakes in its upper section to Chesterfield Inlet.
The Sagdlirmiut of Southampton Island.—
Before leaving the subject of the Hudson Bay Eskimo I may mention the inhabitants of Southampton Island, a tribe which is almost unknown and the only record of which was obtained by Captain Lyon during the few hours which he passed among them in 1824 (Attempt to reach Repulse Bay, p. 54). In August he found a few families on the island south of Cape Pembroke, who were living upon salmon which had been deposited in stone caches and who had tents made of sealskins. A winter house was found at the same point. About 1865 an American whaling vessel found some natives on Manico Point living in five tents. Even then they had scarcely any iron, but used the old stone implements; this proves the want of all communication with the natives of the mainland. Parry found traces of Eskimo in York Bay and they have been seen on many other parts of the island. The Hudson Bay tribes call this tribe the Sagdlirmiut, i.e., the inhabitants of Sagdlirn, and their knowledge about them is very scanty, as they meet very rarely and by chance only.
Before moving on from the topic of the Hudson Bay Eskimo, I should mention the people of Southampton Island, a tribe that is almost unknown, with the only record coming from Captain Lyon during the brief time he spent with them in 1824 (Attempt to reach Repulse Bay, p. 54). In August, he found a few families on the island south of Cape Pembroke, relying on salmon stored in stone caches and using tents made from sealskins. A winter house was also discovered at that location. Around 1865, an American whaling ship encountered some locals at Manico Point living in five tents. Even then, they hardly had any iron and were using old stone tools, indicating a lack of communication with the mainland natives. Parry found signs of Eskimo in York Bay, and they have been spotted in various other parts of the island. The Hudson Bay tribes refer to this group as the Sagdlirmiut, meaning the people of Sagdlirn, but their knowledge of them is very limited since they meet infrequently and only by chance.
The Sinimiut.—
Northwest of Hudson Bay we find a tribe in Pelly Bay. The reports upon it are very scanty and it is difficult to find out the extent of the district which is occupied by it. Ross did not fall in with the tribe, and in the accounts of the Netchillirmiut on their journey to Repulse Bay no mention is made of an intervening tribe (II, p. 263). In April, 1847, Rae found signs of the tribe near Helen Island, in Pelly Bay (I, p. 113). There was an abundance of seals on the ice all around the islands (p. 111), but besides these they had large stocks of dried musk ox and salmon (p. 124). On his second journey he found their winter habitation on Barrow and Cameroon 452 Lakes (II, p. 938), and on the 20th of April he met with seventeen natives on the mainland west of Augustus Island, among whom were five women. In traveling farther west he fell in with a native who had been hunting the musk ox. On the 17th of May he found twelve natives settled in the same place and living on seal (II, p. 842).
Northwest of Hudson Bay, we discover a tribe in Pelly Bay. Reports about them are quite limited, making it hard to determine the exact area they occupy. Ross didn’t encounter the tribe, and in the accounts of the Netchillirmiut during their trip to Repulse Bay, there’s no mention of a tribe in between (II, p. 263). In April 1847, Rae found evidence of the tribe near Helen Island in Pelly Bay (I, p. 113). There were plenty of seals on the ice surrounding the islands (p. 111), and in addition to those, they had large supplies of dried musk ox and salmon (p. 124). On his second journey, he located their winter dwelling near Barrow and Cameroon 452 Lakes (II, p. 938), and on April 20th, he encountered seventeen natives on the mainland west of Augustus Island, including five women. As he traveled further west, he met a native who had been hunting musk ox. On May 17th, he found twelve natives living in the same spot, subsisting on seal (II, p. 842).
Hall met with this tribe twice, in 1866 and in 1869. On the 28th of April, in his first attempt to reach King William Land, he found the Sinimiut settled near Cape Beaufort, in Committee Bay, where they were probably sealing (II, p. 255). No further account of this meeting is found except the remark that these natives were on their way to Repulse Bay (p. 259). Therefore it is rather doubtful whether the eastern shore of Simpson Peninsula belongs to their customary district. In April, 1869, on his second visit to Pelly Bay, Hall found their deserted winter huts on Cameroon Lake (p. 386). In the early part of the spring they had lived on the ice south of Augustus Island, the only place where seals could be caught, as the rest of the bay was filled with heavy floes which had been carried south by the northerly winds prevailing during the preceding fall. The natives themselves were met with on the mainland west of Augustus Island, where they were hunting the musk ox. When Hall crossed the bay in the first days of June the natives had changed neither their place nor their mode of subsistence.
Hall met with this tribe twice, in 1866 and in 1869. On April 28, during his first attempt to reach King William Land, he found the Sinimiut settled near Cape Beaufort, in Committee Bay, where they were likely sealing (II, p. 255). There are no further details about this meeting, except for the note that these natives were on their way to Repulse Bay (p. 259). So it's quite uncertain whether the eastern shore of Simpson Peninsula is part of their usual territory. In April 1869, during his second visit to Pelly Bay, Hall found their abandoned winter huts on Cameroon Lake (p. 386). Earlier in the spring, they had been living on the ice south of Augustus Island, the only spot where seals could be caught, since the rest of the bay was clogged with heavy floes pushed south by the northerly winds from the previous fall. The natives were encountered on the mainland west of Augustus Island, where they were hunting musk ox. When Hall crossed the bay in the early days of June, the natives hadn't changed either their location or their way of living.
There is a discrepancy in Nourse’s extract from Hall’s journal, for he sometimes refers to the Pelly Bay natives as different from the Sinimiut, while in other passages all the inhabitants of the bay are comprised in the latter term. I think this discrepancy is occasioned by the fact that a number of Aivillirmiut had settled in Pelly Bay and some others were related to natives of that locality; the latter Nourse calls the Pelly Bay men, the rest the Sinimiut. The place Sini itself, according to a statement of Hall, is near Cape Behrens, on the northwestern shore of the bay.
There is an inconsistency in Nourse’s extract from Hall’s journal, as he sometimes refers to the Pelly Bay natives as distinct from the Sinimiut, while in other parts, he includes all the residents of the bay under the latter term. I think this inconsistency arises from the fact that several Aivillirmiut had settled in Pelly Bay, and some were related to the locals; Nourse calls the former the Pelly Bay men and the latter the Sinimiut. According to Hall, the place Sini is located near Cape Behrens, on the northwestern shore of the bay.
As the winter huts of the Sinimiut have been found four times on the lakes of the isthmus of Simpson Peninsula, we may suppose that they generally spend the winter there, living on the stores deposited in the preceding season and occasionally angling for trout and salmon (Rae I, p. 110) or killing a musk ox. In March they leave for the sea in order to hunt seals and to secure a fresh supply of blubber for their lamps. Their chief subsistence is the musk ox; besides, salmon are caught in great numbers, for they live on dried fish until spring (Rae I, p. 124).
As the winter huts of the Sinimiut have been discovered four times on the lakes of the isthmus of Simpson Peninsula, we can assume that they usually spend the winter there, relying on the supplies stored from the previous season and occasionally fishing for trout and salmon (Rae I, p. 110) or hunting a musk ox. In March, they head to the sea to hunt seals and gather fresh blubber for their lamps. Their main source of food is the musk ox; in addition, they catch a lot of salmon, as they live on dried fish until spring (Rae I, p. 124).
BOOTHIA FELIX AND BACK RIVER.
The Netchillirmiut.—
Following the shore westward we find the interesting tribes that inhabit Boothia Felix, King William Land, and the mouth of Back River. Among them the Netchillirmiut are the most important. Their favorite hunting grounds seem to have 453 undergone a remarkable change since they were first visited by Ross in 1829. At that period their district occupied the southern part of Boothia Felix, particularly the narrow isthmus and the adjoining parts of both coasts. They were acquainted with Bellot Strait (Ikerasaq), which they described as the way the Victory had to take in order to effect a passage to the western sea. A part of the tribe was in the habit of wintering on Owutta Island; they also probably visited the eastern part of King William Land. The southwestern termination of their district cannot be exactly defined, but from their description of the land south of Lake Willerstedt it appears that they visited Shepherd Bay; besides, I find that in June, 1831, a number of families lived south of Netchillik, i.e., probably in Rae Strait or on Shepherd Bay (Ross II, p. 537).
Following the shore to the west, we come across the interesting tribes that live in Boothia Felix, King William Land, and at the mouth of Back River. Among them, the Netchillirmiut are the most significant. Their favorite hunting grounds seem to have 453 changed dramatically since Ross first visited in 1829. At that time, their area covered the southern part of Boothia Felix, especially the narrow isthmus and the nearby sections of both coasts. They were familiar with Bellot Strait (Ikerasaq), which they described as the route the Victory had to take to reach the western sea. A part of the tribe usually spent winters on Owutta Island; they likely also traveled to the eastern part of King William Land. The exact boundaries of their territory to the southwest can't be clearly defined, but from their description of the land south of Lake Willerstedt, it seems they visited Shepherd Bay. Additionally, I found that in June 1831, several families lived south of Netchillik, likely in Rae Strait or around Shepherd Bay (Ross II, p. 537).
So far as can be gathered from Ross’s account the tribe had three winter settlements, one on the eastern shore of the Isthmus of Boothia, another at Lake Netchillik, and the third on Owutta Island.3 As to the first meeting of the natives with the Victory two contradictory accounts are found. At first it is related (p. 252) that they came from Akugdlit, having been on the road ten days. Later, and this is more probable, it is said that two natives had descried the ship in September, 1829, when passing near Victoria Harbor (p. 309). Being in great fear, they had immediately traveled to Netchillik to communicate with their countrymen. There they met with a woman who had been on board of Parry’s ships, and she had induced all the natives, by her stories, to be on the lookout for the Europeans. At the first meeting, on the 9th of January, 1830, 31 men approached the ship. This would answer to a population of about one hundred and twenty persons, and it is quite unprecedented that such a party should travel for any distance and even beyond the limitations of their own territory and of their customary migrations. Probably a traveling party had joined the Netchillirmiut, who had lived somewhere in Lord Mayor’s Bay, and they all went to meet the ship.
According to Ross’s account, the tribe had three winter settlements: one on the eastern shore of Boothia's Isthmus, another at Lake Netchillik, and the third on Owutta Island.3 Regarding the first encounter between the natives and the Victory, there are two conflicting accounts. Initially, it's reported (p. 252) that they came from Akugdlit after being on the road for ten days. Later, and this seems more likely, it's mentioned that two natives spotted the ship in September 1829 while passing near Victoria Harbor (p. 309). Out of fear, they quickly traveled to Netchillik to inform their fellow tribe members. There, they encountered a woman who had been aboard Parry’s ships, and she shared stories that convinced all the natives to watch out for the Europeans. During the first meeting on January 9, 1830, 31 men approached the ship. This suggests a population of around one hundred and twenty people, which is quite unusual for such a group to travel any significant distance beyond their usual territory and migration patterns. It’s possible a traveling party had joined the Netchillirmiut and that they were from somewhere in Lord Mayor’s Bay, and they all came together to meet the ship.
From Ross we also learn that during January and February these natives lived on seals, which were killed with harpoons (pp. 250, 255, 259), but, in addition, they had deposits of venison, seal blubber, and fish (pp. 251, 262). Sometimes they went hunting the musk ox on the mainland farther north, and a small party may have staid there throughout the winter (p. 265). In the first days of March they began to scatter all over the ice (p. 290), in order to have a better chance of sealing and of catching young seals in the white coat (pp. 293, 295). The young sealing commenced about the 10th of March. It is worth remarking that this is the only tribe on the continent of 454 America which pursues the young seal; they are enabled to do this by the extent of the land floe in the large bays. In the last days of March some of the natives started for Sarvaq and Netchillik to fetch their kayaks (p. 315), which they had left there the preceding season. As they intended to hunt deer at the lakes farther north, they were obliged to have their boats at hand at the breaking up of the ice. The further the season advanced the more the settlements were broken up (p. 338), and towards the end of April the first families left for Netchillik to join the other part of the tribe (p. 323). At this season the musk ox and the returning reindeer were frequently hunted (pp. 252, 335, 349). In the first days of May some of the natives went to Netchillik (p. 337), and another party followed a month later (p. 383). They stopped on Middle Lake for a short time to fish for trout (p. 384). A number of families remained near the ship, sealing, catching salmon, and hunting the musk ox (pp. 436, 441, 450, 453) until the beginning of July, when the fishing season ended and they went to the inland lakes to hunt deer and fish for trout in the rapids between the lakes (p. 450). In the summer their principal fishing stations were Lindsay River and Sarvaq.
From Ross, we also learn that during January and February, these natives lived on seals, which they hunted with harpoons (pp. 250, 255, 259). Additionally, they had supplies of venison, seal blubber, and fish (pp. 251, 262). Sometimes, they traveled to hunt musk oxen on the mainland further north, and a small group might have stayed there throughout the winter (p. 265). In the early days of March, they began to spread out across the ice (p. 290) to improve their chances of sealing and catching young seals with their white coats (pp. 293, 295). The young sealing season started around March 10th. It's notable that this is the only tribe on the continent of 454 America that hunts young seals; they can do this because of the large expanses of land floe in the big bays. In the last days of March, some of the natives set out for Sarvaq and Netchillik to retrieve their kayaks (p. 315), which they had left there the previous season. Since they planned to hunt deer at the lakes further north, they needed to have their boats ready when the ice started breaking up. As the season progressed, the settlements became more dispersed (p. 338), and towards the end of April, the first families left for Netchillik to join the other part of the tribe (p. 323). During this time, musk ox and returning reindeer were often hunted (pp. 252, 335, 349). In the early days of May, some of the natives went to Netchillik (p. 337), and another group followed a month later (p. 383). They paused at Middle Lake for a short time to fish for trout (p. 384). Several families stayed near the ship, sealing, catching salmon, and hunting musk oxen (pp. 436, 441, 450, 453) until early July, when the fishing season ended, and they went to the inland lakes to hunt deer and fish for trout in the rapids between the lakes (p. 450). During the summer, their main fishing spots were Lindsay River and Sarvaq.
The other part of the tribe which had lived at Lake Netchillik were even more numerous than that of the coast, as 21 snow houses were found which had been inhabited by them during the winter (p. 389). The number of inhabitants of this village was about one hundred and seventy, and, since there were a few who lived on Owutta Island and yet others who may have been scattered in different parts of the country, it is probable that the whole tribe numbered 350 persons.
The other part of the tribe that lived at Lake Netchillik was even larger than the coastal group, as 21 snow houses were discovered that had been lived in during the winter (p. 389). The population of this village was about 170, and since a few lived on Owutta Island and others were likely spread across different areas, it's probable that the entire tribe consisted of around 350 people.
As they were seen only a few times by the expedition the reports are rather incomplete. In the winter they lived on a plain, which was called Okavit, on the eastern shore of Lake Netchillik (p. 315). The exact position cannot be learned from Ross’s journal. As some mention is made of blubber deposits at Netchillik (p. 388), it is probable that they lived on stores deposited in summer. Toward the end of May and in the beginning of June they were met with at Spence Bay and Josephine Bay. One of their stations was on the island Inugsulik, near Padliaq, the head of Spence Bay. Here their principal food was codfish, which they caught in holes cut through the ice, while the sealing was there a less important interest (pp. 391, 426). The kayaks which were found deposited on the west shore of Boothia as far as Josephine Bay proved that they resorted to this region in the deer hunting season (pp. 406, 407). The families who had been at Owutta during the winter of 1829-’30 were found in June, 1831, in Padliaq, whence they crossed the isthmus and visited Tarionitjoq (p. 431).
As they were only seen a few times by the expedition, the reports are quite incomplete. In the winter, they lived on a plain called Okavit, on the eastern shore of Lake Netchillik (p. 315). The exact location isn't available in Ross’s journal. Since there’s some mention of blubber deposits at Netchillik (p. 388), it’s likely that they relied on stores left over from summer. Toward the end of May and the beginning of June, they were encountered at Spence Bay and Josephine Bay. One of their camps was on Inugsulik Island, near Padliaq, at the head of Spence Bay. Here, their main food source was codfish, which they caught in holes cut through the ice, while sealing was a less significant activity (pp. 391, 426). The kayaks found on the west shore of Boothia as far as Josephine Bay indicated that they traveled to this area during deer hunting season (pp. 406, 407). The families who had been at Owutta during the winter of 1829-’30 were found in June 1831 in Padliaq, from where they crossed the isthmus and visited Tarionitjoq (p. 431).
In 1830 no natives were seen after the usual time of their departure for the interior of the country, and it was not until April, 1831, that 455 they were found again. They had wintered at Lake Avatutiaq, on the eastern shore of Boothia (p. 511), where they had lived on a large stock of salmon caught in the fall (p. 531) and on musk oxen which were hunted during the entire year in the hilly country near the lakes. Others had wintered farther south, on Lake Owen (p. 524). A portion of these Eskimo set out for Netchillik in April (p. 522), while the others remained in Tom’s Bay and subsisted upon codfish, salmon, and seals (p. 546).
In 1830, no locals were seen after their usual time of heading into the interior of the country, and it wasn't until April 1831 that 455 they were spotted again. They had spent the winter at Lake Avatutiaq, on the eastern shore of Boothia (p. 511), where they lived off a large supply of salmon caught in the fall (p. 531) and musk oxen that were hunted throughout the year in the hilly areas near the lakes. Some had wintered further south, at Lake Owen (p. 524). A portion of these Eskimos left for Netchillik in April (p. 522), while the others stayed in Tom’s Bay and survived on codfish, salmon, and seals (p. 546).
In June another party left for Netchillik, whence some of the natives, who had not seen the ship before, arrived at Victoria Harbor in July, probably having heard of her new station at this place through the returning families (p. 577). In August the last of them left, going west (p. 592).
In June, another group set off for Netchillik, from where some of the locals, who hadn't seen the ship before, arrived at Victoria Harbor in July, likely having heard about her new post here from the returning families (p. 577). In August, the last of them departed, heading west (p. 592).
Though these reports are rather imperfect, they enable us to get a fair idea of the mode of life of this tribe.
Though these reports are somewhat flawed, they give us a good sense of how this tribe lives.
In the large bays on the eastern side of the isthmus the natives live just as do the southern tribes of Baffin Land, pursuing the seal at its breathing hole during the winter. Here, as everywhere else, the settlements were broken up early in the spring. The fishing is commenced remarkably early, while in the east scarcely any salmon are caught before the breaking up of the lakes. West of Melville Peninsula the fishing is commenced in March or even earlier. On Boothia the most important means of subsistence for the natives is the codfish, on which they live during the spring and probably during a part of the winter. It is also an important article of food for the other tribes of this region, while farther east it is of no importance. The salmon fisheries of Boothia are very productive, of which Netchillik and Padliaq in Josephine Bay, Stanley and Lord Lindsay Rivers, Qogulortung, Angmalortuq, and Sarvaq may be considered the most important. Deer are hunted while swimming across the numerous lakes of Boothia, and the musk ox in the granite hills of its northern part. Here is also another winter resort of the tribe, from which the island Tukia, north of Lake Avatutiaq, is visited in summer, to collect pyrite or native iron (p. 362), which is used for kindling fire. The life of the western part of the tribe, as far as we are acquainted with it, was described in the foregoing paragraph.
In the large bays on the eastern side of the isthmus, the locals live just like the southern tribes of Baffin Land, hunting seals at their breathing holes during the winter. As is the case everywhere else, the settlements get broken up early in the spring. Fishing starts quite early here, while in the east, hardly any salmon are caught before the lakes break up. West of Melville Peninsula, fishing begins in March or even earlier. On Boothia, the main source of food for the locals is codfish, which they rely on during the spring and probably part of the winter. It's also an important food source for other tribes in the area, though it's not significant further east. The salmon fisheries in Boothia are very productive, with Netchillik and Padliaq in Josephine Bay, Stanley and Lord Lindsay Rivers, Qogulortung, Angmalortuq, and Sarvaq being the most prominent. Deer are hunted while swimming across the numerous lakes of Boothia, and musk oxen are hunted in the granite hills in the northern part. This area also serves as another winter gathering place for the tribe, from which they visit the island Tukia, north of Lake Avatutiaq, in the summer to collect pyrite or native iron (p. 362), which is used for starting fires. The lifestyle of the western part of the tribe, as far as we know, was described in the previous paragraph.
Neither Dease and Simpson, who visited Castor and Pollux River in 1839, nor Rae, on his second voyage to Boothia, met the natives themselves; the latter, however, saw their marks on the islands of Acland Bay (II, p. 840).
Neither Dease and Simpson, who visited Castor and Pollux River in 1839, nor Rae, on his second trip to Boothia, encountered the natives themselves; however, the latter saw their marks on the islands of Acland Bay (II, p. 840).
The next traveler who fell in with the tribe was M’Clintock, who visited King William Land in search of the Franklin records. In February, 1859, he met several families near Cape Adelaide (p. 230). They traveled during the spring all along the shore and had been near Tasmania Islands in March and April. They were seen by him on their return journey to Netchillik, near Cape Nicholas. They 456 traveled slowly south, hunting seals. They knew the coast as far as Bellot Strait and were able to name every cape of this district. A few families who had wintered in company with this party at Cape Victoria had returned to Netchillik when the other parties started north (p. 253). On the 4th of May, twenty deserted snow huts were found on the southwest point of Matty Island (p. 257). From the direction of the sledge tracks, M’Clintock concluded that the natives who had formerly lived here had gone to Netchillik. On the 7th of May a settlement of 30 or 40 individuals was found on the eastern coast of King William Land (p. 260). This party had not communicated with the villages on the mainland of Boothia since the preceding fall (p. 260).
The next traveler who encountered the tribe was M’Clintock, who visited King William Land looking for the Franklin records. In February 1859, he met several families near Cape Adelaide (p. 230). They traveled along the shore during the spring and had been near the Tasmania Islands in March and April. He saw them on their return journey to Netchillik, near Cape Nicholas. They traveled slowly south, hunting seals. They knew the coast as far as Bellot Strait and could name every cape in the area. A few families who had spent the winter with this group at Cape Victoria had returned to Netchillik when the other groups headed north (p. 253). On May 4th, twenty abandoned snow huts were found on the southwest point of Matty Island (p. 257). Based on the sledge tracks, M’Clintock concluded that the natives who used to live here had gone to Netchillik. On May 7th, a settlement of 30 or 40 people was found on the eastern coast of King William Land (p. 260). This group had not been in contact with the villages on the mainland of Boothia since the previous fall (p. 260).
An interesting change in the territory which is inhabited by this tribe has occurred since Ross’s visit to this country. In order to describe it more fully, I must refer to the relations of the Netchillirmiut to the Ugjulirmiut. At this early period the intercourse between the tribes of Ugjulik and Netchillik was of little consequence. No European had ever been in their districts, which included Adelaide Peninsula and the southern shore of King William Land (Ross II, p. 317), but quite a number of persons were known to the Netchillirmiut (p. 357), who had met them in their trading excursions. In addition to this, a young single man of Ugjulik had been adopted by a Netchillirmio who lived on the eastern coast of King William Land and on Owutta Island (p. 355). When the Franklin expedition perished on King William Land, in 1848, the Netchillirmiut had not yet visited that part of the country. From Schwatka’s inquiries we learn that the tribe that found Crozier and his fellow sufferers did not extend its migrations beyond Adelaide Peninsula and the southern shore of King William Land. In the summer of 1848 they attempted in vain to cross Simpson Strait, and were compelled to stay on the island. They traveled all over the country as far as Peel Inlet, opposite to Matty Island (Gilder, p. 91). Hence it is obvious that the Netchillirmiut, up to the time of the Franklin catastrophe, lived in their old territory, as the inhabitants of Boothia in 1859 had only indirect news of the shipwreck.
An interesting change in the territory inhabited by this tribe has occurred since Ross’s visit to this area. To explain it more fully, I need to mention the relationship between the Netchillirmiut and the Ugjulirmiut. At that early time, the interaction between the Ugjulik and Netchillik tribes was not significant. No Europeans had ever been in their regions, which included Adelaide Peninsula and the southern shore of King William Land (Ross II, p. 317), but several individuals were known to the Netchillirmiut (p. 357) who had encountered them during trading trips. Additionally, a young single man from Ugjulik had been adopted by a Netchillirmio living on the eastern coast of King William Land and on Owutta Island (p. 355). When the Franklin expedition perished on King William Land in 1848, the Netchillirmiut had not yet ventured into that area. From Schwatka’s inquiries, we learn that the tribe that found Crozier and his companions did not migrate beyond Adelaide Peninsula and the southern shore of King William Land. In the summer of 1848, they tried unsuccessfully to cross Simpson Strait and were forced to remain on the island. They traveled throughout the region as far as Peel Inlet, across from Matty Island (Gilder, p. 91). Therefore, it is clear that the Netchillirmiut, up until the Franklin disaster, remained in their traditional territory, as the inhabitants of Boothia in 1859 had only heard indirect news of the shipwreck.
When the Ugjulirmiut obtained an enormous stock of metals and wood by the destruction of Franklin’s ships, the Netchillirmiut commenced to visit King William Land, in order to partake also of these riches. Thus they began, by degrees, to move westward, and became intermingled with the Ugjulirmiut. Hall mentions quite a number of Boothians who had met Ross on the eastern shore of the isthmus, though they were living on King William Land at that time (Hall II, p. 405). Besides, according to all accounts, the number of women is much smaller among the Netchillirmiut than that of men, and these are obliged to look for wives among the neighboring tribes, particularly among the Ugjulirmiut. As these do not differ in the fashion 457 of their clothing and tattooing from the Netchillirmiut, it is scarcely possible at the present time to separate the tribes. It is worth remarking, however, that Gilder and Klutschak use both terms, and therefore I conclude that the natives themselves are conscious of belonging to different tribes.
When the Ugjulirmiut got a huge supply of metals and wood from the destruction of Franklin’s ships, the Netchillirmiut started to visit King William Land to also benefit from these resources. They gradually began moving westward and mingling with the Ugjulirmiut. Hall notes a number of Boothians who had encountered Ross on the eastern shore of the isthmus, although they were living on King William Land at that time (Hall II, p. 405). Furthermore, according to all accounts, there are significantly fewer women among the Netchillirmiut compared to the men, leading them to seek wives from neighboring tribes, particularly the Ugjulirmiut. Since the two groups don’t differ in their clothing and tattooing styles, it’s nearly impossible to distinguish between the tribes today. It’s worth mentioning, however, that Gilder and Klutschak use both terms, which suggests that the natives themselves recognize their affiliation with different tribes.
Schwatka describes the limits of their territory as he learned them from his observations in the summer of 1879 (Science, December 19, 1884, p. 543). He found them on the mainland opposite King William Land and along the islands in the vicinity of Simpson Strait. They were most numerous along the northern shores of Adelaide Peninsula, their villages being scattered every few miles along the coast from Montreal Island to Smith Point. On the chart accompanying this account the eastern shore of the Back River estuary is included in the district inhabited by the Netchillirmiut.
Schwatka outlines the boundaries of their territory based on what he observed during the summer of 1879 (Science, December 19, 1884, p. 543). He identified them on the mainland across from King William Land and along the islands around Simpson Strait. They were most common along the northern coasts of Adelaide Peninsula, with their villages spaced a few miles apart from Montreal Island to Smith Point. The map that goes with this report shows that the eastern shore of the Back River estuary falls within the area occupied by the Netchillirmiut.
It is important to compare this description with the observations which were made by Hall in 1869. He found the first traces of natives at the very head of Shepherd Bay, where a sledge track was observed (p. 395). Near Point Acland several snow huts and a number of natives were met with on the 30th of April (p. 396). Farther west he found a village on Point Booth (p. 397), but the most interesting fact is that in May, 1869, the party had fresh salmon from Netchillik (p. 400). This statement is decisive of the question whether the Netchillirmiut still continued their visits to the isthmus from which they take their name.
It’s essential to compare this description with the observations made by Hall in 1869. He discovered the first signs of natives right at the head of Shepherd Bay, where a sledge track was noted (p. 395). Near Point Acland, several snow huts and a number of natives were encountered on April 30th (p. 396). Further west, he found a village at Point Booth (p. 397), but the most interesting detail is that in May 1869, the group had fresh salmon from Netchillik (p. 400). This statement settles the question of whether the Netchillirmiut continued their visits to the isthmus that carries their name.
From Klutschak’s journal a few more details may be gathered. From it we learn that in summer the Netchillirmiut scatter, and, while some go sealing near Montreal Island (p. 75), many others go inland to hunt deer in the lakes of the peninsula and farther south (p. 119). A third party resort to King William Land, the southern shore of which they frequent until September, while the more northern parts are seldom visited (p. 79). At this season they leave the island and all return to Adelaide Peninsula (p. 126). I suppose, however, that this report does not refer to the whole tribe, but that another party visited Shepherd Bay in winter. It seems to me very improbable that in the interval between 1869 and 1879 a total change should have occurred. In the spring they catch salmon, which are dried and stored to be used in winter. Their stock of blubber and deer meat is sufficient to last them during the greater part of the winter. At this season they fish only in holes made through the ice. Important winter settlements are at Point Richardson and at the outlet of Qimuqsuq (Sherman Inlet), where all the deer needed are caught in the fall while they are crossing the bay.
From Klutschak’s journal, we can gather a few more details. It tells us that in summer the Netchillirmiut spread out, with some sealing near Montreal Island (p. 75), while many others head inland to hunt deer in the lakes of the peninsula and further south (p. 119). A third group goes to King William Land, which they visit until September, while the more northern areas are rarely explored (p. 79). During this time, they leave the island and all return to Adelaide Peninsula (p. 126). However, I think this report doesn’t refer to the whole tribe, as another group likely visited Shepherd Bay in winter. It seems very unlikely that a complete change could have happened between 1869 and 1879. In the spring, they catch salmon, which they dry and store for winter use. Their supply of blubber and deer meat is enough to last for most of the winter. During this season, they only fish in holes cut through the ice. Important winter settlements are at Point Richardson and at the outlet of Qimuqsuq (Sherman Inlet), where they catch all the deer they need in the fall while they are crossing the bay.
Although these statements do not altogether harmonize, it appears, notwithstanding, that King William Land and Adelaide Peninsula, which were not visited by the tribe in the early part of our century, became its favorite hunting ground after the loss of the Franklin 458 expedition. Since that period the more northern parts of Boothia may have been abandoned by the natives, though no certain proof of this can be offered. Netchillik itself and the more southern parts were visited up to 1869, and probably they are yet inhabited by the Eskimo. This cannot be said with positiveness, however, for this part of the country has not been visited since the times of Ross and M’Clintock. The migration of the natives was caused, without doubt and as we have already remarked, by the profusion of metals and wood obtained from the wrecks and the starved traveling parties.
Although these statements don't completely align, it seems, nevertheless, that King William Land and Adelaide Peninsula, which the tribe didn't visit in the early part of our century, became their favorite hunting grounds after the loss of the Franklin 458 expedition. Since then, the more northern areas of Boothia may have been deserted by the natives, although there's no solid evidence to confirm this. Netchillik itself and the more southern areas were visited until 1869, and they probably are still inhabited by the Eskimo. However, we can't say this for sure, as this part of the country hasn't been visited since the times of Ross and M’Clintock. The migration of the natives was undoubtedly caused, as we have already mentioned, by the abundance of metals and wood gathered from the shipwrecks and the starving traveling parties.
The Ugjulirmiut.—
Several important facts regarding the Ugjulirmiut are mentioned above. Dease and Simpson found their first traces on the western shore of Adelaide Peninsula. From Ross’s account (I, p. 427) it appears that their territory was the same at that period as it is now, and M’Clintock’s meeting with them on the shore of King William Land may be adduced as a proof of this. Their old country is now inhabited by both Ugjulirmiut and Netchillirmiut. Therefore their mode of life is identical and requires no comment. Visits to the northern parts of King William Land have been very rare, but it was on one of these that Franklin’s ships were discovered (Klutschak). They rarely went hunting beyond Cape Herschel, but looked for driftwood on the northern shore of the island.
Several important facts about the Ugjulirmiut are mentioned above. Dease and Simpson found their first traces on the western shore of Adelaide Peninsula. From Ross’s account (I, p. 427), it seems that their territory back then was the same as it is now, and M’Clintock’s meeting with them on the shore of King William Land can be seen as evidence of this. Their old territory is currently inhabited by both the Ugjulirmiut and Netchillirmiut. Therefore, their way of life is the same and needs no further comment. Visits to the northern parts of King William Land have been very rare, but it was during one of these visits that Franklin’s ships were found (Klutschak). They seldom went hunting beyond Cape Herschel but looked for driftwood on the northern shore of the island.
The Ukusiksalirmiut.—
The last tribe of the Central Eskimo, the Ukusiksalirmiut, inhabit the estuary of Back River. They were met by Back and by Anderson and Stewart. Recently Schwatka and his party communicated with them on their visit to King William Land. Klutschak affirms that they are the remains of a strong tribe which formerly inhabited Adelaide Peninsula but was supplanted by the Netchillirmiut and the Ugjulirmiut. Klutschak calls them Ukusiksalik; Gilder, sometimes Ukusiksalik, sometimes Ugjulik. The latter author relates that a single family living on Hayes River (Kugnuaq) had formerly had its station on Adelaide Peninsula, but had retired to this country when the warlike Netchillirmiut began to visit King William Land and Adelaide Peninsula. Schwatka could identify the same man with one of those whom Back had seen in the estuary of the river in 1833 (Gilder, p. 78). Therefore they must have lived in this district a long time before the Netchillirmiut began to move westward. According to Back the party with which he fell in did not know the land beyond the estuary of Back River, which indicates that they were neither from Ugjulik nor Netchillik. As the Ugjulirmiut lived on Adelaide Peninsula when Ross wintered in Boothia, I do not consider it probable that the Ukusiksalirmiut ever lived in that part of the country, and I cannot agree with Klutschak. I may add Parry’s remark, that beyond Ukusiksalik (Wager River) another Ukusiksalik (Back River) was known to the natives of Winter Island.
The last tribe of the Central Eskimo, the Ukusiksalirmiut, lives at the estuary of Back River. They were encountered by Back, Anderson, and Stewart. Recently, Schwatka and his group made contact with them during their visit to King William Land. Klutschak states that they are remnants of a strong tribe that once inhabited Adelaide Peninsula but was displaced by the Netchillirmiut and the Ugjulirmiut. Klutschak refers to them as Ukusiksalik; Gilder sometimes calls them Ukusiksalik and sometimes Ugjulik. The latter mentions that a single family living on Hayes River (Kugnuaq) previously had their home on Adelaide Peninsula but moved to this area when the aggressive Netchillirmiut started coming to King William Land and Adelaide Peninsula. Schwatka could identify the same individual as one of those Back had seen at the river’s estuary in 1833 (Gilder, p. 78). This indicates they must have lived in this region long before the Netchillirmiut began to move west. According to Back, the group he encountered didn’t know the land beyond the estuary of Back River, suggesting they weren’t from Ugjulik or Netchillik. Since the Ugjulirmiut lived on Adelaide Peninsula when Ross wintered in Boothia, I find it unlikely that the Ukusiksalirmiut ever resided in that area, and I disagree with Klutschak. Additionally, I should mention Parry’s observation that beyond Ukusiksalik (Wager River), another Ukusiksalik (Back River) was known to the natives of Winter Island.
The reports on their mode of life are very deficient. They were met by Schwatka a little above the great bend of Hayes River in May, 1879; he also met another party in December at the Dangerous Rapids of Back River. Schwatka counted seven families at the former and nine at the latter place. Their principal food consisted of fish, which are caught in abundance in Back River (Klutschak, p. 164). It is said that they have no fuel during the winter. Undoubtedly they use some kind of fuel, and I rather doubt the implication that they do not hunt seals at all. The musk ox and fish, however, are their main food, according to both Klutschak and Gilder. It is very remarkable that all the natives west of Boothia depend much more on fish than do any other tribes of the Central Eskimo.
The reports about their way of life are quite lacking. Schwatka encountered them just above the great bend of Hayes River in May 1879; he also met another group in December at the Dangerous Rapids of Back River. Schwatka noted seven families at the former location and nine at the latter. Their main food came from fish, which are plentiful in Back River (Klutschak, p. 164). It’s said they have no fuel during the winter. Clearly, they do use some kind of fuel, and I find it hard to believe that they don’t hunt seals at all. The musk ox and fish, however, are their primary sources of food, according to both Klutschak and Gilder. It's quite striking that all the natives west of Boothia rely much more on fish than any other tribes of the Central Eskimo.
A word in regard to the roads used in the intercourse between the tribes. From Akugdlit a road leads over the lakes of Simpson Peninsula to Pelly Bay. Rae and Hall traveled over it on their journeys to the northwest and it was used by the Sinimiut when they visited Repulse Bay in 1866. From Pelly Bay two roads lead to Netchillik and the estuary of Back River, the one following the east shore of the Boothia, the other running to Lake Simpson, whence the valley of Murchison River facilitates the access to Inglis Bay. The Isthmus of Boothia is crossed by the two chains of lakes discovered by Ross. In visiting the northeastern part of the peninsula the natives ascend Stanley River and cross the lakes farther north. Between Netchillik and Ugjulik the Eskimo pass by Owutta Island to Peel Inlet, whence they travel overland to the south shore of King William Land and cross Simpson Strait. Another road leads from Cape Colville to Matheson Point, following the south shore of King William Land. In traveling from Ugjulik to Back River they use Sherman Inlet and the adjoining isthmus. It is probable that Back River is visited by natives belonging to Wager River. The existence of a communication between Back River and Chesterfield Inlet is proved by Anderson and Stewart, who found Eskimo at Lake Garry, and by a remark of Klutschak (p. 170), who learned from a native of Back River that Chesterfield Inlet could be reached from the upper part of that river. It is quite probable that thus an immediate though limited intercourse is kept up between the Kinipetu and the Ukusiksalirmiut.
A note about the routes used for interaction between the tribes. From Akugdlit, there's a path that goes over the lakes of Simpson Peninsula to Pelly Bay. Rae and Hall traveled along this route during their journeys to the northwest, and the Sinimiut used it when they visited Repulse Bay in 1866. From Pelly Bay, two routes lead to Netchillik and the estuary of Back River: one along the east shore of Boothia, and the other towards Lake Simpson, where the Murchison River valley makes it easier to reach Inglis Bay. The Isthmus of Boothia is crossed by two chains of lakes discovered by Ross. When visiting the northeastern part of the peninsula, the natives go up Stanley River and cross the lakes further north. Between Netchillik and Ugjulik, the Eskimos travel by Owutta Island to Peel Inlet, where they continue overland to the south shore of King William Land and cross Simpson Strait. Another path leads from Cape Colville to Matheson Point, following the south shore of King William Land. When traveling from Ugjulik to Back River, they use Sherman Inlet and the nearby isthmus. It's likely that natives from Wager River visit Back River. The connection between Back River and Chesterfield Inlet is confirmed by Anderson and Stewart, who found Eskimos at Lake Garry, and a comment from Klutschak (p. 170), who learned from a native of Back River that Chesterfield Inlet could be accessed from the upper part of that river. It's quite possible that there is a direct, though limited, interaction maintained between the Kinipetu and the Ukusiksalirmiut.
SMITH SOUND.
The natives of Ellesmere Land.—
Last of all I have to mention the natives of Ellesmere Land and those of North Greenland. Although the latter are not generally considered as belonging to the central tribes, I find that their habits and their implements resemble those of the Central Eskimo rather than those of the Greenlanders, 460 and therefore a brief mention of them will not be inappropriate. The inhabitants of Umingman Nuna (Ellesmere Land) probably live on the southern shore, near the western part of Jones Sound, and, according to Bessel’s and my own inquiries, they travel all around this island, passing by Hayes Sound.
Lastly, I need to talk about the natives of Ellesmere Land and those from North Greenland. Even though the latter aren’t usually thought of as part of the central tribes, I observe that their habits and tools are more similar to those of the Central Eskimos than to those of the Greenlanders, 460 so a quick mention of them makes sense. The people of Umingman Nuna (Ellesmere Land) likely live along the southern coast, close to the western part of Jones Sound, and based on Bessel’s and my research, they travel all around this island, passing by Hayes Sound.
The North Greenlanders.—
The North Greenlanders live in the sounds of the peninsula between Melville Bay and Kane Basin, hunting seals on the smooth floes of the bays and pursuing walrus at the floe edges. They make large deposits of the blubber and meat obtained in the fall, on which they live during the winter. They also pursue seals in winter with the harpoon. In summer they hunt reindeer on the mountains adjoining the inland ice.
The North Greenlanders live in the inlets of the peninsula between Melville Bay and Kane Basin, hunting seals on the flat ice of the bays and chasing walrus at the edges of the ice. They store a lot of the blubber and meat they collect in the fall, which they rely on during the winter. They also hunt seals in winter using harpoons. In summer, they hunt reindeer on the mountains next to the inland ice.
INFLUENCE OF GEOGRAPHICAL CONDITIONS UPON THE DISTRIBUTION OF THE SETTLEMENTS.
In considering the distribution of the tribes it is evident that they are settled wherever extensive floes afford a good sealing ground during the winter. The Sikosuilarmiut live on the large bay east of King Cape, which is sheltered by numerous islands. The Akuliarmiut are settled near Lesseps and North Bays. I am unable to say whether there is a floe near the winter settlement of the Qaumauangmiut, as there are no reports upon the subject. Probably ice is formed in the sound, which is protected by the Middle Savage Islands, and besides it may be that the natives move to North Bay. The important tribe of Nugumiut lives on Frobisher Bay and the adjoining Grinnell and Field Bays. On the largest floe of this part of the country, in Cumberland Sound, including Lake Nettilling, the largest tribe is settled: the Oqomiut. On Davis Strait ice floes are formed between Cape Mickleham and Cape Mercy, in Exeter Sound, and between Okan and Bylot Island. The tribes are distributed accordingly: the Saumingmiut of Ukiadliving, the inhabitants of Qarmaqdjuin with their winter settlement in Exeter Sound, and the Padlimiut and the Akudnirmiut farther north. The immense land floe of Davis Strait is not so valuable a hunting ground for the Eskimo as Cumberland Sound, the ice being very rough a few miles from the coast and at some places even close inshore. When the sea begins to freeze in the fall the newly formed ice is broken up by severe gales and by the currents and is piled up into high hummocks before it consolidates. The sealing on rough ice during the winter is very difficult and unsuccessful, as it is hard to find the breathing holes and the traveling is very laborious. It is only in the northern parts of Home Bay and in the large fjords that smooth ice is formed. The settlements of the natives are manifestly distributed in accordance with these facts. In every place where smooth ice is formed we find that natives either are settled or have been settled. Aqbirtijung, River Clyde, Ijellirtung, 461 Home Bay, Brodie Bay, Merchant Bay, and Padli are the only places along the shore of Davis Strait where smooth ice occurs. On the long shores between them, which are unsheltered from winds and currents, the ice is always very hummocky, and, therefore, the natives do not settle upon them in the winter. In the far north, extensive floes of smooth ice are formed in Eclipse Sound and Admiralty Inlet.
In looking at where the tribes are located, it's clear they are settled wherever large ice floes provide good sealing grounds during the winter. The Sikosuilarmiut live by the big bay east of King Cape, which is sheltered by many islands. The Akuliarmiut are settled near Lesseps and North Bays. I'm not sure if there’s a floe close to the Qaumauangmiut's winter settlement since I haven't seen any reports on it. It’s likely that ice forms in the sound, which is protected by the Middle Savage Islands, and it’s possible that the locals move to North Bay. The significant tribe of Nugumiut resides on Frobisher Bay and the nearby Grinnell and Field Bays. The largest tribe, the Oqomiut, is settled on the biggest floe in this region, in Cumberland Sound, including Lake Nettilling. In Davis Strait, ice floes form between Cape Mickleham and Cape Mercy, in Exeter Sound, and between Okan and Bylot Island. The tribes are spread out as follows: the Saumingmiut of Ukiadliving, the people of Qarmaqdjuin with their winter settlement in Exeter Sound, and the Padlimiut and the Akudnirmiut further north. The huge land floe in Davis Strait isn't as valuable a hunting ground for the Eskimo as Cumberland Sound, with the ice being very rough a few miles from the coast and in some places right near the shore. When the ocean starts to freeze in the fall, the newly formed ice gets broken up by strong winds and currents and gets piled up into high hummocks before it solidifies. Hunting seals on rough ice during the winter is very challenging and often unsuccessful because it's hard to find the breathing holes, and traveling on it is quite laborious. Only in the northern parts of Home Bay and in the large fjords does smooth ice form. The natives' settlements are clearly located based on these conditions. Wherever smooth ice forms, we find that natives either live there or have lived there. Aqbirtijung, River Clyde, Ijellirtung, 461 Home Bay, Brodie Bay, Merchant Bay, and Padli are the only spots along the shore of Davis Strait where smooth ice occurs. The long stretches in between, which are exposed to winds and currents, always have very hummocky ice, so the natives don’t settle there in the winter. In the far north, extensive smooth ice floes form in Eclipse Sound and Admiralty Inlet.
Concerning the country farther west the reports are rather scanty. The southwest shore of Baffin Land and the eastern entrance of Fury and Hecla Strait are always frozen over and afford a good hunting ground. On the mainland, the large floes of Repulse Bay and Wager River, Chesterfield Inlet and the bights all around it, Pelly Bay and the narrow bays adjoining Boothia Peninsula, and the mouth of Back River are important places for the distribution of the Eskimo.
Concerning the country further west, the reports are quite limited. The southwest coast of Baffin Land and the eastern entrance of Fury and Hecla Strait are always frozen and provide a great hunting area. On the mainland, the large ice floes of Repulse Bay and Wager River, Chesterfield Inlet and the nearby bays, Pelly Bay, and the narrow bays surrounding Boothia Peninsula, as well as the mouth of Back River, are key areas for the distribution of the Eskimo.
There are only a few districts where the proximity of open water favors walrus hunting during the winter, and all of these have neighboring floes on which seals may be hunted with the harpoon. These places are Sikosuilaq, Akuliaq, Frobisher Bay, Iglulik, the west shore of Hudson Bay, and Smith Sound. As to the remainder the Eskimo live altogether independent of the open water during the winter.
There are only a few areas where being close to open water makes walrus hunting easier in the winter, and all of these spots have nearby ice floes where seals can be hunted with a harpoon. These places are Sikosuilaq, Akuliaq, Frobisher Bay, Iglulik, the west shore of Hudson Bay, and Smith Sound. In the rest of the areas, the Eskimo live completely independently of open water during the winter.
Generally speaking, two conditions are required for winter settlements, viz, the existence of an extensive floe and smooth ice.
Generally speaking, two conditions are needed for winter settlements: the presence of a large ice floe and smooth ice.
The different mode of hunting in the spring causes a different distribution of the settlements. During this season those regions which had been deserted during the winter are most visited by the hunters. On light dog sledges they travel over the rough ice and along the shores of the fjords and islands. The natives who lived in large settlements during the winter are spread over the whole country, in order that every one may have a better chance of traveling over his own hunting ground. In a few places the young sealing induces the Eskimo to leave the winter settlements; in other places the kayaks are prepared for visiting the floe edge, and bears and the returning birds are hunted.
The different way of hunting in the spring leads to a different arrangement of the settlements. During this season, the areas that were empty over the winter get a lot of visits from the hunters. They travel on light dog sleds over the rough ice and along the edges of the fjords and islands. The locals who lived in large groups during the winter are now spread out across the country so that everyone can have a better chance to access their own hunting grounds. In some areas, the young seals encourage the Eskimos to leave their winter homes; in other areas, kayaks are readied to visit the floe edge, where they hunt for bears and the returning birds.
Though the greater variety of food which is to be obtained and the difference in the methods of hunting in the spring require the dispersion over a wide area of the families which had kept together during the winter, the selection of places for the new settlements remains wholly dependent upon the state of the ice.
Though the greater variety of food available and the different hunting methods in the spring require families that stayed together during winter to spread out over a wide area, the choice of locations for new settlements still completely depends on the condition of the ice.
After the ice breaks up, the distribution of the deer regulates the location of the summer settlements. While during the winter the state of the ice is of decisive importance, the orography of the land comes now into consideration.
After the ice melts, where the deer are located determines where the summer settlements will be. While the condition of the ice is crucial in winter, the landscape features play a key role now.
Wherever deep valleys give access to an extensive area, wherever practicable roads enable the natives to ascend the plateaus, summer settlements are established. The heads of the fjords are favorite 462 places, as they abound with salmon. The adjoining valleys and the peninsulas which they form give the best chances for a successful deer hunt. These facts are most apparent on the coast of the steep highland of Nugumiut, over which numerous herds of deer roam.
Wherever deep valleys provide access to a large area, and where feasible roads allow the locals to move up to the plateaus, summer camps are set up. The heads of the fjords are popular spots since they are full of salmon. The nearby valleys and the peninsulas they create offer the best opportunities for a successful deer hunt. These facts are especially noticeable along the steep highlands of Nugumiut, where many herds of deer roam.
A great influence is also exerted by the extensive plains of the western part of Baffin Land, which abound in deer. We observe that a number of tribes visit these districts, though their winter stations are at a great distance. The Akuliarmiut of Hudson Strait and the Nugumiut travel to Lake Amaqdjuaq, the Oqomiut stay on Lake Nettilling, and the Akudnirmiut visit Majoraridjen. In the same way all the tribes of Hudson Bay visit the land farther west, which is frequented by herds of the musk ox, and they go even as far as Back River. This important fact shows the attraction which is exerted by a rich country on all the tribes of the neighboring districts.
A significant influence also comes from the vast plains in the western part of Baffin Land, which are full of deer. We see that several tribes come to these areas, even though their winter homes are far away. The Akuliarmiut from Hudson Strait and the Nugumiut travel to Lake Amaqdjuaq, the Oqomiut stay at Lake Nettilling, and the Akudnirmiut visit Majoraridjen. Similarly, all the tribes around Hudson Bay explore the land further west, which is inhabited by herds of musk oxen, and they go as far as Back River. This key detail highlights the pull that a rich land has on all the tribes in surrounding areas.
TRADE AND INTERCOURSE BETWEEN THE TRIBES.
In treating of the single tribes, the routes were mentioned which are followed by the natives as they travel from shore to shore and from settlement to settlement. These routes are established by tradition and the Eskimo never stray from them. In order to obtain a more thorough understanding of the migrations of single individuals and of families, the relations between the tribes and the settlements must be discussed.
In discussing the individual tribes, the paths used by the natives as they travel from one shore to another and from one settlement to another were noted. These paths are traditional, and the Eskimo stick to them. To gain a better understanding of the migrations of individuals and families, we need to look at the relationships between the tribes and the settlements.
By the lively intercourse which is always kept up between the settlements, it cannot fail that marriages between members of different tribes should be of frequent occurrence and that many ties of affinity and consanguinity should thus be created. These relations, however, as distances increase, quickly become less common. For instance, in Cumberland Sound three people are found belonging to Tununirn, about ten belonging to Akudnirn, and quite a number coming from Padli. Also, two Sikosuilarmiut live there, a few natives of Akuliaq and Qaumauang, and very many Nugumiut. Hall’s accounts concerning the Nugumiut and the Aivillirmiut prove a similar proportion of strange natives among these tribes. Every tribe may be said to bring together its immediate neighbors, as it is closely related to them, while those which are separated by the tribe itself are strangers to one another. The importance of this mediate position is regulated by the strength of the tribe, by the significance of the country in reference to its produce, and by the routes crossing it.
Through the constant interactions between the settlements, it's no surprise that marriages between members of different tribes happen often, creating many family ties and connections. However, as distances increase, these relationships quickly become less common. For example, in Cumberland Sound, three people are from Tununirn, about ten are from Akudnirn, and quite a few are from Padli. Additionally, there are two Sikosuilarmiut living there, a few natives from Akuliaq and Qaumauang, and many Nugumiut. Hall's accounts regarding the Nugumiut and the Aivillirmiut show a similar ratio of outsiders among these tribes. Each tribe can be said to connect with its immediate neighbors, as it shares a close relationship with them, while those separated by the tribe itself remain strangers to one another. The significance of this intermediary position is determined by the strength of the tribe, the importance of the land in terms of its resources, and the pathways that run through it.
Thus, the Sikosuilarmiut and the Nuratamiut are closely connected, and may be considered as forming one group with the Akuliarmiut. The Sikosuilarmiut have intercourse with the Igdlumiut, the inhabitants of the northern shore of Labrador. According to Lucien M. Turner, three tribes may be distinguished there as inhabiting the 463 shores of Ungava Bay and the eastern shore of Hudson Bay. This report differs somewhat from the accounts of the Moravian missionaries who have intercourse with the inhabitants of Ungava Bay near Cape Chidleigh. From their reports four tribes may be distinguished: the Kangivamiut of George River, the Kouksoarmiut of Big River, the Ungavamiut of Hope Advance Bay (which is properly named Ungava), and the Itivimiut of Hudson Bay. I am rather undecided whether Ungava is a bay or a large strait separating Cape Wolstenholme and the adjacent land from the continent, as the name Ungava is also reported south of Cape Wolstenholme. The inhabitants of this shore are the Itivimiut of the Labrador Eskimo and the Igdlumiut of the natives of Baffin Land. Probably the intercourse between Sikosuilaq and Cape Wolstenholme is of no great importance. The Sikosuilarmiut visit Trinity Islands (Nannuragassain) in skin boats to hunt walrus and cross by the three islands Tudjaraaq´djung, Akugdlirn, and Tudjaqdjuara´lung to the opposite shore of Hudson Strait. The passage across the strait is considered very dangerous, and therefore is rarely undertaken. The natives do not utter a single word during the long passage; they believe a destructive gale might be conjured up if they did. Only once have natives been met with on Salisbury Island (Lyon, Attempt to reach Repulse Bay, p. 128), but it is doubtful whether they belonged to the northern or to the southern shore of the strait. As for the rest, the passage is only known to me by reports I received in Cumberland Sound, which were confirmed by the whalers visiting the northern shore of Hudson Strait. I do not know whether any intercourse exists between Sikosuilaq and Southampton Island. It is worth remarking that on Mansfield Island numerous ruins of Eskimo habitations have been found (Gordon, Report on the Hudson’s Bay Expedition, 1884, p. 38).
Thus, the Sikosuilarmiut and the Nuratamiut are closely connected and can be seen as one group along with the Akuliarmiut. The Sikosuilarmiut engage with the Igdlumiut, who live on the northern shore of Labrador. According to Lucien M. Turner, three tribes can be identified in that area as living along the 463 shores of Ungava Bay and the eastern shore of Hudson Bay. This report differs a bit from the accounts of the Moravian missionaries who interact with the people of Ungava Bay near Cape Chidleigh. From their reports, four tribes can be identified: the Kangivamiut of George River, the Kouksoarmiut of Big River, the Ungavamiut of Hope Advance Bay (properly called Ungava), and the Itivimiut of Hudson Bay. I am somewhat unsure whether Ungava is a bay or a large strait that separates Cape Wolstenholme and the nearby land from the continent, as the name Ungava also appears south of Cape Wolstenholme. The people living along this shore are the Itivimiut of the Labrador Eskimo and the Igdlumiut of the natives from Baffin Land. The interaction between Sikosuilaq and Cape Wolstenholme probably isn't very significant. The Sikosuilarmiut travel to Trinity Islands (Nannuragassain) in skin boats to hunt walrus and cross via the three islands Tudjaraaq´djung, Akugdlirn, and Tudjaqdjuara´lung to the opposite shore of Hudson Strait. The journey across the strait is considered very dangerous, and as a result, it is rarely attempted. The natives don’t say a single word during the long journey; they believe that speaking might summon a destructive gale. Only once have natives been encountered on Salisbury Island (Lyon, Attempt to reach Repulse Bay, p. 128), but it is uncertain whether they belonged to the northern or the southern shore of the strait. As for the rest, I only know about the passage from reports I received in Cumberland Sound, which were confirmed by the whalers visiting the northern shore of Hudson Strait. I do not know if there is any interaction between Sikosuilaq and Southampton Island. It’s worth noting that numerous ruins of Eskimo habitations have been found on Mansfield Island (Gordon, Report on the Hudson’s Bay Expedition, 1884, p. 38).
The Qaumauangmiut are connected with the Nugumiut in the same manner as with the Akuliarmiut, and many are said to winter near North Bay, which is also visited by the Akuliarmiut. From Hall’s reports it would appear that many are settled in Frobisher Bay.
The Qaumauangmiut are linked to the Nugumiut in the same way they are with the Akuliarmiut, and many are said to spend the winter near North Bay, which is also frequented by the Akuliarmiut. According to Hall’s reports, it seems that many have settled in Frobisher Bay.
At present the intercourse between the Nugumiut and the Oqomiut is of no significance, as many years may pass without a journey being made from one tribe to the other. Formerly, when many whalers visited Cumberland Sound and Field Bay, a number of Nugumiut immigrated to the sound, and consequently almost half of the Eskimo now settled on the western shore of Cumberland Sound were born in Nugumiut or Ukadliq. At the same time many Oqomiut settled among the Nugumiut. That period was doubtless an exceptional one; at any rate, the long stretch of uninhabited shore between the settlements of the two tribes is not favorable to intimate intercourse. Indeed, even now the Nugumiut are considered strangers in the sound, and, notwithstanding the existence of many intermarriages between the tribes, a number of families are not at all acquainted 464 with one another. It is remarkable that the number of natives born in Nugumiut is much larger on the western shore than on the eastern. They seem to have joined their nearest neighbors, the southern Talirpingmiut, perhaps for the reason that in their district the geographic character of the land is most similar to that of Frobisher Bay. The number of Nugumiut settled among the inhabitants of Nettilling Fjord and among the Kingnaitmiut is far less. Among the Saumingmiut there is no one who has traveled beyond Naujateling, and in Padli or farther north there are very few individuals who have been south of Cumberland Sound. It is only by careful consideration of the birthplace of the different individuals who are members of the settlements of Cumberland Sound that it is possible at the present time to detect the former division of the Oqomiut into subtribes. The inhabitants of the eastern shore are related to the Padlimiut and the Akudnirmiut; those of the western shore, to the Nugumiut. In 1840 a brisk intercourse existed between Padli and the sound (Eenoolooapik, p. 81), and probably sledges crossed the peninsula every winter. Though the intercourse is not so intimate to-day as it is between the settlements of the sound, it is yet active. The Kingnaitmiut form the medium of the regular intercourse between Saumia and Padli, while families removing to Akudnirn travel along the shore of Davis Strait. Among the subtribes of the Oqomiut the Saumingmiut are most nearly related to the Padlimiut and extend their migrations farthest to the north.
Right now, the interactions between the Nugumiut and the Oqomiut don’t really matter, since many years can go by without anyone traveling from one tribe to the other. In the past, when a lot of whalers came to Cumberland Sound and Field Bay, many Nugumiut moved to the sound, which means that nearly half of the Eskimos currently living on the western shore of Cumberland Sound were born in Nugumiut or Ukadliq. At the same time, many Oqomiut settled among the Nugumiut. That time was certainly unique; in any case, the long stretch of uninhabited coastline between the two tribes isn’t ideal for close contact. Even now, the Nugumiut are still seen as outsiders in the sound, and despite many intermarriages between the tribes, there are several families that don’t know each other at all. It’s notable that the number of natives born in Nugumiut is significantly higher on the western shore than on the eastern. They seem to have joined their closest neighbors, the southern Talirpingmiut, possibly because the landscape in their area closely resembles that of Frobisher Bay. The number of Nugumiut living among the people of Nettilling Fjord and the Kingnaitmiut is much lower. Among the Saumingmiut, no one has traveled beyond Naujateling, and in Padli or further north, there are very few people who have been south of Cumberland Sound. Only by carefully examining where different individuals from the Cumberland Sound settlements were born can we currently identify the former divisions of the Oqomiut into subtribes. The people on the eastern shore are related to the Padlimiut and the Akudnirmiut; those on the western shore are linked to the Nugumiut. In 1840, there was a lively exchange between Padli and the sound (Eenoolooapik, p. 81), and it’s likely that sledges crossed the peninsula every winter. While the interactions aren’t as close today as they used to be between the settlements in the sound, they are still active. The Kingnaitmiut act as the regular link between Saumia and Padli, while families moving to Akudnirn travel along the coast of Davis Strait. Among the subtribes of the Oqomiut, the Saumingmiut are most closely related to the Padlimiut and extend their migrations farthest north.
The Akudnirmiut, who are closely connected with the Padlimiut, are considered strangers by the Oqomiut. The intercourse between the Akudnirmiut and the Aggomiut is not very frequent, and seems to be maintained as irregularly as that between the Nugumiut and the Oqomiut.
The Akudnirmiut, who have a strong link with the Padlimiut, are seen as outsiders by the Oqomiut. Interactions between the Akudnirmiut and the Aggomiut are infrequent and appear to be as irregular as those between the Nugumiut and the Oqomiut.
The inhabitants of the northern sounds and of Fury and Hecla Strait frequently visit one another. Parry mentions a number of journeys in each direction (II, p. 436). Hall found natives of Tununirn and Tununirusirn settled in Iglulik (II, p. 356). I myself found two Iglulirmiut among the Akudnirmiut. The intercourse seems to have been always very active, and consequently those tribes may be considered as one group.
The people living in the northern sounds and Fury and Hecla Strait often visit each other. Parry lists several trips made in both directions (II, p. 436). Hall discovered natives from Tununirn and Tununirusirn living in Iglulik (II, p. 356). I personally found two Iglulirmiut among the Akudnirmiut. The interactions have always been very active, so these tribes can be seen as one group.
The inhabitants of North Devon belong to the Tununirusirmiut, a few families of this tribe sometimes settling on the island and after a few years’ absence returning to their former home.
The people of North Devon are part of the Tununirusirmiut tribe. Some families from this tribe occasionally settle on the island and return to their original home after a few years away.
From Parry’s, Hall’s, and Schwatka’s reports it appears that the Aivillirmiut are closely related to the Iglulirmiut, while the Eskimo of Chesterfield Inlet, the Agutit or Kinipetu, form a separate group.
From Parry’s, Hall’s, and Schwatka’s reports, it seems that the Aivillirmiut are closely related to the Iglulirmiut, while the Eskimo from Chesterfield Inlet, the Agutit or Kinipetu, make up a separate group.
It is remarkable that between the tribes of Hudson Bay and the more western ones a deep distrust exists, which prevents a frequent and unlimited intercourse. The Sinimiut and Netchillirmiut are 465 feared by the Aivillirmiut, though intermarriages and removals from one tribe to the other are not rare. No doubt they are less closely related than are the neighboring tribes hitherto mentioned. Unfortunately, too little is known of the western tribes to admit of a decided opinion whether or not there exists an important difference in customs and habits. The Sinimiut, the Netchillirmiut, and the Ugjulirmiut may be comprised in one group, for they all hold frequent intercourse with one another and the last two even inhabit the same region at the present time. The change which the relations between these tribes have undergone since 1833 has already been referred to, as has their intercourse with the Ukusiksalirmiut. Schwatka (Science, Vol. IV, p. 543) states that they occasionally meet the Qidneliq of Coronation Bay, but that both tribes distrust each other. Our knowledge about the migrations from North Devon to Ellesmere Land and North Greenland is very scanty, but it is necessary to mention its existence.
It's striking that there's a deep distrust between the tribes of Hudson Bay and those further west, which hinders frequent and open interactions. The Sinimiut and Netchillirmiut are 465 feared by the Aivillirmiut, even though intermarriage and movement between tribes aren't uncommon. They're probably less closely related than the neighboring tribes mentioned earlier. Unfortunately, we don't know enough about the western tribes to form a clear opinion on whether significant differences in customs and habits exist. The Sinimiut, Netchillirmiut, and Ugjulirmiut can be grouped together, as they often interact with each other, and the latter two even live in the same area currently. The changes in the relationships between these tribes since 1833 have already been noted, as have their interactions with the Ukusiksalirmiut. Schwatka (Science, Vol. IV, p. 543) mentions that they sometimes meet the Qidneliq of Coronation Bay, but that there’s mutual distrust between the two tribes. Our understanding of the migrations from North Devon to Ellesmere Land and North Greenland is very limited, but it's important to acknowledge that they occurred.
Between tribes that are strangers to one another ceremonies of greeting are customary which are not adapted to facilitate intercourse. The ceremonies will be described further on (see p. 609). For the present it will be sufficient to say that duels, with varying details, are common between a stranger and a man of the tribe, and these sometimes result in the death of the former.
Between tribes that don't know each other, greeting ceremonies are common, but they're not meant to make communication easier. The details of these ceremonies will be discussed later (see p. 609). For now, it's enough to say that duels, with different specifics, often happen between a stranger and a member of the tribe, and sometimes these duels lead to the death of the stranger.
Among neighboring tribes these ceremonies are dispensed with, for instance, between the Padlimiut and Oqomiut, Padlimiut and Akudnirmiut, while a Nugumio or an Akudnirmio unknown in Oqo has there to go through the whole of the performance. The exception in favor of the former tribes is doubtless due to the frequent intermarriages with those tribes, whereby a constant acquaintance is kept up.
Among neighboring tribes, these ceremonies are skipped; for example, between the Padlimiut and Oqomiut, as well as the Padlimiut and Akudnirmiut. However, a Nugumio or Akudnirmio who is unfamiliar in Oqo must go through the entire performance. The exception for the former tribes is likely due to the frequent intermarriages with those tribes, which helps maintain a continual familiarity.
Real wars or fights between settlements, I believe, have never happened, but contests have always been confined to single families. The last instance of a feud which has come to my knowledge occurred about seventy years ago. At that time a great number of Eskimo lived at Niutang, in Kingnait Fjord, and many men of this settlement had been murdered by a Qinguamio of Anarnitung. For this reason the men of Niutang united in a sledge journey to Anarnitung to revenge the death of their companions. They hid themselves behind the ground ice and killed the returning hunter with their arrows. All hostilities have probably been of a similar character.
I don’t think real wars or fights between communities have ever taken place, but conflicts have always been limited to individual families. The last feud I’m aware of happened about seventy years ago. Back then, a large number of Eskimos lived in Niutang, in Kingnait Fjord, and many men from that settlement had been killed by a Qinguamio from Anarnitung. Because of this, the men from Niutang came together for a sled journey to Anarnitung to get revenge for their fallen friends. They concealed themselves behind the ground ice and shot the returning hunter with their arrows. All conflicts have likely followed a similar pattern.
One tradition only refers to a real fight between the tribes. On the steep island Sagdluaqdjung, near Naujateling, ruins of huts are found on the level summit. They are said to have been built by Eskimo who lived by the seashore and were attacked by a hostile tribe of inlanders. The tradition says that they defended themselves with bows and arrows, and with bowlders which they rolled down upon the enemy. The occurrence of huts upon the top of an island is very unusual, and this tradition is the only one referring to any kind of fights or wars. Even the tradition of the expulsion of the Tornit a 466 fabulous tribe said to have lived with the Eskimo on these shores, does not refer to a combat. The details of this tradition will be found in a subsequent chapter.
One tradition talks about an actual conflict between the tribes. On the steep island of Sagdluaqdjung, near Naujateling, there are ruins of huts on the flat top. It's believed these were built by Eskimos who lived by the sea and were attacked by a rival inland tribe. The story goes that they defended themselves with bows and arrows, as well as boulders that they rolled down onto their attackers. It's quite unusual to find huts on the top of an island, and this tradition is the only one that mentions any kind of fights or wars. Even the story of the expulsion of the Tornit, a legendary tribe said to have lived alongside the Eskimos on these shores, doesn't mention any battle. Details of this tradition can be found in a later chapter.
I wish to state here that my inquiries and my understanding of the facts as they have been reported by other travelers do not agree with the opinions given by Klutschak (Deutsche Rundschau für Geographie und Statistik, III, p. 418), who claims for the Eskimo of the west shore of Hudson Bay reservations which are limited by precise lines of demarkation. In comparing this statement with his own and with Gilder’s narratives I am led to believe that the relations between the tribes are the same in these regions as they are farther east. This opinion is strengthened by Dall’s remarks on the Alaska tribes (Science, p. 228, 1885).
I want to clarify that my research and understanding of the facts reported by other travelers do not align with the views expressed by Klutschak (Deutsche Rundschau für Geographie und Statistik, III, p. 418), who asserts that the Eskimo on the west shore of Hudson Bay have boundaries marked by specific lines. When I compare this statement to his own and Gilder’s accounts, I believe that the relationships between the tribes in these areas are similar to those further east. This viewpoint is further supported by Dall’s comments on the Alaska tribes (Science, p. 228, 1885).
The reasons for the frequent removals of individual Eskimo to strange tribes are to be looked for in the customs of the natives. I can only mention here that intermarriage, adoption, and the fear of blood vengeance are the principal ones.
The reasons for the frequent removals of individual Eskimo to unfamiliar tribes can be found in the customs of the natives. I can only mention that intermarriage, adoption, and the fear of blood vengeance are the main ones.
It is peculiar to the migratory habits of the Eskimo that almost without exception the old man returns to the country of his youth, and consequently by far the greater part of the old people live in their native districts.
It’s interesting about the migratory habits of the Eskimo that almost without fail, older men return to the region where they grew up, and as a result, most elderly people live in their hometowns.
During the last decades the most important inducement to removals has been the presence of the whalers in certain parts of the country. Since the beginning of our century their fleets have visited the west shore of Baffin Bay and Davis Strait, and thus European manufactures have found their way to the inhospitable shores of the Arctic Sea. The most valuable objects which were bartered were metals and wood. The value of the former may be seen in its economical application for knives and harpoon heads. By means of this trade the Akudnirmiut and the Tununirmiut became far superior to the Oqomiut and the Iglulirmiut, with whom they traded extensively in dogs, skins, &c. The Akuliarmiut and the Qaumauangmiut also enjoyed the advantages which accrued from trade with the ships of the Hudson Bay Company.
During the last few decades, the main reason for relocations has been the presence of whalers in certain areas of the country. Since the start of this century, their fleets have visited the west coast of Baffin Bay and Davis Strait, bringing European goods to the harsh shores of the Arctic Sea. The most valuable items traded were metals and wood. The value of metals is evident in their practical use for making knives and harpoon heads. Through this trade, the Akudnirmiut and the Tununirmiut became much more advanced than the Oqomiut and the Iglulirmiut, with whom they traded extensively for dogs, skins, and more. The Akuliarmiut and the Qaumauangmiut also benefited from trade with the ships of the Hudson Bay Company.
When the whalers became better acquainted with the natives and the peculiar jargon which is still in use was developed, the traffic became very active, and reached its height after Cumberland Sound was rediscovered by Penny. As soon as the whalers began to winter in the sound and to employ the natives the latter received firearms and European boats in exchange for their wares, and then their modes of living became materially changed. The immense quantity of European manufactured articles which thus came into the possession of the natives induced the removal of many families to the favored region. Particularly did the Nugumiut and the Akudnirmiut migrate during that period. When in the course of time the 467 Bay of Nugumiut was visited by the whalers removals of members of this tribe became less frequent.
When the whalers got to know the natives better and the unique jargon that’s still used today developed, trade became really active and peaked after Penny rediscovered Cumberland Sound. Once the whalers started wintering in the sound and employing the natives, the latter received firearms and European boats in exchange for their goods, which significantly changed their way of life. The huge number of European manufactured items that came into the possession of the natives prompted many families to move to this favored area. Especially, the Nugumiut and the Akudnirmiut migrated during that time. As time passed, when the whalers visited the 467 Bay of Nugumiut, the movement of members from this tribe became less common.
After the Eskimo had become acquainted with the advantages of firearms the natives of Davis Strait also began to trade bearskins for guns and ammunition, having learned how highly they were prized in Cumberland Sound. Besides, they received, in exchange for seals and walrus blubber put up for the whalers, tobacco, pipes, coffee, boxes, &c. In a similar way the Saumingmiut barter with the whalers of Cumberland Sound, whom they visit during the winter, carrying heavy loads of bearskins to the stations.
After the Eskimos learned the benefits of firearms, the natives of Davis Strait also started trading bearskins for guns and ammunition, having realized how valuable they were in Cumberland Sound. Additionally, they received tobacco, pipes, coffee, boxes, etc., in exchange for seals and walrus blubber that they provided to the whalers. Similarly, the Saumingmiut trade with the whalers of Cumberland Sound, whom they visit during the winter, bringing heavy loads of bearskins to the stations.
A brief sketch of the way in which the whaling and the trade with the Eskimo in Cumberland Sound are carried on may be of interest at this point. Two of the whaling stations are still kept up. They are situated on Qeqerten, the settlement of the Kingnaitmiut. When the Eskimo who have spent the summer inland return at the beginning of October they eagerly offer their services at the stations, for they receive in payment for a half year’s work a gun, a harmonium or something of that nature, and a ration of provisions for their families, with tobacco every week. Every Saturday the women come into the house of the station, at the blowing of the horn, to receive their bread, coffee, sirup, and the precious tobacco. In return the Eskimo is expected to deliver in the kitchen of the station a piece of every seal he catches.
A quick overview of how whaling and trade with the Eskimos in Cumberland Sound happens might be interesting at this point. Two whaling stations are still operational. They are located in Qeqerten, the settlement of the Kingnaitmiut. When the Eskimos who have spent the summer in the interior return at the start of October, they eagerly offer their help at the stations, as they get paid with a gun, a harmonium, or something similar, plus a supply of food for their families and weekly tobacco. Every Saturday, the women come to the station house when the horn blows to collect their bread, coffee, syrup, and valuable tobacco. In return, the Eskimos are expected to deliver a piece of every seal they catch to the station's kitchen.
The time for the fall fishing commences as soon as the ice begins to form. If the weather, which is generally stormy, permits it, the boats leave the harbor to look out for the whales which pass along the east shore of the sound toward the north. During the last few years the catch has been very unprofitable, only a few whales having been seen. As the ice forms quickly the boats must be brought back about the end of October or the beginning of November. Since the whale fishery has become unprofitable the stations have followed the business of collecting seal blubber and skins, which they buy from the Eskimo. (See Appendix, Note 1.)
The fall fishing season starts as soon as the ice begins to form. If the weather, which is usually stormy, allows it, the boats leave the harbor to look for the whales that pass along the east shore of the sound heading north. In recent years, the catch has been quite poor, with only a few whales spotted. Since the ice forms quickly, the boats need to return by the end of October or early November. As the whale fishery has become unprofitable, the stations have turned to collecting seal blubber and skins, which they purchase from the Eskimo. (See Appendix, Note 1.)
A lively traffic springs up as soon as the ice becomes strong enough to allow sledges to pass from shore to shore. The sledges of the stations are sent from one settlement to another to exchange tobacco, matches, coffee, bread, &c. for skins and the spare blubber which the Eskimo have carefully saved up. On the other hand, those natives who require useful articles, such as cooking pots, lamps, &c., collect quantities of hides and blubber and go to Qeqerten to supply their wants. The winter passes quickly amid the stir of business, till everything comes to a stop at the end of March, when the young sealing season fairly opens.
A lively traffic emerges as soon as the ice gets thick enough to let sledges cross from shore to shore. The sledges from the stations travel between settlements to trade tobacco, matches, coffee, bread, and more for skins and the extra blubber that the Eskimos have carefully stored. On the flip side, those natives who need useful items, like cooking pots, lamps, etc., gather a lot of hides and blubber and head to Qeqerten to get what they need. Winter flies by with all the business activity until everything comes to a halt at the end of March, when the new sealing season officially begins.
When the sun has reached such a height that the snow begins to melt in favored spots, a new life begins at the stations. The skins which have been collected in the winter and become frozen are 468 brought out of the store room and exposed to the sun’s rays. Some of the women busy themselves, with their crescent shaped knives, in cutting the blubber from the skins and putting it away in casks. Others clean and salt the skins, which are likewise packed away. The men also find enough work to do after the young sealing is over, for the whale boats must be got ready for the spring fishing. Strangers whose services have been engaged by the station for the next few months arrive daily with their families and all their goods to take up their abode on Qeqerten. The boats are dug out of the deep snow, the oars and sails are looked after, the harpoons are cleaned up and sharpened, and everything is in busy preparation. The boats are made as comfortable as possible with awnings and level floors, for the crews are not to come to the shore for about six weeks.
When the sun is high enough that the snow starts to melt in certain spots, a new life begins at the stations. The skins collected over the winter and frozen are 468 taken out of storage and put in the sunlight. Some of the women use their crescent-shaped knives to cut the blubber off the skins and store it in barrels. Others clean and salt the skins, which are also packed away. The men find plenty of work to do after the young sealing season is over, as the whale boats need to be prepared for spring fishing. Strangers hired by the station for the next few months arrive daily with their families and all their belongings to settle on Qeqerten. The boats are dug out of the deep snow, the oars and sails are checked, the harpoons are cleaned and sharpened, and everything is getting busy in preparation. The boats are made as comfortable as possible with awnings and level floors since the crews won’t come to shore for about six weeks.
By the beginning of May, the arrangements having been completed, the boats are put upon the sledges, which, under the direction of native drivers, are drawn by dog teams, with their crews, to the floe edge. The sledges being heavily laden and food for the dogs having to be provided by hunting, each day’s stage is rather short. Arriving at the floe edge the sledges are unloaded and the boats are launched. Seals and birds of all kinds are now found in profusion and the chase is opened without delay upon everything that is useful and can be shot. Sledges are regularly sent back to Qeqerten with skins and meat for the families of the Eskimo, while the blubber is packed in casks, which are kept ready on the spot.
By the start of May, everything is set, and the boats are loaded onto the sledges, which are pulled by dog teams led by local drivers to the edge of the ice. Since the sledges are heavily loaded and the dogs need to be fed by hunting, each day's journey is kept relatively short. Once they reach the edge of the ice, the sledges are unloaded, and the boats are launched. There are plenty of seals and birds available, and hunting starts right away for anything useful that can be shot. Sledges are regularly sent back to Qeqerten with skins and meat for the families of the Eskimos, while the blubber is packed into barrels that are kept ready on-site.
The most important object of the expedition is the whale. Harpoons and lines are always in readiness for the contest with the mighty monster. The boats return to the north with the breaking up of the ice and the fishing ends in July. The Eskimo are paid off and dismissed and resume their reindeer hunting, while the whites are glad to enjoy some rest after the weeks of exhausting labor.
The main goal of the expedition is the whale. Harpoons and lines are always ready for the battle with the giant creature. The boats head back north as the ice melts, and the fishing wraps up in July. The Eskimo workers are paid and sent off, returning to their reindeer hunting, while the white crew is happy to take a break after weeks of hard work.
The constant contact between the Eskimo and the whalers has effected a perfect revolution in the trade between the Eskimo tribes. As the whale catch in Cumberland Sound has fallen off during the past fifteen years, a remigration of the population of Davis Strait has occurred, ships visiting these shores every fall and a regular traffic being kept up. Therefore many Oqomiut now travel as far as Qivitung in order to trade there. As Nugumiut is still frequently visited by whalers, there is no inducement for the inhabitants to leave their country.
The ongoing interaction between the Inuit and the whalers has completely transformed trade among the Inuit tribes. As the whale catch in Cumberland Sound has declined over the last fifteen years, many people from the Davis Strait have moved back, with ships coming to these shores every fall and a consistent traffic maintained. As a result, many Oqomiut now travel as far as Qivitung to trade. Since Nugumiut is still often visited by whalers, the locals have no reason to leave their homeland.
Within a few years the Akuliarmiut also have become amply provided with firearms and European products in general by means of a new whaling station which has been established in their vicinity.
Within a few years, the Akuliarmiut also became well-equipped with firearms and European products in general thanks to a new whaling station that was set up nearby.
As to the Iglulirmiut, the importation of European manufactures at Pond Bay makes the trade with that region even more important than formerly.
As for the Iglulirmiut, the import of European goods at Pond Bay makes trade with that area even more significant than before.
The Aivillirmiut and the Kinipetu have immediate intercourse 469 with the whalers frequenting the western shore of Hudson Bay. Besides, the southern tribes trade with the stations of the Hudson Bay Company.
The Aivillirmiut and the Kinipetu have direct contact 469 with the whalers that often work along the western shore of Hudson Bay. Also, the southern tribes trade with the Hudson Bay Company stations.
The more western tribes of Boothia and its environs are dependent on the mediation of the Aivillirmiut for their supply of goods, as they themselves have no chance of communicating with the whites.
The western tribes of Boothia and the surrounding areas rely on the Aivillirmiut to get their supplies, since they have no way to communicate with the white settlers themselves.
Finally, I shall describe the old trading routes which existed between these tribes before matters were totally changed by the influence of the Europeans. Two desiderata formed the principal inducement to long journeys, which sometimes lasted even several years: wood and soapstone. The shores of Davis Strait and Cumberland Sound are almost destitute of driftwood, and consequently the natives were obliged to visit distant regions to obtain that necessary material. Tudjaqdjuaq in particular was the objective point of their expeditions. Their boats took a southerly course, and, as the wood was gathered, a portion of it was immediately manufactured into boat ribs and sledge runners, which were carried back on the return journey; another portion was used for bows, though these were also made of deer’s horns ingeniously lashed together. A portion of the trade in wood seems to have been in the hands of the Nugumiut, who collected it on Tudjaqdjuaq and took it north. Another necessary and important article of trade, soapstone, is manufactured into lamps and pots. It is found in a few places only, and very rarely in pieces large enough for the manufacture of the articles named. Among the places visited by the natives for the purpose of obtaining it may be mentioned Kautaq, east of Naujateling; Qeqertelung, near the former place; Qarmaqdjuin (Exeter Bay), and Committee Bay. The visitors come from every part of the country, the soapstone being dug or “traded” from the rocks by depositing some trifles in exchange. In addition to wood and soapstone, metals, which were extremely rare in old times, have formed an important object of trade. They were brought to Baffin Bay either by the Aivillirmiut, who had obtained them from the Hudson Bay Company and the Kinipetu, or by the Akuliarmiut. Even when Frobisher visited the Nugumiut in 1577 he found them in possession of some iron (Frobisher).
Finally, I will describe the old trading routes that existed between these tribes before everything changed completely due to European influence. Two main reasons drove long journeys that sometimes lasted even several years: wood and soapstone. The shores of Davis Strait and Cumberland Sound are almost without driftwood, so the natives had to go to far-off places to get this essential material. Tudjaqdjuaq was especially a key destination for their trips. Their boats headed south, and as they collected wood, part of it was immediately made into ribs for boats and runners for sledges, which they took back on the way home; another portion was used for bows, although these were also made from cleverly tied deer horns. A part of the wood trade seems to have been managed by the Nugumiut, who gathered it at Tudjaqdjuaq and transported it north. Another necessary and vital trade item, soapstone, is made into lamps and pots. It’s found in only a few places and very rarely in large enough pieces to create the items mentioned. Some locations the natives visited to obtain it include Kautaq, east of Naujateling; Qeqertelung, near the previous site; Qarmaqdjuin (Exeter Bay), and Committee Bay. People came from all around the region, with the soapstone being dug or “traded” from the rocks in exchange for small items. Besides wood and soapstone, metals, which were very rare in earlier times, became an important trade item. They were brought to Baffin Bay either by the Aivillirmiut, who had obtained them from the Hudson Bay Company and the Kinipetu, or by the Akuliarmiut. Even when Frobisher visited the Nugumiut in 1577, he found them in possession of some iron (Frobisher).
The occurrence of flint, which was the material for arrowheads, may have given some importance to places where it occurs. Formerly an important trade existed between the Netchillirmiut and the neighboring tribes. As the district of the former is destitute of driftwood and potstone they are compelled to buy both articles from their neighbors. In Ross’s time they got the necessary wood from Ugjulik, the potstone from Aivillik. They exchanged these articles for native iron (or pyrite), which they found on the eastern shore of Boothia and which was used for striking fire. After having collected a sufficient stock of it during several years, they traveled to 470 the neighboring tribes. For reasons which have been mentioned this trade is now essentially changed. According to Schwatka there is a mutual distrust between the Ugjulirmiut and the Netchillirmiut on one side and the Qidnelik on the other, for which reason the intercourse between these tribes is very limited.
The presence of flint, which was used for making arrowheads, likely made certain locations more significant. There used to be a strong trade relationship between the Netchillirmiut and nearby tribes. Because the Netchillirmiut territory lacks driftwood and potstone, they have to purchase both materials from their neighbors. During Ross’s time, they sourced the necessary wood from Ugjulik and the potstone from Aivillik. They traded these goods for native iron (or pyrite), which they found on the eastern shore of Boothia and used for starting fires. After gathering enough over several years, they would travel to 470 the neighboring tribes. However, for reasons previously mentioned, this trade has mostly changed now. According to Schwatka, there’s a mutual distrust between the Ugjulirmiut and the Netchillirmiut on one side and the Qidnelik on the other, which has led to very limited interaction between these tribes.
LIST OF THE CENTRAL ESKIMO TRIBES.
The following list gives the tribes of the Central Eskimo and their geographical distribution:
The following list shows the tribes of the Central Eskimo and where they are located:
- I. Northern coast of Labrador:
- (1) Kangivamiut (George River).
- (2) Kouksoarmiut (Big River).
- (3) Ungavamiut (Hope Advance Bay).
- (4) Itivimiut (Cape Wolstenholme).
- II. Northern shore of Hudson Strait:
- (5) Sikosuilarmiut (King Cape).
- (6) Akuliarmiut (North Bluff).
- (7) Qaumauangmiut (Middle Savage Islands).
- III. Davis Strait:
- (8) Nugumiut (Frobisher Bay).
- (9) Oqomiut (Cumberland Sound):
- a. Talirpingmiut (west shore of Cumberland Sound and Nettilling).
- b. Qinguamiut (head of Cumberland Sound).
- c. Kingnaitmiut (Qeqerten and environs).
- d. Saumingmiut (southern part of Cumberland Peninsula).
- (10) Akudnirmiut (Davis Strait).
- a. Padlimiut (Padli Fjord).
- b. Akudnirmiut (Home Bay).
- IV. Northern part of Baffin Land, North Devon, and Ellesmere
Land:
- (11) Aggomiut.
- a. Tununirmiut (Eclipse Sound).
- b. Tununirusirmiut (Admiralty Inlet and North Devon).
- (12) Inhabitants of Umingman Nuna (Ellesmere Land).
- (11) Aggomiut.
- V. Melville Peninsula, Wager River, and Southampton
Island:
- (13) a. Iglulirmiut (Fury and Hecla Strait).
- b. Amitormiut (eastern coast of Melville Peninsula).
- (14) a. Pilingmiut (eastern coast of Fox Basin).
- b. Sagdlirmiut (islands of Fox Basin).
- (15) Aivillirmiut (Repulse Bay and Wager River).
- (16) Sagdlirmiut (Southampton Island):
- (13) a. Iglulirmiut (Fury and Hecla Strait).
- VI. (17) Kinipetu (Chesterfield Inlet).
- VII. Boothia Felix and King William Land:
- (18) Sinimiut (Pelly Bay).
- (19) Netchillirmiut (Boothia Felix and King William Land).
- (20) Ugjulirmiut (King William Land and Adelaide Peninsula).
- (21) Ukusiksalirmiut (estuary of Back River).
- VIII. Qidnelik (coast west of Adelaide Peninsula).
- IX. Inhabitants of North Greenland.
HUNTING AND FISHING.4
SEAL, WALRUS, AND WHALE HUNTING.
The staple food of the Central Eskimo is the seal, particularly Pagomys fœtidus. The methods of hunting this animal differ materially at different seasons, as its mode of life depends on the state of the ice.
The main food for the Central Eskimo is the seal, especially Pagomys fœtidus. The techniques for hunting this animal vary significantly throughout the seasons, as its lifestyle is influenced by the condition of the ice.
Fig. 390. harpoon from Alaska.
(American Museum of Natural History,
New York.)
Fig. 391. Modern unang or sealing
harpoon.
(Museum für Völkerkunde,
Berlin. IV A 6729.)
Fig. 390. Harpoon from Alaska.
(American Museum of Natural History,
New York.)
Fig. 391. Modern unang or sealing
harpoon.
(Museum für Völkerkunde,
Berlin. IV A 6729.)
In the winter it takes to the smooth parts of the floe a few miles from the coast, where it scratches breathing holes through the ice, in which it rises to blow. It shuns hummocky ice and floes of more than one year’s age. Wherever the edge of the ice is at a great distance from the settlements, the only way of procuring seals is by watching for them at these holes. For the pursuit a light harpoon is used, called unang. The shape of this weapon has been somewhat changed since the introduction of rod iron. Formerly it consisted of a shaft having at one end an ivory point firmly attached by thongs and rivets, the point tapering toward the end. The point was slanting on one side so as to form almost an oblique cone. Thus it facilitated the separation of the harpoon head from the unang. On the opposite end of the shaft another piece of ivory was attached, generally forming a knob. The material used in making the shaft was wood, bone, or ivory, according to the region in which it was manufactured. In Iglulik and in Aggo the narwhal’s horn was the favorite material for the whole implement, a single horn being sufficient to make a whole shaft. Wherever wood could be procured small pieces were ingeniously lashed together. As the shaft is apt to be broken by the struggles of the animal when struck by the weapon, it was strengthened by a stout thong running along the whole length of the shaft. In all other respects the old design corresponds to the modern one. Unfortunately I have seen no specimen of this description, but a figure may be seen in Ross II, p. 272, in the hand of one of the natives. In Alaska a similar harpoon is in use, a specimen of which is represented in Fig. 390. It consists of a wooden shaft, with a stout ivory point at the lower end and another at the upper end. Both are fastened to the shaft by whalebone strings. In the upper end a slanting ivory point is inserted, which serves for attaching the harpoon head to it. The whole shaft is strengthened by a seal line, as shown in the figure.
In winter, it goes to the smooth areas of the ice floes a few miles from the shore, where it creates breathing holes in the ice to surface for air. It avoids rough ice and floes older than a year. When the edge of the ice is far from the settlements, the only way to catch seals is by waiting at these holes. A lightweight harpoon, called an unang, is used for hunting. The design of this weapon has changed a bit since rod iron was introduced. Originally, it had a shaft with an ivory tip securely attached with thongs and rivets, tapering to a point. The tip was angled on one side to form almost an oblique cone, making it easier to separate the harpoon head from the unang. On the other end of the shaft, another piece of ivory was attached, usually forming a knob. The shaft could be made of wood, bone, or ivory, depending on the area it came from. In Iglulik and Aggo, the narwhal’s horn was the preferred material for the entire tool, as a single horn was enough to create an entire shaft. Where wood was available, small pieces were cleverly tied together. Since the shaft could break during the struggle with the animal when struck, it was reinforced with a strong thong running the length of the shaft. In all other respects, the old design matches the modern one. Unfortunately, I haven't seen one of this kind, but an image can be found in Ross II, p. 272, in the hand of one of the natives. In Alaska, a similar harpoon is used, with a specimen illustrated in Fig. 390. It features a wooden shaft with a sturdy ivory point at the lower end and another at the upper end, both attached to the shaft with whalebone strings. At the upper end, there's a slanted ivory point for connecting the harpoon head, and the entire shaft is reinforced with a seal line, as shown in the figure.
The unang now in use in Baffin Land and on the western shore of Hudson Bay (Fig. 391) consists of a wooden shaft into which an iron rod (unartenga) is sunk. The latter is pointed at the end (see, also, Fig. 393) in about the same way as the old ivory implement. The socket is secured by a small ivory ring (unaqiuta) or a string wound around the end of the shaft. In the socket close to the iron rod 472 a bent nail is inserted, forming a narrow eye (tagusiarbing). Near the center of the whole implement a small piece of ivory (tikagung; see, also, Fig. 418) is fastened to the shaft, forming a support for the hand when throwing the weapon. At the lower end of the shaft a string of deer sinews or a thong is fastened, forming a loop (nabiring) which passes through a hole drilled through the shaft. A stout iron point is also attached to the lower end of the shaft (tounga).
The unang currently used in Baffin Land and along the western shore of Hudson Bay (Fig. 391) consists of a wooden shaft with an iron rod (unartenga) embedded into it. The rod is pointed at the end (see, also, Fig. 393), similar to the old ivory tool. The socket is secured with a small ivory ring (unaqiuta) or a string wrapped around the end of the shaft. Near the iron rod in the socket, a bent nail is inserted to create a narrow eye (tagusiarbing). Close to the center of the implement, a small piece of ivory (tikagung; see, also, Fig. 418) is attached to the shaft to provide support for the hand when throwing the weapon. At the lower end of the shaft, a loop (nabiring) made of deer sinews or a thong passes through a hole drilled in the shaft. A sturdy iron point is also secured to the lower end of the shaft (tounga).
Fig. 392. Old style naulang or harpoon head. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A 6692.) 1/1
Fig. 392. Traditional naulang or harpoon head. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A 6692.) 1/1
The natives carry this implement on all their winter excursions, as it is serviceable for numerous purposes. It is always kept within reach on the sledge, as the strong iron point is useful for cutting down hummocks, should any obstruct the passage of the sledges, or for cutting holes through the ice, or it takes the place of a hatchet in breaking the frozen meat which is carried along for dogs’ food. The long iron rod is extremely useful in trying the strength of the ice or the depth of the snow. By taking precautionary measures of this kind the natives pass over extensive floes of weak ice.
The locals take this tool with them on all their winter trips because it’s handy for many tasks. It’s always kept close on the sled, as the sharp iron tip is great for cutting down ice ridges that might block the sleds or for making holes in the ice. It also works as a makeshift hatchet for breaking the frozen meat they bring for the dogs. The long iron rod is really useful for checking how strong the ice is or how deep the snow is. By taking these kinds of precautions, the locals can safely traverse large areas of weak ice.
Fig. 393. Modern naulang or harpoon head (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A 6729.) ½
Fig. 393. Modern naulang or harpoon head (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A 6729.) ½
The head belonging to the unang is called naulang. Since iron has been introduced in Baffin Land and Hudson Bay, the natives file their harpoon heads out of it, but adhere almost exactly to the old pattern. The old naulang was cut out of bone or more frequently out of ivory (Fig. 392). It was one inch to two inches long and had a piece of metal inserted into the slit at the top. Through the middle of the instrument a hole was drilled parallel to the plane of the blade. The harpoon line passed through the hole, and as soon as the point struck an animal and a strain was put upon the line it turned at a right angle to the latter, thus acting as a toggle. The effect was increased by two points at the lower end of the naulang, called uming (beard). These pressed into the flesh or the skin of the animal and prevented the harpoon head from slipping back.
The head of the unang is called naulang. Since iron has been introduced in Baffin Land and Hudson Bay, the locals make their harpoon heads out of it, but they mostly stick to the old design. The original naulang was made from bone or more often from ivory (Fig. 392). It measured one to two inches long and had a metal piece inserted into the slit at the top. A hole was drilled through the middle of the tool parallel to the blade's surface. The harpoon line went through this hole, and when the point hit an animal and pulled on the line, it turned at a right angle, acting like a toggle. This effect was enhanced by two points at the bottom of the naulang, called uming (beard). These dug into the flesh or skin of the animal, keeping the harpoon head from slipping back.
The modern naulang (Fig. 393) is about the same length as the old one, but much more slender. While the back of the old pattern was straight, the points of the iron one are bent outward and backward in order to increase its effect.
The modern naulang (Fig. 393) is roughly the same length as the old one, but it's much slimmer. While the back of the old design was straight, the tips of the new one are curved outward and backward to enhance its impact.
The naulang is fastened to the harpoon line (iparang). This part of the instrument is much longer than the unang, as it must allow for the struggles of the diving seal. The end of the line passes through the hole of the naulang and a loop is formed and secured by deer sinew or arranged as may be seen in Fig. 393. At a distance equal to the length of the iron rod of the unang a small thong (taguta) is attached to the line and serves to fasten it to the shaft (see Fig. 391). It is drawn through 474 the eye formed by the tagusiarbing. As soon as a strain is put upon the naulang the line parts from the shaft, as the taguta is only squeezed into the eye and is easily detached. The harpoon line passes through the nabiring or is fastened by a slipping hitch to the shaft of the unang.
The naulang is attached to the harpoon line (iparang). This part of the tool is much longer than the unang, as it needs to accommodate the struggles of the diving seal. The end of the line goes through the hole in the naulang, forming a loop that is secured with deer sinew or arranged as shown in Fig. 393. A small thong (taguta) is attached to the line at a distance equal to the length of the iron rod of the unang, which helps attach it to the shaft (see Fig. 391). It is pulled through the eye created by the tagusiarbing. As soon as weight is put on the naulang, the line detaches from the shaft since the taguta is only squeezed into the eye and can be easily removed. The harpoon line goes through the nabiring or is secured by a slipping hitch to the shaft of the unang.
If the unang has a nabiring the line passes through this loop. A few feet below it a small piece of ivory (akparaiktung) is attached to the line, acting as a hook after it has run out. It catches the nabiring and drags the harpoon along, thus impeding the movements of the animal (see Fig. 391).
If the unang has a nabiring, the line goes through this loop. A few feet below it, a small piece of ivory (akparaiktung) is attached to the line, acting as a hook once it has run out. It catches the nabiring and pulls the harpoon along, which hinders the movements of the animal (see Fig. 391).
Fig. 394. Qilertuang or leather strap
and clasps for holding coiled up harpoon lines.
a, c (National Museum, Washington. a, 34128;
c, 34132.)
b (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin.) 1/1
Fig. 394. Qilertuang or leather strap and clasps for securing coiled harpoon lines.
a, c (National Museum, Washington. a, 34128; c, 34132.)
b (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin.) 1/1
The rest of the line is coiled up and held by the hunter. The end is doubled so as to form a loop which serves as a handle when the line runs out with the diving seal. Generally, a small piece of leather (Fig. 394) with two slits at one end and an ivory clasp (qilertuang) at the other is fastened to this loop; it serves to hold the bights together when the line is detached from the harpoon and rolled up. Some art is bestowed on the manufacture of this clasp (Fig. 394). Usually it represents a seal, the head of which forms a hook on which the slits can be fastened. The clasp is either tied or otherwise secured to the leather strap. Some specimens in the British Museum, which are about one hundred and fifty years old, show that these implements have not undergone any change during that time.
The rest of the line is coiled up and held by the hunter. The end is doubled to create a loop that acts as a handle when the line runs out with the diving seal. Typically, a small piece of leather (Fig. 394) with two slits at one end and an ivory clasp (qilertuang) at the other is attached to this loop; it keeps the bights together when the line is detached from the harpoon and rolled up. Some skill is applied to make this clasp (Fig. 394). It usually represents a seal, with the head forming a hook on which the slits can be secured. The clasp is either tied or secured to the leather strap. Some examples in the British Museum, which are about one hundred and fifty years old, indicate that these tools have not changed over that time.
Parry describes another harpoon head used by the Iglulirmiut for the unang. He calls it a siatko (Fig. 395). I myself have not seen any of a similar pattern, but Kumlien gives a sketch of one found in a grave at Exeter Sound (Fig. 396). The principal difference between the naulang and the siatko is that the edge of the former is parallel to the hole through which the line passes, while in the latter their directions are vertical to each other. The head of the whaling harpoon (see Fig. 436) acts on the same principle.
Parry describes another harpoon head used by the Iglulirmiut for the unang. He refers to it as a siatko (Fig. 395). I haven't seen any like it, but Kumlien has a sketch of one found in a grave at Exeter Sound (Fig. 396). The main difference between the naulang and the siatko is that the edge of the naulang runs parallel to the hole where the line goes through, while in the siatko, their directions are perpendicular to each other. The head of the whaling harpoon (see Fig. 436) operates on the same principle.
Fig. 395. Siatko or harpoon head of the Iglulirmiut. (From Parry II, p. 550.)
Fig. 395. Siatko or harpoon head of the Iglulirmiut. (From Parry II, p. 550.)
When the day begins to dawn the Eskimo prepares for the hunt. The dogs are harnessed to the sledge and the hunting implements are fitted up. The harpoon line and the snow knife are hung over the deer’s antlers, which are attached to the hind part of the sledge, a seal or bear skin is lashed upon the bottom, and the spear secured under the lashing. The hunter takes up the whip and the dogs set off for the hunting ground. When near the place where he expects to find seals, the hunter stops the team and takes the implements from the sledge, which is then turned upside down. The points of the runners and the short brow antler are pressed into the snow in order to prevent the dogs from running away. A dog with a good scent is then taken from the team and the Eskimo follows his guidance until a seal’s hole is found. In winter it is entirely covered with snow, but generally a very small elevation indicates the situation. The dog is led back to the sledge and the hunter examines the hole to make sure that it is still visited by the seal. Cautiously he cuts a hole through the snow covering and peeps into the excavation. If the water is covered with a new coat of ice the seal has left the hole and it would be in vain to expect its return. The hunter must look for a new hole promising better results.
When dawn breaks, the Eskimo gets ready for the hunt. The dogs are harnessed to the sled, and the hunting gear is organized. The harpoon line and snow knife are hung over the deer antlers attached to the back of the sled, a seal or bear skin is secured to the bottom, and the spear is fastened underneath. The hunter picks up the whip, and the dogs head out towards the hunting grounds. When he gets close to where he expects to find seals, the hunter stops the team, takes the gear off the sled, and flips it upside down. He presses the tips of the runners and the short brow antler into the snow to keep the dogs from running away. He selects a dog with a keen sense of smell from the team and follows its lead until they find a seal's hole. In winter, this hole is completely covered with snow, but usually, a small bump indicates its location. The dog is brought back to the sled, and the hunter checks the hole to see if it’s still being visited by seals. Cautiously, he cuts a hole through the snow covering and peers into the opening. If the water is topped with a new layer of ice, it means the seal has abandoned the hole, and it’s pointless to wait for it to come back. The hunter must search for a new hole that looks more promising.
Fig. 397. Eskimo in the act of striking a seal. (From a photograph.)
Fig. 397. Inuit hunting a seal. (From a photograph.)
If he is sure that the seal has recently visited a hole he marks its exact center on the top of the snow and then fills up his peep hole with small blocks of snow. All these preparations must be made with the utmost precaution, as any change in the appearance of the snow would frighten away the seal. The Eskimo take particular 476 care that no hairs from their clothing fall into the hole or remain sticking in the snow, for they believe that the smell would scare away the animal. The center of the breathing hole must be marked, as the game remains invisible and only a stroke into the center will be likely to hit it. If the snow covering is very thick and strong it is cut down, but is replaced with loose snow, which is heaped around the end of the harpoon, the latter being placed upon the central point. After the harpoon has been extracted a hole remains which forms the mark for the harpooner. If the Eskimo expects the early return of the seal, he spreads a small piece of skin, generally that of a young seal, close to the hole and places his feet upon it, thus keeping them warm. He fastens the naulang to the harpoon shaft, while the lower 477 end of the line is folded up in a coil, which he holds in the left hand. The unang is held in both hands, and thus the hunter sometimes remains for hours, occasionally stooping and listening, until he hears the blowing of the seal. Then, all of a sudden, he stands upright, and, with all his strength, sends the harpoon straight downward into the hole, paying out the line at the same time, but keeping a firm hold of the loop at its end (Fig. 397). Generally the seal is struck near the head. If the line is fastened to the shaft by a slipping hitch it is at once detached and the harpoon either remains sticking in the snow or falls down by the hole. If the line runs through the nabiring, the harpoon is dragged into the water and impedes the movements of the animal. The hunter then begins at once to cut down the snow covering with his knife, which has been left within easy reach, and hauls in the line. As soon as the seal comes to the surface to breathe it is easily dispatched and drawn up on the ice.
If he is certain that the seal has recently visited a breathing hole, he marks its exact center on the surface of the snow and then fills his peep hole with small blocks of snow. All these preparations must be done extremely carefully, as any change in the appearance of the snow could scare the seal away. The Eskimo makes sure that no hairs from their clothing fall into the hole or get stuck in the snow, because they believe the smell would frighten the animal. The center of the breathing hole must be marked, as the game stays hidden and only a strike into the center is likely to hit it. If the snow covering is very thick and strong, it is cut down but replaced with loose snow, which is heaped around the tip of the harpoon, which is positioned at the center point. After the harpoon has been removed, a hole is left that serves as a marker for the harpooner. If the Eskimo expects the seal to return soon, he spreads a small piece of skin, usually from a young seal, close to the hole and stands on it to keep his feet warm. He attaches the naulang to the harpoon shaft, while the lower end of the line is coiled up in his left hand. The unang is held in both hands, and the hunter sometimes waits for hours, occasionally bending down to listen, until he hears the seal blow. Then, suddenly, he stands up and, with all his strength, thrusts the harpoon straight downward into the hole, letting out the line at the same time but keeping a firm grip on the loop at its end. Usually, the seal is hit near the head. If the line is secured to the shaft with a slipping hitch, it is instantly detached and the harpoon either stays lodged in the snow or falls into the hole. If the line runs through the nabiring, the harpoon gets pulled into the water and hinders the seal's movements. The hunter immediately starts cutting through the snow covering with his knife, which he has kept within easy reach, and pulls in the line. As soon as the seal surfaces to breathe, it is easily dispatched and pulled onto the ice.
Fig. 398. Tutareang or buckle. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A 6710.) 1/1
Fig. 398. Tutareang or buckle. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A 6710.) 1/1
The arrangements at the seal hole are more elaborate if the sealer expects to wait a long time. If only a few men go out hunting and famine is impending, he sometimes waits for a whole day or even longer, though it be cold and the wind rage over the icy fields. He builds up a semicircular wall of snow blocks to keep off the piercing wind and makes a seat in the center of it. A skin is spread under his feet and his legs are tied together with a thong, which is fastened by a peculiar kind of buckle (tutareang) with two holes (Fig. 398). One end of the thong is firmly tied to the buckle, passing through one of the holes, while the opposite end passes tightly through the second hole. The thong may be quickly opened by a strong effort on the part of the hunter, while it helps to keep him quiet. At his right hand (Fig. 399; in this drawing it appears on the left) the snow knife is stuck into the snow, while to the left the unang is placed upon two pegs. The coil of the line lies in his lap. His left arm is drawn out of his sleeve, that he may more easily keep warm. Both sleeves are generally held together by a piece of deer’s horn with a branch on each side which serves as a hook. Thus the hunter waits until he hears the breathing of the seal. As it usually stays for several minutes he is in no hurry to get ready. Cautiously he places his left arm into the sleeve, having first disengaged it from the hook. 478 He then takes hold of the coil, picks up his unang, and, having risen, strikes the center of the hole.
The setup at the seal hole is more complex if the sealer expects to wait a long time. If just a few guys go hunting and there's a risk of famine, he might wait an entire day or even longer, despite the cold and the wind howling across the icy fields. He builds a semicircular wall of snow blocks to shield himself from the biting wind and makes a seat in the middle. A skin is laid under his feet and his legs are tied together with a thong, which is secured by a special kind of buckle (tutareang) with two holes (Fig. 398). One end of the thong is tightly attached to the buckle, going through one of the holes, while the other end is snugly passed through the second hole. The thong can be quickly released with a strong pull from the hunter, while also helping to keep him still. To his right (Fig. 399; in this drawing, it appears on the left), the snow knife is stuck into the snow, and to the left, the unang rests on two pegs. The coil of the line sits in his lap. His left arm is pulled out of his sleeve so he can stay warmer. Both sleeves are usually held together by a piece of deer horn with branches on each side that act as a hook. The hunter waits until he hears the seal breathing. Since it usually stays for a few minutes, he doesn't rush to get ready. Carefully, he puts his left arm back into the sleeve after freeing it from the hook. 478 Then he grabs the coil, picks up his unang, and, standing up, strikes the center of the hole.
Fig. 399. Eskimo awaiting return of seal to blowhole. (From a photograph.)
Fig. 399. Eskimo waiting for the seal to come back to the surface. (From a photograph.)
Ross (II, p. 268) and Rae (I, p. 123) state that the sealing at the hole is more difficult in daylight than in the dark. I suppose, however, that when the snow is deep there is no difference; at least the Eskimo of Davis Strait never complain about being annoyed by the daylight.
Ross (II, p. 268) and Rae (I, p. 123) note that sealing the hole is harder in the daylight than in the dark. I think, though, that when the snow is deep, it doesn't really matter; at least the Eskimo of Davis Strait never seem to mind the sunlight.
Fig. 400. Tuputang or ivory plugs for closing wounds. e (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A 6706.) b, c, d (National Museum, Washington. b, 10192; c, 10390; d, 9836.) 1/1
Fig. 400. Tuputang or ivory plugs for closing wounds. e (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A 6706.) b, c, d (National Museum, Washington. b, 10192; c, 10390; d, 9836.) 1/1
Sometimes a small instrument is used in the hunt to indicate the approach of the seal. It is called qipekutang and consists of a very thin rod with a knob or a knot at one end (Parry II, p. 550, Fig. 20). It is stuck through the snow, the end passing into the water, the knob resting on the snow. As soon as the seal rises to blow, it strikes the rod, which, by its movements, warns the Eskimo. Generally it is 479 made of whalebone. Sometimes a string is attached to the knob and fastened by a pin to the snow, as its movements are more easily detected than those of the knob. The natives are somewhat averse to using this implement, as it frequently scares the seals.
Sometimes a small tool is used in the hunt to signal the arrival of the seal. It's called a qipekutang and is made up of a very thin rod with a knob or knot at one end (Parry II, p. 550, Fig. 20). It's stuck into the snow, with the end going into the water while the knob rests on top of the snow. As soon as the seal comes up to breathe, it hits the rod, which moves and alerts the Eskimo. Usually, it is 479 made of whalebone. Sometimes a string is tied to the knob and pinned to the snow because its movement is easier to notice than that of the knob. The locals are somewhat hesitant to use this tool, as it often frightens the seals away.
Fig. 401. Wooden case for plugs. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin.) 1/1
Fig. 401. Wooden case for plugs. (Museum of Ethnology, Berlin.) 1/1
Fig. 403. Qanging for fastening thong to jaw of seal. a (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A 6825.) b, c (National Museum, Washington. b, 34126; c, 34129.) 1/1
Fig. 403. Tool for attaching a strap to a seal's jaw. a (Museum of Ethnology, Berlin. IV A 6825.) b, c (National Museum, Washington. b, 34126; c, 34129.) 1/1
Fig. 405. Qanging in form of a button. (National Museum, Washington. 34130.) 1/1
Fig. 405. Qanging in the shape of a button. (National Museum, Washington. 34130.) 1/1
After the carcass of the animal has been drawn out of the water, the wounds are closed with ivory plugs (tuputang) (Fig. 400), which are carried in a wooden or leathern case (Fig. 401) and are either triangular or square. The plug is pushed under the skin, which is closely tied to its head. Another form of plug which, however, is 480 rarely used, is represented in Fig. 402. The skin is drawn over the plug and tied over one of the threads of the screw cut into the wood. After the dead animal’s wounds are closed, a hole is cut through the flesh beneath the lower jaw and a thong is passed through this hole and the mouth. A small implement called qanging is used for fastening it to the seal. It usually forms a toggle and prevents the line from slipping through the hole. The patterns represented in Fig. 403 are very effective. The hole drilled through the center of the 481 instrument is wider at the lower end than elsewhere, thus furnishing a rest for a knot at the end of the thong. The points are pressed into the flesh of the seal, and thus a firm hold is secured for the whole implement. The Eskimo display some art in the manufacture of this implement, and frequently give it the shape of seals and the like (Fig. 404). Fig. 405 represents a small button, which is much less effective than the other patterns. A very few specimens consist merely of rude pieces of ivory with holes drilled through them. Fig. 406 shows one of these attachments serving for both toggle and handle.
After the animal's carcass is pulled out of the water, the wounds are closed with ivory plugs (tuputang) (Fig. 400), which are kept in a wooden or leather case (Fig. 401) and come in either triangular or square shapes. The plug is inserted under the skin, which is tightly secured to the animal's head. Another type of plug, although rarely used, is shown in Fig. 402. The skin is pulled over the plug and tied around one of the threads carved into the wood. Once the wounds of the dead animal are closed, a hole is made through the flesh beneath the lower jaw, and a thong is passed through this hole and into the mouth. A small tool called qanging is used to attach it to the seal. This tool usually functions as a toggle to stop the line from slipping through the hole. The designs shown in Fig. 403 are very effective. The hole drilled through the center of the 480 tool is wider at the bottom than at the top, creating a resting place for a knot at the end of the thong. The points are pushed into the seal's flesh, ensuring a secure hold for the entire tool. The Eskimos show some skill in making this tool and often shape it like seals and similar creatures (Fig. 404). Fig. 405 depicts a small button that is much less effective than the other designs. A few examples consist simply of rough pieces of ivory with holes drilled through them. Fig. 406 illustrates one of these attachments, which serves as both toggle and handle.
Fig. 404. Qanging in form of a seal. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A 6825.) 1/1
Fig. 404. Qanging in the shape of a seal. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A 6825.) 1/1
Fig. 406. Qanging serving for both toggle and handle. (National Museum, Washington. 10400.) ⅔
Fig. 406. Qanging used as both a toggle and a handle. (National Museum, Washington. 10400.) ⅔
In order to prevent the line from getting out of order, a whirl (qidjarung) is sometimes used. Fig. 407 represents one brought 482 from Cumberland Sound by Kumlien, and is described by him (p. 38). There was a ball in the hollow body of this instrument, which could not be pulled through any of the openings. One line was fastened to this ball, passing through the central hole, and another one to the top of the whirl. A simpler pattern is represented in Fig. 408.
In order to keep the line organized, a whirl (qidjarung) is sometimes used. Fig. 407 shows one that was brought from Cumberland Sound by Kumlien, and he describes it (p. 38). There was a ball inside the hollow body of this instrument that couldn't be pulled through any of the openings. One line was attached to this ball, running through the central hole, and another one was connected to the top of the whirl. A simpler design is shown in Fig. 408.
Fig. 407. Qidjarung or whirl for harpoon line. (National Museum, Washington. 34121.) 1/1
Fig. 407. Qidjarung or whirl for harpoon line. (National Museum, Washington. 34121.) 1/1
On its capture, the seal is dragged to the sledge and after being covered with the bearskin is firmly secured by the lashing. It freezes quickly and the hunter sits down on top of it. If the seal happens to blow soon after the arrival of the hunter, a second one may be procured, but generally the day is far spent when the first seal is killed.
On its capture, the seal is pulled to the sled and after being covered with a bearskin, it’s tightly secured with a rope. It freezes quickly, and the hunter sits on top of it. If the seal happens to blow soon after the hunter arrives, a second one might be caught, but usually, the day is almost over by the time the first seal is killed.
Wherever water holes are found they are frequently visited during the winter by the Eskimo, especially by those who have firearms. They lie in wait at the lower side of the hole, i.e., the side to which the tide sets, and when the seal blows they shoot him, securing him with the harpoon after he has drifted to the edge of the ice. These holes can only be visited at spring tides, as in the intervals a treacherous floe partly covers the opening and is not destroyed until the next spring tide.
Wherever waterholes are found, they are often visited during winter by the Inuit, especially those with firearms. They wait on the lower side of the hole, where the tide flows in, and when the seal surfaces, they shoot it, securing it with a harpoon after it drifts to the edge of the ice. These holes can only be accessed during spring tides, as in between, a dangerous floe partially blocks the opening and doesn’t clear away until the next spring tide.
In March, when the seal brings forth its young, the same way of hunting is continued, besides which young seals are eagerly pursued. The pregnant females make an excavation from five to ten feet in length under the snow, the diving hole being at one end. They prefer snowbanks and rough ice or the cracks and cavities of grounded ice for this purpose, and pup in these holes. The Eskimo set out on light sledges dragged by a few dogs, which quickly take up the scent of the seals. The dogs hurry at the utmost speed to the place of the hole, where they stop at once. The hunter jumps from the sledge and breaks down the roof of the excavation as quickly as possible, cutting off the retreat of the seal through its hole if he can. Generally the mother escapes, but the awkward pup is taken by surprise, or, if very young, cannot get into the water. The Eskimo draws it out by means of a hook (niksiang) and kills it by firmly stepping on the poor beast’s breast. An old pattern of the hook used is represented according to Kumlien’s drawing in Fig. 409; another, made from a bear’s claw, in Fig. 410; the modern pattern, in Fig. 411.
In March, when the seal gives birth to its pups, the same hunting methods are used, and young seals are actively sought after. Pregnant females dig a hole under the snow that is five to ten feet long, with the breathing hole at one end. They prefer snowbanks and rough ice or the cracks and gaps in grounded ice for this, where they give birth in these holes. The Eskimo head out on light sleds pulled by a few dogs, which quickly pick up the seal's scent. The dogs race at full speed to the hole, where they immediately stop. The hunter jumps off the sled and quickly breaks through the roof of the hole, trying to block the seal's escape route. Usually, the mother manages to get away, but the clumsy pup is caught off guard or, if it's very young, cannot reach the water. The Eskimo pulls it out using a hook (niksiang) and kills it by firmly stepping on its chest. An old design of the hook used is shown according to Kumlien’s drawing in Fig. 409; another, made from a bear’s claw, in Fig. 410; and the modern design in Fig. 411.
Sometimes the natives try to catch the old seal in a most cruel way, by using the love of the dam for her pup to lure her to the surface of the hole. They tie a thong to the hind flipper of the pup and throw it into the hole. It dives at once, crying pitifully. When it comes up to breathe the hunter pushes it back, and frequently the dam returns to her young and attempts to draw it away. As soon as she is seen the harpoon is plunged into her body and she is quickly drawn out of the water and killed.
Sometimes the locals try to catch the old seal in a really cruel way, by using the mother’s love for her pup to draw her to the surface of the hole. They tie a strap to the back flipper of the pup and toss it into the hole. It dives right away, crying sadly. When it comes up for air, the hunter pushes it back down, and often the mother comes back to her young and tries to pull it away. As soon as she’s spotted, the harpoon is thrust into her body, and she’s quickly pulled out of the water and killed.
The young seal is also pursued by foxes, which drag it from the excavation and leave nothing but the skin, which becomes a welcome find for the Eskimo.
The young seal is also hunted by foxes, which pull it from the den and leave nothing but the skin, a valuable find for the Eskimo.
Fig. 409. Old pattern of hook for drawing out captured seal.
Fig. 409. Old style of hook for pulling out captured seals.
Fig. 410. Seal hook of bear’s claw. Actual size, 3 feet. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A 6728.)
Fig. 410. Seal hook made from a bear’s claw. Actual size, 3 feet. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A 6728.)
Fig. 411. Modern form of seal hook. (From a drawing by Kumlien.)
Fig. 411. Contemporary version of seal hook. (From a drawing by Kumlien.)
As the season advances and the rays of the sun become warmer the seals break down the snow roofs and are seen basking beside their holes. The young ones remain with their dams until late in June.
As the season progresses and the sun's rays get warmer, the seals break through the snow roofs and can be seen lounging next to their holes. The young ones stay with their mothers until late June.
At this season a new method of hunting is practiced, by which seals are caught with greater ease than in winter. The hunter approaches 484 the animal from the windward side until he is within seventy or eighty yards of it. He then lies down, after having fastened a piece of skin under his left arm, upon which he reclines. The skin protects him from the melting snow, facilitates speed, and diminishes the noise as he creeps. He moves on toward the seal, resting on his left arm and side and pushing himself forward with his right foot and left arm (Fig. 412). The seal frequently raises his head and gazes around to make sure that no danger threatens. As long as the seal is looking around the hunter lies flat and keeps perfectly still, or, if he is somewhat close to the animal, imitates its movements by raising his head and rolling and playing with his hands and feet as a seal does with its flippers. Some natives will utter sounds similar to those of a blowing seal or use a small sledge with a white screen to conceal themselves from view. The sealskin clothing makes man and seal look so extremely alike that it is difficult to distinguish one from the other at some distance. If the hunter succeeds in deceiving the animal it lies down again to sleep and he pushes himself on. As the naps of the seal last but a few moments, the Eskimo approaches very slowly. At last he is near enough. He levels his gun and tries to hit the animal’s head, as it must be killed by the first shot, else it jumps into the hole and escapes. If the snow is hard and water has not yet appeared on the top of the ice, a seal may be killed in this way in twenty or thirty minutes. If the snow is very soft and deep it is almost impossible to get near enough, as it is extremely difficult to push one’s self along. The approach is rather easy through rough ice, which conceals the hunter, but the seals seldom frequent such places. Sometimes they are found at the edges of rough ice or near the shore and are easily caught when in this position.
At this time of year, a new method of hunting is used that makes it easier to catch seals than in winter. The hunter approaches the animal from upwind until he is about seventy or eighty yards away. He then lies down, having tucked a piece of skin under his left arm, which he uses to rest on. The skin keeps him dry from the melting snow, helps him move faster, and reduces noise as he creeps. He moves towards the seal, lying on his left side and pushing himself forward with his right foot and left arm (Fig. 412). The seal often lifts its head and looks around to ensure there's no danger. While the seal is scanning the area, the hunter stays flat and completely still, or if he's close enough, mimics the seal's movements by raising his head and rolling around with his hands and feet, like a seal does with its flippers. Some locals make sounds similar to a blowing seal or use a small sled with a white cover to hide themselves. The sealskin clothing makes the hunter and seal look so similar that it can be hard to tell them apart from a distance. If the hunter successfully tricks the seal, it will lie down to sleep, allowing him to move closer. Since the sealsnap lasts only a few moments, the Eskimo approaches very slowly. Eventually, he gets close enough to aim his gun and tries to shoot the seal in the head, as it needs to be killed with the first shot; otherwise, it will jump back into the hole and escape. If the snow is hard and there's no water on the ice surface yet, a seal can be killed in this way within twenty to thirty minutes. However, if the snow is very soft and deep, it's almost impossible to get close, as moving through it is extremely difficult. Approaching is easier on rough ice, which hides the hunter, but seals don't often go there. Sometimes they can be found at the edges of rough ice or near the shore, where they can be easily caught.
Fig. 412. Eskimo approaching seal. (From a photograph.)
Fig. 412. Inuit approaching seal. (From a photograph.)
Formerly, the harpoon was used instead of the gun, and is even now preferred by some hunters. The hunter gets near enough to reach the seal with the harpoon, and having struck his prey has a better chance of securing it, as the weapon prevents its escape.
Previously, hunters used harpoons instead of guns, and some still prefer them today. The hunter gets close enough to hit the seal with the harpoon, and once he has struck his target, he has a better chance of securing it because the weapon prevents it from escaping.
After the shot has been fired or the harpoon thrown, the Eskimo at once jumps to his feet in order to prevent the escape of the animal 485 to its hole, to which it takes if only wounded. An expert hunter can kill from ten to fifteen seals in one day.
After the shot is fired or the harpoon is thrown, the Eskimo immediately jumps to his feet to stop the animal from escaping 485 to its hole, which it will go to even if it's just wounded. A skilled hunter can catch ten to fifteen seals in a single day.
Rae, in describing the method of hunting, states (I, p. 170) that the women at Repulse Bay are very skillful, and when they have no harpoon frequently use a small wooden club, with which they strike the seal on the nose, killing it.
Rae, describing the hunting technique, says (I, p. 170) that the women at Repulse Bay are very skilled, and when they don’t have a harpoon, they often use a small wooden club to hit the seal on the nose, killing it.
Generally two men go sealing together. They set out early in the morning on one sledge, and while one creeps toward the seals the other keeps the dogs quiet. A single hunter cannot hunt successfully at this season with a sledge, for when he leaves it the dogs will either follow him or, if made fast to the ice, raise such a howling that the seal is put upon its guard. Therefore it is necessary that a continuous watch be kept on the dogs. When the shot is fired and they perceive that the seal is killed, no amount of whipping will restrain them; they rush forward until they have reached the victim, which is then lashed on the sledge.
Generally, two guys go sealing together. They head out early in the morning on one sled, and while one sneaks up on the seals, the other keeps the dogs calm. A solo hunter can't successfully hunt at this time of year with a sled, because when he leaves it, the dogs will either follow him or, if tied to the ice, start howling so loudly that it puts the seals on alert. So, it’s important to keep a constant watch on the dogs. When the shot is fired and they realize the seal is dead, no amount of whipping will hold them back; they dash forward until they reach the prey, which is then tied onto the sled.
The hunters go on in search of a second seal, at the sight of which the dogs are again stopped. When the Eskimo intend to remain out only a few hours they leave the dead animals at their holes and load them on the sledge on the return journey. A single hunter cannot leave the settlement for a long distance, but is limited to sealing near the village and killing no more animals than he can drag to it himself. Sometimes it happens that the seals are fast asleep. Then the hunter can go up to them without any precaution and kill them immediately, and even a dog team running at full speed can take them by surprise. In winter a similar method of hunting is followed whenever the edge of the floe is close to the land. In such places all kinds of seals lie on the ice, even in the midst of winter, and are pursued in the way which has been already described.
The hunters continue their search for a second seal, at which point the dogs are once again held back. When the Eskimo plan to be out for just a few hours, they leave the dead animals at their holes and load them onto the sled for the journey back. A single hunter can't venture too far from the settlement and is limited to sealing near the village, only taking as many animals as he can bring back himself. Sometimes, the seals are fast asleep, allowing the hunter to approach without caution and kill them instantly; even a dog team sprinting at full speed can catch them off guard. In winter, a similar hunting technique is used whenever the edge of the floe is near the land. In these areas, all kinds of seals rest on the ice, even in the dead of winter, and are hunted as described earlier.
A strange method of hunting is reported by Ross (II, p. 451) as practiced by the Netchillirmiut. Eight men slowly approached the basking seal until it raised its head, when those in front stopped and shouted as loud as they could; on which three others ran up with incredible swiftness and the leader struck it with the spear.
A strange method of hunting is reported by Ross (II, p. 451) as practiced by the Netchillirmiut. Eight men slowly approached the basking seal until it raised its head, at which point those in front stopped and shouted as loud as they could; then three others ran up with incredible speed and the leader struck it with a spear.
Still later in the season, when the snow is all gone, a very successful method of hunting is practiced. All the inhabitants of the settlements set out at once, men, women, and children, and occupy every seal hole over a large area. The men keep their harpoons ready to strike the animal when it comes up to blow, while the women and children are provided with sticks only, with which they frighten away the seals whenever they rise where they are standing. The animals are compelled to rise somewhere, as otherwise they would be drowned, and thus an ample supply is secured in a short time.
Later in the season, after all the snow has melted, a very effective method of hunting is used. Everyone in the settlements—men, women, and children—sets out together to cover every seal hole over a large area. The men keep their harpoons ready to strike when the seals come up for air, while the women and children have sticks to scare the seals away whenever they surface nearby. The seals have to come up somewhere; otherwise, they would drown, which means a good supply is gathered in a short time.
After the breaking up of the ice the natives take to their kayaks and the summer hunt is started. As at this season the methods of 486 catching all kinds of seal and walrus are almost identical, I shall describe them together; and, first, the most important part of the hunting gear, the kayak and its belongings.
After the ice breaks up, the locals get into their kayaks and kick off the summer hunt. Since the techniques for catching various seals and walruses are nearly the same during this time, I'll explain them together. First, let’s talk about the most essential piece of hunting equipment: the kayak and its accessories.
The kayak (qajaq) is almost exclusively used for hunting by all Eskimo tribes from Greenland to Alaska. According to Bessels the Ita natives do not know its use, though they have retained the word. As a connection exists between this tribe and those of Baffin Land, I have no doubt that they are acquainted with the use of the boat, though it may be of little avail in that ice encumbered region. When I first visited the tribes of Davis Strait no kayak was to be found between Cape Mercy and Cape Raper, nor had there been any for several years. In the summer of 1884, however, two boats were built by these natives.
The kayak (qajaq) is mainly used for hunting by all Eskimo tribes from Greenland to Alaska. According to Bessels, the Ita natives don’t know how to use it, even though they still have the word. Since there’s a connection between this tribe and those in Baffin Land, I’m sure they are familiar with the boat’s use, even if it isn't very practical in that icy area. When I first visited the tribes of Davis Strait, there were no kayaks found between Cape Mercy and Cape Raper, and there hadn’t been any for several years. However, in the summer of 1884, these natives built two boats.
The general principles of their construction are well known. The kayak of the Nugumiut, Oqomiut, and Akudnirmiut is bulky as compared with that of Greenland and Hudson Bay. It is from twenty-five to twenty-seven feet long and weighs from eighty to one hundred pounds, while the Iglulik boats, according to Lyon (p. 322), range from fifty to sixty pounds in weight. It may be that the Repulse Bay boats are even lighter still. According to Hall they are not heavier than twenty-five pounds (II, p. 216).
The basic principles of their construction are well known. The kayak made by the Nugumiut, Oqomiut, and Akudnirmiut is bulkier compared to those from Greenland and Hudson Bay. It usually measures between twenty-five to twenty-seven feet long and weighs around eighty to one hundred pounds, whereas the Iglulik boats, as noted by Lyon (p. 322), weigh between fifty to sixty pounds. It's possible that the boats from Repulse Bay are even lighter. Hall mentions that they weigh no more than twenty-five pounds (II, p. 216).
Fig. 413. Frame of a kayak or hunting boat. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin.)
Fig. 413. Frame of a kayak or hunting boat. (Museum of Ethnology, Berlin.)
The frame of the kayak (Fig. 413) consists, first, of two flat pieces of wood which form the gunwale (apumang). From ten to twenty beams (ajang) keep this frame on a stretch above. The greatest width between them is a little behind the cock pit (p. 487). A strong piece of wood runs from the cross piece before the hole (masing) to the stem, and another from the cross piece abaft the hole (itirbing) to the stern (tuniqdjung). The proportion of the bow end to the stern end, measured from the center of the hole, is 4 to 3. The former has a projection measuring one-fourth of its whole length. Setting aside the projection, the hole lies in the very center of the body of the kayak. A large number of ribs (tikping), from thirty to sixty, are fastened to the gunwales and kept steady by a keel (kujang), which runs from stem to stern, and by two lateral strips of wood (siadnit), which are fastened between gunwale and keel. The stem projection (usujang), which rises gradually, begins at a strong beam (niutang) and its rib (qaning). The extreme end of the stern (aqojang) is bent upward. The bottom of the boat is partly formed by the keel, partly by the side supports. The stern projection has a keel, but in the body of the boat the side supports are bent down to the depth of the keel, thus forming a flat bottom. Rising again gradually they terminate 487 close to the stern. Between the masing and the itirbing is the hole (pa) of the kayak, the rim of which is formed by a flat piece of wood or whalebone bent into a hoop. It is flattened abaft and sharply bent at the fore part. The masing sometimes rests upon a stud.
The frame of the kayak (Fig. 413) includes two flat pieces of wood that make up the gunwale (apumang). From ten to twenty beams (ajang) hold this frame tight from above. The widest gap between them is just behind the cockpit (p. 487). A solid piece of wood runs from the crosspiece in front of the hole (masing) to the front end, and another piece runs from the crosspiece behind the hole (itirbing) to the back (tuniqdjung). The ratio of the bow to the stern, measured from the center of the hole, is 4 to 3. The bow has a projection that measures one-fourth of its total length. Excluding this projection, the hole is located right in the center of the body of the kayak. A large number of ribs (tikping), between thirty and sixty, are attached to the gunwales and stabilized by a keel (kujang), which extends from the front to the back, and by two lateral strips of wood (siadnit), which are secured between the gunwale and the keel. The stem projection (usujang), which slopes upward gradually, starts at a strong beam (niutang) and its rib (qaning). The very end of the stern (aqojang) curves upward. The bottom of the boat is partly made by the keel and partly by the side supports. The stern projection has a keel, but in the main body of the boat, the side supports drop down to the level of the keel, creating a flat bottom. They gradually rise again, ending 487 near the stern. Between the masing and the itirbing is the hole (pa) of the kayak, the rim of which is made from a flat piece of wood or whalebone shaped into a hoop. It is flattened at the back and sharply bent at the front. The masing sometimes rests on a stud.
Fig. 414. Kayak with covering of skin. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin.)
Fig. 414. Kayak covered with skin. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin.)
The whole frame is covered with skins (aming) tightly sewed together and almost waterproof (Fig. 414). Usually the cover consists of three or four skins of Pagomys fœtidus. When put upon the frame it is thoroughly wetted and stretched as much as possible so as to fit tightly. It is tied by thongs to the rim of the hole. A small piece of ivory is attached to each side of the niutang and serves to fasten a thong which holds the kayak implements. Two more thongs are sewed to the skin just before the hole, another one behind it, and two smaller ones near the stern.
The entire frame is covered with skins (aming) tightly sewn together and is nearly waterproof (Fig. 414). Typically, the cover is made from three or four skins of Pagomys fœtidus. Once placed on the frame, it is thoroughly soaked and stretched as much as possible to fit snugly. It is secured with thongs to the rim of the opening. A small piece of ivory is attached to each side of the niutang and is used to fasten a thong that holds the kayak tools. Two more thongs are sewn to the skin just before the opening, one behind it, and two smaller ones near the stern.
The differences between this boat and that of the Iglulirmiut may be seen from Lyon’s description (page 320). Their kayak has a long peak at the stern, which turns somewhat upward. The rim round the hole is higher in front than at the back, whereas that of the former has the rim of an equal height all around. At Savage Islands Lyon saw the rims very neatly edged with ivory. The bow and the stern of the Iglulik kayaks were equally sharp and they had from sixty to seventy ribs. While the kayaks of the Oqomiut have only in exceptional cases two lateral supports between keel and gunwale, Lyon found in the boats of these natives seven siadnit, but no keel at all. These boats are well represented in Parry’s engravings (II, pp. 271 and 508). Instead of the thongs, ivory or wooden holders are fastened abaft to prevent the weapons from slipping down.
The differences between this boat and the one from the Iglulirmiut can be seen in Lyon’s description (page 320). Their kayak has a long peak at the back that curves slightly upward. The rim around the hole is higher in the front than in the back, while the former has a rim that is the same height all around. At Savage Islands, Lyon noticed that the rims were very neatly edged with ivory. The bow and stern of the Iglulik kayaks were equally sharp, and they had between sixty and seventy ribs. In contrast, the kayaks of the Oqomiut only occasionally have two lateral supports between the keel and the gunwale, while Lyon found seven siadnit in these natives' boats, but no keel at all. These boats are well depicted in Parry’s engravings (II, pp. 271 and 508). Instead of using thongs, they have ivory or wooden holders attached behind to keep the weapons from slipping down.
If the drawing in Lyon’s book (p. 14) be correct, the kayak of the Qaumauangmiut (Savage Islands) has a very long prow ending in a sharp peak, the proportion to the stern being 2 to 1. Its stern is much shorter and steeper than that of the northern boats and carries the same holders as that of the Iglulirmiut.
If the illustration in Lyon’s book (p. 14) is accurate, the kayak of the Qaumauangmiut (Savage Islands) features a very long front that ends in a sharp point, with the ratio to the back being 2 to 1. Its back is much shorter and steeper than that of the northern boats and has the same holders as those of the Iglulirmiut.
Fig. 415. Model of a Repulse Bay kayak. (National Museum, Washington. 68126.)
Fig. 415. Model of a Repulse Bay kayak. (National Museum, Washington. 68126.)
Fig. 416. Sirmijaung or scraper for kayak. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin.) ½
Fig. 416. Sirmijaung or scraper for kayak. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin.) ½
Fig. 417. Large kayak harpoon for seal and walrus. Actual length, 6½ feet. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin.)
Fig. 417. Large kayak harpoon for seal and walrus. Actual length, 6½ feet. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin.)
The model of a Repulse Bay kayak is represented in Fig. 415. The rim of the hole is in the same position as in the Iglulik kayak, the fore part resting on a rib bent like a hoop, whereas in the others 488 it rests on a beam. The stern resembles closely that of the Cumberland Sound boats, while the head is less peaked, the keel having a sharper bend at the beginning of the projection, which does not turn upward. Early in the spring and in the autumn, when ice is still forming, a scraper (sirmijaung) (Fig. 416) is always carried in the 489 kayak for removing the sleet which forms on the skin. When the boat has been pulled on shore, it is turned upside down and the whole bottom is cleaned with this implement. A double bladed paddle (pauting) is used with the boat. It has a narrow handle (akudnang), which fits the hand of the boatman and widens to about four inches at the thin blades (maling), which are edged with ivory. Between each blade and the handle there is a ring (qudluqsiuta).
The Repulse Bay kayak model is shown in Fig. 415. The hole's rim is positioned like that of the Iglulik kayak, with the front resting on a hoop-shaped rib, while in the other designs 488, it rests on a beam. The back closely resembles that of the Cumberland Sound boats, but the front is less pointed, and the keel has a sharper curve at the start of the projection, which does not turn up. In early spring and autumn, when the ice is still forming, a scraper (sirmijaung) (Fig. 416) is always taken in the 489 kayak to remove the sleet that forms on the skin. After the boat is pulled ashore, it’s turned upside down and the entire bottom is cleaned with this tool. A double-bladed paddle (pauting) is used with the kayak. It has a narrow handle (akudnang) that fits the paddler's hand and widens to about four inches at the thin blades (maling), which are edged with ivory. There is a ring (qudluqsiuta) between each blade and the handle.
The kayak gear consists of the large harpoon and its line (to which the sealskin float is attached), the receptacle for this line, the bird spear (with its throwing board), and two lances.
The kayak gear includes a large harpoon and its line (which is connected to the sealskin float), a container for this line, a bird spear (with its throwing board), and two lances.
Fig. 418. Tikagung or support for the hand. a, b, c (National Museum, Washington. a, 30000; b, 30005; c, 30004.) d (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin.)
Fig. 418. Tikagung or hand support. a, b, c (National Museum, Washington. a, 30000; b, 30005; c, 30004.) d (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin.)
The large harpoon (Fig. 417) is used for hunting seals and walrus from the kayak. The shaft (qijuqtenga) consists of a stout pole from four and a half to five feet in length, to which an ivory knob is fastened at the lower end. At its center of gravity a small piece of ivory (tikagung) is attached, which serves to support the hand in throwing the weapon. A remarkable pattern of this tikagung, which nicely fits the hand of the hunter, is represented in the first of the series of Fig. 418, and another one, which differs only in size from 490 that of the unang, in the second. At right angles to the tikagung a small ivory knob is inserted in the shaft and serves to hold the harpoon line. At this part the shaft is greatly flattened and the cross section becomes oblong or rhombic. At the top it is tenoned, to be inserted into the mortice of the ivory head (qatirn). The latter fits so closely on the tenon that it sticks without being either riveted or tied together. The qatirn is represented in Fig. 419. Into the cavity at its top a walrus tusk is inserted and forms with it a ball and socket joint (igimang).
The large harpoon (Fig. 417) is used for hunting seals and walruses from the kayak. The shaft (qijuqtenga) is a sturdy pole ranging from four and a half to five feet long, with an ivory knob attached at the lower end. A small piece of ivory (tikagung) is fixed at the center of gravity, which supports the hand when throwing the weapon. A unique design of this tikagung, fitting the hunter's hand perfectly, is shown in the first of the series of Fig. 418, while another one, differing only in size from that of the unang, is shown in the second. Perpendicular to the tikagung, a small ivory knob is inserted into the shaft to hold the harpoon line. This section of the shaft is significantly flattened, giving it an oblong or rhombic cross-section. The top is tenoned to fit into the mortice of the ivory head (qatirn). The fit of the qatirn on the tenon is so snug that it stays in place without being riveted or tied. The qatirn is shown in Fig. 419. A walrus tusk is inserted into the cavity at its top, forming a ball-and-socket joint (igimang) with it.
Fig. 419. Qatirn or ivory head of harpoon shaft. (National Museum, Washington. 34101.) ⅔
Fig. 419. Qatirn or ivory head of harpoon shaft. (National Museum, Washington. 34101.) ⅔
The tusk and the qatirn are fastened to each other in a most ingenious way, which may be readily made out from the engraving (Fig. 420). The principal effect of this arrangement of the holes and the thong is that the tusk is kept steady by two parallel thongs that prevent it from tipping over and only allow a movement in the plane of the flattening of the shaft as soon as any considerable force is applied to the tusk.
The tusk and the qatirn are attached to each other in a very clever way, which is clear from the engraving (Fig. 420). The main result of this setup with the holes and the thong is that the tusk stays stable thanks to two parallel thongs that stop it from tipping over and only let it move in the direction of the flattening of the shaft when a significant force is applied to the tusk.
The harpoon head used in connection with this weapon is the tokang. To prevent it from being injured, it is carried in a wooden sheath (Fig. 421). The iron point is secured by a string of whalebone or sealskin; the lower part is fastened to the sheath as indicated in the figure. The tokang differs from the naulang in that it is larger and stouter. In some cases great care is bestowed upon the finishing of this important weapon.
The harpoon head associated with this weapon is called the tokang. To keep it safe from damage, it's stored in a wooden sheath (Fig. 421). The iron tip is held in place by a string made of whalebone or sealskin; the bottom part is attached to the sheath as shown in the figure. The tokang is larger and sturdier than the naulang. In some cases, considerable attention is given to the finishing of this crucial weapon.
Fig. 421. Tokang or harpoon point in sheath. (In the possession of Captain John O. Spicer, Groton. Conn.) ⅔
Fig. 421. Tokang or harpoon point in sheath. (In the possession of Captain John O. Spicer, Groton, Conn.) ⅔
An interesting specimen of this variety of harpoon head was found by Kumlien in Cumberland Sound (Fig. 422). It was taken from a whale and differs from the device of that country. The back is bent similar to that of the iron naulang and the barbs have two points each instead of one. The front part is sharply ridged. The specimen is very nicely finished. A few very old harpoon heads of the same pattern are deposited in the British Museum and were of Hudson Strait manufacture; therefore I conclude that Kumlien’s specimen is from the same part of the country.
An interesting example of this type of harpoon head was found by Kumlien in Cumberland Sound (Fig. 422). It was taken from a whale and is different from the devices typically used in that area. The back is bent like that of the iron naulang, and the barbs have two points each instead of one. The front part has a sharp ridge. The specimen is very well made. A few very old harpoon heads of the same design are housed in the British Museum and were made in Hudson Strait; therefore, I conclude that Kumlien’s specimen comes from the same region.
Fig. 423. Ancient tokang or harpoon head. (In A. Sturgis’s collection, New York.)
Fig. 423. Ancient tokang or harpoon head. (In A. Sturgis’s collection, New York.)
Fig. 423 represents an ancient harpoon head of the same style, the locality of which is unfortunately unknown. The specimen is of particular interest, as it shows the method of fastening the stone to the ivory part. A similar specimen is in the collections of the British Museum; it formed part of the Sloane collection. Both these specimens show perforations at the lower end of the harpoon head which 491 are not found in the modern ones. Probably these served for holding the harpoon head to the shaft by means of a thin line, in order to prevent the head from coming off before the seal or walrus was struck. These holes are similar to the ones shown in Figs. 395 and 436.
Fig. 423 shows an ancient harpoon head of the same style, but the specific location is unfortunately unknown. This piece is particularly interesting because it demonstrates how the stone was attached to the ivory part. A similar piece is part of the British Museum's collections; it was included in the Sloane collection. Both of these pieces have holes at the lower end of the harpoon head that aren’t present in modern versions. These holes likely held the harpoon head to the shaft with a thin line, preventing it from coming off before the seal or walrus was hit. These holes are similar to those seen in Figs. 395 and 436.
The harpoon line (alirn) is attached to the tokang in the same way as the iparang is to the naulang. When it is fastened to the igimang, the bend of the tusk facilitates the disengagement of the harpoon head, which turns its back to that of the tusk. Attached to the line at the level of the ivory knob which has been mentioned is the teliqbing (Fig. 424), into the hole of which the knob fits closely. As the line from the tokang to the teliqbing is just long enough to allow it to be pulled down far enough to reach the knob, it holds shaft and head firmly together so long as the tusk remains in its position. As soon as a lateral strain is put upon the tusk the distance between the head and the knob is diminished and the teliqbing slips off, thus disengaging the line with the harpoon head from the shaft. Sometimes the teliqbing has two holes, one being used when the line is wet and longer, the other when it is dry and shorter.
The harpoon line (alirn) is attached to the tokang just like the iparang is to the naulang. When it's secured to the igimang, the curve of the tusk helps the harpoon head to come loose, as it turns away from the tusk. Connected to the line at the point of the ivory knob that was mentioned is the teliqbing (Fig. 424), where the knob fits snugly into the hole. Since the line from the tokang to the teliqbing is just long enough to pull it down to reach the knob, it keeps the shaft and head tightly together as long as the tusk stays in place. However, when a sideways force is applied to the tusk, the gap between the head and the knob decreases, causing the teliqbing to slip off, which then disconnects the line with the harpoon head from the shaft. Sometimes the teliqbing has two holes; one is used when the line is wet and longer, while the other is for when it’s dry and shorter.
Fig. 424. Teliqbing, which is fastened to harpoon line. (National Museum, Washington. 34123.) 1/1
Fig. 424. Teliqbing, which is attached to the harpoon line. (National Museum, Washington. 34123.) 1/1
In Iglulik the spear is called qatilik (Fig. 425). In pattern it is the same as that of Akudnirn and Oqo, the only difference, according to Parry’s description, being that the toung (the tusk) is straight and has a notch near its socket (see Fig. 425), while the harpoon head which belongs to it has only a single point at its lower end.
In Iglulik, the spear is called qatilik (Fig. 425). Its design is the same as that of Akudnirn and Oqo, with the only difference, according to Parry’s description, being that the toung (the tusk) is straight and has a notch near its socket (see Fig. 425), while the harpoon head attached to it has just a single point at its lower end.
Fig. 426. Avautang or sealskin float. (National Museum, Washington. 30009.)
Fig. 426. Avautang or sealskin float. (National Museum, Washington. 30009.)
This harpoon is placed on the right side of the prow of the kayak, with the point directed towards its head. The harpoon line, with the tokang, lies just before the hunter in a flat receptacle (asedlun), which consists of a wooden ring with a handle, held by thongs before the hole of the kayak. The receptacle rests on the skin cover, having no feet, as has the Greenland one. In Hudson Strait it is secured upon holders. The harpoon line is rolled up in a coil, but its end is fastened to the seal float, which lies behind the hunter and is held in place by a thong. The line passes along the right side of the kayak hole. The float (avautang) (Fig. 426) consists of a whole sealskin which had been removed from the animal dexterously, its 493 entire body being pulled through the mouth, which is enlarged by means of a cut along the throat. The nails of the flippers are frequently extracted and the openings sewed up, the hind flippers and the tail being cut off and firmly tied together by a thong, thus forming a neck (atauta), to which the harpoon line is attached. At the head a pipe for blowing up the skin (poviutang) is inserted (Fig. 427); the skin is firmly tied to the ring of the pipe, on which the stopper is secured as soon as the skin is sufficiently inflated. This device is a very convenient one, for it is difficult to inflate the skin without some kind of mouthpiece. If there are any holes in the float they are closed by a button similar to the one shown in Fig. 427 a, which, however, is without a hole.
This harpoon is positioned on the right side of the front of the kayak, with the point facing toward the front. The harpoon line, along with the tokang, lies just in front of the hunter in a flat container (asedlun), which is made of a wooden ring with a handle, secured by thongs in front of the kayak's opening. The container rests on the skin cover, lacking legs, unlike the Greenland version. In Hudson Strait, it is attached to holders. The harpoon line is coiled, but its end is connected to the seal float, which is behind the hunter and secured with a thong. The line runs along the right side of the kayak's opening. The float (avautang) (Fig. 426) is made from an entire sealskin that has been skillfully removed from the animal, pulling its whole body through the mouth, which is enlarged by a cut along the throat. The nails from the flippers are often removed and the openings sewn shut, while the hind flippers and tail are cut off and tightly bound together with a thong, creating a neck (atauta) to which the harpoon line is attached. At the head, a pipe for inflating the skin (poviutang) is inserted (Fig. 427); the skin is securely tied to the ring of the pipe, which is then sealed with a stopper once the skin is adequately inflated. This tool is very practical, as it’s hard to inflate the skin without some type of mouthpiece. If there are any holes in the float, they are sealed with a button similar to the one shown in Fig. 427 a, which, however, does not have a hole.
Fig. 427. Different styles of poviutang or pipe for inflating the float. (National Museum, Washington. a, 29986; b, 34118; c, 34119; d, 34120.)
Fig. 427. Different types of poviutang or pipes for inflating the float. (National Museum, Washington. a, 29986; b, 34118; c, 34119; d, 34120.)
If the harpoon is to be used for hunting large animals, such as walrus or whales, a very ingenious contrivance is sometimes inserted between the line and the float in the shape of a wooden hoop with a seal or deer skin stretched over it (niutang) (see Fig. 437). Three or four thongs of equal length are fastened to the hoop at equal distances and bound together. At their point of union they are attached to the line. As soon as a walrus is struck and starts to swim away, the hoop is thrown at right angles to the stretched line and exerts a strong resistance when dragged along, thus diminishing the speed of the animal and quickly exhausting its strength. The float prevents its escape, as it is too buoyant to be drawn under water. The animal cannot dive, and thus the hunter does not lose sight of his prey.
If the harpoon is meant for hunting large animals like walruses or whales, a clever device is sometimes added between the line and the float. This device looks like a wooden hoop with seal or deer skin stretched over it (niutang) (see Fig. 437). Three or four thongs of the same length are attached to the hoop at equal intervals and tied together. At the point where they connect, they are secured to the line. When a walrus is hit and starts to swim away, the hoop is thrown at a right angle to the taut line and creates strong resistance when pulled, reducing the animal's speed and quickly tiring it out. The float stops the animal from escaping, as it is too buoyant to be pulled underwater. This way, the animal can’t dive, and the hunter keeps sight of his target.
Fig. 428. Agdliaq or spear for small seals. (From Parry II, p. 550.)
Fig. 428. Agdliaq or spear for small seals. (From Parry II, p. 550.)
For small seals a similar weapon is used, the agdliaq (Fig. 428), 494 the main difference being that it is much smaller and has a seal bladder for a float attached to the shaft. I have not seen this weapon myself, but Kumlien has brought away parts of it. Fig. 429 shows that its point differs only in size from the large igimang. The head (probably the naulang) is tied to the shaft, which acts as a drag.
For hunting small seals, a similar tool is used, called the agdliaq (Fig. 428), 494 the main difference being that it’s much smaller and has a seal bladder attached to the shaft for floating. I haven’t seen this weapon myself, but Kumlien has collected parts of it. Fig. 429 shows that its point differs only in size from the large igimang. The head (likely the naulang) is tied to the shaft, which serves as a drag.
The points are fastened to the shaft in almost the same way as the former, the only difference being that they are straight; the drill holes do not cross one another. Fig. 430 represents the heads belonging to this spear; Fig. 431, a large one which is used with the large harpoon. As the lines in all these run as is represented in Fig. 429 b, they cannot act as harpoons. I had no opportunity of seeing any of these weapons myself.
The points are attached to the shaft almost the same way as before, the only difference being that they are straight; the drill holes don’t cross each other. Fig. 430 shows the heads for this spear; Fig. 431 shows a large one used with the large harpoon. Since the lines in all these run as shown in Fig. 429 b, they can't function as harpoons. I didn’t have the chance to see any of these weapons myself.
Fig. 430. Spear heads. (National Museum, Washington. a, 34076: b, 34068.)
Fig. 430. Spear heads. (National Museum, Washington. a, 34076: b, 34068.)
In hunting walrus a lance (anguvigang) (Fig. 432) is used which is similar to the igimang. The shaft and the joint are alike in both, only the knob for the teliqbing being absent. The head is made of bone or the straight part of a walrus tusk and has an iron 495 blade on the top. The lance serves to dispatch the animal after it has been harpooned with the igimang.
In hunting walrus, a lance (anguvigang) (Fig. 432) is used that is similar to the igimang. The shaft and joint are the same in both, except the knob for the teliqbing is missing. The head is made of bone or the straight part of a walrus tusk and has an iron 495 blade on top. The lance is used to kill the animal after it has been harpooned with the igimang.
Fig. 433. Nuirn or bird spear. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin.)
Fig. 433. Nuirn or bird spear. (Museum of Ethnology, Berlin.)
Fig. 432. Anguvigang or lance. Museum für Völkerkunde Berlin.
Fig. 432. Anguvigang or spear. Museum of Ethnology Berlin.
The joint prevents the shaft from being broken by the struggles of the animal. Its place is behind the hunter on the right side of the kayak, the point being directed toward the stern. Generally a second lance is carried on the left side of the boat parallel with the other. It is either of the same kind or a slender shaft with a long point firmly inserted in it (kapun, ipun). The point is about one and one-third of a foot to one and one-half feet long. This weapon, however, is more particularly in use for hunting deer in the lakes and ponds.
The joint keeps the shaft from breaking during the animal's struggle. It's positioned behind the hunter on the right side of the kayak, with the point aimed toward the back. Usually, a second lance is carried on the left side of the boat, parallel to the first. This lance is either the same type or a thinner shaft with a long point securely attached (kapun, ipun). The point is about one and one-third to one and one-half feet long. However, this weapon is mainly used for hunting deer in lakes and ponds.
Fig. 434. Nuqsang or throwing board, (a front and (b back view. National Museum, Washington. 30013.
Fig. 434. Nuqsang or throwing board, (a front and (b back view. National Museum, Washington. 30013.
The last implement in the kayak gear to be described is the bird spear, nuirn (Fig. 433), with its throwing board, nuqsang (Fig. 434). It has a shaft of about four feet in length, flattened at the lower end. Among the natives on the east and southeast of Baffin Land it has an iron prong at its point, whereas in Iglulik it has two points of unequal length, with double barbs. Three double barbed prongs are attached to the center of the shaft. They have a sharp bend at their lower part, the points running parallel to the shaft. The prongs of the Greenland dart are straight and diverge from the shaft. The lower end of the bird spear fits into the groove of the throwing board. Therefore the end of the shaft is squared. The ivory knob at the end of the spear contains a small hole for the insertion of the 496 spike which is in the end of the groove. When the board is used it is held firmly in the right hand, the first finger passing through the hole by the side of the groove, the thumb clasping the notch on the left side (Fig. 434 b), the other fingers those on the right side. The shaft is held by the points of the fingers. When the spear is hurled the posterior point of the groove describes a wide circle, and the fingers let go the shaft, which, remaining in its first position, is driven forward by the spike with great violence, and thus it attains considerable velocity.
The last tool in the kayak gear to describe is the bird spear, nuirn (Fig. 433), along with its throwing board, nuqsang (Fig. 434). It has a shaft that's about four feet long, flattened at the bottom. Among the natives in the east and southeast of Baffin Land, it has an iron tip at the point, while in Iglulik, it has two tips of different lengths with double barbs. Three double-barbed prongs are attached to the center of the shaft. They have a sharp bend at the bottom, with the points running parallel to the shaft. The prongs of the Greenland dart are straight and spread out from the shaft. The bottom of the bird spear fits into the groove of the throwing board, so the end of the shaft is squared off. The ivory knob at the end of the spear has a small hole for inserting the 496 spike that fits into the end of the groove. When using the board, it is held firmly in the right hand, with the index finger going through the hole next to the groove and the thumb gripping the notch on the left side (Fig. 434 b), while the other fingers wrap around the right side. The shaft is held by the fingertips. When the spear is thrown, the back point of the groove traces a wide arc, and the fingers release the shaft, which stays in its original position but is propelled forward by the spike with great force, achieving considerable speed.
I will now give a description of the methods of hunting seals and walrus during the summer. As long as ice cakes are drifting in the bays the natives do not use their seal floats, which would be severed from the line and easily torn to pieces. They paddle to a small cake, on which they lift their kayaks, and cautiously move the cake towards another one on which a seal or walrus is asleep. After they have come within range of their game they shoot it. As an abundance of all kinds of seals and walrus are basking on the ice plenty of food can be obtained.
I’ll now describe how seals and walruses are hunted during the summer. While ice floes are drifting in the bays, the locals don’t use their seal floats, as they would get disconnected from the line and easily destroyed. They paddle to a small ice floe, lift their kayaks onto it, and carefully move the floe toward another one where a seal or walrus is sleeping. Once they’re close enough to their target, they shoot it. With so many different types of seals and walruses basking on the ice, there’s plenty of food to be had.
An ingenious way of walrusing during this season is described by Lyon (p. 330):
An clever method of walrusing during this season is described by Lyon (p. 330):
When the hunters, in their canoes, perceive a large herd sleeping on the floating ice, as is their custom, they paddle to some other piece near them, which is small enough to be moved. On this they lift their canoes, and then bore several holes, through which they fasten their tough lines, and when everything is ready, they silently paddle the hummock towards their prey, each man sitting by his own line and spear. In this manner they, reach the ice on which the walruses are lying snoring; and if they please, each man may strike an animal, though, in general, two persons attack the same beast. The wounded and startled walrus rolls instantly to the water, but the siatko, or harpoon, being well fixed, he cannot escape from the hummock on which the Eskimo have fastened the line. When the animal becomes a little weary, the hunter launches his canoe, and lying out of his reach, spears him to death.
When the hunters, in their canoes, spot a large herd sleeping on the floating ice, they paddle to a nearby piece that's small enough to be moved. They lift their canoes onto this piece and drill several holes to attach their strong lines. Once everything is set, they silently paddle the ice hummock closer to their prey, with each man sitting by his own line and spear. This way, they reach the ice where the walruses are lying, snoring; and if they want, each man can strike an animal, though usually, two people go after the same one. The injured and startled walrus immediately rolls into the water, but with the harpoon securely in place, it can't escape from the ice where the Eskimos have tied the line. When the animal gets a bit tired, the hunter launches his canoe and, staying just out of its reach, spears it to death.
When the ice is gone seals are shot or harpooned with the igimang and the agdliaq. The float prevents their escape and they are killed with the anguvigang or the qapun. Later in summer, when they begin to shed their fur, they lose almost all their blubber and sink when shot; therefore they must be hunted with the harpoon and the float. As the walrus is a dangerous foe should it turn upon the hunters in their light boats, the harpoon is thrown from a great distance, and the animal is not attacked at close quarters until it is well nigh exhausted by dragging the float and the niutang and by loss of blood. A great number of walrus are shot or harpooned while basking on the low islands and rocks.
When the ice melts, seals are shot or harpooned with the igimang and the agdliaq. The float prevents their escape, and they are killed with the anguvigang or the qapun. Later in the summer, when they start shedding their fur, they lose almost all their blubber and sink when shot; so they must be hunted with the harpoon and the float. The walrus is a dangerous enemy if it turns on the hunters in their small boats, so the harpoon is thrown from a long distance, and the animal isn’t attacked up close until it’s almost exhausted from dragging the float and the niutang and from blood loss. A large number of walrus are shot or harpooned while lounging on the low islands and rocks.
There are a few shoals and narrow inlets in Frobisher Bay and Cumberland Sound in which great numbers of seals are caught during the summer. In hunting them at those places some of the Eskimo in kayaks occupy the shallow entrance of the inlet, while others scare the seals from its head. As the seals approach its outlet they are speared by those who are lying in wait for them. Since the natives have procured firearms seals are shot from the boats, and in whale boats they even attack the walrus, though they prefer to have drifting ice near at hand in case the fierce animal should turn upon them and tear the boat with its powerful tusks. This method of hunting is very successful in openings which intersect the land floe in spring. To these places an enormous number of seals and walrus 498 resort, and they are shot either when basking at the edge of the water or when blowing.
There are a few shallow areas and narrow inlets in Frobisher Bay and Cumberland Sound where large numbers of seals are caught during the summer. In hunting them in these spots, some of the Eskimo use kayaks to block the shallow entrance of the inlet, while others drive the seals from the top. As the seals come closer to the exit, they are speared by those lying in wait. Since the locals have gotten firearms, they shoot seals from their boats, and in whale boats, they even go after walrus, although they prefer to have drifting ice nearby in case the aggressive animal turns on them and damages the boat with its strong tusks. This hunting method works really well in openings that cut through the land floe in spring. These spots attract a huge number of seals and walrus, and they are shot either while basking at the water's edge or when they surface to breathe. 498
In the fall, when the small bays are covered with ice and newly formed floes drift to and fro in the open sea, the natives go sealing at the edge of the land ice (Fig. 435). The seals are shot on the drifting ice or in the water and are secured by means of the unang, in the following manner: The hunter jumps upon a small cake, which he pushes on with his spear until he is near the body of the animal, and then drags it upon the land floe with the harpoon line. This method is almost the same as the one used in sealing and walrusing during the winter wherever the open water is close to the shore.
In the fall, when the small bays are frozen over and newly formed ice floes drift in the open sea, the locals go seal hunting at the edge of the sea ice (Fig. 435). The seals are shot on the drifting ice or in the water and are secured using the unang in this way: The hunter jumps onto a small piece of ice, which he pushes with his spear until he’s close to the animal, then pulls it onto the larger ice floe with the harpoon line. This method is almost identical to the one used for seal and walrus hunting during the winter whenever there’s open water near the shore.
Fig. 435. Sealing at the edge of the ice. (From a photograph.)
Fig. 435. Sealing at the edge of the ice. (From a photograph.)
This hunt is described by Gilder in the following words (pp. 182–184):
This hunt is described by Gilder in the following words (pp. 182–184):
Usually there are two hunters who approach the walrus, one hiding behind the other, so that the two appear but as one. When the spear is thrown, both hold on to the line, which is wound around their arms so as to cause as much friction as possible, 499 in order to exhaust the animal speedily. ***When the line is nearly run out the end of the spear shaft is passed through a loop in the end of the line and held firmly by digging a little hole in the ice for the end of the spear to rest in, the foot resting upon the line and against the spear to steady it. This gives the hunter an immense advantage over his powerful game, and if he is fortunate enough to secure this hold there is no escape for the walrus except that the line may cut on the edge of the sharp ice, or the thin ice break off, and hunter, line, and all be precipitated into the water—a not unusual experience in walrus hunting. Another cause of misfortune is for the line to become entangled around the arm of the hunter so that he cannot cast it off, in which case he is most assuredly drawn into the sea, and in nine cases out of ten drowned, for his knife is seldom at hand for an emergency and no amount of experience will ever induce an Inung [Eskimo] to provide against danger.
Usually, there are two hunters who approach the walrus, one hiding behind the other, so they look like one person. When the spear is thrown, both hold on to the line, which is wrapped around their arms to create as much friction as possible, 499 to tire the animal out quickly. Understood. Please provide the text to be modernized.When the line is almost gone, the end of the spear shaft is passed through a loop at the end of the line and held securely by digging a small hole in the ice for the spear to rest in, with the foot placed on the line against the spear to steady it. This gives the hunter a huge advantage over the powerful animal, and if he’s lucky enough to secure this hold, the walrus can't escape unless the line cuts on the sharp edge of the ice, or the thin ice breaks off, causing the hunter and line to fall into the water—a not uncommon occurrence in walrus hunting. Another reason for trouble is if the line gets tangled around the hunter's arm, making it impossible to throw it off, in which case he will almost certainly be pulled into the sea, and in nine out of ten cases, he will drown, since his knife is rarely handy for emergencies, and no amount of experience will convince an Inung [Eskimo] to prepare for danger.
Sometimes the hunter is alone when he strikes a walrus, and in that case it requires considerable dexterity to secure the spear hold in the ice; or if he fails to get that he may sit down and brace his feet against a small hummock, when it comes to a sheer contest of muscle between the hunter and the walrus. In these contests victory generally perches upon the banner of the walrus, though the Inung [Eskimo] will never give up until the last extremity is reached. Often he is dragged to the very edge of the ice before he finds a protuberance against which to brace his feet, and often he is drawn down under the ice before he will relinquish his hold. He is very tenacious under such circumstances, for he knows that when he loses the walrus he loses his line and harpoon also.
Sometimes the hunter is alone when he strikes a walrus, and in that case, it takes a lot of skill to secure the spear in the ice; or if he fails to do that, he may sit down and brace his feet against a small snow mound, resulting in a pure test of strength between the hunter and the walrus. In these struggles, victory usually goes to the walrus, although the Inung [Eskimo] will never give up until the very end. Often, he is pulled to the very edge of the ice before he finds a bump to brace his feet against, and often he is dragged under the ice before he will let go. He is very determined in such situations because he knows that if he loses the walrus, he also loses his line and harpoon.
Hall (I, p. 459) describes the hunt, according to his observations in Frobisher Bay, as follows:
Hall (I, p. 459) describes the hunt, based on his observations in Frobisher Bay, like this:
The line is coiled, and hung about the neck of the hunter; thus prepared he hides himself among the broken drifting ice, and awaits the moment for striking his game. The spear is then thrown and the hunter at once slips the coil of line off his head, fastens the end to the ice by driving a spear through a loop in it, and waits till the walrus comes to the surface of the water, into which he has plunged on feeling the stroke of the harpoon; then the animal is quickly despatched by the use of a long lance.
The line is coiled and draped around the hunter's neck; once ready, he hides among the shattered, drifting ice and waits for the right moment to strike his target. He then throws his spear and immediately slips the coil of line off his head, securing the end to the ice by driving another spear through a loop in it. He waits for the walrus to surface after being hit by the harpoon; then, the animal is quickly dispatched with a long lance.
Sometimes the walrus when swimming under an extensive floe of new ice are drowned by being frightened down every time they try to come up to blow.
Sometimes the walrus, when swimming beneath a large sheet of new ice, drown because they are scared down every time they try to come up for air.
Formerly whaling was one of the favorite hunts of the Central Eskimo and in some places it is even continued to this day. Whales are either pursued in kayaks or in skin boats. If the kayak is used, they are harpooned in the same way as the walrus, a very large float (avautapāq´) being attached to the harpoon head. The whale is pursued by a great number of kayaks and every boatman endeavors to drive his harpoon into the animal, which, by the loss of blood and the resistance of the niutang and floats, is tired out and killed with lances.
In the past, whaling was one of the favorite hunts of the Central Eskimo, and in some areas, it is still practiced today. Whales are either hunted in kayaks or in skin boats. When using a kayak, they are harpooned similar to how walruses are hunted, with a large float (avautapāq´) attached to the harpoon head. The whale is chased by a number of kayaks, and each boatman tries to stab his harpoon into the animal. As the whale loses blood and struggles against the niutang and floats, it becomes exhausted and is ultimately killed with lances.
More frequently it is pursued in skin boats (p. 527), which for the purpose are propelled by means of paddles (angun). In this case the crew consists entirely of men, although on other occasions the rowing falls to the women’s share; a skillful boatman steers the boat and the harpooner stands in the bow watching his opportunity to strike the whale. The implement used in this pursuit is represented in Fig. 436. I could not procure the weapon itself (sakurpāng´, i.e., the 500 largest weapon), but had a model made by an Akudnirmio, of which the figure is a drawing. The shaft is said to be very long and heavy, measuring from ten to twelve feet. To this shaft a bone point tapering towards the end is firmly attached. The harpoon head consists of two pieces similar to the siatko of the Iglulirmiut (see Fig. 395). The iron edge is inserted into a flat piece of bone, which fits into the slit of a large head. The latter is made from the jawbone of a whale and is extremely heavy. When the whale is struck, both parts, the head and the edge, are disengaged from the shaft and separated from each other, but both enter the flesh of the whale and work in the same way as the tokang.
More often, it's done in skin boats (p. 527), which are moved using paddles (angun). In this case, the crew is all male, although sometimes women do the rowing; a skilled boatman steers the boat while the harpooner stands at the front, looking for the right moment to strike the whale. The tool used for this hunt is shown in Fig. 436. I couldn't get the actual weapon (sakurpāng´, meaning the largest weapon), but I had a model made by an Akudnirmio, which is represented in the drawing. The shaft is said to be very long and heavy, measuring between ten and twelve feet. To this shaft, a bone point that tapers at the end is securely attached. The harpoon head consists of two pieces similar to the siatko of the Iglulirmiut (see Fig. 395). The iron edge is inserted into a flat piece of bone that fits into a slot of a large head. The latter is made from a whale's jawbone and is very heavy. When the whale is struck, both parts—the head and the edge—detach from the shaft and separate, but both penetrate the whale's flesh and function in the same way as the tokang.
The long harpoon line is coiled up on the first thwart of the boat. On the second one the niutang and five large floats (Fig. 437), which were fastened to the line, are kept ready and heaved overboard as soon as the harpoon is fast to a whale. The buoys and the niutang tire it out quickly and the boat can easily follow it up. It is lanced with the kalugiang whenever it comes up to blow. This lance consists of a heavy handle with a long point of rod iron; formerly bone or narwhal ivory, with an iron edge inserted into its point, was used for this purpose.
The long harpoon line is coiled on the first seat of the boat. On the second seat, the niutang and five large floats (Fig. 437), which are attached to the line, are ready to be thrown overboard as soon as the harpoon is secured to a whale. The buoys and the niutang tire it out quickly, allowing the boat to easily follow it. It's struck with the kalugiang whenever it surfaces to breathe. This lance has a heavy handle with a long iron tip; in the past, bone or narwhal ivory was used, with an iron edge inserted at the point for this purpose.
The narwhal and the white whale are hunted in the same way as the walrus and the right whale. There are a few shallow bays to which the white whale resorts in the summer. If a shoal of them has entered such a bay, the Eskimo take to their boats and kayaks, and by throwing stones frighten them into the shallowest part, where they are easily harpooned.
The narwhal and the white whale are hunted similarly to the walrus and the right whale. In the summer, there are a few shallow bays that the white whale visits. If a school of them has entered one of these bays, the Eskimo get into their boats and kayaks, and by throwing stones, they scare the whales into the shallowest area, where they can be easily harpooned.
DEER, MUSK OX, AND BEAR HUNTING.
When the snow has melted and the short summer is at hand the Eskimo start for the deer hunt. The tribes possessed of firearms can easily procure deer all the year round, particularly where uneven land facilitates their approach toward the herd; but in summer the hunt is most important, as it is the only season in which deerskins are fit for clothing.
When the snow has melted and summer is just around the corner, the Eskimos head out for the deer hunt. The tribes with guns can easily get deer throughout the year, especially in areas with uneven terrain that helps them get closer to the herd; however, the hunt during the summer is the most crucial because it's the only time when deer hides are suitable for making clothes.
The favorite method of hunting is to attack the deer in the ponds when swimming from one side to the other. In many places the deer in their migrations are in the habit of crossing the narrow parts of lakes, and here the natives lie in ambush with their kayaks. In other places they are driven into the water by the Eskimo and attacked by the drivers or by hunters stationed on the lake. Favorite places for such a chase are narrow peninsulas, generally called nedlung. The Eskimo deploy into a skirmish line and slowly drive the herd to the point of the peninsula, whence the deer, the retreat being cut off, take to the water.
The preferred hunting method is to ambush the deer in the ponds while they swim from one side to the other. In many areas, during their migrations, the deer tend to cross the narrow parts of lakes, and that's where the locals lie in wait with their kayaks. In other instances, they are driven into the water by the Eskimo and attacked by the drivers or hunters positioned on the lake. Popular spots for this kind of chase are narrow peninsulas, often referred to as nedlung. The Eskimo form a line and gradually push the herd towards the tip of the peninsula, where the deer, finding their escape cut off, jump into the water.
If the shore be too straight to permit this method of hunting, they drive the deer to a hill stretching to the lake. A line of cairns (inugsung) is erected on the top, intended to deceive the deer, which believe them a new line of hunters approaching from the opposite side. They take to the water, as they see no retreat. If there are no hills a line of cairns is erected in some part of the plain. Such monuments are found all over the country, most of them having the appearance of being very old.
If the shore is too straight for this hunting method, they drive the deer to a hill that extends to the lake. A line of stone markers (inugsung) is built on top to trick the deer into thinking there’s a new group of hunters coming from the other side. They jump into the water, seeing no way to escape. If there are no hills, they set up a line of markers somewhere in the plain. These structures can be found throughout the country, most looking quite old.
As soon as the deer are in the water the natives pursue them in their kayaks, and as their boats are propelled much more swiftly than the animals can swim they are quickly overtaken and killed with the spear (kapun). Sometimes the wounded deer will turn upon the boat, in which cases the hunter must make his escape with the utmost speed, else he will be capsized or the skin of the boat will be torn to pieces by the animal’s antlers.
As soon as the deer are in the water, the locals chase them in their kayaks. Since their boats move much faster than the deer can swim, they quickly catch up and kill them with a spear (kapun). Sometimes, the injured deer will turn and attack the boat, so the hunter has to escape as quickly as possible, or else he risks capsizing or having the animal’s antlers tear the kayak apart.
In some of the narrow valleys with steep faces on both sides the deer are driven toward the hunters. As there is no chance for escape on either side they are killed by the men who lie in ambush. A remarkable tradition referring to the deer hunts of a fabulous tribe in these passes is frequently told by the Eskimo (see p. 635).
In certain narrow valleys with steep cliffs on both sides, the deer are pushed toward the hunters. With no way to escape on either side, they are taken down by the men hiding in ambush. A fascinating tradition about the deer hunts of a legendary tribe in these areas is often shared by the Eskimo (see p. 635).
Fig. 438. Wooden bow from Iglulik. (From Parry II, p. 550.)
Fig. 438. Wooden bow from Iglulik. (From Parry II, p. 550.)
Some places are particularly favorable to these methods of hunting. 502 The herds when traveling north in spring and south in autumn take the same course every year, passing rivers, lakes, and valleys at the deer passes. Here the Eskimo stay during the migrations of the deer, as they are sure to fall in with them and to secure plenty of meat and skins during the season. In spring the rivers and lakes are not yet freed from their icy fetters and the pursuit is more difficult; in the autumn, however, they are easily captured in the water. Some important stations of this kind are the island Qeqertome itoq tudlirn, south of Lake Nettilling; the outlet of this lake, Koukdjuaq, particularly the peninsula formed by the river and the south shore of the lake; the country about Qudjitariaq, farther north, and the narrow valley between Piling and Itirbilung: on the continent, the lakes of Rae Isthmus, particularly North Pole Lake; some passes in the hills north of Chesterfield Inlet; the isthmus of Boothia; the entrance of Qimuqsuq, on Adelaide Peninsula; and Simpson Strait.
Some places are especially good for these hunting methods. 502 The herds travel north in spring and south in autumn, following the same route every year, passing rivers, lakes, and valleys at the deer crossings. The Eskimos stay at these spots during the deer migrations, knowing they will likely encounter them and have plenty of meat and skins for the season. In spring, the rivers and lakes are still frozen, making it harder to hunt; however, in autumn, they are easily caught in the water. Some key locations include the island Qeqertome itoq tudlirn, south of Lake Nettilling; the lake's outlet, Koukdjuaq, especially the peninsula formed by the river and south shore of the lake; the area around Qudjitariaq, further north; and the narrow valley between Piling and Itirbilung. On the mainland, notable places are the lakes of Rae Isthmus, particularly North Pole Lake; certain passes in the hills north of Chesterfield Inlet; the isthmus of Boothia; the entrance of Qimuqsuq on Adelaide Peninsula; and Simpson Strait.
Fig. 439. Wooden bow from Cumberland Sound. (National Museum, Washington.)
Fig. 439. Wooden bow from Cumberland Sound. (National Museum, Washington.)
Referring to the last, Klutschak describes an interesting method of hunting deer which is in vogue in that locality (p. 130). The narrow strait which separates Ita Island from King William Land freezes up early in the season, and the reindeer in trying to cross the strait frequently gather on this island. The Eskimo deploy over the icy bridge and make a terrible noise, frightening the reindeer, which are gradually driven toward a place the ice of which is treacherous at this time of the year. Here they break through and, being able to move only with great difficulty, are easily killed.
Referring to the last point, Klutschak describes an interesting method of hunting deer that is currently popular in that area (p. 130). The narrow strait that separates Ita Island from King William Land freezes early in the season, and the reindeer, attempting to cross the strait, often gather on this island. The Eskimo spread out over the icy bridge and make a loud racket, which scares the reindeer, driving them toward a spot where the ice is unsafe at this time of year. Here, they break through and, struggling to move, become easy targets for hunters.
Fig. 440. Bows of reindeer antlers. (National Museum, Washington. a, 34053; b, 34055.)
Fig. 440. Bows made from reindeer antlers. (National Museum, Washington. a, 34053; b, 34055.)
When the deer have scattered over the country they must be stalked, and, wherever the natives have no firearms, bows and arrows are used.
When the deer have spread out across the land, they must be tracked down, and wherever the locals don’t have guns, they use bows and arrows.
Fig. 441. Bow of antlers, with central part cut off straight, from Pelly Bay. (National Museum, Washington. 10270.)
Fig. 441. Bow of antlers, with the central part cut off flat, from Pelly Bay. (National Museum, Washington. 10270.)
They have two kinds of bows (pitiqse): a wooden one (Figs. 438 and 439) and another made of reindeer antlers (Figs. 440 and 441). Parry gives a very good description of the former (II, p. 510):
They have two types of bows (pitiqse): one made of wood (Figs. 438 and 439) and another made from reindeer antlers (Figs. 440 and 441). Parry provides a great description of the first one (II, p. 510):
One of the best of their bows was made of a single piece of fir, four feet eight inches in length, flat on the inner side and rounded on the outer, being five inches in girth about the middle where, however, it is strengthened on the concave side, when strung, by a piece of bone ten inches long, firmly secured by tree-nails of the same material. At each end of the bow is a knob of bone, or sometimes of wood covered with leather, with a deep notch for the reception of the string. The only wood which they can procure, not possessing sufficient elasticity combined with 503 strength, they ingeniously remedy the defect by securing to the back of the bow, and to the knobs at each end, a quantity of small lines, each composed of a plat or “sinnet” of three sinews. The number of lines thus reaching from end to end is generally about thirty; but besides these, several others are fastened with hitches round the bow, in pairs, commencing eight inches from one end, and again united at the same distance from the other, making the whole number of strings in the middle of the bow sometimes amount to sixty. These being put on with the bow somewhat bent the contrary way, produce a spring so strong as to require considerable force as well as knack in stringing it, and giving the requisite velocity to the arrow. The bow is completed by a woolding round the middle and a wedge or two here and there, driven in to tighten it.
One of their best bows was crafted from a single piece of fir, measuring four feet eight inches long, flat on the inside and rounded on the outside, with a girth of five inches at the midpoint. It is reinforced on the concave side by a ten-inch long piece of bone, securely fastened with tree-nails made from the same material. Each end of the bow has a knob made of bone or sometimes wood wrapped in leather, featuring a deep notch to hold the string. The wood they can find doesn’t have enough elasticity and strength, so they cleverly fix this issue by attaching a series of small lines to the back of the bow and to the knobs at each end. Each line consists of a braid or "sinnet" made from three sinews. There are usually about thirty of these lines running from end to end, but additionally, several others are tied around the bow in pairs, starting eight inches from one end and rejoining at the same distance from the other, which can lead to a total of sixty strings in the middle of the bow. When applied with the bow bent in the opposite direction, this setup creates a strong spring action that requires significant force and skill to string it and to give the arrow the needed speed. The bow is finished off with a wrapping around the middle and one or two wedges driven in to tighten it.
Fig. 442. Arrows with bone heads. (National Museum, Washington. a, 34054; b, 10270.)
Fig. 442. Arrows with bone heads. (National Museum, Washington. a, 34054; b, 10270.)
Fig. 443. Arrows with metal heads.
a, b (National Museum, Washington. a, 30056;
b, 34056.) c (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A
6707.)
Fig. 443. Arrows with metal tips.
a, b (National Museum, Washington. a, 30056; b, 34056.) c (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A 6707.)
442b, 443a, b: 1/4
442, 443a, b: 1/4
The bow represented in Fig. 439 is from Cumberland Sound and resembles the Iglulik pattern. The fastening of the sinew lines is different and the piece of bone giving additional strength to the central part is wanting. In Cumberland Sound and farther south wooden bows each made of a single piece were not very rare; the wood necessary for their manufacture was found in abundance on Tudjan (Resolution Island), whence it was brought to the more northern districts.
The bow shown in Fig. 439 is from Cumberland Sound and looks like the Iglulik style. The way the sinew lines are fastened is different, and the bone piece that adds extra strength to the middle part is missing. In Cumberland Sound and further south, wooden bows made from a single piece weren't too uncommon; the wood needed to make them was plentiful on Tudjan (Resolution Island), from where it was transported to the more northern areas.
Fig. 444. Arrowhead from Boothia. (National Museum, Washington. 10205.) ½
Fig. 444. Arrowhead from Boothia. (National Museum, Washington. 10205.) ½
The bows which are made of antlers generally consist of three pieces, a stout central one slanted on both sides and two side pieces riveted to it. The central part is either below or above the side ones, as represented in Fig. 440. These bows are strengthened by plaited sinews in the same way as the wooden ones and generally the joints are secured by strong strings wound around them. A remarkable bow made of antlers is represented in Fig. 441. The central part is not slanted, but cut off straight. The joint is effected by two additional pieces on each side, a short stout one outside, a long thin one inside. These are firmly tied together with sinews. The short piece prevents the parts from breaking apart, the long one gives a powerful spring. The specimen here represented was brought home by Hall from the Sinimiut of Pelly Bay, and a similar one was brought by Collinson from Victoria Land and has been deposited in the British Museum. The strings are attached to these bows in the same way as to the wooden ones.
The bows made from antlers usually consist of three parts: a strong central piece that is angled on both sides and two side pieces attached to it. The central part can either sit below or above the side pieces, as shown in Fig. 440. These bows are reinforced with braided sinew, just like the wooden ones, and the joints are typically secured with strong strings wrapped around them. A notable bow made from antlers is illustrated in Fig. 441. The central piece isn’t slanted but cut straight across. The joint is created with two extra pieces on each side: a short, thick one on the outside and a long, thin one on the inside. These are tightly bound together with sinew. The short piece keeps the parts from coming apart, while the long one provides a strong spring action. The example shown was brought back by Hall from the Sinimiut of Pelly Bay, and a similar one was collected by Collinson from Victoria Land and is currently housed in the British Museum. The strings are attached to these bows in the same way as they are for wooden ones.
Fig. 446. Various forms of arrowhead. (National Museum, Washington. a, 29993; e, 10213.) ½
Fig. 446. Different types of arrowheads. (National Museum, Washington. a, 29993; e, 10213.) ½
The arrows (qaqdjung) are made of round pieces of wood generally tapering a little towards the lower end, to which two feathers of an owl or some other bird are attached. The bone heads of these 505 arrows are joined to the shaft as represented in Fig. 442, while metal heads are inserted as shown in Fig. 443. The difference in the methods used by the Mackenzie and the central tribes in fastening the point to the shaft is very striking. The arrow point of the former and of the western tribes is pointed and inserted in the shaft (Fig. 444),5 while that of the latter is always slanted and lashed to it (Figs. 442 and 443). The direction of the slant is either parallel or vertical to the edge (Fig. 445). Other forms of arrows are shown in Fig. 446. A similar difference between the fastenings of the socket to the spear handle exists in the two localities. The western tribes give its base the form of a wedge (Fig. 447), which is inserted in the shaft, while the Central Eskimo use a mortise.
The arrows (qaqdjung) are made from round pieces of wood, usually tapering a bit at the lower end, where two feathers from an owl or another bird are attached. The bone heads of these 505 arrows are connected to the shaft as shown in Fig. 442, while metal heads are inserted as illustrated in Fig. 443. The differences in the methods used by the Mackenzie and the central tribes to attach the point to the shaft are quite noticeable. The arrow point of the former and the western tribes is pointed and inserted into the shaft (Fig. 444), 5, while that of the latter is always slanted and tied to it (Figs. 442 and 443). The direction of the slant can be either parallel or vertical to the edge (Fig. 445). Other types of arrows are shown in Fig. 446. A similar difference exists in the way the socket is fastened to the spear handle in these two areas. The western tribes shape its base like a wedge (Fig. 447), which is inserted into the shaft, whereas the Central Eskimo use a mortise.
Fig. 447. Socket of spear handle from Alaska. (National Museum, Washington. 36060.) ¼
Fig. 447. Socket of spear handle from Alaska. (National Museum, Washington. 36060.) ¼
Formerly slate heads were in general use (Fig. 448); now the heads are almost everywhere made of iron or tin, riveted or tied to the 508 point (Fig. 446). In ancient graves flint heads are frequently found, some of which are represented in Fig. 449. On Southampton Island stone heads are in use even at the present time. Fig. 423 probably shows how they were attached to the shank.
Formerly, slate heads were commonly used (Fig. 448); now, heads are almost universally made of iron or tin, secured with rivets or ties to the point (Fig. 446). In ancient graves, flint heads are often discovered, some of which are shown in Fig. 449. On Southampton Island, stone heads are still used today. Fig. 423 probably indicates how they were attached to the shank.
Fig. 449. Flint arrowheads from old graves. (National Museum, Washington. c, 30109; d, 34138.) 1/1
Fig. 449. Flint arrowheads from ancient graves. (National Museum, Washington. c, 30109; d, 34138.) 1/1
The quiver (Fig. 450) is made of sealskin, the hair of which is removed. It comprises three divisions, a larger one containing the bow and a smaller one containing four or six arrows, the head directed toward the lower end of the case. When extracted from the quiver they are ready for use. Between the two compartments there is also a small pouch, in which tools and extra arrowheads are carried.
The quiver (Fig. 450) is made of sealskin, with the hair removed. It has three sections: a larger one for the bow and a smaller one for four to six arrows, with the tips pointing toward the bottom of the case. When taken out of the quiver, they are ready to use. There is also a small pouch between the two compartments for carrying tools and extra arrowheads.
Fig. 450. Various styles of quiver. a, b Two views of a quiver from Cumberland Sound. (National Museum, Washington. 30015.) c Quiver from Iglulik (from Parry II, p. 550).
Fig. 450. Different styles of quivers. a, b Two angles of a quiver from Cumberland Sound. (National Museum, Washington. 30015.) c Quiver from Iglulik (from Parry II, p. 550).
When traveling the Eskimo carry the quiver by an ivory handle; when in use it is hung over the left shoulder. Fig. 451 represents quiver handles, the first being fashioned in imitation of an ermine.
When traveling, the Eskimo carry the quiver by an ivory handle; when in use, it is hung over the left shoulder. Fig. 451 shows quiver handles, with the first designed to look like an ermine.
Fig. 451. Quiver handles. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. a, b, IV A 6843.)
Fig. 451. Quiver handles. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. a, b, IV A 6843.)
If the deer cannot be driven into the water the Eskimo either stalk them or shoot them from a stand. In a plain where the hunter cannot hide himself it is easier to approach the herd if two men hunt together. They advance, the second man hiding behind the first one by stooping a little. The bows or the guns are carried on the shoulders so as to resemble the antlers of a deer. The men imitate their grunting and approach slowly, now stopping and stooping, now advancing. If the deer look about suspiciously they sit down, the second man lying almost flat on the ground, and both, at some distance off, greatly resemble the animals themselves. Ross (II, p. 252) states that the inhabitants of Boothia imitate the appearance of the deer, the foremost of two men stalking a herd bearing a deer’s head upon his own.
If the deer can’t be pushed into the water, the Eskimo either stalks them or shoots them from a lookout. In an open area where the hunter can’t hide, it’s easier to get close to the herd if two men hunt together. They move forward, with the second man crouching behind the first one. They carry their bows or guns on their shoulders to mimic a deer’s antlers. The men imitate the deer’s grunting and move slowly, sometimes stopping and bending down, other times moving forward. If the deer look around suspiciously, they sit down, with the second man lying almost flat on the ground, and both, from a distance, closely resemble the animals. Ross (II, p. 252) notes that the people of Boothia imitate the appearance of the deer, with the front man of two stalking the herd wearing a deer’s head on his own.
It is somewhat difficult to approach the deer near enough to get within range, especially if they are hunted with bow and arrow. Generally it is not necessary to get quite near them, for when feeding the herd moves on in the same direction for some time, and the hunter can hide behind a stone lying in that direction and wait until they are within range. After the first shot has been fired they do not take to flight at once, but stand for a few seconds, struck with surprise, 509 and a clever hunter may kill two or three before they run away. If the country is very level the Eskimo raise heaps of stones or build circular or semicircular walls to conceal themselves and allure the animals by grunting. As the deer possess a very fine scent they must always be approached from the lee side.
It's a bit tricky to get close enough to the deer to take a shot, especially if you're hunting with a bow and arrow. Usually, you don't need to get too close, because when they're feeding, the herd tends to move in the same direction for a while. The hunter can hide behind a rock in that path and wait until they are within range. After the first shot is fired, they don't run away immediately but stand there for a few seconds in surprise, and a skilled hunter might be able to take down two or three before they escape. In very flat areas, the Eskimo will pile up stones or build circular or semicircular walls to hide and lure the animals by grunting. Since deer have an excellent sense of smell, you always have to approach them from downwind.
An interesting method of hunting is described by Parry (II, p. 512) and confirmed by Hall (II, p. 178). Parry writes:
An interesting hunting method is described by Parry (II, p. 512) and confirmed by Hall (II, p. 178). Parry writes:
Two men walk directly from the deer they wish to kill, when the animal almost always follows them. As soon as they arrive at a large stone, one of the men hides behind it with his bow, while the other continuing to walk on soon leads the deer within range of his companion’s arrows.
Two men walk straight from the deer they want to hunt, and the animal usually follows them. When they reach a big rock, one man hides behind it with his bow, while the other keeps walking, eventually leading the deer within range of his friend’s arrows.
Hall says that one hunter hides himself behind a stone while the other utters grunting sounds to attract it.
Hall says that one hunter hides behind a stone while the other makes grunting sounds to attract it.
In winter deer are sometimes caught in traps made by digging holes in the snow and covering them with slabs of the same material. Sometimes urine is poured upon and around the trap or salt water ice is placed upon it, in order to allure the deer (Klutschak, p. 131). Having been attracted to the trap they fall through the roof and are speared in the hole.
In winter, deer are sometimes caught in traps made by digging holes in the snow and covering them with slabs of the same material. Sometimes, urine is poured on and around the trap, or saltwater ice is placed on it to lure the deer (Klutschak, p. 131). Once attracted to the trap, they fall through the roof and are speared in the hole.
Wherever the musk ox is found it is eagerly pursued by the Eskimo. Though dogs are of no use in the chase of the nimble deer, they are of great help in hunting this animal. When a track is found the dogs are let loose and soon overtake the herd. The latter form a circle of defense in which they are kept at bay until the hunter approaches. While the dogs continue attacking and dodging, the musk oxen try to hit them with their horns and do not heed the Eskimo, who assails them at close quarters with a lance to which a thong is frequently attached. When an ox is wounded it makes an impetuous attack on the hunter, who dodges to one side. The dogs being at hand again immediately keep it at bay, thus enabling the hunter to let fly another arrow or throw his lance again. Thus the struggle continues until the greater part of the herd is killed. In rare instances an ox dashes out of the circle and escapes from the pack.
Wherever the musk ox is found, the Eskimo eagerly pursues it. While dogs aren’t helpful for chasing the quick deer, they are very useful when hunting this animal. When a track is discovered, the dogs are released and quickly catch up to the herd. The musk oxen form a defensive circle to protect themselves while they are kept at bay until the hunter gets closer. As the dogs continue to attack and evade, the musk oxen try to hit them with their horns and ignore the Eskimo, who attacks them up close with a lance often tied with a thong. When an ox is wounded, it charges at the hunter, who dodges to the side. The dogs are right there again, keeping it at bay, allowing the hunter to shoot another arrow or throw his lance once more. This struggle goes on until most of the herd is killed. In rare cases, an ox breaks out of the circle and escapes from the pack.
Polar bears are hunted in about the same manner as the musk ox. The Eskimo pursue them in light sledges, and when they are near the pursued animal the traces of the most reliable dogs in the team are cut, when they dash forward and bring the bear to bay. As the hunter gets sufficiently near, the last dogs are let loose and the bear is killed with a spear or with bow and arrow. The best season for bear hunting is in March and April, when the bears come up the fjords and bays in pursuit of the young seals. At this season the she bear is accompanied by the cub which was born in February or March. Its skin and flesh are highly prized by the Eskimo. At some places, for instance at Cape Raper and at Cape Kater on Davis Strait, the she bears dig holes in the snow banks, in which they sleep during 510 the winter. The natives seek these holes and kill the bear before it awakes.
Polar bears are hunted in a similar way to musk ox. The Eskimos chase them using lightweight sleds, and when they get close to the bear, they stop the most reliable dogs in the team. The dogs then sprint forward to corner the bear. Once the hunter is close enough, the last dogs are released, and the bear is killed with a spear or a bow and arrow. The best time for bear hunting is in March and April when the bears come into the fjords and bays to hunt young seals. During this time, the female bear is usually with her cub, which was born in February or March. The skin and meat are highly valued by the Eskimos. In some areas, like Cape Raper and Cape Kater on Davis Strait, the female bears dig holes in the snow to sleep in during the winter. The locals find these holes and kill the bear before it wakes up.
The chase of the musk ox and that of the bear have become much easier since the introduction of firearms in Arctic America, and the Eskimo can kill their game without encountering the same dangers as formerly.
The hunt for musk ox and bears has become much easier since firearms were introduced in Arctic America, and the Eskimo can take down their prey without facing the same dangers as before.
HUNTING OF SMALL GAME.
Lastly, I mention the methods used in catching smaller animals, such as wolves, foxes, and hares. Wolves are only pursued when they become too troublesome. Frequently they linger about the villages in winter, and when everybody is asleep they attack the store rooms or the dogs, which have the greatest fear of this voracious animal; for, although dogs will brave the bear, they do not venture to resist a single wolf. If a pack of these beasts linger about the village for weeks preying upon the native stores, traps are finally built or the Eskimo lie in ambush near a bait to kill them. The wolf trap is similar to the one used to catch deer. The hole dug in the snow is about eight or nine feet deep and is covered with a slab of snow, on the center of which a bait is laid. A wall is built around it which compels the wolf to leap across it before he can reach the bait. By so doing he breaks through the roof and, as the bottom of the pit is too narrow to afford him jumping room, he is caught and killed there (Rae I, p. 135).
Lastly, I want to talk about the methods used to catch smaller animals like wolves, foxes, and hares. Wolves are only hunted when they become too much of a problem. They often hang around the villages in winter, and when everyone is asleep, they attack the storage rooms or the dogs, which fear this fierce animal the most; because while dogs will face a bear, they won’t dare confront a single wolf. If a pack of these creatures stays near the village for weeks, feeding on the local supplies, traps are eventually set up, or the Eskimo lies in wait near bait to kill them. The wolf trap is similar to the one used for deer. The hole dug in the snow is about eight or nine feet deep and is covered with a slab of snow, with bait placed in the center. A wall is built around it that forces the wolf to jump over before reaching the bait. In doing so, he breaks through the roof, and since the bottom of the pit is too narrow for him to jump around, he gets caught and killed there (Rae I, p. 135).
A remarkable method of killing wolves has been described by Klutschak (p. 192) and confirmed by the Eskimo of Cumberland Sound. A sharp knife is smeared with deer’s blood and sunk into the snow, the edge only protruding. The wolves lick the knife and cut their tongues so severely as to bleed to death. Another method is to roll a strip of whalebone, about two feet long, in a coil, which is tied up with sinews. At each end a small metal edge is attached to the whalebone. This strip, wrapped in a piece of blubber or meat, is gulped down by the hungry wolf. As it is digested the sinews are dissolved and the elastic strap is opened and tears the stomach of the animal. A very ingenious trap is described by Parry (II, p. 514):
A unique way of killing wolves has been described by Klutschak (p. 192) and confirmed by the Eskimos of Cumberland Sound. A sharp knife is coated with deer blood and placed in the snow with just the edge sticking out. The wolves lick the knife and end up cutting their tongues so badly that they bleed to death. Another method involves rolling a piece of whalebone, about two feet long, into a coil, which is secured with sinews. A small metal edge is attached to each end of the whalebone. This strip, wrapped in blubber or meat, is eaten by the hungry wolf. As it digests, the sinews dissolve and the elastic strap opens up, tearing the wolf's stomach. A very clever trap is described by Parry (II, p. 514):
It consists of a small house built of ice, at one end of which a door, made of the same plentiful material, is fitted to slide up and down in a groove; to the upper part of this a line is attached and, passing over the roof, is led down into the trap at the inner end, and there held by slipping an eye in the end of it over a peg of ice left for the purpose. Over the peg, however, is previously placed a loose grummet, to which the bait is fastened, and a false roof placed over all to hide the line. The moment the animal drags at the bait the grummet slips off the peg, bringing with it the line that held up the door, and this falling down closes the trap and secures him.
It’s a small house made of ice, with a door at one end that slides up and down a groove; a line is attached to the top and runs over the roof down into the trap inside, where it’s held by slipping a loop over a peg of ice set aside for this purpose. Before the peg, there’s a loose noose that the bait is attached to, and a false roof is placed over everything to hide the line. The moment the animal pulls on the bait, the noose slips off the peg, pulling down the line that held the door open, which then falls and shuts the trap, catching it.
Foxes are usually caught in traps. An ice house about six feet high is built of hummocks, which are cut down with the point of the spear. It is covered with ice slabs, only a hole in the center 511 being left. Blocks of snow and slabs of ice are piled up around the building so as to permit easy access to the roof. Some blood is sprinkled round the hole to attract the fox and a larger bait is placed upon the floor of the house. The fox jumps down and, as the only exit is in the center of the roof, cannot escape. Another trap has a slab of ice erected in such a manner as to fall and kill the fox when he touches the bait.
Foxes are typically caught in traps. An ice house about six feet high is built from hummocks, which are chopped down with the tip of a spear. It's covered with ice slabs, leaving only a hole in the center 511 for entry. Blocks of snow and slabs of ice are stacked around the building to allow easy access to the roof. Some blood is sprinkled around the hole to lure the fox, and a bigger bait is placed on the floor of the house. The fox jumps down, and since the only exit is in the center of the roof, it can't escape. Another trap features a slab of ice set up to fall and crush the fox when it touches the bait.
A third trap, similar to the one above mentioned, has been described by Lyon, p. 339:
A third trap, similar to the one mentioned above, has been described by Lyon, p. 339:
It is like a small lime kiln in form, having a hole near the top, within which the bait is placed, and the foxes (for these animals alone are thus taken) are obliged to advance to it over a piece of whalebone, which, bending beneath their weight, lets them into prison, and then resumes its former position: thus a great number of them are sometimes caught in a night. In the summer they are but rarely taken, and it is then by means of a trap of stones, formed like the ice trap, with a falling door.
It looks like a small lime kiln, with a hole near the top where the bait is placed. The foxes—only these animals are caught this way—have to step onto a piece of whalebone. The whalebone bends under their weight, dropping them into a trap, and then it goes back to its original position. Because of this, many foxes can be caught in one night. In the summer, they’re caught much less often, usually using a stone trap designed like the ice trap, which has a falling door.
Hares are either killed with small shot or with arrows or caught in whalebone snares, as are ermines and lemmings.
Hares are either killed with small pellets, arrows, or caught in whalebone traps, just like ermines and lemmings.
Fig. 452. Whalebone nooses for catching waterfowl. (In the possession of Captain Spicer, of Groton, Conn.)
Fig. 452. Whalebone loops for catching waterfowl. (Owned by Captain Spicer, of Groton, Conn.)
Waterfowl of all descriptions are caught in abundance in whalebone nooses (Fig. 452) fastened to a long whalebone line or to a thong. The line is set along the edge of a lake, particularly near nesting places. In shallow lakes these lines are placed across the water to catch the diving and swimming birds, which are drawn to the shore with the line. On the low egg islands, which are inhabited by innumerable ducks, snares are set on the nests, and great numbers are caught in a short time. Swans and geese are procured in the same way. Other birds, and particularly partridges, are killed with arrows and with small shot.
Waterfowl of all kinds are easily caught in whalebone nooses (Fig. 452) attached to a long whalebone line or a thong. The line is placed along the edge of a lake, especially near nesting sites. In shallow lakes, these lines are laid across the water to trap diving and swimming birds, which are lured towards the shore by the line. On the low egg islands, which are home to countless ducks, snares are set on the nests, allowing for the capture of many birds in a short time. Swans and geese are caught in the same way. Other birds, especially partridges, are hunted with arrows and small shot.
Large flocks of ducks and other kinds of birds fly through certain valleys in the fall and in spring when migrating. Great numbers are caught here without any difficulty, as they can be killed with sticks.
Large flocks of ducks and other types of birds fly through certain valleys in the fall and spring when they migrate. A lot of them are caught here easily, as they can be killed with sticks.
A favorite method of catching gulls is by building a flat snow house. One block of the roof is translucent and so thin as to permit the hunter, who is hidden in the house, to push his hand through it. A bait is placed on this block, and as soon as a bird alights to feed it is pulled through the roof into the hut.
A popular way to catch gulls is by making a flat snow shelter. One section of the roof is see-through and so thin that the hunter, who is concealed inside, can reach his hand through it. A bait is set on this section, and as soon as a bird lands to eat, it gets pulled through the roof into the shelter.
By far the greater number of birds are caught during the molting season. Partridges can be caught with the hand and waterfowl are pursued with the kayak. The waterfowl dive as soon as the boat comes near them and being frightened down again as soon as they rise they are eventually drowned. One species of goose (kango) 513 which frequents the lakes of the country is caught in a remarkable way. A circular wall of stones is raised, with a single entrance. The Eskimo drive a flock of these birds towards the building, one man, whom the stupid creatures follow, leading the way. As soon as they have entered the wall the entrance is shut up and they are slaughtered. If they happen to be met with on the water they are encircled by kayaks and driven towards the shore, one boat leading. Then they are driven within the stone wall as already described.
Most birds are caught during the molting season. Partridges can be caught by hand, and waterfowl are hunted with a kayak. The waterfowl dive as soon as the boat approaches, and when they are scared back underwater as soon as they surface, they eventually drown. One type of goose (kango) 513 that inhabits the lakes is trapped in a unique way. A circular wall of stones is built with a single entrance. The Eskimo drive a flock of these birds towards the enclosure, with one man leading the way, whom the unsuspecting birds follow. Once they enter the wall, the entrance is closed off and they are killed. If they are encountered on the water, they are surrounded by kayaks and pushed towards the shore, with one boat leading the way. Then, they are driven into the stone wall as described before.
Fig. 454. Ivory fish used as bait in
spearing salmon.
a From Repulse Bay. a, c, d (National
Museum, Washington. a, 10400; c, 34109; d, 34134.)
1/1
b (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A 6830.) 1/1
Fig. 454. Ivory fish used as bait for catching salmon.
a From Repulse Bay. a, c, d (National Museum, Washington. a, 10400; c, 34109; d, 34134.)
1/1
b (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A 6830.) 1/1
FISHING.
The most important fish is the salmon, which is caught in abundance during the summer. When the lakes begin to break up the salmon descend to the sea, following the narrow lead between the 514 land floe and the water. In some places they are so plentiful as to fill the water completely. Here they are speared with the kakivang (Fig. 453). This instrument consists of a handle which widens towards the end; in the center it has a prong of bone or iron, and two larger ones at the sides, made of deer antlers or musk ox horn. These latter diverge and are furnished with a bone or iron nail on the inner side. The elasticity of these side prongs is increased by thongs or strings holding them tightly together. If the salmon are very plentiful no bait is needed and the natives cannot spear them as quickly as they swim along. When the ice is gone they are caught in the shallow rivers falling from the lakes into the sea. The natives stand on the bank or step into the water. A small ivory fish (Fig. 454) (eχalujang), tied by two or three holes in the back to a plaited string of deer sinews, is used as a bait. Frequently bear’s teeth are used for bait. They are attached to a separate line which the hunter continually moves up and down to attract the attention of the fish. When the salmon comes near the bait it is speared with the kakivang. In the left hand the fisherman holds an instrument for stringing the fish (quqartaun), some illustrations of which are given in Fig. 455. It is made of ivory. A thong fastened to the hole of the instrument has a thick knot at the opposite end. As soon as a salmon is caught it is taken out of the nippers (kakivang) and the point of the 515 quqartaun is pushed into the gills and brought out again at the mouth; thus the fish remains sticking until it is dead. Sometimes it is killed by pushing the ivory point of the instrument into its neck. When dead it is pushed on the thong.
The most important fish is salmon, which is caught in large numbers during the summer. When the lakes start to break up, the salmon head to the sea, following the narrow gap between the 514 ice and the water. In some areas, they are so abundant that they completely fill the water. Here, they are speared with a kakivang (Fig. 453). This tool has a handle that widens at the end; in the center, it has a prong made of bone or iron, and two larger prongs on the sides made from deer antlers or musk ox horn. These side prongs diverge and have a bone or iron nail on the inner side. The flexibility of these side prongs is enhanced by cords or strings that hold them tightly together. If there are a lot of salmon, no bait is needed, and the natives can't spear them as quickly as they swim by. When the ice melts, they are caught in the shallow rivers flowing from the lakes into the sea. The natives either stand on the shore or wade into the water. A small ivory fish (Fig. 454) (eχalujang), tied by two or three holes in its back to a braided string of deer sinew, is used as bait. Sometimes bear teeth are also used for bait, attached to a separate line that the hunter moves up and down to grab the fish’s attention. When the salmon comes close to the bait, it is speared with the kakivang. In their left hand, the fisherman holds a tool for stringing the fish (quqartaun), some examples of which are shown in Fig. 455. It is made of ivory. A cord attached to the hole in the tool has a thick knot at the other end. As soon as a salmon is caught, it is removed from the nippers (kakivang), and the point of the 515 quqartaun is pushed into the gills and pulled out through the mouth; this keeps the fish on the line until it is dead. Sometimes, it is dispatched by pushing the ivory point of the tool into its neck. Once dead, it is pushed onto the cord.
Fig. 453. Kakivang or salmon spear. (National Museum, Washington, a, 34087; b, 34086.) ¼
Fig. 453. Kakivang or salmon spear. (National Museum, Washington, a, 34087; b, 34086.) ¼
At some places wears are built, above which the fish are caught. These consist of dikes of stones about one and a half or two feet high, which are piled across a creek some distance below high water mark. The salmon cross the wall at high water, but are cut off from the sea at half tide and are speared while there. In other places the forks of rivers are shut off by dikes, above which the salmon gather.
At certain locations, wears are constructed, where fish are caught. These are made of stone banks that are around one and a half to two feet high, built across a creek a bit downstream from the high water mark. The salmon swim over the wall during high water, but they get trapped from the sea at low tide and are caught with spears then. In other areas, river forks are blocked by dikes, where the salmon gather.
In autumn salmon are caught when ascending the rivers. Sometimes they linger too long in small ponds and, as the rivers quickly dry up at this season, are prevented from getting out of the pools. Here they are caught until late in the season. Some of these ponds freeze to the bottom in winter, and the natives, when visiting them in the spring, cut holes in the ice and take out the frozen fish.
In autumn, salmon are caught as they swim upstream in the rivers. Sometimes they stay too long in small ponds, and since the rivers dry up quickly during this season, they can't get out of the pools. They are caught there until late in the season. Some of these ponds freeze solid in winter, and when the locals check them in the spring, they cut holes in the ice and retrieve the frozen fish.
Fig. 456. Salmon hook. (National Museum, Washington. 10142.) 1/1
Fig. 456. Salmon hook. (National Museum, Washington. 10142.) 1/1
In the early part of the spring salmon are caught with hooks (kakliokia, Iglulik; niksiartaung, Oqo), holes being cut through the ice of the lake. Formerly the hooks were made of deer antlers. Another device consists of a nail, crooked and pointed at one end, the other being let into a piece of ivory or bone (Fig. 456). A third one is represented in Fig. 457.
In early spring, people catch salmon using hooks (kakliokia, Iglulik; niksiartaung, Oqo), cutting holes through the lake ice. In the past, the hooks were made from deer antlers. Another tool uses a nail that is bent and sharp at one end, with the other end attached to a piece of ivory or bone (Fig. 456). A third type is shown in Fig. 457.
The fishing line is made of plaited deer sinews and is either held in the hand or tied to a short rod. Along with these hooks baits are used similar to those mentioned in the foregoing description. If the 516 carving represented in Fig. 458 is used, the hook is tied to it by means of two holes on the lower side of the fish, while the line passes through its back. The fish, in coming near the bait, is generally caught by the hook in the back or side. In this manner salmon, trout, and all kinds of sea fish are caught.
The fishing line is made of braided deer sinew and can either be held in hand or tied to a short rod. Along with these hooks, baits are used similar to those mentioned earlier. If the 516 carving shown in Fig. 458 is used, the hook is attached to it through two holes on the lower side of the fish, while the line goes through its back. When the fish approaches the bait, it usually gets caught by the hook in its back or side. This method is used to catch salmon, trout, and various types of sea fish.
Fig. 458. Bait used in fishing with hooks. (National Museum, Washington. 34108.) 1/1
Fig. 458. Bait used in fishing with hooks. (National Museum, Washington. 34108.) 1/1
I myself have never seen any nets for fishing, but Klutschak found them in use among the Utkusiksalik tribe, and Petitot (Les grands Esquimaux, p. 278), among the natives of Anderson River. The Labrador Eskimo also use nets.
I have never personally seen any fishing nets, but Klutschak discovered them being used by the Utkusiksalik tribe, and Petitot (Les grands Esquimaux, p. 278) found them among the natives of Anderson River. The Labrador Eskimo also use nets.
MANUFACTURES.
MAKING LEATHER AND PREPARING SKINS.
Most of the implements of the Eskimo are made of some part of the animals which they pursue. The skins are used for clothing, for building purposes, and for covering the frames of boats. Many implements are made of bone, others of walrus tusks or narwhal horn. As wood is extremely scarce, bone or other parts of animals must make up the deficiency. I shall here describe the methods of preparing these materials.
Most of the tools used by the Eskimo are made from parts of the animals they hunt. The skins are used for clothing, construction, and to cover boat frames. Many tools are made from bone, while others come from walrus tusks or narwhal horns. Since wood is very rare, they have to rely on bone or other animal parts to fill the gap. I will now describe how these materials are prepared.
Fig. 459. Butcher’s knife with bone handle. (National Museum, Washington. 34080.) ¼
Fig. 459. Butcher’s knife with bone handle. (National Museum, Washington. 34080.) ¼
Fig. 460. Pana or knife for dissecting game, a (From Parry II, p. 548.) b (American Museum of Natural History.)
Fig. 460. Pana or knife for dissecting game, a (From Parry II, p. 548.) b (American Museum of Natural History.)
The skin of the seal (Pagomys fœtidus) is dressed in different ways, according to the purpose for which it is intended. In skinning the animal a longitudinal cut is made across the belly with a common butcher’s knife (saving). Most natives have procured this useful instrument and even in olden times a considerable number had found their way from Hudson Bay territory to their countries. The large knives of their own manufacture (pilaut) are of similar form, a metal edge being inserted into an ivory blade. Figure 459 is a more modern knife, an iron blade being fastened to a bone handle.
The skin of the seal (Pagomys fœtidus) is prepared in various ways depending on its intended use. When skinning the animal, a long cut is made along the belly with a regular butcher's knife (saving). Most locals have obtained this handy tool, and even in the past, a significant number had made their way from Hudson Bay territory to their areas. Their own large knives (pilaut) are similarly shaped, with a metal edge fitted into an ivory blade. Figure 459 shows a more modern knife, with an iron blade attached to a bone handle.
The skin, with the blubber, is cut from the flesh with the same knife, or still more easily with the pana, the old device of which is represented in Fig. 460 a (Parry II, p. 550). This knife is about one foot and a half long (Parry II, p. 503). The use of the small prongs near the blade was not explained by Parry. In Fig. 460 b is presented a pana from the eastern coast of Hudson Bay, collected by Dr. R. Bell; the handle is made of bone, the blade of iron. The flippers are cut off at the joints, and thus the whole skin is drawn off in a single piece. In dressing the animal the natives open the belly and first scoop out the blood, then the entrails are taken out, the ribs are separated from the breast bone and from the vertebrae, the fore flippers (with the shoulders and the hind flippers) are taken out, the only part remaining being the head, the spinal column, and the rump bone. Generally these are not eaten, but are used for dogs’ food.
The skin and blubber are cut from the flesh using the same knife, or even more easily with the pana, an old tool shown in Fig. 460 a (Parry II, p. 550). This knife is about a foot and a half long (Parry II, p. 503). Parry didn't explain the use of the small prongs near the blade. Fig. 460 b shows a pana from the eastern coast of Hudson Bay, collected by Dr. R. Bell; the handle is made of bone and the blade is iron. The flippers are cut off at the joints, allowing the entire skin to be removed in one piece. While processing the animal, the natives open the belly and first scoop out the blood, then remove the entrails, separate the ribs from the breastbone and vertebrae, and take out the fore flippers (along with the shoulders and hind flippers). The only parts left are the head, spinal column, and rump bone. Generally, these parts are not eaten but are used as dog food.
The knife (ulo) used by the women serves to clean and prepare the skins. This implement, with which almost all the cutting is done, is shaped like a crescent, the handle being attached to the center, and 518 greatly resembles a mincing knife. Fig. 461 represents the form which is now in use. Fig. 462 is a very old ulo handle from a stone circle on Qeqertuqdjuaq (Cape Broughton). It is made of bone and has a slit for the slate blade. It is worth remarking that this blade had not been riveted to the handle, but fastened with a kind of glue (see p. 526). There are a few arrow and harpoon heads the blades of which are inserted in the same manner; the bone is heated and the blade is inserted while it is hot. As it is cooling the slit becomes narrower and the blade is firmly squeezed into the bone handle. Part of a slate blade, which had been riveted to the handle, is shown in Fig. 463. Fig. 464 represents a handle from a recent grave.
The knife (ulo) used by women is for cleaning and preparing skins. This tool, which is used for almost all cutting, is crescent-shaped with the handle attached at the center, and it looks a lot like a mincing knife. Fig. 461 shows the design currently in use. Fig. 462 features a very old ulo handle from a stone circle on Qeqertuqdjuaq (Cape Broughton). It’s made from bone and has a slit for the slate blade. Notably, this blade wasn't riveted to the handle but secured with a type of glue (see p. 526). There are a few arrow and harpoon heads where the blades are attached in the same way; the bone is heated, and the blade is inserted while it's hot. As it cools, the slit tightens, gripping the blade securely into the bone handle. Part of a slate blade that had been riveted to the handle is shown in Fig. 463. Fig. 464 displays a handle from a recent grave.
Fig. 461. Form of ulo now in use. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A 6733.) ⅔
Fig. 461. Current design of ulo. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A 6733.) ⅔
In preparing the skin the women spread it over a piece of whalebone (asimautang), a small board, or a flat stone, and sit down before it, resting on their knees, the feet bent under the thighs. They hold the skin at the nearest edge and, pushing the ulo forward, remove the blubber from it and deposit the latter in a small tub which stands near the board. As they proceed to the opposite end of the skin, the finished part is rolled up and held in the left hand.
In preparing the skin, the women spread it over a piece of whalebone (asimautang), a small board, or a flat stone, and sit in front of it on their knees, with their feet bent underneath them. They hold the skin at one edge and, pushing the ulo forward, remove the blubber from it, placing the blubber in a small tub nearby. As they work their way to the other end of the skin, they roll up the finished section and hold it in their left hand.
Fig. 463. Fragment of an ulo blade of slate. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A 6714.) 1/1
Fig. 463. Fragment of a slate ulo blade. (Museum of Ethnology, Berlin. IV A 6714.) 1/1
If the skin is to be used with the hair on it, the tough membrane (mami) which covers the inner side is removed in the same way as the blubber and, after it has been carefully patched up and holes have been cut all around the edge, is stretched over a gravelly place or on snow by means of long pegs (pauktun), which hold it a few inches above the ground, thus allowing the air to circulate underneath it. The skin itself is washed and rubbed with gravel, snow, or ice and every hole made by the bullet or by the spear or in preparing it is sewed up. It very seldom happens that the women in preparing it damage the skin or even the thin mami. It is particularly difficult to split the skin near a hole. First they finish the work all around it and then carefully sever the membrane at its edge. The skin is dried in the same way as the membrane. In the early part of spring, though it may still be very cold, a few choice young sealskins are dried on snow walls which face to the south. In order thoroughly to dry a sealskin one fine warm spring day is needed. If the Eskimo are greatly in need of skins they dry them in winter over the lamps. A frame is made of four poles, lashed together, according to the size of the skin. A thong passes through the slits along its edge and around the frame, keeping the skin well stretched. Thus it is placed over the lamps or near the roof of the hut. However, it is disagreeable work to dry the skins inside the huts, and, as they are much inferior to those which are dried on the ground, the Eskimo avoid it if they can. When so prepared the sealskins are only fit for covering tents, making bags, &c.; they are far too hard to be used for clothing, for which purpose the skin of yearlings is almost exclusively used. The young seals, having shed 520 for the first time, have a very handsome coat, the hair being of a fine texture and much longer than in older animals. From the middle of May until late in summer their skins are most suitable for the manufacture of summer clothing, but it is necessary to protect the carcasses of the killed animals from the burning rays of the sun as soon as possible or the skin would be quickly spoiled.
If the skin is going to be used with the fur still on it, the tough membrane (mami) covering the inside is removed just like the blubber. After it's carefully patched up and holes have been cut around the edges, it's stretched over a gravelly area or on snow using long pegs (pauktun), which keep it a few inches above the ground, allowing air to circulate underneath. The skin is washed and scrubbed with gravel, snow, or ice, and any holes made by bullets or spears or during processing are sewn up. It rarely happens that the women spoil the skin or even the thin mami while preparing it. It’s particularly tricky to split the skin near a hole. They finish the work around it first and then carefully cut the membrane at its edge. The skin dries the same way the membrane does. In early spring, even when it’s still very cold, a few select young sealskins are dried on snow walls facing south. To thoroughly dry a sealskin, one fine warm spring day is necessary. If the Eskimos are in urgent need of skins, they dry them in the winter over lamps. A frame is made from four poles, tied together based on the size of the skin. A thong goes through slits along its edge and around the frame, keeping the skin stretched. This setup is positioned over the lamps or near the roof of the hut. However, drying skins indoors is unpleasant work, and since those dried inside are much lower quality than those dried outside, the Eskimos avoid it if possible. When prepared this way, the sealskins are only suitable for covering tents, making bags, etc.; they are way too stiff for clothing, which is why yearling skin is almost exclusively used for that purpose. The young seals, having shed for the first time, have a very beautiful coat, with fine, long hair compared to older animals. From mid-May until late summer, their skins are ideal for making summer clothing, but it's essential to protect the carcasses from direct sunlight as soon as possible, or the skin will spoil quickly.
Fig. 465. Modern tesirqun or scraper. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A 6734.)
Fig. 465. Modern tesirqun or scraper. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A 6734.)
After being dried they are cleaned with the sharp scraper (tesirqun), the modern device of which is represented in Fig. 465. It consists of a handle having a round back and a flat front, with two grooves for the knuckles of the first and second fingers, while the thumb and the other fingers clasp the handle. The scraper itself consists of a rounded piece of tin riveted to the handle. The old scraper (Fig. 466) was made of a deer’s shoulder or of some other bone. I have never seen any that were made of a thigh bone, similar to those found by Lucien M. Turner in Ungava Bay.
After they're dried, they're cleaned with a sharp scraper (tesirqun). The modern version is shown in Fig. 465. It has a handle with a round back and a flat front, featuring two grooves for the knuckles of the first and second fingers, while the thumb and other fingers grip the handle. The scraper itself is a rounded piece of tin that’s riveted to the handle. The old scraper (Fig. 466) was made from a deer’s shoulder or another bone. I’ve never seen any made from a thigh bone, like those found by Lucien M. Turner in Ungava Bay.
Fig. 467. Seligoung or scraper used for
softening skins.
(Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A 6697.)
Fig. 467. Seligoung or scraper used for softening skins.
(Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A 6697.)
After being scraped the skin is soaked in salt water and washed again. As soon as it is dry it is softened with the straight scraper (seligoung) (Fig. 467).
After being scraped, the skin is soaked in salt water and washed again. Once it's dry, it's softened with a straight scraper (seligoung) (Fig. 467).
Fig. 468 shows some very old stone scrapers found in graves. As the stones are sharpened it is probable that they were used for cleaning the skins. The hole in the right side of the handle is used for the second finger, the grooves on the back for the third and fourth. The bone is fastened to the handle by whalebone straps or thongs.
Fig. 468 shows some very old stone scrapers found in graves. Since the stones are sharpened, it's likely they were used for cleaning skins. The hole on the right side of the handle is for the second finger, and the grooves on the back are for the third and fourth fingers. The bone is attached to the handle with whalebone straps or thongs.
Fig. 468. Old stone scrapers found in
graves.
(National Museum, Washington, a, b, 34083; c,
34084; d, 34085.) ⅔
Fig. 468. Ancient stone scrapers discovered in graves.
(National Museum, Washington, a, b, 34083; c, 34084; d, 34085.) ⅔
Skins of Phoca annellata, Phoca cristata, and Phoca grœnlandica are prepared in the same way.
Skins of Phoca annellata, Phoca cristata, and Phoca grœnlandica are processed in the same manner.
Those which are intended for kayak covers, boots, mittens, quivers, &c. are prepared in a different way. They are either put into hot water or laid in a brook for a few days until the hair begins to loosen. Then both sides are worked with the ulo, in order to clean and shave them. When the hair is removed they are dried and made pliable in the same way as has been described. If it is intended to make the skin as soft as possible it is allowed to become putrid before it is cleansed. Then the hair and the blubber are removed, and afterwards it is left to hang in the sun for a few days until it acquires a light color.
Those intended for kayak covers, boots, mittens, quivers, etc., are prepared differently. They are either soaked in hot water or placed in a stream for a few days until the hair starts to loosen. Then both sides are worked on with the ulo to clean and shave them. Once the hair is gone, they are dried and made flexible in the same way as previously described. If the goal is to make the skin as soft as possible, it’s allowed to decompose before being cleaned. After that, the hair and blubber are removed, and it’s left to hang in the sun for a few days until it takes on a light color.
The large ground seal (Phoca barbata) is skinned in a different manner. Its skin is very thick, thicker even than sole leather, and therefore extremely durable and suitable for all sorts of lines, particularly traces, lashings, and harpoon lines, and for soles, drinking 521 cups, and boat covers. This seal is very large, sometimes attaining a length of ten feet. The skin of the back and of the breast dries unequally, and therefore a piece covering the throat and breast is taken out before the rest is skinned, and the parts are dried separately. If it is to be used for lines it is cut by making girdles about six inches in width around the body. The hair and the blubber are removed from 522 these cylindrical rings, from which lines are made by cutting spirally, a strip seventy or eighty feet long being thus obtained. This line is stretched as taut as possible between two rocks, and while drying it undergoes an enormous tension. Before being taken from the rocks the edges are rounded and cleaned with a knife.
The large ground seal (Phoca barbata) is processed differently. Its skin is really thick, even thicker than sole leather, making it extremely durable and ideal for various types of lines, especially traces, lashings, harpoon lines, and for soles, drinking 521 cups, and boat covers. This seal is quite large, sometimes reaching a length of ten feet. The skin on the back and breast dries unevenly, so a section covering the throat and breast is removed before the rest is skinned, and these parts are dried separately. If it’s going to be used for lines, it’s cut into girdles about six inches wide around the body. The hair and blubber are stripped from 522 these cylindrical rings, which are then turned into lines by cutting them in a spiral, producing a strip that’s seventy or eighty feet long. This line is pulled as tight as possible between two rocks, and while drying it experiences a significant amount of tension. Before it’s taken off the rocks, the edges are shaped and cleaned with a knife.
Walrus hide is always cut up before being prepared. As soon as the walrus is killed it is cut into as many parts as there are partners in the hunt, every part being rolled up in a piece of skin and carried home in it. Sometimes the skin is used for making boats, but generally it is cut into lines. Both kinds of hide, that of the walrus and that of the ground seal, are as stiff as a board when dried and require much work before being fit for use. They are chewed by the natives until they become thin and pliable. The whole skin must be chewed in this way before it can be used for soles and boat covers. Afterwards it is scraped with the tesirqun and softened with the straight scraper. The new thongs, after being dried between the rocks, must also be chewed until they become sufficiently pliable, after which they are straightened by a stretcher that is held with the feet (Fig. 469). Frequently they are only pulled over the sole of the boot for this purpose, the man taking hold of the line at two points and pulling the intermediate part by turns to the right and to the left over the sole of the foot.
Walrus hide is always cut up before it’s prepared. As soon as the walrus is killed, it's divided into as many pieces as there are people in the hunt, with each piece wrapped up in a piece of skin and taken home. Sometimes the skin is used to make boats, but usually, it's cut into strips. Both types of hides, the walrus hide and the ground seal hide, are as stiff as a board when dried and need a lot of work to be ready for use. The locals chew on them until they become thin and flexible. The entire skin has to be chewed in this way before it can be used for soles and boat covers. After that, it’s scraped with a tesirqun and softened with a straight scraper. The new thongs, once dried between rocks, also need to be chewed until they become pliable enough, and then they are straightened with a stretcher held with the feet (Fig. 469). Often, they are just pulled over the boot sole for this purpose, with the person holding the line at two points and alternately pulling the middle part to the right and to the left over the sole of the foot.
Fig. 469. Stretcher for lines. (National Museum, Washington. 9836.) 1/1
Fig. 469. Stretcher for lines. (National Museum, Washington. 9836.) 1/1
Another kind of line is cut from the hide of the white whale, which is skinned in the same way as the ground seal, but, as it must be slit on the spinal column, the single pieces of line are much shorter, and they cannot be used to the same extent as seal lines. Some lines are cut from the skins of Pagomys fœtidus, but these are weak and greatly inferior to lines of ground seal hide.
Another type of line is made from the hide of the white whale, which is skinned like the ground seal. However, since it needs to be cut along the spinal column, the individual pieces of line are much shorter and can't be used as extensively as seal lines. Some lines are also made from the skins of Pagomys fœtidus, but these are weak and far less effective than lines made from ground seal hide.
Deerskins are dried in summer and dressed after the ice has formed. Like all other kinds of skins they are not tanned, but curried. They are hung up among the rafters of the hut, and the workers—in Oqo and Akudnirn the women, in Hudson Bay the men—take off their jackets and begin preparing them with the sharp scraper. After being cleaned in this way they are thoroughly dried, either by hanging them near the roof of the hut or, according to Gilder, by wrapping them around the upper part of the body next to the skin, after 523 which they are again scraped with the tesirqun. This done, the flesh side is wetted, the skin is wrapped up for half a day or a day, and afterwards undergoes a new scraping. Then it is chewed, rubbed, and scraped all over, thus acquiring its pliability, softness, and light color.
Deerskins are dried in the summer and processed after the ice has formed. Like all other types of skins, they aren’t tanned but cured. They are hung up among the rafters of the hut, and the workers—in Oqo and Akudnirn the women, in Hudson Bay the men—take off their jackets and start preparing them with a sharp scraper. Once cleaned this way, they are thoroughly dried, either by hanging them near the roof of the hut or, according to Gilder, by wrapping them around the upper part of the body next to the skin, after 523 which they are scraped again with the tesirqun. After that, the flesh side is dampened, the skin is wrapped up for half a day or a day, and then it goes through another scraping. It is then chewed, rubbed, and scraped all over, giving it flexibility, softness, and a light color.
In the spring the skins of bears and of seals are sometimes dried on large frames which are exposed to the sun, the skins being tied to the frames with thongs. Smaller quadrupeds, as foxes and ermines, are skinned by stripping the entire animal through its mouth without making a single cut in the skin. Birds are opened at the breast and the body is taken out through this small hole, the head, wings, and legs being cut off at the neck and the other joints. Ducks are frequently skinned by cutting the skin around the head and the outer joints of the wings and legs and stripping it off. The skins are cleaned by sucking out the fat and chewing them.
In the spring, bear and seal skins are sometimes dried on large frames placed in the sun, with the skins tied to the frames using thongs. Smaller animals like foxes and ermines are skinned by pulling the entire animal through its mouth without making any cuts in the skin. Birds are opened at the breast, and their bodies are taken out through this small opening, while the head, wings, and legs are removed at the neck and other joints. Ducks are often skinned by cutting the skin around the head and the outer joints of the wings and legs before stripping it off. The skins are cleaned by sucking out the fat and chewing them.
Skins of salmon are used for water proof bags; intestines of seals, particularly those of ground seals, are carefully dried and after being sewed together are used for sails, windows, and kayak jackets.
Skins of salmon are used for waterproof bags; the intestines of seals, especially those from ground seals, are carefully dried and stitched together to make sails, windows, and kayak jackets.
Fig. 470. Ivory needle. (National Museum, Washington. 34135.) 1/1
Fig. 470. Ivory needle. (National Museum, Washington. 34135.) 1/1
Fig. 471. Ivory needle case from Cumberland Sound. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. 6832.) 1/1
Fig. 471. Ivory needle case from Cumberland Sound. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. 6832.) 1/1
SUNDRY IMPLEMENTS.
The sewing is done with thread made of deer or white whale sinews. Particularly are those sinews at the back dried and when intended for use they can easily be split as thin as required. At present steel needles are in general use. Wherever they are wanting ivory ones of the same pattern are used (Fig. 470). The thread is fastened 524 to the eyehole by a kind of loop, the short end being twisted around the longer one. Kumlien described a needle of a very different device (p. 25):
The sewing is done with thread made from deer or white whale sinews. The sinews, especially those from the back, are dried and can easily be split as thin as needed when ready for use. Right now, steel needles are commonly used. If they're not available, ivory needles of the same design are used (Fig. 470). The thread is attached to the eyehole with a loop, where the short end is twisted around the longer one. Kumlien described a needle with a very different design (p. 25):
This tool was almost exactly like an awl in shape, but had an eye near the point. They must have had to thread this instrument for each stitch. The needle part was apparently of deer horn and the handle of walrus ivory.
This tool was almost exactly like an awl in shape, but had a hole near the tip. They must have had to thread this instrument for each stitch. The needle part was apparently made of deer horn and the handle was made of walrus ivory.
Probably it was used like a packing needle for sewing tent covers, &c. The needles (mirqun) are kept in ivory needle cases (umī´ujang). The case represented in Fig. 471 is from a grave in Cumberland Sound. The grooves on both sides are evidently intended for a leather strap which is to be tied around it. This specimen is closed at the bottom and had a stopper for closing the mouth. Fig. 472 is a more common pattern. The ivory piece forms a tube through which a leather strap passes. The needles are stuck into the leather and drawn into the tube. Small ivory implements and ornaments are attached to both ends of the strap.
Probably, it was used like a packing needle for sewing tent covers, etc. The needles (mirqun) are kept in ivory needle cases (umī´ujang). The case shown in Fig. 471 is from a grave in Cumberland Sound. The grooves on both sides are clearly meant for a leather strap that can be tied around it. This specimen is closed at the bottom and has a stopper for sealing the opening. Fig. 472 is a more common design. The ivory piece forms a tube through which a leather strap passes. The needles are inserted into the leather and drawn into the tube. Small ivory tools and ornaments are attached to both ends of the strap.
Fig. 473. Tikiq or thimble. (National Museum, Washington. 10181.) 1/1
Fig. 473. Tikiq or thimble. (National Museum, Washington. 10181.) 1/1
Thimbles (tikiq) (Fig. 473) are made of an oblong piece of ground sealskin, fitting to the point of the first finger. A rim is cut around half of its circumference and thus it can be drawn over the finger. The women sew by pulling the thread toward them and making an overcast seam.
Thimbles (tikiq) (Fig. 473) are made from an elongated piece of ground sealskin that fits over the tip of the index finger. A rim is cut around half of its circumference, allowing it to be easily slid over the finger. The women sew by pulling the thread toward themselves and creating an overcast seam.
Whalebone is used for making elastic thongs and in the place of wood; for example, for kayak ribs, for the rim of the kayak hole, boxes, &c. It requires no particular preparation, being easily split and shaped so as to fit any purpose. If wood is to be bent into hoops or deer horn is to be straightened, it is made pliable by being put into boiling water for some time. Bones of whales and other large animals and the penis bone of the walrus are used instead of poles. In olden times, when iron was extremely rare and an effective saw could not be procured, they split the bone by drilling many holes, one close to the other, afterwards breaking the pieces asunder.
Whalebone is used to make flexible straps and in place of wood; for example, for kayak ribs, the rim of the kayak opening, boxes, etc. It doesn’t require any special preparation and can be easily split and shaped to fit any purpose. If wood needs to be bent into hoops or deer antlers need to be straightened, they are made flexible by boiling them in water for a while. Whale bones and bones from other large animals, as well as the baculum of the walrus, are used instead of poles. In ancient times, when iron was very rare and finding an effective saw was difficult, they would split the bone by drilling many closely spaced holes and then breaking the pieces apart.
Fig. 474. Instrument for straightening bones.
Fig. 474. Bone straightening instrument.
Small pieces of bone, used for arrows &c., were straightened, after being steamed, with the implement represented in Fig. 474.
Small pieces of bone, used for arrows, etc., were straightened after being steamed with the tool shown in Fig. 474.
Fig. 475. Drill for working in ivory and bone. (National Museum, Washington. 34114.) ⅔
Fig. 475. Tool for carving ivory and bone. (National Museum, Washington. 34114.) ⅔
The drill (Fig. 475) is the most important implement for working in ivory and bone. It consists of three parts: the bow with its string 525 (niuqtung), the drill (qaivun), and the mouthpiece (qingmiaq). The string of the bow is twisted around the shaft of the drill, the mouthpiece (which is made of wood or of bone) is taken into the mouth, and the rounded end of the drill is placed in its hole. Then the whole implement is put firmly against the place to be perforated and is set in motion by moving the bow. Instead of the latter, a string is sometimes used with a handle at each end. For one man, however, the first device is handier. The string of the second form is usually pulled by one man while the other holds the mouthpiece.
The drill (Fig. 475) is the most important tool for working with ivory and bone. It has three parts: the bow with its string 525 (niuqtung), the drill (qaivun), and the mouthpiece (qingmiaq). The bowstring is twisted around the shaft of the drill, the mouthpiece (made of wood or bone) is held in the mouth, and the rounded end of the drill is placed in its hole. Then the whole tool is pressed firmly against the spot to be drilled and is set in motion by moving the bow. Instead of the bow, a string is sometimes used with a handle on each end. However, for one person, the first method is more convenient. In the second method, one person usually pulls the string while the other holds the mouthpiece.
The same instrument is sometimes used for making fire. Instead of the iron, a piece of hard wood (ground willow) is put into the 526 mouthpiece and placed upon a piece of driftwood cut to the shape represented in Fig. 476. The wooden drill turns rapidly in a hole of the driftwood until it begins to glow. A little moss is applied to the glowing wood and gently blown until it begins to burn. Wherever flint and pyrite are to be had these are used for striking fire. Moss or the wool-like hair of Eryophorum serves for tinder.
The same tool is sometimes used to start a fire. Instead of using iron, a piece of hard wood (like ground willow) is placed in the 526 mouthpiece and set on a piece of driftwood shaped like the one in Fig. 476. The wooden drill spins quickly in a hole in the driftwood until it starts to glow. A bit of moss is added to the glowing wood and gently blown on until it catches fire. Where flint and pyrite are available, they are used to create sparks. Moss or the wool-like fibers of Eryophorum act as tinder.
Fig. 476. Driftwood used in kindling fire from Nugumiut. (National Museum, Washington. 10258.) ¼
Fig. 476. Driftwood used to start a fire by the Nugumiut. (National Museum, Washington. 10258.) ¼
Ivory implements are cut out of the tusks with strong knives and are shaped by chipping pieces from the blocks until they acquire the desired forms. In olden times it must have been an extremely troublesome work to cut them out, the old knives being very poor and ineffective. They are finished with the file, which on this account is an important tool for the natives; it is also used for sharpening knives and harpoons. The women’s knives are cut, by means of files, from old saw blades; the seal harpoons, from Scotch whale harpoons. If files are not obtainable, whetstones are used for sharpening the iron and stone implements.
Ivory tools are carved from tusks using strong knives, and they’re shaped by chipping away pieces until they reach the desired forms. In the past, it must have been a really tough job to carve these, since the old knives were quite poor and ineffective. They’re finished with a file, which is an important tool for the locals; it’s also used to sharpen knives and harpoons. The women’s knives are made from old saw blades using files, and the seal harpoons come from Scottish whale harpoons. If files aren’t available, whetstones are used to sharpen the iron and stone tools.
Engravings in bone and ivory are made with the implement represented in Fig. 477. An iron point is inserted in a wooden handle; formerly a quartz point was used. The notch which separates the head from the handle serves as a hold for the points of the fingers. The designs are scratched into the ivory with the iron pin.
Engravings in bone and ivory are made with the tool shown in Fig. 477. An iron tip is fixed into a wooden handle; previously, a quartz tip was used. The notch that separates the head from the handle provides a grip for your fingers. The designs are etched into the ivory using the iron pin.
Stone implements were made of flint, slate, or soapstone. Flint was worked with a squeezing tool, generally made of bone. Small pieces were thus split off until the stone acquired the desired form. Slate was first roughly formed and then finished with the drill and the whetstone. The soft soapstone is now chiseled out with iron tools. If large blocks of soapstone cannot be obtained, fragments are cemented together by means of a mixture of seal’s blood, a kind of clay, and dog’s hair. This is applied to the joint, the vessel being heated over a lamp until the cement is dry. According to Lyon (p. 320) it is fancied that the hair of a bitch would spoil the composition and prevent it from sticking.
Stone tools were made from flint, slate, or soapstone. Flint was shaped using a squeezing tool, usually made of bone. Small pieces were split off until the stone took on the desired shape. Slate was initially formed roughly and then refined with a drill and a whetstone. The soft soapstone is now carved using iron tools. If large blocks of soapstone aren't available, smaller pieces are glued together with a blend of seal's blood, a type of clay, and dog hair. This mixture is applied to the joints, and the vessel is heated over a lamp until the adhesive sets. According to Lyon (p. 320), it is believed that using a female dog's hair could ruin the mixture and prevent it from adhering.
TRANSPORTATION BY BOATS AND SLEDGES.
THE BOAT (UMIAQ).
Fig. 478. Framework of Eskimo boat.
Fig. 478. Structure of Inuit boat.
The main part of the frame of a boat is a timber which runs from stem to stern (Fig. 478). It is the most solid part and is made of driftwood, which is procured in Hudson Strait, Hudson Bay, and on the northern shore of King William Land. In Iglulik, and probably in Pond Bay, boats are rarely used and never made, as wood is wanting. The central part of this timber is made a little narrower than the ends, which form stout heads. A mortise is cut into each of the latter, into which posts (kiglo) are tenoned for the bow and for the stern. The shape of this part will best be seen from the engraving (Fig. 479). A strong piece of wood is fitted to the top of these uprights and the gunwales are fastened to them with heavy thongs. The gunwales and two curved strips of wood (akuk), which run along each side of the bottom of the boat from stem to stern, determine its form. These strips are steadied by from seven to ten cross pieces, which are firmly tied to them and to the central piece. From this pair of strips to the gunwales run a number of ribs, which stand somewhat close together at the bow and the stern, but are separated by intervals of greater distance in the center of the boat. The cross pieces along the bottom are arranged similarly to the ribs. Between the gunwale and the bottom two or three pairs of strips also run along the sides of the boat and steady its whole frame. The uppermost pair (which is called tuving) lies near the gunwale and serves as a fastening for the cover of the boat. The thwarts, three 528 or four in number, are fastened between the gunwale and these lateral strips. All these pieces are tied together with thongs, rivets not being used at all.
The main part of a boat's frame is a piece of timber that runs from the front to the back (Fig. 478). It's the sturdiest section and is made from driftwood sourced from Hudson Strait, Hudson Bay, and the northern shore of King William Land. In Iglulik, and likely in Pond Bay, boats are rarely used and never made because there's a lack of wood. The center of this timber is crafted to be a bit narrower than the ends, which are thicker and form strong heads. A mortise is carved into each end, into which posts (kiglo) are fitted for the bow and stern. The shape of this part can be better understood from the engraving (Fig. 479). A solid piece of wood is attached to the top of these uprights, and the gunwales are secured to them with heavy thongs. The gunwales and two curved wood strips (akuk) that run along each side of the bottom of the boat from front to back define its shape. These strips are supported by seven to ten cross pieces, which are tightly tied to them and the central piece. A series of ribs extend from these strips to the gunwales; they're closer together at the bow and stern but spaced farther apart in the center of the boat. The cross pieces along the bottom are arranged similarly to the ribs. Between the gunwale and the bottom, two or three pairs of strips also run along the sides of the boat, reinforcing the entire frame. The top pair (called tuving) is located near the gunwale and serves as a fastening point for the boat cover. The thwarts, usually three or four in total, are attached between the gunwale and these side strips. All these pieces are tied together with thongs, as no rivets are used at all.
Fig. 480. Umiaq or skin boat.
Fig. 480. Umiaq or skin canoe.
The frame is covered with skins of ground seals (Figs. 480, 481). It requires three of these skins to cover a medium sized boat; five to cover a large one. If ground seals cannot be procured, skins of harp or small seals are used, as many as twelve of the latter being required. The cover is drawn tightly over the gunwale and, after being wetted, is secured by thongs to the lateral strip which is close to the gunwale. The wooden pieces at both ends are perforated and the thongs for fastening the cover are pulled through these holes.
The frame is covered with skins from ground seals (Figs. 480, 481). It takes three of these skins to cover a medium-sized boat and five to cover a large one. If ground seals aren't available, skins from harp or smaller seals can be used, needing as many as twelve of the smaller ones. The cover is pulled tightly over the gunwale and, after being wet, is secured with thongs to the side strip near the gunwale. The wooden pieces at both ends have holes in them, and the thongs used to fasten the cover are threaded through these holes.
Fig. 481. Umiaq or skin boat.
Fig. 481. Umiaq or kayak.
The boat is propelled by two large oars. The rowlocks are a very ingenious device. A piece of bone is tied upon the skin in order 529 to protect it from the friction of the oar, which would quickly wear it through (Fig. 481 a). On each side of the bone a thong is fastened to the tuving, forming a loop. Both loops cross each other like two rings of a chain. The oar is drawn through both loops, which are twisted by toggles until they become tight. Then the toggles are secured between the gunwale and the tuving.
The boat is moved by two large oars. The rowlocks are a really clever design. A piece of bone is tied onto the skin to protect it from the oar's friction, which would wear it out quickly (Fig. 481 a). On each side of the bone, a thong is attached to the tuving, creating a loop. Both loops cross each other like two links in a chain. The oar is pulled through both loops, which are twisted by toggles until they’re tight. Then the toggles are secured between the gunwale and the tuving.
The oar (ipun) consists of a long shaft and an oval or round blade fastened to the shaft by thongs. Two grooves and the tapering end serve for handles in pulling. Generally three or four women work at each oar.
The oar (ipun) is made up of a long handle and an oval or round blade attached to the handle with thongs. Two grooves and the tapered end act as handles for pulling. Typically, three or four women work at each oar.
For steering, a paddle is used of the same kind as that used in whaling (see p. 499). A rudder is rarely found (Fig. 480), and when used most probably is made in imitation of European devices.
For steering, a paddle is used that’s similar to those used in whaling (see p. 499). A rudder is seldom seen (Fig. 480), and when it is used, it’s likely modeled after European designs.
If the wind permits, a sail is set; but the bulky vessel can only run with the wind. The mast is set in the stem, a mortise being cut in the forehead of the main timber, with a notch in the wooden piece above it to steady it. A stout thong, which passes through two holes on each side of the notch, secures the mast to the wooden head piece. The sail, which is made of seal intestines carefully sewed together, is squared and fastened by loops to a yard (sadniriaq) which is trimmed with straps of deerskin. It is hoisted by a rope made of sealskin and passing over a sheave in the top of the mast. This rope is tied to the thwart farthest abaft, while the sheets are fastened to the foremost one.
If the wind allows, a sail is raised; but the heavy boat can only move with the wind. The mast is placed at the front, with a slot cut into the main timber, and a notch in the piece above it to stabilize it. A strong thong passes through two holes on each side of the notch to secure the mast to the wooden head piece. The sail, made from carefully stitched seal intestines, is shaped and attached by loops to a yard (sadniriaq) that’s edged with deerskin straps. It’s raised by a rope made of sealskin that runs over a pulley at the top of the mast. This rope is tied to the seat located the farthest back, while the sheets are attached to the front seat.
THE SLEDGE AND DOGS.
During the greater part of the year the only passable road is that afforded by the ice and snow; therefore sledges (qamuting) of different constructions are used in traveling.
During most of the year, the only road that's usable is the one made by the ice and snow; so, different types of sleds (qamuting) are used for traveling.
Fig. 482. Qamuting or sledge.
Fig. 482. Sled.
The best model is made by the tribes of Hudson Strait and Davis Strait, for the driftwood which they can obtain in abundance admits the use of long wooden runners. Their sledges (Fig. 482) have two runners, from five to fifteen feet long and from twenty inches to two 530 and a half feet apart. They are connected by cross bars of wood or bone and the back is formed by deer’s antlers with the skull attached. The bottom of the runners (qamun) is curved at the head (uinirn) and cut off at right angles behind. It is shod with whalebone, ivory, or the jawbones of a whale. In long sledges the shoeing (pirqang) is broadest near the head and narrowest behind. This device is very well adapted for sledging in soft snow; for, while the weight of the load is distributed over the entire length of the sledge, the fore part, which is most apt to break through, has a broad face, which presses down the snow and enables the hind part to glide over it without sinking in too deeply.
The best model comes from the tribes of Hudson Strait and Davis Strait, as the driftwood they can easily get allows for the use of long wooden runners. Their sledges (Fig. 482) have two runners, ranging from five to fifteen feet long and spaced from twenty inches to two and a half feet apart. They are connected by crossbars made of wood or bone, and the back is formed by deer antlers still attached to the skull. The bottom of the runners (qamun) is curved at the front (uinirn) and cut off at right angles at the back. It's reinforced with whalebone, ivory, or the jawbones of a whale. In longer sledges, the shoeing (pirqang) is widest near the front and narrowest at the rear. This design works really well for sledding in soft snow; it spreads the weight of the load across the entire length of the sledge, while the front, which is most likely to sink, has a broad surface that presses down on the snow, allowing the back to glide over without sinking too deeply.
Fig. 483. Sledge shoe. (National Museum, Washington. 34096.) ¼
Fig. 483. Sledge shoe. (National Museum, Washington. 34096.) ¼
The shoe (Fig. 483) is either tied or riveted to the runner. If tied, the lashing passes through sunken drill holes to avoid any friction in moving over the snow. The right and left sides of a whale’s jaw are frequently used for shoes, as they are of the proper size and permit the shoe to be of a single piece. Ivory is cut into flat pieces and riveted to the runner with long treenails. The points are frequently covered with bone on both the lower and upper sides, as they are easily injured by striking hard against hummocks or snowdrifts. Sometimes whalebone is used for the shoes.
The shoe (Fig. 483) is either tied or attached to the runner with rivets. If it’s tied, the lashing goes through recessed drill holes to minimize friction while moving over the snow. The right and left sides of a whale’s jaw are often used for shoes since they are the right size and allow for a single-piece construction. Ivory is cut into flat pieces and attached to the runner with long wooden pegs. The tips are often covered with bone on both the top and bottom to protect against damage from hitting hard surfaces like ice ridges or snowdrifts. Sometimes, whalebone is used for the shoes.
The cross bars (napun) project over the runners on each side and have notches which form a kind of neck. These necks serve to fasten the thongs when a load is lashed on the sledge. The bars are fastened to the runners by thongs which pass through two pairs of holes in the bars and through corresponding ones in the runners. If these fastenings should become loose, they are tightened by winding a small thong round them and thus drawing the opposite parts of the thong tightly together. If this proves insufficient, a small wedge is driven between the thong and the runner.
The crossbars (napun) extend over the runners on each side and have notches that create a sort of neck. These necks are used to secure the thongs when a load is tied onto the sled. The bars are attached to the runners with thongs that go through two pairs of holes in the bars and through matching holes in the runners. If these connections start to loosen, they can be tightened by wrapping a small thong around them, pulling the opposite parts of the thong tightly together. If that doesn’t work, a small wedge is driven between the thong and the runner.
Fig. 484. Clasp for fastening traces to sledge. (National Museum, Washington. 34110.) ½
Fig. 484. Clasp for attaching traces to a sledge. (National Museum, Washington. 34110.) ½
The antlers attached to the back of the sledge have the branches removed and the points slanted so as to fit to the runners. Only the brow antlers are left, the right one being cut down to about three inches in length, the left one to one and a half inches. This back forms a very convenient handle for steering the sledge past hummocks or rocks, for drawing it back when the points have struck a snowdrift, &c. Besides, the lashing for holding the load is tied to the right brow antler and the snow knife and the harpoon line are hung upon it.
The antlers at the back of the sled have been trimmed, with the branches removed and the points angled to fit onto the runners. Only the brow antlers remain, with the right one cut down to about three inches and the left one to one and a half inches. This back section provides a convenient handle for steering the sled around bumps or rocks, and for pulling it back when the points hit a snowdrift, etc. Additionally, the fastening for securing the load is attached to the right brow antler, and the snow knife and harpoon line are hung on it.
Fig. 485. Artistic form of clasp for fastening traces to sledge. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin.) 1/1
Fig. 485. Artistic design of a clasp for securing traces to a sled. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin.) 1/1
Under the foremost cross bar a hole is drilled through each runner. A very stout thong (pitu) consisting of two separate parts passes through the holes and serves to fasten the dogs’ traces to the sledge. 531 A button at each end of this thong prevents it from slipping through the hole of the runner. The thong consists of two parts, the one ending in a loop, the other in a peculiar kind of clasp (partirang). Fig. 484 represents the form commonly used. The end of one part of the thong is fastened to the hole of the clasp, which, when closed, is stuck through the loop of the opposite end (see Fig. 482). A more artistic design is shown in Fig. 485. One end of the line is tied to the hole in the under side of this implement. When it is in use the loop of the other end is stuck through another hole in the center and hung over the nozzle. The whole represents the head of an animal with a gaping mouth. The dogs’ traces are strung upon this line by means of the uqsirn, an ivory implement with a large and a small eyelet (Fig. 486). The trace is tied to the former, while the latter is strung upon the pitu.
Under the main crossbar, a hole is drilled through each runner. A very sturdy thong (pitu) made of two separate pieces goes through the holes and connects the dogs' traces to the sled. 531 A button at each end of this thong keeps it from slipping through the runner's hole. The thong has two parts: one ends in a loop, while the other has a unique clasp (partirang). Fig. 484 shows the commonly used design. One end of the thong is attached to the hole in the clasp, which, when closed, goes through the loop of the other end (see Fig. 482). A more artistic design is illustrated in Fig. 485. One end of the line is secured to the hole on the underside of this implement. When in use, the loop of the other end is inserted through another hole in the center and then hung over the nozzle. The whole setup resembles the head of an animal with an open mouth. The dogs' traces are attached to this line using the uqsirn, an ivory tool with a large and a small eyelet (Fig. 486). The trace is attached to the larger eyelet, while the smaller one is threaded onto the pitu.
Fig. 486. Uqsirn, for fastening traces
to pitu.
a (National Museum, Washington. 34122.) 1/1
b (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin.) ½
Fig. 486. Uqsirn, for securing traces to pitu.
a (National Museum, Washington. 34122.) 1/1
b (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin.) ½
The dogs have harnesses (ano) made of sealskin (Fig. 487) or sometimes of deerskin, consisting of two bights passing under the fore legs. They are joined by two straps, one passing over the breast, the other over the neck. The ends are tied together on the back, whence the trace runs to the sledge. According to Parry (II, p. 517), 532 the Iglulik harnesses consisted of three bights, one passing over the breast and shoulder and two under the fore legs.
The dogs wear harnesses made of sealskin or sometimes deerskin, featuring two loops that go under their front legs. These are connected by two straps, one that goes over the chest and the other over the neck. The ends are tied together on their back, from which the trace extends to the sled. According to Parry (II, p. 517), the Iglulik harnesses had three loops: one over the chest and shoulder and two under the front legs.
Fig. 487. Ano or dog harness. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A 6730.)
Fig. 487. Ano or dog harness. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A 6730.)
It was mentioned at another place (p. 475) that in sealing a dog is taken out of the sledge to lead the hunter to the breathing hole. For this purpose the traces of some harnesses are made of two pieces, which are united by the sadniriaq, a clasp similar to that of the pitu (Figs. 487, 488). If the dog is to be taken from the sledge the fore part of the trace is unbuttoned.
It was mentioned elsewhere (p. 475) that when sealing, a dog is taken out of the sled to lead the hunter to the breathing hole. For this purpose, the traces of some harnesses are made of two pieces that are connected by the sadniriaq, a clasp similar to that of the pitu (Figs. 487, 488). If the dog needs to be taken from the sled, the front part of the trace is unbuttoned.
Fig. 488. Sadniriaq or clasp. (National Museum, Washington.) ⅔
Fig. 488. Sadniriaq or clasp. (National Museum, Washington.) ⅔
Besides this form of sledge a great number of others are in use. Whenever whales are caught their bone is sawed or cut into large pieces, which are shod with the same material. If large bones are not to be had, a substitute is found in walrus skins or rolls of sealskins, which are wetted and sewed up in a bag. This bag is given the desired form and after being frozen to a solid mass is as serviceable as the best plank. In Boothia frozen salmon are used in the same way and after having served this purpose in winter are eaten in the spring. Other sledges are made of slabs of fresh water ice, which are cut and allowed to freeze together, or of a large ice block hollowed out in the center. All these are clumsy and heavy and much inferior to the large sledge just described.
Besides this type of sled, many others are in use. Whenever whales are caught, their bones are sawed or cut into large pieces, which are covered with the same material. If large bones aren’t available, they use walrus skins or rolls of sealskins, which are wet and sewn into a bag. This bag is shaped as needed and, once frozen solid, works as well as the best plank. In Boothia, frozen salmon are used in the same way and, after serving this purpose in winter, are eaten in the spring. Other sleds are made of slabs of freshwater ice, which are cut and allowed to freeze together, or from a large ice block hollowed out in the center. All these are clumsy and heavy and much worse than the large sled described earlier.
Parry (II, p. 515) states that at Igiulik the antlers are detached from the sledge in winter when the natives go sealing. The tribes of Davis Strait do not practice this custom, but use scarcely any sledge without a pair of antlers.
Parry (II, p. 515) says that in Igiulik, the antlers are removed from the sled in winter when the locals go sealing. The tribes of Davis Strait don’t follow this custom, but hardly use any sleds without a pair of antlers.
As to the appearance of the dogs I would refer to Parry (II, p. 515) and other writers and confine my remarks to a description of their use by the Eskimo.
As for how the dogs look, I will point you to Parry (II, p. 515) and other authors, and I'll limit my comments to how the Eskimo use them.
As the traces are strung upon a thong, as just described, the dogs all pull at one point; for that reason they may seem, at first sight, to be harnessed together without order or regularity; but they are arranged with great care. The strongest and most spirited dog has the longest trace and is allowed to run a few feet in advance of the rest as a leader; its sex is indifferent, the choice being made chiefly with regard to strength. Next to the leader follow two or three strong dogs with traces of equal length, and the weaker and less manageable the dogs the nearer they run to the sledge. A team is almost unmanageable if the dogs are not accustomed to one another. They must know their leader, who brings them to terms whenever there is a quarrel. In a good team the leader must be the acknowledged chief, else the rest will fall into disorder and refuse to follow him. His authority is almost unlimited. When the dogs are fed, he takes the choice morsels; when two of them quarrel, he bites both and thus brings them to terms.
As the traces are strung on a strap, as mentioned, the dogs all pull together at one point; for this reason, they might initially seem to be harnessed together chaotically; however, they are actually arranged with great care. The strongest and most spirited dog has the longest trace and is allowed to run a few feet ahead as the leader; it doesn't matter what sex it is, as the choice is mainly based on strength. Following the leader are two or three strong dogs with equal-length traces, and the weaker, less controllable dogs are positioned closer to the sled. A team becomes almost unmanageable if the dogs aren't familiar with each other. They need to recognize their leader, who resolves any conflicts. In a well-functioning team, the leader must be the accepted chief; otherwise, the others will become disorganized and refuse to follow. His authority is almost absolute. When it's time to feed, he gets the best pieces; when two of them fight, he bites both to settle the dispute.
Generally there is a second dog which is inferior only to the leader, but is feared by all the others. Though the authority of the leader is not disputed by his own team, dogs of another team will not submit to him. But when two teams are accustomed to travel in company the dogs in each will have some regard for the leader of the other, though continuous rivalry and quarrels go on between the two leaders. Almost any dog which is harnessed into a strange team will at first be unwilling to draw, and it is only when he is thoroughly accustomed to all his neighbors and has found out his friends and his enemies that he will do his work satisfactorily. Some dogs when put into a strange team will throw themselves down and struggle and 534 howl. They will endure the severest lashing and allow themselves to be dragged along over rough ice without being induced to rise and run along with the others. Particularly if their own team is in sight will they turn back and try to get to it. Others, again, are quite willing to work with strange dogs.
Generally, there's a second dog that is just below the leader in rank but is still feared by all the others. While the leader's authority is accepted by his own group, dogs from other teams won't submit to him. However, when two teams are used to traveling together, the dogs from each will show some respect for the leader of the other team, even though there's usually ongoing rivalry and fights between the two leaders. Almost any dog that is paired with a new team will initially be reluctant to pull, and it’s only after he gets used to his neighbors and figures out who his friends and enemies are that he’ll start to work properly. Some dogs will throw themselves down and struggle and howl when they’re placed in a new team. They might endure harsh whipping and let themselves be dragged over rough ice without getting up to run with the others. They especially try to turn back towards their own team if they see it. Others, however, are perfectly fine working with unfamiliar dogs.
Partly on this account and partly from attachment to their masters, dogs sold out of one team frequently return to their old homes, and I know of instances in which they even ran from thirty to sixty miles to reach it. Sometimes they do so when a sledge is traveling for a few days from one settlement to another, the dogs not having left home for a long time before. In such cases when the Eskimo go to harness their team in the morning they find that some of them have run away, particularly those which were lent from another team for the journey. In order to prevent this the left fore leg is sometimes tied up by a loop which passes over the neck. When one is on a journey it is well to do so every night, as some of the dogs are rather unwilling to be harnessed in the morning, thus causing a great loss of time before they are caught. In fact such animals are customarily tied up at night, while the others are allowed to run loose.
Partly for this reason and partly due to their loyalty to their masters, dogs that are sold from one team often return to their old homes, and I know of cases where they have traveled between thirty and sixty miles to get there. Sometimes they do this when a sled is on a trip for a few days from one settlement to another, especially if the dogs haven't been away for a long time. In these cases, when the Eskimo goes to harness their team in the morning, they discover that some of the dogs are missing, particularly those that were borrowed from another team for the journey. To prevent this, the left front leg is sometimes tied up with a loop that passes over the neck. It’s a good idea to do this every night while traveling, as some dogs are quite reluctant to be harnessed in the morning, which can lead to a significant loss of time while trying to catch them. In fact, these dogs are usually tied up at night, while the others are free to roam.
Sometimes the harnesses are not taken off at night. As some dogs are in the habit of stripping off their harness, it is fastened by tying the trace around the body. Though all these peculiarities of the dogs give a great deal of trouble to the driver, he must take care not to punish them too severely, as they will then become frightened and for fear of the whip will not work at all.
Sometimes the harnesses are not removed at night. Since some dogs tend to wriggle out of their harnesses, it's secured by tying the trace around their bodies. Even though these quirks of the dogs can really annoy the driver, he needs to be careful not to punish them too harshly, as they might get scared and, out of fear of the whip, refuse to work completely.
Before putting the dogs to the sledge it must be prepared and loaded. In winter the shoes of the runners are covered with a thick coat of ice, which diminishes the friction on the snow. If the shoes are of good bone, ivory, or whalebone, the icing is done with water only, the driver taking a mouthful and carefully letting it run over the shoe until a smooth cover of about one third of an inch in thickness is produced. The icicles made by the water which runs down the side of the runner are carefully removed with the snow knife, and the bottom is smoothed with the same implement and afterward somewhat polished with the mitten. Skin runners and others which have poor shoes are first covered with a mixture of moss and water or clay and water. This being frozen, the whole is iced, as has been described. Instead of pure water, a mixture of blood and water or of urine and water is frequently used, as this sticks better to the bone shoe than the former.
Before attaching the dogs to the sled, it needs to be prepared and loaded. In winter, the sled runners get a thick layer of ice on the shoes, which reduces friction on the snow. If the shoes are made from good materials like bone, ivory, or whalebone, the icing process involves just water. The driver takes a mouthful of water and carefully lets it flow over the shoe until a smooth layer of about one-third of an inch thick forms. Any icicles formed by the water running down the side of the runner are carefully removed with a snow knife, and the bottom is smoothed out with the same tool and then polished with a mitten. For skin runners and others with poor shoes, they are first covered with a mix of moss and water or clay and water. Once that is frozen, the whole thing is iced, as described earlier. Instead of just water, a mix of blood and water or urine and water is often used, since it sticks better to the bone shoe than plain water does.
This done, the sledge is turned right side up and loaded. In winter, when the snow is hard, small sledges with narrow shoes are the best. In loading, the bulk of the weight is placed behind. When the snow is soft or there are wide cracks in the floe, long sledges with broad shoes are by far the best. In such cases the heaviest part of the load is placed on the middle of the sledge or even nearer the head. 535 Particularly in crossing cracks the weight must be as near the head as possible, for if the jump should be unsuccessful a heavy weight at the hind part would draw the sledge and the dogs into the water.
This done, the sled is turned right side up and loaded. In winter, when the snow is firm, small sleds with narrow runners work best. When loading, most of the weight should go towards the back. When the snow is soft or there are wide cracks in the ice, long sleds with wide runners are much better. In these situations, the heaviest part of the load should be positioned in the middle of the sled or even closer to the front. 535 Especially when crossing cracks, the weight needs to be as close to the front as possible, because if the jump doesn’t go well, a heavy weight at the back could pull the sled and the dogs into the water.
The load is fastened to the sledge by a long lashing (naqetarun). This is tied to the first cross bar and after passing over the load is drawn over the notch of the next bar, and so on from one notch, over the load, to a notch on the opposite side. After having been fastened in this way it is tightened. Two men are required for the work, one pulling the lashing over the notch, the other pressing down the load and lifting and lowering the thong in order to diminish the friction, thus making the pulling of the other man more effective. The end is fastened to the brow antler. Implements which are used in traveling are hung upon the antlers at the back of the sledge. In spring, when the snow is melting and water is found under it, the travelers frequently carry in their pouch a tube for drinking (Fig. 489).
The load is secured to the sled by a long strap (naqetarun). This strap is attached to the first crossbar, then goes over the load and is pulled through the notch of the next bar, and so on from one notch, over the load, to a notch on the opposite side. After being secured this way, it is tightened. Two people are needed for this task: one pulls the strap over the notch while the other presses down on the load and lifts and lowers the thong to reduce friction, making the other person's pulling more efficient. The end is tied to the brow antler. The tools used for traveling are hung on the antlers at the back of the sled. In spring, when the snow is melting and water is underneath, travelers often carry a drinking tube in their pouch (Fig. 489).
Fig. 489. Tube for drinking. (National Museum, Washington. 10383.) ¼
Fig. 489. Drinking tube. (National Museum, Washington. 10383.) ¼
When the sledge has been loaded the dogs are hitched to it and the driver takes up the whip and is ready for starting. The handle of the whip is about a foot or a foot and a half in length. It is made of wood, bone, or whalebone and has a lash of from twenty to twenty-five feet in length. The lash is made of walrus or ground seal hide, the lower end being broad and stiff, thus giving it greater weight and a slight springiness near the handle, which facilitates its use. A broad piece of skin clasps the handle, to which it is tied with seal thongs. Another way of making the lower part heavy is by plaiting ground seal lines for a length of a foot or a foot and a half.
Once the sled is loaded, the dogs are harnessed to it, and the driver picks up the whip, ready to set off. The whip handle is about a foot to a foot and a half long. It's made from wood, bone, or whalebone and has a lash that’s twenty to twenty-five feet long. The lash is crafted from walrus or ground seal hide, with the lower end being wide and stiff, which gives it more weight and a bit of bounce near the handle, making it easier to use. A wide piece of skin wraps around the handle and is secured with seal thongs. Another method to make the lower part heavier is by braiding ground seal lines for about a foot to a foot and a half.
When starting the driver utters a whistling guttural sound which sounds like h!h!, but cannot exactly be expressed by letters, as there is no vowel in it, and yet on account of the whistling noise in the throat it is audible at a considerable distance. The dogs, if well rested and strong, jump to their feet and start at once. If they are lazy it requires a great deal of stimulating and lashing before they make a start. If the load is heavy it is difficult to start it and the Eskimo must use some strategy to get them all to pull at once. The sledge is moved backward and forward for about a foot, so as to make a short track in which it moves easily. Then the driver sings out to the dogs, at the same time drawing the traces tight with his hands and pulling at the sledge. The dogs, feeling a weight at the traces, begin to draw, and when the driver suddenly lets go the traces the sledge receives a sudden pull and begins to move. If assistance is at hand the sledge may be pushed forward until it gets under way.
When the driver starts, he makes a whistling, guttural sound that resembles h!h!, but it's hard to express in writing since it has no vowels. However, due to the whistling noise from his throat, it's audible from quite a distance. If the dogs are well-rested and strong, they quickly jump up and get going. If they're feeling lazy, it takes a lot of encouragement and whipping before they finally move. If the load is heavy, starting it can be a challenge, and the Eskimo has to come up with a strategy to get them all to pull together. The sledge is shifted back and forth for about a foot to create a short path that makes it easier to move. Then the driver calls out to the dogs while tightening the traces by hand and pulling on the sledge. When the dogs feel the weight on the traces, they start to pull, and when the driver quickly releases the traces, the sledge gets a sudden tug and begins to slide. If help is available, the sledge can be pushed forward until it gets moving.
It is extremely hard work to travel with a heavy load, particularly in rough ice or on soft snow. The dogs require constant stimulating; for this purpose a great number of exclamations are in use and almost every Eskimo has his own favorite words for driving. The general exclamation, used for stimulating is the above mentioned h! h! or aq! aq! which is pressed out from the depths of the breast and the palate, the vowel being very indistinct. Others are: djua! the a being drawn very long and almost sung in a high key, or ah! pronounced in the same way; iatit! or jauksa koksa! and smacking with the tongue. If a seal is seen basking on the ice or if the sledge happens to pass a deserted snow hut, the driver says, Ha! Do you see the seal? Ai! A seal! a seal! (Ha! Takuviuk? Ai! Uto! uto!) and Ai! There is a house; a small house! (Ai! Iglu; igluaqdjung!) or, Now we go home! (Sarpoq! Sarpoq!) The latter, however, are only used when the dogs are going at a good rate.
It’s really hard work to travel with a heavy load, especially on rough ice or soft snow. The dogs need constant motivation; for this, a lot of different exclamations are used, and almost every Eskimo has their own favorite words to encourage them. The main exclamation for motivation is the previously mentioned h! h! or aq! aq!, which comes from deep in the chest and throat, the vowel being quite unclear. Others include: djua!, where the “a” is drawn out very long and almost sung in a high pitch, or ah! pronounced the same way; iatit! or jauksa koksa! along with smacking the tongue. If a seal is spotted relaxing on the ice or if the sled passes an empty snow hut, the driver says, Ha! Do you see the seal? Ai! A seal! a seal! (Ha! Takuviuk? Ai! Uto! uto!) and Ai! There’s a house; a small house! (Ai! Iglu; igluaqdjung!) or, Now we go home! (Sarpoq! Sarpoq!) However, the last ones are only used when the dogs are moving at a good pace.
For directing the sledge the following words are used: Aua, aua! Aua! ja aua! for turning to the right; χoiaχoi! ja χoia! for turning to the left. In addition the whip lash is thrown to the opposite side of the dogs. The leader is the first to obey the order, but a turn is made very slowly and by a long curve. If the driver wants to make a sharper turn he must jump up and run to the opposite side of the sledge, throwing the whip lash at the same time toward the team. For stopping the dogs the word Ohoha! pronounced in a deep key, is used.
For steering the sled, the following commands are used: Aua, aua! Aua! for turning right; χoiaχoi! ja χoia! for turning left. Additionally, the whip is thrown to the opposite side of the dogs. The leader is the first to follow the command, but turns are made slowly and with a wide curve. If the driver wants to make a sharper turn, they must jump up and run to the opposite side of the sled while throwing the whip towards the team. To stop the dogs, the command Ohoha! pronounced in a deep voice is used.
If the traveling is difficult the driver must walk along at the right side of the sledge and wherever hummocks obstruct the passage he must direct it around them either by pushing its head aside or by pulling at the deer’s skull at the back. But notwithstanding all this stimulating and all the pulling the sledge is frequently stopped by striking a piece of ice or by sinking into soft snow. As soon as it sinks down to the cross bars it must be lifted out, and when the load is heavy the only means of getting on is by unloading and afterwards reloading. In the same way it must be lifted across hummocks through which a road is cut with the end of the spear, which, for this purpose, is always lashed in a place where it is handy for use, generally on the right side of the bottom of the sledge. The difficulties of traveling across heavy ice which has been subjected to heavy pressures have frequently been described. When the sledge stops the dogs immediately lie down, and if they cannot start again, though pulling with all their strength, the leader frequently looks around pitifully, as if to say, We cannot do more!
If the traveling is tough, the driver has to walk along the right side of the sled, and whenever hummocks block the way, they have to steer it around by either pushing the front aside or pulling on the deer’s skull at the back. Despite all the effort and pulling, the sled often gets stuck on a piece of ice or sinks into soft snow. As soon as it sinks down to the crossbars, it has to be lifted out, and when the load is heavy, the only way to move forward is by unloading and then reloading. It also needs to be lifted over hummocks, creating a path with the spear’s tip, which is always tied in a spot that is easy to reach, usually on the right side at the bottom of the sled. The challenges of traveling over heavy ice that has been under a lot of pressure have been talked about many times. When the sled stops, the dogs immediately lie down, and if they can’t get going again, even with all their strength, the lead dog often looks around sadly, as if to say, “We can’t do any more!”
Traveling with a light sledge and strong dogs is quite different. Then the team is almost unmanageable and as soon as it is hitched up it is off at full speed. The driver sits down on the fore part and lets the whip trail along, always ready for use. Now the dogs have time enough for playing and quarreling with one another. Though 537 they generally keep their proper place in the team, some will occasionally jump over the traces of their neighbors or crawl underneath them; thus the lines become quickly entangled, and it is necessary to clear them almost every hour.
Traveling with a light sled and strong dogs is a whole different experience. Once the team is hitched up, they take off at full speed and are almost impossible to control. The driver sits at the front and lets the whip drag behind, always ready to use it. The dogs have plenty of time to play and squabble with each other. Even though 537 they generally stay in their spots in the team, some occasionally jump over the traces of their neighbors or crawl underneath; this quickly tangles the lines, so they need to be cleared almost every hour.
If any dog of the team is lazy the driver calls out his name and he is lashed, but it is necessary to hit the dog called, for if another is struck he feels wronged and will turn upon the dog whose name has been called; the leader enters into the quarrel, and soon the whole pack is huddled up in one howling and biting mass, and no amount of lashing and beating will separate the fighting team. The only thing one can do is to wait until their wrath has abated and to clear the traces. It is necessary, however, to lay the mittens and the whip carefully upon the sledge, for the leader, being on the lookout for the traces to be strung, may give a start when the driver is scarcely ready, and off the team will go again before the driver can fairly get hold of the sledge. If anything has dropped from it he must drive in a wide circle to the same place before he can stop the team and pick it up. On an old track it is very difficult to stop them at all. When attempting to do so the driver digs his heels into the snow to obstruct their progress and eventually comes to a stop. Then he stands in front of the sled and makes the dogs lie down by lashing their heads gently. Should the dogs start off he would be thrown upon the sledge instead of being left behind, which might easily happen should he stand alongside.
If any dog on the team is slacking, the driver calls out its name and lashes it, but it’s important to hit only the dog that was called. If another dog gets struck, it feels unfairly treated and will retaliate against the dog whose name was mentioned. The leader will join in the fight, and before long, the whole pack will be tangled up in a noisy and biting mess, and no amount of whipping or beating will separate the fighting dogs. The only option is to wait until they calm down and then clear the traces. However, it's crucial to place the mittens and whip carefully on the sled because the leader, always alert for the traces to be tightened, might surge forward when the driver isn't ready, causing the team to take off before the driver can properly grasp the sled. If anything falls off, the driver will have to circle back to the same spot before he can stop the team and retrieve it. On an old path, it's very tough to stop them at all. When trying to do so, the driver digs his heels into the snow to slow them down until they eventually stop. Then he stands in front of the sled and makes the dogs lie down by gently lashing at their heads. If the dogs start moving again, he’d be thrown onto the sled instead of left behind, which could easily happen if he stands beside it.
The sledge is steered with the legs, usually with the right foot of the driver, or, if it must be pulled aside from a large hummock, by pulling the head aside or by means of the deer’s antlers. If two persons are on the sledge—and usually two join for a long drive—they must not speak to each other, for as soon as the dogs hear them they will stop, turn around, sit down, and listen to the conversation. It has frequently been said that the method of harnessing is inconvenient, as the dogs cannot use their strength to the best advantage; but whoever has driven a sledge himself will understand that any other method would be even more troublesome and less effective. On smooth ice and hard snow any method of harnessing could be used; but, on rough ice, by any other method every cross piece would quickly break on attempting to cross the hummocks. Frequently the traces catch a projecting point and the dogs are then pulled back and thrown against the ice or under the sledge if the trace does not break. If for any reason a dog should hang back and the trace should trail over the snow the driver must lift it up to prevent it from being caught by the sledge runner, else the dog will be dragged in the same way as if the trace were caught by a hummock. Many dogs are able in such cases to strip off their harnesses and thus escape being dragged along, as the team cannot be stopped quickly enough to prevent this. Besides the driver must see to it that the dogs do 538 not step across their traces, which in such cases would run between their hind legs, for should this happen the skin might be severely chafed. If the driver sees a trace in this position he runs forward and puts it back without stopping the team. Particular attention must be paid to this matter when the dogs rise just before starting.
The sled is steered using the legs, typically with the driver’s right foot, or, if it needs to be pulled away from a large mound of snow, by pulling the front or using the deer's antlers. If two people are on the sled—and usually two ride together for a long journey—they shouldn't talk to each other, because as soon as the dogs hear them, they will stop, turn around, sit down, and listen to the conversation. It's often said that the way of harnessing is inconvenient, as the dogs can’t use their strength to their full advantage; but anyone who has driven a sled will know that any other way would be even more of a hassle and less effective. On smooth ice and hard snow, any harnessing method could work; but on rough ice, any other method would quickly break every cross piece when trying to navigate over the mounds. Often, the traces get caught on a sticking up point, and then the dogs are pulled back and slammed against the ice or under the sled if the trace doesn’t break. If a dog happens to lag behind and the trace drags over the snow, the driver has to lift it to keep it from getting caught by the sled runner, or else the dog will be dragged just like it would if the trace got caught on a mound. Many dogs can manage to wiggle out of their harnesses in such situations to avoid being dragged because the team can't be stopped quickly enough. Additionally, the driver must ensure the dogs don’t step over their traces, which would run between their hind legs, as this could seriously chafe their skin. If the driver sees a trace in this position, they rush forward to fix it without stopping the team. Special care must be taken regarding this when the dogs are getting up just before starting.
The sledges are not used until the ice is well covered with snow, as the salt crystals formed on the top of the ice in the autumn hurt the dogs’ feet and cause sores that heal slowly. Late in the spring, when the snow has melted and sharp ice needles project everywhere, the feet of the dogs are covered with small pieces of leather, with holes for the nails, which are tied to the leg. As they are frequently lost and the putting on of these shoes takes a long time, their use is very inconvenient.
The sledges aren't used until the ice is completely covered with snow because the salt crystals that form on the surface in the fall hurt the dogs' paws and cause sores that heal slowly. Late in the spring, when the snow has melted and sharp ice shards are everywhere, the dogs' paws are covered with small pieces of leather that have holes for their nails and are tied to their legs. Since these often get lost and putting them on takes a long time, using them is pretty inconvenient.
At this season numerous cracks run through the floe. They are either crossed on narrow snow bridges which join the edges at convenient places or on a drifting piece of ice by floating across.
At this time of year, there are many cracks in the ice. They can either be crossed on narrow snow bridges that connect the edges at convenient spots or by floating across on a drifting piece of ice.
A few more words in conclusion concerning the training of the dogs. The Eskimo rarely brings up more than three or four dogs at the same time. If the litter is larger than this number the rest are sold or given away. The young dogs are carefully nursed and in winter they are even allowed to lie on the couch or are hung up over the lamp in a piece of skin. When about four months old they are first put to the sledge and gradually become accustomed to pull along with the others. They undergo a good deal of lashing and whipping before they are as useful as the old ones.
A few more words to wrap up about training the dogs. The Eskimo usually raises no more than three or four dogs at a time. If the litter is larger than that, the extras are sold or given away. The young dogs are carefully cared for, and in winter, they’re even allowed to lie on the couch or are hung up over the lamp in a piece of skin. When they’re about four months old, they are first trained to pull the sledge and gradually get used to working alongside the older dogs. They go through quite a bit of lashing and whipping before they are as useful as the older ones.
If food is plentiful the dogs are fed every other day, and then their share is by no means a large one. In winter they are fed with the heads, entrails, bones, and skins of seals, and they are so voracious at this time of the year that nothing is secure from their appetite. Any kind of leather, particularly boots, harnesses, and thongs, is eaten whenever they can get at it. In the spring they are better fed and in the early part of summer they grow quite fat. In traveling, however, it sometimes happens at this time of the year, as well as in winter, that they have no food for five or six days. In Cumberland Sound, Hudson Strait, and Hudson Bay, where the rise and fall of the tide are considerable, they are carried in summer to small islands where they live upon what they can find upon the beach, clams, codfish, &c. If at liberty they are entirely able to provide for themselves. I remember two runaway dogs which had lived on their own account from April until August and then returned quite fat.
If food is abundant, the dogs are fed every other day, and their portion isn’t very large. In winter, they are given the heads, guts, bones, and skins of seals, and they are so greedy this time of year that nothing is safe from their hunger. They’ll eat any kind of leather, especially boots, harnesses, and straps, whenever they can get their paws on it. In the spring, they eat better, and by early summer, they get quite chubby. However, while traveling during this time of year, just like in winter, there are times when they may go without food for five or six days. In Cumberland Sound, Hudson Strait, and Hudson Bay, where the tides vary greatly, they are taken in summer to small islands where they survive on whatever they can scrounge from the beach, like clams, codfish, etc. If they’re free, they can completely fend for themselves. I remember two runaway dogs that had survived on their own from April until August and returned looking hefty.
The Eskimo of all these regions are very much troubled with the well known dog’s disease of the Arctic regions. The only places where it seems to be unknown are Davis Strait and Aggo. Here every man has a team of from six to twelve dogs, while in Cumberland Sound, in some winters, scarcely any have been left. (See Appendix, Note 2.)
The Eskimos in all these areas are heavily affected by the well-known dog disease common in the Arctic. The only places where it seems to be absent are Davis Strait and Aggo. Here, each person has a team of six to twelve dogs, while in Cumberland Sound, some winters, barely any are left. (See Appendix, Note 2.)
HABITATIONS AND DRESS.
THE HOUSE.
The houses of the Eskimo differ according to the season. All the tribes from Smith Sound to Labrador and from Davis Strait to Victoria Land are in the habit of building snow houses in winter. Though they erect another more durable kind of winter house, these are more frequently in use. The principles of construction are the same everywhere. A level place is selected for erecting the snow house. To be suitable for cutting into blocks the snowbank must have been formed by a single storm, for blocks which are cut from drifts composed of several layers break when cut. It must be very fine grained, but not so hard that it cannot be readily cut with the saw or the snow knife. The whole building is constructed of blocks of about three feet or four feet in length, two feet in height, and from six inches to eight inches in thickness. They are cut with snow knives or dovetail saws, which for this reason are much in demand. The old snow knife (sulung) was made of ivory and had a slight curve (Fig. 490). 540 The blocks are cut either vertically or horizontally, the former way being more convenient if the snowdrift is deep. Two parallel cuts of the breadth and the depth of the blocks are made through the drift, and after having removed a small block the Eskimo go on cutting or sawing parallel to the surface. A cross cut is then made and the block is loosened with the point of the foot and lifted out of the bank. Vertical blocks are more easily detached from the snowdrift than horizontal ones.
The houses of the Eskimo vary with the seasons. All the tribes from Smith Sound to Labrador and from Davis Strait to Victoria Land tend to build snow houses in winter. While they also construct a more lasting type of winter house, these snow houses are used more often. The construction principles are consistent everywhere. A flat area is chosen for building the snow house. To be suitable for cutting into blocks, the snowbank must have formed from a single storm, because blocks cut from drifts made of multiple layers tend to break when cut. The snow must be very fine-grained but not so hard that it can’t be easily cut with a saw or snow knife. The entire structure is made of blocks about three to four feet long, two feet high, and six to eight inches thick. They are cut using snow knives or dovetail saws, which are therefore in high demand. The traditional snow knife (sulung) was made of ivory and had a slight curve (Fig. 490). 540 The blocks are cut either vertically or horizontally; the vertical method is more convenient if the snowdrift is deep. Two parallel cuts are made through the drift, matching the width and depth of the blocks, and after removing a small block, the Eskimo continues cutting or sawing parallel to the surface. A cross cut is then made, and the block is loosened with the tip of the foot and lifted out of the bank. Vertical blocks are easier to detach from the snowdrift than horizontal ones.
Fig. 490. Various styles of snow knife. (National Museum, Washington. a, 10386; b, 10385.)
Fig. 490. Different types of snow knife. (National Museum, Washington. a, 10386; b, 10385.)
Two men unite in building a house, the one cutting the blocks, the other building. At first a row of blocks is put up in a circle, the single pieces being slanted so as to fit closely together. Then the first block is cut down to the ground and the top of the row is slanted so as to form one thread of a spiral line. The builder places the first block of the second row with its narrow side upon the first block and pushes it with his left hand to the right so that it touches the last block of the first row. Thus the snow block, which is inclined a little inward, has a support on two sides. The vertical joint is slanted with the snow knife and tightly pressed together, the new block resting on the oblique side of the former. In building on in this way the blocks receive the shape of almost regular trapezoids. Every block is inclined a little more inward than the previous one, and as the angle to the vertical becomes greater the blocks are only kept in their places by the neighboring ones. In order to give them a good support the edges are the more slanted as their angle is greater.
Two guys come together to build a house, one cutting the blocks and the other assembling them. At first, they stack a row of blocks in a circle, angling the pieces so they fit tightly together. Then, they cut the first block down to the ground and angle the top of the row to create a spiral line. The builder places the first block of the second row with its narrow side on the first block and pushes it to the right with his left hand until it touches the last block of the first row. This way, the snow block, which leans slightly inward, is supported on two sides. The vertical joint is angled with a snow knife and pressed tightly together, with the new block resting on the slanted side of the previous one. As they continue building this way, the blocks take on the shape of almost regular trapezoids. Each block leans in a little more than the one before it, and as the angle to vertical increases, the blocks are held in place only by their neighbors. To provide better support, the edges are angled more as the angle increases.
This method of building is very ingenious, as it affords the possibility of building a vault without a scaffold. If the blocks were placed in parallel rows, the first block of a new row would have no support, while by this method each reclines on the previous one. When the house has reached a considerable height the man who cuts the blocks outside must place them upon the last row. The builder supports them with his head and pushes them to their proper places. The key block and those which are next to it are either cut inside or pushed into the house through a small door cut for the purpose. The key block is generally shaped irregularly, as it is fitted into the hole which remains; usually the last two blocks are triangular. When the vault is finished the joints between the blocks are closed up by cutting down the edges and pressing the scraps into the joints. Larger openings are closed with snow blocks and filled up with loose snow pressed into the fissures. Thus the whole building becomes a tight vault, without any holes through which the warm air inside may escape. Such a snow house, about five feet high and seven feet in diameter, is used as a camp in winter journeys. It takes about two hours for two skilled men to build and finish it. For winter quarters the vaults are built from ten to twelve feet high and twelve to fifteen feet in diameter. In order to reach this height the builder 541 makes a bench on which he steps while finishing the upper part of the building.
This building method is quite clever, as it allows for creating a vault without scaffolding. If the blocks were laid out in straight rows, the first block of a new row wouldn’t have any support. However, with this technique, each block rests on the one below it. Once the house has reached a significant height, the person cutting the blocks outside has to place them on the last row. The builder supports them with his head and pushes them into position. The key block and those adjacent to it are either cut inside or passed through a small opening made for this. The key block is usually shaped irregularly to fit into the gap that remains; often, the last two blocks are triangular. Once the vault is complete, the joints between the blocks are sealed by trimming the edges and pressing the scraps into the gaps. Bigger openings are filled with snow blocks and packed with loose snow to fill the cracks. This way, the entire structure becomes a tight vault, preventing warm air from escaping. A snow house, around five feet tall and seven feet wide, is used as a campsite during winter travels. It typically takes about two hours for two skilled workers to build and finish it. For winter shelters, the vaults are built to be ten to twelve feet high and twelve to fifteen feet wide. To reach this height, the builder 541 makes a bench to step on while finishing the upper part of the structure.
The plan of a snow house of the Davis Strait tribes is a little different from that of the Hudson Bay and the Iglulik tribes.
The design of a snow house from the Davis Strait tribes is slightly different from that of the Hudson Bay and Iglulik tribes.
I shall first describe the former according to my own observations (Figs. 491 and 492).
I will first describe the former based on my own observations (Figs. 491 and 492).
Fig. 491. Ground plan of snow house of Davis Strait tribes.
Fig. 491. Floor plan of the snow house used by the tribes of Davis Strait.
The entrance to the main building is formed by two, or less frequently by three, small vaults. The first one (uadling) is a small dome about six feet in height, with a door two and a half feet in height; the second one is a long passage of equal height formed by an elliptical vault (igdluling). Its roof is generally arched, but sometimes the top is cut off evenly and covered with slabs of snow. Both vaults together form the entrance and are called toqsung. A door about three feet high leads into the main room, the floor of which is about nine inches above that of the former. Two very small vaults are always attached to the whole building (Fig. 491). One is situated alongside of the uadling and the igdluling, and serves as a storeroom for clothing and harness (sirdloang). It is not connected with the interior of the hut, but one of the blocks of the vault can be taken out and is made to serve as a lid. On the left side of the entrance of the main building is another small vault (igdluarn), which is accessible from the main building. It serves for keeping spare meat and blubber. Frequently there is a second igdluarn on the opposite side, and sometimes even a third one in the igdluling. Another appendix of the main building is frequently used, the audlitiving (Fig. 491 and Fig. 492 c). It is a vault similar to the sirdloang and is attached to the back of the main room. It serves for storing up meat for future use.
The entrance to the main building is made up of two, or occasionally three, small arches. The first one (uadling) is a small dome about six feet tall, with a door that is two and a half feet high; the second is a long passage of the same height formed by an elliptical arch (igdluling). Its roof is usually arched, but sometimes the top is leveled off and covered with slabs of snow. Together, both arches create the entrance and are called toqsung. A door about three feet high leads into the main room, which is about nine inches higher than the previous area. There are always two very small vaults attached to the whole building (Fig. 491). One is located next to the uadling and igdluling, serving as a storeroom for clothing and harness (sirdloang). It's not connected to the interior of the hut, but one of the blocks from the vault can be removed and used as a lid. On the left side of the entrance to the main building is another small vault (igdluarn), which can be accessed from the main building. It’s used for storing spare meat and blubber. Often, there’s a second igdluarn on the opposite side, and sometimes even a third one in the igdluling. Another part of the main building that is frequently used is the audlitiving (Fig. 491 and Fig. 492 c). It is a vault similar to the sirdloang and is attached to the back of the main room. It’s used for storing meat for later use.
Directly over the entrance a window is cut through the wall, either square or more frequently forming an arch, which is generally covered with the intestines of ground seals, neatly sewed together, the 542 seams standing vertically (Fig. 493). In the center there is a hole (qingang) through which one can look out. In some instances a piece of fresh water ice is inserted in the hole. According to Ross it is always used by the Netchillirmiut (II, p. 250), who make the slab by letting water freeze in a sealskin.
Directly above the entrance, a window is cut into the wall, either square or more commonly arched, and it's usually covered with the intestines of ground seals, neatly sewn together, the seams standing upright (Fig. 493). In the center, there's a hole (qingang) that allows you to look outside. In some cases, a piece of freshwater ice is placed in the hole. According to Ross, the Netchillirmiut always use this method (II, p. 250), creating the slab by letting water freeze in a sealskin.
Fig. 492. Snow house of Davis Strait, sections.
Fig. 492. Snow house from Davis Strait, sections.
In the rear half and on both sides of the door a bank of snow two and a half feet high is raised and cut off straight, a passage trench five feet wide and six feet long remaining. The rear half forms the bed, the adjoining parts of the side benches are the place for the lamps, while on both sides of the entrance meat and refuse are heaped up. Frequently the snowbank on which the hut is built is deep 543 enough so that the bed needs very little raising, and the passage is cut into the bank. As this is much more convenient in building, the huts are generally erected on a sloping face, the entrance lying on the lower part, which faces the beach.
In the back half and on both sides of the door, there's a snowbank two and a half feet high that's been leveled off, leaving a passageway five feet wide and six feet long. The back half serves as the bed, the nearby spots on the side benches are where the lamps go, and on both sides of the entrance, meat and waste are piled up. Often, the snowbank supporting the hut is deep enough that the bed doesn't need much lifting, and the passageway is carved into the bank. Since this makes construction easier, huts are usually built on a slope, with the entrance at the lower part facing the beach. 543
Fig. 493. Section and interior of snow house.
Fig. 493. Section and interior of a snow house.
Before the bed is arranged and the hut furnished the vault is lined with skins, frequently with the cover of the summer hut. The lining (ilupiqang) is fastened to the roof by small ropes (nirtsun), which are fastened by a toggle on the outside of the wall (Fig. 493). In the lower part of the building the lining lies close to the wall; in the upper part it forms a flat roof about two or three feet below the top of the vault. The effect of this arrangement is to prevent the warm air inside from melting the snow roof, as above the skins there is always a layer of colder air. Close to the top of the building a small hole (qangirn) is cut through the wall for ventilation. The lamps require a good draught, which is secured by this hole. The cold air enters through the door, slowly filling the passage, and after being warmed rises to the lamps and escapes through the skin cover and the hole. The moisture of the air forms long ice needles on the inside of the roof. Sometimes they fall down upon the skins, and must be immediately removed by shaking it until they glide down at the sides, else they melt and wet the room thoroughly. Frequently a high ice funnel forms around the hole from the freezing moisture of the escaping air.
Before the bed is set up and the hut is furnished, the vault is lined with skins, often using the cover from the summer hut. The lining (ilupiqang) is attached to the roof with small ropes (nirtsun), which are secured with a toggle on the outside of the wall (Fig. 493). In the lower part of the structure, the lining sits close to the wall; in the upper part, it creates a flat roof about two or three feet below the top of the vault. This setup helps keep the warm air inside from melting the snow roof, since there's always a layer of cooler air above the skins. Near the top of the building, a small hole (qangirn) is cut into the wall for ventilation. The lamps need a good draft, which is provided by this hole. Cold air enters through the door, gradually filling the passage, and after warming up, it rises to the lamps and escapes through the skin cover and the hole. The moisture in the air creates long ice needles on the underside of the roof. Occasionally, they fall onto the skins and must be quickly shaken off so they slide down the sides; otherwise, they melt and thoroughly wet the room. Often, a tall ice funnel forms around the hole from the freezing moisture of the escaping air.
The southern and western tribes rarely line the snow house. The continuous dropping from the roof, however, causes great inconvenience, and, besides, the temperature cannot be raised higher than two or three degrees centigrade above the freezing point, while in the lined houses it is frequently from ten to twenty degrees centigrade, 544 so that the latter are much more comfortable. To avoid the dropping the natives apply a cold piece of snow to the roof before the drop falls down, which at once freezes to it, the roof acquiring by this repeated process a stalactitic appearance. The eastern tribes use the lining in their permanent houses without any exception. The western and southern tribes, who leave the walls bare, heap a thick layer of loose snow over the whole building, almost covering it up, the window and the ventilating hole alone excepted. For this purpose snow shovels are used.
The southern and western tribes hardly ever insulate their snow houses. The constant dripping from the roof, however, creates a lot of hassle, and the temperature can only be raised by two or three degrees Celsius above freezing. In contrast, the insulated houses often reach temperatures between ten and twenty degrees Celsius, 544 making them much more comfortable. To prevent dripping, the locals put a cold piece of snow on the roof before the drops fall, which instantly freezes to it, giving the roof a stalactite-like look over time. The eastern tribes always insulate their permanent houses. The western and southern tribes, who leave their walls uninsulated, cover the entire building with a thick layer of loose snow, leaving only the window and the ventilation hole uncovered. They use snow shovels for this task.
The edge of the bed is formed by a long pole. The surface of the snowbank which forms the foundation for the bed is covered with pieces of wood, oars, paddles, tent poles, &c. These are covered with a thick layer of shrubs, particularly Andromeda tetragona. Over these numerous heavy deerskins are spread, and thus a very comfortable bed is made.
The edge of the bed is made up of a long pole. The top of the snowbank that forms the base for the bed is covered with bits of wood, oars, paddles, tent poles, etc. These are topped with a thick layer of shrubs, especially Andromeda tetragona. On top of these, several heavy deerskins are laid out, creating a very comfortable bed.
According to Parry the arrangement in Iglulik is as follows (II, p. 501):
According to Parry, the setup in Iglulik is as follows (II, p. 501):
The beds are arranged by first covering the snow with a quantity of small stones, over which are laid their paddles, tent poles, and some blades of whalebone; above these they place a number of little pieces of network made of thin slips of whalebone, and lastly a quantity of twigs of birch and of the Andromeda tetragona. ***The birch, they say, had been procured from the southward by way of Nuvuk. ***There deerskins, which are very numerous, can now be spread without risk of their touching the snow.
The beds are set up by first covering the snow with a layer of small stones, on top of which are placed their paddles, tent poles, and some whalebone blades; above these, they put several small pieces of netting made from thin strips of whalebone, and finally a bunch of twigs from birch and the Andromeda tetragona. Sure, I can help with that. Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.They say the birch was brought from the south through Nuvuk. Sure! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.Now they can lay out the abundant deerskins without worrying about them touching the snow.
At night, when the Eskimo go to bed, they put their clothing, their boots excepted, on the edge of the platform under the deerskins, thus forming a pillow, and lie down with the head toward the entrance. The blankets (qipiq) for their beds are made of heavy deerskins, which are sewed together, one blanket serving for a whole family. The edge of the blanket is trimmed with leather straps.
At night, when the Inuit go to bed, they place their clothing—except for their boots—on the edge of the platform under the deerskins, creating a pillow, and lie down with their heads toward the entrance. The blankets (qipiq) for their beds are made of heavy deerskins sewn together, with one blanket used for the whole family. The edge of the blanket is finished with leather straps.
On the side benches in front of the bed is the fireplace, which consists of a stone lamp and a framework from which the pots are suspended (see Fig. 493). The lamp (qudlirn), which is made of soapstone, is a shallow vessel in the shape of a small segment of a circle. Sometimes a small space is divided off at the back for gathering in the scraps of blubber. The wick consists of hair of Eryophorum or of dried moss rubbed down with a little blubber so as to be inflammable. It is always carried by the women in a small bag. The whole vessel is filled with blubber as high as the wick, which is spread along the straight side of the vessel. It requires constant attention to keep the desired length burning without smoking, the length kindled being in accordance with the heat or light required. The trimming of the wick is done with a bit of bone, asbestus, or wood, with which the burning moss is spread along the edge of the lamp and extinguished or pressed down if the fire is not wanted or if it smokes. At the same time this stick serves to light other lamps (or pipes), the burnt point 545 being put into the blubber and then kindled. Sometimes a long, narrow vessel stands below the lamp, in which the oil that drops from the edge is collected.
On the side benches in front of the bed is the fireplace, which has a stone lamp and a framework from which pots are hung (see Fig. 493). The lamp (qudlirn), made of soapstone, is a shallow dish shaped like a small segment of a circle. Sometimes, there’s a small compartment at the back for collecting scraps of blubber. The wick is made from hair of Eryophorum or dried moss mixed with a bit of blubber to make it flammable. Women always carry it in a small bag. The entire vessel is filled with blubber up to the wick, which is laid along the straight side of the dish. It requires constant attention to maintain the right length of the wick burning without smoking, with the burning length adjusted based on the heat or light needed. The wick is trimmed using a piece of bone, asbestus, or wood, with which the burning moss is spread along the edge of the lamp and extinguished or pressed down if the flame isn't needed or if it smokes. This stick also lights other lamps (or pipes) by dipping the burnt end into the blubber before igniting it. Occasionally, a long, narrow container sits below the lamp to collect the oil that drips from the edge.
In winter the blubber before being used is frozen, after which it is thoroughly beaten. This bursts the vesicles of fat and the oil comes out as soon as it is melted. The pieces of blubber are either put into the lamp or placed over a piece of bone or wood, which hangs from the framework a little behind the wick. In summer the oil must be chewed out. It is a disgusting sight to see the women and children sitting around a large vessel all chewing blubber and spitting the oil into it.
In winter, the blubber is frozen before it's used, and then it's thoroughly beaten. This breaks the fat cells, and the oil comes out as soon as it melts. The pieces of blubber are either placed in the lamp or set over a piece of bone or wood, which hangs from the framework just behind the wick. In summer, the oil has to be chewed out. It's quite a repulsive sight to see the women and children gathered around a large container, all chewing on blubber and spitting the oil into it.
The frame of the fireplace consists of four poles stuck in the snow in a square around the lamp and four crossbars connecting the poles at the top. From those which run from the front to the back the kettle (ukusik) is suspended by two pairs of strings or thongs. It is made of soapstone and has a hole in each corner for the string. The kettle which is in use among the eastern tribes has a narrow rim and a wide bottom (Fig. 494), while that of the western ones is just the opposite. Parry, however, found one of this description in River Clyde (I, p. 286). When not in use it is shoved back by means of the strings. Since whalers began to visit the country a great number of tin pots have been introduced, which are much more serviceable, the process of cooking being quickened.
The fireplace frame consists of four poles sunk into the snow in a square around the lamp, with four crossbars connecting the poles at the top. From the front to the back, a kettle (ukusik) is suspended by two pairs of strings or thongs. It’s made of soapstone and has a hole in each corner for the string. The kettle used by the eastern tribes has a narrow rim and a wide bottom (Fig. 494), while the western tribes have the opposite design. However, Parry found one like this in the River Clyde (I, p. 286). When not in use, it is pushed back using the strings. Since whalers started visiting the area, a lot of tin pots have been introduced, which are much more practical, speeding up the cooking process.
On the top of the frame there is always a wood or bone hoop with a net of thongs stretched across it (inetang). It serves to dry clothing, particularly boots, stockings, and mittens, over the fire. In the passage near the entrance to the hut there is frequently a small lamp (adlirn), which is very effective for warming the cold air entering through the door, and in the remotest corner in the back of the hut there is sometimes another (kidlulirn). When all the lamps are lighted the house becomes warm and comfortable.
On the top of the frame, there’s usually a wooden or bone hoop with a net of thongs stretched across it (inetang). It’s used to dry clothes, especially boots, socks, and mittens, over the fire. In the hallway near the entrance of the hut, there’s often a small lamp (adlirn), which does a great job of warming the chilly air coming in through the door, and in the farthest corner at the back of the hut, there’s sometimes another one (kidlulirn). When all the lamps are on, the house feels warm and cozy.
Two small holes are frequently cut in the snowbank which forms the ledge, at about the middle of its height (see Fig. 492 a). They are closed with small snow blocks, each of which has a groove for a handle, and serve to store away anything that must be kept dry. 546 At night the entrance of the inner room is closed with a large snow block, which stands in the passage during the day.
Two small holes are often cut into the snowbank that forms the ledge, around the middle of its height (see Fig. 492 a). They are covered with small snow blocks, each having a groove for a handle, which are used to store anything that needs to stay dry. 546 At night, the entrance to the inner room is sealed with a large snow block that sits in the passage during the day.
Fig. 495. Plan of double snow house.
Fig. 495. Layout of a double snow house.
These huts are always occupied by two families, each woman having her own lamp and sitting on the ledge in front of it, the one on the right side, the other on the left side of the house. If more families join in building a common snow house, they make two main rooms with one entrance. The plan of such a building is seen in Fig. 495.
These huts are always home to two families, with each woman having her own lamp and sitting on the ledge in front of it, one on the right side and the other on the left side of the house. If more families decide to build a shared snow house, they create two main rooms with one entrance. The design of such a building is shown in Fig. 495.
Fig. 496. Plan of Iglulik house. (From Parry II, p. 500.)
Fig. 496. Layout of Iglulik home. (From Parry II, p. 500.)
The plans of the Iglulik and Hudson Bay houses are different from the one described here. The difference will best be seen by comparing the plans represented in Fig. 496 and Fig. 497, which have been 547 reprinted from Hall and Parry, respectively, with the former ones. Among the eastern tribes I have never seen the beds on the side of the passage, but always at the rear of the house.
The layouts of the Iglulik and Hudson Bay houses differ from the one described here. You can see the differences more clearly by comparing the layouts shown in Fig. 496 and Fig. 497, which have been 547 reprinted from Hall and Parry, respectively, with the earlier ones. Among the eastern tribes, I've never seen the beds along the side of the passage; they are always located at the back of the house.
Besides these snow houses a more solid building is in use, called qarmang. On the islands of the American Archipelago and in the neighboring parts of the mainland numerous old stone foundations are found, which prove that all these islands were once inhabited by the Eskimo. It has often been said that the central tribes have forgotten the art of building stone houses and always live in snow huts. At the present time they do not build houses, but cover the walls of an old hut with a new roof whenever they take possession of it. There is no need of any new buildings, as the Eskimo always locate in the old settlements and the old buildings are quite sufficient to satisfy all their wants.
Besides these snow houses, there's a more solid structure in use called a qarmang. On the islands of the American Archipelago and in the nearby areas of the mainland, you can find many old stone foundations that show these islands were once inhabited by the Eskimo. It's often said that the central tribes have forgotten how to build stone houses and always live in snow huts. Nowadays, they don’t build new houses; instead, they just put a new roof on the walls of an old hut whenever they move in. There's no need for new buildings since the Eskimo always settle in the old communities, and the existing structures are more than enough to meet their needs.
Fig. 498. Plan and sections of qarmang or stone house.
Fig. 498. Plan and sections of qarmang or stone house.
Those in good condition have a long stone entrance (ka´teng) (Fig. 498), sometimes from fifteen to twenty feet long. This is made by cutting an excavation into the slope of a hill. Its walls are covered with large slabs of stone about two and a half feet high and three feet wide, the space between the stone and the sides of the excavation being afterwards filled up with earth. The floor of the passage slopes upward toward the hut. The last four feet of the entrance are covered with a very large slab and are a little higher than the other parts of the roof of the passageway. The slab is at the same height as the benches of the dwelling room, which is also dug out, the walls being formed of stones and whale ribs. The plan of the interior is the same as that of the snow house, the bed being in the rear end of the room and the lamps on both sides of the entrance. The floor of the hut is about eight inches higher than that of the passage. The roof and the window, however, differ from those of the snow house. In the front part of the hut the rib of a whale is put up, forming an arch. A great number of poles are lashed to it and run toward the back of the house, where they rest on the top of the wall, forming, as it were, the rafters. The whole curve formed by the rib is covered with a window of seal intestines, while the poles are covered with sealskins, which are fastened in front to the whale rib. At the other end they are either fastened 549 to the ribs in the wall or, more frequently, are steadied by stones. The roof is covered with a thick layer of Andromeda, and another skin, which is fastened in the same way, is spread over both covers. This kind of hut is very warm, light, and comfortable. The stone banks forming the bed are covered as already described.
Those in good condition have a long stone entrance (ka’teng) (Fig. 498), often ranging from fifteen to twenty feet long. This is created by cutting a space into the slope of a hill. Its walls are lined with large slabs of stone, about two and a half feet high and three feet wide, with the gaps between the stones and the sides of the excavation filled with earth. The floor of the passage slopes upward toward the hut. The last four feet of the entrance are covered with a very large slab that is slightly higher than the rest of the roof of the passageway. The slab is at the same height as the benches in the dwelling room, which is also dug out, with walls made of stones and whale ribs. The layout inside is similar to that of a snow house, with the bed located at the back of the room and lamps on either side of the entrance. The floor of the hut is about eight inches higher than that of the passage. However, the roof and window differ from those in the snow house. In the front part of the hut, a whale rib is installed, forming an arch. A large number of poles are tied to it and extend toward the back of the house, resting on top of the wall, functioning like rafters. The entire curve created by the rib is covered with a window made of seal intestines, while the poles are covered with sealskins, which are secured in front to the whale rib. At the other end, they are either secured to the ribs in the wall or more frequently steadied by stones. The roof is layered with a thick coat of Andromeda, and another skin, attached in the same way, is spread over both layers. This type of hut is very warm, bright, and comfortable. The stone benches that serve as the bed are covered as previously described.
If three families occupy one house the whale’s rib which forms the window is placed a few feet farther forward than in the previous case, at the end of the large slab which forms the roof of the last part of the passage.
If three families live in one house, the whale’s rib used for the window is positioned a few feet further forward than in the previous case, at the end of the large slab that makes up the roof of the last section of the passage.
Fig. 499. Plan of large qarmang or stone house for three families.
Fig. 499. Layout of a large qarmang or stone house designed for three families.
By means of poles and bones a small side room is built (qareang), the ceiling of which is sewed to that of the main room (Fig. 499). The large slab which is in front of the window (at the end of the passage) is utilized as a storeroom for both families living on that side of the house, a place being left open only in the middle, where the spy hole is. In some instances this side room is inclosed in the stone walls of the hut.
By using poles and bones, a small side room is constructed (qareang), with its ceiling attached to that of the main room (Fig. 499). The large slab in front of the window (at the end of the hallway) serves as a storeroom for both families living on that side of the house, leaving only a gap in the middle for the spy hole. In some cases, this side room is enclosed within the stone walls of the hut.
Fig. 500. Plan of stone house in Anarnitung, Cumberland Sound. (From a drawing by L. Kumlien.)
Fig. 500. Layout of a stone house in Anarnitung, Cumberland Sound. (From a drawing by L. Kumlien.)
Fig. 500 and Fig. 501 present sketches of plans of some of these 550 houses. From such sketches it appears that several houses might have a common entrance.
Fig. 500 and Fig. 501 show sketches of plans for some of these 550 houses. From these sketches, it seems that multiple houses could have a shared entrance.
Fig. 501. Plan of group of stone houses in Pangnirtung, Cumberland Sound.
Fig. 501. Layout of a cluster of stone houses in Pangnirtung, Cumberland Sound.
In Anarnitung I observed no passage at all for the houses, the walls being entirely above the ground and piled up with bowlders and sod. They are, however, covered in the same way as the others and the entrance is made of snow.
In Anarnitung, I noticed that there were no pathways leading to the houses; the walls were completely above ground and stacked with boulders and grass. However, they are covered similarly to the others, and the entrance is made of snow.
Fig. 502. Plan and sections of qarmang or house made of whale ribs.
Fig. 502. Plan and sections of a qarmang or house made from whale ribs.
A winter house built on the same plan is represented in Fig. 502. The wall is made entirely of whale ribs, placed so that their ends cross one another. The poles are tied over the top of the ribs and the whole frame is covered with the double roof described above. A few narrow snow vaults form the entrance. The front rib forms the door, and thus the hut becomes quite dark. Huts of this kind are also called qarmang or qarmaujang, i.e., similar to a qarmang.
A winter house built on the same design is shown in Fig. 502. The walls are made entirely of whale ribs, arranged so their ends interlock. The poles are tied over the top of the ribs, and the whole structure is covered with a double roof as described earlier. A few narrow snow tunnels create the entrance. The front rib serves as the door, making the hut quite dark inside. Huts like this are also called qarmang or qarmaujang, meaning similar to a qarmang.
Fig. 503. Storehouse in Ukiadliving. (From a sketch by the author.)
Fig. 503. Storehouse in Ukiadliving. (From a sketch by the author.)
In Ukiadliving I found, along with a great number of fine qarmat, some very remarkable storehouses, such as are represented in Fig. 503. Structures of this kind (ikan´) consist of heavy granite pillars, on the top of which flat slabs are piled to a height of from nine to ten feet. In winter, blubber and meat are put away upon these pillars, which are sufficiently high to keep them from the dogs. Sometimes two pillars, about ten feet apart, are found near the huts. In winter the kayak is placed upon them in order to prevent it from being covered by snowdrifts or from being torn and destroyed by the dogs. In snow villages these pillars are made of snow.
In Ukiadliving, I discovered, along with a large number of fine qarmat, some very impressive storehouses, like those shown in Fig. 503. These structures (ikan´) are made of heavy granite pillars, with flat slabs stacked on top of them to a height of about nine to ten feet. During winter, blubber and meat are stored on these pillars, which are high enough to keep them out of reach of the dogs. Sometimes, two pillars, spaced about ten feet apart, can be found near the huts. In winter, the kayak is placed on these pillars to prevent it from being buried under snowdrifts or damaged by the dogs. In snow villages, these pillars are made of snow.
In the spring, when the rays of the sun become warmer, the roofs of the snow houses fall down. At this season the natives build only the lower half of a snow vault, which is covered with skins.
In the spring, when the sun's rays get warmer, the roofs of the snow houses collapse. During this time, the locals only build the lower half of a snow vault, which is covered with skins.
Fig. 504. Plan and sections of tupiq or tent of Cumberland Sound.
Fig. 504. Plan and sections of the tupiq or tent from Cumberland Sound.
Still later they live in their tents (tupiq) (Fig. 504). The framework consists of poles, which are frequently made of many pieces of wood ingeniously lashed together. The plan (Fig. 504 a) is the same 552 as that of the winter houses. At the edge of the bed and at the entrance two pairs of converging poles are erected. A little below the crossing points two cross strips are firmly attached, forming the ridge. Behind the poles, at the edge of the bed, six or eight others are arranged in a semicircle resting on the ground and on the crossing point of those poles. The frame is covered with a large skin roof fitting tightly. The back part, covering the bed, is made of sealskins; the fore part, between the two pairs of poles, of the thin membrane which is split from the skins (see p. 519), and admits the light. The door is formed by the front part of the cover, the left side (in entering) ending in the middle of the entrance, the right one overlapping it, so as to prevent the wind from blowing into the hut. The cover is steadied with heavy stones (Fig. 504 c). In Cumberland Sound and the more southern parts of Baffin Land the back of the hut is inclined at an angle of 45°; in Davis Strait it is as steep as 60°, or even more. In the summer tent the bed and the side platforms are not raised, but only separated from the passage by means of poles.
Later on, they live in their tents (tupiq) (Fig. 504). The structure is made of poles, often crafted from multiple pieces of wood cleverly tied together. The layout (Fig. 504 a) is the same as that of the winter houses. At the edge of the bed and at the entrance, two pairs of converging poles are set up. Just below the crossing points, two cross strips are securely attached to form the ridge. Behind the poles, at the edge of the bed, six or eight others are arranged in a semicircle resting on the ground and at the crossing point of those poles. The frame is covered with a large skin roof that fits snugly. The back section, covering the bed, is made from sealskins, while the front section, between the two pairs of poles, is made from a thin membrane split from the skins (see p. 519), allowing light to enter. The door is created from the front part of the cover, with the left side (when entering) ending in the middle of the entrance and the right side overlapping it to stop the wind from blowing into the hut. The cover is held down with heavy stones (Fig. 504 c). In Cumberland Sound and further south in Baffin Land, the back of the hut is slanted at a 45° angle; in Davis Strait, it can be as steep as 60° or more. In the summer tent, the bed and side platforms aren't elevated but are separated from the passage with poles.
Fig. 505. Plan and sections of tupiq or tent of Pond Bay.
Fig. 505. Plan and sections of tupiq or tent of Pond Bay.
Farther north and west, in Pond Bay, Admiralty Inlet, and Iglulik, where wood is scarce, the Eskimo have a different plan of construction (Fig. 505). A strong pole is set up vertically at the end of the passage, a small cross piece being lashed to its top. The entrance is formed by an oblique pole, the end of which lies in the ridge of the roof. The latter is formed by a stout thong which runs over the top of both poles and is fastened to heavy stones on both sides. If wood is wanting, then poles are made from the penis bones of the walrus. Parry found one of these tents at River Clyde, on his first expedition, and describes it as follows (I, p. 283):
Farther north and west, in Pond Bay, Admiralty Inlet, and Iglulik, where wood is rare, the Eskimos have a different building method (Fig. 505). A strong pole is set up vertically at the end of the passage, with a small crosspiece tied to its top. The entrance is made by an angled pole, the end of which rests on the ridge of the roof. The roof is created with a sturdy thong that runs over the top of both poles and is secured to heavy stones on each side. If wood is unavailable, poles are made from the penis bones of walruses. Parry discovered one of these tents at River Clyde during his first expedition and describes it as follows (I, p. 283):
The tents which compose their summer habitations, are principally supported by a long pole of whalebone, 14 feet high, standing perpendicularly, with 4 or 5 feet of it projecting above the skins which form the roof and sides. The length of the tent is 17, and its breadth from 7 to 9 feet, the narrowest part being next the door, and widening towards the inner part, where the bed, composed of a quantity of the small shrubby plant, the Andromeda tetragona, occupies about one-third of the whole apartment. The pole of the tent is fixed where the bed commences, and the latter is kept separate by some pieces of bone laid across the tent from side to side. The door which faces the southwest, is also formed of two pieces of bone, with the upper ends fastened together, and the skins are made to overlap in that part of the tent, which is much lower than the inner end. The covering is fastened to the ground by curved pieces of bone, being generally parts of the whale.
The tents that make up their summer homes are mainly supported by a long whalebone pole that stands straight up at 14 feet tall, with 4 or 5 feet sticking up above the skins that form the roof and sides. The tent is 17 feet long and 7 to 9 feet wide, the narrowest part being near the door and widening toward the back, where a bed made from a bunch of the small shrub plant, the Andromeda tetragona, takes up about one-third of the entire space. The pole is anchored where the bed starts, and it's kept separate by some bones laid across the tent from side to side. The door, which faces southwest, is made of two pieces of bone with the top ends tied together, and the skins are designed to overlap in that part of the tent, which is much lower than the back end. The covering is secured to the ground with curved pieces of bone, usually made from whale parts.
This kind of tent differs from the one described by me only in the construction of its door.
This type of tent is different from the one I described only in how its door is built.
I could not find a description of the tent of the Hudson Bay Eskimo. There is only one illustration in Klutschak (p. 137) and one in Ross (II, p. 581) representing tents of the Netchillirmiut. In the former there are a few conical tents, such as are used by the eastern tribes before a sufficient number of skins for a large tent can be 553 procured. The same kind is represented in Ross’s book. The other tent drawn by Klutschak is similar to the Iglulik one, but the arrangement of the poles in the back part is invisible. The entrance is formed by two converging poles and a rope runs over the ridge and is tied to a rock.
I couldn't find a description of the tent of the Hudson Bay Eskimo. There’s only one illustration in Klutschak (p. 137) and one in Ross (II, p. 581) showing tents of the Netchillirmiut. In the first one, there are a few conical tents, similar to those used by the eastern tribes before enough skins for a large tent can be obtained. The same type is shown in Ross’s book. The other tent depicted by Klutschak is similar to the Iglulik design, but the arrangement of the poles in the back part is not visible. The entrance is formed by two converging poles, and a rope runs over the ridge and is tied to a rock.
The small tents which are used in the spring are made of a few converging poles forming a cone. They are covered with a skin roof.
The small tents used in the spring are made of a few poles that come together to form a cone shape. They have a skin roof on top.
Fig. 506. Plan and sections of double winter tent, Cumberland Sound.
Fig. 506. Layout and cross-sections of a double winter tent, Cumberland Sound.
Some families, instead of building snow houses or stone houses in winter, cover the summer tent with shrubs and spread over them a second skin cover. In front of the tent snow vaults are built to protect the interior from the cold. In some instances several families join their tents (Fig. 506). In the front part where the tents adjoin each other the covers are taken away and replaced by a whale rib which affords a passage from one room to the other.
Some families, instead of building snow houses or stone houses in winter, cover their summer tents with shrubs and put a second skin cover over them. In front of the tent, they build snow vaults to keep the inside warm. Sometimes, several families connect their tents (Fig. 506). In the front part where the tents meet, the covers are removed and replaced with a whale rib, creating a passage from one room to another.
The plans of the feasting houses, will be found in another place (p. 600).
The plans for the dining venues can be found elsewhere (p. 600).
CLOTHING, DRESSING OF THE HAIR, AND TATTOOING.
The styles of clothing differ among the tribes of the Central Eskimo. In summer the outer garment is always made of sealskins, though the women wear deerskins almost the entire year. The sealskin clothing is made from the skins of Pagomys fœtidus, yearlings being used, and also from those of Callocephalus, if they can be obtained. The latter particularly are highly valued by the natives. The inner garment is made either of the skin of the young seal in the white coat or of a light deerskin. It is cut entirely with the woman’s knife and is sewed with deer sinews.
The clothing styles vary among the Central Eskimo tribes. In summer, the outer garment is always made of sealskin, although women wear deerskin almost all year round. The sealskin outfits are crafted from the skins of Pagomys fœtidus, primarily using yearlings, and also from Callocephalus, when available. The latter is especially prized by the locals. The inner garment is made either from the skin of a young seal with its white coat or a light deerskin. It’s entirely cut with a woman’s knife and sewn with deer sinews.
The prettiest clothing is made by the tribes of Davis Strait. Both men and women wear boots, trousers, and jackets. The style of the men’s clothing may be seen from Figs. 397 and 399, which represent men in the winter clothing, and 412 and 435, which show them in summer clothing. The summer boots are made from the hairless skin of Pagomys fœtidus, the soles from that of Phoca, the sole reaching to the top of the foot. The leg of the boot is kept up by a string passing through its rim and firmly tied around the leg. At the ankle a string passes over the instep and around the foot to prevent the heel from slipping down. On the top of the foot a knob (qaturang) is sometimes attached to the string as an ornament (Fig. 507). The stocking is made of light deerskin. It reaches above the knee, where it has a trimming made from the white parts of a deerskin, whereas the boot ends below the knee. Next to the stocking is a slipper, which is made of birdskin, the feathers being worn next to the foot. This is covered with a slipper of sealskin, the hair side worn outward and the hair pointing toward the heel. The boot finishes the footgear. In the huts the birdskin slippers are frequently laid aside.
The nicest clothing comes from the tribes of Davis Strait. Both men and women wear boots, pants, and jackets. You can see the style of men’s clothing in Figs. 397 and 399, which show them in winter outfits, and 412 and 435, which display their summer attire. Summer boots are made from the hairless skin of Pagomys fœtidus, with soles made from Phoca, the sole extending to the top of the foot. The boot stays up with a string threaded through the rim and tightly tied around the leg. There's also a string around the ankle that goes over the instep and around the foot to stop the heel from slipping down. Sometimes, a knob (qaturang) is attached to the string on top of the foot as a decoration (Fig. 507). The stocking is made from light deerskin, extending above the knee, where it features a trim made from the white parts of deerskin, while the boot ends below the knee. Next to the stocking is a slipper made of birdskin, with the feathers next to the foot. This is covered with a slipper of sealskin, with the hair side out and the hair pointing toward the heel. The boot completes the footwear. In the huts, the birdskin slippers are often set aside.
The breeches of the men consist of an outside and an inside pair, the former being worn with the hair outside; the latter, which are made of the skins of young seals or of deer, with the hair inside. They are fastened round the body by means of a string and reach a little below the knee. Their make will best be seen from the figures. Only the southern tribes trim the lower end of the trousers by sewing a piece to them, the hair of which runs around the leg, while above it runs downward. This pattern looks very pretty.
The men's pants have two layers: the outer pair has the hair on the outside, while the inner pair, made of young seal or deer skins, has the hair on the inside. They are secured around the waist with a string and reach just below the knee. You can see their design better in the illustrations. Only the southern tribes customize the bottoms of their pants by sewing on a piece that has hair running around the leg, while the hair above it hangs down. This design looks really nice.
Fig. 508. Woman’s jacket. (National Museum, Washington.)
Fig. 508. Women's jacket. (National Museum, Washington.)
Fig. 507. Qaturang or boot ornament. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A 6850.)
Fig. 507. Qaturang or boot ornament. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A 6850.)
Fig. 509. Ivory beads for women’s jackets, a (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A 6841) b, c (National Museum, Washington. 34134.) 1/1
Fig. 509. Ivory beads for women’s jackets, a (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A 6841) b, c (National Museum, Washington. 34134.) 1/1
The jacket does not open in front, but is drawn over the head. It 555 has a hood fitting closely to the head. The back and the front are made of a sealskin each. The hood of the Oqomiut is sharply pointed, while that of the Akudnirmiut is more rounded. The jackets are cut straight and have a slit in front. Some have a short tail behind, particularly the winter jackets. The cut of the winter clothing, which is made of deerskin, is the same as the former, and it is frequently trimmed with straps of deerskin. The jacket is rarely worn with the hood down, as it is only used while hunting and traveling. It is never brought into the huts, but after being cleaned from the adhering snow with the snowbeater (tiluqtung, as named by the eastern 556 tribes; arautaq, as called by Hudson Bay tribes) is kept in the storeroom outside the house.
The jacket doesn't open in the front but is pulled over the head. It has a hood that fits snugly to the head. Each side is made of a piece of sealskin. The hood of the Oqomiut is sharply pointed, while the Akudnirmiut's hood is more rounded. The jackets are cut straight and have a slit in the front. Some have a short tail in the back, especially the winter jackets. The cut of the winter clothing, which is made of deerskin, is the same as the previous style, and it is often trimmed with straps of deerskin. The jacket is rarely worn with the hood down, as it's only used while hunting and traveling. It's never brought into the huts, but after being cleaned of any snow with the snowbeater (tiluqtung, as the eastern tribes call it; arautaq, as referred to by Hudson Bay tribes), it is stored in the storeroom outside the house.
The women’s trousers are composed of two pieces. The upper one fits tightly and covers the upper half of the thigh. It is made of the skin of a deer’s belly. The other parts are, as it were, leggings, which reach from a little below the knee to the middle of the thigh and are kept in place by a string running to the upper part of the trousers. The women’s jacket (Fig. 508) is much more neatly trimmed than that of the men. It is frequently adorned with ivory or brass beads running round the edge (Fig. 509). It has a wide and large hood reaching down almost to the middle of the body. In front the jacket has a short appendage; behind, a very long tail which trails along the ground (see Fig. 508). If a child is carried in the hood, a leather girdle fastened with a buckle (Fig. 510) is tied around the waist and serves to prevent the child from slipping down. The first specimen given in Fig. 510 is remarkable for its artistic design.
The women's trousers are made of two parts. The top part fits snugly and covers the upper thigh. It's crafted from the skin of a deer’s belly. The other part is like leggings, extending from just below the knee to the mid-thigh, held up by a string connected to the upper section of the trousers. The women’s jacket (Fig. 508) is much more finely tailored than the men’s. It often features ivory or brass beads along the edge (Fig. 509). The jacket has a wide hood that reaches down nearly to the middle of the body. In front, the jacket has a short extension; in the back, it has a very long tail that drags on the ground (see Fig. 508). If a child is carried in the hood, a leather belt with a buckle (Fig. 510) is fastened around the waist to keep the child from sliding down. The first example shown in Fig. 510 is notable for its artistic design.
Fig. 510. Girdle buckles.
a, c, d (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin.)
b (National Museum, Washington. 34125.) 1/1
Fig. 510. Girdle buckles.
a, c, d (Museum of Ethnology, Berlin.)
b (National Museum, Washington. 34125.) 1/1
Among the Akudnirmiut of Davis Strait another fashion is more frequently in use much resembling that of Iglulik. The women have a wider jacket with a broader hood, enormous boots with a flap reaching up to the hip, and breeches consisting of one piece and reaching to the knees. Unfortunately I have no drawing of this clothing and must therefore refer to Parry’s engravings, which, however, are not very well executed, and to the figures representing dolls in this costume (see Fig. 528).
Among the Akudnirmiut of Davis Strait, another style is more commonly seen, similar to that of Iglulik. The women wear a wider jacket with a broader hood, huge boots with flaps that reach up to the hip, and breeches made from a single piece that go down to the knees. Unfortunately, I don’t have a drawing of this clothing, so I have to refer to Parry’s engravings, which, unfortunately, are not very well done, and to the figures showing dolls in this costume (see Fig. 528).
When children are about a month old they are put into a jacket made from the skin of a deer fawn and a cap of the same material, their legs remaining bare, as they are always carried in their mother’s 557 hood. In some places, where large boots are in use, they are said to be carried in these. The cap is separate and is always made of the head of a fawn, the ears standing upright on each side of the head. The jacket is either quite open in front or has a short slit. Children of more than two years of age wear the same clothing, with trousers and boots (Fig. 511). When they are about eight years old they are clothed like men (Fig. 512). Girls frequently wear the same kind of dress for some time, until they are from nine to ten years old, when they assume the clothing of the women.
When children are about a month old, they are dressed in a jacket made from the skin of a deer fawn, along with a cap made of the same material. Their legs stay bare since they are always carried in their mother’s hood. In some places, where big boots are used, they are said to be carried in those. The cap is separate and always made from the head of a fawn, with the ears standing upright on each side. The jacket is either completely open in front or has a short slit. Children over two years old wear the same clothing, along with trousers and boots. By the time they are around eight years old, they are dressed like men. Girls often wear the same type of dress for a while, until they are between nine and ten years old, when they start wearing women’s clothing.
Fig. 511. Infant’s clothing.
(Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin.)
Fig. 511. Baby's clothing.
(Museum of Ethnology, Berlin.)
As to the mode of clothing of the other tribes I give the descriptions of the authors.
As for how the other tribes dress, I’ll share the descriptions from the authors.
Parry describes the dress of the Iglulirmiut as follows (II, p. 495):
Parry describes the clothing of the Iglulirmiut like this (II, p. 495):
In the jacket of the women, the tail or flap behind is very broad, and so long as almost to touch the ground; while a shorter and narrower one before reaches halfway down the thigh. The men have also a tail in the hind part of their jacket, but of smaller dimensions; but before, it is generally straight or ornamented by a single scollop. The hood of the jacket ***is much the largest in that of the women, for the purpose of holding a child. The back of the jacket also bulges out in the middle to give the child a footing, and a strap or girdle below this, and secured round the waist by two large wooden buttons in front, prevents the infant from falling through when, the hood being in use, it is necessary thus to deposit it. ***The upper (winter) garment of the females, besides being cut according to a regular 558 and uniform pattern, and sewed with exceeding neatness, which is the case with all the dresses of these people, has also the flaps ornamented in a very becoming manner by a neat border of deerskin, so arranged as to display alternate breadths of white and dark fur. This is, moreover, usually beautified by a handsome fringe, consisting of innumerable long, narrow threads of leather hanging down from it.A This ornament is not uncommon also in the outer jackets of the men. When seal-hunting,A they fasten up the tails of their jackets with a button behind.
In the women's jacket, the tail or flap at the back is very wide and nearly reaches the ground, while the front flap is shorter and narrower, going halfway down the thigh. The men also have a tail at the back of their jackets, but it's smaller; the front is typically straight or decorated with a single scallop. The hood of the women's jacket is much larger to accommodate a child. The back of the jacket bulges out in the middle to give the child a place to sit, and a strap or belt below this, secured around the waist with two large wooden buttons in front, keeps the baby from falling through when the hood is being used. The upper (winter) garment for women is not only cut according to a regular and uniform pattern and sewn very neatly, like all their dresses, but also has flaps decorated with a nice border of deerskin, designed to show alternating strips of white and dark fur. Additionally, it often features a beautiful fringe made of numerous long, narrow leather threads hanging down from it. This decoration is also common on men's outer jackets. When seal hunting, they button up the tails of their jackets at the back.
The breeches and the foot gear of the men are described as being much the same as those of the Akudnirmiut. Parry remarks (loc. cit.) that several serpentine pieces of hide are sewed across the soles to prevent them from wearing out:
The pants and footwear of the men are said to be very similar to those of the Akudnirmiut. Parry notes (loc. cit.) that several snake-like strips of hide are stitched across the soles to keep them from wearing out:
The inner boot of the women, unlike that of the men, is loose around the leg, coming as high as the knee joint behind, and in front carried up by a long, pointed flap nearly to the waist and there fastened to the breeches. The upper boot, with the hair as usual outside, corresponds with the other in shape, except that it is much more full, especially on the outer side, where it bulges out so preposterously as to give the women the most awkward, bow-legged appearance imaginable. ***Here, also, as in the jacket, considerable taste is displayed in the selection of different parts of the deerskin, alternate strips of dark and white being placed up and down the sides and front by way of ornament. The women also wear a moccasin (itigega) overall in the winter-time.
The inner boot for women, unlike men’s, is loose around the leg, reaching up to the knee in the back, and in the front, it has a long, pointed flap that goes nearly to the waist and is attached to the breeches. The upper boot, with the hair on the outside as usual, matches the other in shape, but it's much fuller, especially on the outer side, which bulges out awkwardly, giving women a very awkward, bow-legged look. Understood! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.Here, like in the jacket, there’s a lot of style in how different parts of the deerskin are chosen, with alternating dark and white strips arranged vertically on the sides and front for decoration. Women also wear a moccasin (itigega) in the winter.
The dress of the Aivillirmiut is similar to that of the Igiulirmiut (Gilder, p. 139).
The clothing of the Aivillirmiut is similar to that of the Igiulirmiut (Gilder, p. 139).
Traces of clothing found in old graves of Cumberland Sound and Frobisher’s description of the dress of the Nugumiut show that the style of clothing now used by the Igiulirmiut formerly obtained in all parts of Baffin Land.
Traces of clothing found in old graves of Cumberland Sound and Frobisher’s description of the dress of the Nugumiut show that the style of clothing now worn by the Igiulirmiut used to be common throughout all parts of Baffin Land.
All the Eskimo wear mittens. Those used in winter are made of the skin of young seals or of deerskin. In summer they use hairless sealskin, and sometimes make them with two thumbs, so as to turn the mitten round if one side should become wet.
All the Eskimos wear mittens. The ones used in winter are made from the skin of young seals or deerskin. In summer, they use hairless sealskin and sometimes make them with two thumbs so they can turn the mitten around if one side gets wet.
The manner of dressing the hair practiced by the tribes of Northeastern Baffin Land differs from that of other tribes. On Davis Strait and in Hudson Bay the men allow it to grow to a considerable length, but frequently cut it short on the forehead. If all the hair is long it is kept back by a band made of the skin of deer antlers taken in the velvet. Sometimes these ties are very neatly finished. Frobisher states that the Nugumiut shaved part of their heads. The Kinipetu shave the top of the head; the Netchillirmiut wear their hair short.
The way the tribes of Northeastern Baffin Land style their hair is different from other tribes. In Davis Strait and Hudson Bay, men let their hair grow quite long but often trim it short at the front. If their hair is long all over, they tie it back with a band made from deer antler skin taken when it's still soft. Sometimes these bands are very well made. Frobisher notes that the Nugumiut shave parts of their heads. The Kinipetu shave the tops of their heads, while the Netchillirmiut keep their hair short.
The women have two styles of dressing their hair. They always part it on the top of the head. The back hair is wound into a bunch protruding from the back of the head or nicely arranged in a knot. The hair at the sides is plaited and folded over the ears, joining the knot behind. The other way is to arrange these parts in small pigtails reaching a little below the ears. They are kept in order by an ivory or brass ring (see Fig. 515).
The women have two ways of styling their hair. They always part it at the top of the head. The hair in the back is gathered into a bun sticking out from the back of the head or neatly arranged in a knot. The hair on the sides is braided and tucked behind the ears, connecting to the knot in the back. The other style is to arrange these sections into small pigtails that hang just below the ears. They're kept neat with an ivory or brass ring (see Fig. 515).
The manner in which the Iglulirmiut dress their hair is thus described by Parry (II, p. 493):
The way the Iglulirmiut style their hair is described by Parry (II, p. 493):
They separate their locks into two equal parts, one of which hangs on each side of their heads and in front of their shoulders. To stiffen and bind these they use a narrow strap of deerskin, attached at one end to a round piece of bone, fourteen inches long, tapered to a point, and covered over with leather. This looks like a little whip, the handle of which is placed up and down the hair and the strap wound round it in a number of spiral turns, making the tail, thus equipped, very much resemble one of those formerly worn by our seamen. The strap of this article of dress, which is altogether called a tugliga, is so made from the deerskin as to show when bound round the hair, alternate turns of white and dark fur, which give it a very neat and ornamental appearance. ***Those who are less nice dispose ***their hair into a loose plait on each side or have one tugliga and one plait.
They divide their hair into two equal sections, with one side falling in front of each shoulder. To stiffen and secure these sections, they use a narrow strip of deerskin, which is attached at one end to a round piece of bone, fourteen inches long, pointed at the end, and covered in leather. This resembles a small whip, with the handle positioned along the hair and the strap wrapped around it in several spiral loops, making the styled hair look a lot like the ones once worn by sailors. The strap, known as a tugliga, is crafted from deerskin to display alternating sections of white and dark fur when wrapped around the hair, giving it a clean and decorative look. Got it! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.Those who care less about details style their hair into loose braids on each side or sport one tugliga along with a braid.
Fig. 513. Ivory combs. (National Museum, Washington. 10195.) 1/1
Fig. 513. Ivory combs. (National Museum, Washington. 10195.) 1/1
The natives of Southampton Island arrange their hair in a bunch protruding from the forehead (sulubaut). The same dress is worn at certain feasts on Davis Strait (p. 608).
The natives of Southampton Island style their hair in a bunch that sticks out from their forehead (sulubaut). The same dress is worn at certain feasts along Davis Strait (p. 608).
For dressing the hair ivory combs are in use, two specimens of which are represented in. Fig. 513.
For styling hair, ivory combs are used, two examples of which are shown in Fig. 513.
The clothing is frequently trimmed with straps of white deerskin, 560 giving it a pleasing appearance. The edge of the women’s jacket is adorned with ivory beads. Instead of these, teeth, deer’s ears, foxes’ noses, or brass bells are sometimes used.
The clothing is often decorated with strips of white deerskin, 560 which makes it look nice. The hem of the women’s jacket is embellished with ivory beads. Instead of these, they sometimes use teeth, deer’s ears, fox noses, or brass bells.
The inner jackets of the men are sometimes trimmed with beads, feathers, or leather straps, forming a collar and figures of different kinds on the back and on the breast. An amulet is worn in the middle of the back (p. 592). These ornaments and the amulet are only visible when the outer garment is taken off in the hut.
The inner jackets of the men are sometimes decorated with beads, feathers, or leather straps, creating a collar and various designs on the back and chest. An amulet is worn in the center of the back (p. 592). These decorations and the amulet can only be seen when the outer garment is removed inside the hut.


Fig. 514. Buckles. c (From
Tununirnusirn.)
(National Museum, Washington, a, 10196; b, 10400;
c, 10177; d, 10196; e, 10195; f, 10207.)
1/1
Fig. 514. Buckles. c (From Tununirnusirn.)
(National Museum, Washington, a, 10196; b, 10400; c, 10177; d, 10196; e, 10195; f, 10207.)
Fig. 514 represents a number of buckles serving to carry needlecases or similar implements at the girdle, to which the eye is tied, the button being fastened to the implement. Head ornaments are in frequent use and are sometimes beautifully finished.
Fig. 514 shows several buckles used to hold needle cases or similar tools at the waist, with the eye tied to them and the button fastened to the tool. Headpieces are commonly used and can be elegantly crafted.
Fig. 515. Manner of tattooing face and wearing hair.
Fig. 515. How to tattoo the face and style hair.
The women are in the habit of adorning their faces by tattooing. It is done, when they are about twelve years of age, by passing needle and thread covered with soot under the skin, or by puncture, the points of the tattooing instruments being rubbed with the same substance in both cases, which is a mixture of the juice of Fucus and soot, or with gunpowder, by which process they obtain a blue color. The face, arms, hands, thighs, and breasts are the parts of the body which are generally tattooed. The patterns will be seen in Figs. 515 and 516.
The women often decorate their faces with tattoos. This usually happens when they are around twelve years old. They do this by stitching needle and thread coated in soot under their skin, or by using a puncturing method where the tips of the tattooing tools are dipped in the same substance, which is a mix of the juice of Fucus and soot, or even gunpowder, which gives them a blue color. The face, arms, hands, thighs, and breasts are the common areas for tattooing. You can see the designs in Figs. 515 and 516.
Fig. 516. Manner of tattooing legs and hands.
Fig. 516. How to tattoo legs and hands.
SOCIAL AND RELIGIOUS LIFE.
DOMESTIC OCCUPATIONS AND AMUSEMENTS.
It is winter and the natives are established in their warm snow houses. At this time of the year it is necessary to make use of the short daylight and twilight for hunting. Long before the day begins to dawn the Eskimo prepares for hunting. He rouses his housemates; his wife supplies the lamp with a new wick and fresh blubber 562 and the dim light which has been kept burning during the night quickly brightens up and warms the hut. While the woman is busy preparing breakfast the man fits up his sledge for hunting. He takes the snow block which closes the entrance of the dwelling room during the night out of the doorway and passes through the low passages. Within the passage the dogs are sleeping, tired by the fatigues of the day before. Though their long, heavy hair protects them from the severe cold of the Arctic winter, they like to seek shelter from the piercing winds in the entrance of the hut.
It’s winter, and the locals are settled in their cozy snow houses. At this time of year, it’s important to make the most of the short daylight and twilight for hunting. Long before dawn, the Eskimo gets ready for the hunt. He wakes up his housemates; his wife prepares the lamp with a new wick and fresh blubber, and the dim light that’s been flickering through the night quickly brightens and warms the hut. While she busies herself with breakfast, the man gets his sled ready for hunting. He removes the snow block that sealed the entrance overnight and navigates through the low passages. Inside the passageway, the dogs are sleeping, exhausted from the previous day. Even though their long, thick fur protects them from the harsh cold of the Arctic winter, they prefer to rest sheltered from the biting winds at the entrance of the hut. 562
The sledge is iced, the harnesses are taken out of the storeroom by the door, and the dogs are harnessed to the sledge. Breakfast is now ready and after having taken a hearty meal of seal soup and frozen and cooked seal meat the hunter lashes the spear that stands outside of the hut upon the sledge, hangs the harpoon line, some toggles, and his knife over the antlers, and starts for the hunting ground. Here he waits patiently for the blowing seal, sometimes until late in the evening.
The sled is ready, the harnesses are pulled from the storage room by the door, and the dogs are attached to the sled. Breakfast is served, and after enjoying a filling meal of seal soup and both frozen and cooked seal meat, the hunter secures the spear that stands outside the hut onto the sled, hangs the harpoon line, some toggles, and his knife over the antlers, and sets off to the hunting ground. There, he waits patiently for the surfacing seal, sometimes until late in the evening.
Meanwhile the women, who stay at home, are engaged in their domestic occupations, mending boots and making new clothing, or they visit one another, taking some work with them, or pass their time with games or in playing with the children. While sitting at their sewing and at the same time watching their lamps and cooking the meat, they incessantly hum their favorite tunes. About noon they cook their dinner and usually prepare at the same time the meal for the returning hunters. As soon as the first sledge is heard approaching, the pots, which have been pushed back during the afternoon, are placed over the fire, and when the hungry men enter the hut their dinner is ready. While hunting they usually open the seals caught early in the morning, to take out a piece of the flesh or liver, which they eat raw, for lunch. The cut is then temporarily fastened until the final dressing of the animal at home.
Meanwhile, the women who stay at home are busy with their household tasks, fixing boots and making new clothes, or they visit each other, bringing some work along, or spend their time playing games or with the children. While they sit sewing and also keeping an eye on their lamps and cooking the meat, they constantly hum their favorite songs. Around noon, they cook lunch and usually prepare the meal for the returning hunters at the same time. As soon as they hear the first sled approaching, the pots, which they had pushed back during the afternoon, are put back over the fire, so when the hungry men come into the hut, their dinner is ready. While hunting, they typically open the seals caught earlier in the morning to take out a piece of the flesh or liver, which they eat raw for lunch. The cut is then temporarily secured until they can finish processing the animal at home.
In the western regions particularly the hunters frequently visit the depots of venison made in the fall, and the return is always followed by a great feast.
In the western regions, hunters often visit the venison camps set up in the fall, and their return is always celebrated with a big feast.
After the hunters reach home they first unharness their dogs and unstring the traces, which are carefully arranged, coiled up, and put away in the storeroom. Then the sledge is unloaded and the spoils are dragged through the entrance into the hut. A religious custom commands the women to leave off working, and not until the seal is cut up are they allowed to resume their sewing and the preparing of skins. This custom is founded on the tradition that all kinds of sea animals have risen from the fingers of their supreme goddess, who must be propitiated after being offended by the murder of her offspring (see p. 583). The spear is stuck into the snow at the entrance of the house, the sledge is turned upside down, and the ice coating is removed from the runners. Then it is leaned against the 563 wall of the house, and at last the hunter is ready to enter. He strips off his deerskin jacket and slips into his sealskin coat. The former is carefully cleaned of the adhering ice and snow with the snowbeater and put into the storeroom outside the house.
After the hunters get home, they first unharness their dogs and take down the traces, which they carefully arrange, coil up, and store in the storeroom. Then they unload the sled and drag the catch through the entrance into the hut. A religious custom requires the women to stop working, and they can't resume their sewing and preparing of skins until the seal is cut up. This tradition is based on the belief that all sea animals come from the fingers of their supreme goddess, who needs to be appeased after the death of her offspring (see p. 583). The spear is stuck into the snow at the entrance of the house, the sled is turned upside down, and the ice is removed from the runners. Then it’s leaned against the 563 wall of the house, and finally, the hunter is ready to enter. He takes off his deerskin jacket and puts on his sealskin coat. The jacket is carefully cleaned of the ice and snow with the snowbeater and stored outside in the storeroom.
This done, the men are ready for their dinner, of which the women do not partake. In winter the staple food of the Eskimo is boiled seal and walrus meat, though in some parts of the western districts it is musk ox and venison, a rich and nourishing soup being obtained by cooking the meat. The natives are particularly fond of seal and walrus soup, which is made by mixing and boiling water, blood, and blubber with large pieces of meat.
This done, the men are ready for their dinner, which the women do not join. In winter, the main food for the Eskimos is boiled seal and walrus meat, although in some areas of the western districts, they eat musk ox and venison, resulting in a rich and nourishing soup when the meat is cooked. The locals especially enjoy seal and walrus soup, made by mixing and boiling water, blood, and blubber with large chunks of meat.
The food is not always salted, but sometimes melted sea water ice, which contains a sufficient quantity of salt, is used for cooking. Liver is generally eaten raw and is considered a tidbit. I have seen the intestines eaten only when there was no meat.
The food isn't always salted, but sometimes melted sea ice, which has enough salt, is used in cooking. Liver is usually eaten raw and is seen as a delicacy. I've noticed that the intestines are only eaten when there’s no meat available.
Fig. 517. Forks. a, b (From Iglulik.) (National Museum, Washington, a, 10395; b, 10393.)
Fig. 517. Forks. a, b (From Iglulik.) (National Museum, Washington, a, 10395; b, 10393.)
Forks (Fig. 517)6 are used to take the meat out of the kettle and the soup is generally poured out into a large cup. Before the introduction of European manufactures these vessels and dishes generally consisted of whalebone. One of these has been described by Parry (I, p. 286). It was circular in form, one piece of whalebone being bent into the proper shape for the sides and another flat piece of the same material sewed to it for a bottom, so closely as to make it perfectly watertight. A ladle or spoon (Fig. 518) is sometimes used in drinking it, but usually the cup is passed around, each taking a sip in turn. In the same way large pieces of meat are passed round, each taking as large a mouthful as possible and then cutting 564 off the bit close to the lips. They all smack their lips in eating. The Eskimo drink a great deal of water, which is generally kept in vessels standing near the lamps. When the men have finished their meal the women take their share, and then all attack the frozen meat which is kept in the storerooms. The women are allowed to participate in this part of the meal. An enormous quantity of meat is devoured every night, and sometimes they only suspend eating when they go to bed, keeping a piece of meat within reach in case they awake.
Forks (Fig. 517)6 are used to take the meat out of the kettle, and the soup is usually poured into a large cup. Before European goods became available, these vessels and dishes were mainly made of whalebone. One of these was described by Parry (I, p. 286). It was circular in shape, made from one piece of whalebone bent into the right form for the sides, with another flat piece sewn tightly to it for the bottom, making it completely watertight. A ladle or spoon (Fig. 518) is sometimes used for drinking, but generally the cup is passed around, with each person taking a sip in turn. Similarly, large pieces of meat are shared around, and each person takes as big a bite as possible before cutting off the piece close to their lips. They all smack their lips while eating. The Eskimo drinks a lot of water, which is usually stored in containers near the lamps. When the men finish their meal, the women take their share, and then everyone digs into the frozen meat stored in the storerooms. Women are allowed to take part in this part of the meal. A huge amount of meat is consumed every night, and sometimes they only stop eating when they go to bed, keeping a piece of meat nearby in case they wake up.
Fig. 518. Ladle of musk ox horn. (National Museum. Washington. 10382.) ½
Fig. 518. Ladle made from musk ox horn. (National Museum. Washington. 10382.) ½
After dinner the seals, which have been placed behind the lamps to thaw, are thrown upon the floor, cut up, and the spare meat and skins are taken into the storerooms. If a scarcity of food prevails in the village and a hunter has caught a few seals, every inhabitant of the settlement receives a piece of meat and blubber, which he takes to his hut, and the successful hunter invites all hands to a feast.
After dinner, the seals, which have been set behind the lamps to thaw, are thrown onto the floor, chopped up, and the extra meat and skins are taken into the storage rooms. If there’s a food shortage in the village and a hunter has caught a few seals, every resident of the settlement gets a piece of meat and blubber to take to their hut, and the successful hunter invites everyone to a feast.
The dogs are fed every second day after dinner. For this purpose two men go to a place at a short distance from the hut, taking the frozen food with them, which they split with a hatchet or the point of the spear. While one is breaking the solid mass the other keeps the dogs off by means of the whip, but as soon as the food is ready they make a rush at it, and in less than half a minute have swallowed their meal. No dog of a strange team is allowed to steal anything, but is kept at a distance by the dogs themselves and by the whip. If the dogs are very hungry they are harnessed to the sledge in order to prevent an attack before the men are ready. They are unharnessed after the food is prepared, the weakest first, in order to give him the best chance of picking out some good pieces. Sometimes they are fed in the house; in such a case, the food being first prepared, they are led into the hut singly; thus each receives his share.
The dogs are fed every other day after dinner. Two men go to a spot not far from the hut, bringing along the frozen food, which they chop up with a hatchet or a spear point. While one man breaks apart the solid food, the other uses a whip to keep the dogs away. But as soon as the food is ready, they dart at it and finish their meal in less than thirty seconds. No dog from a different team is allowed to steal anything; they're kept at a distance by the other dogs and the whip. If the dogs are really hungry, they're harnessed to the sledge to prevent them from attacking before the men are ready. They’re unharnessed after the food is prepared, starting with the weakest dog to give it a better chance to grab some good pieces. Sometimes they are fed inside the house; in that case, the food is prepared first, and each dog is brought into the hut one at a time so that everyone gets their share.
All the work being finished, boots and stockings are changed, as they must be dried and mended. The men visit one another and spend the night in talking, singing, gambling, and telling stories. The events of the day are talked over, success in hunting is compared, the hunting tools requiring mending are set in order, and the lines are dried and softened. Some busy themselves in cutting new ivory implements and seal lines or in carving. They never spend the nights quite alone, but meet for social entertainment. During these visits the host places a large lump of frozen meat and a knife on the side bench behind the lamp and every one is welcome to help himself to as much as he likes.
All the work done, they change out of their boots and stockings since they need to be dried and fixed. The men visit each other and spend the night talking, singing, gambling, and sharing stories. They discuss the day's events, compare their hunting successes, organize their hunting gear that needs repairs, and dry and soften their lines. Some focus on making new ivory tools and seal lines or on carving. They never spend the nights completely alone; they gather for social fun. During these visits, the host puts a big chunk of frozen meat and a knife on the side bench behind the lamp, and everyone is welcome to take as much as they want.
The first comers sit down on the ledge, while those entering later stand or squat in the passage. When any one addresses the whole assembly he always turns his face to the wall and avoids facing the listeners. Most of the men take off their outer jacket in the house and they sit chatting until very late. Even the young children do not go to bed early.
The first people to arrive sit on the ledge, while newcomers stand or crouch in the hallway. When someone speaks to the whole group, they always turn their back to the audience and avoid looking at them. Most of the guys take off their outer jackets inside the house and chat until late at night. Even the little kids don't go to bed early.
Fig. 519. Skull used in the game ajegaung, from Ungava Bay. (From L. M. Turner’s collection.) (National Museum, Washington. 90227.) 1/1
Fig. 519. Skull used in the game ajegaung, from Ungava Bay. (From L. M. Turner’s collection.) (National Museum, Washington. 90227.) 1/1
The women sit on the bed in front of their lamps, with their legs under them, working continually on their own clothing or on that of the men, drying the wet footgear and mittens, and softening the leather by chewing and rubbing. If a bitch has a litter of pups it is their business to look after them, to keep them warm, and to feed them regularly. Generally the pups are put into a small harness and are allowed to crawl about the side of the bed, where they are tied to the wall by a trace. Young children are always carried in their mothers’ hoods, but when about a year and a half old they are 566 allowed to play on the bed, and are only carried by their mothers when they get too mischievous. When the mother is engaged in any hard work they are carried by the young girls. They are weaned when about two years old, but women suckle them occasionally until they are three or four years of age. During this time they are frequently fed from their mothers’ mouths. When about twelve years old they begin to help their parents, the girls sewing and preparing skins, the boys accompanying their fathers in hunting expeditions. The parents are very fond of their children and treat them kindly. They are never beaten and rarely scolded, and in turn they are very dutiful, obeying the wishes of their parents and taking care of them in their old age.
The women sit on the bed in front of their lamps, with their legs tucked underneath them, constantly working on their own clothes or those of the men, drying wet shoes and mittens, and softening leather by chewing and rubbing. If a dog has a litter of puppies, it’s their responsibility to take care of them, keeping them warm and feeding them regularly. Usually, the puppies are put into a small harness and allowed to crawl around the side of the bed, where they are tied to the wall by a strap. Young children are always carried in their mothers’ hoods, but when they are about a year and a half old, they are allowed to play on the bed and are only carried by their mothers when they start to get too rowdy. When the mother is busy with hard work, young girls carry them. They are weaned at around two years old, but women sometimes nurse them until they are three or four. During this time, they often get food directly from their mothers’ mouths. When they reach about twelve years old, they begin helping their parents, with the girls sewing and preparing skins, and the boys going with their fathers on hunting trips. Parents are very fond of their children and treat them kindly. They are never beaten and rarely scolded, and in return, they are very obedient, following their parents' wishes and taking care of them in their old age.
Fig. 520. Ivory carving representing
head of fox, used in the game ajegaung.
(Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A 6820.) 1/1
Fig. 520. Ivory carving depicting the head of a fox, used in the game ajegaung.
(Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A 6820.) 1/1
In winter gambling is one of the favorite amusements of the Eskimo. Figs. 519–521 represent the ajegaung, used in a game somewhat similar to our cup and ball. The most primitive device is Fig. 519, a hare’s skull with a number of holes drilled through it. A specimen was kindly lent to me by Lucien M. Turner, who brought it from Ungava Bay; but in Baffin Land exactly the same device is in use. Fig. 520 represents the head of a fox, in ivory; Fig. 521, a polar bear. The specimen shown in Fig. 521 b was brought from Cumberland Sound by Kumlien. The neck of the bear is more elaborate than the one shown in a. The attachment of the part representing the hind legs is of some interest. The game is played as follows: First, the skull or the piece of ivory must be thrown up and caught ten times upon the stick in any one of the holes. Then, beginning with the hole in front (the mouth), those of the middle line must be caught. The three holes on the neck of the bear are double, one crossing vertically, the other slanting backward, but both ending in one hole on the neck. After the mouth has been caught upon the stick the vertical hole in the neck is the next, then the oblique one, and so on down the middle line of the animal’s body. If, in the first part of the game, the player misses twice he must give up the pieces to his neighbor, who then takes his turn. In the second part he is allowed to play on as long as he catches in any hole, even if it be not the right one, but as soon as he misses he must give it up. After having caught one hole he proceeds to the next, and the player who first finishes all the holes has won the game.
In winter, gambling is one of the favorite pastimes of the Eskimo. Figs. 519–521 show the ajegaung, which is used in a game somewhat like our cup and ball. The most basic version is Fig. 519, which is a hare’s skull with several holes drilled into it. Lucien M. Turner kindly lent me a specimen he brought from Ungava Bay; however, in Baffin Land, the same device is also used. Fig. 520 shows the head of a fox made from ivory; Fig. 521 features a polar bear. The specimen shown in Fig. 521 b was brought from Cumberland Sound by Kumlien. The bear's neck in this version is more detailed than the one in a. The way the part representing the hind legs is attached is also interesting. The game is played like this: First, the skull or ivory piece must be thrown up and caught ten times on the stick using any of the holes. Starting with the front hole (the mouth), the ones in the center line must then be caught. The three holes on the bear’s neck are double, one crossing vertically and the other slanting backward, but both end in a single hole on the neck. After catching the mouth on the stick, the next move is to the vertical hole in the neck, then the oblique one, and so forth down the animal's body. If the player misses twice in the first part of the game, they have to give up the pieces to the next player, who then takes their turn. In the second part, the player can continue to play as long as they catch in any hole, even if it's not the correct one, but if they miss, they must give it up. After catching one hole, they move to the next, and the player who finishes all the holes first wins the game.
Fig. 521. Ivory carvings representing
polar bear, used in the game ajegaung.
a (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A 6819.) b (National
Museum, Washington. 34078.) ⅔
Fig. 521. Ivory carvings of a polar bear, used in the game ajegaung.
a (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A 6819.) b (National Museum, Washington. 34078.) ⅔
A game similar to dice, called tingmiujang, i.e., images of birds, is frequently played. A set of about fifteen figures like those represented in Fig. 522 belong to this game, some representing birds, 568 others men or women. The players sit around a board or a piece of leather and the figures are shaken in the hand and thrown upward. On falling, some stand upright, others lie flat on the back or on the side. Those standing upright belong to that player whom they face; sometimes they are so thrown that they all belong to the one who tossed them up. The players throw by turns until the last figure is taken up, the one getting the greatest number of the figures being the winner.
A game similar to dice, called tingmiujang, which means images of birds, is often played. A set of about fifteen figures like those shown in Fig. 522 belong to this game, some representing birds, 568 others representing men or women. The players sit around a board or a piece of leather, and the figures are shaken in their hands and tossed up. When they land, some stand upright while others lie flat on their backs or sides. The figures that stand upright belong to the player they face; sometimes, all the figures land in a way that they all belong to the player who tossed them. The players take turns throwing until the last figure is picked up, and the player who collects the most figures wins.
Fig. 522. Figures used in playing
tingmiujang, a game similar to dice.
(Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A 6823.) 1/1
Fig. 522. Figures used in playing tingmiujang, a game similar to dice.
(Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A 6823.) 1/1
A favorite game is the nuglutang (Fig. 523). A small, rhomboidal plate of ivory with a hole in the center is hung from the roof and steadied by a heavy stone or a piece of ivory hanging from its lower end. The Eskimo stand around it and when the winner of the last game gives a signal every one tries to hit the hole with a stick. The one who succeeds has won. This game is always played amid great excitement.
A popular game is nuglutang (Fig. 523). A small, diamond-shaped ivory plate with a hole in the center is hung from the ceiling and held steady by a heavy stone or a piece of ivory at its bottom. The Eskimos stand around it, and when the winner of the last game gives a signal, everyone tries to hit the hole with a stick. The person who succeeds wins. This game is always played with a lot of excitement.
Fig. 523. Game of nuglutang. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A 6821.)
Fig. 523. Game of nuglutang. (Museum of Ethnology, Berlin. IV A 6821.)
The sāketān resembles a roulette. A leather cup with a rounded 569 bottom and a nozzle is placed on a board and turned round. When it stops the nozzle points to the winner. At present a tin cup fastened with a nail to a board is used for the same purpose (Fig. 524).
The sāketān is like a roulette. A leather cup with a rounded bottom and a spout is placed on a board and spun around. When it stops, the spout indicates the winner. Nowadays, a tin cup secured with a nail to a board is used for the same purpose (Fig. 524).
Fig. 524. The sāketān or roulette. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A 6854.)
Fig. 524. The sāketān or roulette. (Museum of Ethnology, Berlin. IV A 6854.)
Their way of managing the gain and loss is very curious. The first winner in the game must go to his hut and fetch anything he likes as a stake for the next winner, who in turn receives it, but has to bring a new stake, in place of this, from his hut. Thus the only one who loses anything is the first winner of the game, while the only one who wins anything is the last winner.
Their method of handling gains and losses is quite interesting. The first winner in the game must go to their hut and get something they like as a stake for the next winner, who will receive it but has to bring a new stake from their own hut in return. This way, the only person who actually loses anything is the first winner, while the only one who gains anything is the last winner.
Fig. 525. The ajarorpoq or cat’s cradle. a representing deer; b, hare; c, hill and ponds.
Fig. 525. The ajarorpoq or cat’s cradle. a represents deer; b represents hare; c represents hill and ponds.
The women are particularly fond of making figures out of a loop, a game similar to our cat’s cradle (ajarorpoq). They are, however, 570 much more clever than we in handling the thong and have a great variety of forms, some of which are represented in Fig. 525.
The women really enjoy making shapes with a loop, a game that's kind of like cat’s cradle (ajarorpoq). However, they are 570 much more skilled than us at manipulating the string and have a wide range of designs, some of which are shown in Fig. 525.
As an example I shall describe the method of making the device representing a deer (Fig. 525 a): Wind the loop over both hands, passing it over the back of the thumbs inside the palms and outside the fourth fingers. Take the string from the palm of the right hand with the first finger of the left and vice versa. The first finger of the right hand moves over all the parts of the thong lying on the first and fourth fingers of the right hand and passes through the loop formed by the thongs on the thumb of the right hand; then it moves back over the foremost thong and takes it up, while the thumb lets go the loop. The first finger moves downward before the thongs lying on the fourth finger and comes up in front of all the thongs. The thumb is placed into the loops hanging on the first finger and the loop hanging on the first finger of the left hand is drawn through both and hung again over the same finger. The thumb and first finger of the right and the thumb of the left hand let go their loops. The whole is then drawn tight. A few other devices from Hudson Bay are represented by Klutschak (p. 139).
As an example, I’ll explain how to make the device that looks like a deer (Fig. 525 a): Wind the loop around both hands, passing it over the backs of your thumbs inside the palms and outside your fourth fingers. Take the string from the palm of your right hand with your left index finger and vice versa. Your right index finger moves over all the parts of the string resting on your right hand's first and fourth fingers and goes through the loop made by the strings on your right thumb; then it moves back over the front string and picks it up while your thumb releases the loop. The index finger moves down in front of the strings resting on your fourth finger and comes back up in front of all the strings. Your thumb goes into the loops hanging on your index finger, and the loop on your left index finger is pulled through both and hung back over the same finger. The thumbs and index fingers of both hands let go of their loops. Then everything is pulled tight. A few other devices from Hudson Bay are shown by Klutschak (p. 139).
Fig. 526. Ball. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A 6822.)
Fig. 526. Ball. (Museum of Ethnology, Berlin. IV A 6822.)
The ball (Fig. 526) is most frequently used in summer. It is made of sealskin stuffed with moss and neatly trimmed with skin straps. One man throws the ball among the players, whose object it is to keep it always in motion without allowing it to touch the ground. Another game of ball I have seen played by men only. A leather ball filled with hard clay is propelled with a whip, the lash of which is tied up in a coil. Every man has his whip and is to hit the ball and so prevent his fellow players from getting at it.
The ball (Fig. 526) is mostly used in the summer. It's made of sealskin stuffed with moss and neatly finished with skin straps. One person throws the ball among the players, whose goal is to keep it moving without letting it touch the ground. I've also seen another ball game played only by men. A leather ball filled with hard clay is hit with a whip, the end of which is coiled up. Each man has his whip and aims to hit the ball to stop others from getting to it.
A third game at ball called igdlukitaqtung is played with small balls tossed up alternately from the right to the left, one always being in the air. Songs used in the game will be found in the last pages of this paper.
A third game called igdlukitaqtung is played with small balls that are tossed back and forth from right to left, with one ball always in the air. The songs used in the game can be found in the last pages of this paper.
An amusement of women and children is to point successively on the forehead, the cheek, and the chin and to pronounce as rapidly as possible sulubautiχu´tika, tudliχu´tika, tadliχu´tika, tudliχú´tika, i.e., the forehead, the cheek, the chin, the cheek.
An activity for women and children is to touch their forehead, cheek, and chin in succession while quickly saying sulubautiχu´tika, tudliχu´tika, tadliχu´tika, tudliχú´tika, meaning the forehead, the cheek, the chin, the cheek.
Young children play with toy sledges, kayaks, boats, bows and arrows, and dolls. The last are made in the same way by all the tribes, a wooden body being clothed with scraps of deerskin cut in the same way as the clothing of men. Fig. 527 shows dolls in the dress of the Oqomiut; Fig. 528, in that of the Akudnirmiut.
Young kids play with toy sleds, kayaks, boats, bows and arrows, and dolls. All the tribes make the dolls in the same way, using a wooden body dressed in scraps of deerskin cut like men's clothing. Fig. 527 shows dolls dressed like the Oqomiut; Fig. 528 shows dolls dressed like the Akudnirmiut.
Fig. 527. Dolls in dress of the Oqomiut. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A 6702.) 1/1
Fig. 527. Dolls dressed in the style of the Oqomiut. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A 6702.) 1/1
In summer children and grown up people exercise by sitting down on their knees in a large circle and simultaneously jumping up and down, by kneeling and holding their toes in their hands and trying to outdo one another in running in this position, &c.
In summer, kids and adults get active by sitting on their knees in a big circle and jumping up and down at the same time, by kneeling and holding their toes with their hands, and trying to outdo each other in running this way, etc.
A favorite amusement during the long winter nights is telling tales and composing songs. Old traditions are always related in a highly ceremonious manner. The narrator takes off his outer jacket, pulls the hood over his head, and sits down in the rear part of the hut, turning his face toward the wall, and then tells the story slowly and solemnly. All the stories are related in a very abridged form, the substance being supposed to be known. The form is always the same, and should the narrator happen to say one word otherwise than is customary he will be corrected by the listeners.
A favorite pastime during the long winter nights is sharing stories and writing songs. Old traditions are always recounted in a really formal way. The storyteller removes his outer jacket, pulls the hood over his head, and sits at the back of the hut, facing the wall, then tells the story slowly and seriously. All the stories are told in a very condensed way, assuming the audience already knows the main points. The format is always consistent, and if the storyteller happens to say any word differently than usual, the listeners will correct him.
Children tell one another fables and sing short songs. Comic songs making fun of any person are great favorites. Details on the poetry and music of the Eskimo will be found further on.
Children share fables and sing short songs to each other. Humorous songs that poke fun at people are especially popular. More information about the poetry and music of the Eskimos will be provided later.
Parry’s description of the games and sports practiced by the Iglulirmiut is so interesting that I insert it here (II, p. 538):
Parry’s description of the games and sports practiced by the Iglulirmiut is so fascinating that I’m including it here (II, p. 538):
On an occasion when most of the men were absent from the huts on a sealing excursion, the women joined in playing, one of them being the chief performer. Being requested to amuse the rest, she suddenly unbound her hair, platted it, tied both ends together to keep it out of her way, and then stepping out into the middle of the hut, began to make the most hideous faces that can be conceived, by drawing both lips into her mouth, poking forward her chin, squinting frightfully, occasionally shutting one eye, and moving her head from side to side as if her neck had been dislocated. This exhibition, which they call ajokitarpoq, and which is evidently considered an accomplishment that few of them possess in perfection, distorts every feature in the most horrible manner imaginable, and would, I think, put our most skillful horse-collar grinners quite out of countenance.
On a day when most of the men were away from the huts on a sealing trip, the women decided to have some fun, with one of them taking the lead. When asked to entertain the others, she suddenly let her hair down, braided it, tied both ends together to keep it out of the way, and then stepped into the center of the hut. She started making the most outrageous faces you can imagine, pulling her lips into her mouth, jabbing her chin forward, squinting dramatically, occasionally closing one eye, and moving her head side to side as if her neck were out of joint. This performance, which they call ajokitarpoq, is clearly seen as a skill that only a few can master perfectly. It distorts every feature in the most horrifying way imaginable and would probably make our best horse-collar grin artists look bad.
This performance is identical with one described later (p. 578) as practiced during the meals in summer.
This performance is the same as the one described later (p. 578) that is done during meals in the summer.
The next performance consists in looking steadfastly and gravely forward and repeating the words tăbā’-tăbā’; kjaibo, kjaibo; kebang inutovik, kebang inutovik; amatama, amatama, in the order in which they are here placed, but each at least four times, and always by a peculiar modulation of the voice speaking them in pairs as they are coupled above. The sound is made to proceed from the throat in a way much resembling ventriloquism, to which art it is indeed an approach. After the last amatama she always pointed with her finger toward her body, and pronounced the word angakoq, steadily retaining her gravity for five or six seconds, and then bursting into a loud laugh, in which she was joined by all the rest. The women sometimes produce a much more guttural and unnatural sound, repeating principally the word ikeri-ikeri, coupling them as before, and staring in such a manner as to make their eyes appear ready to burst out of their sockets with the exertion. Two or more of them will sometimes stand up face to face, and with great quickness and regularity respond to each other, keeping such exact time that the sound appears to come from one throat instead of several. Very few of the females are possessed of this accomplishment, which is called pitkusiraqpoq, and it is not uncommon to see several of the younger females practising it. A third part of the game, distinguished by the word kaitikpoq, consists only in falling on each knee alternately, 573 a piece of agility which they perform with tolerable quickness, considering the bulky and awkward nature of their dress. ***Then the same woman came forward, and letting her arms hang down loosely and bending her body very much forward, shook herself with extreme violence, as if her whole frame had been strongly convulsed, uttering at the same time, in a wild tone of voice, some of the unnatural sounds before mentioned.
The next performance involves looking straight ahead and seriously repeating the words tăbā’-tăbā’; kjaibo, kjaibo; kebang inutovik, kebang inutovik; amatama, amatama, in the order given here, each at least four times, and always with a unique tone of voice, saying them in pairs as listed above. The sound is produced from the throat in a way that closely resembles ventriloquism, essentially being a form of it. After the last amatama, she always pointed at her body with her finger and said the word angakoq, keeping a serious expression for five or six seconds before bursting into laughter, which was joined by everyone else. The women sometimes create a much more guttural and unnatural sound, mainly repeating the word ikeri-ikeri, pairing them as before, and staring in such a way that their eyes appear to be about to pop out from the strain. Occasionally, two or more of them will stand facing each other and respond very quickly and rhythmically, keeping such perfect time that it sounds like the noise is coming from a single throat instead of multiple ones. Very few of the women have this skill, known as pitkusiraqpoq, and it’s not unusual to see some of the younger women practicing it. A third part of the performance, called kaitikpoq, involves simply dropping onto each knee alternately, a display of agility they perform with reasonable speed, considering the bulky and awkward nature of their attire. 573 Then the same woman stepped forward, letting her arms hang loosely and bending her body forward significantly, shaking herself violently as if her entire body was in strong convulsions, simultaneously uttering some of the previously mentioned unnatural sounds in a wild tone.
This being at an end, a new exhibition was commenced in which ten or twelve women took a part, and which our gentlemen compared to blind man’s buff. A circle being formed, and a boy dispatched to look out at the door of the hut, a woman placed herself in the center, and, after making a variety of guttural noises for about half a minute, shut her eyes, and ran about till she had taken hold of one of the others, whose business it then became to take her station in the center, so that almost every woman in her turn occupied this post, and in her own peculiar way, either by distortion of countenance or other gestures, performed her part in the game. This continued three-quarters of an hour, and, from the precaution of placing a lookout who was withdrawn when it was over, as well as from some very expressive signs which need not here be mentioned, there is reason to believe that it is usually followed by certain indecencies, with which their husbands are not to be acquainted. ***
This being over, a new game started where ten or twelve women participated, which the men compared to blind man's buff. A circle was formed, and a boy was sent to check at the door of the hut. One woman stood in the center and, after making a variety of guttural sounds for about half a minute, closed her eyes and ran around until she grabbed one of the others. That woman then took her place in the center, and almost every woman had a turn in this role, each performing her part in her unique way, either by making funny faces or through other gestures. This went on for about three-quarters of an hour, and due to the precaution of having a lookout who left when it ended, as well as some very telling signs that don’t need to be mentioned here, there is reason to think that it usually leads to certain inappropriate actions that their husbands shouldn't find out about. I'm ready to assist you with modernizing phrases. Please provide the text you want me to work on.
The most common amusement however, and to which their husbands made no objection, they performed at Winter Island expressly for our gratification. The females, being collected to the number of ten or twelve, stood in as large a circle as the hut would admit, with a man in the center. He began by a sort of half howling, half singing noise, which appeared as if designed to call the attention of the women, the latter soon commencing the Amna Aya song. This they continued without variety, remaining quite still while the man walked round within the circle; his body was rather bent forward, his eyes sometimes closed, his arms constantly moving up and down, and now and then hoarsely vociferating a word or two as if to increase the animation of the singers, who, whenever he did this, quitted the chorus and rose into the words of the song. At the end of ten minutes they all left off at once, and after one minute’s interval commenced a second act precisely similar and of equal duration, the man continuing to invoke their muse as before. A third act which followed this, varied frequently towards the close only in his throwing his feet up before and clapping his hands together, by which exertion he was thrown into a violent perspiration. He then retired, desiring a young man (who as we were informed was the only individual of several then present thus qualified) to take his place in the center as master of the ceremonies, when the same antics as before were again gone through. After this description it will scarcely be necessary to remark that nothing can be poorer in its way than this tedious singing recreation, which, as well as in everything in which dancing is concerned, they express by the word mumipoq. They seem, however, to take great delight in it; and even a number of the men as well as all the children crept into the hut by degrees to peep at the performance.
The most common entertainment, which their husbands didn’t mind, was performed at Winter Island just for our enjoyment. The women gathered, about ten or twelve of them, standing in as large a circle as the hut allowed, with a man in the center. He started with a kind of half howling, half singing sound, as if trying to get the women’s attention; soon after, they began the Amna Aya song. They kept this going without changing, remaining totally still while the man walked around inside the circle; his body leaned slightly forward, his eyes sometimes closed, his arms constantly moving up and down, and occasionally he would shout a word or two to energize the singers. Whenever he did this, they would stop the chorus and sing the words of the song. After ten minutes, they all stopped at once and, after a one-minute break, started a second act that was exactly the same and lasted just as long, with the man continuing to call on their muse. The third act that followed varied only towards the end, where he would throw his feet up and clap his hands together, which made him break out into a heavy sweat. Then he stepped back, asking a young man (who we were told was the only one present who could do this) to take his place in the center as the master of ceremonies, and they went through the same routines again. After this description, it’s not really necessary to say that this boring singing entertainment is one of the least exciting forms of amusement, which, like everything related to dancing, they refer to as mumipoq. However, they do seem to enjoy it a lot, and even some of the men and all the children gradually crept into the hut to peek at the performance.
The Eskimo women and children often amuse themselves with a game not unlike our “skip-rope.” This is performed by two women holding the ends of a line and whirling it regularly round and round, while a third jumps over it in the middle according to the following order. She commences by jumping twice on both feet, then alternately with the right and left, and next four times with the feet slipped one behind the other, the rope passing once round at each jump. After this she performs a circle on the ground, jumping about half a dozen times in the course of it, which bringing her to her original position, the same thing is repeated as often as it can be done without entangling the line. One or two of the women performed this with considerable agility and adroitness, considering the clumsiness of their boots and jackets, and seemed to pride themselves in some degree on the qualification. 574 A second kind of this game consists in two women holding a long rope by its ends and whirling it round in such a manner over the heads of two others standing close together near the middle of the bight, that each of these shall jump over it alternately. The art therefore, which is indeed considerable, depends more on those whirling the rope than on the jumpers, who are, however, obliged to keep exact time in order to be ready for the rope passing under their feet.
The Eskimo women and children often entertain themselves with a game similar to our "jump rope." It involves two women holding the ends of a rope and spinning it around regularly while a third person jumps over it in the middle in a specific sequence. She starts by jumping twice on both feet, then alternates with her right and left foot, and then jumps four times with her feet crossed behind each other, letting the rope pass under her with each jump. After that, she makes a circle on the ground, jumping about half a dozen times as she goes, which brings her back to her starting position, and then she repeats the process as many times as possible without getting tangled in the rope. One or two of the women did this with notable agility and skill, considering how bulky their boots and jackets are, and they seemed to take some pride in their ability. 574 A second version of this game involves two women holding a long rope at its ends and spinning it overhead of two others who are standing close together near the middle, so each of them can jump over the rope alternately. The skill in this game relies more on the women spinning the rope than on the jumpers, who, however, need to keep perfect timing to be ready for the rope passing underneath their feet.
Of all these games I observed only the one called pitkusiraqpoq by Parry, which I saw played several times at Cumberland Sound. (See Appendix, Note 3.)
Of all these games, I only watched the one called pitkusiraqpoq by Parry, which I saw played several times at Cumberland Sound. (See Appendix, Note 3.)
While in times of plenty the home life is quite cheerful, the house presents a sad and gloomy appearance if stormy weather prevents the men from hunting. The stores are quickly consumed, one lamp after another is extinguished, and everybody sits motionless in the dark hut. Nevertheless the women and men do not stop humming their monotonous amna aya and their stoicism in enduring the pangs of hunger is really wonderful. At last, when starvation is menacing the sufferers, the most daring of the men resolves to try his luck. Though the storm may rage over the icy plain he sets out to go sealing. For hours he braves the cold and stands waiting and watching at the breathing hole until he hears the blowing of the seal and succeeds in killing it.
While times of abundance bring cheerful home life, the house looks sad and gloomy when bad weather keeps the men from hunting. The supplies quickly run out, one lamp after another goes out, and everyone sits still in the dark hut. Still, the men and women keep humming their monotonous amna aya, and their ability to endure the pain of hunger is truly impressive. Finally, when starvation threatens those suffering, the bravest of the men decides to take a chance. Even though the storm may rage over the icy plain, he ventures out to go sealing. For hours, he endures the cold, waiting and watching at the breathing hole until he hears the seal blow and manages to kill it.
When those who have remained at home hear the sound of the returning sledge, they rush out of the houses to meet it. Quickly they help the bold hunter to get on shore. The sledge is unloaded, the seal dragged into the house, and every one joyfully awaits his share. The animal is cut up, every household receiving a piece of meat and blubber. The gloomy huts are again lighted up and the pots, which had been out of use for some days, are again hung up over the lamps.
When the people at home hear the sound of the returning sled, they rush out of the houses to greet it. They quickly help the brave hunter get ashore. The sled is unloaded, the seal is pulled into the house, and everyone happily anticipates their share. The animal is butchered, and each household gets a piece of meat and blubber. The dreary huts are once again brightened up, and the pots, which hadn't been used for a few days, are hung up over the lamps again.
If the hunter, however, has tried in vain to procure food, if the storm does not subside, the terrors of famine visit the settlement. The dogs are the first to fall victims to the pressing hunger, and if the worst comes cannibalism is resorted to. But all these occurrences are spoken of with the utmost horror. In such cases children particularly are killed and eaten. Fortunately, however, such occurrences are very rare.
If the hunter has tried unsuccessfully to find food and the storm doesn't let up, the fear of starvation hits the settlement. The dogs are the first to suffer from the intense hunger, and if things get really bad, people turn to cannibalism. But all of this is talked about with sheer horror. In these situations, children especially are killed and eaten. Thankfully, though, these occurrences are very rare.
VISITING.
As soon as the ice has consolidated in winter a lively intercourse springs up between the settlements. Friends visit one another, trading excursions are undertaken, and almost every few days visitors arrive at the village. They are welcomed with great hospitality. The sledge is unloaded and the dogs are fed by the host. The visitor is led into the hut, served with the choicest pieces of meat, and the hostess puts his clothing in order. In the winter these visits are generally short, rarely lasting more than a few days.
As soon as the ice solidifies in winter, a lively exchange starts between the communities. Friends visit each other, trading trips are made, and almost every few days, newcomers arrive in the village. They are greeted with warm hospitality. The sled is unloaded, and the dogs are fed by the host. The guest is taken into the hut, offered the best cuts of meat, and the hostess helps to tidy up their clothing. During winter, these visits are usually brief, rarely lasting more than a few days.
Longer journeys are postponed until spring, when food can be procured more easily. These journeys are planned a long time before they are made. While the families generally leave what they can spare of their household goods in winter at their summer settlement, they bring away everything they possess to the winter village if they intend to visit a neighboring tribe in the spring. In April or May they leave their snow houses; the tent poles and the whole of their goods are loaded upon the sledge, only the boats being left behind in charge of some friend, and then they start upon their long, lonely journey. On the first day they do not travel far, but make the first halt after about a twelve-mile journey. As the load is heavy the men and women sit on the top of the sledges only to rest. The driver walks alongside and the women lead the way, the dogs pulling more willingly if they see somebody ahead of the sledge. At night it is not unloaded, only those things being taken out which are necessary for building a small tent and for cooking. In order to protect the sledge from the attacks of the dogs, the pitu (see p. 530) is taken out and fastened to an eye cut into the ice with the end of the spear. After having traveled about three days a longer halt is made; the sledge is unloaded, the dogs are unharnessed, and the men go out hunting in order to procure food for the dogs and for themselves. Thus they slowly proceed until they at last reach the end of their journey. Here they settle down with the friends whom they have come to visit, establish a hut of their own, and spend a whole year with them. In the following spring they retrace their journey to their own homes. Journeys of four to five hundred miles in one spring are not of rare occurrence; longer journeys, however, frequently last for years.
Longer trips are postponed until spring when it's easier to find food. These journeys are planned well in advance. While families usually leave behind what they can spare from their household items in winter at their summer settlement, they take everything they own to the winter village if they plan to visit a neighboring tribe in the spring. In April or May, they leave their snow houses; the tent poles and all their belongings are loaded onto the sled, leaving only the boats behind with a friend to watch over them, and then they begin their long, solitary journey. On the first day, they don't go too far, making their first stop after about twelve miles. Because the load is heavy, the men and women sit on top of the sleds just to rest. The driver walks alongside while the women lead the way since the dogs pull more willingly when they see someone ahead of the sled. At night, they don’t unload everything; only the items needed to set up a small tent and cook are taken out. To protect the sled from being damaged by the dogs, the pitu (see p. 530) is taken out and secured into an eye cut into the ice with the spear's end. After traveling for about three days, they take a longer break; the sled is unloaded, the dogs are unharnessed, and the men go out hunting to gather food for themselves and the dogs. They continue this way until they finally reach their destination. There, they set up with the friends they came to visit, build their own hut, and spend the entire year with them. The following spring, they retrace their journey back home. Trips of four to five hundred miles in a single spring are not uncommon; however, longer journeys often last for years.
A journey of two hundred miles, going and coming, is sometimes accomplished in one season. For such a journey they would set out in March or April, leaving all their goods behind, and live with the friends whom they visit for a month or two, returning about June. While on the visit the visitors help their friends to provide for their families.
A journey of two hundred miles, round trip, is sometimes done in one season. For this trip, they would leave in March or April, leaving all their belongings behind, and stay with the friends they visit for a month or two, coming back around June. During the visit, the guests assist their friends in providing for their families.
Fig. 529. Modern snow goggles, of wood. (National Museum, Washington. 29978.) ½
Fig. 529. Modern snow goggles made of wood. (National Museum, Washington. 29978.) ½
In traveling in the spring the Eskimo always use snow goggles to protect themselves from snow blindness. The modern ones (Fig. 529), which are made of wood and have a shade and a narrow slit for each eye, are very effective. The old design is represented in Fig. 530, the specimen being made of ivory.
In the spring, when the Eskimo travel, they always wear snow goggles to protect themselves from snow blindness. The current versions (Fig. 529), made of wood, feature a shade and a narrow slit for each eye, and they work really well. The older design is shown in Fig. 530, with this particular example made of ivory.
Fig. 530. Old form of snow goggles, of
ivory, found in Idjorituaqtuin, Cumberland Sound.
(Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A 6833.)
Fig. 530. Traditional snow goggles made of ivory, discovered in Idjorituaqtuin, Cumberland Sound.
(Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin. IV A 6833.)
Long journeys are sometimes made in summer, several families traveling together in their boats. As, however, the open season is very short in many parts of Northeastern America, spring journeys are more frequently made.
Long trips are sometimes taken in the summer, with several families traveling together in their boats. However, since the open season is very short in many parts of Northeastern America, spring trips are more commonly done.
When traveling by boat the tent poles, skin covers, and all the household goods are stowed away in the bottom. The women do the pulling, three or four working at each oar, while a man sits on the stern board steering with a paddle. They move on at their leisure, 576 stopping whenever they are tired or when a seal is seen blowing near the boat. The kayaks are tied to the stern and towed along. Children and dogs lie about in the bottom of the boat. In the center there is a tub containing all kinds of provisions, and every now and then they take some refreshment from it. During the nights the tents are erected at suitable points. The natives are well acquainted with these, and, if they are not compelled by severe weather to seek shelter at the nearest point, always visit the same places. These have a smooth, sloping beach, fresh water, and dry, gravelly places in which the tents are built.
When traveling by boat, the tent poles, skin covers, and all the household items are packed away in the bottom. The women do the rowing, with three or four of them working at each oar, while a man sits at the back steering with a paddle. They move at their own pace, 576 stopping whenever they feel tired or when they spot a seal breathing near the boat. The kayaks are tied to the back and towed along. Children and dogs lounge at the bottom of the boat. In the middle, there's a tub filled with various supplies, and every now and then, they grab some snacks from it. At night, the tents are set up at suitable locations. The locals know these spots well, and if they're not forced by bad weather to find shelter nearby, they always return to the same places. These locations have a smooth, sloping beach, fresh water, and dry, gravelly areas where the tents are pitched.
SOCIAL CUSTOMS IN SUMMER.
When the rays of the sun begin to be warmer and the roofs of the snow houses tumble down the natives live in a very uncomfortable way until a sufficient number of sealskins are procured to build a tent. Sometimes a family live under a roof too small to cover them 577 all, though they sit as close as possible, and too low to permit them to sit upright; but, as seals are basking everywhere on the ice, this state of affairs does not last long. The women split a number of large skins and dry them on the snow, and by the middle of May they can build a pretty large tent; but it is not until they settle permanently at the place of the summer village that the large tent is sewed and put up.
When the sun starts to get warmer and the roofs of the snow houses collapse, the natives live in an uncomfortable way until they gather enough sealskins to build a tent. Sometimes, a family has to fit under a roof that's too small for all of them, even though they sit as close as possible and too low to sit up straight; however, since seals are basking on the ice all around, this situation doesn't last long. The women split a number of large skins and dry them on the snow, and by mid-May, they can construct a fairly large tent; but it’s not until they settle in the summer village that the large tent is sewn together and set up. 577
At this season salmon and venison form the staple food of the Eskimo. The old men, women, and children, who stay at the lakes or at the salmon rivers, depend almost entirely upon this food. They fish and eat the salmon in a raw as well as in a cooked state. Birds are caught and eaten raw. The surplus salmon are split and dried on poles erected for the purpose. Deer shoulders, legs, and backs are also cut into thin pieces and dried. Sometimes the dried fish and venison are deposited in stone caches for later use, but most of it is eaten in summer, especially when the Eskimo go traveling. When the men go deer hunting they take a supply of dried salmon with them, and thus can stay out for a week or even longer. When a deer is killed it is skinned at once, the legs being slit and the belly opened. The paunch is carefully tied up, as the contents are a favorite dish of the Eskimo. The head, the legs, and the ribs are cut off and after being piled up the whole is covered with heavy stones, only the horns protruding from the top of the depot. The hams and the skin are generally carried to the hut at once, and, if the distance is not too great or the carcass can be reached with sledges or boats, the whole animal is brought home. Large depots are only made in the fall, when there is no danger of the meat spoiling.
At this time of year, salmon and venison are the main foods for the Eskimo. The older men, women, and children who stay by the lakes or the salmon rivers rely almost completely on this food. They fish for salmon and eat it both raw and cooked. Birds are caught and eaten raw as well. The excess salmon is split and dried on poles set up for that purpose. Deer shoulders, legs, and backs are also sliced into thin pieces and dried. Sometimes, the dried fish and venison are stored in stone caches for later use, but most of it is consumed in the summer, especially when the Eskimo are traveling. When the men go deer hunting, they bring along dried salmon, allowing them to stay out for a week or even longer. When a deer is killed, it’s skinned right away, with the legs cut and the belly opened. The stomach is carefully tied up because the contents are a favorite dish among the Eskimo. The head, legs, and ribs are cut off and piled together, then covered with heavy stones, with only the horns sticking out from the top of the stash. The hams and skin are usually taken back to the hut immediately, and if it’s not too far or the carcass can be reached with sledges or boats, the entire animal is brought home. Large caches are typically made in the fall when there’s no risk of the meat spoiling.
At this season the natives visit deer passes and lakes, near which they establish their huts. The tents and all the household goods are packed up in heavy bundles, some of which are carried by the dogs, the load hanging on both sides of the back; others, by men and women, being secured by one strap which passes over the forehead and by another which passes over the breast. Their strength and their perseverance in carrying heavy loads over long distances are remarkable.
At this time of year, the locals go to the deer crossings and lakes, where they set up their huts. They pack all their tents and household items into heavy bundles; some of these are carried by dogs with the load hanging on both sides of their backs, while others are carried by men and women, secured with one strap over their forehead and another over their chest. Their strength and determination to carry heavy loads over long distances are impressive.
The social life in the summer settlements is rather different from that in winter. At this season the families do not cook their own meals, but a single one provides for the whole settlement. The day before it is her turn to cook, the woman goes to the hills to fetch shrubs for the fire. Three stones are put up near the hut as a fireplace, the opening facing the wind. The kettle is placed on the top of it and the fire is fed with shrubs and blubber. When the meal is ready the master of the house stands beside it, crying Ujo! Ujo! (boiled meat) and everybody comes out of the hut provided with a knife. The dish is carried to a level place and the men sit down around it in one circle, while the women form another. Then large 578 lumps of meat are passed around, everybody cutting off a piece and taking a swallow of the soup, which is passed around in a large leather cup. These dinners, which are held in the evening after the return from the hunt, are almost always enlivened by a mimic performance. A man or an old woman sits down in the center of the circle and amuses the assembly by singing and dancing or by making faces. A favorite performance is one in which a man, with blackened face and with a thong tied around his head, writhes and makes odd grimaces.
The social life in the summer settlements is quite different from winter. During this season, families don’t cook their own meals; instead, one person prepares food for the entire settlement. The day before it’s her turn to cook, the woman goes to the hills to gather shrubs for the fire. Three stones are set up near the hut to create a fireplace, with the opening facing the wind. The kettle is placed on top, and the fire is fueled with shrubs and blubber. When the meal is ready, the head of the household stands beside it, calling out "Ujo! Ujo!" (boiled meat), and everyone comes out of the hut with a knife. The dish is taken to a flat area, and the men sit together in one circle while the women form another. Then large lumps of meat are passed around, and everyone cuts off a piece and takes a sip of the soup, which is shared in a large leather cup. These dinners, held in the evening after returning from the hunt, are almost always lively with entertainment. A man or an older woman sits in the center of the circle to entertain everyone with singing, dancing, or funny faces. A popular act is when a man with a blackened face and a thong tied around his head writhes and makes silly grimaces.
After dinner the men sit chatting or gambling before the huts, while the women and children amuse themselves by running about, playing at ball, or dancing.
After dinner, the men sit outside the huts chatting or playing games of chance, while the women and children entertain themselves by running around, playing ball, or dancing.
A strict religious custom forbids the Eskimo to work on the deerskins which are obtained in summer before the ice has formed; they are only dried and tied up in large bundles. In the fall, when on their way to the winter settlements, the Eskimo travel rather quickly. The boats are piled up with the spoils of the summer hunt and the place of destination is generally reached before the stormy weather sets in.
A strict religious custom prevents the Eskimo from working on the deerskins obtained during the summer before the ice forms; they are simply dried and bundled up. In the fall, as they head to their winter settlements, the Eskimo travel fairly quickly. The boats are loaded with the spoils of the summer hunt, and they usually reach their destination before the stormy weather arrives.
When it gets colder short excursions are made by boat in order to collect shrubs for covering the tents. Several families join in building a common hut, and on a fine day the old tents are torn down and the tent poles are converted into a strong frame, which is covered with a double roof. The bed and the platforms for the lamps are raised and henceforth all the cooking is done inside.
When it gets colder, brief boat trips are taken to gather shrubs for covering the tents. Several families come together to construct a shared hut, and on a nice day, the old tents are taken down and the tent poles are turned into a sturdy frame, which is topped with a double roof. The bed and the platforms for the lamps are elevated, and from then on, all the cooking is done inside.
As soon as the first seals are caught with the harpoon the deer skins are prepared. If they were deposited under stones in summer, sledges set out to bring them to the settlements, and then they are distributed for winter clothing. According to Hall the western tribes are in the habit of spreading all the skins on one place and distributing them among the inhabitants of the settlement. I did not observe the same custom among the eastern tribes. Then they devote themselves to dressing the skins. On Davis Strait this work falls to the share of the women, while among the Hudson Bay tribes it is done by the men. At this season the great religious feasts of the natives are celebrated, which announce, as it were, the commencement of winter.
As soon as the first seals are caught with the harpoon, the deer skins are prepared. If they were stored under rocks in the summer, sleds are sent out to bring them back to the settlements, and then they are handed out for winter clothing. According to Hall, the western tribes usually spread all the skins in one place and distribute them among the people in the settlement. I didn’t notice the same practice among the eastern tribes. After that, they focus on preparing the skins. In Davis Strait, this task is taken care of by the women, while among the Hudson Bay tribes, it’s done by the men. During this time, the natives celebrate their major religious feasts, which essentially signal the start of winter.
SOCIAL ORDER AND LAWS.
The social order of the Eskimo is entirely founded on the family and on the ties of consanguinity and affinity between the individual families. Generally children are betrothed when very young, but these engagements, not being strictly binding, may be broken off at any time. When the children reach maturity the girl learns the duties of a woman and the boy those of a man. As soon as he is 579 able to provide for a family and she can do the work falling to her share, they are allowed to marry. It happens frequently that the young man’s parents are unwilling to allow him to provide for his parents-in-law, and then he may be rejected at any moment. Usually the young couple must begin housekeeping with the young wife’s family and the young man, if belonging to a strange tribe, must join that of his wife. It is not until after his parents-in-law are dead that he is entirely master of his own actions. Though the betrothal be entered into in the days of childhood the bride must be bought from the parents by some present. In other instances the men choose their wives when grown up and sometimes a long wooing precedes the marriage. The consent of the bride’s parents, or, if they are dead, that of her brothers, is always necessary. Marriages between relatives are forbidden: cousins, nephew and niece, aunt and uncle, are not allowed to intermarry. There is, however, no law to prevent a man from marrying two sisters. It is remarkable that Lyon states just the reverse (p. 353). I am sure, however, that my statements are correct in reference to the Davis Strait tribes.
The social structure of the Eskimo is completely based on family and the connections of blood relationships and alliances between individual families. Typically, children are promised to each other when they are very young, but these engagements aren’t strict and can be ended at any time. Once the children grow up, the girl learns the responsibilities of a woman and the boy learns those of a man. As soon as he can support a family and she can handle her share of the work, they are allowed to get married. It often happens that the young man’s parents don't want him to support his in-laws, and as a result, he may be turned down at any time. Usually, the couple starts their household with the young wife’s family, and if the young man comes from a different tribe, he must join his wife's tribe. He won’t have full control over his own life until after his in-laws pass away. Although the betrothal happens during childhood, the bride must be purchased from her parents through some gifts. In other cases, men choose their wives when they are older, and a lengthy courtship sometimes occurs before marriage. The approval of the bride’s parents is always required, or if they have passed away, that of her brothers. Marriages between relatives are not allowed: cousins, uncles, and aunts cannot marry each other. However, there is no law stopping a man from marrying two sisters. Interestingly, Lyon claims the opposite (p. 353). I am confident, however, that my statements accurately reflect the practices of the Davis Strait tribes.
Should the newly married couple join the wife’s family this would serve as a check to polygamy, which, however, is quite allowable. It is only when the new family settles on its own account that a man is at full liberty to take additional wives, among whom one is always considered the chief wife. Monogamy is everywhere more frequent than polygamy, only a very few men having two or more wives. According to Ross polyandry occurs with the Netchillirmiut (II, pp. 356, 373). As long as the mother-in-law lives with the young family the wives are subordinate to her, while the mothers of both parties are independent of each other. No example came to my notice of both parents living with the newly married couple. Sometimes the man and wife do not set up a new household at once, but each remains at home. The property necessary for establishing a new family is the hunting gear of the man and the knife, scraper, lamp, and cooking pot of the women.
If the newly married couple moves in with the wife's family, it would help prevent polygamy, which is allowed. A man is free to take more wives only when the new family sets up on their own, and among those wives, one is usually considered the primary wife. Monogamy is much more common than polygamy, with very few men having two or more wives. According to Ross, polyandry occurs with the Netchillirmiut (II, pp. 356, 373). As long as the mother-in-law lives with the young couple, the wives are under her authority, while the mothers of both sides are independent of each other. I didn't come across any examples of both parents living with the newlyweds. Sometimes the husband and wife don’t start a new household right away, but instead stay at home. The essentials for starting a new family include the man's hunting gear and the woman's knife, scraper, lamp, and cooking pot.
A strange custom permits a man to lend his wife to a friend for a whole season or even longer and to exchange wives as a sign of friendship. On certain occasions it is even commanded by a religious law (see p. 605). Nevertheless I know of some instances of quarrels arising from jealousy. Lyon states, however, that this passion is unknown among the Iglulirmiut (p. 355). The husband is not allowed to maltreat or punish his wife; if he does she may leave him at any time, and the wife’s mother can always command a divorce. Both are allowed to remarry as soon as they like, even the slightest pretext being sufficient for a separation.
A strange custom allows a man to loan his wife to a friend for an entire season or even longer, and to swap wives as a gesture of friendship. On certain occasions, it's even mandated by religious law (see p. 605). However, I know of some cases where jealousy has caused arguments. Lyon claims that this emotion is not found among the Iglulirmiut (p. 355). The husband can't mistreat or punish his wife; if he does, she can leave him at any time, and the wife’s mother can always demand a divorce. Both are free to remarry whenever they choose, with even the smallest reason being enough for a separation.
I may be allowed to refer once more to the division of labor between the man and woman. The principal part of the man’s work is to provide for his family by hunting, i.e., for his wife and children and 580 for his relatives who have no provider. He must drive the sledge in traveling, feed the dogs, build the house, and make and keep in order his hunting implements, the boat cover and seal floats excepted. The woman has to do the household work, the sewing, and the cooking. She must look after the lamps, make and mend the tent and boat covers, prepare the skins, and bring up young dogs. It falls to her share to make the inner outfit of the hut, to smooth the platforms, line the snow house, &c. On Davis Strait the men cut up all kinds of animals which they have caught; on Hudson Bay, however, the women cut up the seals. There the men prepare the deerskins, which is done by the women among the eastern tribes. Everywhere the women have to do the rowing in the large boats while the man steers. Cripples who are unable to hunt do the same kind of work as women.
I can reference again the division of labor between men and women. The main role of the man is to provide for his family by hunting, which includes his wife and children, as well as for his relatives who don’t have anyone to support them. He needs to drive the sled when traveling, take care of the dogs, build the house, and maintain his hunting tools, except for the boat cover and seal floats. The woman is responsible for household tasks, sewing, and cooking. She has to take care of the lamps, make and repair the tent and boat covers, prepare the animal skins, and train young dogs. It's her job to create the interior setup of the hut, smooth the platforms, line the snow house, etc. In Davis Strait, men cut up all kinds of animals they catch; however, in Hudson Bay, the women handle the seal preparation. There, the men get the deerskins ready, which is a task done by women in the eastern tribes. In every place, women are expected to row the large boats while men steer. Disabled individuals who can’t hunt do similar tasks as women.
Children are treated very kindly and are not scolded, whipped, or subjected to any corporal punishment. Among all the tribes infanticide has been practiced to some extent, but probably only females or children of widows or widowers have been murdered in this way, the latter on account of the difficulty of providing for them. It is very remarkable that this practice seems to be quite allowable among them, while in Greenland it is believed that the spirit of the murdered child is turned into an evil spirit, called angiaq, and revenges the crime (Rink, p. 45).
Children are treated very kindly and are not scolded, beaten, or subjected to any physical punishment. Among all the tribes, infanticide has been practiced to some extent, but likely only female infants or children of widows or widowers have been killed in this way, often due to the difficulty of providing for them. It is quite remarkable that this practice seems to be generally accepted among them, while in Greenland, it’s believed that the spirit of the murdered child becomes an evil spirit, called angiaq, and seeks revenge for the crime (Rink, p. 45).
Besides the children properly belonging to the family, adopted children, widows, and old people are considered part of it. Adoption is carried on among this people to a great extent.
Besides the children who are biologically part of the family, adopted children, widows, and elderly people are considered part of it as well. Adoption is quite common among these people.
If for any reason a man is unable to provide for his family or if a woman cannot do her household work, the children are adopted by a relative or a friend, who considers them as his own children. In the same way widows with their children are adopted by their nearest relative or by a friend and belong to the family, though the woman retains her own fireplace.
If a man can't take care of his family or a woman can't handle her household tasks, their children are taken in by a relative or a friend, who treats them as if they are their own kids. Similarly, widows and their children are taken in by their closest relative or a friend and become part of the family, although the woman keeps her own space in the home.
It is difficult to decide which relative is considered the nearest, but the ties of consanguinity appear to be much closer than those of affinity. If a woman dies the husband leaves his children with his parents-in-law and returns to his own family, and if a man dies his wife returns to her parents or her brothers, who are the nearest relatives next to parents or children. When a woman dies, however, after the children are grown up the widower will stay with them. In case of a divorce the children generally remain with the mother.
It’s tough to determine who counts as the closest relative, but blood relations seem to be much stronger than marital connections. When a woman passes away, her husband usually leaves their kids with his in-laws and goes back to his own family. Conversely, if a man dies, his wife typically goes back to her parents or brothers, who are the nearest relatives after parents or kids. However, when a woman dies and the children are adults, the widower usually stays with them. In the case of a divorce, the kids generally stay with their mother.
As a great part of the personal property of a man is destroyed at his death or placed by his grave, the objects which may be acquired by inheritance are few. These are the gun, harpoon, sledge, dogs, kayak, boat, and tent poles of the man and the lamp and pots of the woman. The first inheritor of these articles is the eldest son living 581 with the parents. Sons and daughters having households of their own do not participate in the inheritance. An elder adopted son has a preference over a younger son born of the marriage. Details of the laws which relate to inheritance are unknown to me.
As a lot of a man’s personal belongings are destroyed when he dies or placed by his grave, there are only a few things that can be inherited. These include the man’s gun, harpoon, sledge, dogs, kayak, boat, and tent poles, along with the woman’s lamp and pots. The first person to inherit these items is the eldest son living 581 with the parents. Sons and daughters who have their own households don’t share in the inheritance. An older adopted son has priority over a younger biological son from the marriage. I’m not familiar with the specifics of the inheritance laws.
Sometimes men are adopted who may almost be considered servants. Particularly bachelors without any relations, cripples who are not able to provide for themselves, or men who have lost their sledges and dogs are found in this position. They fulfill minor occupations, mend the hunting implements, fit out the sledges, feed the dogs, &c.; sometimes, however, they join the hunters. They follow the master of the house when he removes from one place to another, make journeys in order to do his commissions, and so on. The position, however, is a voluntary one, and therefore these men are not less esteemed than the self dependent providers.
Sometimes, men are adopted who can almost be seen as servants. This is especially true for bachelors with no family, disabled individuals who can’t take care of themselves, or men who have lost their sleds and dogs. They take on minor tasks, repair hunting gear, help prepare sleds, feed the dogs, and so on; however, they sometimes join the hunters. They accompany the head of the household when he moves from one place to another, travel to run errands for him, and so forth. Nonetheless, this role is a voluntary one, and these men are still respected just as much as those who are independent providers.
Strangers visiting their friends for a season are generally in a similar position, though they receive a wife if the host happens to have more than one; if the friend has hunting gear, a sledge, and dogs of his own, he can arrange a separate fireplace in the hut.
Strangers visiting their friends for a while are usually in the same situation, though they get a wife if the host has more than one. If the friend has hunting gear, a sled, and his own dogs, he can set up a separate fireplace in the cabin.
In summer most families have each their own tent, but in the fall from two to four join in building a house. Frequently the parents live on one side, the family of the son-in-law on the other, and a friend or relative in a small recess. Sometimes two houses have a common entrance or the passages communicate with one another. The inhabitants of both parts usually live quite independently of one another, while the oldest man of every house has some influence over his housemates.
In the summer, most families have their own tents, but in the fall, two to four of them come together to build a house. Often, the parents live on one side, the son-in-law's family on the other, and a friend or relative in a small nook. Sometimes, two houses share an entrance or have connected passages. The people in both parts usually live quite independently from each other, while the oldest man in each house has some influence over his companions.
If the distance between the winter and the summer settlement is very great or when any particular knowledge is required to find out the haunts of game, there is a kind of chief in the settlement, whose acknowledged authority is, however, very limited. He is called the pimain (i.e., he who knows everything best) or the issumautang. His authority is virtually limited to the right of deciding on the proper time to shift the huts from one place to the other, but the families are not obliged to follow him. At some places it seems to be considered proper to ask the pimain before moving to another settlement and leaving the rest of the tribe. He may ask some men to go deer hunting, others to go sealing, but there is not the slightest obligation to obey his orders.
If the distance between the winter and summer settlements is really far or if you need specific knowledge to find where the game is, there’s a kind of leader in the settlement whose authority is pretty limited. He’s called the pimain (meaning he who knows everything best) or the issumautang. His authority mostly involves deciding the right time to move the huts from one spot to another, but families aren’t required to follow him. In some places, it seems appropriate to ask the pimain before relocating to another settlement and leaving the rest of the tribe. He might request some men to go deer hunting and others to go seal hunting, but there’s no obligation to follow his orders.
Every family is allowed to settle wherever it likes, visiting a strange tribe being the only exception. In such a case the newcomer has to undergo a ceremony which consists chiefly in a duel between a native of the place and himself. If he is defeated he runs the risk of being killed, by those among whom he has come (see pp. 465, 609).
There are numerous regulations governing hunting, determining to whom the game belongs, the obligations of the successful hunter towards the inhabitants of the village, &c.
There are many rules about hunting that specify who owns the game, what responsibilities the successful hunter has towards the villagers, etc.
When a seal is brought to the huts everybody is entitled to a share of the meat and blubber, which is distributed by the hunter himself or carried to the individual huts by his wife. This custom is only practiced when food is scarce. In time of plenty only the housemates receive a share of the animal.
When a seal is brought to the huts, everyone gets a share of the meat and blubber, which is distributed by the hunter or taken to the individual huts by his wife. This practice only happens when food is scarce. In times of plenty, only those living in the same house get a share of the animal.
A ground seal belongs to all the men who take part in the hunt, the skin especially being divided among them. A walrus is cut up at once into as many parts as there are hunters, the one who first struck it having the choice of the parts and receiving the head. A whale belongs to the whole settlement and its capture is celebrated by a feast (p. 603).
A ground seal is shared by all the hunters involved in the hunt, with the skin particularly divided among them. A walrus is immediately cut into as many pieces as there are hunters, with the first person to strike it getting to choose their share and receiving the head. A whale is considered the property of the entire settlement, and catching one is celebrated with a feast (p. 603).
A bear or a young seal belongs to the man who first saw it, no matter who kills it.
A bear or a young seal belongs to the person who first saw it, regardless of who actually kills it.
Lost objects must be restored to the owner if he is known, game, however, excepted; for example, if a harpoon line breaks and the animal escapes, but is found later by another man, the game belongs to the latter. In Hudson Bay he is also allowed to keep the harpoon and line.
Lost objects must be returned to the owner if he is known, except for game; for example, if a harpoon line breaks and the animal escapes, but is later found by someone else, the game belongs to that person. In Hudson Bay, he can also keep the harpoon and line.
There is no way of enforcing these unwritten laws and no punishment for transgressors except the blood vengeance. It is not a rare occurrence that a man who is offended by another man takes revenge by killing the offender. It is then the right and the duty of the nearest relative of the victim to kill the murderer. In certain quarrels between the Netchillirmiut and the Aivillirmiut, in which the murderer himself could not be apprehended, the family of the murdered man has killed one of the murderer’s relations in his stead. Such a feud sometimes lasts for a long time and is even handed down to a succeeding generation. It is sometimes settled by mutual agreement. As a sign of reconciliation both parties touch each other’s breasts, saying, Ilaga (my friend) (Klutschak, p. 70).
There’s no way to enforce these unwritten rules or punish those who break them, except through blood vengeance. It’s not uncommon for a man who feels wronged by another to seek revenge by killing him. At that point, it becomes the right and responsibility of the victim's closest relative to kill the murderer. In certain disputes between the Netchillirmiut and the Aivillirmiut, when the actual killer can’t be found, the family of the murdered person has killed a relative of the murderer instead. These feuds can drag on for a long time and can even be passed down to the next generation. Sometimes, they’re resolved through mutual agreement. As a sign of reconciliation, both sides touch each other’s chests, saying, Ilaga (my friend) (Klutschak, p. 70).
If a man has committed a murder or made himself odious by other outrages he may be killed by any one simply as a matter of justice. The man who intends to take revenge on him must ask his countrymen singly if each agrees in the opinion that the offender is a bad man deserving death. If all answer in the affirmative he may kill the man thus condemned and no one is allowed to revenge the murder. (See Appendix, Note 4.)
If a man has committed murder or become despised due to other terrible acts, he can be killed by anyone as a form of justice. The person seeking revenge must individually ask each of his countrymen if they believe the offender is a bad person who deserves to die. If everyone agrees, he may kill the condemned man, and no one is permitted to take revenge for that murder. (See Appendix, Note 4.)
Their method of carrying on such a feud is quite foreign to our feelings. Strange as it may seem, a murderer will come to visit the relatives of his victim (though he knows that they are allowed to kill him in revenge) and will settle with them. He is kindly welcomed and sometimes lives quietly for weeks and months. Then he is suddenly challenged to a wrestling match (see p. 609), and if defeated is killed, or if victorious he may kill one of the opposite party, or when hunting he is suddenly attacked by his companions and slain.
Their way of handling such a feud is completely different from how we feel. Odd as it sounds, a murderer will visit the family of his victim (even though he knows they can legally kill him in revenge) and negotiate with them. He is warmly welcomed and sometimes lives peacefully for weeks or months. Then he is unexpectedly challenged to a wrestling match (see p. 609), and if he loses, he is killed; if he wins, he might kill one of the other side, or while hunting, he can suddenly be ambushed by his friends and killed.
RELIGIOUS IDEAS AND THE ANGAKUNIRN (PRIESTHOOD).
Although the principal religious ideas of the Central Eskimo and those of the Greenlanders are identical, their mythologies differ in many material points. I will only mention here that they believe in the Tornait of the old Greenlanders, while the Tornarsuk (i.e., the great Tornaq of the latter) is unknown to them. Their Supreme Being is a woman whose name is Sedna.
Although the main religious beliefs of the Central Eskimo and those of the Greenlanders are the same, their mythologies differ in many important ways. I’ll just mention that they believe in the Tornait of the old Greenlanders, while the Tornarsuk (which is the great Tornaq of the latter) is not known to them. Their Supreme Being is a woman named Sedna.
The first report on this tradition is found in Warmow’s journal of his visit to Cumberland Sound (Missionsblatt aus der Brüdergemeinde, 1859, No. I, p. 19). The editor says:
The first report on this tradition is found in Warmow’s journal of his visit to Cumberland Sound (Missionsblatt aus der Brüdergemeinde, 1859, No. I, p. 19). The editor says:
The name of the good spirit is Sanaq or Sana, and he seems to be worshiped as the unknown deity. Nobody could give a definite answer to Brother Warmow’s frequent questions as to what they believed he was. They only said they invoked his help if they were in need. “Then we ask him,” one of the men said, “and Takaq (the moon) gives us what we want, seals and deer.” Another one said that Sanaq had lived on the earth and afterwards ascended to the moon.
The good spirit is called Sanaq or Sana, and it appears he is honored as the unknown deity. No one could give Brother Warmow a clear answer regarding what they believed him to be. They merely said they called on him for help when they needed it. “So then we ask him,” one man said, “and Takaq (the moon) gives us what we want, seals and deer.” Another mentioned that Sanaq had lived on earth before ascending to the moon.
In Hall’s account of his explorations in Frobisher Bay it is mentioned that the tribes of that country, the Nugumiut, believe in a Supreme Being, and the following statement is given (Hall I, p. 524):
In Hall’s account of his explorations in Frobisher Bay, it's noted that the tribes of that region, the Nugumiut, believe in a Supreme Being, and the following statement is provided (Hall I, p. 524):
There is one Supreme Being, called by them Anguta, who created the earth, sea, and heavenly bodies. There is also a secondary divinity, a woman, the daughter of Anguta, who is called Sidne. She is supposed to have created all things having life, animal and vegetable. She is regarded also as the protecting divinity of the Inuit people. To her their supplications are addressed; to her their offerings are made; while most of their religious rites and superstitious observances have reference to her.
There is one Supreme Being, known as Anguta, who created the earth, sea, and celestial bodies. There is also a secondary deity, a woman who is Anguta's daughter, named Sidne. She is believed to have created all living things, both animal and plant. She is also seen as the protective deity of the Inuit people. They address their prayers to her; they make offerings to her; and most of their religious rituals and superstitious practices are focused on her.
It is of great importance that in the journals of Hall’s second journey Sedna is mentioned a few times (spelled Sydney), this being the only proof that she is known among the tribes of Hudson Bay.
It’s really important that in the journals from Hall’s second journey, Sedna is mentioned a few times (spelled Sydney). This is the only evidence that she is recognized among the tribes of Hudson Bay.
The statements of the whalers visiting the Sikosuilarmiut and the Akuliarmiut of Hudson Strait correspond with my own observations. Before entering into a comparison of this tradition with similar ones belonging to other tribes, I will give the particulars of the myth as I received it from the Oqomiut and the Akudnirmiut.
The accounts from the whalers who visited the Sikosuilarmiut and the Akuliarmiut of Hudson Strait match what I've seen myself. Before comparing this tradition to similar ones from other tribes, I’ll share the details of the myth as I heard it from the Oqomiut and the Akudnirmiut.
SEDNA AND THE FULMAR.
Once upon a time there lived on a solitary shore an Inung with his daughter Sedna. His wife had been dead for some time and the two led a quiet life. Sedna grew up to be a handsome girl and the youths came from all around to sue for her hand, but none of them could touch her proud heart. Finally, at the breaking up of the ice in the spring a fulmar flew from over the ice and wooed Sedna with enticing song. “Come to me,” it said; “come into the land of the 584 birds, where there is never hunger, where my tent is made of the most beautiful skins. You shall rest on soft bearskins. My fellows, the fulmars, shall bring you all your heart may desire; their feathers shall clothe you; your lamp shall always be filled with oil, your pot with meat.” Sedna could not long resist such wooing and they went together over the vast sea. When at last they reached the country of the fulmar, after a long and hard journey, Sedna discovered that her spouse had shamefully deceived her. Her new home was not built of beautiful pelts, but was covered with wretched fishskins, full of holes, that gave free entrance to wind and snow. Instead of soft reindeer skins her bed was made of hard walrus hides and she had to live on miserable fish, which the birds brought her. Too soon she discovered that she had thrown away her opportunities when in her foolish pride she had rejected the Inuit youth. In her woe she sang: “Aja. O father, if you knew how wretched I am you would come to me and we would hurry away in your boat over the waters. The birds look unkindly upon me the stranger; cold winds roar about my bed; they give me but miserable food. O come and take me back home. Aja.”
Once upon a time, there lived on a lonely shore an Inung and his daughter Sedna. His wife had been gone for a while, and they led a quiet life. Sedna grew up to be a beautiful girl, and young men came from far and wide to ask for her hand, but none could win her proud heart. Finally, as the ice broke up in spring, a fulmar flew over the ice and serenaded Sedna with a tempting song. “Come to me,” it said; “come into the land of the 584 birds, where you’ll never go hungry, where my tent is made of the finest skins. You'll rest on soft bearskins. My fellow fulmars will bring you everything your heart desires; their feathers will clothe you; your lamp will always be filled with oil, and your pot with meat.” Sedna couldn't resist such charm for long, and they traveled together over the vast sea. When they finally arrived in the land of the fulmar after a long and difficult journey, Sedna realized that her partner had tricked her. Her new home wasn’t made of beautiful pelts but was covered in miserable fish skins full of holes, allowing the wind and snow to blow in. Instead of soft reindeer skins, her bed was made of hard walrus hides, and she had to survive on terrible fish that the birds brought her. Too soon, she realized she had lost her chances when, in her foolish pride, she had turned down the Inuit youth. In her sorrow, she sang: “Aja. Oh father, if you knew how miserable I am, you would come to me and take me away in your boat across the waters. The birds look at me with disdain; cold winds roar around my bed; they give me only pathetic food. Oh, come and take me back home. Aja.”
When a year had passed and the sea was again stirred by warmer winds, the father left his country to visit Sedna. His daughter greeted him joyfully and besought him to take her back home. The father hearing of the outrages wrought upon his daughter determined upon revenge. He killed the fulmar, took Sedna into his boat, and they quickly left the country which had brought so much sorrow to Sedna. When the other fulmars came home and found their companion dead and his wife gone, they all flew away in search of the fugitives. They were very sad over the death of their poor murdered comrade and continue to mourn and cry until this day.
When a year had gone by and the sea was once again stirred by warmer winds, the father left his homeland to visit Sedna. His daughter welcomed him happily and begged him to take her back home. Upon hearing about the terrible things that had happened to his daughter, the father decided to take revenge. He killed the fulmar, took Sedna into his boat, and they quickly left the land that had caused Sedna so much grief. When the other fulmars returned home and found their companion dead and his wife missing, they all flew away in search of the runaways. They were deeply saddened by the loss of their poor murdered friend and continue to weep and lament to this day.
Having flown a short distance they discerned the boat and stirred up a heavy storm. The sea rose in immense waves that threatened the pair with destruction. In this mortal peril the father determined to offer Sedna to the birds and flung her overboard. She clung to the edge of the boat with a death grip. The cruel father then took a knife and cut off the first joints of her fingers. Falling into the sea they were transformed into whales, the nails turning into whalebone. Sedna holding on to the boat more tightly, the second finger joints fell under the sharp knife and swam away as seals (Pagomys fœtidus); when the father cut off the stumps of the fingers they became ground seals (Phoca barbata). Meantime the storm subsided, for the fulmars thought Sedna was drowned. The father then allowed her to come into the boat again. But from that time she cherished a deadly hatred against him and swore bitter revenge. After they got ashore, she called her dogs and let them gnaw off the feet and hands of her father while he was asleep. Upon this he cursed himself, his daughter, and the dogs which had maimed him; 585 whereupon the earth opened and swallowed the hut, the father, the daughter, and the dogs. They have since lived in the land of Adlivun, of which Sedna is the mistress.
Having flown a short distance, they spotted the boat and stirred up a violent storm. The sea surged with enormous waves that threatened to destroy them. In this life-and-death situation, the father decided to sacrifice Sedna to the birds and tossed her overboard. She grasped the edge of the boat with a death grip. The heartless father then took a knife and cut off the first joints of her fingers. As they fell into the sea, they transformed into whales, with her nails changing into whalebone. Sedna, holding on to the boat even tighter, had the second finger joints severed by the sharp knife and swam away as seals (Pagomys fœtidus); when the father cut off the stumps of her fingers, they became ground seals (Phoca barbata). Meanwhile, the storm calmed down, as the fulmars believed Sedna had drowned. The father then allowed her back into the boat. But from that moment on, she held a deep hatred for him and swore to take revenge. Once they reached shore, she called her dogs and had them chew off her father's feet and hands while he slept. After that, he cursed himself, his daughter, and the dogs that had injured him; 585 and suddenly the earth opened up and swallowed the hut, the father, the daughter, and the dogs. They have since lived in the land of Adlivun, where Sedna is the mistress.
This tradition is handed down in an old song. I shall give the substance of it here, as it differs in some points from the above myth.
This tradition is passed down in an old song. I'll summarize it here, as it varies in some aspects from the myth mentioned above.
The story begins when the fulmar carries Sedna to his home and she discovers that he has brought her to a very wretched tent. The next year the father and a brother, whom I find mentioned nowhere else, came to visit her and take her home. The fulmar follows their boat and causes a heavy gale to rise which almost upsets it. The father cuts off her fingers, which are transformed into whales, seals, and ground seals. Besides, he pierces her eye and thus kills her. Then he takes the body into the boat and carries it to the shore. There he lays it on the beach and covers it with a dogskin. When the flood comes in it covers Sedna.
The story begins when the fulmar takes Sedna to his home, and she finds out that he has brought her to a really miserable tent. The following year, her father and a brother, who I can't find mentioned anywhere else, come to visit her and take her back home. The fulmar follows their boat and creates a strong storm that nearly capsizes it. The father cuts off her fingers, which turn into whales, seals, and ground seals. He also pokes her eye, effectively killing her. Then, he takes her body into the boat and brings it to the shore. There, he lays it down on the beach and covers it with a dogskin. When the tide comes in, it covers Sedna.
Sedna and her father are described by the angakut (see p. 591), who sometimes visit her house or see them when both dwell among the natives, as follows: She is very large and much taller than the Inuit. In accordance with the second form of the tradition she has only one eye and is scarcely able to move. Her father is also a cripple and appears to the dying, whom he grasps with his right hand, which has only three fingers.
Sedna and her father are described by the angakut (see p. 591), who sometimes visit her house or see them when they both live among the natives, as follows: She is very large and much taller than the Inuit. According to the second version of the tradition, she has only one eye and can barely move. Her father is also disabled and appears to those who are dying, reaching out to them with his right hand, which has only three fingers.
There is a remarkable resemblance between this tradition and one related by Lyon (p. 362), who describes the religious ideas of the Iglulirmiut, more particularly the genii of one of their angakut. He says that the principal spirits are Aiviliajoq (Ay-willi-ay-oo) or Nuliajoq (Noo-le-ay-oo), a female spirit, and her father, Napajoq (Nap-payok) or Anautalik (An-now-ta-lig). Then he continues:
There is a striking similarity between this tradition and one mentioned by Lyon (p. 362), who talks about the religious beliefs of the Iglulirmiut, especially regarding the spirits associated with one of their angakut. He states that the main spirits are Aiviliajoq (Ay-willi-ay-oo) or Nuliajoq (Noo-le-ay-oo), a female spirit, and her father, Napajoq (Nap-payok) or Anautalik (An-now-ta-lig). He then goes on:
The former is in the first place the mother, protectress, and not unfrequently the monopolist of sea animals, which she sometimes very wantonly confines below, and by that means causes a general scarcity in the upper world. When this is the case, the angakok is persuaded to pay her a visit, and attempt the release of the animals on which his tribe subsist. I know not what ceremonies he performs at the first part of the interview; but as the spell by which the animals are held lies in the hand of the enchantress, the conjuror makes some bold attempts to cut it off, and, according to his success, plenty, more or less, is obtained. If deprived of her nails, the bears obtain their freedom; amputation of the first joint liberates the netsiq (Pagomys); while that of the second loosens the ugjuq (Phoca). Should the knuckles be detached whole herds of walrus rise to the surface; and should the adventurous angakoq succeed in cutting through the lower part of the metacarpal bones, the monstrous whales are disenthralled and delightedly join the other creatures of the deep. ***Her house is exceedingly fine, and very like a Kabluna (European) looking-glass(?); and, what is still more attractive to an Eskimo, it contains plenty of food. Immediately within the door of the dwelling, which has a long passage of entrance, is stationed a very large and fierce dog, which has no tail, and whose hinder quarters are black. ***Aiviliajoq is described as being equally wonderful in her personal appearance as in her actions. She is very tall and has but one eye, which is the left, the place of the other being covered by a profusion of black 586 hair. She has one pigtail only, contrary to the established fashion in the upper Eskimo world, which is to wear one on each side of the face, and this is of such immense magnitude, that a man can scarcely grasp it with both hands. Its length is exactly twice that of her arm, and it descends to her knee. The hood of her jacket is always worn up. ***
The former is primarily the mother, guardian, and often the sole controller of sea creatures, which she sometimes harshly keeps trapped below, leading to a general shortage in the world above. When this happens, the angakok is convinced to visit her and try to free the animals that his tribe depends on. I don’t know what rituals he performs at the beginning of the meeting; however, since the spell binding the animals is in the hands of the enchantress, the shaman makes some daring attempts to sever it, and depending on how well he does, more or less abundance is achieved. If she loses her nails, the bears gain their freedom; cutting off the first joint frees the netsiq (Pagomys); while cutting the second joint releases the ugjuq (Phoca). If the knuckles are completely removed, entire groups of walrus come to the surface; and if the daring angakoq manages to cut through the lower part of the metacarpal bones, the massive whales are set free and happily join the other creatures of the sea. Got it! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.Her house is very impressive, almost like a European mirror; and, even more enticing to an Eskimo, it is filled with plenty of food. Right inside the entrance, which has a long hallway, is a very large and fierce dog with no tail and black hindquarters. Understood. Please provide the text you want to modernize.Aiviliajoq is said to be as extraordinary in her appearance as she is in her actions. She is very tall and has only one eye, which is the left; the other is covered by a mass of black 586 hair. She has just one pigtail, unlike the common style in the upper Eskimo world of wearing one on each side of the face, and it is so large that a man can barely grab it with both hands. Its length is exactly twice that of her arm and extends down to her knee. The hood of her jacket is always worn up. Understood. Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.
Her father has but one arm, the hand of which is covered by a very large mitten of bearskin. ***He is not larger than a boy of ten years of age. He bears the character of a good, quiet sort of person and is master of a very nice house, which, however, is not approachable, on account of the vast herds of walrus lying round it, which, with numerous bears, make a terrific howling. ***He has nothing to eat, and does not even require it; in which particular he differs widely from his daughter, who has a most voracious appetite. I know not if he is the father of all terrestrial animals, but he is certainly their patron, and withholds them at times from the Eskimo.
Her father has only one arm, and his hand is covered by a very large bearskin mitten. Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.He’s about the size of a ten-year-old boy. He seems like a good, quiet guy and is the owner of a lovely house, which isn’t accessible because of the huge herds of walrus surrounding it, making a loud racket along with the numerous bears. Understood. Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize.He has nothing to eat, and he doesn’t even need it, which sets him apart from his daughter, who has a really big appetite. I’m not sure if he’s the father of all land animals, but he's definitely their protector and occasionally keeps them away from the Eskimo.
The name of the father, Anautalik (An-now-ta-lig), i.e., the man with something to cut (with a knife), is very remarkable. Besides, it is interesting that the angakoq who visits the dwelling of Nuliajoq has to cut off her hand in order to liberate the sea animals. In the tradition related in the foregoing, Sedna has another name, to wit, Uinigumisuitung, i.e., she who would not have a husband; her father, Savirqong, i.e., the man with the knife. Often he is only called Anguta, her father.
The name of the father, Anautalik (An-now-ta-lig), meaning the man with something to cut (with a knife), is quite notable. Additionally, it's interesting that the angakoq who visits Nuliajoq's home has to cut off her hand to free the sea animals. In the earlier tradition mentioned, Sedna has another name, Uinigumisuitung, meaning she who would not have a husband; her father, Savirqong, translates to the man with the knife. He is often simply referred to as Anguta, her father.
It is evident that Nuliajoq is identical with Sedna, though some peculiarities exist in the tradition as related by Lyon which it is rather difficult to reconcile with the myth as it is related among the Oqomiut. It seems to me that this difficulty arises from the mixing up of the angakoq’s visit to Sedna with the tradition itself. Indeed Lyon only refers to the angakoq’s visit to Nuliajoq, whom he considers a genius of a great angakoq, though he remarks in another place (p. 363) that she “has a boundless command over the lives and destinies of mankind.”
It’s clear that Nuliajoq is the same as Sedna, although there are some unique aspects in the story as told by Lyon that are hard to align with the myth shared by the Oqomiut. I think this confusion comes from mixing the angakoq’s visit to Sedna with the tradition itself. In fact, Lyon only mentions the angakoq’s visit to Nuliajoq, whom he sees as a spirit of a great angakoq, but he notes elsewhere (p. 363) that she “has limitless control over the lives and destinies of humanity.”
The tale of the angakoq’s visit makes the tradition very similar to the Greenland myth of Arnaquagsaq, i.e., the old woman. According to Cranz (p. 264) and to Rink (p. 40) this spirit has her abode in the depth of the ocean. She represents the source of nourishment, supplying the physical wants of mankind. She sits in her dwelling in front of a lamp, beneath which is placed a vessel which receives the oil that keeps flowing down from the lamp. From this vessel, as well as from the dark interior of her hut, she sends out all the animals which serve for food, but in certain cases withholds the supply, thus causing want and famine. The reason for thus withholding the supply was that certain filthy and noxious parasites fastened themselves upon her head, of which she could only be relieved by an angakoq. Then she could be induced again to send out the animals for the benefit of man. In going to her he (the angakoq) had first to pass the Arsissut and then to cross an abyss, in which, according to the earliest authors, a wheel as slippery as ice was constantly 587 turning around; then, having safely passed a boiling kettle with seals in it, he arrived at the house, in front of which watch was kept by terrible animals, sometimes described as seals, sometimes as dogs; and, lastly, within the house passage itself, he had to cross an abyss by means of a bridge as narrow as a knife edge.
The story of the angakoq’s visit is very much like the Greenland myth of Arnaquagsaq, the old woman. According to Cranz (p. 264) and Rink (p. 40), this spirit lives deep in the ocean. She symbolizes the source of nourishment, providing for mankind's physical needs. She sits in her home in front of a lamp, under which is a container that catches the oil continuously flowing from the lamp. From this container, as well as from the dark inside of her hut, she sends out all the animals that people eat, but sometimes she holds back the supply, causing scarcity and hunger. The reason she withholds the supply is that certain dirty and harmful parasites cling to her head, and only an angakoq can help her get rid of them. Once freed, she would again send out animals for the benefit of people. To reach her, he (the angakoq) first had to pass the Arsissut and then cross an abyss, where, according to the earliest authors, a wheel as slippery as ice was constantly turning; then, after safely crossing a boiling kettle filled with seals, he arrived at her house, which was guarded by terrifying creatures, sometimes described as seals, sometimes as dogs; lastly, within the house itself, he had to cross another abyss using a bridge as narrow as a knife edge.
About the same tale is found among the Baffin Land tribes; according to Captain Spicer, of Groton, Conn., she is called Nanoquagsaq by the Akuliarmiut. She is visited by the angakut, who liberate the sea animals by subduing her or rather by depriving her of a charm by which she restrains the animals.
About the same story is found among the Baffin Land tribes; according to Captain Spicer from Groton, Conn., she is called Nanoquagsaq by the Akuliarmiut. The angakut visit her and free the sea animals by overcoming her, or rather by taking away a charm that she uses to keep the animals under control.
I am inclined to think that the form in which Lyon gives this tradition is not quite correct, but is a mixture of the Sedna myth and that of the angakoq’s visit to Arnaquagsaq. This seems the more probable from a Greenland tale which Dr. Rink kindly communicated to me, in which it is related that the grandfather of Arnaquagsaq cut off her fingers, which were changed into sea animals.
I tend to believe that the way Lyon presents this tradition isn’t entirely accurate; it seems to blend the Sedna myth with the story of the angakoq’s visit to Arnaquagsaq. This seems more likely based on a Greenland tale that Dr. Rink graciously shared with me, which tells of how the grandfather of Arnaquagsaq cut off her fingers, and they transformed into sea animals.
For this reason it is most probable that Arnaquagsaq, Sedna, and Nuliajoq proceed from the same myth, though the traditions differ from one another as they are related by the travelers. In the mythology of the central tribes this character has a much more decided influence upon their religious belief than the Arnaquagsaq of the Greenlanders seems to have had.
For this reason, it’s highly likely that Arnaquagsaq, Sedna, and Nuliajoq come from the same myth, even though the traditions differ in how travelers tell them. In the mythology of the central tribes, this character has a much stronger influence on their religious beliefs than the Arnaquagsaq from the Greenlanders appears to have had.
The myth of Sedna is confused with another which treats of the origin of the Europeans and of the Adlet (see p. 637). The legends are in part almost identical. Sedna orders her dog to gnaw off her father’s feet; Uinigumisuitung’s children maim their grandfather in the same way; and, besides, Sedna’s second name is also Uinigumisuitung. In both tales the father is called Savirqong. In Lyon’s Private Journal (p. 363) an important statement is found to the effect that the dog which protects Nuliajoq’s dwelling is by some natives called her husband, by others merely her dog, but that he is generally considered the father of Erqigdlit (identical with Adlet, p. 637) and Qadlunait (Europeans).
The myth of Sedna is intertwined with another story about the origin of Europeans and the Adlet (see p. 637). The legends are almost the same in some parts. Sedna tells her dog to chew off her father's feet; Uinigumisuitung’s children injure their grandfather in the same way; plus, Sedna’s other name is also Uinigumisuitung. In both stories, the father is named Savirqong. In Lyon’s Private Journal (p. 363), there's an important note stating that the dog protecting Nuliajoq’s home is referred to by some natives as her husband, by others simply as her dog, but he is generally considered the father of Erqigdlit (the same as Adlet, p. 637) and Qadlunait (Europeans).
Finally, I must record the legend of the origin of the walrus and the reindeer, which is closely related to the Sedna tradition. I could never learn any other reason why the use of sea animals and reindeer at the same period should be forbidden, except the fear of offending Sedna. She is represented as disliking the deer, which accordingly are not found in her house. Any reason for this dislike is not given. The Akuliarmiut, however, have a tradition that a woman, most probably Sedna herself, created the walrus and the reindeer during a famine. She opened her belly and took out a small piece of fat which she carried up the hills where it was transformed by a magic spell into a reindeer. As soon as she saw the animal she became frightened and ordered it to run away, but the deer turned upon her and would not go; then she became angry and knocked out its teeth. 588 It turned round at once, but before it could leave she gave it a kick which lopped off its tail. Thus it happened that the deer is deficient as to certain teeth and has scarcely any tail. The woman, however, continued to hate the deer. Afterward she descended to the beach and threw another piece of fat into the water. It was transformed into a walrus, which swam away at once. (According to a communication of Captain Spicer.)
Finally, I must share the story of how the walrus and the reindeer came to be, which is closely tied to the Sedna tradition. I could never find out any other reason why using sea animals and reindeer at the same time should be prohibited, except for the fear of upsetting Sedna. She is said to dislike deer, which is why they aren't found in her home. There's no explanation for this dislike. However, the Akuliarmiut have a story that a woman, likely Sedna herself, created the walrus and the reindeer during a famine. She opened her belly and took out a small piece of fat, which she carried up the hills, where it magically transformed into a reindeer. As soon as she saw the animal, she got scared and told it to run away, but the deer turned to her and wouldn’t go. Then she got angry and knocked out its teeth. 588 It turned around immediately, but before it could escape, she kicked it, chopping off its tail. That’s why the deer has missing teeth and barely any tail. The woman, however, continued to loathe the deer. Later, she went down to the beach and threw another piece of fat into the water. It was transformed into a walrus, which immediately swam away. (According to a report from Captain Spicer.)
The form of this tradition as related by the Akudnirmiut is somewhat different. During a famine a woman (I could not learn whether she was identical with Sedna or not) carried her boots to the hills and transformed them by magic into deer, which spread all over the country. Then she carried her breeches to the sea, where they were changed into walrus. The first deer, however, had large tusks and no horns, while the walrus had horns and no tusks. The Eskimo soon found that this was very dangerous for the hunter, as the deer killed pursuers with their tusks, while the walrus upset the boats. Therefore an old man transferred the horns to the deer and the tusks to the walrus.
The version of this tradition told by the Akudnirmiut is a bit different. During a famine, a woman (I couldn’t find out if she was the same as Sedna or not) took her boots to the hills and magically turned them into deer, which spread all over the land. Then she took her breeches to the sea, and they transformed into walrus. However, the first deer had big tusks and no horns, while the walrus had horns and no tusks. The Eskimo quickly realized that this was very dangerous for hunters, as the deer attacked chasers with their tusks, while the walrus capsized boats. So, an old man switched the horns to the deer and the tusks to the walrus.
It is very probable that this woman was Sedna, as the Eskimo affirm that the observances referring to walrus and deer are commanded by Sedna and as the first tradition accounts for her dislike of the deer.
It’s highly likely that this woman was Sedna, since the Eskimo people claim that the rituals related to walrus and deer are dictated by Sedna, and the earliest stories explain her aversion to deer.
I could not find any trace of the tradition reported by Lyon, that Anautalik, Nuliajoq’s father, is the protector of land animals, nor of that of a being to whom he refers by the name of Pukimna (derived from pukiq, the white parts of a deerskin), who lives in a fine country far to the west and who is the immediate protectress of deer, which animals roam in immense herds around her dwelling.
I couldn’t find any evidence of the tradition mentioned by Lyon, that Anautalik, Nuliajoq’s father, is the protector of land animals, nor of a being he calls Pukimna (derived from pukiq, the white parts of a deer skin), who lives in a beautiful land far to the west and is the direct protector of deer, which roam in huge herds around her home.
Sedna is the mistress of one of the countries to which the souls go after death. It has been related in the foregoing tradition of Sedna and the fulmar that she descended to Adlivun; since that time she has been the mistress of the country, and when invoked as such has the name of Idliragijenget. She has a large house, in which no deerskins are found. There she lives with her father, each occupying one side of it. The father, who is unable to move, lies on the ledge and is covered with old skins. In the entrance across the threshold lies Sedna’s dog watching her house. Like her, the father has only one eye, and he never moves from his place while in the house.
Sedna is the ruler of one of the realms where souls go after death. According to the previous stories about Sedna and the fulmar, she descended to Adlivun; since then, she has ruled that land, and when called upon, she goes by the name Idliragijenget. She has a large house that has no deerskins in it. She shares this space with her father, each of them on opposite sides. The father, who cannot move, lies on a ledge covered with old skins. At the entrance, Sedna’s dog lies across the threshold, keeping watch over her home. Like her, the father has only one eye, and he never leaves his spot while in the house.
The dead, who are seized by Sedna’s father, Anguta, are carried to this dwelling. The dog moves aside only a little, just enough to allow the souls to pass. They have to stay in this dismal abode during a whole year, lying by the side of Anguta, who pinches them.
The dead, captured by Sedna’s father, Anguta, are taken to this place. The dog shifts just slightly, making enough room for the souls to move through. They have to remain in this grim space for an entire year, lying next to Anguta, who pinches them.
The happy land is heaven and is called Qudlivun (the uppermost ones). It abounds with deer, which are easily caught, and no ice or snow ever visits it.
The happy land is like heaven and is called Qudlivun (the uppermost ones). It’s filled with deer that are easy to catch, and it never experiences ice or snow.
The Oqomiut and the Akudnirmiut make a distinction between Adlivun and Adliparmiut. Adlivun means “those who live beneath us;” Adliparmiut, “the inhabitants of the country farthest below us;” and the same difference exists between Qudlivun and Qudliparmiut. Though these names intimate the probability that the Eskimo believe in a series of places, located in a descending scale, each below the other, I could not find any more detailed description of the conception.
The Oqomiut and the Akudnirmiut differentiate between Adlivun and Adliparmiut. Adlivun means “those who live beneath us,” while Adliparmiut refers to “the inhabitants of the country farthest below us.” A similar difference exists between Qudlivun and Qudliparmiut. Although these names suggest that the Eskimo believe in a series of places arranged in a downward hierarchy, I couldn't find a more detailed description of this idea.
Hall’s observations agree fairly with my own. He says (I, p. 524):
Hall’s observations align pretty well with mine. He states (I, p. 524):
Qudliparmiut (heaven) is upward. Everybody happy there. All the time light; no snow, no ice, no storms; always pleasant; no trouble; never tired; sing and play all the time—all this to continue without end.
Qudliparmiut (heaven) is up above. Everyone is happy there. It's always bright; no snow, no ice, no storms; it's always nice; no problems; never tired; singing and playing all the time—this goes on forever.
Adliparmiut (hell) is downward. Always dark there. No sun; trouble there continually; snow flying all the time, terrible storms; cold, very cold; and a great deal of ice there. All who go there must always remain.
Adliparmiut (hell) is below. It's always dark there. No sun; there's constant trouble; snow is always blowing around, terrible storms; it's very cold; and there's a lot of ice. Everyone who goes there must stay forever.
All Inuit who have been good go to Qudliparmiut; that is, who have been kind to the poor and hungry, all who have been happy while living on this earth. Any one who has been killed by accident, or who has committed suicide, certainly goes to the happy place.
All Inuit who have been good go to Qudliparmiut; that is, those who have been kind to the poor and hungry, and all who have lived happily on this earth. Anyone who has died by accident or who has taken their own life definitely goes to the happy place.
All Inuit who have been bad—that is, unkind one to another—all who have been unhappy while on this earth, will go to Adliparmiut. If an Inung kills another because he is mad at him, he will certainly go to Adliparmiut.
All Inuit who have been unkind to one another—those who have felt unhappy during their time on earth—will go to Adliparmiut. If an Inung kills another out of anger, they will definitely go to Adliparmiut.
Kumlien’s remarks on this subject, as well as on other ethnographic subjects, are not trustworthy. He has transferred Greenland tales to Cumberland Sound, though the traditions of these tribes differ materially one from the other. I tried hard to corroborate his statements concerning the amaroq and the tornarsuq, concerning certain customs, &c., and am convinced that they are totally unknown to all the natives of Baffin Land from Nugumiut to Tununirn.
Kumlien’s comments on this topic, as well as on other ethnographic issues, are not reliable. He has shifted Greenland stories to Cumberland Sound, even though the traditions of these groups are significantly different from each other. I made a significant effort to verify his claims about the amaroq and the tornarsuq, certain customs, etc., and I am convinced that they are completely unknown to all the natives of Baffin Land, from Nugumiut to Tununirn.
Kumlien states that the better land is below the surface of the earth and that those who are killed by violence descend after death. According to Hall and to replies to my own inquiries, it is quite the reverse. Lyon’s report is extremely interesting, particularly his description of the stages of the nether world, of which I could only find a scanty hint in the names. He says (p. 372):
Kumlien says that the better land is underground and that those who die by violence go down after death. However, according to Hall and responses to my own questions, it’s actually the opposite. Lyon’s report is really fascinating, especially his description of the levels of the underworld, which I could only find a few hints about in the names. He mentions (p. 372):
There are two places appointed to receive the souls of the good: one of these is in the center of the earth, the other in qilaq, or heaven. To the latter place, such as are drowned at sea, starved to death, murdered, or killed by walruses or bears, are instantly wafted, and dwell in a charming country, which, however, has never been seen by any angakoq. ***
There are two places designated to receive the souls of the good: one is in the center of the earth, and the other is in qilaq, or heaven. To the latter place, those who drown at sea, die of starvation, are murdered, or are killed by walruses or bears are immediately carried, and they live in a beautiful land, which, however, has never been seen by any angakoq. Understood. Please provide the text you’d like me to modernize.
The place of souls in the world below is called Adli generally; but there are, properly, four distinct states of blessedness, and each rank has a world to itself, the lowest land being the last and best, which all hope to reach. The day on which a good person dies and is buried, the soul goes to a land immediately under the visible world; and, still descending, it arrives the second day at one yet lower; the third day it goes farther yet; and on the fourth it finds, “below the lowest deep, a deeper still.” This is the “good land,” and the soul which reaches it is for ever happy. The three first stages are bad uncomfortable places for in each the sky is so close to the earth, that a man cannot walk erect: yet these regions are inhabited; and the good soul, in passing through them, sees multitudes of the dead, who, having lost 590 their way, or, not being entitled to the “good land,” are always wandering about and in great distress. Whether these unhappy souls are in purgatory or not, I was unable to learn; but they suffer no other pain than what we would call the “fidgets.” In the lowest Adli a perpetual and delightful summer prevails.
The place of souls in the underworld is generally called Adli; however, there are actually four distinct states of happiness, and each level has its own separate world, with the lowest level being the best, which everyone hopes to reach. On the day a good person dies and is buried, their soul goes to a place just below the visible world; then, as it descends further, it reaches a lower realm on the second day; on the third day, it moves even deeper; and by the fourth day, it finds, “below the lowest deep, a deeper still.” This is the “good land,” and the soul that makes it there is forever happy. The first three stages are uncomfortable places where the sky is so close to the ground that a person cannot walk upright; still, these areas are inhabited, and the good soul, while passing through them, sees countless dead souls who have lost their way or are not eligible for the “good land,” constantly wandering and in great distress. Whether these unfortunate souls are in purgatory or not, I couldn't find out; but they don’t experience any pain beyond what we would call the “fidgets.” In the lowest part of Adli, there is an everlasting and pleasant summer.
The belief of these tribes undoubtedly is that all who die by accident or by violence and women who die in childbirth are taken to the upper world. I never heard a different opinion expressed by any native. I do not know whether they believe in a series of upper worlds similar to the nether worlds of the Iglulirmiut, but it is probable, from the names Qudlivun and Qudliparmiut. In the Greenland tradition the upper world is represented as a country with hills and valleys, over which the solid blue sky is expanded. Sedna of the Oqomiut lives in Adlivun, and here the souls must stay one year after death. Everybody who dies from disease or who has offended Sedna by infringing her orders is taken to her. The Eskimo are in great fear of the terrors of her abode. Murderers and offenders against human laws, after they have entered Sedna’s house, will never leave it; the other souls, however, are taken to the Adliparmiut, where they live comparatively at their ease, although they are not nearly so blessed as the Qudliparmiut. They hunt whales and walrus and are almost always troubled by ice and snow.
The belief of these tribes is clearly that everyone who dies from an accident or violence, along with women who die during childbirth, is taken to the upper world. I’ve never heard any native express a different opinion. I'm not sure if they believe in a series of upper worlds like the lower worlds of the Iglulirmiut, but it seems likely, given the names Qudlivun and Qudliparmiut. In Greenlandic tradition, the upper world is depicted as a land with hills and valleys, under a solid blue sky. Sedna of the Oqomiut resides in Adlivun, and souls must stay there for a year after death. Anyone who dies from illness or who has offended Sedna by breaking her rules is taken to her. The Eskimo are very afraid of the horrors of her realm. Murderers and those who break human laws will never escape Sedna’s house; however, other souls are taken to the Adliparmiut, where they live relatively comfortably, although they’re not as blessed as the Qudliparmiut. They hunt whales and walruses and constantly deal with ice and snow.
The older authors on Greenland mythology state that the conceptions of the natives do not coincide (Cranz). According to one tradition the good land is below, and tornarsuq, the supreme tornaq, is master of it. Here continuous summer prevails and there is plenty of fresh water, with a profusion of game. Only those people are allowed to come here who have been good hunters and workers, who have accomplished great exploits, caught many seals, who have suffered much, or have died by violence or in childbirth. The souls of the deceased must slide for five days, or even longer, down a steep rock, which has become quite slippery from the blood which has been sprinkled over it. Those who have been lazy and unfit for working go to the upper world, where they suffer from scarcity of food. Particularly the bad and witches are taken to this country, where they are tormented by ravens.
The older writers on Greenland mythology say that the views of the natives don’t match up (Cranz). According to one tradition, the good land is below, and tornarsuq, the supreme tornaq, is in charge of it. Here, summer is endless, and there’s plenty of fresh water and lots of game. Only those who have been good hunters and workers, achieved great feats, caught many seals, suffered greatly, or died violently or in childbirth are allowed to come here. The souls of the dead must slide down a steep, slippery rock for five days or even longer, made slick from blood sprinkled on it. Those who were lazy and unfit for work go to the upper world, where they suffer from lack of food. Especially the wicked and witches are sent to this place, where they are tormented by ravens.
Another tradition places the good land in heaven. The souls travel on the rainbow to the moon, near which they find a large lake abounding with fowls and fish. Rink gives the following statement on this subject (p. 37):
Another tradition says that the good land is in heaven. The souls journey on the rainbow to the moon, where they discover a large lake filled with birds and fish. Rink provides the following statement on this topic (p. 37):
After death, human souls either go to the upper or to the under world. The latter is decidedly to be preferred, as being warm and rich in food. There are the dwellings of the happy dead called arsissut,—viz, those who live in abundance. On the contrary, those who go to the upper world will suffer from cold and famine; and these are called the arssartut, or ball players, on account of their playing at ball with a walrus head, which gives rise to the aurora borealis.
After death, human souls either go to the upper world or the underworld. The underworld is definitely the better option because it's warm and full of food. There are the homes of the happy dead called arsissut—those who live in plenty. In contrast, those who go to the upper world will endure cold and hunger; they are called the arssartut, or ball players, because they play ball with a walrus head, which creates the northern lights.
While the Iglulirmiut believe that the soul leaves the body immediately after death and descends to Adli, the tribes of Davis Strait 591 suppose that it lingers three days around the body, unable to leave it. Then it descends to Sedna’s house. During its stay in Adlivun the soul is called tupilaq, which is represented by the figure of a man with wide, loose, shabby clothing. It is looked upon as a malevolent spirit, frequently roaming around the villages. The tupilaq is not allowed to enter the houses, and if the angakoq perceives and announces his presence no one would dare to leave the houses. His touch kills men at once, the sight of him causes sickness and mischief. As soon as the soul has become an adliparmio, it is at rest and ceases to be feared as a tupilaq.
While the Iglulirmiut believe that the soul leaves the body immediately after death and goes to Adli, the tribes of Davis Strait 591 think that it stays around the body for three days, unable to depart. Then it travels to Sedna's house. During its time in Adlivun, the soul is called tupilaq, represented by a figure of a man wearing loose, ragged clothing. It is seen as a malevolent spirit that often roams the villages. The tupilaq is not allowed to enter homes, and if the angakoq sees and announces its presence, no one would dare to leave their houses. Its touch kills instantly, and just seeing it causes illness and trouble. Once the soul becomes an adliparmio, it finds peace and is no longer feared as a tupilaq.
It is worth remarking that the Greenlanders designate with the name of tupilaq a supernatural being made by men for the purpose of destroying their enemies (Rink, p. 53). It is composed of various parts of different animals and is enabled to act in the shape of any of them at will. I have not found any trace of this idea among the Central Eskimo.
It’s important to note that the Greenlanders refer to a supernatural being made by humans as a tupilaq, which is intended to destroy their enemies (Rink, p. 53). It’s made from different parts of various animals and can take on the form of any of them at will. I haven’t found any evidence of this concept among the Central Eskimo.
THE TORNAIT AND THE ANGAKUT.
A consideration of the religious ideas of the Eskimo shows that the tornait, the invisible rulers of every object, are the most remarkable beings next to Sedna. Everything has its inua (owner), which may become the genius of man who thus obtains the qualities of angakunirn. I am not quite sure that every inua can become the tornaq of a man, though with the Greenlanders this was possible. I learned of three kinds of spirits only, who are protectors of angakut: those in the shape of men, of stones, and of bears. These spirits enable the angakut to have intercourse with the others who are considered malevolent to mankind, and though those three species are kind to their angakut they would hurt strangers who might happen to see them. The bear seems to be the most powerful among these spirits. The tornait of the stones live in the large bowlders scattered over the country. The Eskimo believe that these rocks are hollow and form a nice house, the entrance of which is only visible to the angakoq whose genius lives in the stone. The tornaq is a woman with only one eye, in the middle of the brow. Another kind of tornaq lives in the stones that roll down the hills in spring when the snow begins to melt. If a native happens to meet such a stone, which is about to become his tornaq, the latter addresses him: “I jumped down in long leaps from my place on the cliff. As the snow melts, as water is formed on the hills, I jump down.” Then it asks the native whether he is willing to have it for his tornaq, and if he answers in the affirmative it accompanies him, wabbling along, as it has no legs.
A look at the religious beliefs of the Eskimo shows that the tornait, the invisible rulers of every object, are the most significant beings next to Sedna. Everything has its inua (owner), which may turn into the genius of a person who then gains the qualities of angakunirn. I'm not completely convinced that every inua can become the tornaq of a person, though it was possible with the Greenlanders. I learned of only three types of spirits that protect the angakut: those that take the form of men, stones, and bears. These spirits enable the angakut to interact with others who are seen as harmful to humanity, and while those three types are kind to their angakut, they could harm strangers who happen to see them. The bear appears to be the strongest among these spirits. The tornait of the stones dwell in the large boulders scattered across the land. The Eskimo believe that these rocks are hollow and create a nice home, the entrance to which is only visible to the angakoq whose genius resides in the stone. The tornaq is a woman with a single eye, located in the center of her forehead. Another type of tornaq lives in the stones that roll down the hills in spring when the snow starts to melt. If a native encounters such a stone, which is about to become his tornaq, it speaks to him: “I jumped down in long leaps from my place on the cliff. As the snow melts, as water gathers on the hills, I jump down.” Then it asks the native if he agrees to have it as his tornaq, and if he responds positively, it follows him, wobbling along since it has no legs.
The bear tornaq is represented as a huge animal without any hair except on the points of the ears and of the tail and at the mouth. If a man wishes to obtain a bear for his tornaq he must travel all alone 592 to the edge of the land floe and summon the bears. Then a large herd will approach and frighten him almost to death. He falls down at once. Should he fall backward he would die at once. If he falls upon his face, however, one bear out of the herd steps forward and asks him if he wishes him to become his tornaq. He then recovers and takes the bear for his spirit and is accompanied by him on the return journey. On the way home, they pass a seal hole and the bear captures the animal for his master. The Eskimo is now a great angakoq, and whenever he wants help he is sure to get it from his bear.
The bear tornaq is described as a large animal with no fur except on the tips of its ears, tail, and face. If a person wants to get a bear for their tornaq, they must go alone to the edge of the ice floe and call out to the bears. A large group will then come near, which can be so terrifying that it almost scares him to death. He immediately collapses. If he falls backward, he will die instantly. However, if he falls face down, one bear from the group will step forward and ask if he wants it to become his tornaq. He then recovers and takes the bear as his spirit guide, returning home together. On their way back, they pass a seal hole, and the bear catches the seal for his master. The Eskimo becomes a powerful angakoq, and whenever he needs help, he can always count on his bear.
The Eskimo do not make images of the tornait or other supernatural beings in whom they believe, but use to a great extent amulets (arngoaq), some of which are given by the tornait, while others are inherited. The most common varieties of amulets are the feather of an owl, a bear’s tooth, and the like, which are always worn on the middle of the back of the inner jacket. Rare minerals (e.g., iron) sewed up in a piece of skin are sometimes used for the same purpose. A small part of the first gown worn by a child is considered a powerful amulet and is preserved for this reason. It is worn at the point of the hood at a great feast celebrated every fall (see pp. 604, 611) and is called koukparmiutang.
The Eskimos don’t create images of the tornait or other supernatural beings they believe in, but they do use amulets (arngoaq) quite a bit, some of which are given by the tornait, while others are passed down. The most common types of amulets include an owl’s feather, a bear’s tooth, and similar items, which are always worn on the middle of the back of the inner jacket. Sometimes, rare minerals (e.g., iron) stitched into a piece of skin are used for the same purpose. A small part of the first garment worn by a child is regarded as a strong amulet and is kept for this reason. It's worn at the tip of the hood during a big feast held every fall (see pp. 604, 611) and is referred to as koukparmiutang.
Lyon (p. 367) gives the following account of the use of amulets in Iglulik:
Lyon (p. 367) provides the following description of how amulets are used in Iglulik:
Bones and teeth of animals, hanging as solitary pendants, or strung in great numbers, have peculiar virtues, and the bones of the feet of the kabliaqdjuq, which I imagine to be the wolverine, are the most in request. The front teeth of musk oxen are considered as jewels, while the grinders, one or two together, are much esteemed as tassels for the strings used to tie up the breeches of the women. Eye teeth of foxes are sometimes seen to the number of hundreds, neatly perforated and arranged as a kind of fringe round caps or dresses, and even the bones and teeth of fish have their value.
Bones and teeth from animals, whether hanging individually or strung together in large quantities, have unique properties. The foot bones of the kabliaqdjuq, which I think is the wolverine, are the most sought after. The front teeth of musk oxen are regarded as precious, while their molars, grouped one or two together, are highly valued as decorative tassels for the strings used to fasten women's breeches. Eyeteeth from foxes can sometimes be found in the hundreds, skillfully drilled and arranged as a decorative fringe for hats or clothing, and even fish bones and teeth are considered valuable.
Leather cases of the size of a quill, and containing small pieces of deer’s or other flesh, are frequently attached to the caps or hoods of children, but whether to render them expert hunters, or to preserve their health, I could not discover. I was assured that broken spear heads, and other equally cumbrous pendants, worn round the necks of young girls, were spells for the preservation of their chastity, while the same ornaments caused the women to be prolific.
Leather cases the size of a quill, containing small pieces of deer or other meat, are often attached to the caps or hoods of children, but I couldn't figure out if it was to make them skilled hunters or to keep them healthy. I was told that broken spearheads and other heavy pendants worn around the necks of young girls were charms to protect their purity, while the same ornaments made women more fertile.
The principal office of the angakut is to find out the reason of sickness and death or of any other misfortune visiting the natives.
The main job of the angakut is to uncover the reasons behind illness, death, or any other misfortunes affecting the locals.
The Eskimo believes that he is obliged to answer the angakoq’s questions truthfully. The lamps being lowered, the angakoq strips off his outer jacket, pulls the hood over his head, and sits down in the back part of the hut facing the wall. He claps his hands, which are covered with mittens, and, shaking his whole body, utters sounds which one would hardly recognize as human.
The Eskimo thinks he has to answer the angakoq’s questions honestly. As the lamps dim, the angakoq takes off his outer jacket, pulls the hood over his head, and sits down in the back of the hut facing the wall. He claps his hands, which are covered with mittens, and, shaking his whole body, makes sounds that are hard to identify as human.
Thus he invokes his tornaq, singing and shouting alternately, the listeners, who sit on the edge of the bed, joining the chorus and 593 answering his questions. Then he asks the sick person: “Did you work when it was forbidden?” “Did you eat when you were not allowed to eat?” And if the poor fellow happens to remember any transgression of such laws, he cries: “Yes, I have worked.” “Yes, I have eaten.” And the angakoq rejoins “I thought so” and issues his commands as to the manner of atonement.
Thus he calls on his tornaq, singing and shouting back and forth, while the listeners, who sit on the edge of the bed, join in the chorus and answer his questions. Then he asks the sick person: “Did you work when it was forbidden?” “Did you eat when you weren't supposed to eat?” And if the poor fellow happens to recall any violation of such rules, he cries: “Yes, I have worked.” “Yes, I have eaten.” And the angakoq responds, “I thought so,” and gives instructions on how to make amends.
These are manifold. Exchange of wives between two men or adoption of a sick child by another family in order to save its life are frequently demanded. The inhabitants of a village are forbidden to wash themselves for a number of days, to scrape the ice from the windows, and to clean their urine pots before sunrise. Sometimes the angakoq commands that the clothing be thrown away or gives regulations for diet, particularly forbidding the eating of venison, working on deerskins, filing iron, &c.
These are many. It's often required for two men to swap wives or for a family to adopt a sick child to save its life. The people in a village may be prohibited from washing themselves for several days, scraping ice off the windows, and cleaning their urine pots before sunrise. Sometimes, the angakoq orders that clothing be discarded or sets rules about diet, especially banning the consumption of venison, working with deerskins, filing iron, etc.
Disorders of women are considered as a punishment for the neglect to observe the regulations referring to their behavior at certain periods, which regulations were established by Sedna. The same is stated by Lyon (p. 363).
Disorders in women are seen as a consequence for not following the rules about their behavior during specific times, which were set by Sedna. Lyon also states this (p. 363).
A method of finding out the reason of a disease is by “head lifting.” A thong is tied round the head of the sick person or of a relative, who must lie down on the bed, the angakoq holding the thong. Then he asks his tornaq the reason of the sickness and the remedy. If the tornaq answers a question of the angakoq in the affirmative the head is easily lifted. In the other case it feels so heavy that he is unable to move it. Another method is by lifting a boot or a stone, which has been placed under the pillow of the patient. The angakut believe that the boot or stone becomes heavy and cannot be lifted when the tornaq answers their incantations.
A way to find out the cause of an illness is through “head lifting.” A thong is tied around the head of the sick person or a relative, who must lie down on the bed, while the angakoq holds the thong. Then, he asks his tornaq about the reason for the sickness and the remedy. If the tornaq answers the angakoq's question positively, the head is easily lifted. If not, it feels so heavy that he can't move it. Another method involves lifting a boot or a stone placed under the patient's pillow. The angakut believe that the boot or stone becomes heavy and cannot be lifted when the tornaq responds to their incantations.
At the beginning of some of their performances I have observed the angakoq crawling about in the passage of the hut, howling and shouting, while those inside kept on singing. Then he entered the hut and continued the incantations on the back part of the bed.
At the start of some of their performances, I've seen the angakoq crawling around in the hut's passage, howling and shouting, while those inside kept singing. Then he went into the hut and continued the incantations at the back of the bed.
Sometimes their cure for sickness is laying a piece of burning wick upon the diseased part of the body and blowing it up into the air or merely blowing upon it.
Sometimes their cure for illness involves placing a burning wick on the affected area of the body and either blowing it up into the air or just blowing on it.
Storm and bad weather, when lasting a long time and causing want of food, are conjured by making a large whip of seaweed, stepping to the beach, and striking out in the direction whence the wind blows, at the same time crying Taba (It is enough).
Storms and bad weather, when they last too long and cause a shortage of food, are warded off by making a large whip out of seaweed, stepping onto the beach, and striking in the direction the wind is coming from, while shouting "Taba" (It’s enough).
A great number of the performances of the angakut require much skill and expertness. Thus in invoking a tornaq or flying to a distant place they can imitate a distant voice by a sort of ventriloquism. In these performances they always have the lamps extinguished and hide themselves behind a screen hung up in the back part of the hut. The tornaq, being invoked, is heard approaching and shaking the hut. The angakoq believes that it is unroofed and flies with 594 his spirit to their place of destination, to propitiate the wrath of a hostile tornaq, to visit the moon or Sedna’s dismal abode.
A lot of the performances by the angakut require significant skill and expertise. So, when invoking a tornaq or traveling to a distant place, they can mimic a distant voice using a kind of ventriloquism. During these performances, they always turn off the lamps and hide behind a screen that's set up at the back of the hut. The tornaq, once invoked, can be heard approaching and shaking the hut. The angakoq believes that the roof is removed and travels with his spirit to their destination to appease the anger of a hostile tornaq, to visit the moon, or to go to Sedna’s gloomy home.
Part of their performances might almost be called juggling. Hall (II, p. 101) describes one of these performances:
Part of their performances could almost be described as juggling. Hall (II, p. 101) talks about one of these performances:
The angakoq (Ar-too-a) now made use of three walrus spears. One of these he thrust into the wall of the snow house, and ***ran with it outside of the igdlu [house] where his ejaculations were responded to by the party inside with the cries of “Atte! Atte!” [Go on! Go on!]. Returning with his spear to the door, he had a severe wrestling match with four of the men, who overcame him. But coming again into the central igdlu, and having the lights which had been at the first patted down, relit, he showed the points of two spears apparently covered with fresh blood, which he held up in the presence of all.
The angakoq (Ar-too-a) now used three walrus spears. He thrust one into the wall of the snow house and ran outside of the igdlu [house], where the party inside responded to his shouts with cries of "Atte! Atte!" [Go on! Go on!]. When he returned with his spear to the door, he had a tough wrestling match with four of the men, who managed to overpower him. But after coming back into the central igdlu and relighting the lights that had been dimmed earlier, he displayed two spears that seemed to be covered in fresh blood, holding them up for everyone to see.
The performance of the angakut in the Sedna feast, which will be described hereafter (p. 604) is quite astonishing. Some pierce their bodies with harpoons, evidently having bladders filled with blood fastened under their jackets beforehand, and bleed profusely as they enter the hut. (See Appendix, Note 5.)
The performance of the angakut in the Sedna feast, which will be described hereafter (p. 604), is truly incredible. Some stab their bodies with harpoons, clearly having bladders filled with blood attached under their jackets beforehand, and bleed heavily as they enter the hut. (See Appendix, Note 5.)
A memorable ceremony has been described by Hall (I, p. 469):
A memorable ceremony has been described by Hall (I, p. 469):
I heard a loud shout just outside [the hut]. As quick as thought, the Eskimo sprang for the long knives lying around, and hid them wherever they could find places. ***Immediately there came crawling into the low entrance to the hut a man with long hair completely covering his face and eyes. He remained on his knees on the floor of the hut, feeling round like a blind man at each side of the entrance, back of the firelight, the place where meat is usually kept, and where knives may generally be found. Not finding any, the angakoq slowly withdrew. ***If he had found a knife he would have stabbed himself in the breast.
I heard a loud shout just outside [the hut]. As quick as a thought, the Eskimo grabbed the long knives lying around and hid them wherever they could. Understood. Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.Then, a man with long hair covering his face and eyes crawled into the low entrance of the hut. He stayed on his knees on the floor, feeling around like a blind man on each side of the entrance, behind the firelight, where meat is usually kept and where knives can commonly be found. Not finding any, the angakoq slowly pulled back. Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.If he had found a knife, he would have stabbed himself in the chest.
It is one of their favorite tricks to have their hands tied up and a thong fastened around their knees and neck. Then they begin invoking their tornaq, and all of a sudden the body lies motionless while the soul flies to any place which they wish to visit. After returning, the thongs are found untied, though they had been fastened by firm knots. The resemblance of this performance to the experiments of modern spiritualists is striking.
It’s one of their favorite tricks to have their hands tied and a thong secured around their knees and neck. Then they start invoking their tornaq, and suddenly the body goes still while the soul travels wherever they want to go. When they return, the thongs are found untied, even though they had been fastened tightly. The similarity of this act to the practices of modern spiritualists is remarkable.
The angakut use a sacred language in their songs and incantations. A great number of words have a symbolic meaning, but others are old roots, which have been lost from common use in the lapse of time. These archaic words are very interesting from a linguistic point of view. Indeed, some are found which are still in use in Greenland, though lost in the other dialects, and others which are only used in Alaska.
The angakut use a sacred language in their songs and chants. Many of the words have symbolic meanings, while others are ancient roots that have faded from everyday use over time. These old words are very fascinating from a linguistic perspective. In fact, some are still used in Greenland, although they have disappeared from other dialects, and others are only found in Alaska.
I ought to add here that most of the angakut themselves believe in their performances, as by continued shouting and invoking they fall into an ecstasy and really imagine they accomplish the flights and see the spirits.
I should mention that most of the angakut genuinely believe in their performances, as by repeatedly shouting and invoking, they enter a state of ecstasy and truly think they are flying and seeing the spirits.
The angakoq, who must be paid at once for curing a sick person, receives pretty large fees for services of this kind.
The angakoq, who must be paid immediately for healing a sick person, charges quite a bit for these services.
Although witchcraft occupied a prominent place in the belief of the Greenlanders I could only find very faint traces of it in Baffin Land, to wit, the opinion that a man has the power of injuring a distant enemy by some means the details of which I did not learn.
Although witchcraft was widely believed in Greenland, I found only slight evidence of it in Baffin Land, specifically the belief that a person has the ability to harm a distant enemy through some unspecified means.
I shall add here the numerous regulations referring to eating and working, many of which are connected with the Sedna tradition, and the observance of which is watched by the angakut. As all sea animals have originated from her fingers the Eskimo must make an atonement for every animal he kills. When a seal is brought into the hut the women must stop working until it is cut up. After the capture of a ground seal, walrus, or whale they must rest for three days. Not all kinds of work, however, are forbidden, for they are allowed to mend articles made of sealskin, but they must not make anything new. For instance, an old tent cover may be enlarged in order to build a larger hut, but it is not permitted to make a new one. Working on new deerskins is strictly forbidden. No skins of this kind obtained in summer may be prepared before the ice has formed and the first seal is caught with the harpoon. Later, as soon as the first walrus is caught, the work must stop again until the next fall. For this reason all families are eager to finish the work on deerskins as quickly as possible, as the walrusing season is not commenced until that is done.
I will add here the many rules about eating and working, many of which are tied to the Sedna tradition, and the angakut keep an eye on these practices. Since all sea animals originated from her fingers, the Eskimo must atone for every animal he kills. When a seal is brought into the hut, the women must stop working until it’s cut up. After capturing a ground seal, walrus, or whale, they must rest for three days. However, not all types of work are prohibited; they are allowed to repair things made of sealskin, but they cannot create anything new. For example, they can enlarge an old tent cover to make a larger hut, but it is not allowed to make a completely new one. Working with new deerskins is strictly off-limits. No deerskins obtained in summer can be prepared until the ice has formed and the first seal is caught with the harpoon. Later, as soon as the first walrus is caught, work must stop again until the next fall. Because of this, all families are eager to finish working on deerskins as quickly as possible since the walrus hunting season doesn’t start until that is done.
The laws prohibiting contact with deer and sea animals at the same time are very strict. According to the Eskimo themselves Sedna dislikes the deer (probably for some reason connected with the tradition of its origin,) and therefore they are not allowed to bring it in contact with her favorites. The meat of the whale, seal, or walrus must not be eaten on the same day with venison. It is not permitted that both sorts of meat lie on the floor of the hut or behind the lamps at the same time. If a man who has eaten venison in the morning happens to enter a hut in which seal meat is being cooked he is allowed to eat venison on the bed, but it must be wrapped up before being carried into the hut and he must take care to keep clear of the floor. Before changing from one food to the other the Eskimo must wash themselves. For the same reason walrus hide must not be carried to Lake Nettilling, which is considered the domain of deer.
The laws against mixing deer and marine animals are very strict. According to the Eskimos, Sedna dislikes deer (likely due to some tradition related to her origin), so they can’t bring it near her favorites. You can’t eat whale, seal, or walrus meat on the same day as venison. Both types of meat can't be on the floor of the hut or behind the lamps at the same time. If someone has had venison in the morning and enters a hut where seal meat is being cooked, they can eat venison in bed, but it has to be wrapped up before bringing it into the hut, and they must avoid placing it on the floor. Before switching from one type of food to another, the Eskimos must wash themselves. For the same reason, walrus hide cannot be taken to Lake Nettilling, which is considered the territory of deer.
A similar custom requires that the Ukusiksalirmiut carry salmon into a hut by a separate entrance, for it must not pass through the same one as seal oil. Besides, the fish must only be cooked at the distance of a day’s journey from the place where they have been caught. If eaten on the spot they must be eaten raw (Klutschak, p. 158).
A similar tradition requires that the Ukusiksalirmiut bring salmon into a hut through a different entrance, as it cannot pass through the same one used for seal oil. Additionally, the fish should only be cooked a day’s journey away from where they were caught. If they are eaten on site, they must be consumed raw (Klutschak, p. 158).
Their customs referring to hunting are manifold. When skinning a deer they must not break a single bone; then, they cut off bits of different parts of the animal and bury them in the ground or under stones (Hall I, p. 386). I have never noticed this custom myself. 596 On the west shore of Hudson Bay dogs are not allowed to gnaw deer bones during the deer hunting season or seal bones during the sealing season (Klutschak, p. 123). Deer bones must not be broken while walrus are hunted (Hall II, p. 155).
Their customs related to hunting are diverse. When skinning a deer, they must not break a single bone; then, they cut off pieces from different parts of the animal and bury them in the ground or under stones (Hall I, p. 386). I have never personally observed this custom. 596 On the west shore of Hudson Bay, dogs are not allowed to chew on deer bones during the deer hunting season or seal bones during the sealing season (Klutschak, p. 123). Deer bones must not be broken while hunting walrus (Hall II, p. 155).
When the men go out hunting in their kayaks the women of the Aivillirmiut take a cup down to the shore and leave it there, believing that it will bring luck (Hall II, p. 103). On Davis Strait they throw a piece of seal’s blubber on their husband’s kayak when he is about to go hunting (Kumlien, p. 45). After the capture of a whale the Aivillirmiut are not allowed to burn shrubs, but use bones of the whale instead, which are mixed with blubber (Hall II, p. 364). If an animal that is with young is killed the fetus must not be taken and used for food (Hall II, p. 253). When a bear is caught the Nugumiut and the Oqomiut are accustomed to fasten its bladder to a stick which is placed upright near the hut or encampment for three days.
When the men go hunting in their kayaks, the women of the Aivillirmiut place a cup on the shore and leave it there, believing it will bring luck (Hall II, p. 103). In Davis Strait, they throw a piece of seal blubber onto their husband's kayak right before he goes hunting (Kumlien, p. 45). After a whale is caught, the Aivillirmiut can't burn shrubs; instead, they use whale bones mixed with blubber (Hall II, p. 364). If a pregnant animal is killed, its fetus must not be taken and consumed (Hall II, p. 253). When a bear is captured, the Nugumiut and the Oqomiut typically attach its bladder to a stick, which they place upright near the hut or camp for three days.
When a house is deserted the Aivillirmiut are in the habit of carrying all the bones lying inside to some distance and putting them upon the ice (Hall II, p. 175). If they intend to move to a place some distance away they are in the habit of burying some of their clothing. Klutschak observed this custom among the Netchillirmiut; I myself, among the Akudnirmiut. If a great number of families leave a village those who remain build new houses, as they believe that they would otherwise have bad luck in hunting.
When a house is abandoned, the Aivillirmiut typically gather all the bones inside and take them some distance away to place them on the ice (Hall II, p. 175). If they plan to relocate far away, they often bury some of their clothing. Klutschak noticed this practice among the Netchillirmiut; I personally observed it among the Akudnirmiut. If many families leave a village, those who stay will build new houses, as they believe not doing so would bring them bad luck in hunting.
A great number of regulations refer to the behavior of women during menstruation. They are not allowed to eat raw meat, they must cook in separate pots, and are not permitted to join in festivals, being looked upon as unclean during this period. Customs referring to childbirth and sickness will be found further on (see p. 609).
A lot of rules talk about how women should behave during their periods. They can't eat raw meat, need to cook in separate pots, and aren't allowed to participate in festivals because they're considered unclean during this time. Customs related to childbirth and illness will be discussed later (see p. 609).
When a traveling party visits a neighboring tribe it is obliged to adopt the customs and regulations of the latter.
When a traveling group visits a neighboring tribe, they have to follow the customs and rules of that tribe.
This account does not by any means include all the peculiar customs of these people, for they are so numerous and the difficulty of finding out anything pertaining to this subject is so great that it is probable that the greater part of them have escaped notice.
This account definitely doesn’t cover all the unique customs of these people, since there are so many and it’s really hard to uncover anything related to this topic, making it likely that most of them have been overlooked.
I shall also mention a few customs that are peculiar to certain places. At Qeqertelung, east of Naujateling, in Cumberland Sound, the Eskimo dig potstone, but must buy it from the rock: that is, having dug out a piece, they must give the rock something in exchange; for example, ivory carvings, beads, food, or the like.
I’ll also highlight a few customs that are unique to specific areas. In Qeqertelung, east of Naujateling in Cumberland Sound, the Inuit mine potstone, but they have to pay for it with something in return; for instance, after extracting a piece, they must offer the rock something like ivory carvings, beads, food, or similar items.
At Arligaulik, near Wager River, the Eskimo address a large rock and bid it farewell when passing (Hall II, p. 174).
At Arligaulik, near the Wager River, the Eskimos greet a large rock and say goodbye to it when they pass by (Hall II, p. 174).
In Cumberland Sound there is a cape called Iliqimisarbing, i.e., the place of headshaking. The place is very dangerous, as heavy squalls sweep down the steep rocks and slides frequently occur. Therefore the natives never pass it without shaking their heads, at the same time uttering a deep murmur.
In Cumberland Sound, there's a cape called Iliqimisarbing, which means the place of headshaking. This area is really dangerous, as strong winds rush down the steep cliffs and landslides happen often. Because of this, the locals always shake their heads when passing by, while also making a low sound.
Besides the tornait already mentioned, a number of others are known which cannot become genii of men. A spirit of the sea, Kalopaling or Mitiling, is described in a tradition (see p. 620). In Erdmann’s Wörterbuch des Labradordialectes “Mitiling” is translated Gespenst, i.e., ghost. No doubt it is the name of the same spirit or at least of a similar one which is recognized among the northern tribes, the literal translation being “with eider ducks.” Another spirit of which the natives are in great fear is Qiqirn, a phantom in the shape of a huge dog almost without hair. Like the bear which has been alluded to, it has hair only at the mouth, the feet, and the points of the ears and the tail. If it comes near dogs or men they fall into fits and only recover when Qiqirn has left. It is exceedingly afraid of men and runs away as soon as an angakoq descries it.
Besides the tornait already mentioned, there are several others known that can't become the spirits of men. A sea spirit, Kalopaling or Mitiling, is described in a tradition (see p. 620). In Erdmann’s Wörterbuch des Labradordialectes, “Mitiling” is translated as Gespenst, which means ghost. It’s likely the name of the same spirit or at least a similar one recognized among the northern tribes, with the literal translation being “with eider ducks.” Another spirit that the natives fear greatly is Qiqirn, a phantom in the shape of a huge, nearly hairless dog. Like the bear mentioned earlier, it only has hair on its mouth, feet, and the tips of its ears and tail. If it gets close to dogs or people, they go into fits and only recover when Qiqirn has left. It is extremely afraid of humans and runs away as soon as an angakoq spots it.
A very remarkable tornaq is the qaggim inua, i.e., master of the dancing house. The natives build large houses for feasting, singing, and dancing, which are devoted to spirits. This tornaq has the shape of a bandy legged man, his knees being bent outward and forward. He has not a single hair upon his entire body and no bones at the back of his head. To touch him would result in immediate death (see p. 636).
A very remarkable tornaq is the qaggim inua, meaning master of the dancing house. The locals build large houses for feasting, singing, and dancing that are dedicated to spirits. This tornaq looks like a man with bowlegs, with his knees bent outward and forward. He has no hair on his entire body and no bones in the back of his head. Touching him would lead to immediate death (see p. 636).
Besides these tornait, more powerful supernatural beings are known, who are “owners” (inua) of the stars and constellations and of meteorologic processes. Moon and sun are considered brother and sister, and in this the tradition of the Central Eskimo exactly corresponds with that of the Greenlanders. It is even known among the Eskimo of Point Barrow (Simpson, p. 940). From Repulse Bay (Aivillirmiut) a few scanty traces of this tradition are recorded by Rae (I, p. 79). He relates as follows:
Besides these tornait, there are more powerful supernatural beings known as the "owners" (inua) of the stars, constellations, and weather processes. The moon and sun are viewed as brother and sister, and this belief among the Central Eskimo aligns perfectly with that of the Greenlanders. It's even recognized by the Eskimo of Point Barrow (Simpson, p. 940). A few sparse references to this tradition have been noted by Rae from Repulse Bay (Aivillirmiut) (I, p. 79). He describes it as follows:
It is said that many years ago, not long after the creation of the world, there was a mighty conjurer, who gained so much power that at last he raised himself up into the heavens, taking with him his sister (a beautiful girl) and a fire. To the latter he added great quantities of fuel, which thus formed the sun. For some time he and his sister lived in great harmony, but at last they disagreed, and he, in addition to maltreating the lady in many ways, at last scorched the side of her face. She had suffered patiently all sorts of indignities, but the spoiling of her beauty was not to be borne; she therefore ran away from him and formed the moon, and continues so until this day. Her brother is still in chase of her, but although he gets near, he will never overtake her. When it is new moon, the burnt side of the face is towards us; when full moon, the reverse is the case.
It’s said that many years ago, not long after the world was created, there was a powerful magician who gained so much strength that he elevated himself into the heavens, taking his sister (a beautiful girl) and a fire with him. He added a huge amount of fuel to the fire, which then became the sun. For a while, he and his sister lived in great harmony, but eventually they had a falling out. He mistreated her in many ways and ultimately scorched the side of her face. She had endured countless humiliations, but the damage to her beauty was too much to handle; so she ran away from him and became the moon, where she remains to this day. Her brother is still in pursuit of her, but even though he gets close, he will never catch up. When it's a new moon, the burnt side of her face is visible to us; when it’s a full moon, the opposite side is shown.
The following form of the legend, which I received from some Akudnirmiut and Oqomiut, is almost identical with the Greenland one:
The following version of the legend, which I got from some Akudnirmiut and Oqomiut, is almost the same as the Greenland one:
In olden times a brother and his sister lived in a large village in which there was a singing house, and every night the sister with her playfellows enjoyed themselves in this house. Once upon a time, when all the lamps in the singing house were extinguished, somebody came in and outraged her. She was unable to recognize him; but 598 she blackened her hands with soot and when the same again happened besmeared the man’s back with it. When the lamps were relighted she saw that the violator was her brother. In great anger she sharpened a knife and cut off her breasts, which she offered to him, saying: “Since you seem to relish me, eat this.” Her brother fell into a passion and she fled from him, running about the room. She seized a piece of wood (with which the lamps are kept in order) which was burning brightly and rushed out of the house. The brother took another one, but in his pursuit he fell down and extinguished his light, which continued to glow only faintly. Gradually both were lifted up and continued their course in the sky, the sister being transformed into the sun, the brother into the moon. Whenever the new moon first appears she sings:
In ancient times, a brother and sister lived in a big village that had a singing house, where the sister had fun with her friends every night. One night, when all the lamps in the singing house went out, someone came in and assaulted her. She couldn’t recognize him, but 598 she blackened her hands with soot, and when it happened again, she smeared the man’s back with it. When the lamps were lit again, she saw that the attacker was her brother. Furious, she sharpened a knife and cut off her breasts, offering them to him, saying, “Since you seem to enjoy me, eat this.” Her brother became enraged, and she ran from him, darting around the room. She grabbed a piece of wood (used to keep the lamps in order) that was burning brightly and rushed out of the house. The brother took another piece, but as he chased after her, he fell and put out his light, which only glowed faintly afterward. Eventually, they were both lifted into the sky, the sister transformed into the sun and the brother into the moon. Whenever the new moon first appears, she sings:
Aningaga tapika, takirn tapika qaumidjatedlirpoq; qaumatitaudle.
Aningaga tapika, takirn tapika qaumidjatedlirpoq; qaumatitaudle.
Aningaga tapika, tikipoq tapika.
Aningaga tapika, tikipoq tapika.
(My brother up there, the moon up there begins to shine; he will be bright.
(My brother up there, the moon up there starts to shine; he will be bright.
My brother up there, he is coming up there.)
My brother up there, he's coming up there.
THE FLIGHT TO THE MOON.
There exists another tradition in regard to the spirit of the moon, which is also known to the Greenlanders. While in the first tradition the moon is a man carrying a glowing light, in the other she is the moon man’s house (Rink, p. 440). The legend, as told by the Oqomiut and Akudnirmiut, is the narrative of the flight of an angakoq to the moon and is as follows:
There is another tradition about the spirit of the moon, which is also known to the Greenlanders. In the first tradition, the moon is seen as a man carrying a bright light, while in the other, she represents the home of the moon man (Rink, p. 440). The legend, as recounted by the Oqomiut and Akudnirmiut, describes the story of an angakoq flying to the moon and goes like this:
A mighty angakoq, who had a bear for his tornaq, resolved to pay a visit to the moon. He sat down in the rear of his hut, turning his back toward the lamps, which had been extinguished. He had his hands tied up and a thong fastened around his knees and neck. Then he summoned his tornaq, which carried him rapidly through the air and brought him to the moon. He observed that the moon was a house, nicely covered with white deerskins, which the man in the moon used to dry near it. On each side of the entrance was the upper portion of the body of an enormous walrus, which threatened to tear in pieces the bold intruder. Though it was dangerous to pass by the fierce animals, the angakoq, by help of his tornaq, succeeded in entering the house.
A powerful angakoq, who had a bear as his tornaq, decided to visit the moon. He sat at the back of his hut, facing away from the extinguished lamps. His hands were tied, and he had a thong secured around his knees and neck. Then he called upon his tornaq, which quickly carried him through the air and took him to the moon. He saw that the moon was a house, nicely covered with white deerskins, which the man in the moon used to dry nearby. On either side of the entrance were the upper bodies of enormous walruses, ready to tear apart anyone who dared to intrude. Despite the danger of passing the fierce creatures, the angakoq, with the help of his tornaq, managed to enter the house.
In the passage he saw the only dog of the man of the moon, which is called Tirie´tiang and is dappled white and red. On entering the main room he perceived, to the left, a small additional building, in which a beautiful woman, the sun, sat before her lamp. As soon as she saw the angakoq entering she blew her fire, behind the blaze of which she hid herself. The man in the moon came to meet him kindly, stepping from the seat on the ledge and bidding the stranger welcome. Behind the lamps great heaps of venison and seal meat were piled up, but the man of the moon did not yet offer him anything. 599 He said: “My wife, Ululiernang, will soon enter and we will perform a dance. Mind that you do not laugh, else she will slit open your belly with her knife, take out your intestines, and give them to my ermine which lives in yon little house outside.”
In the passage, he saw the only dog of the man in the moon, named Tirie'tiang, which was dappled white and red. Upon entering the main room, he noticed a small additional building to the left, where a beautiful woman, the sun, sat in front of her lamp. As soon as she saw the angakoq walk in, she blew on her fire, hiding herself behind the flames. The man in the moon came out to greet him warmly, stepping down from his seat on the ledge and welcoming the stranger. Behind the lamps, there were large piles of venison and seal meat, but the man in the moon didn’t offer him anything yet. 599 He said, “My wife, Ululiernang, will be coming in soon, and we will dance. Just make sure you don’t laugh, or she will cut open your belly with her knife, take out your intestines, and give them to my ermine that lives in that little house outside.”
Before long a woman entered carrying an oblong vessel in which her ulo (see p. 518) lay. She put it on the floor and stooped forward, turning the vessel like a whirligig. Then she commenced dancing, and when she turned her back toward the angakoq it was made manifest that she was hollow. She had no back, backbone, or entrails, but only lungs and heart.
Before long, a woman came in holding an elongated container that had her ulo (see p. 518) inside. She set it down on the floor and leaned forward, spinning the container like a top. Then she started dancing, and when she turned her back to the angakoq, it became clear that she was hollow. She had no back, no spine, or internal organs, just lungs and a heart.
The man joined her dance and their attitudes and grimaces looked so funny that the angakoq could scarcely keep from laughing. But just at the right moment he called to mind the warnings of the man in the moon and rushed out of the house. The man cried after him, “Uqsureliktaleqdjuin” (“Provide yourself with your large white bear tornaq”).7 Thus he escaped unhurt.
The man joined her dance, and their expressions and gestures were so hilarious that the angakoq could barely hold back his laughter. But just at the right moment, he remembered the warnings from the man in the moon and dashed out of the house. The man called after him, “Uqsureliktaleqdjuin” (“Get your large white bear tornaq”).7 That’s how he got away unhurt.
Upon another visit he succeeded in mastering his inclination to laugh and was hospitably received by the man after the performance was finished. He showed him all around the house and let him look into a small additional building near the entrance. There he saw large herds of deer apparently roaming over vast plains, and the man of the moon allowed him to choose one animal, which fell immediately through a hole upon the earth. In another building he saw a profusion of seals swimming in an ocean and was allowed to pick out one of these also. At last the man in the moon sent him away, when his tornaq carried him back to his hut as quickly as he had left it.
Upon another visit, he managed to hold back his laughter and was warmly welcomed by the man after the show ended. The man showed him around the house and allowed him to peek into a small additional building near the entrance. There, he saw large herds of deer seemingly wandering over vast plains, and the man of the moon let him choose one animal, which immediately fell through a hole in the ground. In another building, he saw a multitude of seals swimming in an ocean and was allowed to pick one of those as well. Finally, the man in the moon sent him away, and his tornaq carried him back to his hut as quickly as he had left it.
During his visit to the moon his body had lain motionless and soulless, but now it revived. The thongs with which his hands had been fastened had fallen down, though they had been tied in firm knots. The angakoq felt almost exhausted, and when the lamps were relighted he related to the eagerly listening men his adventures during his flight to the moon.
During his trip to the moon, his body had lain still and lifeless, but now it came to life. The straps that had bound his hands had fallen away, even though they had been tied tightly. The angakoq felt nearly worn out, and when the lights were turned back on, he shared with the eagerly attentive men his experiences from his journey to the moon.
It is related in the course of this tradition that the man in the moon has a qaumat, some kind of light or fire, but I could not reach a satisfactory understanding of the meaning of this word. It is derived from qauq (daylight) and is used in Greenland for the moon herself. Among the Eskimo of Baffin Land it is only employed in the angakoq language, in which the moon is called qaumavun, the sun qaumativun. Another name of the moon is aninga (her brother), in reference to the first legend. The natives also believe that the man in the moon makes the snow. He is generally considered a protector of orphans and of the poor, and sometimes descends from his house on a sledge drawn by his dog, Tirie´tiang, in order to help them (see the tradition of Qaudjaqdjuq, p. 630).
It’s said in this tradition that the man in the moon has a qaumat, some sort of light or fire, but I couldn’t fully grasp what this word means. It comes from qauq (daylight) and is used in Greenland to refer to the moon itself. Among the Eskimo of Baffin Land, it’s only used in the angakoq language, where the moon is called qaumavun, and the sun is qaumativun. Another name for the moon is aninga (her brother), which relates to the first legend. The locals also believe that the man in the moon creates the snow. He’s generally viewed as a protector of orphans and the poor, and sometimes he comes down from his home on a sled pulled by his dog, Tirie´tiang, to help them (see the tradition of Qaudjaqdjuq, p. 630).
KADLU THE THUNDERER.
It is said that three sisters make the lightning, the thunder, and the rain. The names of two of them are Ingnirtung (the one who strikes the fire) and Udluqtung (the one who rubs the skins), whose second name is Kadlu (thunder), while that of the third I could not ascertain. They live in a large house the walls of which are supported by whale ribs. It stands in the far west, at a great distance from the sea, as Kadlu and her sisters do not like to go near it. If an Eskimo should happen to enter the house he must hasten away or Ingnirtung will immediately kill him with her lightning. Even the stones are afraid of her and jump down the hills whenever they see the lightning and hear the thunder. The faces of the sisters are entirely black and they wear no clothes at all.(?) Ingnirtung makes the lightning by striking two red stones together (flint). Kadlu makes the thunder by rubbing sealskins and singing. The third sister makes the rain by urinating. They procure food by striking reindeer with the lightning, which singes their skins and roasts their flesh. The Akudnirmiut say that beyond Iglulik, on the continent of America, a large tribe of Eskimo live whom they call Kakī´joq. The women of the tribe are said to have rings tattooed round their eyes. These natives offer the dried skins of a species of small seals to Kadlu, who uses them for making the thunder.
It’s said that three sisters create the lightning, thunder, and rain. Two of them are named Ingnirtung (the one who strikes the fire) and Udluqtung (the one who rubs the skins), with Kadlu (thunder) being her second name. I could not find out the name of the third sister. They live in a large house supported by whale ribs. It’s located far in the west, far from the sea, as Kadlu and her sisters prefer to stay away from it. If an Eskimo happens to enter their house, he must leave quickly, or Ingnirtung will kill him with her lightning. Even the stones are afraid of her and leap down the hills whenever they see the lightning and hear the thunder. The sisters have completely black faces and wear no clothes at all. Ingnirtung creates lightning by striking two red stones together (flint). Kadlu produces thunder by rubbing sealskins and singing. The third sister creates the rain by urinating. They get food by striking reindeer with lightning, which singes their skins and roasts their flesh. The Akudnirmiut say that beyond Iglulik, on the continent of America, there’s a large tribe of Eskimos called Kakī´joq. The women in this tribe are said to have rings tattooed around their eyes. These natives offer dried skins of a species of small seals to Kadlu, who uses them to make the thunder.
FEASTS, RELIGIOUS AND SECULAR.
The Eskimo have some very interesting feasts, most of which are closely connected with their religious notions. In summer feasts are celebrated in the open air, but in winter a house, called qaggi, or, as we may call it, singing house, is built for that purpose.
The Eskimos have some really interesting feasts, most of which are closely tied to their religious beliefs. In the summer, these feasts are held outdoors, but in the winter, they build a house called a qaggi, or what we might call a singing house, for that purpose.
Fig. 531. Diagram showing interior of qaggi or singing house among eastern tribes.
Fig. 531. Diagram showing the interior of a qaggi or singing house among eastern tribes.
The plan of the house which is used by the eastern tribes is represented in Fig. 531. It is a large snow dome about fifteen feet in 601 height and twenty feet in diameter, without any lining. In the center there is a snow pillar five feet high, on which the lamps stand. When the inhabitants of a village assemble in this building for singing and dancing the married women stand in a row next the wall. The unmarried women form a circle inside the former, while the men sit in the innermost row. The children stand in two groups, one at each side of the door. When the feast begins, a man takes up the drum (kilaut), which will be described presently, steps into the open space next the door, and begins singing and dancing. Among the stone foundations of Niutang, in Kingnait (Cumberland Sound), there is a qaggi built on the same plan as the snow structure. Probably it was covered with a snow roof when in use.
The layout of the house used by the eastern tribes is shown in Fig. 531. It’s a large snow dome about fifteen feet tall and twenty feet wide, without any lining. In the center, there’s a five-foot-high snow pillar where the lamps are placed. When the villagers gather in this building for singing and dancing, the married women stand in a row against the wall. The unmarried women form a circle inside that row, while the men sit in the innermost row. The children stand in two groups, one on each side of the door. When the feast starts, a man picks up the drum (kilaut), which will be described shortly, steps into the open space
Fig. 532. Plan of Hudson Bay qaggi or singing house. (From Hall II, p. 220.)
Fig. 532. Layout of Hudson Bay qaggi or singing house. (From Hall II, p. 220.)
Hall gives the plan of the Hudson Bay qaggi (Fig. 532), a copy of which is here introduced, as well as his description of the drum (Fig. 533), which I have never seen made (Hall II, p. 96):
Hall presents the layout of the Hudson Bay qaggi (Fig. 532), a version of which is included here, along with his description of the drum (Fig. 533), which I have never personally observed being made (Hall II, p. 96):
The drum is made from the skin of the deer [or seal], which is stretched over a hoop made of wood, or of bone from the fin of a whale, by the use of a strong, braided cord of sinew passed around a groove on the outside. The hoop is about 2½ inches wide, 1½ inches thick, and 3 feet in diameter, the whole instrument weighing about 4 pounds. The wooden drumstick, 10 inches in length and 3 inches in diameter, is called a kentun. ***
The drum is made from the skin of a deer [or seal], which is stretched over a hoop made of wood or whale fin bone, using a strong, braided cord of sinew passed around a groove on the outside. The hoop is about 2½ inches wide, 1½ inches thick, and 3 feet in diameter, with the entire instrument weighing around 4 pounds. The wooden drumstick, which is 10 inches long and 3 inches in diameter, is called a kentun. Understood! Please provide the text you would like me to modernize.
The deerskin which is to be the head of the instrument is kept frozen when not in use. It is then thoroughly saturated with water, drawn over the hoop, and temporarily fastened in its place by a piece of sinew. A line of heavy, twisted sinew, about 50 feet long, is now wound tightly on the groove on the outside of the hoop, binding down the skin. This cord is fastened to the handle of the kilaut [drum], which is made to turn by the force of several men (while its other end is 602 held firmly), and the line eased out as required. To do this a man sits on the bed-platform, “having one or two turns of the line about his body, which is encased in furred deerskins, and empaled by four upright pieces of wood.” Tension is secured by using a round stick of wood as a lever on the edge of the skin, drawing it from beneath the cord. When any whirring sound is heard, little whisps of reindeer hair are tucked in between the skin and the hoop, until the head is as tight as a drum.
The deerskin that will be the top of the instrument is kept frozen when not in use. It's then soaked in water, stretched over the hoop, and temporarily secured in place with a piece of sinew. A heavy, twisted sinew line, about 50 feet long, is wound tightly around the groove on the outside of the hoop, holding the skin down. This cord is attached to the handle of the kilaut [drum], which is turned by the force of several men (while the other end is held firmly), and the line is loosened as needed. To do this, a man sits on the bed-platform, having one or two loops of the line around his body, which is wrapped in fur-lined deerskins and supported by four upright pieces of wood. Tension is achieved by using a round stick of wood as a lever on the edge of the skin, pulling it from beneath the cord. When a whirring sound is heard, small tufts of reindeer hair are tucked in between the skin and the hoop until the head is as tight as a drum.
performer, who strikes the edge of the rim opposite that over which the skin is stretched. He holds the drum in different positions, but keeps it in a constant fan-like motion by his hand and by the blows of the kentun struck alternately on the opposite sides of the edge. Skillfully keeping the drum vibrating on the handle, he accompanies this with grotesque motions of the body, and at intervals with a song, while the women keep up their own Inuit songs, one after another, through the whole performance.
performer, who hits the edge of the rim opposite the side where the skin is stretched. He holds the drum in various positions but keeps it moving in a constant fan-like motion with his hand and by alternating hits with the kentun on the opposite sides of the edge. Skillfully maintaining the drum's vibration on the handle, he pairs this with exaggerated body movements and, at intervals, a song, while the women continue their own Inuit songs, one after another, throughout the entire performance.
The feast is described as follows:
The feast is described as follows:
As usual the women sat on the platform Turk fashion; the men, behind them with extended legs. The women were gayly dressed. They wore on each side of the face an enormous pigtail, made by wrapping their hair on a small wooden roller a foot in length; strips of reindeer-fur being wrapped with the hair [see p. 559]. These were black and white for those who had sons and black only for those who had none. Shining ornaments were worn on the head and on the breast they had masonic-like aprons, the groundwork of which was of a flaming red color, ornamented with glass beads of many colors.
As usual, the women sat on the platform in a Turk style, while the men sat behind them with their legs stretched out. The women were brightly dressed. They had large pigtails on each side of their faces, created by wrapping their hair around a small wooden roller about a foot long; strips of reindeer fur were wrapped with the hair [see p. 559]. Those who had sons wore black and white, while those without sons wore only black. They adorned their heads with shiny decorations and wore masonic-like aprons with a bright red background, decorated with colorful glass beads.
In Cumberland Sound the women also wear pigtails at the celebration of these feasts. The drum is sometimes played with the wrist of the right hand instead of the beater.
In Cumberland Sound, the women also sport pigtails during the celebration of these feasts. Sometimes, the drum is played with the wrist of the right hand instead of a beater.
Every singing house is dedicated to a tornaq, the qaggim inua, as mentioned above. For this reason all these performances may be considered religious feasts.
Every singing house is dedicated to a tornaq, the qaggim inua, as mentioned above. For this reason, all these performances can be seen as religious celebrations.
The songs are always composed by the singer himself. Satiric songs are great favorites on these occasions. While the men listen in silence the women join in the chorus, amna aya, the never failing 603 end of each verse. The dancer remains on one spot only, stamping rhythmically with the feet, swinging the upper part of his body, and at the same time playing the kilaut. While dancing he always strips the upper part of the body, keeping on only trousers and boots. Singing and dancing are alternated with wrestling matches and playing at hook and crook. Almost every great success in hunting is celebrated in the qaggi, and especially the capture of a whale. Such a feast has been described by Parry.
The songs are always written by the singer himself. Satirical songs are very popular during these events. While the men listen quietly, the women join in the chorus, "amna aya," which is the constant end of each verse. The dancer stays in one spot, stamping rhythmically with his feet, swaying the upper part of his body, and at the same time playing the kilaut. While dancing, he always removes the upper part of his clothing, wearing only trousers and boots. Singing and dancing are alternated with wrestling matches and games like hook and crook. Almost every big success in hunting is celebrated in the qaggi, especially when a whale is caught. Parry has described such a feast.
Fig. 534. Plans of remains of supposed qaggin or singing houses. (From Parry II, p. 362.)
Fig. 534. Plans of the remains of what are believed to be qaggin or singing houses. (From Parry II, p. 362.)
The stone foundations observed by Parry and copied here (Fig. 534) are probably the remains of singing houses. Parry’s description is as follows (II, p. 362):
The stone foundations that Parry noted and included here (Fig. 534) are likely the remnants of singing houses. Parry’s description is as follows (II, p. 362):
It appears that the whole whale or a principal part of it is dragged into the enclosure, where some of the men are employed in cutting it up and throwing the pieces over the wall to the rest, who stand ready to receive them outside; while within the women range themselves in a circle around the whale and continue singing during the operation. * * * Each of these structures * * * was the distinct property of a particular individual; and had probably, in its turn, been the seat of feasting and merriment either to the present owner, or those from whom he had inherited it.
It looks like the entire whale, or at least a large part of it, is pulled into the enclosure, where some of the men are busy cutting it up and tossing the pieces over the wall to the others waiting outside. Meanwhile, the women form a circle around the whale and keep singing throughout the process. * * * Each of these structures * * * was owned by a specific individual and had likely served as a spot for celebrations and joy either for the current owner or for those from whom he inherited it.
Great feasts closely connected with the Sedna tradition are celebrated every fall.
Great feasts closely linked to the Sedna tradition are celebrated every fall.
When late in the fall storms rage over the land and release the sea from the icy fetters by which it is as yet but slightly bound, when the loosened floes are driven one against the other and break up with loud crashes, when the cakes of ice are piled in wild disorder one upon another, the Eskimo believes he hears the voices of spirits which inhabit the mischief laden air.
When late in the fall storms lash the land and free the sea from the icy chains that still hold it tightly, when the loosened ice floes collide with each other and shatter with loud crashes, and when the ice chunks are haphazardly stacked on top of one another, the Eskimo thinks he hears the voices of spirits that inhabit the troublesome air.
The spirits of the dead, the tupilaq, knock wildly at the huts, which they cannot enter, and woe to the unhappy person whom they can lay hold of. He immediately sickens and a speedy death is regarded as sure to come. The wicked qiqirn pursues the dogs, which die with convulsions and cramps as soon as they see him. All the countless spirits of evil are aroused, striving to bring sickness and death, bad weather, and failure in hunting. The worst visitors are Sedna, mistress of the under world, and her father, to whose share the dead 604 Inuit fall. While the other spirits fill the air and the water, she rises from under the ground.
The spirits of the dead, the tupilaq, bang wildly on the huts, which they can’t enter, and anyone they can grab suffers. They quickly get sick, and a fast death seems certain. The evil qiqirn chases after the dogs, which convulse and cramp as soon as they spot him. All the countless evil spirits stir, trying to bring illness and death, bad weather, and failed hunts. The worst visitors are Sedna, the ruler of the underworld, and her father, who claims the dead 604 Inuit. While the other spirits fill the air and the water, she rises up from below the ground.
It is then a busy season for the wizards. In every hut we may hear them singing and praying; conjuring of the spirits is going on in every house. The lamps burn low. The wizard sits in a mystic gloom in the rear of the hut. He has thrown off his outer coat and drawn the hood of his inner garment over his head, while he mutters indescribable sounds, unnatural to a human voice. At last the guardian spirit responds to the invocation. The angakoq lies in a trance and when he comes to himself he promises in incoherent phrases the help of the good spirit against the tupilaq and informs the credulous, affrighted Inuit how they can escape from the dreaded ghosts.
It’s a busy season for the wizards. In every hut, you can hear them singing and praying; spirit conjuring is happening in every house. The lamps flicker low. The wizard sits in a mystical gloom at the back of the hut. He has taken off his outer coat and pulled the hood of his inner garment over his head, while he mutters strange sounds that don't seem human. Finally, the guardian spirit responds to the call. The angakoq lies in a trance, and when he comes to, he incoherently promises the support of the good spirit against the tupilaq and tells the frightened Inuit how they can avoid the feared ghosts.
The hardest task, that of driving away Sedna, is reserved for the most powerful angakoq. A rope is coiled on the floor of a large hut in such a manner as to leave a small opening at the top, which represents the breathing hole of a seal. Two angakut stand by the side of it, one of them holding the seal spear in his left hand, as if he were watching at the seal hole in the winter, the other holding the harpoon line. Another angakoq, whose office it is to lure Sedna up with a magic song, sits at the back of the hut. At last she comes up through the hard rocks and the wizard hears her heavy breathing; now she emerges from the ground and meets the angakoq waiting at the hole. She is harpooned and sinks away in angry haste, drawing after her the harpoon, to which the two men hold with all their strength. Only by a desperate effort does she tear herself away from it and return to her dwelling in Adlivun. Nothing is left with the two men but the blood sprinkled harpoon, which they proudly show to the Inuit.
The toughest job, driving away Sedna, is given to the most powerful angakoq. A rope is coiled on the floor of a big hut in such a way that there’s a small opening at the top, representing a seal’s breathing hole. Two angakut stand beside it, one holding the seal spear in his left hand, as if he’s waiting for the seal in the winter, while the other holds the harpoon line. Another angakoq, tasked with luring Sedna up with a magical song, sits at the back of the hut. Finally, she comes up through the hard rocks, and the wizard hears her heavy breathing; then she surfaces from the ground and meets the angakoq waiting at the hole. She gets harpooned and sinks away in a fit of anger, pulling the harpoon with her, while the two men hold on with all their strength. Only by a desperate effort does she break free and return to her home in Adlivun. All that’s left for the two men is the blood-sprinkled harpoon, which they proudly show to the Inuit.
Sedna and the other evil spirits are at last driven away, and on the following day a great festival for young and old is celebrated in honor of the event. But they must still be careful, for the wounded Sedna is greatly enraged and will seize any one whom she can find out of his hut; so on this day they all wear protecting amulets (koukparmiutang) on the tops of their hoods. Parts of the first garment which they wore after birth are used for this purpose.
Sedna and the other evil spirits are finally driven away, and the next day, a huge festival for everyone, young and old, is celebrated to mark the occasion. However, they still need to be cautious, as the injured Sedna is very angry and will grab anyone she can find outside their hut. So, on this day, everyone wears protective amulets (koukparmiutang) on the tops of their hoods. Pieces of the first clothing they wore after birth are used for this purpose.
The men assemble early in the morning in the middle of the settlement. As soon as they have all got together they run screaming and jumping around the houses, following the course of the sun (nunajisartung or kaivitijung). A few, dressed in women’s jackets, run in the opposite direction. These are those who were born in abnormal presentations. The circuit made, they visit every hut, and the woman of the house must always be in waiting for them. When she hears the noise of the band she comes out and throws a dish containing little gifts of meat, ivory trinkets, and articles of sealskin into the yelling crowd, of which each one helps himself to what he can get. No hut is omitted in this round (irqatatung).
The men gather early in the morning in the center of the settlement. Once everyone is together, they run around the houses, screaming and jumping, following the path of the sun (nunajisartung or kaivitijung). A few of them, wearing women’s jackets, run the other way. These are the ones who were born in unusual positions. After making their circuit, they visit every hut, and the woman of the house must be ready to greet them. When she hears the noise of the group, she comes out and throws a dish filled with small gifts of meat, ivory trinkets, and sealskin items into the shouting crowd, where everyone grabs what they can. No hut is left out during this round (irqatatung).
The crowd next divides itself into two parties, the ptarmigans (aχigirn), those who were born in the winter, and the ducks (aggirn), or the children of summer. A large rope of sealskin is stretched out. One party takes one end of it and tries with all its might to drag the opposite party over to its side. The others hold fast to the rope and try as hard to make ground for themselves. If the ptarmigans give way the summer has won the game and fine weather may be expected to prevail through the winter (nussueraqtung).
The crowd then splits into two groups: the ptarmigans (aχigirn), who were born in the winter, and the ducks (aggirn), or the children of summer. A big rope made of sealskin is laid out. One group grabs one end of the rope and tries their hardest to pull the other group to their side. The other group holds on tightly to the rope, trying just as hard to gain ground for themselves. If the ptarmigans give in, summer wins the game and good weather is likely to last through the winter (nussueraqtung).
The contest of the seasons having been decided, the women bring out of a hut a large kettle of water and each person takes his drinking cup. They all stand as near the kettle as possible, while the oldest man among them steps out first. He dips a cup of water from the vessel, sprinkles a few drops on the ground, turns his face toward the home of his youth, and tells his name and the place of his birth (oχsoaχsavepunga——me, I was born in ——). He is followed by an aged woman, who announces her name and home, and then all the others do the same, down to the young children, who are represented by their mothers. Only the parents of children born during the last year are forbidden to partake in this ceremony. As the words of the old are listened to respectfully, so those of the distinguished hunters are received with demonstrative applause and those of the others with varying degrees of attention, in some cases even with joking and raillery (imitijung).
The contest of the seasons has been settled, and the women bring out a large kettle of water from a hut, and everyone takes their drinking cup. They all stand as close to the kettle as possible, while the oldest man steps forward first. He fills his cup with water from the kettle, sprinkles a few drops on the ground, turns to face the home of his youth, and shares his name and place of birth (oχsoaχsavepunga——me, I was born in ——). Next, an elderly woman steps up to announce her name and home, and then everyone else follows suit, down to the young children, who are represented by their mothers. Only the parents of children born in the last year are not allowed to participate in this ceremony. The words of the elders are listened to with respect, while those of the distinguished hunters receive loud applause, and the others are met with varying levels of attention, sometimes even with jokes and teasing (imitijung).
Now arises a cry of surprise and all eyes are turned toward a hut out of which stalk two gigantic figures. They wear heavy boots; their legs are swelled out to a wonderful thickness with several pairs of breeches; the shoulders of each are covered by a woman’s over-jacket and the faces by tattooed masks of sealskins. In the right hand each carries the seal spear, on the back of each is an inflated buoy of sealskin, and in the left hand the scraper. Silently, with long strides, the qailertetang (Fig. 535) approach the assembly, who, screaming, press back from them. The pair solemnly lead the men to a suitable spot and set them in a row, and the women in another opposite them. They match the men and women in pairs and these pairs run, pursued by the qailertetang, to the hut of the woman, where they are for the following day and night man and wife (nulianititijung). Having performed this duty, the qailertetang stride down to the shore and invoke the good north wind, which brings fair weather, while they warn off the unfavorable south wind.
Now there's a gasp of surprise, and everyone turns to look at a hut from which two massive figures emerge. They wear heavy boots; their legs are swollen with several pairs of pants; each has a woman’s over-jacket draped over their shoulders, and their faces are concealed by tattooed sealskin masks. In their right hands, each holds a seal spear, and on their backs is an inflated sealskin buoy, while in their left hands, they carry a scraper. Silently, with long strides, the qailertetang (Fig. 535) approach the crowd, who scream and back away from them. The duo solemnly directs the men to a suitable spot and arranges them in a line, facing another line of women. They pair off the men and women, and these pairs run, chased by the qailertetang, to the woman's hut, where for the next day and night, they will be husband and wife (nulianititijung). After completing this task, the qailertetang walk down to the shore to call on the good north wind, which brings fair weather, while warning against the unfavorable south wind.
As soon as the incantation is over, all the men attack the qailertetang with great noise. They act as if they had weapons in their hands and would kill both spirits. One pretends to probe them with a spear, another to stab them with a knife, one to cut off their arms and legs, another to beat them unmercifully on the head. The buoys which they carry on their backs are ripped open and collapse and soon they both lie as if dead beside their broken weapons (pilektung). 606 The Eskimo leave them to get their drinking cups and the qailertetang awake to new life. Each man fills his sealskin with water, passes a cup to them, and inquires about the future, about the fortunes of the hunt and the events of life. The qailertetang answer in murmurs which the questioner must interpret for himself.
As soon as the chanting ends, all the men rush at the qailertetang with loud shouts. They act as if they have weapons in their hands and are ready to kill both spirits. One pretends to poke them with a spear, another to stab them with a knife, one to chop off their arms and legs, and another to hit them hard on the head. The buoys they carry on their backs burst open and collapse, and soon both of them lie seemingly dead next to their shattered weapons (pilektung). 606 The Eskimo leave them to grab their drinking cups, and the qailertetang come back to life. Each man fills his sealskin with water, hands a cup to them, and asks about the future, the success of the hunt, and life’s events. The qailertetang respond in low murmurs that the questioner has to interpret for himself.
Fig. 535. Qailertetang, a masked figure. (From a sketch by the author.)
Fig. 535. Qailertetang, a masked figure. (From a sketch by the author.)
The evening is spent in playing ball, which is whipped all around the settlement (ajuktaqtung). (See Appendix, Note 6.)
The evening is spent playing ball, which is tossed all around the settlement (ajuktaqtung). (See Appendix, Note 6.)
This feast is celebrated as here described in Cumberland Sound and Nugumiut. Hall and Kumlien make a few observations in regard to it, but the latter has evidently misunderstood its meaning. His description is as follows (p. 43):
This feast is celebrated as described here in Cumberland Sound and Nugumiut. Hall and Kumlien make a few observations about it, but the latter has clearly misunderstood its significance. His description is as follows (p. 43):
An angakoq dresses himself up in the most hideous manner, having several pairs of pants on among the rest, and a horrid looking mask of skins. The men and women now range themselves in separate and opposite ranks, and the angakoq takes 607 his place between them. He then picks out a man and conducts him to a woman in the opposite ranks. This couple then go to the woman’s hut and have a grand spree for a day or two. This manner of proceeding is kept up till all the women but one are disposed of. This one is always the angakoq’s choice, and her he reserves for himself.
An angakoq dresses in a very strange way, wearing multiple pairs of pants and a gruesome mask made of animal skins. The men and women line up in separate and opposing groups, and the angakoq takes his position between them. He then selects a man and leads him to a woman in the opposite line. The couple goes to the woman's hut and has a big celebration for a day or two. This process continues until all the women are paired off except for one. This last woman is always the angakoq's first choice, and he keeps her for himself.
Another description by Kumlien (p. 19) evidently refers to the same feast:
Another description by Kumlien (p. 19) clearly refers to the same feast:
They have an interesting custom or superstition, namely, the killing of the evil spirit of the deer; sometime during the winter or early in spring, at any rate before they can go deer hunting, they congregate together and dispose of this imaginary evil. The chief ancut [angakoq], or medicine man, is the main performer. He goes through a number of gyrations and contortions, constantly hallooing and calling, till suddenly the imaginary deer is among them. Now begins a lively time. Every one is screaming, running, jumping, spearing, and stabbing at the imaginary deer, till one would think a whole madhouse was let loose. Often this deer proves very agile, and must be hard to kill, for I have known them to keep this performance up for days; in fact, till they were completely exhausted.
They have an interesting custom or superstition about killing the evil spirit of the deer. Sometime during the winter or early spring, before they can go deer hunting, they gather together to get rid of this imaginary evil. The chief ancut [angakoq], or medicine man, is the main performer. He goes through a series of movements and gestures, constantly shouting and calling until the imaginary deer appears among them. Then the fun begins. Everyone is screaming, running, jumping, spearing, and stabbing at the imaginary deer, making it seem like a madhouse. This deer is often very quick and difficult to catch, as I've seen them continue this performance for days, in fact, until they are completely worn out.
During one of these performances an old man speared the deer, another knocked out an eye, a third stabbed him, and so on till he was dead. Those who are able or fortunate enough to inflict some injury on this bad deer, especially he who inflicts the death blow, is considered extremely lucky, as he will have no difficulty in procuring as many deer as he wants, for there is no longer an evil spirit to turn his bullets or arrows from their course.
During one of these performances, an old man stabbed the deer, another person knocked out an eye, a third one stabbed him, and so on until he was dead. Those who can or are lucky enough to cause some harm to this bad deer, especially the one who delivers the final blow, is seen as very lucky, as they will have no trouble getting as many deer as they want, since there’s no longer an evil spirit to deflect their bullets or arrows.
I could not learn anything about this ceremony, though I asked all the persons with whom Kumlien had had intercourse. Probably there was some misunderstanding as to the meaning of their feast during the autumn which induced him to give this report.
I couldn't find out anything about this ceremony, even though I asked everyone who had interacted with Kumlien. There was probably some confusion about the significance of their autumn feast that led him to give this report.
Hall describes the feast as celebrated by the Nugumiut (I, p. 528), as follows:
Hall describes the feast celebrated by the Nugumiut (I, p. 528) as follows:
At a time of the year apparently answering to our Christmas, they have a general meeting in a large igdlu [snow house] on a certain evening. There the angakoq prays on behalf of the people for the public prosperity through the subsequent year. Then follows something like a feast. The next day all go out into the open air and form in a circle; in the centre is placed a vessel of water, and each member of the company brings a piece of meat, the kind being immaterial. The circle being formed, each person eats his or her meat in silence, thinking of Sedna, and wishing for good things. Then one in the circle takes a cup, dips up some of the water, all the time thinking of Sedna, and drinks it; and then, before passing the cup to another, states audibly the time and the place of his or her birth. This ceremony is performed by all in succession. Finally, presents of various articles are thrown from one to another, with the idea that each will receive of Sedna good things in proportion to the liberality here shown.
At a time of year that corresponds to our Christmas, they hold a general meeting in a large igloo on a specific evening. There, the angakoq prays for the well-being of the people for the coming year. This is followed by a kind of feast. The next day, everyone goes outside and forms a circle; in the center is a container of water, and each person brings a piece of meat, any kind will do. Once the circle is formed, each person eats their meat in silence, thinking of Sedna and wishing for good things. Then, one person in the circle takes a cup, dips some of the water, still thinking of Sedna, and drinks it; before passing the cup to the next person, they state out loud their birth time and place. This ceremony is repeated by everyone in turn. Lastly, presents are exchanged among the group, with the belief that each will receive good things from Sedna in proportion to their generosity shown here.
Soon after this occasion, at a time which answers to our New Year’s day, two men start out, one of them being dressed to represent a woman, and go to every house in the village, blowing out the light in each. The lights are afterwards rekindled from a fresh fire. When Taqulitu [Hall’s well known companion in his journeys] was asked the meaning of this, she replied, “New sun—new light,” implying a belief that the sun was at that time renewed for the year.
Soon after this event, around what we now call New Year’s Day, two men set out, one of them dressed as a woman, visiting every house in the village and blowing out the light in each one. The lights are later relit from a new fire. When Taqulitu (Hall’s well-known travel companion) was asked what this meant, she replied, “New sun—new light,” suggesting a belief that the sun was renewed for the year at that time.
Inasmuch as Hall did not see the feast himself, but had only a description by an Eskimo, into which he introduced points of similarity with Christian feasts, it may be looked upon as fairly agreeing 608 with the feast of the Oqomiut. The latter part corresponds to the celebration of the feast as it is celebrated in Akudnirn.8
Insofar as Hall didn't witness the feast himself but only received a description from an Eskimo, which he then compared to Christian feasts, it can be seen as reasonably aligning with the feast of the Oqomiut. The latter part matches the way the feast is celebrated in Akudnirn.8
According to a statement in the journal of Hall’s second expedition (II, p. 219) masks are also used on the western shore of Hudson Bay, where it seems that all the natives disguise themselves on this occasion.
According to a statement in the journal of Hall’s second expedition (II, p. 219), masks are also used on the western shore of Hudson Bay, where it seems that all the locals disguise themselves for this occasion.
The Akudnirmiut celebrate the feast in the following way: The qailertetang do not act a part there, but other masks take their place. They are called mirqussang and represent a man and his wife. They wear masks of the skin of the ground seal, only that of the woman being tattooed. The hair of the man is arranged in a bunch protruding from the forehead (sulubaut), that of the woman in a pigtail on each side and a large knot at the back of the head. Their left legs are tied up by a thong running around the neck and the knee, compelling them to hobble. They have neither seal float and spear nor inflated legs, but carry the skin scraper. They must try to enter the huts while the Inuit hold a long sealskin thong before them to keep them off. If they fall down in the attempt to cross it they are thoroughly beaten with a short whip or with sticks. After having succeeded in entering the huts they blow out all the fires.
The Akudnirmiut celebrate the feast like this: The qailertetang don’t participate, but other masks take their place. They’re called mirqussang and represent a man and his wife. They wear masks made from the skin of a ground seal, with the woman’s mask being tattooed. The man’s hair is styled in a bunch sticking out from his forehead (sulubaut), while the woman’s hair is in pigtails on either side and a big knot at the back of her head. Their left legs are tied up with a thong that goes around their neck and knee, forcing them to hobble. They don’t have a seal float or spear, nor do they use inflated legs, but they carry a skin scraper. They have to try to get into the huts while the Inuit hold a long sealskin thong in front of them to block their way. If they fall while trying to cross it, they get hit with a short whip or sticks. Once they manage to get inside the huts, they blow out all the fires.
The parts of the feast already described as celebrated in Cumberland Sound seem not to be customary in Akudnirn, the conjuration of Sedna and the exchanges of wives excepted, which are also practiced here. Sometimes the latter ceremony takes place the night before the feast. It is called suluiting or quvietung.
The elements of the feast that have been described in Cumberland Sound don't appear to be traditional in Akudnirn, except for the conjuration of Sedna and the swapping of wives, which are also practiced here. Sometimes the latter ceremony happens the night before the feast. It's called suluiting or quvietung.
When it is quite dark a number of Inuit come out of their huts and run crying all round their settlements. Wherever anybody is asleep they climb upon the roof of his hut and rouse him by screaming and shouting until all have assembled outside. Then a woman and a man (the mirqussang) sit down in the snow. The man holds a knife (sulung) in his hand, from which the feast takes its name, and sings:
When it’s really dark, several Inuit come out of their huts and run around their settlements, crying out. Wherever someone is asleep, they climb onto the roof of his hut and wake him up by screaming and shouting until everyone has gathered outside. Then a woman and a man (the mirqussang) sit down in the snow. The man holds a knife (sulung) in his hand, which gives the feast its name, and starts to sing:
Oangaja jaja jajaja aja.
Oangaja jaja jajaja aja.
Pissiungmipadlo panginejernago
Pissiungmipadlo panginejernago
Qodlungutaokpan panginejerlugping
Qodlungutaokpan panginejerlugping
Pissiungmipadlo panginejernago.
Pissiungmipadlo panginejernago.
To this song the woman keeps time by moving her body and her arms, at the same time flinging snow on the bystanders. Then the whole company goes into the singing house and joins in dancing and singing. This done, the men must leave the house and stand outside while the mirqussang watch the entrance. The women continue singing and leave the house one by one. They are awaited by the mirqussang, who lead every one to one of the men standing about. The pair must re-enter the singing house and walk around the lamp, 609 all the men and women crying, “Hrr! hrr!” from both corners of the mouth. Then they go to the woman’s hut, where they stay during the ensuing night. The feast is frequently celebrated by all the tribes of Davis and Hudson Strait, and even independently of the great feast described above.
To this song, the woman sways her body and arms, at the same time tossing snow at the onlookers. Then the whole group goes into the singing house to join in dancing and singing. Once that's done, the men have to leave the house and wait outside while the mirqussang watch the entrance. The women keep singing and exit the house one by one. They are greeted by the mirqussang, who guide each of them to one of the men standing nearby. The couple has to go back into the singing house and walk around the lamp, 609 with all the men and women shouting, “Hrr! hrr!” from both corners of their mouths. Then they head to the woman’s hut, where they stay for the rest of the night. The feast is often celebrated by all the tribes of Davis and Hudson Strait, even independently of the big feast mentioned earlier.
The day after, the men frequently join in a shooting match. A target is set up, at which they shoot their arrows. As soon as a man hits, the women, who stand looking on, rush forward and rub noses with him.
The next day, the men often participate in a shooting contest. A target is set up for them to shoot their arrows at. As soon as a man scores a hit, the women who are watching rush forward and rub noses with him.
If a stranger unknown to the inhabitants of a settlement arrives on a visit he is welcomed by the celebration of a great feast. Among the southeastern tribes the natives arrange themselves in a row, one man standing in front of it. The stranger approaches slowly, his arms folded and his head inclined toward the right side. Then the native strikes him with all his strength on the right cheek and in his turn inclines his head awaiting the stranger’s blow (tigluiqdjung). While this is going on the other men are playing at ball and singing (igdlukitaqtung). Thus they continue until one of the combatants is vanquished.
If a stranger unknown to the people of a settlement arrives for a visit, he is welcomed with a big feast. Among the southeastern tribes, the locals line up with one man standing in front. The stranger approaches slowly, arms crossed and head tilted to the right. Then the local guy strikes him with all his strength on the right cheek and leans his head in return, waiting for the stranger's hit (tigluiqdjung). While this happens, the other men are playing ball and singing (igdlukitaqtung). They keep this going until one of the fighters is defeated.
The ceremonies of greeting among the western tribes are similar to those of the eastern, but in addition “boxing, wrestling, and knife testing” are mentioned by travelers who have visited them. In Davis Strait and probably in all the other countries the game of “hook and crook” is always played on the arrival of a stranger (pakijumijartung). Two men sit down on a large skin, after having stripped the upper part of their bodies, and each tries to stretch out the bent arm of the other. These games are sometimes dangerous, as the victor has the right to kill his adversary; but generally the feast ends peaceably. The ceremonies of the western tribes in greeting a stranger are much feared by their eastern neighbors and therefore intercourse is somewhat restricted. The meaning of the duel, according to the natives themselves, is “that the two men in meeting wish to know which of them is the better man.” The similarity of these ceremonies with those of Greenland, where the game of hook and crook and wrestling matches have been customary, is quite striking, as is that of the explanation of these ceremonies.
The greeting ceremonies among the western tribes are similar to those in the east, but travelers who have visited them also mention “boxing, wrestling, and knife testing.” In Davis Strait and likely in other regions, the game of “hook and crook” is always played when a stranger arrives (pakijumijartung). Two men sit on a large skin after taking off the upper part of their clothes, and each tries to stretch out the other's bent arm. These games can sometimes be dangerous, as the winner has the right to kill his opponent; however, most of the time the feast ends peacefully. The greeting ceremonies of the western tribes are greatly feared by their eastern neighbors, which limits their interactions. According to the natives, the purpose of the duel is “to determine which of the two men is the better man.” The similarities between these ceremonies and those of Greenland, where the games of hook and crook and wrestling matches are common, are quite striking, as is the explanation of these ceremonies.
The word for greeting on Davis Strait and Hudson Strait, is Assojutidlin? (Are you quite well?) and the answer, Tabaujuradlu (Very well). The word Taima! which is used in Hudson Strait, and Mane taima! of the Netchillirmiut seem to be similar to our Halloo! The Ukusiksalirmiut say Ilaga! (My friend!)
The word for greeting in Davis Strait and Hudson Strait is Assojutidlin? (Are you well?) and the response is Tabaujuradlu (Very well). The term Taima!, used in Hudson Strait, and Mane taima! from the Netchillirmiut, seem to be similar to our Hello! The Ukusiksalirmiut say Ilaga! (My friend!)
CUSTOMS AND REGULATIONS CONCERNING BIRTH, SICKNESS, AND DEATH.
I have mentioned that it is extremely difficult to find out the innumerable regulations connected with the religious ideas and customs 610 of the Eskimo. The difficulty is even greater in regard to the customs which refer to birth, sickness, and death, and it is no wonder that, while some of the accounts of different writers coincide tolerably well, there are great discrepancies in others, particularly as the customs vary to a great extent among the different tribes.
I’ve pointed out that it’s really hard to figure out all the many rules related to the religious beliefs and practices of the Eskimo. The challenge is even tougher when it comes to customs linked to birth, sickness, and death. It’s no surprise that while some accounts from various authors match up fairly well, there are significant differences in others, especially since these customs vary widely between the different tribes. 610
Before the child is born a small hut or snow house is built for the mother, in which she awaits her delivery. Sick persons are isolated in the same way, the reason being that in case of death everything that had been in contact with the deceased must be destroyed. According to Kumlien (p. 28) the woman is left with only one attendant, a young girl appointed by the head ancut (angakoq) of the encampment; but this, no doubt, is an error. She may be visited by her friends, who, however, must leave her when parturition takes place. She must cut the navel string herself, and in Davis Strait this is done by tying it through with deer sinews; in Iglulik (Lyon, p. 370), by cutting it with a stone spear head. The child is cleaned with a birdskin and clothed in a small gown of the same material. According to Lyon the Iglulirmiut swathe it with the dried intestines of some animal.
Before the child is born, a small hut or snow house is built for the mother, where she waits for her delivery. Sick individuals are isolated in the same way because, in case of death, everything that had contact with the deceased must be destroyed. According to Kumlien (p. 28), the woman is left with only one helper, a young girl chosen by the head ancut (angakoq) of the camp; however, this is likely an error. She can be visited by her friends, who must leave her when labor begins. She has to cut the umbilical cord herself, and in Davis Strait this is done by tying it with deer sinews; in Iglulik (Lyon, p. 370), it is cut with a stone spearhead. The child is cleaned with birdskin and dressed in a small gown made of the same material. According to Lyon, the Iglulirmiut wrap it in the dried intestines of an animal.
Kumlien describes a remarkable custom of which I could find no trace, not even upon direct inquiry (p. 281):
Kumlien describes an amazing tradition that I couldn't find any evidence of, not even after asking directly (p. 281):
As soon as the mother with her new born babe is able to get up and go out, usually but a few hours, they are taken in charge by an aged female angakoq, who seems to have some particular mission to perform in such cases. She conducts them to some level spot on the ice, if near the sea, and begins a sort of march in circles on the ice, the mother following with the child on her back; this manœuvre is kept up for some time, the old woman going through a number of performances the nature of which we could not learn and continually muttering something equally unintelligible to us. The next act is to wade through snowdrifts, the aged angakoq leading the way. We have been informed that it is customary for the mother to wade thus bare-legged.
As soon as the mother with her newborn baby is able to get up and go outside, usually just a few hours later, they're cared for by an elderly female angakoq, who seems to have a specific role in these situations. She takes them to a flat spot on the ice, if they're near the sea, and starts walking in circles on the ice, with the mother following her and the child on her back; this continues for a while, as the old woman goes through various rituals that we couldn't fully understand and keeps murmuring something that was just as unclear to us. The next step is to walk through snowdrifts, with the elderly angakoq leading the way. We’ve been told it’s traditional for the mother to wade through like this without any pants.
Lyon says (p. 370):
Lyon states (p. 370):
After a few days, or according to the fancy of the parents, an angakoq, who by relationship or long acquaintance is a friend of the family, makes use of some vessel, and with the urine the mother washes the infant, while all the gossips around pour forth their good wishes for the little one to prove an active man, if a boy, or, if a girl, the mother of plenty of children. This ceremony, I believe, is never omitted, and is called qoqsiuariva.
After a few days, or at the discretion of the parents, a family friend, known as an angakoq, uses a container, and with the urine, the mother washes the baby while all the friends nearby offer their best wishes for the child to grow up to be an active man if it's a boy, or, if it's a girl, to be the mother of many children. I believe this ceremony is never skipped, and it’s called qoqsiuariva.
Though I heard about the washing with urine, I did not learn anything about the rest of the ceremony in Cumberland Sound and Davis Strait.
Though I heard about washing with urine, I didn’t learn anything about the rest of the ceremony in Cumberland Sound and Davis Strait.
A few days after birth the first dress of the child is exchanged for another. A small hood made from the skin of a hare’s head is fitted snugly upon the head, a jacket for the upper part of the body is made of the skin of a fawn, and two small boots, made of the same kind of a skin, the left one being wreathed with seaweed (Fucus), cover the legs. While the child wears this clothing that which was first worn is fastened to a pole which is secured to the roof of the hut. In two 611 months the child gets a third suit of clothes the same as formerly described (p. 557). Then the second gown is exposed for some time on the top of the hut, the first one being taken down, and both are carefully preserved for a year. After this time has expired both are once more exposed on the top of a pole and then sunk into the sea, a portion of the birdskin dress alone being kept, for this is considered a powerful amulet and is held in high esteem and worn every fall at the Sedna feast on the point of the hood (see p. 604). I have stated that those who were born in abnormal presentations wear women’s dresses at this feast and must make their round in a direction opposite to the movement of the sun. Captain Spicer, of Groton, Conn., affirms that the bird used for the first clothing is chosen according to a strict law, every month having its own bird. So far as I know, waterfowl are used in summer and the ptarmigan in winter, and accordingly the men are called at the great autumn feast the ducks and ptarmigans, the former including those who were born in summer, the latter those born in winter.
A few days after birth, the baby's first outfit is swapped for another. A small hood made from a hare's head is snugly placed on the baby's head, a jacket for the upper body is fashioned from fawn skin, and two little boots, made from the same skin, the left one decorated with seaweed (Fucus), cover the legs. While the child wears this outfit, the original clothing is attached to a pole secured to the roof of the hut. In two months, the child receives a third set of clothes similar to the previous ones (p. 557). After that, the second outfit is displayed for some time on the roof of the hut, while the first one is taken down, and both are carefully kept for a year. Once that year is up, both outfits are again placed on a pole and then thrown into the sea, keeping only a portion of the birdskin dress, as it is considered a powerful amulet, highly valued and worn every fall during the Sedna feast at the tip of the hood (see p. 604). I've mentioned that those born in unusual positions wear women's dresses at this feast and must move in the opposite direction of the sun. Captain Spicer from Groton, Conn., states that the bird used for the first clothing is chosen according to strict rules, with each month assigned a specific bird. As far as I know, waterfowl are worn in summer and ptarmigans in winter, and so at the great autumn feast, people are referred to as ducks and ptarmigans, with ducks for those born in summer and ptarmigans for those born in winter.
As long as any portion of the navel string remains a strip of sealskin is worn around the belly.
As long as any part of the umbilical cord is left, a strip of sealskin is worn around the waist.
After the birth of her child the mother must observe a great number of regulations, referring particularly to food and work. She is not allowed for a whole year to eat raw meat or a part of any animal killed by being shot through the heart. In Cumberland Sound she must not eat for five days anything except meat of an animal killed by her husband or by a boy on his first hunting expedition. This custom seems to be observed more strictly, however, and for a longer period if the new born child dies. Two months after delivery she must make a call at every hut, while before that time she is not allowed to enter any but her own. At the end of this period she must also throw away her old clothing. The same custom was observed by Hall among the Nugumiut (I, p. 426). On the western shore of Hudson Bay she is permitted to re-enter the hut a few days after delivery, but must pass in by a separate entrance. An opening is cut for the purpose through the snow wall. She must keep a little skin bag hung up near her, into which she must put a little of her food after each meal, having first put it up to her mouth. This is called laying up food for the infant, although none is given to it (Hall II, p. 173). I have already mentioned that the parents are not allowed in the first year after the birth of a child to take part in the Sedna feast.
After the birth of her child, the mother must follow many rules, especially regarding food and work. For a whole year, she cannot eat raw meat or any part of an animal that was killed by being shot in the heart. In Cumberland Sound, she must avoid eating anything except meat from an animal that her husband or a boy on his first hunting trip killed for five days. This rule is usually followed more strictly and for a longer time if the newborn child dies. Two months after giving birth, she must visit every hut, and until then, she can only enter her own. At the end of this period, she must also dispose of her old clothes. Hall noted a similar custom among the Nugumiut (I, p. 426). On the western shore of Hudson Bay, she can re-enter the hut a few days after giving birth, but she must use a separate entrance. A hole is cut into the snow wall for this. She must keep a little skin bag nearby and put a small portion of her food into it after each meal, having first put it to her mouth. This is referred to as saving food for the infant, although none is actually given to it (Hall II, p. 173). I have already mentioned that the parents cannot participate in the Sedna feast during the first year after a child is born.
The customs which are associated with the death of an infant are very complicated. For a whole year, when outside the hut, the mother must have her head covered with a cap, or at least with a piece of skin. If a ground seal is caught she must throw away the old cap and have a new one made. The boots of the deceased are always carried about by the parents when traveling, and whenever they stop 612 these are buried in the snow or under stones. Neither parent is allowed to eat raw flesh during the following year. The woman must cook her food in a small pot which is exclusively used by her. If she is about to enter a hut the men who may be sitting inside must come out first, and not until they have come out is she allowed to enter. If she wants to go out of the hut she must walk around all the men who may happen to be there.
The customs related to the death of an infant are very complicated. For an entire year, when outside the hut, the mother must keep her head covered with a cap or at least a piece of skin. If a ground seal is caught, she must discard the old cap and have a new one made. The parents always carry the deceased's boots when traveling, and whenever they stop, 612 these are buried in the snow or under stones. Neither parent is allowed to eat raw flesh during the following year. The woman must cook her food in a small pot that is exclusively for her use. If she is about to enter a hut, the men sitting inside must come out first, and only after they have exited is she allowed to enter. When she wants to leave the hut, she must walk around all the men who may be present.
The child is sometimes named before it is born. Lyon says upon this subject (p. 369):
The child is sometimes named before it's born. Lyon talks about this (p. 369):
Some relative or friend lays her hand on the mother’s stomach, and decides what the infant is to be called, and, as the names serve for either sex, it is of no consequence whether it proves a girl or a boy.
Some relative or friend places their hand on the mother's stomach and decides what the baby will be called, and since the names work for either gender, it doesn't matter whether it's a girl or a boy.
On Davis Strait it is always named after the persons who have died since the last birth took place, and therefore the number of names of an Eskimo is sometimes rather large. If a relative dies while the child is younger than four years or so, his name is added to the old ones and becomes the proper name by which it is called. It is possible that children receive the names of all the persons in the settlement who die while the children are quite young, but of this I am not absolutely certain. When a person falls sick the angakut change his name in order to ward off the disease or they consecrate him as a dog to Sedna. In the latter event he gets a dog’s name and must wear throughout life a harness over the inner jacket. Thus it may happen that Eskimo are known in different tribes by different names. It may also be mentioned here that friends sometimes exchange names and dogs are called by the name of a friend as a token of regard.
On Davis Strait, names are always given based on those who have passed away since the last birth, so an Eskimo might have quite a few names. If a relative dies when a child is under four years old, that relative's name is added to the existing ones and becomes the child's official name. It's possible for children to inherit the names of everyone in the settlement who dies while they're very young, but I'm not completely sure about that. When someone gets sick, the angakut change their name to keep the illness away, or they may designate them as a dog for Sedna. In that case, the person receives a dog's name and has to wear a harness over their inner jacket for life. This means Eskimos may be known by different names in different tribes. It's also worth mentioning that friends sometimes swap names, and dogs may be called by a friend's name as a sign of respect.
The treatment of the sick is the task of the angakoq, whose manipulations have been described.
The angakoq is responsible for treating the sick, and their methods have been explained.
If it is feared that a disease will prove fatal, a small snow house or a hut is built, according to the season, into which the patient is carried through an opening at the back. This opening is then closed, and subsequently a door is cut out. A small quantity of food is placed in the hut, but the patient is left without attendants. As long as there is no fear of sudden death the relatives and friends may come to visit him, but when death is impending the house is shut up and he is left alone to die. If it should happen that a person dies in a hut among its inmates, everything belonging to the hut must be destroyed or thrown away, even the tools &c. lying inside becoming useless to the survivors, but the tent poles may be used again after a year has elapsed. No doubt this custom explains the isolation of the sick. If a child dies in a hut and the mother immediately rushes out with it, the contents of the hut may be saved.
If there's concern that a disease could be fatal, a small snow house or hut is built, depending on the season, and the patient is carried in through a back opening. This opening is then sealed, and later, a door is cut out. A small amount of food is placed in the hut, but the patient is left alone. As long as there’s no immediate risk of death, family and friends can visit, but when death is near, the hut is shut up and the person is left alone to die. If someone dies in the hut while others are still there, everything inside must be destroyed or discarded, including tools and other items, as they are considered useless to the survivors, though the tent poles can be reused after a year. This practice likely explains why the sick are isolated. If a child dies in the hut and the mother quickly takes it outside, the contents of the hut can be saved.
Though the Eskimo feel the greatest awe in touching a dead body, the sick await their death with admirable coolness and without the 613 least sign of fear or unwillingness to die. I remember a young girl who sent for me a few hours before her death and asked me to give her some tobacco and bread, which she wanted to take to her mother, who had died a few weeks before.
Though the Eskimo have a deep sense of awe when it comes to touching a dead body, the sick face their death with impressive calmness and show no fear or reluctance to die at all. I remember a young girl who called for me a few hours before she passed away and asked me to give her some tobacco and bread, which she wanted to take to her mother, who had died a few weeks earlier.
Only the relatives are allowed to touch the body of the deceased. They clothe it or wrap it in deerskins and bury it at once. In former times they always built a tomb, at least when death occurred in the summer. From its usual dimensions one would suppose that the body was buried with the legs doubled up, for all of them are too short for grown persons. If the person to be buried is young, his feet are placed in the direction of the rising sun, those of the aged in the opposite direction. According to Lyon the Iglulirmiut bury half grown children with the feet towards the southeast, young men and women with the feet towards the south, and middle aged persons with the feet towards the southwest. This agrees with the fact that the graves in Cumberland Sound do not all lie east and west. The tomb is always vaulted, as any stone or piece of snow resting upon the body is believed to be a burden to the soul of the deceased. The man’s hunting implements and other utensils are placed by the side of his grave; the pots, the lamps, knives, &c., by the side of that of the woman; toys, by that of a child. Hall (I, p. 103) observed in a grave a small kettle hung up over a lamp. These objects are held in great respect and are never removed, at least as long as it is known to whose grave they belong. Sometimes models of implements are used for this purpose instead of the objects themselves. Figure 536 represents a model of a lamp found in a grave of Cumberland Sound. Nowadays the Eskimo place the body in a box, if they can procure one, or cover it very slightly with stones or snow. It is strange that, though the ceremonies of burying are very strictly attended to and though they take care to give the dead their belongings, they do not heed the opening of the graves by dogs or wolves and the devouring of the bodies and do not attempt to recover them when the graves are invaded by animals.
Only relatives are allowed to touch the deceased's body. They dress it or wrap it in deerskins and bury it right away. In the past, they always built a tomb, especially if the death happened in the summer. Based on its usual size, it seems that the body is buried with the legs drawn up, since all of them are too short for adults. If the person being buried is young, their feet are oriented towards the rising sun, while those of older individuals point in the opposite direction. According to Lyon, the Iglulirmiut bury half-grown children with their feet facing southeast, young men and women towards the south, and middle-aged individuals with their feet facing southwest. This matches the fact that graves in Cumberland Sound aren't all aligned east and west. The tomb is always vaulted, as any stone or piece of snow resting on the body is believed to burden the deceased's soul. A man's hunting tools and other belongings are placed next to his grave; pots, lamps, knives, etc., are placed beside that of a woman, and toys are left by a child's grave. Hall (I, p. 103) noted a small kettle hanging over a lamp in a grave. These items are highly respected and are never removed, at least as long as it’s known to whose grave they belong. Sometimes, models of these tools are used instead of the actual objects. Figure 536 shows a model of a lamp found in a grave in Cumberland Sound. Nowadays, the Eskimo places the body in a box if they can get one or covers it lightly with stones or snow. It’s odd that, although they strictly follow burial rituals and make sure to include the deceased's belongings, they ignore when dogs or wolves dig up the graves and consume the bodies, and they don't try to recover them when animals invade the graves.
Fig. 536. Model of lamp from a grave in Cumberland Sound. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin.)
Fig. 536. Model of lamp from a grave in Cumberland Sound. (Museum of Ethnology, Berlin.)
The body must be carried to the place of burial by the nearest relatives, a few others only accompanying it. For this purpose they rarely avail themselves of a sledge, as it cannot be used afterward, but must be left with the deceased. Dogs are never allowed to drag the sledge on such an occasion. After returning from the burial the relatives must lock themselves up in the old hut for three days, during which they mourn the loss of the deceased. During this time 614 they do not dress their hair and they have their nostrils closed with a piece of deerskin. After this they leave the hut forever. The dogs are thrown into it through the window and allowed to devour whatever they can get at. For some time afterward the mourners must cook their meals in a separate pot. A strange custom was observed by Hall in Hudson Bay (II, p. 186). The mourners did not smoke. They kept their hoods on from morning till night. To the hood the skin and feathers of the head of Uria grylle were fastened and a feather of the same waterfowl to each arm just above the elbow. All male relatives of the deceased wore a belt around the waist, besides which they constantly wore mittens. It is probable that at the present time all Eskimo when in mourning avoid using implements of European manufacture and suspend the use of tobacco. It has already been stated that women who have lost a child must keep their heads covered.
The body must be taken to the burial site by the closest family members, with just a few others accompanying them. They rarely use a sled for this, since it can't be reused and has to be left with the deceased. Dogs are never allowed to pull the sled in this situation. After returning from the burial, the family must stay locked in their old hut for three days, during which they mourn the loss. During this time, 614 they do not style their hair and cover their nostrils with a piece of deerskin. After this period, they leave the hut for good. Dogs are thrown in through the window and allowed to eat whatever they can find. For some time afterward, the mourners must cook their meals in a separate pot. A strange practice was noted by Hall in Hudson Bay (II, p. 186). The mourners refrained from smoking. They kept their hoods on from morning to night. Attached to the hood were the skin and feathers of the head of Uria grylle, along with a feather from the same bird on each arm just above the elbow. All male relatives of the deceased wore a belt around their waist and kept mittens on at all times. It's likely that nowadays, all Eskimos in mourning avoid using European-made tools and refrain from tobacco. It's also been noted that women who have lost a child must keep their heads covered.
Parry, Lyon (p. 369), and Klutschak (p. 201) state that when the Eskimo first hear of the death of a relative they throw themselves upon the ground and cry, not for grief, but as a mourning ceremony.
Parry, Lyon (p. 369), and Klutschak (p. 201) say that when the Eskimo first learns about the death of a relative, they drop to the ground and cry, not out of grief, but as part of a mourning ceremony.
For three or sometimes even four days after a death the inhabitants of a village must not use their dogs, but must walk to the hunting ground, and for one day at least they are not allowed to go hunting at all. The women must stop all kinds of work.
For three or sometimes even four days after someone dies, the people in a village can’t use their dogs and must walk to the hunting ground. At least for one day, they aren’t allowed to go hunting at all. The women must stop all types of work.
On the third day after death the relatives visit the tomb and travel around it three times in the same direction as the sun is moving, at the same time talking to the deceased and promising that they will bring him something to eat. According to Lyon the Iglulirmiut chant forth inquiries as to the welfare of the departed soul, whether it has reached the land Adli, if it has plenty of food, &c., at each question stopping at the head of the grave and repeating some ceremonial words (p. 371).
On the third day after someone dies, the family members visit the grave and walk around it three times in the direction the sun travels, while talking to the deceased and promising to bring them something to eat. According to Lyon, the Iglulirmiut sing out questions about the well-being of the departed soul, asking whether it has reached the land of Adli, if it has enough food, and so on, stopping at the head of the grave after each question to recite some ceremonial words (p. 371).
These visits to the grave are repeated a year after death and whenever they pass it in traveling. Sometimes they carry food to the deceased, which he is expected to return greatly increased. Hall describes this custom as practiced by the Nugumiut (I, p. 426). He says:
These visits to the grave happen a year after death and anytime they pass by while traveling. Sometimes they bring food for the deceased, which they expect to be returned in much larger amounts. Hall talks about this custom as practiced by the Nugumiut (I, p. 426). He says:
They took down small pieces of [deer] skin with the fur on, and of [fat]. When there they stood around [the] grave [of the woman] upon which they placed the articles they had brought. Then one of them stepped up, took a piece of the [deer meat], cut a slice and ate it, at the same time cutting off another slice and placing it under a stone by the grave. Then the knife was passed from one hand to the other, both hands being thrown behind the person. This form of shifting the implement was continued for perhaps a minute, the motions being accompanied by constant talk with the dead. Then a piece of [deer] fur and some [fat] were placed under the stone with an exclamation signifying, “Here is something to eat and something to keep you warm.” Each of the [natives] also went through the same forms. They never visit the grave of a departed friend until some months after 615 death, and even then only when all the surviving members of the family have removed to another place. Whenever they return to the vicinity of their kindred’s grave, a visit is made to it with the best of food as a present for the departed one. Neither seal, polar bear, nor walrus, however, is taken.
They took small pieces of deer skin with the fur still on, and some fat. When they arrived, they gathered around the grave of the woman and placed the items they brought. Then one of them stepped forward, took a piece of deer meat, cut a slice, and ate it, while cutting off another slice to place under a stone by the grave. The knife was then passed from one hand to the other, both hands being thrown behind the person. This process of shifting the knife continued for about a minute, with constant conversation directed at the deceased. Then a piece of deer fur and some fat were placed under the stone with a remark signifying, "Here’s something to eat and something to keep you warm." Each of the natives followed the same rituals. They never visit a friend's grave until several months after their death, and even then only after all the surviving family members have moved to another place. Whenever they come back near their loved one's grave, they visit with the best food as a gift for the departed. However, they don’t bring seal, polar bear, or walrus.
According to Klutschak (p. 154), the natives of Hudson Bay avoid staying a long time on the salt water ice near the grave of a relative.
According to Klutschak (p. 154), the people of Hudson Bay avoid spending a long time on the saltwater ice near the burial site of a relative.
On the fourth day after death the relatives may go for the first time upon the ice, but the men are not allowed to hunt; on the next day they must go sealing, but without dogs and sledge, walking to the hunting ground and dragging the seal home. On the sixth day they are at liberty to use their dogs again. For a whole year they must not join in any festival and are not allowed to sing certain songs.
On the fourth day after a death, the family is allowed to go on the ice for the first time, but the men can’t hunt. The next day, they can go seal hunting, but without dogs or sleds; they have to walk to the hunting area and drag the seal back. On the sixth day, they can use their dogs again. For a whole year, they can’t participate in any festivals and are not allowed to sing certain songs.
If a married woman dies the widower is not permitted to keep any part of the first seal he catches after her death except the flesh. Skin, blubber, bones, and entrails must be sunk in the sea.
If a married woman dies, the widower cannot keep any part of the first seal he catches after her death, except for the flesh. The skin, blubber, bones, and entrails must be thrown back into the sea.
All the relatives must have new suits of clothes made and before the others are cast away they are not allowed to enter a hut without having asked and obtained permission. (See Appendix, Note 7.)
All the relatives must have new suits made, and before the others are thrown out, they can't enter a hut without asking for and getting permission. (See Appendix, Note 7.)
Lyon (p. 368) makes the following statement on the mourning ceremonies in Iglulik:
Lyon (p. 368) makes the following statement about the mourning ceremonies in Iglulik:
Widows are forbidden for six months to taste of unboiled flesh; they wear no ***pigtails, and cut off a portion of their long hair in token of grief, while the remaining locks hang in loose disorder about their shoulders. ***After six months, the disconsolate ladies are at liberty to eat raw meat, to dress their pigtails and to marry as fast as they please; while in the meantime they either cohabit with their future husbands, if they have one, or distribute their favors more generally. A widower and his children remain during three days within the hut where his wife died, after which it is customary to remove to another. He is not allowed to fish or hunt for a whole season, or in that period to marry again. During the three days of lamentation all the relatives of the deceased are quite careless of their dress; their hair hangs wildly about, and, if possible, they are more than usually dirty in their persons. All visitors to a mourning family consider it as indispensably necessary to howl at their first entry.
Widows aren't allowed to eat unboiled meat for six months; they don’t wear pigtails and cut a part of their long hair as a sign of grief, while the rest hangs loosely over their shoulders. After six months, these grieving women can eat raw meat, style their hair into pigtails, and marry whoever they want; in the meantime, they might live with their future husbands, if they have one, or share their affections more broadly. A widower and his kids stay in the hut where his wife passed away for three days, after which it’s customary for them to move to a different place. He can’t fish or hunt for an entire season, nor can he marry again during that time. During the three days of mourning, all the relatives of the deceased don’t care much about their appearance; their hair is messy, and they often look dirtier than usual. When visitors come to a mourning family, they find it absolutely necessary to wail upon entering.
I may add here that suicide is not of rare occurrence, as according to the religious ideas of the Eskimo the souls of those who die by violence go to Qudlivun, the happy land. For the same reason it is considered lawful for a man to kill his aged parents. In suicide death is generally brought about by hanging.
I should mention that suicide isn't uncommon, as the Eskimo belief system holds that the souls of those who die violently go to Qudlivun, the land of happiness. Because of this, it's seen as acceptable for someone to kill their elderly parents. In cases of suicide, death is usually caused by hanging.
TALES AND TRADITIONS.
ITITAUJANG.
A long, long time ago, a young man, whose name was Ititaujang, lived in a village with many of his friends. When he became grown he wished to take a wife and went to a hut in which he knew an orphan girl was living. However, as he was bashful and was afraid to speak to the young girl himself, he called her little 616 brother, who was playing before the hut, and said, “Go to your sister and ask her if she will marry me.” The boy ran to his sister and delivered the message. The young girl sent him back and bade him ask the name of her suitor. When she heard that his name was Ititaujang she told him to go away and look for another wife, as she was not willing to marry a man with such an ugly name.9 But Ititaujang did not submit and sent the boy once more to his sister. “Tell her that Nettirsuaqdjung is my other name,” said he. The boy, however, said upon entering, “Ititaujang is standing before the doorway and wants to marry you.” Again the sister said “I will not have a man with that ugly name.” When the boy returned to Ititaujang and repeated his sister’s speech, he sent him back once more and said, “Tell her that Nettirsuaqdjung is my other name.” Again the boy entered and said, “Ititaujang is standing before the doorway and wants to marry you.” The sister answered, “I will not have a man with that ugly name.” When the boy returned to Ititaujang and told him to go away, he was sent in the third time on the same commission, but to no better effect. Again the young girl declined his offer, and upon that Ititaujang went away in great anger. He did not care for any other girl of his tribe, but left the country altogether and wandered over hills and through valleys up the country many days and many nights.
A long time ago, a young man named Ititaujang lived in a village with many of his friends. When he grew up, he wanted to find a wife and went to a hut where an orphan girl lived. However, he was shy and afraid to talk to her, so he called her little 616 brother, who was playing outside, and said, “Go ask your sister if she will marry me.” The boy ran to his sister and delivered the message. She sent him back and asked for the name of her suitor. When she heard his name was Ititaujang, she told him to go away and find another wife, as she didn't want to marry a man with such an ugly name. But Ititaujang didn’t give up and sent the boy back again. “Tell her that Nettirsuaqdjung is my other name,” he said. However, when the boy entered, he said, “Ititaujang is standing outside and wants to marry you.” Once more, the sister responded, “I will not have a man with that ugly name.” When the boy returned to Ititaujang and repeated her words, he sent him back again, saying, “Tell her that Nettirsuaqdjung is my other name.” The boy went back in and said, “Ititaujang is standing outside and wants to marry you.” The sister replied, “I will not have a man with that ugly name.” After the boy returned to Ititaujang and told him to leave, he was sent in for a third time with the same message, but it was still no use. The young girl refused his proposal again, and Ititaujang left in great anger. He didn’t care for any other girl in his tribe and left the land altogether, wandering over hills and through valleys for many days and nights.
At last he arrived in the land of the birds and saw a lakelet in which many geese were swimming. On the shore he saw a great number of boots; cautiously he crept nearer and stole as many as he could get hold of. A short time after the birds left the water and finding the boots gone became greatly alarmed and flew away. Only one of the flock remained behind, crying, “I want to have my boots; I want to have my boots.” Ititaujang came forth now and answered, “I will give you your boots if you will become my wife.” She objected, but when Ititaujang turned round to go away with the boots she agreed, though rather reluctantly.
At last, he arrived in the land of the birds and saw a small lake where many geese were swimming. On the shore, he noticed a lot of boots; he carefully crept closer and grabbed as many as he could. Shortly after, the birds left the water and, realizing the boots were gone, became very alarmed and flew away. Only one bird stayed behind, crying, “I want my boots; I want my boots.” Ititaujang came forward and replied, “I’ll give you your boots if you become my wife.” She hesitated at first, but when Ititaujang turned to leave with the boots, she reluctantly agreed.
Having put on the boots she was transformed into a woman and they wandered down to the seaside, where they settled in a large village. Here they lived together for some years and had a son. In time Ititaujang became a highly respected man, as he was by far the best whaler among the Inuit.
Having put on the boots, she transformed into a woman, and they wandered down to the seaside, where they settled in a large village. Here, they lived together for several years and had a son. Over time, Ititaujang became a highly respected man, as he was easily the best whaler among the Inuit.
Once upon a time the Inuit had killed a whale and were busy cutting it up and carrying the meat and the blubber to their huts. Though Ititaujang was hard at work his wife stood lazily by. When he called her and asked her to help as the other women did she objected, crying, “My food is not from the sea; my food is from the land; I will not eat the meat of a whale; I will not help.”
Once upon a time, the Inuit had killed a whale and were busy cutting it up and carrying the meat and blubber to their huts. Although Ititaujang was hard at work, his wife stood by lazily. When he called her and asked for help like the other women, she refused, saying, “My food doesn’t come from the sea; my food comes from the land; I won’t eat whale meat; I won’t help.”
Ititaujang answered, “You must eat of the whale; that will fill your stomach.” Then she began crying and exclaimed, “I will not eat it; I will not soil my nice white clothing.”
Ititaujang replied, “You need to eat the whale; that will satisfy your hunger.” Then she started crying and said, “I won’t eat it; I don’t want to ruin my nice white clothes.”
She descended to the beach, eagerly looking for birds’ feathers. Having found a few she put them between her fingers and between those of her child; both were transformed into geese and flew away.
She walked down to the beach, excited to look for birds’ feathers. After finding a few, she placed them between her fingers and her child's; they both transformed into geese and flew away.
When the Inuit saw this they called out, “Ititaujang, your wife is flying away.” Ititaujang became very sad; he cried for his wife and did not care for the abundance of meat and blubber, nor for the whales spouting near the shore. He followed his wife and ascended the land in search of her.
When the Inuit saw this, they shouted, “Ititaujang, your wife is flying away.” Ititaujang became very sad; he cried for his wife and didn’t care about the plenty of meat and blubber, nor the whales spouting near the shore. He followed his wife and climbed the land in search of her.
After having traveled for many weary months he came to a river. There he saw a man who was busy chopping chips from a piece of wood with a large hatchet. As soon as the chips fell off he polished them neatly and they were transformed into salmon, becoming so slippery that they glided from his hands and fell into the river, which they descended to a large lake near by. The name of the man was Eχaluqdjung (the little salmon).
After traveling for many exhausting months, he finally reached a river. There, he saw a man who was chopping off pieces from a block of wood with a big hatchet. As soon as the pieces fell, he polished them carefully, turning them into salmon that became so slippery they slipped from his hands and fell into the river, which they flowed down to a nearby large lake. The man's name was Eχaluqdjung (the little salmon).
On approaching, Ititaujang was frightened almost to death, for he saw that the back of this man was altogether hollow and that he could look from behind right through his mouth. Cautiously he crept back and by a circuitous way approached him from the opposite direction.
On getting closer, Ititaujang was scared out of his wits because he noticed that the back of this man was completely hollow and he could see right through his mouth from behind. Carefully, he backed away and took a longer route to approach him from the other side.
When Eχaluqdjung saw him coming he stopped chopping and asked, “Which way did you approach me?” Ititaujang, pointing in the direction he had come last and from which he could not see the hollow back of Eχaluqdjung, answered, “It is there I have come from.” Eχaluqdjung, on hearing this, said, “That is lucky for you. If you had come from the other side and had seen my back I should have immediately killed you with my hatchet.” Ititaujang was very glad that he had turned back and thus deceived the salmon maker. He asked him, “Have you not seen my wife, who has left me, coming this way?” Eχaluqdjung had seen her and said, “Do you see yon little island in the large lake? There she lives now and has taken another husband.”
When Eχaluqdjung saw him coming, he stopped chopping and asked, “Which way did you approach me?” Ititaujang, pointing in the direction he had come from and where he couldn’t see Eχaluqdjung’s back, replied, “I came from over there.” Eχaluqdjung, upon hearing this, said, “That’s lucky for you. If you had come from the other side and had seen my back, I would have killed you right away with my hatchet.” Ititaujang felt very relieved that he had turned back and tricked the salmon maker. He then asked, “Have you seen my wife, who left me, coming this way?” Eχaluqdjung had seen her and said, “See that little island in the big lake? That’s where she is now, and she has taken another husband.”
When Ititaujang heard this report he almost despaired, as he did not know how to reach the island; but Eχaluqdjung kindly promised to help him. They descended to the beach; Eχaluqdjung gave him the backbone of a salmon and said, “Now shut your eyes. The backbone will turn into a kayak and carry you safely to the island. But mind you do not open your eyes, else the boat will upset.”
When Ititaujang heard this news, he was nearly hopeless because he didn’t know how to get to the island. But Eχaluqdjung kindly offered to help him. They went down to the beach, and Eχaluqdjung gave him the backbone of a salmon, saying, “Now close your eyes. The backbone will turn into a kayak and take you safely to the island. Just make sure not to open your eyes, or the boat will tip over.”
Ititaujang promised to obey. He shut his eyes, the backbone became a kayak, and away he went over the lake. As he did not hear any splashing of water, he was anxious to see whether the boat moved on, and opened his eyes just a little. But he had scarcely taken a short glimpse when the kayak began to swing violently and he felt 618 that it became a backbone again. He quickly shut his eyes, the boat went steadily on, and a short time after he was landed on the island.
Ititaujang promised to follow the instructions. He closed his eyes, and the backbone transformed into a kayak, allowing him to glide over the lake. Since he didn't hear any splashing water, he grew anxious to see if the boat was still moving, so he opened his eyes just a bit. But he had barely caught a glimpse when the kayak started to rock wildly, and he felt that it turned back into a backbone. He quickly closed his eyes again, and the boat continued steadily until, shortly after, he reached the island.
There he saw the hut and his son playing on the beach near it. The boy on looking up saw Ititaujang and ran to his mother crying, “Mother, father is here and is coming to our hut.” The mother answered, “Go, play on; your father is far away and cannot find us.” The child obeyed; but as he saw Ititaujang approaching he re-entered the hut and said, “Mother, father is here and is coming to our hut.” Again the mother sent him away, but he returned very soon, saying that Ititaujang was quite near.
There he saw the hut and his son playing on the beach nearby. The boy looked up, saw Ititaujang, and ran to his mother crying, “Mom, Dad is here and is coming to our hut.” The mother replied, “Go on, keep playing; your father is far away and won’t be able to find us.” The child listened, but when he saw Ititaujang getting closer, he went back into the hut and said, “Mom, Dad is here and is coming to our hut.” Again, the mother told him to go play, but he quickly came back, saying Ititaujang was very close now.
Scarcely had the boy said so when Ititaujang opened the door. When the new husband saw him he told his wife to open a box which was in a corner of the hut. She did so, and many feathers flew out of it and stuck to them. The woman, her new husband, and the child were thus again transformed into geese. The hut disappeared; but when Ititaujang saw them about to fly away he got furious and cut open the belly of his wife before she could escape. Then many eggs fell down.
Scarcely had the boy finished speaking when Ititaujang opened the door. When the new husband saw him, he told his wife to open a box that was in a corner of the hut. She did so, and a flurry of feathers burst out and stuck to them. The woman, her new husband, and the child were once again transformed into geese. The hut vanished; but when Ititaujang saw them about to fly away, he became enraged and cut open his wife's belly before she could escape. Then many eggs fell out.
THE EMIGRATION OF THE SAGDLIRMIUT.
In the beginning all the Inuit lived near Ussualung, in Tiniqdjuarbing (Cumberland Sound). The Igdlumiut, the Nugumiut, and the Talirpingmiut in the south, the Aggomiut in the far north, and the Inuit, who tattoo rings round their eyes, in the far west, all once lived together. There is a tradition concerning the emigration of the Sagdlirmiut (see p. 451) who live east of Iglulik. The Akudnirmiut say that the following events did not happen in Tiniqdjuarbing, but in Aggo, a country where nobody lives nowadays. Ikeraping, an Akudnirmio, heard the story related by a Tununirmio, who had seen the place himself, but all the Oqomiut assert that Ussualung is the place where the events in the story happened.
In the beginning, all the Inuit lived close to Ussualung, in Tiniqdjuarbing (Cumberland Sound). The Igdlumiut, Nugumiut, and Talirpingmiut in the south, the Aggomiut in the far north, and the Inuit, who have tattoo rings around their eyes, in the far west, all lived together. There’s a tradition about the migration of the Sagdlirmiut (see p. 451) who live east of Iglulik. The Akudnirmiut say that the events didn’t take place in Tiniqdjuarbing, but in Aggo, a land where no one lives now. Ikeraping, an Akudnirmio, heard the story from a Tununirmio who had seen the place himself, but all the Oqomiut insist that Ussualung is where the events in the story occurred.
An old woman, the sister of Mitiq, the angakoq, told the story as follows:
An elderly woman, the sister of Mitiq, the angakoq, shared the story like this:
Near Ussualung there are two places, Qerniqdjuaq and Eχaluqdjuaq. In each of these was a large house, in which many families lived together. They used to keep company during the summer when they went deer hunting, but returned to their separate houses in the fall.
Near Ussualung, there are two places, Qerniqdjuaq and Eχaluqdjuaq. Each of these had a large house where many families lived together. They would spend time together during the summer while deer hunting, but returned to their separate homes in the fall.
Once upon a time it happened that the men of Qerniqdjuaq had been very successful, while those of Eχaluqdjuaq had caught scarcely any deer. Therefore the latter got very angry and resolved to kill the other party, but they preferred to wait until the winter. Later in the season many deer were caught and put up in depots. They were to be carried down to the winter settlements by means of sledges.
Once upon a time, the people of Qerniqdjuaq had a great hunt, while those from Eχaluqdjuaq barely caught any deer. This made the latter very angry, and they decided to take revenge, but they chose to wait until winter. As the season progressed, many deer were caught and stored. They were meant to be transported to the winter settlements using sledges.
One day both parties agreed upon a journey to these depots and the men of Eχaluqdjuaq resolved to kill their enemies on this occasion. 619 They set out with their dogs and sledges, and when they were fairly inland they suddenly attacked their unsuspecting companions and killed them. For fear that the wives and children of the murdered men might be suspicious if the dogs returned without their masters, they killed them too. After a short time they returned and said they had lost the other party and did not know what had happened to them.
One day, both groups agreed to go on a trip to these depots, and the men of Eχaluqdjuaq decided to kill their enemies this time. 619 They set off with their dogs and sleds, and once they were well inland, they suddenly attacked their unsuspecting companions and killed them. Afraid that the wives and children of the murdered men might get suspicious if the dogs returned without their owners, they killed the dogs too. After a short while, they came back and said they had lost the other group and didn't know what had happened to them.
A young man of Eχaluqdjuaq was the suitor of a girl of Qerniqdjuaq and used to visit her every night. He did not stop his visits now. He was kindly received by the woman and lay down to sleep with his young wife.
A young man from Eχaluqdjuaq was dating a girl from Qerniqdjuaq and would visit her every night. He continued his visits without fail. The woman welcomed him warmly, and he lay down to sleep with his young girlfriend.
Under the snow bench there was a little boy who had seen the young man of Eχaluqdjuaq coming. When everybody was sleeping he heard somebody calling and soon recognized the spirits of the murdered men, who told him what had happened and asked him to kill the young man in revenge. The boy crept from his place under the bed, took a knife, and put it into the young man’s breast. As he was a small boy and very weak, the knife glided from the ribs and entered deep into the heart, thus killing the young man.
Under the snow bench, there was a little boy who had seen the young man from Eχaluqdjuaq approaching. While everyone was asleep, he heard someone calling and soon recognized the spirits of the murdered men. They revealed what had happened and urged him to kill the young man in revenge. The boy crawled out from under the bed, grabbed a knife, and plunged it into the young man’s chest. Since he was so small and weak, the knife slipped from the ribs and went deep into the heart, killing the young man.
Then he roused the other inhabitants of the hut and told them that the spirits of the dead men had come to him, that they had told him of their murder, and had ordered him to kill the young man. The women and children got very much frightened and did not know what to do. At last they resolved to follow the advice of an old woman and to flee from their cruel neighbors. As their dogs were killed, the sledges were of no use, but by chance a bitch with pups was in the hut and the old woman, who was a great angakoq, ordered them to go and whip the young dogs, which would thus grow up quickly. They did so and in a short time the pups were large and strong. They harnessed them and set off as quickly as possible. In order to deceive their neighbors they left everything behind and did not even extinguish their lamps, that they might not excite suspicion.
Then he woke up the other people in the hut and told them that the spirits of the dead men had come to him, that they had revealed their murder to him, and had commanded him to kill the young man. The women and children became very frightened and didn’t know what to do. Finally, they decided to follow the advice of an old woman and escape from their cruel neighbors. Since their dogs were dead, the sledges were useless, but by chance a female dog with puppies was in the hut, and the old woman, who was a powerful angakoq, instructed them to go and whip the young dogs so they would grow up quickly. They did this, and soon the puppies were big and strong. They harnessed them and left as fast as they could. To mislead their neighbors, they left everything behind and didn't even put out their lamps, so they wouldn’t raise any suspicion.
The next morning the men of Eχaluqdjuaq wondered why their companion had not returned and went to the hut in Qernirtung. They peeped through the spy hole in the window and saw the lamps burning, but nobody inside. At last they discovered the body of the young man, and, finding the tracks of the sledges, they hurriedly put their sledges in order and pursued the fugitives.
The next morning, the men of Eχaluqdjuaq were concerned about their missing friend and went to the hut in Qernirtung. They peeked through the small window and saw the lamps still lit, but no one inside. Finally, they found the young man's body, and after spotting the sled tracks, they quickly got their sleds ready and chased after the fugitives.
Though the latter had journeyed rapidly their pursuers followed still more rapidly and seemed likely to overtake them in a short time. They therefore became very much frightened, fearing the revenge of their pursuers.
Though the latter had traveled quickly, their pursuers were coming after them even faster and seemed likely to catch up soon. They were therefore very scared, fearing the revenge of their pursuers.
When the sledge of the men drew near and the women saw that they were unable to escape, a young woman asked the old angakoq: “Don’t you know how to cut the ice?” The matron answered in the affirmative and slowly drew a line over the ice with her first finger 620 across the path of their pursuers. The ice gave a loud crack. Once more she drew the line, when a crack opened and quickly widened as she passed on. The floe began moving and when the men arrived they could not cross over the wide space of water. Thus the party were saved by the art of their angakoq.
When the men's sled started getting closer and the women realized they couldn't escape, a young woman asked the old angakoq, "Don’t you know how to cut the ice?" The matron nodded and slowly traced a line over the ice with her finger 620 across the path of their pursuers. The ice cracked loudly. She drew another line, and a crack opened up and quickly widened as she moved on. The floe began to shift, and when the men arrived, they couldn't cross the large area of open water. So, the party was saved by the skill of their angakoq.
For many days they drifted to and fro, but finally they landed on the island of Sagdlirn, where they took up their abode and became the mothers of the Sagdlirmiut.
For many days, they floated back and forth, but finally, they arrived at the island of Sagdlirn, where they settled down and became the mothers of the Sagdlirmiut.
KALOPALING.
Kalopaling is a fabulous being that lives in the sea. His body is like that of a human being and he wears clothing made of eider ducks’ skins. Therefore he is sometimes called Mitiling (with eider ducks). As these birds have a black back and a white belly, his gown looked speckled all over. His jacket has an enormous hood, which is an object of fear to the Inuit. If a kayak capsizes and the boatman is drowned Kalopaling puts him into this hood. He cannot speak, but can only cry, “Be, be! Be, be!” His feet are very large and look like inflated sealskin floats.
Kalopaling is an amazing creature that lives in the sea. His body is shaped like a human's, and he wears clothes made from eider duck skins. Because of this, he is sometimes called Mitiling (with eider ducks). Since these birds have a black back and a white belly, his outfit appears speckled all over. His jacket features a huge hood, which strikes fear in the Inuit. If a kayak overturns and the paddler drowns, Kalopaling puts him into this hood. He can't speak, only cries out, “Be, be! Be, be!” His feet are very big and resemble inflated sealskin floats.
The Inuit believe that in olden times there were a great number of Kalopalit, but gradually their number diminished and there are now very few left. They may be seen from the land swimming very rapidly under the water and sometimes rising to the surface. While swimming they make a great noise by splashing with arms and legs. In summer they like to bask on rocks and in winter they sometimes sit on the ice near cracks or at the edge of drifting floes. As they pursue the hunters the most daring men try to kill them whenever they can get near them. Cautiously they approach the sleeping Kalopaling, and as soon as they come near enough they throw the walrus harpoon at him. They must shut their eyes immediately until the Kalopaling is dead, else he will capsize the boat and kill the hunters. The flesh of the Kalopaling is said to be poisonous, but good enough for dog’s food.
The Inuit believe that long ago, there were many Kalopalit, but over time their numbers dwindled and now very few remain. They can be seen from the shore swimming quickly underwater and sometimes coming up for air. While swimming, they make a lot of noise splashing with their arms and legs. In the summer, they enjoy sunbathing on rocks, and in the winter they sometimes sit on the ice near cracks or at the edges of drifting ice floes. As they chase hunters, the bravest men try to catch them whenever they get close. They carefully approach the sleeping Kalopaling, and as soon as they are close enough, they throw a walrus harpoon at it. They have to shut their eyes right away until the Kalopaling is dead, or it could overturn the boat and kill the hunters. The flesh of the Kalopaling is said to be poisonous, but it's considered good enough for dog food.
An old tradition is handed down which refers to a Kalopaling:
An old tradition is passed down that talks about a Kalopaling:
An old woman lived with her grandson in a small hut. As they had no kinsmen they were very poor. A few Inuit only took pity on them and brought them seal’s meat and blubber for their lamps. Once upon a time they were very hungry and the boy cried. The grandmother told him to be quiet, but as he did not obey she became angry and called Kalopaling to come and take him away. He entered at once and the woman put the boy into the large hood, in which he disappeared almost immediately.
An old woman lived with her grandson in a small hut. Since they had no relatives, they were very poor. A few Inuit felt sorry for them and brought them seal meat and blubber for their lamps. One day, they were really hungry, and the boy started crying. The grandmother told him to be quiet, but when he didn’t listen, she got angry and called Kalopaling to come and take him away. He came in right away, and the woman put the boy into the large hood, where he vanished almost instantly.
Later on the Inuit were more successful in sealing and they had an abundance of meat. Then the grandmother was sorry that she had so rashly given the boy to Kalopaling and wished to see him back 621 again. She lamented about it to the Inuit, and at length a man and his wife promised to help her.
Later on, the Inuit became more successful at sealing and had plenty of meat. Then the grandmother regretted that she had so hastily given the boy to Kalopaling and wanted to see him back 621 again. She expressed her sorrow to the Inuit, and eventually, a man and his wife said they would help her.
When the ice had consolidated and deep cracks were formed near the shore by the rise and fall of the tide, the boy used to rise and sit alongside the cracks, playing with a whip of seaweed. Kalopaling, however, was afraid that somebody might carry the boy away and had fastened him to a string of seaweed, which he held in his hands. The Inuit who had seen the boy went toward him, but as soon as he saw them coming he sang, “Two men are coming, one with a double jacket, the other with a foxskin jacket” (Inung maqong tikitong, aipa mirqosailing, aipa kapiteling). Then Kalopaling pulled on the rope and the boy disappeared. He did not want to return to his grandmother, who had abused him.
When the ice had solidified and deep cracks formed near the shore from the tide rising and falling, the boy would get up and sit by the cracks, playing with a whip made of seaweed. Kalopaling, though, was worried that someone might take the boy away and had tied him to a piece of seaweed, which he held in his hands. An Inuit who had spotted the boy approached him, but as soon as the boy saw them coming, he sang, “Two men are coming, one with a double jacket, the other with a foxskin jacket” (Inung maqong tikitong, aipa mirqosailing, aipa kapiteling). Then Kalopaling tugged on the rope, and the boy vanished. He didn’t want to go back to his grandmother, who had mistreated him.
Some time afterward the Inuit saw him again sitting near a crack. They took the utmost caution that he should not hear them when approaching, tying pieces of deerskin under the soles of their boots. But when they could almost lay hold of the boy he sang, “Two men are coming, one with a double jacket, the other with a foxskin jacket.” Again Kalopaling pulled on the seaweed rope and the boy disappeared.
Some time later, the Inuit spotted him again sitting by a crack. They were extremely careful not to let him hear them as they approached, tying pieces of deerskin under their boots. But just as they were about to grab the boy, he sang, “Two men are coming, one with a double jacket, the other with a foxskin jacket.” Once again, Kalopaling pulled on the seaweed rope, and the boy vanished.
The man and his wife, however, did not give up trying. They resolved to wait near the crack, and on one occasion when the boy had just come out of the water they jumped forward from a piece of ice behind which they had been hidden and before he could give the alarm they had cut the rope and away they went with him to their huts.
The man and his wife, however, didn't give up trying. They decided to wait by the crack, and one time when the boy had just come out of the water, they jumped out from behind a piece of ice where they had been hiding. Before he could raise the alarm, they cut the rope and took him back to their huts.
The boy lived with them and became a great hunter.
The boy lived with them and became an amazing hunter.
THE UISSUIT.
Besides the Kalopalit there are the Uissuit, a strange people that live in the sea. They are dwarfs and are frequently seen between Iglulik and Netchillik, where the Anganidjen live, an Inuit tribe whose women are in the habit of tattooing rings around their eyes. There are men and women among the Uissuit and they live in deep water, never coming up to the surface. When the Inuit wish to see them, they go in their boats to a place where they cannot see the bottom and try to catch them by hooks which they slowly move up and down. As soon as they get a bite they draw in the line. The Uissuit are thus drawn up; but no sooner do they approach the surface than they dive down headlong again, only their legs having emerged from the water. The Inuit have never succeeded in getting one out of the water.
Besides the Kalopalit, there are the Uissuit, a peculiar group that lives in the sea. They are small in stature and are often spotted between Iglulik and Netchillik, where the Anganidjen tribe resides, an Inuit group whose women typically tattoo rings around their eyes. Both men and women are part of the Uissuit, and they dwell in deep waters, never surfacing. When the Inuit want to see them, they take their boats to a spot where they can't see the bottom and try to catch them with hooks that they slowly move up and down. As soon as they get a nibble, they reel in the line. The Uissuit are pulled up this way; however, as soon as they near the surface, they dive down headfirst again, with only their legs sticking out of the water. The Inuit have never managed to pull one out of the water.
KIVIUNG.
An old woman lived with her grandson in a small hut. As she had no husband and no son to take care of her and the boy, they were very poor, the boy’s clothing being made of skins of birds which 622 they caught in snares. When the boy would come out of the hut and join his playfellows, the men would laugh at him and tear his outer garment. Only one man, whose name was Kiviung, was kind to the young boy; but he could not protect him from the others. Often the lad came to his grandmother crying and weeping, and she always consoled him and each time made him a new garment. She entreated the men to stop teasing the boy and tearing his clothing, but they would not listen to her prayer. At last she got angry and swore she would take revenge upon his abusers, and she could easily do so, as she was a great angakoq.
An old woman lived with her grandson in a small hut. With no husband or son to support them, they were very poor, and the boy's clothes were made from the skins of birds that they caught in traps. When the boy came out of the hut to play with his friends, the men would laugh at him and tear his outer garment. Only one man, named Kiviung, was kind to the boy, but he couldn’t protect him from the others. Often, the boy returned to his grandmother crying, and she always comforted him and made him a new garment each time. She begged the men to stop teasing the boy and destroying his clothes, but they ignored her pleas. Finally, she became angry and vowed to take revenge on those who mistreated him, and she could easily do it since she was a powerful angakoq.
She commanded her grandson to step into a puddle which was on the floor of the hut, telling him what would happen and how he should behave. As soon as he stood in the water the earth opened and he sank out of sight, but the next moment he rose near the beach as a yearling seal with a beautiful skin and swam about lustily.
She ordered her grandson to step into a puddle on the hut's floor, explaining what would happen and how he should act. As soon as he stood in the water, the ground opened up, and he disappeared, but in the next moment, he reappeared near the beach as a young seal with a beautiful coat, swimming around energetically.
The men had barely seen the seal when they took to their kayaks, eager to secure the pretty animal. But the transformed boy quickly swam away, as his grandmother had told him, and the men continued in pursuit. Whenever he rose to breathe he took care to come up behind the kayaks, where the men could not get at him with their harpoons; there, however, he splashed and dabbled in order to attract their attention and lure them on. But before any one could turn his kayak he had dived again and swam away. The men were so interested in the pursuit that they did not observe that they were being led far from the coast and that the land was now altogether invisible.
The men barely spotted the seal before jumping into their kayaks, eager to catch the beautiful creature. But the boy, now transformed, quickly swam away, just as his grandmother had warned him, and the men kept chasing after him. Whenever he surfaced for air, he made sure to come up behind the kayaks, where they couldn’t reach him with their harpoons; in that spot, he splashed and played around to catch their attention and draw them in. But before anyone could turn their kayak, he had dived again and swum off. The men were so focused on the chase that they didn’t realize they were being led far from the shore, and the land was now completely out of sight.
Suddenly a gale arose; the sea foamed and roared and the waves destroyed or upset their frail vessels. After all seemed to be drowned the seal was again transformed into the lad, who went home without wetting his feet. There was nobody now to tear his clothing, all his abusers being dead.
Suddenly, a strong wind picked up; the sea churned and crashed, and the waves wrecked their fragile boats. Just when it looked like everyone had drowned, the seal turned back into the boy, who walked home without getting his feet wet. There was no one left to rip his clothes, as all his tormentors were dead.
Only Kiviung, who was a great angakoq and had never abused the boy, had escaped the wind and waves. Bravely he strove against the wild sea, but the storm did not abate. After he had drifted for many days on the wide sea, a dark mass loomed up through the mist. His hope revived and he worked hard to reach the supposed land. The nearer he came, however, the more agitated did the sea become, and he saw that he had mistaken a wild, black sea, with raging whirlpools, for land. Barely escaping he drifted again for many days, but the storm did not abate and he did not see any land. Again he saw a dark mass looming up through the mist, but he was once more deceived, for it was another whirlpool which made the sea rise in gigantic waves.
Only Kiviung, who was a great angakoq and had never mistreated the boy, had managed to survive the wind and waves. He bravely battled against the wild sea, but the storm didn't let up. After drifting for many days on the vast ocean, a dark shape emerged through the mist. His hope revived, and he worked hard to reach what he thought was land. However, as he got closer, the sea became more agitated, and he realized he had mistaken a wild, black sea with furious whirlpools for land. Barely escaping, he drifted once again for many days, but the storm continued, and he didn’t see any land. Once more, he spotted a dark shape looming through the mist, but he was deceived again; it was just another whirlpool creating towering waves on the sea.
At last the storm moderated, the sea subsided, and at a great distance he saw the land. Gradually he came nearer and following the 623 coast he at length spied a stone house in which a light was burning. He landed and entered the house. Nobody was inside but an old woman whose name was Arnaitiang. She received him kindly and at his request pulled off his boots, slippers, and stockings and dried them on the frame hanging over the lamp. Then she went out to light a fire and cook a good meal.
At last, the storm calmed down, the sea settled, and in the distance, he spotted land. Gradually, he drew closer, and following the 623 coast, he finally noticed a stone house with a light on inside. He landed and entered the house. There was no one there except for an old woman named Arnaitiang. She welcomed him warmly and, at his request, took off his boots, slippers, and socks, drying them on the rack above the lamp. Then she went outside to start a fire and prepare a nice meal.
When the stockings were dry, Kiviung tried to take them from the frame in order to put them on, but as soon as he extended his hand to touch them the frame rose out of his reach. Having tried several times in vain, he called Arnaitiang and asked her to give him back the stockings. She answered: “Take them yourself; there they are; there they are” and went out again. The fact is she was a very bad woman and wanted to eat Kiviung.
When the stockings were dry, Kiviung tried to take them from the frame to put them on, but as soon as he reached for them, the frame lifted out of his grasp. After several unsuccessful attempts, he called Arnaitiang and asked her to give him the stockings back. She replied, “Get them yourself; they're right there; they're right there,” and walked out again. The truth is, she was a very wicked woman and wanted to eat Kiviung.
Then he tried once more to take hold of his stockings, but with no better result. He called again for Arnaitiang and asked her to give him the boots and stockings, whereupon she said: “Sit down where I sat when you entered my house; then you can get them.” After that she left him again. Kiviung tried it once more, but the frame rose as before and he could not reach it.
Then he tried once more to grab his stockings, but it didn't work any better. He called out for Arnaitiang again and asked her to hand him the boots and stockings. She replied, “Sit down where I was when you entered my house; then you can get them.” After that, she left him again. Kiviung tried again, but the frame lifted up like before, and he still couldn't reach it.
Now he understood that Arnaitiang meditated mischief; so he summoned his tornaq, a huge white bear, who arose roaring from under the floor of the house. At first Arnaitiang did not hear him, but as Kiviung kept on conjuring the spirit came nearer and nearer to the surface, and when she heard his loud roar she rushed in trembling with fear and gave Kiviung what he had asked for. “Here are your boots,” she cried; “here are your slippers; here are your stockings. I’ll help you put them on.” But Kiviung would not stay any longer with this horrid witch and did not even dare to put on his boots, but took them from Arnaitiang and rushed out of the door. He had barely escaped when it clapped violently together and just caught the tail of his jacket, which was torn off. He hastened to his kayak without once stopping to look behind and paddled away. He had only gone a short distance before Arnaitiang, who had recovered from her fear, came out swinging her glittering woman’s knife and threatening to kill him. He was nearly frightened to death and almost upset his kayak. However, he managed to balance it again and cried in answer, lifting up his spear: “I shall kill you with my spear.” When Arnaitiang heard these words she fell down terror stricken and broke her knife. Kiviung then observed that it was made of a thin slab of fresh water ice.
Now he realized that Arnaitiang was up to no good; so he called for his tornaq, a giant white bear, who emerged roaring from beneath the house's floor. At first, Arnaitiang didn't hear him, but as Kiviung continued to summon the spirit, it came closer and closer to the surface. When she finally heard his loud roar, she rushed in, trembling with fear, and gave Kiviung what he had asked for. “Here are your boots,” she exclaimed; “here are your slippers; here are your stockings. I’ll help you put them on.” But Kiviung didn’t want to stay any longer with this dreadful witch and didn’t even dare to put on his boots. He snatched them from Arnaitiang and dashed out the door. He barely made it out when the door slammed shut and barely caught the tail of his jacket, tearing it off. He rushed to his kayak without stopping to look back and paddled away. He had only gone a short distance when Arnaitiang, who had recovered from her fright, came out swinging her sparkling woman’s knife and threatening to kill him. He was nearly scared to death and almost tipped over his kayak. However, he managed to steady it and shouted back, raising his spear: “I shall kill you with my spear.” When Arnaitiang heard these words, she fell down in terror and broke her knife. Kiviung then noticed that it was made of a thin slab of fresh water ice.
He traveled on for many days and nights, following the shore. At last he came to a hut, and again a lamp was burning inside. As his clothing was wet and he was hungry, he landed and entered the house. There he found a woman who lived all alone with her daughter. Her son-in-law was a log of driftwood which had four boughs. Every day about the time of low water they carried it to 624 the beach and when the tide came in it swam away. When night came again it returned with eight large seals, two being fastened to every bough. Thus the timber provided its wife, her mother, and Kiviung with an abundance of food. One day, however, after they had launched it as they had always done, it left and never returned.
He traveled for many days and nights along the shore. Finally, he reached a hut, and once again, a lamp was lit inside. Since his clothes were soaked and he was hungry, he docked and entered the house. Inside, he found a woman living alone with her daughter. Her son-in-law was a piece of driftwood with four branches. Every day around low tide, they took it to the beach, and when the tide came in, it floated away. When night fell again, it came back with eight large seals, two tied to each branch. This way, the wood provided plenty of food for his wife, her mother, and Kiviung. However, one day, after they had sent it off as usual, it left and never returned.
After a short interval Kiviung married the young widow. Now he went sealing every day himself and was very successful. As he thought of leaving some day, he was anxious to get a good stock of mittens (that his hands might keep dry during the long journey?). Every night after returning from hunting he pretended to have lost his mittens. In reality he had concealed them in the hood of his jacket.
After a brief period, Kiviung married the young widow. Now he went sealing every day on his own and was very successful. Since he was thinking about leaving one day, he wanted to gather a good supply of mittens (to keep his hands dry during the long journey?). Every night after coming back from hunting, he pretended to have lost his mittens. In reality, he had hidden them in the hood of his jacket.
After awhile the old woman became jealous of her daughter, for the new husband of the latter was a splendid hunter and she wished to marry him herself. One day when he was away hunting, she murdered her daughter, and in order to deceive him she removed her daughter’s skin and crept into it, thus changing her shape into that of the young woman. When Kiviung returned, she went to meet him, as it had been her daughter’s custom, and without exciting any suspicion. But when he entered the hut and saw the bones of his wife he at once became aware of the cruel deed and of the deception that had been practiced and fled away.
After a while, the old woman became jealous of her daughter because her daughter's new husband was an amazing hunter, and she wanted to marry him herself. One day, when he was out hunting, she killed her daughter, and to trick him, she took off her daughter's skin and put it on, changing her shape to look like the young woman. When Kiviung returned, she went to greet him, as her daughter used to do, without raising any suspicion. But when he entered the hut and saw his wife's bones, he immediately realized the terrible act and the deception that had taken place, and he ran away.
He traveled on for many days and nights, always following the shore. At last he again came to a hut where a lamp was burning. As his clothing was wet and he was hungry, he landed and went up to the house. Before entering it occurred to him that it would be best to find out first who was inside. He therefore climbed up to the window and looked through the peep hole. On the bed sat an old woman, whose name was Aissivang (spider). When she saw the dark figure before the window she believed it was a cloud passing the sun, and as the light was insufficient to enable her to go on with her work she got angry. With her knife she cut away her eyebrows, ate them, and did not mind the dripping blood, but sewed on. When Kiviung saw this he thought that she must be a very bad woman and turned away.
He traveled for many days and nights, always sticking close to the shore. Finally, he arrived at a hut where a lamp was lit. Since his clothes were soaked and he felt hungry, he landed and walked up to the house. Before going inside, he thought it would be wise to find out who was there first. So, he climbed up to the window and peeked through the hole. On the bed sat an old woman named Aissivang (spider). When she saw the dark figure at the window, she thought it was just a cloud passing over the sun, and since the light was too dim for her to continue her work, she got angry. With her knife, she sliced off her eyebrows, ate them, and didn’t mind the blood dripping down as she kept sewing. When Kiviung saw this, he figured she must be a very bad woman and turned away.
Still he traveled on days and nights. At last he came to a land which seemed familiar to him and soon he recognized his own country. He was very glad when he saw some boats coming to meet him. They had been on a whaling excursion and were towing a great carcass to the village. In the bow of one of them stood a stout young man who had killed the whale. He was Kiviung’s son, whom he had left a small boy and who was now grown up and had become a great hunter. His wife had taken a new husband, but now she returned to Kiviung.
Still, he traveled day and night. Finally, he arrived in a land that felt familiar and soon recognized his own country. He was very happy when he saw some boats coming to greet him. They had been out on a whaling trip and were towing a huge carcass back to the village. In the bow of one of the boats stood a stocky young man who had killed the whale. He was Kiviung's son, whom he had left as a small boy, and who had now grown up to become a great hunter. His wife had married someone else, but now she was returning to Kiviung.
ORIGIN OF THE NARWHAL.
A long, long time ago a widow lived with her daughter and her son in a hut. When the boy was quite young he made a bow and arrows of walrus tusks and shot birds, which they ate. Before he was grown up he accidentally became blind. From that moment his mother maltreated him in every way. She never gave him enough to eat, though he had formerly added a great deal to their sustenance, and did not allow her daughter, who loved her brother tenderly, to give him anything. Thus they lived many years and the poor boy was very unhappy.
A long time ago, a widow lived with her daughter and son in a hut. When the boy was still young, he made a bow and arrows from walrus tusks and hunted birds, which they ate. Before he grew up, he accidentally became blind. From that moment on, his mother mistreated him in every way. She never gave him enough to eat, even though he had previously contributed a lot to their food supply, and she wouldn't let her daughter, who loved her brother dearly, give him anything. They lived this way for many years, and the poor boy was very unhappy.
Once upon a time a polar bear came to the hut and thrust his head right through the window. They were all very much frightened and the mother gave the boy his bow and arrows that he might kill the animal. But he said, “I cannot see the window and I shall miss him.” Then the sister leveled the bow and the boy shot and killed the bear. The mother and sister went out and took the carcass down and skinned it.
Once upon a time, a polar bear came to the hut and stuck its head right through the window. They were all really scared, and the mother handed the boy his bow and arrows so he could kill the animal. But he said, “I can’t see the window, and I’ll miss.” Then the sister aimed the bow, and the boy shot and killed the bear. The mother and sister went outside, brought the carcass down, and skinned it.
After they had returned into the hut they told the boy that he had missed the bear, which had run away when it had seen him taking his bow and arrows. The bad mother had strictly ordered her daughter not to tell that the bear was dead, and she did not dare to disobey. The mother and the daughter ate the bear and had an ample supply of food, while the boy was almost starving. Sometimes, when the mother had gone away, the girl gave her brother something to eat, as she loved him dearly.
After they got back into the hut, they told the boy that he missed the bear, which had run off when it saw him taking his bow and arrows. The strict mother had told her daughter not to say that the bear was dead, and she didn’t dare disobey. The mother and daughter ate the bear and had plenty of food, while the boy was almost starving. Sometimes, when the mother was gone, the girl would give her brother some food because she loved him dearly.
One day a loon flew over the hut and observing the poor blind boy it resolved to restore his eyesight. It sat down on the top of the roof and cried, “Come out, boy, and follow me.” When he heard this he crept out and followed the bird, which flew along to a lake. There it took the boy and dived with him to the bottom. When they had risen again to the surface it asked, “Can you see anything?” The boy answered, “No, I cannot yet see.” They dived again and staid a long time in the water. When they emerged, the bird asked, “Can you see now?” The boy answered, “I see a dim shimmer.” Then they dived the third time and staid very long under water. When they had risen to the surface the boy had recovered his eyesight altogether.
One day, a loon flew over the hut and, seeing the poor blind boy, decided to restore his sight. It landed on the roof and called out, “Come out, boy, and follow me.” When he heard this, he crawled out and followed the bird, which flew to a lake. There, it took the boy and dove with him to the bottom. After they surfaced, it asked, “Can you see anything?” The boy replied, “No, I still can’t see.” They dove again and stayed underwater for a long time. When they came up, the bird asked, “Can you see now?” The boy answered, “I see a faint glimmer.” Then they dove for the third time and stayed down for quite a while. When they emerged, the boy could see perfectly.
He was very glad and thankful to the bird, which told him to return to the hut. Then he found the skin of the bear he had killed drying in the warm rays of the sun. He got very angry and cut it into small pieces. He entered the hut and asked his mother: “From whom did you get the bearskin I saw outside of the hut?” The mother was frightened when she found that her son had recovered his eyesight, and prevaricated. She said, “Come here, I will give 626 you the best I have; but I am very poor; I have no supporter; come here, eat this, it is very good.” The boy, however, did not comply and asked again, “From whom did you get yon bearskin I saw outside the hut?” Again she prevaricated; but when she could no longer evade the question she said, “A boat came here with many men in it, who left it for me.”
He was really happy and thankful to the bird, which told him to go back to the hut. Then he saw the skin of the bear he had killed drying in the warm sunlight. He got very angry and cut it into small pieces. He went into the hut and asked his mother, “Where did you get the bearskin I saw outside?” His mother was scared when she realized her son had regained his eyesight and dodged the question. She said, “Come here, I’ll give you the best I have; but I’m very poor; I have no one to support me; come here, eat this, it’s really good.” The boy, however, didn’t agree and asked again, “Where did you get that bearskin I saw outside the hut?” Again she dodged the question; but when she could no longer avoid it, she said, “A boat came here with many men in it, who left it for me.”
The boy did not believe the story, but was sure that it was the skin of the bear he had killed during the winter. However, he did not say a word. His mother, who was anxious to conciliate him, tried to accommodate him with food and clothing, but he did not accept anything.
The boy didn’t buy the story, but he was convinced it was the skin of the bear he had killed in the winter. Still, he kept quiet. His mother, eager to make peace with him, tried to win him over with food and clothes, but he turned down everything.
He went to the other Inuit who lived in the same village, made a spear and a harpoon of the same pattern he saw in use with them, and began to catch white whales. In a short time he had become an expert hunter.
He went to the other Inuit living in the same village, crafted a spear and a harpoon just like the ones he saw them using, and started catching white whales. Before long, he had become an expert hunter.
By and by he thought of taking revenge on his mother. He said to his sister, “Mother abused me when I was blind and has maltreated you for pitying me; we will revenge ourselves on her.” The sister agreed and he planned a scheme for killing the mother.
By and by, he thought about getting back at his mother. He said to his sister, “Mom mistreated me when I was blind and has also treated you badly for feeling sorry for me; we should get our revenge on her.” The sister agreed, and he came up with a plan to kill their mother.
When he went to hunt white whales he used to wind the harpoon line round his body and, taking a firm footing, hold the animal until it was dead. Sometimes his sister accompanied him and helped him to hold the line.
When he went to hunt white whales, he would wrap the harpoon line around his body and, finding a solid position, hold the animal until it was dead. Sometimes his sister would join him to help manage the line.
One day he told his mother to go with him and hold his line. When they came to the beach he tied the rope round her body and asked her to keep a firm footing. She was rather anxious, as she had never done this before, and told him to harpoon a small dolphin, else she might not be able to resist the strong pull. After a short time a young animal came up to breathe and the mother shouted, “Kill it, I can hold it;” but the boy answered, “No, it is too large.” Again a small dolphin came near and the mother shouted to him to spear it; but he said, “No, it is too large.” At last a huge animal rose quite near. Immediately he threw his harpoon, taking care not to kill it, and tossing his mother forward into the water cried out, “That is because you maltreated me; that is because you abused me.”
One day, he asked his mother to come along and help him with his line. When they got to the beach, he wrapped the rope around her waist and told her to stand firm. She was a bit nervous since she had never done this before, and asked him to catch a small dolphin; otherwise, she might not be able to resist the strong pull. After a short while, a young dolphin swam up to breathe, and the mother shouted, “Get it! I can hold it!” But the boy replied, “No, it's too big.” Another small dolphin appeared, and the mother urged him to spear it; but he said, “No, it's too big.” Finally, a large dolphin surfaced very close. He quickly threw his harpoon, making sure not to kill it, and pushed his mother forward into the water, shouting, “That’s what you get for mistreating me; that’s what you get for abusing me.”
The white whale dragged the mother into the sea, and whenever she rose to the surface she cried, “Louk! Louk!” and gradually she became transformed into a narwhal.
The white whale pulled the mother into the ocean, and every time she came up for air, she shouted, “Louk! Louk!” until she eventually turned into a narwhal.
After the young man had taken revenge he began to realize that it was his mother whom he had murdered and he was haunted by remorse, and so was his sister, as she had agreed to the bad plans of her brother. They did not dare to stay any longer in their hut, but left the country and traveled many days and many nights overland. At last they came to a place where they saw a hut in which a man lived whose name was Qitua´jung. He was very bad and had horribly long nails on his fingers. The young man, being very thirsty, 627 sent his sister into the hut to ask for some water. She entered and said to Qitua´jung, who sat on the bed place, “My brother asks for some water;” to which Qitua´jung responded, “There it stands behind the lamp. Take as much as you like.” She stooped to the bucket, when he jumped up and tore her back with his long nails. Then she called to her brother for help, crying, “Brother, brother, that man is going to kill me.” The young man ran to the hut immediately, broke down the roof, and killed the bad man with his spear.
After the young man got his revenge, he began to realize that he had murdered his own mother, and he was overwhelmed with guilt. His sister felt the same way because she had gone along with his terrible plans. They didn’t want to stay in their hut any longer, so they left the country and traveled for many days and nights overland. Eventually, they arrived at a place where they spotted a hut belonging to a man named Qitua´jung. He was very evil and had disgustingly long nails on his fingers. Feeling extremely thirsty, the young man sent his sister into the hut to ask for some water. She walked in and said to Qitua´jung, who was sitting on the bed, “My brother is asking for some water.” Qitua´jung replied, “There it is behind the lamp. Take as much as you want.” As she bent down to reach the bucket, he jumped up and slashed her back with his long nails. She screamed for her brother, crying, “Brother, brother, that man is going to kill me!” The young man rushed to the hut, broke through the roof, and killed the evil man with his spear.
Cautiously he wrapped up his sister in hares’ skins, put her on his back, and traveled on. He wandered over the land for many days, until he came to a hut in which a man lived whose name was Iqignang. As the young man was very hungry, he asked him if he might eat a morsel from the stock of deer meat put up in the entrance of the hut. Iqignang answered, “Don’t eat it, don’t eat it.” Though he had already taken a little bit, he immediately stopped. Iqignang was very kind to the brother and sister, however, and after a short time he married the girl, who had recovered from her wounds, and gave his former wife to the young man.10
Cautiously, he wrapped his sister in rabbit skins, put her on his back, and continued on his journey. He roamed the land for many days until he reached a hut where a man named Iqignang lived. The young man was very hungry and asked if he could have a bit of the deer meat stored at the entrance of the hut. Iqignang replied, “Don't eat it, don't eat it.” Although he had already taken a small piece, he immediately stopped. Iqignang was very kind to the brother and sister, and after a short time, he married the girl, who had healed from her wounds, and gave his former wife to the young man.10
THE VISITOR.
An old hag lived in a house with her grandson. She was a very bad woman who thought of nothing but playing mischief. She was a witch and tried to harm everybody by witchcraft. Once upon a time a stranger came to visit some friends who lived in a hut near that of the old woman. As the visitor was a good hunter and procured plenty of food for his hosts, she envied them and resolved to kill the new comer. She made a soup of wolf’s and man’s brains, which was the most poisonous meal she could prepare, and sent her grandson to invite the stranger. She cautioned him not to say what she had cooked, as she knew that the visitor was a great angakoq, who was by far her superior in wisdom.
An old witch lived in a house with her grandson. She was a really nasty person who only cared about causing trouble. She practiced witchcraft and tried to harm everyone around her. One day, a stranger came to visit some friends who lived in a hut near hers. Since the visitor was a skilled hunter and brought plenty of food for his friends, she became jealous and decided to kill him. She cooked up a soup made from wolf and human brains, the deadliest dish she could make, and sent her grandson to invite the stranger. She warned him not to mention what she had cooked, knowing that the visitor was a powerful angakoq, far more knowledgeable than she was.
The boy went to the neighboring hut and said: “Stranger, my grandmother invites you to come to her hut and to have there a good feast on a supper she has cooked. She told me not to say that it is a man’s and a wolf’s brains and I do not say it.”
The boy went to the nearby hut and said: “Hey there, my grandmother invites you to come to her place for a nice dinner she's made. She asked me not to mention that it’s made of a man’s and a wolf’s brains, and I won’t say it.”
Though the angakoq understood the schemes of the old hag he followed the boy and sat down with her. She feigned to be very glad to see him and gave him a dish full of soup, which he began to eat. But by help of his tornaq the food fell right through him into a vessel which he had put between his feet on the floor of the hut. This he gave to the old witch and compelled her to eat it. She died as soon as she had brought the first spoonful to her mouth.
Though the angakoq recognized the old hag's tricks, he followed the boy and sat down with her. She pretended to be really happy to see him and served him a bowl of soup, which he started to eat. But thanks to his tornaq, the food simply fell through him into a container he had placed between his feet on the floor of the hut. He gave this to the old witch and forced her to eat it. She died as soon as she took the first spoonful.
THE FUGITIVE WOMEN.
Once upon a time two women who were with child quarreled with their husbands and fled from their families and friends to live by themselves. After having traveled a long distance they came to a place called Igdluqdjuaq, where they resolved to stay. It was summer when they arrived. They found plenty of sod and turf and large whale ribs bleaching on the beach. They erected a firm structure of bones and filled the interstices with sod and turf. Thus they had a good house to live in. In order to obtain skins they made traps, in which they caught foxes in sufficient numbers for their dresses. Sometimes they found carcasses of ground seals or of whales which had drifted to the shore, of which they ate the meat and burnt the blubber. There was also a deep and narrow deer pass near the hut. Across this they stretched a rope and when the deer passed by they became entangled in it and strangled themselves. Besides, there was a salmon creek near the house and this likewise furnished them with an abundance of food.
Once upon a time, two pregnant women fought with their husbands and left their families and friends to live on their own. After traveling a long way, they reached a place called Igdluqdjuaq, where they decided to settle down. It was summer when they arrived. They found plenty of sod and turf, along with large whale ribs bleached on the beach. They built a sturdy structure out of bones and filled the gaps with sod and turf, creating a decent house to live in. To get skins, they made traps and caught enough foxes for their clothing. Sometimes, they stumbled upon the carcasses of seals or whales that had washed ashore, which they ate and burned the blubber from. There was also a deep and narrow deer pass near their hut. They stretched a rope across it, and when the deer passed by, they got caught and strangled themselves. Additionally, there was a salmon creek close to the house that provided them with plenty of food.
In winter their fathers came in search of their lost daughters. When they saw the sledge coming they began to cry, as they were unwilling to return to their husbands. The men, however, were glad to find them comfortable, and having staid two nights at their daughters’ house they returned home, where they told the strange story that two women without the company of any men lived all by themselves and were never in want.
In winter, their fathers came looking for their lost daughters. When they saw the sledge approaching, they started to cry because they didn't want to go back to their husbands. The men, however, were happy to find their daughters well-off, and after staying two nights at their house, they went home, where they shared the unusual story of two women living completely independently without any men and never lacking for anything.
Though this happened a long time ago the house may still be seen and therefore the place is called Igdluqdjuaq (The Large House).
Though this happened a long time ago, you can still see the house, and that's why the place is called Igdluqdjuaq (The Large House).
QAUDJAQDJUQ.
I. STORY OF THE THREE BROTHERS.
A long time ago there lived three brothers. Two of them were grown up, but the third was a young lad whose name was Qaudjaqdjuq. The elder brothers had left their country and traveled about many years, while the youngest lived with his mother in their native village. As they had no supporter, the poor youth was abused by all the men of the village and there was nobody to protect him.
A long time ago, there were three brothers. Two of them were adults, but the youngest was a boy named Qaudjaqdjuq. The older brothers had left their home and traveled around for many years, while the youngest stayed with his mother in their hometown. Since they didn’t have anyone to support them, the poor young man was mistreated by all the men in the village, and there was no one to defend him.
At last the elder brothers, being tired of roaming about, returned home. When they heard that the boy had been badly used by all the Inuit they became angry and thought of revenge. At first, however, they did not say anything, but built a boat, in which they intended to escape after having accomplished their designs. They were skillful boat builders and finished their work very soon. They tried the boat and found that it passed over the water as swiftly as an eider duck flies. As they were not content with their work they destroyed it again and built a new boat, which proved as swift as 629 an ice duck. They were not yet content, destroyed this, and built a third one that was good. After having finished the boat they lived quietly with the other men. In the village there was a large singing house, which was used at every festival. One day the three brothers entered it and shut it up. Then they began dancing and singing and continued until they were exhausted. As there was no seat in the house they asked their mother to bring one, and when they opened the door to let her pass in, an ermine, which had been hidden in the house, escaped.
Finally, the older brothers, tired of wandering around, went back home. When they found out that the boy had been mistreated by all the Inuit, they got angry and plotted revenge. At first, they kept quiet but decided to build a boat, which they planned to use to escape after carrying out their plans. They were skilled boat builders and finished their work quickly. They tested the boat and found it glided over the water as fast as an eider duck flies. Not satisfied with their work, they destroyed it and built a new boat, which turned out to be as fast as an ice duck. Still not satisfied, they destroyed that one too and crafted a third boat that was good. Once they finished the boat, they lived quietly with the other villagers. In the village, there was a large singing house used for every festival. One day, the three brothers went inside and locked the door. Then they started dancing and singing and kept it up until they were exhausted. Since there were no seats in the house, they asked their mother to bring one, and when they opened the door to let her in, an ermine that had been hiding in the house darted out.
Near the singing house the other Inuit of the village were playing. When they saw the ermine, which ran right through the crowd, they endeavored to catch it. In the eagerness of pursuit one man, who had almost caught the little animal, stumbled over a bowlder and fell in such a manner that he was instantly killed. The ermine was sprinkled with blood, particularly about its mouth. During the ensuing confusion it escaped into the singing house, where it concealed itself again in the same corner.
Near the singing house, the other Inuit from the village were playing. When they spotted the ermine darting through the crowd, they tried to catch it. In their excitement, one man, who was close to catching the little animal, tripped over a rock and fell in a way that instantly killed him. The ermine was splattered with blood, especially around its mouth. Amid the chaos that followed, it managed to escape into the singing house, where it hid again in the same corner.
The brothers, who were inside, had recommenced singing and dancing. When they were exhausted they called for their mother (to bring something to eat). When they opened the door the ermine again escaped and ran about among the Inuit, who were still playing outside.
The brothers inside started singing and dancing again. When they got tired, they called for their mom to bring them something to eat. When they opened the door, the ermine escaped again and ran around among the Inuit, who were still playing outside.
When they saw it they believed that the brothers would induce them to pursue it again, and thus make them perish one by one. Therefore the whole crowd stormed the singing house with the intention of killing the brothers. As the door was shut they climbed on the roof and pulled it down, but when they took up their spears to pierce the three men they opened the door and rushed down to the beach. Their boat was quite near at hand and ready to be launched, while those of the other Inuit were a long distance off.
When they saw it, they thought the brothers would get them to go after it again, leading to their demise one by one. So the entire crowd attacked the singing house, intending to kill the brothers. With the door locked, they climbed onto the roof and tore it down, but when they raised their spears to stab the three men, they opened the door and rushed down to the beach. Their boat was right there and ready to go, while the other Inuit’s boats were far away.
They embarked with their mother, but, when they were at a short distance and saw that the other men had not yet reached their boats, they pretended that they were unable to move theirs, though they pulled with the utmost effort. In reality, they played with the oars on the water. A few young women and girls were on the shore looking at the brothers, who seemed to exert themselves to the utmost of their strength. The eldest brother cried to the women: “Will you help us? We cannot get along alone.” Two girls consented, but as soon as they had come into the boat the brothers commenced pulling as hard as possible, the boat flying along quicker than a duck, while the girls cried with fright. The other Inuit hastened up desirous to reach the fugitives, and soon their boats were manned.
They set out with their mother, but when they got a little way out and saw that the other men hadn't reached their boats yet, they pretended they couldn't move theirs, even though they were pulling with all their strength. In reality, they were just playing with the oars in the water. A few young women and girls were on the shore watching the brothers, who looked like they were putting in a huge effort. The oldest brother called out to the women, “Can you help us? We can't do this alone.” Two girls agreed, but as soon as they got into the boat, the brothers started pulling as hard as they could, and the boat sped along faster than a duck, while the girls screamed in fear. The other Inuit rushed over, eager to catch up with the escapees, and soon their boats were ready.
The brothers were not afraid, however, as their boat was by far the swiftest. When they had almost lost sight of the pursuers they were suddenly stopped by a high, bold land rising before the boat and shutting up their way. They were quite puzzled, as they had to 630 retrace their way for a long distance and feared they would be overtaken by the other boats. But one of the brothers, who was a great angakoq, saved them by his art. He said: “Shut your eyes and do not open them before I tell you, and then pull on.” They did as they were bade, and when he told them to look up they saw that they had sailed right through the land, which rose just as high and formidable behind them as it had formerly obstructed their way. It had opened and let them pass.
The brothers weren't scared, though, since their boat was definitely the fastest. Just when they almost lost sight of their pursuers, they were suddenly stopped by a tall, steep land rising up in front of them and blocking their path. They were really confused because they had to backtrack a long way and were worried about being caught by the other boats. But one of the brothers, who was a skilled angakoq, saved them with his abilities. He said, "Close your eyes and don't open them until I say so, then keep rowing." They did what he said, and when he told them to look up, they saw that they had sailed right through the land, which stood just as tall and daunting behind them as it had before. It had opened up and allowed them to pass.
After having sailed some time they saw a long black line in the sea. On coming nearer they discovered that it was an impenetrable mass of seaweed, so compact that they could leave the boat and stand upon it. There was no chance of pushing the boat through, though it was swifter than a duck. The eldest brother, however, thought of his angakoq art and said to his mother, “Take your hair lace and whip the seaweed.” As soon as she did so it sank and opened the way.
After sailing for a while, they spotted a long black line in the ocean. As they got closer, they realized it was an unbreakable mass of seaweed, so dense that they could get out of the boat and stand on it. There was no way to push the boat through, even though it was faster than a duck. However, the oldest brother remembered his angakoq skills and said to his mother, “Use your hair lace and whip the seaweed.” As soon as she did that, it sank and cleared a path.
After having overcome these obstacles they were troubled no more and accomplished their journey in safety. When they arrived in their country they went ashore and erected a hut. The two women whom they had taken from their enemies they gave to their young brother Qaudjaqdjuq.
After overcoming these challenges, they were no longer troubled and completed their journey safely. When they arrived in their country, they went ashore and built a hut. The two women they had taken from their enemies were given to their younger brother Qaudjaqdjuq.
They wanted to make him a very strong man, such as they were themselves. For this reason they led him to a huge stone and said, “Try to lift that stone.” As Qaudjaqdjuq was unable to do so, they whipped him and said, “Try it again.” Now Qaudjaqdjuq could move it a little from its place. The brothers were not yet content and whipped him once more. By the last whipping he became very strong and lifted the bowlder and cast it over the hut.
They wanted to make him a really strong man, just like they were. So, they took him to a huge stone and said, “Try to lift that stone.” When Qaudjaqdjuq couldn’t do it, they whipped him and told him, “Try again.” This time, Qaudjaqdjuq managed to move it a little. The brothers still weren’t satisfied and whipped him again. After that last whipping, he became really strong and lifted the boulder, throwing it over the hut.
Then the brothers gave him the whip and told him to beat his wives if they disobeyed him.
Then the brothers gave him the whip and told him to punish his wives if they disobeyed him.
II. QAUDJAQDJUQ.
A long time ago there was a poor little orphan boy who had no protector and was maltreated by all the inhabitants of the village. He was not even allowed to sleep in the hut, but lay outside in the cold passage among the dogs, who were his pillows and his quilt. Neither did they give him any meat, but flung old, tough walrus hide at him, which he was compelled to eat without a knife. A young girl was the only one who pitied him. She gave him a very small piece of iron for a knife, but bade him conceal it well or the men would take it from him. He did so, putting it into his urethra. Thus he led a miserable life and did not grow at all, but remained poor little Qaudjaqdjuq. He did not even dare to join the plays of the other children, as they also maltreated and abused him on account of his weakness.
A long time ago, there was a poor little orphan boy who had no protector and was mistreated by everyone in the village. He wasn't even allowed to sleep in the hut but lay outside in the cold hallway among the dogs, who served as his pillows and blanket. They didn’t give him any food, just tossed him old, tough walrus hide that he had to eat without a knife. The only person who felt sorry for him was a young girl. She gave him a small piece of iron to use as a knife but told him to hide it well or the men would take it from him. He did so, hiding it inside his body. He lived a miserable life and didn’t grow at all, remaining poor little Qaudjaqdjuq. He didn’t even dare to join in the games of the other children, as they also mistreated and bullied him because of his vulnerability.
Fig. 537. Qaudjaqdjuq is maltreated by his enemies. Drawn by Qeqertuqdjuaq, an Oqomio.
Fig. 537. Qaudjaqdjuq is mistreated by his enemies. Captured by Qeqertuqdjuaq, an Oqomio.
When the inhabitants assembled in the singing house Qaudjaqdjuq used to lie in the passage and peep over the threshold. Now and then a man would lift him by the nostrils into the hut and give him the large urine vessel to carry out (Fig. 537). It was so large and heavy 632 that he was obliged to take hold of it with both hands and his teeth. As he was frequently lifted by the nostrils they grew to be very large, though he remained small and weak.
When the villagers gathered in the singing house, Qaudjaqdjuq would lie in the doorway and peek inside. Occasionally, a man would lift him by the nostrils and bring him into the hut, giving him the large urine vessel to carry out (Fig. 537). It was so big and heavy that he had to grip it with both hands and his teeth. Since he was often lifted by the nostrils, they became quite large, even though he stayed small and weak. 632
Fig. 538. The man in the moon comes down to help Qaudjaqdjuq.
Fig. 538. The man in the moon comes down to assist Qaudjaqdjuq.
At last the man in the moon,11 who had seen how badly the men behaved towards Qaudjaqdjuq, came down to help him. He harnessed his dog12 (Fig. 538) Tirie´tiang to his sledge and drove down. When near the hut he stopped and cried, “Qaudjaqdjuq, come out.” Qaudjaqdjuq answered, “I will not come out. Go away!” But when he had asked him a second and a third time to come out, he complied, though he was very much frightened. Then the man in the moon went with him to a place where some large bowlders were lying about and, having whipped him (Fig. 539), asked, “Do you feel stronger now?” Qaudjaqdjuq answered: “Yes, I feel stronger.” “Then lift yon bowlder,” said he. As Qaudjaqdjuq was not yet able to lift it, he gave him another whipping, and now all of a sudden he began to grow, the feet first becoming of an extraordinary size (Fig. 540). Again the man in the moon asked him: “Do you feel stronger now?” Qaudjaqdjuq answered: “Yes, I feel stronger;” but as he could not yet lift the stone he was whipped once more, after which he had attained a very great strength and lifted the bowlder as if it were a small pebble. The man in the moon said: “That will do. To-morrow morning I shall send three bears; then you may show your strength.”
At last, the man in the moon, who had seen how badly the men treated Qaudjaqdjuq, came down to help him. He hitched his dog, Tirie'tiang, to his sled and drove down. When he got near the hut, he stopped and shouted, “Qaudjaqdjuq, come out.” Qaudjaqdjuq replied, “I won’t come out. Go away!” But after the man in the moon called him a second and third time, he finally came out, though he was very scared. Then the man in the moon took him to a spot where some large boulders were scattered and, after giving him a whipping, asked, “Do you feel stronger now?” Qaudjaqdjuq replied: “Yes, I feel stronger.” “Then lift that boulder,” said the man. Since Qaudjaqdjuq still couldn’t lift it, he got another whipping, and suddenly he started to grow, with his feet becoming extraordinarily large. Again, the man in the moon asked: “Do you feel stronger now?” Qaudjaqdjuq answered: “Yes, I feel stronger,” but as he still couldn’t lift the stone, he got whipped once more. After that, he gained incredible strength and lifted the boulder as if it were a small pebble. The man in the moon said: “That will do. Tomorrow morning, I’ll send three bears; then you can show your strength.”
Fig. 539. The man in the moon
whipping Qaudjaqdjuq.
Fig. 539. The man in the moon
flogging Qaudjaqdjuq.
He returned to the moon, but Qaudjaqdjuq, who had now become Qaudjuqdjuaq (the big Qaudjaqdjuq), returned home tossing the stones with his feet and making them fly to the right and to the left. At night he lay down again among the dogs to sleep. Next morning he awaited the bears, and, indeed, three large animals soon made their appearance, frightening all the men, who did not dare to leave the huts.
He went back to the moon, but Qaudjaqdjuq, who was now known as Qaudjuqdjuaq (the big Qaudjaqdjuq), headed home, kicking stones into the air and sending them flying to the right and left. At night, he settled down among the dogs to sleep. The next morning, he waited for the bears, and sure enough, three large ones soon showed up, scaring all the men, who were too afraid to leave the huts.
Then Qaudjuqdjuaq put on his boots and ran down to the ice. The men who looked out of the window hole said, “Look here, is 633 not that Qaudjaqdjuq? The bears will soon make way with him.” But he seized the first by its hind legs and smashed its head on an iceberg, near which it happened to stand. The other one fared no better; the third, however, he carried up to the village and slew some of his persecutors with it. Others he pressed to death with his hands or tore off their heads (Fig. 541), crying: “That is for abusing me; that is for your maltreating me.” Those whom he did not kill ran away, never to return. Only a few who had been kind to him while he had been poor little Qaudjaqdjuq were spared, among them the girl who had given him the knife. Qaudjuqdjuaq lived to be a great hunter and traveled all over the country, accomplishing many exploits.
Then Qaudjuqdjuaq put on his boots and ran down to the ice. The men looking out of the window hole said, “Look, isn’t that Qaudjaqdjuq? The bears are about to take him out.” But he grabbed the first bear by its hind legs and smashed its head against an iceberg nearby. The second one didn’t fare any better; however, he carried the third one back to the village and used it to take down some of his attackers. Others he crushed with his hands or ripped their heads off (Fig. 541), shouting: “That’s for mistreating me; that’s for your abuse.” Those he didn’t kill ran away, never to return. Only a few who had been kind to him when he was poor little Qaudjaqdjuq were spared, including the girl who had given him the knife. Qaudjuqdjuaq went on to become a great hunter and traveled all over the country, achieving many feats.
Fig. 541. Qaudjuqdjuaq killing his enemies.
Fig. 541. Qaudjuqdjuaq defeating his enemies.
IGIMARASUGDJUQDJUAQ THE CANNIBAL.
Igimarasugdjuqdjuaq was a very huge and bad man, who had committed many murders and eaten the victims after he had cut them up with his knife. Once upon a time his sister-in-law came to visit his wife, but scarcely had she entered the hut before Igimarasugdjuqdjuaq killed her and commanded his wife to cook her.
Igimarasugdjuqdjuaq was a gigantic and ruthless man who had killed many people and eaten his victims after chopping them up with his knife. One day, his sister-in-law came to visit his wife, but hardly had she stepped inside the hut before Igimarasugdjuqdjuaq killed her and ordered his wife to cook her.
His wife was very much frightened, fearing that she herself would be the next victim, and resolved to make her escape. When Igimarasugdjuqdjuaq had left to go hunting she gathered heather, stuffed her jacket with it, and placed the figure in a sitting position upon the bed. Then she ran away as fast as she could and suc-ceeded 634 in reaching a village. When her husband came home and saw the jacket he believed that it was a stranger who had come to visit him and stabbed him through the body. When he discovered, however, that his wife had deceived and left him, he fell into a passion and pursued her.
His wife was extremely scared, worried that she would be the next victim, and decided to escape. While Igimarasugdjuqdjuaq went hunting, she gathered heather, stuffed her jacket with it, and set up a figure in a sitting position on the bed. Then she ran away as fast as she could and managed to reach a village. When her husband came home and saw the jacket, he thought it was a stranger visiting him and stabbed it. However, when he realized that his wife had tricked him and left, he went into a rage and chased after her.
He came to the village and said: “Have you seen my wife? She has run away.” The Inuit did not tell him that she was staying with them, but concealed her from his wrath. At last Igimarasugdjuqdjuaq gave her up for lost and returned home.
He arrived in the village and said, “Have you seen my wife? She has run away.” The Inuit didn’t tell him that she was staying with them; instead, they hid her from his anger. Eventually, Igimarasugdjuqdjuaq gave her up for lost and went back home.
The Inuit, however, resolved to revenge the many outrages which he had wrought upon them. They went to visit him and met him on the ice just below the hut. When he told them he was going bear hunting they said: “Let us see your spear.” This spear had a stout and sharp walrus tusk for a point. “Ah,” said they; “that is good for bear hunting; how sharp it is. You must hit him just this way.” And so saying they struck his brow, the point of the spear entering his brain, and then cut the body up with their knives.
The Inuit, however, decided to take revenge for the many wrongs he had done to them. They went to confront him and found him on the ice just below the hut. When he told them he was going bear hunting, they said, “Let us see your spear.” This spear had a strong and sharp walrus tusk as a point. “Ah,” they said; “that’s great for bear hunting; look how sharp it is. You have to hit him just like this.” As they said this, they struck his forehead, the point of the spear piercing his brain, and then they cut up his body with their knives.
THE TORNIT.13
In olden times the Inuit were not the only inhabitants of the country in which they live at the present time. Another tribe similar to them shared their hunting ground. But they were on good terms, both tribes living in harmony in the villages. The Tornit were much taller than the Inuit and had very long legs and arms. Almost all of them were blear eyed. They were extremely strong and could lift large bowlders, which were by far too heavy for the Inuit. But even the Inuit of that time were much stronger than those of to-day, and some large stones are shown on the plain of Miliaqdjuin, in Cumberland Sound, with which the ancient Inuit used to play, throwing them great distances. Even the strongest men of the present generations are scarcely able to lift them, much less to swing them or throw them any distance.
In the past, the Inuit weren't the only people living in the area where they currently reside. Another tribe, similar to them, shared their hunting grounds. They maintained a friendly relationship, and both tribes coexisted peacefully in their villages. The Tornit were much taller than the Inuit, with long legs and arms. Most of them had droopy eyes. They were incredibly strong and capable of lifting large boulders that were way too heavy for the Inuit. However, even the Inuit from that era were much stronger than today's Inuit, and some large stones can be found on the plains of Miliaqdjuin in Cumberland Sound, which the ancient Inuit would play with by throwing them long distances. Even the strongest men of today struggle to lift them, let alone swing or throw them any great distance.
Fig. 542. Tumiujang
or lamp of the Tornit.
(Museum für Volkerkunde,
Berlin IV, A 6848.)
Fig. 542. Tumiujang
or lamp of the Tornit.
(Museum für Volkerkunde,
Berlin IV, A 6848.)
The Tornit lived on walrus, seals, and deer, just as the Eskimo do nowadays, but their methods of hunting were different. The principal part of their winter dress was a long and wide coat of deerskins, 635 similar to the jumper of the Eskimo, but reaching down to the knees and trimmed with leather straps. When sealing in winter they wore this garment, the lower edge of which was fastened on the snow by means of pegs. Under the jacket they carried a small lamp, called tumiujang (literally, resembling a footprint) or quming (Fig. 542), over which they melted snow in a small pot. Some Eskimo say that they opened the seals as soon as they were caught and cooked some meat over these lamps. When the seal blew in the hole they whispered, “Kapatipara” (I shall stab it) and, when they had hit it, “Igdluiliq.” Frequently they forgot about the lamp and in throwing the harpoon upset it and burned their skin.
The Tornit ate walrus, seals, and deer, just like the Eskimos do today, but their hunting methods were different. Their main winter clothing was a long, wide coat made of deerskin, 635 similar to an Eskimo jumper but reaching down to their knees and trimmed with leather straps. When they went sealing in the winter, they wore this coat, which was secured to the snow with pegs at the bottom. Underneath the jacket, they carried a small lamp called tumiujang (which literally means resembling a footprint) or quming (Fig. 542), which they used to melt snow in a small pot. Some Eskimos say that they would open the seals as soon as they caught them and cook some meat over these lamps. When the seal surfaced, they would whisper, “Kapatipara” (I shall stab it), and after they struck it, they would say, “Igdluiliq.” Often, they would forget about the lamp, and while throwing the harpoon, they would knock it over and burn their skin.
All their weapons were made of stone. For the blades of their knives they used green slate (uluqsaq, literally material for women’s knives), which was fastened by ivory pins to a bone or ivory handle.
All their weapons were made of stone. For the blades of their knives, they used green slate (uluqsaq, literally material for women’s knives), which was secured with ivory pins to a bone or ivory handle.
The points of their harpoons were made of bone, ivory, or slate; those of their lances, of flint or quartz, which was also used for drillheads; and they made neither kayaks nor bows.
The tips of their harpoons were made of bone, ivory, or slate; those of their spears were made of flint or quartz, which was also used for drill bits; and they didn't make kayaks or bows.
Their method of hunting deer was remarkable. In a deer pass, where the game could not escape, they erected a file of cairns across the valley and connected them by ropes. Some of the hunters hid behind the cairns, while others drove the deer toward them. As the animals were unable to pass the rope they fled along it, looking for an exit, and while attempting to pass a cairn were lanced by the waiting hunter, who seized the body by the hind legs and drew it behind the line.
Their way of hunting deer was impressive. In a deer pass, where the animals couldn’t get away, they built a line of stone piles across the valley and connected them with ropes. Some of the hunters hid behind the stone piles while others drove the deer toward them. As the deer tried to escape, unable to cross the rope, they ran along it looking for a way out, and while trying to get past a stone pile, they were struck by the waiting hunter, who grabbed the deer by the back legs and pulled it behind the line.
This tale is related as a proof of their enormous strength and it is said that they were able to hold a harpooned walrus as the Eskimo hold a seal.
This story is shared as evidence of their incredible strength, and it's said that they could hold a harpooned walrus the way Eskimos hold a seal.
The Tornit could not clean the sealskins so well as the Inuit, but worked them up with part of the blubber attached. Their way of preparing meat was disgusting, since they let it become putrid and placed it between the thigh and the belly to warm it.
The Tornit couldn't clean the sealskins as well as the Inuit, but processed them with some of the blubber still attached. Their method of preparing meat was gross, as they let it rot and tucked it between the thigh and the belly to warm it up.
The old stone houses of the Tornit can be seen everywhere. Generally they did not build snow houses, but lived the whole winter in stone buildings, the roofs of which were frequently supported by whale ribs. Though the Eskimo built similar structures they can be easily distinguished from one another, the bed of their huts being much larger than that of the Tornit.
The old stone houses of the Tornit are everywhere. Usually, they didn’t build snow houses; instead, they spent the entire winter in stone buildings, whose roofs were often supported by whale ribs. While the Eskimo built similar structures, they can be easily told apart since the beds in their huts are much larger than those of the Tornit.
Though both tribes lived on very good terms, the Inuit did not like to play at ball with the Tornit, as they were too strong and used large balls, with which they hurt their playfellows severely.
Though both tribes got along well, the Inuit didn't enjoy playing ball with the Tornit because they were too strong and used large balls that often hurt their playmates badly.
A remarkable tradition is told referring to the emigration of this people.
A remarkable tradition is shared about the migration of this people.
The Tornit did not build any kayaks, but as they were aware of the advantages afforded by their use in hunting they stole the boats from the Inuit, who did not dare to defend their property, the 636 Tornit being by far their superiors in strength. Once upon a time a young Tuniq had taken the kayak of a young Inung without asking him and had injured it by knocking in the bottom. The Inung got very angry and ran a knife into the nape of the Tuniq’s neck while he was sleeping. (According to another tradition he drilled a hole into his head; this form is also recorded in Labrador.) The Tornit then became afraid that the Inuit would kill them all and preferred to leave the country for good. They assembled at Qernirtung (a place in Cumberland Sound), and in order to deceive any pursuers they cut off the tails of their jumpers and tied their hair into a bunch protruding from the crown of the head.
The Tornit didn't make any kayaks, but they understood the benefits of using them for hunting, so they stole the boats from the Inuit, who were too scared to defend their property, the 636, since the Tornit were much stronger. Once, a young Tuniq took a kayak from a young Inung without permission and damaged it by putting a hole in the bottom. The Inung got really angry and stabbed the Tuniq in the back of the neck while he was sleeping. (According to another version of the story, he drilled a hole in his head; that version is also noted in Labrador.) The Tornit then feared that the Inuit would kill them all and decided to leave the area for good. They gathered at Qernirtung (a location in Cumberland Sound), and to throw off any pursuers, they cut off the tails of their jumpers and styled their hair into a bunch sticking out from the top of their heads.
In another form of the tradition it is said that while playing with the Tornit a young Inung fell down and broke his neck. The Tornit feared that the Inuit might take revenge upon them and left the country.
In another version of the tradition, it's said that while playing with the Tornit, a young Inung fell and broke his neck. The Tornit were afraid that the Inuit would seek revenge on them and left the area.
Many old ditties are sung which either treat of the Tornit or are reported to have been sung by them. Some of them will be found in the linguistic account connected with my journey.
Many old songs are sung that either talk about the Tornit or are said to have been sung by them. Some of these can be found in the language section related to my journey.
THE WOMAN AND THE SPIRIT OF THE SINGING HOUSE.
Once upon a time a woman entered the singing house when it was quite dark. For a long time she had wished to see the spirit of the house, and though the Inuit had warned her of the impending danger she had insisted upon her undertaking.
Once upon a time, a woman entered the singing house when it was really dark. She had wanted to see the spirit of the house for a long time, and even though the Inuit had warned her about the danger ahead, she insisted on going through with it.
She summoned the spirit, saying, “If you are in the house, come here.” As she could not see him, she cried, “No spirit is here; he will not come.” But the spirit, though yet invisible, said, “Here I am; there I am.” Then the woman asked, “Where are your feet; where are your shins; where are your thighs; where are your hips; where are your loins?” Every time the spirit answered, “Here they are; there they are.” And she asked further, “Where is your belly?” “Here it is,” answered the spirit. “Where is your breast; where are your shoulders; where is your neck; where is your head?” “Here it is; there it is;” but in touching the head the woman all of a sudden fell dead. It had no bones and no hair (p. 597).
She called out to the spirit, saying, “If you’re here, come over.” When she couldn’t see him, she exclaimed, “No spirit is here; he won’t show up.” But the spirit, though still unseen, replied, “Here I am; there I am.” Then the woman asked, “Where are your feet? Where are your shins? Where are your thighs? Where are your hips? Where are your loins?” Each time the spirit responded, “Here they are; there they are.” She continued, “Where is your belly?” “Here it is,” the spirit answered. “Where is your chest? Where are your shoulders? Where is your neck? Where is your head?” “Here it is; there it is,” but when the woman touched the head, she suddenly collapsed. It had no bones and no hair (p. 597).
THE CONSTELLATION UDLEQDJUN.
Three men went bear hunting with a sledge and took a young boy with them. When they approached the edge of the floe they saw a bear and went in pursuit. Though the dogs ran fast they could not get nearer and all of a sudden they observed that the bear was lifted up and their sledge followed. At this moment the boy lost one of his mittens and in the attempt to pick it up fell from the sledge. There he saw the men ascending higher and higher, finally being transformed into stars. The bear became the star Nanuqdjung 637 (Betelgeuse); the pursuers, Udleqdjun (Orion’s belt); and the sledge, Kamutiqdjung (Orion’s sword). The men continue the pursuit up to this day; the boy, however, returned to the village and told how the men were lost.
Three men went bear hunting with a sled and brought a young boy along. When they reached the edge of the ice floe, they spotted a bear and took off after it. Even though the dogs were fast, they couldn't get any closer. Suddenly, they noticed the bear was lifted up, and the sled followed it. At that moment, the boy dropped one of his mittens, and while trying to pick it up, he fell off the sled. There, he watched as the men rose higher and higher, eventually turning into stars. The bear became the star Nanuqdjung (Betelgeuse); the pursuers turned into Udleqdjun (Orion’s belt); and the sled became Kamutiqdjung (Orion’s sword). The men are still chasing the bear to this day; the boy, however, went back to the village and told everyone how the men were lost. 637
ORIGIN OF THE ADLET AND OF THE QADLUNAIT.
Savirqong, an old man, lived alone with his daughter. Her name was Niviarsiang (i.e., the girl), but as she would not take a husband she was also called Uinigumissuitung (she who would not take a husband). She refused all her suitors, but at last a dog, spotted white and red, whose name was Ijirqang, won her affection and she took him for a husband. They had ten children, five of whom were Adlet and five dogs. The lower part of the body of the Adlet was that of a dog and hairy all over, the soles excepted, while the upper part was that of a man. When the children grew up they became very voracious, and as the dog Ijirqang did not go out hunting at all, but let his father in law provide for the whole family, it was difficult for Savirqong to feed them. Moreover, the children were awfully clamorous and noisy; so at last the grandfather got tired of it, put the whole family into his boat, and carried them to a small island. He told the dog Ijirqang to come every day and fetch meat.
Savirqong, an old man, lived alone with his daughter. Her name was Niviarsiang (meaning "the girl"), but since she refused to marry, she was also known as Uinigumissuitung (meaning "she who would not take a husband"). She turned down all her suitors, but eventually, a spotted white and red dog named Ijirqang won her heart, and she took him as her husband. They had ten children, five of whom were Adlet and five were dogs. The lower half of the Adlet's body was that of a dog and covered in hair, except for the soles of their feet, while the upper half was that of a man. As the children grew up, they became very greedy, and since the dog Ijirqang didn't go hunting at all, relying on his father-in-law to provide for the whole family, it became hard for Savirqong to feed them. Additionally, the children were incredibly loud and noisy; so eventually, the grandfather got fed up, put the whole family in his boat, and took them to a small island. He told the dog Ijirqang to come every day and bring meat.
Niviarsiang hung a pair of boots round his neck and he swam across the narrow channel. But Savirqong, instead of giving him meat, filled the boots with heavy stones, which drowned Ijirqang when he attempted to return to the island.
Niviarsiang hung a pair of boots around his neck and swam across the narrow channel. But Savirqong, instead of giving him meat, filled the boots with heavy stones, which drowned Ijirqang when he tried to return to the island.
The daughter thought of revenging the death of her husband. She sent the young dogs to her father’s hut and let them gnaw off his feet and hands. In return Savirqong, when Niviarsiang happened to be in his boat, threw her overboard and cut off her fingers when she held to the gunwale. As they fell into the sea they were transformed into seals and whales. At last he allowed her to climb into the boat.
The daughter planned to avenge her husband's death. She sent the young dogs to her father's hut and let them chew off his feet and hands. In retaliation, Savirqong, while Niviarsiang was in his boat, threw her overboard and chopped off her fingers when she tried to hold onto the edge. As they fell into the sea, they turned into seals and whales. Finally, he let her climb back into the boat.
As she feared that her father might think of killing or maiming her children, she ordered the Adlet to go inland, where they became the ancestors of a numerous people. She made a boat for the young dogs, setting up two sticks for masts in the soles of her boots, and sent the puppies across the ocean. She sang: “Angnaijaja. When you arrive there across the ocean you will make many things giving you joy. Angnaija.” They arrived in the land beyond the sea and became the ancestors of the Europeans.
As she worried that her father might consider harming her children, she instructed the Adlet to go inland, where they became the ancestors of a large group of people. She crafted a boat for the young dogs, using two sticks for masts from the soles of her boots, and sent the puppies across the ocean. She sang: “Angnaijaja. When you get there across the ocean, you will create many things that bring you joy. Angnaija.” They reached the land beyond the sea and became the ancestors of the Europeans.
THE GREAT FLOOD.
A long time ago the ocean suddenly began to rise, until it covered the whole land. The water even rose to the top of the mountains and the ice drifted over them. When the flood had subsided the ice 638 stranded and ever since forms an ice cap on the top of the mountains. Many shellfish, fish, seal, and whales were left high and dry and their shells and bones may be seen to this day. A great number of Inuit died during this period, but many others, who had taken to their kayaks when the water commenced to rise, were saved.
A long time ago, the ocean suddenly started to rise, covering all the land. The water even reached the tops of the mountains, and the ice drifted over them. When the flood receded, the ice 638 became stranded and has since formed an ice cap on the mountaintops. Many shellfish, fish, seals, and whales were left high and dry, and their shells and bones can still be seen today. A large number of Inuit died during this time, but many others, who took to their kayaks when the water began to rise, were saved.
INUGPAQDJUQDJUALUNG.14
In days of yore, an enormous man, whose name was Inugpaqdjuqdjualung, lived in company with many other Inuit in a village on a large fjord. He was so tall that he could straddle the fjord. He used to stand thus every morning and wait for whales to pass beneath him. As soon as one came along he stooped and caught it, just as another man would scoop up some little thing that had fallen into the water, and he ate it as other men eat a small piece of meat.
In ancient times, a giant man named Inugpaqdjuqdjualung lived with many other Inuit in a village by a large fjord. He was so tall that he could straddle the fjord. Every morning, he would stand like that and wait for whales to swim underneath him. As soon as one passed by, he would bend down and catch it, just like someone else would scoop up a small object that had fallen into the water, and he would eat it like other men eat a small piece of meat.
One day all the natives had manned their boats to hunt a whale. Inugpaqdjuqdjualung at the time was sitting lazily near his hut, but when he saw the efforts of the men he scooped both whale and boats from the water and placed them upon the beach.
One day, all the locals got into their boats to hunt a whale. Inugpaqdjuqdjualung was sitting lazily near his hut, but when he saw what the men were doing, he scooped both the whale and the boats out of the water and laid them on the beach.
At another time, being tired from running about, he lay down on a high hill to take a nap. The Inuit told him that a couple of huge bears had been seen near the village, but he said he didn’t care, and told his friends to rouse him by throwing large stones upon him if they should see the bears coming. They did so and Inugpaqdjuqdjualung, suddenly starting up, cried: “Where are they? Where are they?” When the Inuit pointed them out he said: “What! those little things? Those are not worth the bustle; they are small foxes, not bears,” and he crushed one between his fingers, while he put the other into the eyelet of his boot and strangled it there.
At another time, feeling tired from running around, he lay down on a high hill to take a nap. The Inuit told him that a couple of huge bears had been spotted near the village, but he said he didn’t care and told his friends to wake him by throwing large stones at him if they saw the bears coming. They did just that, and Inugpaqdjuqdjualung suddenly jumped up and shouted, “Where are they? Where are they?” When the Inuit pointed them out, he said, “What! Those little things? Those aren’t worth the fuss; they’re small foxes, not bears,” and he crushed one between his fingers while he put the other into the eyelet of his boot and strangled it there.
THE BEAR STORY.
This story is reprinted from Hall (II, p. 240):
This story is reprinted from Hall (II, p. 240):
Many moons ago, a woman obtained a polar bear cub but two or three days old. Having long desired just such a pet, she gave it her closest attention, as though it were a son, nursing it, making for it a soft warm bed alongside her own, and talking to it as a mother does to her child. She had no living relative, and she and the bear occupied the house alone. Kunikdjuaq, as he grew up, proved that the woman had not taught him in vain, for he early began to hunt seals and salmon, bringing them to his mother before eating any himself, and receiving his share from her hands. She always watched from the hilltop for his return, and if she saw that he had been unsuccessful, she begged from her neighbors blubber for his food. She learned how this was from her lookout, for if successful, he came back in the tracks made on going out, but if unsuccessful always by a different route. Learning to excel the Inuit in hunting, he excited their envy, and, after long years of faithful service, his death was resolved upon. On hearing this, the old woman, overwhelmed with grief, offered to give up her own life if they would but spare him who had so long supported her. Her offer was sternly refused. Upon this, when all his enemies 639 had retired to their houses, the woman had a long talk with her son—now well grown in years—telling him that wicked men were about to kill him, and that the only way to save his life and hers was for him to go off and not return. At the same time she begged him not to go so far that she could not wander off and meet him, and get from him a seal or something else which she might need. The bear, after listening to what she said with tears streaming down her furrowed cheeks, gently placed one huge paw on her head, and then throwing both around her neck, said, “Good mother, Kunikdjuaq will always be on the lookout for you and serve you as best he can.” Saying this, he took her advice and departed, almost as much to the grief of the children of the village as to the mother.
Many moons ago, a woman got a polar bear cub that was only two or three days old. Having always wanted a pet like that, she gave it her full attention, caring for it like it was her own child, nursing it, making a soft, warm bed for it next to hers, and talking to it like a mother does. She had no living relatives, and she and the bear lived in the house alone. As Kunikdjuaq grew, he proved the woman had taught him well; he started hunting seals and salmon early on, bringing them back to his mother before eating anything himself, receiving his share from her hands. She always watched from the hilltop for his return, and if she saw he hadn’t been successful, she begged her neighbors for blubber to feed him. She figured this out from her lookout; if he was successful, he'd come back on the same tracks he made going out, but if he failed, he’d always take a different route. Learning to outshine the Inuit in hunting made him the subject of their envy, and after many years of loyal service, they decided to have him killed. When the old woman heard this, heartbroken, she offered to give up her own life if they would just spare the one who had supported her for so long. Her offer was firmly declined. After all his enemies had gone home, the woman had a long conversation with her now grown son, telling him that wicked men were planning to kill him, and that the only way to save both their lives was for him to leave and not come back. At the same time, she pleaded with him not to go too far so she could still wander off to meet him and get a seal or something else she needed. The bear, listening as tears streamed down her wrinkled cheeks, gently placed a huge paw on her head, then wrapped both arms around her neck, saying, “Good mother, Kunikdjuaq will always be watching for you and will help you as best he can.” With that, he took her advice and left, causing nearly as much sorrow for the village children as for his mother.
Not long after this, being in need of food, she walked out on the sea ice to see if she could not meet her son, and soon recognized him as one of two bears who were lying down together. He ran to her, and she patted him on the head in her old familiar way, told him her wants, and begged him to hurry away and get something for her. Away ran the bear, and in a few moments the woman looked upon a terrible fight going on between him and his late companion, which, however, to her great relief, was soon ended by her son’s dragging a lifeless body to her feet. With her knife she quickly skinned the dead bear, giving her son large slices of the blubber, and telling him that she would soon return for the meat, which she could not at first carry to her house, and when her supply should again fail she would comeback for his help. This she continued to do for “a long, long time,” the faithful bear always serving her and receiving the same unbroken love of his youth.
Not long after this, needing some food, she walked out onto the sea ice to see if she could find her son, and soon recognized him as one of two bears lying down together. He ran to her, and she patted him on the head in her familiar way, told him what she needed, and asked him to hurry and get something for her. The bear ran off, and in a few moments she saw a fierce fight happening between him and his companion, which, to her great relief, ended quickly with her son dragging a lifeless body to her feet. With her knife, she quickly skinned the dead bear, giving her son large chunks of blubber, and telling him that she would be back soon for the meat, which she couldn't carry home right away. She promised that when her supplies ran low again, she would come back for his help. She continued to do this for “a long, long time,” with the loyal bear always helping her and receiving the same unwavering love he had known in his youth.
SUNDRY TALES.
(1) Two little girls, while playing about a cliff near Aivillik, with infants in the hoods on their backs, went into an opening between the rocks, which closed upon them before escape was possible. All attempts at rescue were unsuccessful, and the poor children, to whom for a time meat and water were passed, perished in the cliffs (Hall II, p. 222).
(1) Two little girls, while playing near a cliff by Aivillik, with babies in hoods on their backs, went into a gap between the rocks, which closed in on them before they could get out. All attempts to rescue them failed, and the poor kids, who were given some food and water for a while, died in the cliffs (Hall II, p. 222).
(2) Opposite to Niutang, a village in Kingnait, Cumberland Sound, there is a vein of diorite resembling a boot, and therefore called Kamingujang. A long time ago two enemies lived in the village. One day they stood on the beach ready to go hunting. Suddenly the one exclaimed, pointing to Kamingujang, “There he blows,” making his enemy believe that a whale was passing up the fjord and inducing him to look out for it. Then he killed him from behind, piercing him with the spear.
(2) Across from Niutang, a village in Kingnait, Cumberland Sound, there's a vein of diorite that looks like a boot, and that's why it's called Kamingujang. Long ago, two enemies lived in the village. One day, they were on the beach preparing to go hunting. Suddenly, one of them shouted, pointing at Kamingujang, “Look over there,” making his enemy think a whale was swimming up the fjord and causing him to look for it. Then he attacked from behind, stabbing him with a spear.
(3) At Qognung, near the head of Nettilling Fjord, there is a large white stone on each side of the fjord, somewhat resembling a bear. It is said that these stones have been bears which, being pursued by an Eskimo in the water, escaped to the land, but were transformed into these stones.
(3) At Qognung, near the top of Nettilling Fjord, there are large white stones on both sides of the fjord that look a bit like bears. It's said that these stones were once bears that, while being chased by an Eskimo in the water, made it to land but were turned into these stones.
(4) A long time ago a dead boy was buried under a large stone. Before his relatives had returned to their hut the body was transformed into a hare, which jumped forth from the tomb. All hares come from this animal.
(4) A long time ago, a dead boy was buried under a big stone. Before his relatives got back to their hut, the body changed into a hare that jumped out of the grave. All hares come from this animal.
(5) It is said that albinos of seals and deer spring from an egg of about half a foot in length, which forms itself in the earth. The seal digs an underground passage to the sea, the deer a similar one to a distant part of the country, and there they rise. The albinos are said to be very quick.
(5) It’s said that albino seals and deer come from an egg about half a foot long, which forms in the ground. The seal digs a tunnel to the sea, and the deer digs one to a faraway place, and that’s where they emerge. Albinos are said to be very fast.
I will add here an enumeration of the fabulous tribes of which I gained intelligence, but of some of them I only know the names.
I will include a list of the amazing tribes I learned about, but for some of them, I only know their names.
(1) The Tornit, or, as they are called by the Akudnirmiut, the Tuniqdjuait (p. 634). It is remarkable that this people is considered here, as well as in Labrador, a tribe similar to the Eskimo, with whom they formerly lived in company, but who were subsequently expelled by the latter. In Greenland they are entirely a fabulous tribe, each individual being of enormous size, living inland and seldom hunting in the upper parts of the fjords. While in the western parts of the Eskimo country a more historical form of the tradition is preserved, it is entirely mythical in Greenland.
(1) The Tornit, or as the Akudnirmiut call them, the Tuniqdjuait (p. 634). It's interesting that this group is viewed here, as well as in Labrador, as a tribe similar to the Eskimo, with whom they once lived, but were later driven out by them. In Greenland, they are entirely a legendary tribe, with each person being of enormous size, living inland and rarely hunting in the upper parts of the fjords. While in the western regions of the Eskimo territory a more historical version of the story is kept, it is completely mythical in Greenland.
(2) The Adlet or Erqigdlit. In the tradition treating of this tribe a similar change occurs. The Labrador Eskimo call the Indians of the interior Adlet, the tribes west of Hudson Bay call them Erqigdlit. The Baffin Land Eskimo and the Greenlanders have forgotten this relation altogether, but denote with the term a fabulous tribe with dogs’ legs and a human body. The name Adla is used as far north as Cumberland Peninsula, the Akudnirmiut and the more northern tribes using the term Erqigdlit. It is difficult to account for the use of these different terms in both senses.
(2) The Adlet or Erqigdlit. In the tradition related to this tribe, a similar change takes place. The Labrador Eskimo refer to the Indians from the interior as Adlet, while the tribes west of Hudson Bay call them Erqigdlit. The Baffin Land Eskimo and the Greenlanders have completely forgotten this connection, instead using the term to describe a mythical tribe with dog legs and a human body. The name Adla is used as far north as Cumberland Peninsula, with the Akudnirmiut and the more northern tribes using the term Erqigdlit. It's challenging to explain why these different terms are used in both contexts.
(3) The Ardnainiq, a tribe living in the extreme northwest. The men of this people are small, tiny, like children, but entirely covered with hair. They are carried about in the hoods of their wives, just like children. The women are of normal size. They do all the work, going out hunting in the kayaks and providing for the men.
(3) The Ardnainiq, a tribe living in the far northwest. The men of this group are small, almost like children, but completely covered in hair. They are carried around in the hoods of their wives, just like kids. The women are of average size. They do all the work, hunting in kayaks and taking care of the men.
(4) The Inuarudligang, dwarfs living in the cliffs near the shore.
(4) The Inuarudligang, a group of dwarfs living in the cliffs near the shore.
(5) The Igdlungajung, a bandy legged people living inland.
(5) The Igdlungajung, a group of people with bow legs living in the interior.
(6) The Uissuit, dwarfs living in the depth of the sea (p. 621).
(6) The Uissuit, dwarfs living in the depths of the sea (p. 621).
(7) The Ijirang.
The Ijirang.
(8) The Qailerte´tang, a people consisting of women only (p. 605).
(8) The Qailerte´tang, a group made up entirely of women (p. 605).
Finally, I will mention the animals which are only known to the natives by reports of foreign tribes and are described as fabulous creatures. These are the umingmang (the musk ox), which is represented as a fierce animal with black and red streaks and larger than a bear, and the agdlaq (the black bear), which, according to their belief, is also of enormous size. It is said to live inland and to devour everything that comes near it. I am unable to decide whether the report of an enormous fish, the idluk, which is said to live in the lakes, is altogether fabulous. The natives say that if they want to catch the fish they build a snow house on the lake and cut a hole through the ice, into which they sink the hook with a deer’s ham for 641 a bait and a stout thong for a fishing line. Six men hold the line by turns, and as soon as they feel the fish has nibbled they pull it up with all their strength.
Finally, I will mention the animals that are only known to the locals through stories from foreign tribes and are described as mythical creatures. These include the umingmang (the musk ox), portrayed as a fierce animal with black and red stripes that's bigger than a bear, and the agdlaq (the black bear), which, according to their belief, is also enormous. They say it lives inland and devours everything that comes near. I can't tell if the account of a giant fish, the idluk, which is said to inhabit the lakes, is completely made up. The locals claim that if they want to catch the fish, they build a snow house on the lake and cut a hole in the ice, into which they lower a hook baited with a deer's ham and use a strong cord for the fishing line. Six men take turns holding the line, and as soon as they feel the fish nibbling, they pull it up with all their strength.
The fabulous amaroq and avignaq of the Greenlanders are unknown, but the terms denote real animals, the wolf and the lemming.
The amazing amaroq and avignaq of the Greenlanders are unfamiliar, but these terms refer to actual animals, the wolf and the lemming.
Besides traditions of this kind the Eskimo have a great number of fables. Following is an example.
Besides traditions like this, the Eskimo have a lot of fables. Here’s an example.
THE OWL AND THE RAVEN.
The owl and the raven were fast friends. One day the raven made a new dress, dappled white and black, for the owl, who in return made a pair of boots of whalebone for the raven and then began to make a white dress. But when he was about to try it on, the raven kept hopping about and would not sit still. The owl got angry and said: “Now sit still or I shall pour out the lamp over you.” As the raven continued hopping about, the owl fell into a passion and poured the oil upon it. Then the raven cried “Qaq! Qaq!” and since that day has been black all over.
The owl and the raven were good friends. One day, the raven made a new dress for the owl, patterned in white and black. In return, the owl made a pair of whalebone boots for the raven and started working on a white dress. But when the owl was about to try it on, the raven kept hopping around and wouldn’t sit still. The owl got angry and said, “Now sit still or I’ll pour the lamp oil on you.” When the raven continued to hop around, the owl lost their temper and poured the oil on it. Then the raven cried, “Qaq! Qaq!” and has been completely black ever since.
COMPARISON BETWEEN BAFFIN LAND TRADITIONS AND THOSE OF OTHER TRIBES.
The similarity of the language and traditions of the Eskimo from Behring Strait to Greenland is remarkable, considering the distance which separates the tribes. Unfortunately the material from other tribes, except the Greenlanders, is very scanty, but it is probable that the same traditions or elements of traditions are known to all the tribes. In the following table the above traditions are compared with Rink’s Tales and Traditions of the Greenlanders and with those of other tribes:
The similarity in language and traditions among the Eskimo people from the Bering Strait to Greenland is impressive, especially given the distance between the tribes. Unfortunately, the information from other tribes, aside from the Greenlanders, is quite limited, but it's likely that the same traditions or parts of those traditions are shared by all the tribes. In the following table, the mentioned traditions are compared with Rink’s Tales and Traditions of the Greenlanders and with those of other tribes:
Traditions of Greenlanders and other tribes: | Traditions of the Central Eskimo: |
---|---|
Qagsaqsuq, Rink, p. 93. | Qaudjaqdjuq, p. 630. Qaudjaqdjuq, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__. |
The man who recovered his sight, Rink, p. 99. The man who got his sight back, Rink, p. 99. |
The origin of the narwhal, p. 625. The narwhal's origin, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__. |
Igimarasugsuq, Rink, p. 106. | Igimarasugdjuqdjuaq, p. 633. Igimarasugdjuqdjuaq, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__. |
The man who mated himself with a sea fowl, Rink, p. 145. The man who partnered with a sea bird, Rink, p. 145. |
Ititaujang, p. 615. Ititaujang, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__. |
Givioq, Rink, pp. 157 and 429. Givioq, Rink, pp. 157 and 429. |
Kiviung, p. 621. Kiviung, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__. |
Tiggaq, Rink, p. 162. | The visitor, p. 627. The guest, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__. |
A lamentable story, Rink, p. 239. A sad story, Rink, p. 239. |
No. 1, sundry tales, p. 639. No. 1, various stories, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__. |
The sun and the moon, Rink, p. 236. (L’homme lunaire, Petitot, Traditions indiennes du Canada Nord-Ouest, p. 7. Also found by Simpson at Point Barrow.) The sun and the moon, Rink, p. 236. (The lunar man, Petitot, Traditions of Indian Tribes in Northwestern Canada, p. 7. Also found by Simpson at Point Barrow.) |
The sun and the moon, p. 597. The sun and the moon, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__. |
642 The moon, Rink, p. 440. | |
The Tornit (from Labrador), Rink, p. 469. The Tornit (from Labrador), Rink, p. 469. |
The Tornit, p. 634. The Tornit, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__. |
A woman who was mated with a dog, Rink, p. 471. A woman who was paired with a dog, Rink, p. 471. (Fragmentary in J. Murdoch: “A few legendary fragments from the Point Barrow Eskimos,” American Naturalist, p. 594, July, 1886.) (Fragmentary in J. Murdoch: “A few legendary fragments from the Point Barrow Eskimos,” American Naturalist, p. 594, July, 1886.) |
Some of these stories are almost identical in both countries, for instance, Qaudjaqdjuq, the origin of the narwhal, &c., and it is of great interest to learn that some passages, particularly speeches and songs, occur literally in both countries, for instance, the interesting song of Niviarsiang (page 637) and the conclusion of the Kiviung tradition. The tradition of the Tornit and the form of the second tale (origin of the narwhal) resemble much more those of Labrador than those of Greenland. The elements of which the traditions are composed are combined differently in the tales of Baffin Land and Greenland, but most of these elements are identical. I give here a comparative table.
Some of these stories are nearly the same in both countries; for example, Qaudjaqdjuq, the origin of the narwhal, etc. It’s fascinating to discover that some parts, especially speeches and songs, are found word-for-word in both countries, like the intriguing song of Niviarsiang (page 637) and the ending of the Kiviung tradition. The Tornit tradition and the second tale (origin of the narwhal) are much more similar to those of Labrador than to those of Greenland. The components of these traditions are arranged differently in the stories from Baffin Land and Greenland, but most of these components are the same. I’m providing a comparative table here.
Greenland. | Baffin Land. | |
---|---|---|
Transformation of a man into a seal. Transformation of a man into a seal. |
Rink, pp. 222, 224, 469. | Kiviung, p. 621. Kiviung, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__. |
Men walking on the surface of the water. Men walking on the surface of the water. |
Rink, pp. 123, 407. | Kiviung, p. 622. Kiviung, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__. |
Harpooning a witch. | Rink, p. 372. | Sedna, p. 604. Sedna, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__. |
Erqigdlit. | Rink, pp. 401 et seq. | Adlet, p. 637. Adlet, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__. |
Sledge of the man of the moon drawn by one dog. Sledge of the man on the moon pulled by one dog. |
Rink, pp. 401, 442. | |
Origin of the salmon. | Cranz, p. 262. | Ititaujang, p. 617. Ititaujang, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__. |
Arnaquagsaq. | Rink, pp. 150, 326, 466. | Sedna, p. 583. Sedna, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__. |
Origin of the thunder. | Cranz, p. 233; Egede, p. 207. | Kadlu, p. 600. Kadlu, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__. |
The following is a comparison between traditions from Alaska and the Mackenzie and those of the Central Eskimo:
The following is a comparison between the traditions of Alaska and the Mackenzie region and those of the Central Eskimo:
Traditions from Alaska and the Mackenzie: Traditions from Alaska and the Mackenzie: |
Traditions of the Central Eskimo: Central Eskimo Traditions: |
---|---|
Men as descendants of a dog, Murdoch, op. cit., 594. Men as descendants of a dog, Murdoch, op. cit., 594. |
|
The origin of reindeer, Murdoch, op. cit., p. 595. The origin of reindeer, Murdoch, op. cit., p. 595. |
|
The origin of the fishes, Murdoch, op. cit., p. 595. The origin of the fishes, Murdoch, op. cit., p. 595. |
Ititaujang, p. 617. Ititaujang, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__. |
Thunder and lightning, Murdoch, op. cit., p. s595. Thunder and lightning, Murdoch, op. cit., p. s595. |
Kadlu the thunderer, p. 600. Kadlu the Thunderer, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__. |
Sun and moon, Petitot, op. cit., p. 7. Sun and moon, Petitot, referenced work, p. 7. |
Sun and moon, p. 597. Sun and moon, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__. |
Orion, Simpson, p. 940. | Orion, p. 636. Orion, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__. |
The table shows that the following ideas are known to all tribes from Alaska to Greenland: The sun myth, representing the sun as the brother of the moon; the legend of the descent of man from a dog; the origin of thunder by rubbing a deerskin; the origin of fish from chips of wood; and the story of the origin of deer.
The table shows that the following ideas are familiar to all tribes from Alaska to Greenland: the sun myth, which portrays the sun as the brother of the moon; the legend of humans descending from dogs; the origin of thunder being created by rubbing deerskin; the origin of fish coming from wood chips; and the story of how deer originated.
It must be regretted that very few traditions have as yet been collected in Alaska, as the study of such material would best enable us to decide upon the question of the origin of the Eskimo.
It’s unfortunate that very few traditions have been gathered in Alaska so far, as examining this material would help us determine the origins of the Eskimo.
SCIENCE AND THE ARTS.
GEOGRAPHY AND NAVIGATION.
The Eskimo exhibit a thorough knowledge of the geography of their country. I have already treated of their migrations and mentioned that the area they travel over is of considerable extent. They have a very clear conception of all the countries they have seen or heard of, knowing the distances by day’s journeys, or, as they say, by sleeps, and the directions by the cardinal points. So far as I know, all these tribes call true south piningnang, while the other points are called according to the weather prevailing while the wind blows from the different quarters. In Cumberland Sound uangnang is west-northwest; qaningnang (that is, snow wind), east-northeast; nigirn, southeast; and aqsardnirn, the fohn-like wind blowing from the fjords of the east coast. On Nettilling these names are the same, the east-northeast only being called qanara (that is, is it snow?) In Akudnirn uangnang is west-southwest; ikirtsuq (i.e., the wind of the open sea), east-northeast; oqurtsuq (i.e., the wind of the land Oqo or of the lee side, southeast; and avangnanirn (i.e., from the north side along the shore), the northwestern gales. According to Parry the same names as in Cumberland Sound are used in Iglulik.
The Inuit have a deep understanding of the geography of their land. I've already discussed their migrations and noted that the distances they cover are quite large. They have a clear idea of all the regions they’ve seen or heard about, knowing the distances in terms of how many days it takes to travel, or as they say, by sleeps, and the directions by cardinal points. As far as I know, all these tribes refer to true south as “piningnang,” while the other directions are named based on the weather when the wind comes from different areas. In Cumberland Sound, “uangnang” means west-northwest; “qaningnang” (which means snow wind) stands for east-northeast; “nigirn” refers to southeast; and “aqsardnirn” describes the fohn-like wind coming from the fjords of the east coast. On Nettilling, these names are the same, with the east-northeast being called “qanara” (that means "is it snow?"). In Akudnirn, “uangnang” means west-southwest; “ikirtsuq” (which means the wind of the open sea) corresponds to east-northeast; “oqurtsuq” (meaning the wind of the land Oqo or of the sheltered side) means southeast; and “avangnanirn” (meaning from the north side along the shore) refers to the northwestern gales. According to Parry, the same names found in Cumberland Sound are also used in Iglulik.
If the weather is clear the Eskimo use the positions of the sun, of the dawn, or of the moon and stars for steering, and find their way pretty well, as they know the direction of their point of destination exactly. If the weather is thick they steer by the wind, or, if it is calm, they do not travel at all. After a gale they feel their way by observing the direction of the snowdrifts.
If the weather is clear, the Eskimos use the positions of the sun, dawn, or the moon and stars for navigation, and they find their way fairly well since they know the exact direction of their destination. When the weather is poor, they rely on the wind for guidance, or if it's calm, they simply don’t travel at all. After a storm, they navigate by observing the direction of the snowdrifts.
They distinguish quite a number of constellations, the most important of which are Tuktuqdjung (the deer), our Ursa Major; the Pleiades, Sakietaun; and the belt of Orion, Udleqdjun.
They recognize several constellations, the most significant of which are Tuktuqdjung (the deer), our Ursa Major; the Pleiades, Sakietaun; and the belt of Orion, Udleqdjun.
CUMBERLAND PENINSULA, DRAWN BY ARANIN, A SAUMINGNIO.
CUMBERLAND PENINSULA, ILLUSTRATED BY ARANIN, A SAUMINGNIO.
ESKIMO DRAWINGS.
INUIT ARTWORK.
As their knowledge of all the directions is very detailed and they are skillful draftsmen they can draw very good charts. If a man intends to visit a country little known to him, he has a map drawn in the snow by some one well acquainted there and these maps are so good that every point can be recognized. Their way of drawing 644 is first to mark some points the relative positions of which are well known. They like to stand on a hill and to look around in order to place these correctly. This done, the details are inserted. It is remarkable that their ideas of the relative position and direction of coasts far distant one from another are so very clear. Copies of some charts drawn by Eskimo of Cumberland Sound and Davis Strait are here introduced (Plate IV, p. 643, and Figs. 543–546). A comparison between the maps and these charts will prove their correctness. Frequently the draftsman makes his own country, with which he is best acquainted, too large; if some principal points are marked first, he will avoid this mistake. The distance between the extreme points represented in the first chart (Fig. 543) is about five hundred miles.
As their knowledge of all the directions is very detailed and they are skilled mapmakers, they can create very accurate charts. If someone plans to visit a place he's not familiar with, he can get a map drawn in the snow by someone who knows the area well, and these maps are so precise that every location is recognizable. Their method of drawing is first to mark a few points that are well-known positions. They prefer to stand on a hill and survey the area to place these points accurately. Once that's done, the details are filled in. It's impressive how clearly they understand the relative positions and directions of coasts that are far apart. Copies of some charts made by the Eskimo of Cumberland Sound and Davis Strait are included here (Plate IV, p. 643, and Figs. 543–546). Comparing the maps to these charts will confirm their accuracy. Often, the mapmaker will make his own country, which he knows best, appear too large; marking some key points first can help him avoid this error. The distance between the farthest points shown in the first chart (Fig. 543) is about five hundred miles.
Fig. 543. Cumberland Sound and
Frobisher Bay, drawn by Itu, a Nugumio.
(Original in the Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin.)
Fig. 543. Cumberland Sound and Frobisher Bay, illustrated by Itu, a Nugumio.
(Original in the Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin.)
Fig. 544. Cumberland Sound and Frobisher Bay, drawn by Sunapignang, an Oqomio.
Fig. 544. Cumberland Sound and Frobisher Bay, illustrated by Sunapignang, an Oqomio.
Fig. 545. Cumberland Sound, drawn by Itu, a Nugumio.
Fig. 545. Cumberland Sound, illustrated by Itu, a Nugumio.
Fig. 546. Peninsula of Qivitung, drawn by Angutuqdjuaq, a Padlimio.
Fig. 546. Peninsula of Qivitung, illustrated by Angutuqdjuaq, a Padlimio.
The Eskimo have a sort of calendar. They divide the year into thirteen months, the names of which vary a great deal, according to the tribes and according to the latitude of the place. The surplus is 648 balanced by leaving out a month every few years, to wit, the month siringilang (without sun), which is of indefinite duration, the name covering the whole time of the year when the sun does not rise and there is scarcely any dawn. Thus every few years this month is totally omitted, when the new moon and the winter solstice coincide. The name qaumartenga is applied only to the days without sun but with dawn, while the rest of the same moon is called siriniktenga. The days of the month are very exactly designated by the age of the moon. Years are not reckoned for a longer space than two, backward and forward.
The Eskimo have their own type of calendar. They break the year into thirteen months, with names that vary quite a bit depending on the tribes and the latitude of the area. To keep things in balance, they skip a month every few years, specifically the month siringilang (without sun), which lasts for an indefinite period. This name refers to the entire time of the year when the sun doesn't rise, and there's hardly any dawn. So, every few years, this month is completely left out when the new moon and the winter solstice happen at the same time. The term qaumartenga is used only for the days that are sunless but have dawn, while the rest of that moon is called siriniktenga. The days of the month are precisely identified by the age of the moon. Years are only counted for a maximum of two, both backward and forward.
a, b, c, e Drawn by Aisē´ang, a native of Nuvujen.
a, b, c, e Illustrated by Aisē´ang, a resident of Nuvujen.
d, f, g Drawn by Maleki, a native of Imigen.
d, f, g Created by Maleki, a local from Imigen.
ESKIMO DRAWINGS.
Inuit drawings.
Original layout of Plate V:
Original layout of Plate V:
Drawn by Aisē´ang, a native of Nuvujen.
Drawn by Aisē´ang, a local of Nuvujen.
ESKIMO DRAWINGS.
INUIT ART.
The Eskimo are excellent draftsmen and carvers. Most of the drawings are similar to the bear and deer shown on Plate V (Figs. d and g) or to the illustrations of the Qaudjaqdjuq tale (see Figs. 537–541, pp. 631–633.) The rest, on Plates VI and VII, are excellently made, and by far superior to any I have seen made by other Eskimo of these regions. A number of carvings are represented on Plates VIII and IX. The narwhal and the whale are particularly admirable. Among the implements represented in this paper there are many of beautiful and artistic design.
The Inuit are skilled draftsmen and carvers. Most of the drawings resemble the bear and deer shown on Plate V (Figs. d and g) or the illustrations from the Qaudjaqdjuq story (see Figs. 537–541, pp. 631–633). The rest, on Plates VI and VII, are exceptionally crafted and far superior to anything I've seen made by other Inuit from this area. A number of carvings are displayed on Plates VIII and IX. The narwhal and the whale are particularly outstanding. Among the tools shown in this paper, there are many with beautiful and artistic designs.
Drawn by Aise´ang, a native of Nuvujen.
Drawn by Aise´ang, a local from Nuvujen.
ESKIMO DRAWING.
Inuit drawing.
Carving representing whale. (In the possession of Mrs. Adams, Washington.) 1/1
Carving of a whale. (Owned by Mrs. Adams, Washington.) 1/1
Carving representing whale. (National Museum, Washington. 29998.) 1/1
Carving of a whale. (National Museum, Washington. 29998.) 1/1
Carving representing seal. (National Museum, Washington. 29991.) 1/1
Carving representing seal. (National Museum, Washington. 29991.) 1/1
ESKIMO CARVINGS.
INUIT CARVINGS.
I also add a number of engravings of implements plainly showing the influence of European patterns (Plate X).
I also include several engravings of tools that clearly show the influence of European designs (Plate X).
Carving representing narwhal. (In the possession of Capt. John O. Spicer, Groton. Conn.). ½
Carving of a narwhal. (Owned by Capt. John O. Spicer, Groton, Conn.). ½
Seal. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin.) 1/1
Seal. (Museum of Ethnology, Berlin.) 1/1
Walrus head. (National Museum, Washington. 10414.) 1/1
Walrus head. (National Museum, Washington. 10414.) 1/1
Polar bear. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin.) 1/1
Polar bear. (Museum of Ethnology, Berlin.) 1/1
Sealskin float. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin.) 1/1
Sealskin float. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin.) 1/1
Knife. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin.) 1/1
Knife. (Museum of Ethnology, Berlin.) 1/1
Seal. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin.) 1/1
Seal. (Museum of Ethnology, Berlin.) 1/1
Spyglass. (Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin.) 1/1
Spyglass. (Museum of Ethnology, Berlin.) 1/1
ESKIMO CARVINGS.
INUIT CARVINGS.
(National Museum, Washington. a, 10395; b, 68146; c, 10396; e, 10394.)
(National Museum, Washington. a, 10395; b, 68146; c, 10396; e, 10394.)
MODERN IMPLEMENTS
Modern tools
POETRY AND MUSIC.
Among the arts of the Eskimo poetry and music are by far the most prominent. The tales which have been related are only a small part of their stock of traditions. Besides the contents their form also is very interesting, as most of them have been handed down in unchanged form and their narration demands a great deal of art. Many traditions are told in a very abridged form, the substance being supposed to be known. A specimen of this kind is the Sedna tradition (p. 604). All these tales must be considered recitatives, many of them beginning with a musical phrase and continuing as a rhythmic recitation, others being recited in rhythmic phrases throughout. Other traditions are told in a more detailed and prosaic manner, songs or recitations, however, being sometimes included. Ititaujang, for instance, in traveling into the country looking for his wife, sings the song No. XIII, and in the Kalopaling tradition the boy, on seeing the two Inuit coming, sings:
Among the arts, poetry and music are by far the most significant for the Inuit. The stories that have been shared are just a small part of their vast collection of traditions. Additionally, not only the content but also the form is fascinating, as most of these tales have been passed down unchanged, and their delivery requires a great deal of skill. Many traditions are told in a very concise way, with the assumption that the audience already knows the basic details. An example of this is the Sedna tradition (p. 604). All these stories should be seen as recitatives, many starting with a musical phrase and then continuing as rhythmic recitations, while others are recited in rhythmic phrases throughout. Some traditions are narrated in a more detailed and straightforward way, although songs or recitations may also be included. For example, Ititaujang, while traveling in the wilderness searching for his wife, sings song No. XIII, and in the Kalopaling tradition, the boy sings upon seeing the two Inuit approaching:
Inung maqong tikitong aipa kapiteling aipa mirqosailing
Inung maqong tikitong aipa kapiteling aipa mirqosailing
[Music]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
Some Eskimo are very good narrators and understand how to express the feelings of the different persons by modulations of the voice. In addition, as a number of tales are really onomatopoetic, an artistic effect is produced. The way of reciting is always similar to the one above described by notes (p. 648).
Some Inuit are great storytellers and know how to convey the emotions of different characters with variations in their voice. Also, since many tales are quite onomatopoeic, they create an artistic effect. The method of storytelling is always similar to what was described by notes (p. 648).
Besides these tales, which may be called poetic prose, there are real poems of a very marked rhythm, which are not sung but recited. The following are examples:
Besides these stories, which could be called poetic prose, there are actual poems with a distinct rhythm that are recited rather than sung. Here are some examples:
MERRYMAKING AMONG THE TORNIT.
Pika pikagning mingepignirming qijepignirming sukadla. aq! aq!
Pika pikagning mingepignirming qijepignirming sukadla. aq! aq!
[Music]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
The Eskimo reciting this song jump up and down and to the right and left with their legs bent and their hands hanging down, the palms touching each other. In crying aq! aq! they jump as high as possible.
The Eskimo singing this song jump up and down, to the right and left, with their knees bent and their arms hanging down, palms touching. While shouting aq! aq! they leap as high as they can.
THE LEMMING’S SONG.
Ikergnapigen, ikergnapigen sirdnaturenain
Ikergnapigen, ikergnapigen sirdnaturenain
aχe-eroqturenain nakusungming aukturenain
aχe-eroqturenain nakusungming aukturenain
pijungmadjangilatit qialungnuaralungnan
pijungmadjangilatit qialungnuaralungnan
[Music]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
Besides these old songs and tales there are a great number of new ones, and, indeed, almost every man has his own tune and his own song. A few of these become great favorites among the Eskimo and are sung like our popular songs. The summer song (No. I) and “The returning hunter” (No. II) may be most frequently heard. As to the contents of the songs, they treat of almost everything imaginable: of the beauty of summer; of thoughts and feelings of the composer on any occasion, for instance, when watching a seal, when angry with somebody, &c.; or they tell of an important event, as of a long journey. Satiric songs are great favorites.
Besides these old songs and stories, there are a lot of new ones, and almost everyone has their own tune and song. A few of these become popular among the Eskimo and are sung like our favorite songs. The summer song (No. I) and “The returning hunter” (No. II) are the most commonly heard. As for the content of the songs, they cover almost everything you can think of: the beauty of summer; the composer’s thoughts and feelings on various occasions, like when watching a seal, when feeling angry with someone, etc.; or they recount significant events, such as a long journey. Satirical songs are especially popular.
The form of both old and new songs is very strict, they being divided into verses of different length, alternating regularly. I give here some examples:
The structure of both old and new songs is quite rigid, divided into verses of varying lengths that alternate in a regular pattern. Here are some examples:
ARLUM PISSINGA (the killer’s song).
Qiangalo taitoχalunga qolaralo taitoχalunga
Qiangalo taitoχalunga qolaralo taitoχalunga
Qiangalogalo qolaralogalo aisinaiisi
Qiangalogalo qolaralogalo aisinaiisi
senilearaluqdjuara maliksiaqtuaqtugo
senilearaluqdjuara maliksiaqtuaqtugo
uvanaleunen audlatsiapiata kingodnidlaqdjuagung
uvanaleunen audlatsiapiata kingodnidlaqdjuagung
qangatirgakulung uaijuvara.
qangatirgakulung uaijuvara.
[Music]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
The “killer” of the song title is a killer whale (arluk, gen. arluup or arlum).
The "killer" in the song title refers to a killer whale (arluk, gen. arluup or arlum).
I. The killer’s song:
(1) Qiangalo taitoχalunga,
Qiangalo taitoχalunga,
Qolaralo taitoχalunga
Qolaralo taitoχalunga
Qiangalogalo
Qiangalogalo
Qolaralogalo
Qolaralogalo
Aisinaisi.15
Aisinaisi.__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
(2) Senilearaluqdjuara
(2) Senilearaluqdjuara
Maliksiaqtuaqtugo.
Maliksiaqtuaqtugo.
Uvanaleunen
Uvanaleunen
Audlatsiapiata
Audlatsiapiata
Kingodnidlaqdjuagung
Kingodnidlaqdjuagung
(3) Qangatirgakulung uaijuvara.
Qangatirgakulung uaijuvara.
II. Summer song:
Aja.
Aja.
(1) Ajaja adlenaipa.
Ajaja adlenaipa.
Adlenaitariva silekdjua una aujaratarame
Adlenaitariva silekdjua una aujaratarame
Ajaja, Ajaja!
Ajaja, Ajaja!
Aja!
Aha!
(2) Ajaja adlenaipa
Ajaja adlenaipa
Adlenaitariva silekdjua una tektorotikelektlune.
Adlenaitariva silekdjua una tektorotikelektlune.
Ajaja, Ajaja.
Ajaja, Ajaja.
Aja!
Aye!
(3) Ajaja nipituovokpan!
(3) Ajaja nipituovokpan!
Nipituovokpan kouvodlalimokoa nunatine aujadle
Nipituovokpan kouvodlalimokoa nunatine aujadle
Ajaja, Ajaja
Ajaja, Ajaja
Aja!
Ayo!
&c.
&c.
III. Utitiaq’s song:
Aja!
Ayo!
(1) Adlenaipunganema adlenait.
Adlenaipunganema adlenait.
Adlenaipunganema
Adlenaipunganema
Adlenaipunganema adlenait,
Adlenaipunganema adlenait,
Aja!
Aja!
(2) Sikuqdjualimena adlenait.
Sikuqdjualimena adlenait.
Atoqpoqtaromena
Atoqpoqtaromena
Tanerangitu adlenait.
Tanerangitu adlenait.
Aja!
Ayo!
&c.
&c.
IV. Kadlu’s song:
(1) Odlaqē´, odlaqē´, odlaqē´.
Odlaqē´, odlaqē´, odlaqē´.
Odlaqē´ saranga tutaranga atujang una ajajaja.
Odlaqē´ saranga tutaranga atujang una ajajaja.
Odlaqē´ atedlirlungai aχigirn qodlusuaning aχiatungitunga ajaja.
Odlaqē´ atedlirlungai aχigirn qodlusuaning aχiatungitunga ajaja.
Nettiulunga iχatijetingirn pinassousirdlunirn pinasuatautlirpadlirunirn.
Nettiulunga iχatijetingirn pinassousirdlunirn pinasuatautlirpadlirunirn.
(2) Odlaqē´, odlaqē´, odlaqē´.
Odlaqē´, odlaqē´, odlaqē´.
Odlaqē´ saranga tutaranga atujang una ajajaja.
Odlaqē´ saranga tutaranga atujang una ajajaja.
Odlaqē´ atedlirlungai aχigirn qodlusuaning aχiatungitunga ajaja.
Odlaqē´ atedlirlungai aχigirn qodlusuaning aχiatungitunga ajaja.
Ugjurutlarunirn iχatijitingirn pinassousirdlunirn pinasuatautlirpadlirnunirn.
Ugjurutlarunirn iχatijitingirn pinassousirdlunirn pinasuatautlirpadlirnunirn.
(3) ....&c.
(3) ....& etc.
Some of these verses contain only a single word, the rhythm being brought about by the chorus aja, amna aja, &c. I add two examples of this kind:
Some of these lines consist of just one word, with the rhythm created by the chorus aja, amna aja, etc. Here are two examples of this type:
V. Song in the language of the Angakut:
Ajarpaija taitlaniqdjuaq ajarpe aitarpik ajijaija.
Ajarpaija taitlaniqdjuaq ajarpe aitarpik ajijaija.
Ajarpaija ataqdjuaq ajarpe aitarpik ajijaija.
Ajarpaija ataqdjuaq ajarpe aitarpik ajijaija.
Ajarpaija mingeriaqdjuaq ajarpe aitarpik ajijaija.
Ajarpaija mingeriaqdjuaq ajarpe aitarpik ajijaija.
VI. Oχaitoq’s song:
Aja.
Aja.
(1) Tavunga tavunga tavunga tavunga
Tavunga tavunga tavunga tavunga
Tavunga tavunga tavunga tavunga tavungadlo tavunga
Tavunga tavunga tavunga tavunga tavungadlo tavunga
Aja.
Aja.
(2) Pissutaramaima tavunga tavunga.
Pissutaramaima tavunga tavunga.
Pissutaramaima tavunga tavunga tavungadlo tavunga, &c.
Pissutaramaima tavunga tavunga tavungadlo tavunga, &c.
The rhythm of the songs will best be understood by examining the melodies. Every long syllable may be replaced by two or even three short ones; other short syllables appear as unaccented parts before the accented part of a measure; in short, the rhythmic adaptation of the words to the melody is very arbitrary and interchanges frequently occur, so that it is impossible to speak of metric feet. At the same time this furnishes distinct proof that the musical rhythm is the decisive element in determining the form. The rhythmic arrangement of the words is regulated with considerable exactness by the quantity of the syllables, and not by the accent. While, for instance, in speaking, it would be “palirtu´gun,” in song No. IV it is “palir´tugun´,” and in No. I “tekto´roti´kelek´tlune,” instead of “tektorotikelektlu´ne,” &c. Such displacements of the accent, however, are avoided if possible, and in the best and most popular songs they hardly appear at all.
The rhythm of the songs can be best understood by looking at the melodies. Each long syllable can be swapped out for two or even three short ones; other short syllables come in as unaccented sections before the accented part of a measure. In short, adapting the words rhythmically to the melody is quite flexible, and frequent changes happen, making it hard to define metric feet. At the same time, this provides clear evidence that musical rhythm is the key factor in shaping the form. The arrangement of the words is determined quite precisely by the number of syllables, not by the accent. For example, in regular speech, you would say “palirtu´gun,” while in song No. IV, it's “palir´tugun´,” and in No. I “tekto´roti´kelek´tlune,” instead of “tektorotikelektlu´ne,” etc. These shifts in accent are avoided when possible, and in the best and most popular songs, they barely happen at all.
The numbers refer to the songs printed below, so “No. I” is the Summer Song, No. II above. But the quoted word “tektorotikelektlune” occurs only in the first version.
The numbers refer to the songs listed below, so “No. I” is the Summer Song, No. II above. However, the quoted word “tektorotikelektlune” appears only in the first version.
The construction of the songs corresponds entirely with that of the music, inasmuch as every melody and every rhythmically spoken song is made up of musical, that is, rhythmic, phrases which are divided by cæsuræ. Repetitions of the same phrases are very frequent. 652 The adaptation of the melodies to our divisions of time and measure is also somewhat arbitrary, as they frequently consist of a mixture of three and four part phrases. It is for this reason that I have noted down some songs without any division into bars or measures and in those cases have only marked the accented syllables.
The structure of the songs aligns perfectly with the music, since every melody and every rhythmically spoken song consists of musical, or rhythmic, phrases that are separated by pauses. It's quite common to see repetitions of the same phrases. 652 The way the melodies fit into our divisions of time and measure is also a bit arbitrary, as they often include a mix of three- and four-part phrases. That's why I've recorded some songs without breaking them into bars or measures, and in those cases, I've only marked the accented syllables.
Among the twenty melodies and rhythmic poems we find ten of binary measures, five of triple measures, and six of mixed ones. Of the whole number, nine begin on the full bar, eleven on the arsis.
Among the twenty melodies and rhythmic poems, we have ten in binary time signatures, five in triple time, and six in mixed rhythms. Out of all of them, nine start on the downbeat, while eleven begin on the upbeat.
The melodies move within the following range: In a fifth (No. III), one; in a minor sixth (Nos. VII, IX, X), three; in a major sixth (Nos. II, IV, XVII), three; in a seventh (Nos. XII, XIV), two; in an octave, (Nos. I, II, V, VIII, XI, XVI), six; in a minor ninth (No. VI), one; in a major ninth (No. V), one; in a tenth (No. XIII), one.
The melodies fall within the following range: In a fifth (No. III), one; in a minor sixth (Nos. VII, IX, X), three; in a major sixth (Nos. II, IV, XVII), three; in a seventh (Nos. XII, XIV), two; in an octave (Nos. I, II, V, VIII, XI, XVI), six; in a minor ninth (No. VI), one; in a major ninth (No. V), one; in a tenth (No. XIII), one.
These may be divided into two very characteristic and distinct groups. The first, which would coincide with our major key, contains the following essential tones:
These can be divided into two clear and distinct groups. The first, which aligns with our main key, includes the following essential tones:
[Music]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
The fourth and the sixth occur seldom, and then only as subordinate tones. This key is identical with the Chinese and many of the Indian ones.
The fourth and sixth happen rarely, and only as secondary tones. This key matches the Chinese and many of the Indian ones.
In the second group, which corresponds to our minor key, we frequently find the fourth, while the sixth only appears twice and then as a subordinate tone (in No. XV). We furthermore find the major seventh in the lower position leading back to the beginning, i.e., the key note. The essential components of this key are:
In the second group, which relates to our minor key, we often find the fourth, while the sixth appears only twice and then as a subordinate tone (in No. XV). We also see the major seventh in the lower position leading back to the beginning, that is, the key note. The essential components of this key are:
[Music]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
Professor R. Succo calls attention to the fact that the relation of the melodies to their key note resembles that of the Gregorian chants, especially the psalmodic ones among them.
Professor R. Succo highlights that the connection between the melodies and their key note is similar to that of Gregorian chants, particularly the psalmodic ones.
If we, in accordance with our ideas, suppose the melody—No. XIII, for example—to begin in C major, it nevertheless does not conclude in the same key, but in E. We would say that No. XIV is written in A minor; still it ends in E. We find the same in the Gregorian chants. They also resemble the songs of the Eskimo in the retention of the same note during a large number of consecutive syllables.
If we follow our ideas and assume that the melody—No. XIII, for example—starts in C major, it doesn't end in the same key but in E. We would say that No. XIV is in A minor; however, it also ends in E. The same is true for Gregorian chants. They are similar to Eskimo songs in that they keep the same note for many consecutive syllables.
On the whole the melodies, even to our musical sense, can be traced to a key note. However, changes often occur as well (see No. VI). A very striking construction appears in No. XIII, where the oft-repeated E forms a new key note, while at the conclusion the melody leaps back without any modulation to C through the peculiar interval, ḇ, c.
On the whole, the melodies, even to our musical understanding, can be traced to a key note. However, changes often happen as well (see No. VI). A very striking construction appears in No. XIII, where the frequently repeated E forms a new key note, while at the end, the melody jumps back without any modulation to C through the unusual interval, ḇ, c.
I. SUMMER SONG.
Aja.
Aja.
Ajaja, adlenaipa, adlenaitariva silekdjua una aujaratarame.
Ajaja, adlenaipa, adlenaitariva silekdjua una aujaratarame.
Ajaja, Ajaja, Aja.
Ajaja, Ajaja, Aja.
[Music]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
II. THE RETURNING HUNTER.
a.
a.
Angutivun taina taunane taina,
Angutivun taina taunane taina,
auvasimameta avavasimameta neriopaluktunga,
auvasimameta avavasimameta neriopaluktunga,
hanga anga;
hanga anga;
hanga anga agaga.
hanga anga agaga.
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
b.
b.
Angutivun taina taunane taina,
Angutivun taina taunane taina,
auvasimameta avavasimameta neriopaluktunga;
auvasimameta avavasimameta neriopaluktunga;
hanga anga agaga.
hanga anga agaga.
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
III. SONG OF THE TORNIT.
Savu saujaqdjuin tetetlirpavun, aqtungan.
Savu saujaqdjuin tetetlirpavun, aqtungan.
Surqarmun pilaktutu aχi lurpa, aqtungan.
Surqarmun pilaktutu aχi lurpa, aqtungan.
[Music]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
IV. SONG OF THE INUIT TRAVELING TO NETTILLING.
Aja.
Aja.
Aχagodlo palirtugun;
Aχagodlo palirtugun;
uangnangmun tipavunga,
uangnangmun tipavunga,
ija jija ajaja.
ija jija ajaja.
Aja.
Aja.
[Music]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
V. OXAITOQ’S SONG.
Aja.
Aja.
Tavunga tavunga tavunga tavunga.
Tavunga tavunga tavunga tavunga.
Tavunga tavunga tavunga tavunga tavungadlo tavunga.
Tavunga tavunga tavunga tavunga tavungadlo tavunga.
Aja.
Aja.
[Music]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
VI. UTITIAQ’S SONG.
Aja.
Aja.
Adlenaipunganema adlenait.
Adlenaipunganema adlenait.
Adlenaipunganema adlenaipunganema adlenait.
Adlenaipunganema adlenaipunganema adlenait.
Aja.
Aja.
[Music]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
VII. SONG.
[Music]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
VIII. SONG.
Hajajaja hajaja hajajaja hajaja
Hahaha haha hahaha haha
hajajaja hajaja hajajaja hajaja.
hahaha haha haha haha.
[Music]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
IX. SONG OF THE TORNIT.
Savungaja aja aja
Savungaja aja aja
Sama ajaja aja.
Sama ajaja aja.
Nunataχatoq sedna,
Nunataχatoq Sedna,
sersertaχatoq sedna.
sersertaχatoq sedna.
[Music]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
X. THE FOX AND THE WOMAN.
Sourme oχomejame, kangedlirpiuk tajajajaja.
Sourme oχomejame, kangedlirpiuk tajajajaja.
Irdning nuχingnaq ujarqamoma satuaitiem
Irdning nuχingnaq ujarqamoma satuaitiem
aqbiranga pirietukilaunga.
aqbiranga pirietukilaunga.
[Music: melody, recitative]
[Music: __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__]
XI. THE RAVEN SINGS.
Aaja aja aja ajaja aja aja ajaja.
Aaja aja aja ajaja aja aja ajaja.
Aaja aja aja aja qilirsiutarata taunane.
Aaja aja aja aja qilirsiutarata taunane.
Arnaqdjuqpun una qiavoqtung qitungnaqdjuago nutingmen.
Arnaqdjuqpun is not available today.
[Music]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
XII. SONG OF A PADLIMIO.
Ananema Padli unguatane naunirpunga
Ananema Padli is available now.
ananega oqsomiksema qijanurpomena kijutaidle
ananega oqsomiksema qijanurpomena kijutaidle
noutlarputin kungesiening qaqoamudle
noutlarputin kungesiening qaqoamudle
noutlarputidle aja.
noutlarputidle aja.
[Music]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
XIII. ITITAUJANG’S SONG.
Tavungavunga pisupagasupunga pisupagasupunga
Tavungavunga pisupagasupunga pisupagasupunga
silapotuadnun tigmidjen nunanun tavungaja ijaaja.
silapotuadnun tigmidjen nunanun tavungaja ijaaja.
Nutitavun okoa
Nutitavun okoa
quliqdjuaq una
quliqdjuaq is here
niguviksao adjirdjangirtun
niguviksao adjirdjangirtun
qangiqsao adjirdjangirtun
qangiqsao adjirdjangirtun
kissieni okoa oχomeangitigun
kissieni okoa oχomeangitigun
majoardlunga tavunga
majoardlunga tavunga
imma pisutalupurmalirmijunga.
imma pisutalupurmalirmijunga.
[Music]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
XIV. PLAYING AT BALL.
Sake-etan sungmunpingmeta naumunpingmeta
Sake-etan sungmunpingmeta naumunpingmeta
qaujarajuva udlujarajuva
qaujarajuva udlujarajuva
amutai qimutai idlo-oma una qagiela una
amutai qimutai idlo-oma una qagiela una
idnir sorivara inung ikoa oaitiangikoa audlertouqikoa
idnir sorivara inung ikoa oaitiangikoa audlertouqikoa
togitjugitjuge togitjugitjuge setidle sinadle
togitjugitjuge togitjugitjuge set idle sinadle
arnarisaigneman tigmidjen arnaining tunigo
arnarisaigneman tigmidjen arnaining tunigo
anejuidla qausirtuming ita itjamuna
anejuidla qausirtuming ita itjamuna
majaoadlelatit ikuseka avasituko
majaoadlelatit ikuseka avasituko
oqsukena taotugnite akataotuktara
oqsukena taotugnite akataotuktara
sugavikana kananepa iluqio gnariputit
sugavikana kananepa iluqio gnariputit
aaiqtodlutidlo nesertodlutidlo
aaiqtodlutidlo nesertodlutidlo
avatirtunggiengodlutidlo
avatirtunggiengodlutidlo
[Music]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
XV. PLAYING AT BALL.
χolurpajause χolupirpajause
χolurpajause χolupirpajause
surivanga pangmane majoriva pangmane.
surivanga pangmane majoriva pangmane.
[Music]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
XVI. From Parry, Second Voyage, p. 542, Iglulik.
Amna aya aya amna ah
Amna aya aya Amna ah
amna aya aya amna ah ah
amna aya aya amna ah ah
etc.
etc.
The sixteenth bar is probably
The 16th bar is probably
[Music]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
XVII. From Lyon, Private Journal, p. 135, Iglulik.
Pilitai, avata vat . . .
Pilitai, avata vat . . .
ah! hooi! ah! hooi!
ah! hooi! ah! hooi!
[Music: as printed]
[Music: __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
According to Parry, p. 542, the fourth bar of XVII is written: ;
the eighth, ;
Lyon bar after the twelfth bar inserted.
According to Parry, p. 542, the fourth bar of XVII is written: ;
the eighth, ;
Lyon bar after the twelfth bar inserted.
[Music: with all changes]
[Music: __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
XVIII. From Kane, Arctic
Explorations. The Second Grinnell Expedition, I, p. 383.
From Ita, Smith Sound.
Amna gat amnaya amna ja amnayet.
Amna gat amnaya amna ja amnayet.
[Music]
[__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__]
XIX. From Bessels’s Amerikanische Nordpol-Expedition, p. 372.
Ahjajajajajajajajaja
Ahhahaha
ahjajajajajajajajaja
ahhahahaha
ahjajajajajajajajaja ah.
ahhahaha ah.
[Music: __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__.]
GLOSSARY.
As in the original text, χ in Glossary entries is shown in ordinary (not small-capped) type: Eχaluq, Eχaluit.
As in the original text, χ in Glossary entries is shown in ordinary (not small-capped) type: Eχaluq, Eχaluit.
ESKIMO WORDS USED, WITH DERIVATIONS AND SIGNIFICATIONS.
Adlipar´miut, the inhabitants of the country farthest below; from at, below; -lirn, being in a certain direction; -pāng, superlative; -mio (plural, -miut), inhabitant of.
Adlipar'miut, the people living in the southernmost part of the country; from at, below; -lirn, in a specific direction; -pāng, the most; -mio (plural, -miut), residents of.
A´dlirn, a small lamp on the floor of the hut; from at, below; -lirn, being in a certain direction.
A'dlirn, a small lamp on the floor of the hut; from at, below; -lirn, being in a certain direction.
Adli´vun, those beneath us; from at, below; -lirn, being in a certain direction; -vun, possessive first person plural.
Adli´vun, those below us; from at, beneath; -lirn, indicating a certain direction; -vun, our possessive.
A´gdlag, black bear.
A'gdlag, black bear.
Agdliaq, a small spear; from ake-, across; -dlivoq, he provides with; -aq, past participle.
Agdliaq, a small spear; from ake-, across; -dlivoq, he provides with; -aq, past participle.
Ag´girn, a species of duck (Anas glacialis).
Ag´girn, a type of duck (Anas glacialis).
Aiss´ivang, spider.
Aiss'ivang, spider.
A´jang, beam of kayak; from ajaq-, to support.
A'jang, beam of a kayak; from ajaq-, to support.
Aja´rorpoq, he plays the game cat’s cradle.
Aja´rorpoq, he plays the game cat's cradle.
Aje´gaung, a game.
Aje´gaung, a game.
Ajokitarpoq, a game.
Ajokitarpoq, a game.
Ajuktaq´tung, batting the ball.
Ajuktaq´tung, hitting the ball.
Akparaik´tung, hook for preventing the loss of harpoon.
Akparaik'tung, a device to stop the harpoon from getting lost.
Akud´nang, paddle handle; from ako, middle.
Akud´nang, paddle handle; from ako, center.
A´kuk, lateral strips of wood used in boat; from ako, middle.
A'kuk, side pieces of wood used in boats; from ako, center.
A´lirn, harpoon line.
A´lirn, harpoon rope.
A´maroq, wolf.
A'maroq, wolf.
A´ming, skin of land animals, cover of boat and kayak.
Aiming, skin from land animals, used as covering for boats and kayaks.
Ang´akoq, a magician, conjurer.
Ang´akoq, a magician, wizard.
Angakunirn, the art of the angakoq.
Angakunirn, the skill of the angakoq.
Ang´akut, plural of angakoq.
Ang´akut, plural of angakoq.
Angiaq, spirit of a murdered child (Greenland).
Angiaq, spirit of a murdered child (Greenland).
Ang´un, paddle.
Ang'un, paddle.
Anguta´, his father.
Anguta, his dad.
Angu´vigang, lance; from anguvoq, he goes sealing with the harpoon.
Angu' vigang, lance; from anguvoq, he goes sealing with the harpoon.
Aning´a, her brother (the moon).
Aning´a, her brother (the moon).
A´no, dog harness.
A'no, dog harness.
A´pumang, gunwale.
A´pumang, side of a boat.
Aqo´jang, stern of kayak.
Aqo´jang, back of the kayak.
Aqsar´dnirn, wind blowing down a valley.
Aqsar´dnirn, wind blowing through a valley.
Arau´taq, snow beater (Aivillik dialect).
Arau'taq, snow beater (Aivillik dialect).
Arng´oaq, amulet.
Arng'oaq, amulet.
Ase´dlun, flat receptacle for the harpoon line on kayak.
Ase'dlun, a flat container for the harpoon line on a kayak.
Asimau´tang, piece of board or whalebone on which skins are cleaned.
Asimau’tang, a flat piece of wood or whalebone used for cleaning skins.
Atau´ta, neck of sealskin float; from atav-, to be connected.
Atau'ta, a float made of sealskin; from atav-, to be linked.
Audliti´ving, vault back of snow house.
Audliti´ving, behind the snow house.
Avangna´nirn, northwestern gales along the coast of Baffin Land.
Avangna´nirn, northwestern winds along the coast of Baffin Land.
Avau´tang, sealskin float.
Avau´tang, sealskin buoy.
Avautapāq´, large sealskin float; from avautang, sealskin float; -pāq, superlative.
Avautapāq’, a big sealskin float; from avautang, sealskin float; -pāq, the best.
A´vignaq, lemming.
A'vignaq, lemming.
Aχi´girn, ptarmigan.
Aχi´girn, grouse.
Eχalū´jang, carved ivory fish, used as bait; from eχaluq, salmon; -ujang, similar to.
Eχalū´jang, carved ivory fish, used as bait; from eχaluq, salmon; -ujang, similar to.
Eχaluq, salmon.
Eχaluq, salmon.
Idluk´, a fabulous fish.
Idluk´, an amazing fish.
Igdl´u, snow house.
Igdl'u, snow house.
Igdl´uarn, a vault attached to snow hut; from igdlu, snow house; -arn, small.
Igdl'uarn, a small vault connected to a snow hut; from igdlu, snow house; -arn, small.
Igdlukitaq´tung, playing with two balls, tossing them up alternately; from igdlung, both; -kitarpoq, he uses at the same time.
Igdlukitaqtung is playing with two balls, tossing them up one after the other; from igdlung, both; -kitarpoq, he uses at the same time.
Igdlu´ling, second vault of snow house; from igdlu, snow house; -ling, with.
Igdlu’ling, second snow house; from igdlu, snow house; -ling, with.
I´gimang, ball-and-socket joint of harpoon and lance; from igipā´, he throws it off.
I'gimang, the ball-and-socket joint of a harpoon and lance; from igipā´, he throws it away.
Ikan´, store room supported by stone pillars; from ikarpoq, it stretches from one support to another.
Fish, a storeroom held up by stone pillars; from ikarpoq, it reaches from one support to another.
Ikirt´suq, wind blowing from the open sea.
Ikirt´suq, wind blowing in from the open sea.
Ilaga, my friend (Netchillik).
Ilaga, my friend (Netchillik).
Ilupi´qang, lining of snow house; from ilo, inner.
Ilupi'qang, the part inside a snow house; from ilo, meaning inner.
Imiti´jung, drinking water; from imiq, fresh water.
Imitating, drinking water; from imiq, fresh water.
Inetang, hoop with net of thongs to dry clothing etc. in snow house; from inivā´, he hangs it up.
Inetang, a hoop with a net made of straps to dry clothes and other items in a snow house; from inivā´, he hangs it up.
In´ua, its man, owner; possessive third person of inung, man.
Inua, his man, owner; possessive third person of inung, man.
Inug´sung, cairn; from inung, man.
Inug'sung, burial mound; from inung, man.
Ipar´ang, harpoon line.
Ipar'ang, harpoon line.
Ip´un, oar, a spear.
Ip´un, oar, a spear.
Irqata´tung, a certain circuit among the huts.
Irqata'tung, a specific path around the huts.
Issumau´tang, a chief; from issu´mavoq, he thinks.
Issumau´tang, a chief; from issu´mavoq, he believes.
Itigega, boot (Iglulik).
Itigega, boot (Iglulik).
Itir´bing, cross piece abaft the hole in kayak; from itiq.
Itir’bing, cross piece behind the hole in the kayak; from itiq.
Kabliaqdjuq, wolverine (Iglulik).
Kabliaqdjuq, wolverine (Iglulik).
Kaitikpoq, a game.
Kaitikpoq, a game.
Kaiviti´jung, a game.
Kaiviti'jung, a game.
Kaki´vang, fish spear.
Kaki'vang, fish spear.
Kaklio´kia, hook (Iglulik).
Kaklio´kia, hook (Iglulik).
Kalu´giang, a heavy lance (qalugiang?).
Kalu´giang, a heavy lance (qalugiang?).
Kang´o, a species of goose.
Kang'o, a species of goose.
Ka´pun, Spear; from kapivā´, he stabs him.
Ka´pun, Spear; from kapivā´, he stabs him.
Ka´teng, entrance to stone hut.
Ka´teng, entrance to stone house.
Kentun, drumstick.
Kentun, drumstick.
Kidlu´lirn, lamp standing in the rear of the hut.
Kidlu'rin, lamp standing at the back of the hut.
Ki´glo, boat post.
Ki´glo, boat dock.
Kilaut, drum.
Kilaut, drum.
Koukparmiu´tang, a certain amulet at point of hood.
Koukparmiu´tang, a specific amulet at the tip of the hood.
Ku´jang, keel of kayak.
Ku´jang, kayak keel.
Ma´ling, paddle blade.
Ma'ling, paddle blade.
Ma´mi, membrane or inner side of skin.
Mom, membrane or inner layer of skin.
Ma´sing, cross piece before hole in kayak.
Ma'sing, cross piece in front of the hole in the kayak.
Mir´qun, needle.
Mir´qun, sewing needle.
Mirquss´ang, two masked persons.
Mirquss´ang, two masked individuals.
Mumipoq, he dances.
Mumipoq, he dances.
Nabi´ring, a loop; from nā´poq, he hinders a motion.
Nabiring, a loop; from nā´poq, he blocks a motion.
Na´po (plural napun), cross bar of sledge.
Na´po (plural napun), sledge crossbar.
Naqeta´run, lashing for the sledge; from naqigpoq, it is pressed down.
Naqeta'run, whipping for the sled; from naqigpoq, it is pushed down.
Nau´lang, harpoon head.
Nau'lang, harpoon tip.
Ne´tivang, Phoca cristata.
Ne´tivang, Phoca cristata.
Ni´girn, southeast.
Ni'girn, southeast.
Niksiang, hook.
Niksiang, hook.
Niksiar´taung, fish hook.
Niksiar´taung, fishing hook.
Nirt´sun, small ropes used in sledge and house.
Nirt'sun, short ropes used for sleds and homes.
Niuq´tung, drill bow with string; from niorpoq, he drills.
Niuq´tung, a bow drill with a string; from niorpoq, he drills.
Niu´tang, hoop with skin stretched over it; beam of kayak.
Niu´tang, a hoop with stretched skin over it; a kayak beam.
Nuglu´tang, a certain game.
Nuglu´tang, a specific game.
Nu´irn, bird spear.
Nu´irn, bird spear.
Nulianititi´jung, exchange of wives.
Nulianititi´jung, wife exchange.
Nunajisar´tung, a certain festival.
Nunajisar'tung, a certain festival.
Nuqsang, throwing board.
Nuqsang, frisbee.
Nussueraqtung, a certain festival.
Nussueraqtung festival.
Oqur´tsuq (Akudnirn), southeast, blowing from Oqo; from oqo, weather side.
Oqur´tsuq (Akudnirn), southeast, blowing from Oqo; from oqo, the side facing the weather.
Pa, hole of kayak.
Pa, kayak hole.
Pakijumijar´tung, game of hook and crook.
Pakijumijar´tung, a game of deceit and trickery.
Pa´na, double edged knife.
Pa´na, double-edged knife.
Parti´rang, button for closing the pitu; from pārpa, he meets him.
Partirang, button to close the pitu; from pārpa, he encounters him.
Pauk´tun, pegs.
Pauk´tun, pegs.
Pau´ting, double bladed kayak paddle.
Pau'ting, double-bladed kayak paddle.
Pi´laut, large knife.
Pi´laut, large knife.
Pilek´tung, cutting something.
Pilek´tung, slicing something.
Pi´main, chief, he who knows everything best by practice.
Piman, chief, the one who knows everything best through experience.
Pi´ningnang, true south.
Piningnang, true south.
Pir´qang, shoeing of runners of sledge.
Pir'qang, fitting shoes on sled runners.
Pitiq´se, bow.
Pitiq´se, bow.
Pitkusi´rarpoq, a certain game.
Pitkusi´rarpoq, a specific game.
Pi´tu, a stout thong, consisting of two parts to fasten traces to sledge.
Pi'tu, a thick strap, made up of two pieces to attach the traces to the sled.
Poviu´tang, pipe for inflating skins; from pō-, to blow.
Poviu'tang, a pipe for inflating skins; from pō-, to blow.
Pukiq, the white part of a deerskin.
Pukiq, the white part of a deerskin.
Qadlunait, Europeans.
Qadlunait, Europeans.
Qag´gi, singing house.
Qag´gi, music venue.
Qailerte´tang, a certain masked figure.
Qailerte´tang, a masked figure.
Qai´vun, drill.
Qai´vun, drill.
Qa´jaq, kayak.
Qa´jaq, kayak.
Qa´mun, sledge runner.
Qa'mun, sled driver.
Qa´muting (dual of qamun), sledge.
Qa´muting (dual of qamun), sled.
Qana´ra, east-northeast (Nettilling); from qaning, falling snow.
Qanara, east-northeast (Nettilling); from qaning, falling snow.
Qang´ing, a toggle.
Qang'ing, a switch.
Qang´irn, a ventilating hole in snow house; from qa, above.
Qang’irn, a vent in a snow house; from qa, above.
Qa´ning, a certain rib of kayak.
Quitting, a specific rib of a kayak.
Qa´ningnang, east-northeast; from qaning, falling snow.
Qa´ningnang, east-northeast; from qaning, snowfall.
Qaq´djung, arrow.
Qaq´djung, arrow.
Qa´reang, annex of house for an additional family.
Qa'reang, an extension of the house for another family.
Qar´mang (plural qarmat), stone or bone house.
Qar´mang (plural qarmat), stone or bone dwelling.
Qarmau´jang, similar to a qarmang; suffix, -ujang, similar to.
Qarmau'jang, similar to a qarmang; suffix, -ujang, similar to.
Qasi´giaq, Phoca annellata.
Qasi´giaq, ringed seal.
Qatilik, a spear (Iglulik); from qatirn, ivory head of harpoon shaft; -lik, with.
Killer, a spear (Iglulik); from qatirn, ivory head of harpoon shaft; -lik, with.
Qa´tirn, ivory head of harpoon shaft.
Qa'tirn, ivory tip of the harpoon shaft.
Qatu´rang, a boot ornament.
Qatu'rang, a boot accessory.
Qaumarteng´a, days without sun, but with dawn.
Qaumarteng’a, days without sunlight, but with morning.
Qau´mat, a kind of fire (?); from qauq, daylight.
Qau'mat, a type of fire (?); from qauq, daylight.
Qaumati´vun, sun (in the sacred language of the angakut).
Qaumati'vun, sun (in the sacred language of the angakut).
Qauma´vun, moon (in the sacred language of the angakut).
Qauma'vun, moon (in the sacred language of the shamans).
Qauq, daylight.
Qauq, daylight.
Qidja´rung, whirl; from qipivā´, he twists it.
Qidja´rung, whirl; from qipivā´, he twists it.
Qijuqteng´a, harpoon shaft; from qijuq, wood.
Qijuqteng´a, harpoon shaft; from qijuq, wood.
Qilaq, sky.
Qilaq, sky.
Qiler´tuang, clasp for holding the coils of the harpoon line; from qilerpā´, he ties it with a knot.
Qiler'tuang, a clasp for holding the coils of the harpoon line; from qilerpā´, he ties it with a knot.
Qing´ang, a hole to look out of snow house.
Qing'ang, a window to look out of the snow house.
Qing´miaq, mouth piece of drill.
Qing'miaq, drill mouthpiece.
Qipeku´tang, rod to indicate approach of seal to his hole.
Qipeku´tang, a stick used to signal the approach of a seal to its hole.
Qi´piq, blanket.
Qi´piq, blanket.
Qi´qirn, phantom in the shape of a huge, hairless dog.
Qi'qirn, a ghost that looks like a giant, hairless dog.
Qoqsiuariva, the ceremony of washing children with urine.
Qoqsiuariva, the ritual of washing children with urine.
Qudlipar´miut, the inhabitants of the country farthest above; from qu, above; -lirn, being in a certain direction; -pāng, superlative; -mio (plural, -miut), inhabitant of.
Qudlipar'miut, the people living in the northernmost region; from qu, above; -lirn, in a specific direction; -pāng, the highest degree; -mio (plural, -miut), resident of.
Qudlirn, a lamp; from qu, above; -lirn, being in a certain direction.
Qudlirn, a lamp; from qu, above; -lirn, pointing in a specific direction.
Qudli´vun, the uppermost ones; from qu, above; -lirn, being in a certain direction; -vun, possessive first person plural.
Qudli'vun, the highest ones; from qu, above; -lirn, pointing in a certain direction; -vun, our possessive form.
Qudluqsiu´ta, ring on a paddle.
Qudluqsiu´ta, paddle ring.
Qu´ming, a certain lamp.
Qu´ming, a specific lamp.
Quqar´taun, an implement to string fish.
Quqar'taun, a tool used to string fish.
Quvie´tung, a festival.
Quvie´tung, a festival.
Sadni´riaq, cross piece, a certain button, from sadne, side, across.
Sadni´riaq, cross piece, a specific button, from sadne, side, across.
Sadni´run, a yard.
Sadni'run, a yard.
Sāketān´, roulette; from sakagpā´, he pushes it.
Saketan, roulette; from sakagpā´, he pushes it.
Sakie´taun, the Pleiades.
Sakie´taun, the Pleiades.
Sakurpāng´, whale harpoon; from sako, weapon; -pāng, the largest.
Sakurpang, whale harpoon; from sako, weapon; -pāng, the largest.
Sa´ving, knife.
Saving, knife.
Seligo´ung, scraper; from selivā´, he cleans a skin.
Seligo'ung, scraper; from selivā´, he cleans a skin.
Siad´nirn (plural, siadnit), lateral strip in kayak; from siaq-, to place in a row; -nirn, being.
Siad'nirn (plural, siadnit), lateral strip in a kayak; from siaq-, to arrange in a line; -nirn, existence.
Siat´ko, harpoon head (Iglulik).
Siat'ko, harpoon tip (Iglulik).
Siek´tung, the three stars in Orion’s belt: those standing in a row.
Shooting, the three stars in Orion’s belt: those are perfectly lined up.
Sir´dloang, store room of snow house.
Sir'dloang, storage area of the snow house.
Siring´ilang, the excepted month in balancing Eskimo calendars, the month without sun; from sirinirn, sun; -ngilang, he has not.
Siring'ilang, the unique month in balancing Eskimo calendars, the month without sun; from sirinirn, sun; -ngilang, he has not.
Sirinikteng´a, the first days with sunlight; from sirinirn, sun; -tang, new; -a, possessive third person singular.
Sirinikteng'a, the first days of sunlight; from sirinirn, sun; -tang, new; -a, possessive third person singular.
Sirmi´jaung, scraper for kayak; from sirming, thin ice.
Sirmi'jaung, a tool for scraping kayaks; derived from sirming, meaning thin ice.
Sulubaut´, bunch of hair projecting from forehead.
Sulubaut, a tuft of hair sticking out from the forehead.
Sului´tung, festival in which a knife (sulung) is used.
Sului´tung, a festival where a knife (sulung) is used.
Su’lung, wing; knife shaped like a wing.
Su’lung, wing; a knife that resembles a wing.
Tagusiar´bing, eye (of harpoon).
Tagusiar’bing, eye (of harpoon).
Taguta´, a thong (of harpoon).
Taguta, a harpoon thong.
Teliq´bing, certain piece on harpoon line.
Teliq'bing, a specific piece on the harpoon line.
Tesir´qun, scraper; from tesivā´, he stretches it.
Tesir'qun, scraper; from tesivā´, he stretches it.
Tigdluiq´djung, blow with the fist (of a stranger); from tigdlugpā´, he strikes him with the fist.
Tigdluiq´djung, punch with the fist (of a stranger); from tigdlugpā´, he hits him with the fist.
Tika´gung, support of hand in throwing harpoon.
Tika'gung, hand support for throwing a harpoon.
Ti´kiq, thimble.
Ti´kiq, thimble.
Tik´ping, rib of kayak.
Tik´ping, kayak rib.
Tiluq´tung, snow beater; from tiluqpā´, he strikes it, in order to shake something off.
Tiluq’tung, snow beater; from tiluqpā´, he strikes it, to shake something off.
Tingmi´ujang, images of birds (used for dice); from tingmiang, bird; -ujang, similar to.
Tingmi'ujang, bird images (used for dice); from tingmiang, bird; -ujang, resembling.
To´kang, harpoon head.
To´kang, harpoon tip.
Toq´sung, vaulted entrance to snow house.
Toq'sung, arched entrance to the snow house.
Tor´naq, a guardian spirit.
Tor'naq, a guardian spirit.
Tornarsuq, the great tornaq.
Tornarsuq, the great tornaq.
To´ung, tusk, point.
To´ung, tusk, point.
Toung´a, point of spear.
Toung'a, spear tip.
Tugliga, a tress.
Tugliga, a hairstyle.
Tuktuq´djung, the constellation of the Reindeer, or the Great Bear, Ursa Major; from tukto, caribou (deer).
Tuktuq'djung, the constellation of the Reindeer, or the Great Bear, Ursa Major; from tukto, caribou (deer).
Tumi´ujang, a certain lamp resembling a footprint; from tume, footprint; -ujang, similar to.
Tumi'ujang, a type of lamp that looks like a footprint; from tume, meaning footprint; -ujang, meaning similar to.
Tuniq´djung, stern of kayak.
Tuniq´djung, back of kayak.
Tu´pilaq, spirit of a deceased person.
Tu'pilak, spirit of a dead person.
Tu´piq, tent.
Tu´piq, tent.
Tupu´tang, plugs for closing wounds.
Tupu´tang, wound-closing plugs.
Tuta´reang, a certain buckle.
Tuta'reang, a specific buckle.
Tu´ving, strip in the boat nearest the gunwale; from tuk-, to stop a motion; tupā´, he makes it fast.
Tuving, tie off in the boat closest to the edge; from tuk-, to halt a movement; tupā´, he secures it.
Ua´dling, first vault of snow house.
Ua´dling, first house with snow.
Uang´nang, west-northwest, Cumberland Sound; west-southwest in Akudnirn.
Uang'nang, west-northwest, Cumberland Sound; west-southwest in Akudnirn.
Udleq´djung, Sword of Orion: following one another.
Udleq´djung, Sword of Orion: following one another.
Ui´nirn, head of sledge runner.
Ui´nirn, head of sled team.
U´kusik, soapstone kettle.
U'kusik, soapstone pot.
U´lo, woman’s knife.
Ulo, woman's knife.
Uluq´saq, green slate, material for women’s knives; from ulo and -saq, material for.
Uluq'saq, green slate, the material for women's knives; derived from ulo and -saq, meaning material for.
U´miaq, large skin boat.
U'miaq, large skin boat.
Uming, beard.
Uming, beard.
U´mingmang, musk ox.
Umingmang, musk ox.
Umī´ujang, needle case.
Umī´ujang, sewing kit.
U´nang, sealing harpoon.
U'nang, sealing harpoon.
Unaqiu´ta, ring on shaft of sealing harpoon; from unang; -iarpā´, he fastens it; -ta, past participle.
Unaqiu´ta, a ring on the shaft of a sealing harpoon; from unang; -iarpā´, he attaches it; -ta, past participle.
Unarteng´a, iron rod of sealing harpoon; from unang; -tang, belonging to; -a, possessive.
Unarteng'a, sealing harpoon made of iron; from unang; -tang, belonging to; -a, possessive.
Uqsirn, implement for fastening traces to sledge.
Uqsirn, a tool for securing traces to a sled.
Usujang, stern projection of kayak; from usung, penis; -ujang, similar to.
Usujang, a sharp extension of a kayak; from usung, penis; -ujang, like.
ESKIMO GEOGRAPHICAL NAMES USED, WITH ENGLISH SIGNIFICATIONS.
Agdlinartung.
Agdlinartung.
Aggirtijung, abounding with ducks.
Aggirtijung, full of ducks.
Aggo, the weather side.
Aggo, the weather channel.
Aggomiut, the inhabitants of Aggo.
Aggomiut, the people of Aggo.
Agpan, loons.
Agpan, loons.
Agutit.
Agutit.
Aivillik, with walrus.
Aivillik with walrus.
Aivillirmiut, the inhabitants of Aivillik (the walrus country).
Aivillirmiut, the people of Aivillik (the walrus country).
Akudnirmiut, the inhabitants of Akudnirn.
Akudnirmiut, the people of Akudnirn.
Akudnirn, the intervening country.
Akudnirn, the middle nation.
Akugdlirn, the central one.
Akugdlirn, the main one.
Akugdlit, the central ones.
Akugdlit, the main ones.
Akuliaχating.
Akuliaχating.
Akuliaq.
Akuliaq.
Akuliarmiut, the inhabitants of Akuliaq.
Akuliarmiut, the people of Akuliaq.
Amaqdjuaq, the large place where children are carried in the hood.
Amaqdjuaq, the big area where kids are carried in the hood.
Amartung, a woman carrying a child in the hood.
Amartung, a woman holding a child in her hood.
Amitoq, the narrow one.
Amitoq, the narrow one.
Anarnitung, smelling of excrements.
Anarnitung, smelling of feces.
Anartuajuin, the excrements.
Anartuajuin, the waste.
Anaulereë´ling.
Anaulereë´ling.
Angiuqaq; from angivoq, it is large.
Angiuqaq; from angivoq, it's large.
Angmalortuq, the round one.
Angmalortuq, the circle.
Angmang, jasper.
Angmang, jasper.
Angmartung, the open one (not frozen over).
Angmartung, the one that's open (not frozen over).
Aqbeniling, six; so called because reached after six days’ travel.
Aqbeniling, six; named that because it’s reached after six days of travel.
Aqbirsiarbing, a lookout for whales.
Aqbirsiarbing, a whale watcher.
Aqbirtijung, abounding with whales.
Aqbirtijung, full of whales.
Aqojang; from aqo, stern.
Aqojang; from aqo, stern.
Aqojartung; from aqo, stern.
Aqojartung; from aqo, stern.
Arligaulik.
Arligaulik.
Audnerbing, place where seals are approached by the crawling hunter.
Audnerbing, a place where seals are approached by the creeping hunter.
Augpalugtijung, with many red places.
Augpalugtijung, with many red spots.
Augpalugtung, the red one.
Augpalugtung, the red one.
Aulitiving, an annex of the snow house; hills lying at the foot of steep cliffs.
Aulitive, an extension of the snow house; hills situated at the base of steep cliffs.
Auqardneling, with many places where the ice melts early in spring.
Auqardneling, with numerous spots where the ice melts early in spring.
Avatutiaq.
Avatutiaq.
Avaudjeling, with a low saddle.
Avaudjeling, with a low seat.
Eχaloaping, with common salmon.
Eχaloaping, with common salmon.
Eχalualuin, the large salmon (plur.).
Eχalualuin, the big salmon (plur.).
Eχaluaqdjuin, the small salmon (plur.).
Eχaluaqdjuin, the small salmon (pl.)
Eχaluin, the salmon (plur.).
Eχaluin, the salmon (plural).
Eχaluqdjuaq, the shark.
Eχaluqdjuaq, the shark.
Eχoleaqdjuin.
Eχoleaqdjuin.
Idjorituaqtuin, the only places with an abundance of grass.
Idjorituaqtuin, the only places with plenty of grass.
Idjuk, the testicles.
Idjuk, the balls.
Igdlumiut, the inhabitants of the other side.
Igdlumiut, the people from the other side.
Igdlungajung, the bandy legged man; so called from a fabulous tribe.
Igdlungajung, the man with splayed legs; named after a legendary tribe.
Igdluqdjuaq, the large house.
Igdluqdjuaq, the big house.
Iglulik, with houses.
Iglulik, with homes.
Iglulirmiut, the inhabitants of the place with houses.
Iglulirmiut, the people living in the place with houses.
Igpirto, with many hills.
Igpirto, with lots of hills.
Igpirtousirn, the smaller place with many hills.
Igpirtousirn, the smaller area with many hills.
Ijelirtung.
Ijelirtung.
Ikaroling, with a ford.
Ikaroling, with a crossing.
Ikerassaq, the narrow strait.
Ikerassaq, the narrow channel.
Ikerassaqdjuaq, the large narrow strait.
Ikerassaqdjuaq, the wide narrow strait.
Iliqimisarbing, where one shakes one’s head.
Iliqimisarbing, where you shake your head.
Imeraqdjuaq.
Imeraqdjuaq.
Imigen, with fresh water.
Imigen, with clean water.
Ingnirn, flint.
Ingnirn, flint.
Inugsuin, the cairns.
Inugsuin, the cairns.
Inugsulik, with cairns.
Inugsulik, with memorial piles.
Ipiuteling, with an isthmus.
Ipiuteling, with an isthmus.
Ipiuting, the isthmus; literally, the traces of a dog.
Ipiuting, the isthmus; literally, the footprints of a dog.
Irtiujang.
Irtiujang.
Isiritung.
Isiritung.
Isoa, its cover.
Isoa, its cover.
Issortuqdjuaq, the large one with muddy water.
Issortuqdjuaq, the big one with muddy water.
Ita, food.
Ita, cuisine.
Itidliaping, the common pass.
Itidliaping, the usual route.
Itidlirn, the pass.
Itidlirn, the passage.
Itijareling, with a small pass.
Itijareling, with a small pass.
Itirbilung, the anus.
Itirbilung, the butt.
Itivimiut, the inhabitants of the coast beyond the land.
Itivimiut, the people living along the coast past the land.
Ituatukan.
Ituatukan.
Itutonik (Etotoniq).
Itutonik (Etotoniq).
Kaming´ujang, similar to a boot.
Kaming´ujang, like a boot.
Kangertloa´ping, the common bay.
Kangertloa´ping, the public bay.
Kangertlua´lung, the large bay.
Kangertlua´lung, the big bay.
Kangertlukdjuaq, the large bay.
Kangertlukdjuaq, the big bay.
Kangertluk´siaq.
Kangertluk'siaq.
Kangertlung, the bay.
Kangertlung, the bay.
Kangia, its head, its upper part (of a bay).
Kangia, its top, the upper part (of a bay).
Kangianga, its upper part.
Kangianga, its upper section.
Kangidliuta, nearest to the land.
Kangidliuta, closest to the land.
Kangivamiut, inhabitants of Kangia.
Kangivamiut, residents of Kangia.
Kautaq, diorite.
Kautaq, diorite.
Kilauting, the drum.
Kilauting, the drum.
Kingnait, the high land.
Kingnait, the highlands.
Kingnaitmiut, the inhabitants of Kingnait.
Kingnaitmiut, the people of Kingnait.
Kinipetu.
Kinipetu.
Kitigtung, the island lying farthest out toward the sea.
Kitigtung, the island that is the farthest out toward the ocean.
Kitingujang, the gorge.
Kitingujang, the canyon.
Kouaqdjuaq.
Kouaqdjuaq.
Koukdjuaq, the large river.
Koukdjuaq, the big river.
Kouksoarmiut, the inhabitants of Kouksoaq.
Kouksoarmiut, the people of Kouksoaq.
Koukteling, with a river.
Koukteling, by a river.
Kugnuaq, the small nice river.
Kugnuaq, the lovely little river.
Majoraridjen, the places where one has to climb up.
Majoraridjen, the spots where you have to climb up.
Maktartudjennaq, where one eats whale’s hide.
Maktartudjennaq, where people eat whale skin.
Maluksilaq.
Maluksilaq.
Manirigtung, with many eggs.
Manirigtung, with lots of eggs.
Manituling, with uneven places.
Manituling, with rough spots.
Metja, the lid.
Metja, the cover.
Midlurieling, where stones are thrown (for catching white whales).
Midlurieling, where stones are thrown (to catch white whales).
Miliaqdjuin, the small ones, which shut it up(?).
Miliaqdjuin, the little ones, which close it up(?).
Miliqdjuaq, the large one, which shuts up(?).
Miliqdjuaq, the big one, which closes up(?).
Mingong, the beetle.
Mingong, the bug.
Misiqtung.
Misiqtung.
Muingmang.
Muingmang.
Nanuqtuaqdjung, the little bear.
Nanuqtuaqdjung, the baby bear.
Nanuragassain, abounding in young bears.
Nanuragassain, full of young bears.
Naqoreang.
Naqoreang.
Narpaing.
Narpaing.
Naujan, the gulls.
Naujan, the seagulls.
Naujaqdjuaq, the large gull.
Naujaqdjuaq, the big gull.
Naujateling, with gulls.
Naujateling, with seagulls.
Nebarvik.
Nebarvik.
Nedlung, peninsula from the point of which deer are driven into the water; from nedlugpoq, he swims.
Nedlung, the peninsula where deer are driven into the water; from nedlugpoq, meaning he swims.
Nedluqseaq; from nedlugpoq, he swims.
Nedluqseaq; from nedlugpoq, he swims.
Neqemiarbing, where something is carried in the hand.
Neqemiarbing, where something is held in the hand.
Nerseqdjuaq, the large valley.
Nerseqdjuaq, the big valley.
Netchillik, with seals.
Netchillik, with seals.
Netchillirmiut, the inhabitants of Netchillik (the seal country).
Netchillirmiut, the people from Netchillik (the seal country).
Nettilling, with seals.
Nettilling, with seals.
Niaqonaujang, similar to a head.
Niaqonaujang, like a head.
Nikosiving; from nikuipoq, it stands erect.
Nikosiving; from nikuipoq, it stands tall.
Nirdlirn, the goose.
Nirdlirn, the goose.
Niutang, hoop used in whaling.
Niutang, hoop used in whaling.
Nudlung, the posteriors.
Nudlung, the buttocks.
Nudnirn, the point.
Nudnirn, the point.
Nugumiut, the inhabitants of the point.
Nugumiut, the people living at the point.
Nurata.
Nurata.
Nuratamiut, the inhabitants of Nurata.
Nuratamiut, the people of Nurata.
Nuvujalung, the large cape or point.
Nuvujalung, the big cape or point.
Nuvujen, the points.
Nuvujen, the points.
Nuvukdjuaq, the great point.
Nuvukdjuaq, the great point.
Nuvukdjuaraqdjung, the little Nuvukdjuaq.
Nuvukdjuaraqdjung, the small Nuvukdjuaq.
Nuvuktirpāng´, the greatest point.
Nuvuktirpāng´, the best point.
Nuvuktualung, the only great point.
Nuvuktualung, the only great spot.
Nuvung, the point.
Nuvung, the spot.
Okan, the codfish (plural).
Okan, the codfish (plural).
Okavit.
Okavit.
Operdniving, place where one lives in spring.
Operdniving, a place where you live in the spring.
Oqo, the weather side.
Oqo, the weather side.
Oqomiut, the inhabitants of Oqo.
Oqomiut, the people of Oqo.
Owutta.
Owutta.
Padli, with the mouth of a river.
Padli, at the river mouth.
Padliaq, the little mouth of the river.(?)
Padliaq, the small mouth of the river. (?)
Padlimiut, the inhabitants of Padli.
Padlimiut, the people of Padli.
Padloping; from padlorpoq (lying on the face?).
Padloping; from padlorpoq (lying face down?).
Pamiujang, similar to a tail.
Pamiujang, like a tail.
Pangnirtung, with many bucks.
Pangnirtung, with many dollars.
Pikiulaq, Uria grylle.
Pikiulaq, Uria grylle.
Piling, with many things (i.e., game).
Piling up, with various things (i.e., game).
Pilingmiut, the inhabitants of Piling.
Pilingmiut, the people of Piling.
Pingitkalik.
Pingitkalik.
Pitiktaujang.
Pitiktaujang.
Pujetung, with plenty of blubber.
Pujetung, with lots of fat.
Putukin.
Putukin.
Qaggilortung; from qaggi, singing house.
Qaggilortung; from qaggi, music venue.
Qairoliktung, with plenty of seals (Phoca grœnlandica).
Qairoliktung, with many seals (Phoca grœnlandica).
Qamusiojodlang.
Qamusiojodlang.
Qariaq.
Qariaq.
Qarmang, walls.
Qarmang, walls.
Qarmaqdjuin, the large walls.
Qarmaqdjuin, the big walls.
Qarussuit, the caves.
Qarussuit, the caves.
Qasigidjen, Callocephali.
Qasigidjen, Callocephali.
Qaumauang; from qauq, daylight.
Qaumauang; from qauq, daylight.
Qaumauangmiut, the inhabitants of Qaumauang.
Qaumauangmiut, the people of Qaumauang.
Qaχodlualung, the large fulmar.
Qaχodlualung, the big fulmar.
Qaχodluin, the fulmars.
Qaχodluin, the fulmars.
Qeqertakadlinang; from qeqertaq, island.
Qeqertakadlinang; from qeqertaq, island.
Qeqertalukdjuaq, the large island.
Qeqertalukdjuaq, the big island.
Qeqertaq, the island.
Qeqertaq Island.
Qeqertaujang, similar to an island.
Qeqertaujang, like an island.
Qeqertelung, the large island.
Qeqertelung, the big island.
Qeqerten, the islands.
Qeqerten, the islands.
Qeqertome itoq tudlirn, next to the island.
Qeqertome itoq tudlirn, next to the island.
Qeqertuqdjuaq, the large island.
Qeqertuqdjuaq, the big island.
Qerniqdjuaq, the great black place.
Qerniqdjuaq, the great black spot.
Qidnelik.
Qidnelik.
Qimissung, the snow drift.
Qimissung, the snowbank.
Qimuqsuq; from qimuqpoq, he draws the sledge.
Qimuqsuq; from qimuqpoq, he pulls the sled.
Qingaseareang.
Qingaseareang.
Qingua, its head.
Qingua, its leader.
Qinguamiut, the inhabitants of Qingua.
Qinguamiut, the people of Qingua.
Qivitung, the hermit.
Qivitung, the recluse.
Qognung, the narrow place.
Qognung, the tight spot.
Qogulortung (Qaggilortung?).
Qogulortung (Qaggilortung?).
Qordluving, where the water runs in a solid stream.
Qordluving, where the water flows in a steady stream.
Quaiirnang.
Quaiirnang.
Qudjitariaq.
Qudjitariaq.
Sagdlirmiut, the inhabitants of Sagdlirn.
Sagdlirmiut, the people of Sagdlirn.
Sagdlirn, the island nearest the sea.
Sagdlirn, the island closest to the sea.
Sagdlua, its Sagdlirn.
Sagdlua, its Sagdlirn.
Sakiaqdjung, the little rib.
Sakiaqdjung, the small rib.
Sarbaq (sarvaq), the rapids.
Sarbaq (sarvaq), the fast water.
Sarbaqdjukulu, the small rapids.
Sarbaqdjukulu, the little rapids.
Sarbaqdualung, the large rapids.
Sarbaqdualung, the big rapids.
Sarbausirn, the smaller rapids.
Sarbausirn, the minor rapids.
Sarbuqdjuaq, the large rapids.
Sarbuqdjuaq, the big rapids.
Saumia, its left side.
Saumia, the left side.
Saumingmiut, the inhabitants of Saumia.
Saumingmiut, the people of Saumia.
Saunirtung, with many bones.
Saunirtung, with many bones.
Saunirtuqdjuaq, the great one with many bones.
Saunirtuqdjuaq, the mighty one with numerous bones.
Sednirun, the yard.
Sednirun, the yard.
Siegtung, the scattered ones.
Siegtung, the outcasts.
Sikosuilaq, the coast without ice.
Sikosuilaq, the coast without ice.
Sikosuilarmiut, the inhabitants of Sikosuilaq.
Sikosuilarmiut, the people of Sikosuilaq.
Sini, the edge.
Sini, the edge.
Sinimiut, the inhabitants of Sini.
Sinimiut, the people of Sini.
Sioreling, with sand.
Sioreling, with sand.
Sirmiling, with a glacier.
Sirmiling, with a glacier.
Sulung, the valley through which the wind blows howling.
Sulung, the valley where the wind howls.
Surosirn, the boy.
Surosirn, the kid.
Talirpia, its right side.
Talirpia, its right side.
Talirpingmiut, the inhabitants of Talirpia.
Talirpingmiut, the people of Talirpia.
Tappitariaq, the pass crossing two isthmuses.
Tappitariaq, the route connecting two isthmuses.
Tappitaridjen, the passes crossing two isthmuses.
Tappitaridjen, the routes that connect two narrow strips of land.
Taquirbing.
Taquirbing.
Tarionitjoq, the salt water basin.
Tarionitjoq, the saltwater basin.
Tarrionitung, the salt water basin.
Tarrionitung, the saltwater basin.
Taχolidjuin.
Taχolidjuin.
Tessiujang, similar to a pond.
Tessiujang, like a pond.
Tikeraqdjuaq, the great point.
Tikeraqdjuaq, the great point.
Tikeraqdjuausirn, the smaller great point.
Tikeraqdjuausirn, the smaller great point.
Tikeraqdjung, the small point.
Tikeraqdjung, the small spot.
Tikeraqdjuq, the small point.
Tikeraqdjuq, the small tip.
Tininiqdjuaq, the large beach.
Tininiqdjuaq, the big beach.
Tiniqdjuaurbing, the great place with a high tide.
Tiniqdjuaurbing, the amazing spot with a big tide.
Tiniqdjuarbiusirn, the smaller great place with a high tide.
Tiniqdjuarbiusirn, the smaller great place with a high tide.
Tornait, Spirits.
Tornait, Spirits.
Touaqdjuaq.
Touaqdjuaq.
Tuarpuqdjuaq.
Tuarpuqdjuaq.
Tudjan.
Tudjan.
Tudjaqdjuaq.
Tudjaqdjuaq.
Tudjaqdjuaralung.
Tudjaqdjuaralung.
Tudjaraaqdjung.
Tudjaraaqdjung.
Tukia, its farthest corner.
Tukia, its farthest corner.
Tulukan, the ravens.
Tulukan, the crows.
Tuniqten, those lying behind it.
Tuniqten, those deceiving it.
Tunukutang.
Tunukutang.
Tununirmiut, the inhabitants of Tununirn.
Tununirmiut, the people of Tununirn.
Tununirn, the country lying back of something.
Tununirn, the country located behind something.
Tununirusirmiut, the inhabitants of Tununirusirn.
Tununirusirmiut, the residents of Tununirusirn.
Tununirusirn, the smaller Tununirn.
Tununirusirn, the smaller Tununirn.
Tunussung, the nape.
Tunussung, the back of the neck.
Tupirbikdjuin, the tent sites.
Tupirbikdjuin, the camping spots.
Udlimauliteling, with a hatchet.
Udlimauliteling with a hatchet.
Ugjuktung, with many ground seals.
Ugjuktung, with many ground seals.
Ugjulik, with ground seals.
Ugjulik, with beach seals.
Ugjulirmiut, the inhabitants of Ugjulik (the ground seal country).
Ugjulirmiut, the people of Ugjulik (the land of ground seals).
Uglariaq.
Uglariaq.
Uglirn, walrus island.
Uglirn, walrus island.
Uglit, the walrus islands.
Uglit, the walrus islands.
Uibarun, the cape.
Uibarun, the cape.
Ujaraqdjuin, the large stones.
Ujaraqdjuin, the big stones.
Ujaradjiraaitjung; from ujaraq, stone.
Ujaradjiraaitjung; from ujaraq, rock.
Ukadliq, the hare.
Ukadliq, the rabbit.
Ukiadliving, the place where one lives in the fall.
Ukiad living, the place where you live in the fall.
Ukiukdjuaq, the great winter.
Ukiukdjuaq, the great winter.
Ukusiksalik, the place with pot stone.
Ukusiksalik, the place with pot stone.
Ukusiksalirmiut, inhabitant of Ukusiksalik.
Ukusiksalirmiut, resident of Ukusiksalik.
Umanaq, the heart-like island.
Umanaq, the heart-shaped island.
Umanaqtuaq, the great heart-like island.
Umanaqtuaq, the great heart-shaped island.
Umingman Nuna, the land of the musk ox.
Umingman Nuna, the place of the musk ox.
Ungava.
Ungava.
Ungavamiut.
Ungavamiut.
Ussualung, the large penis.
Ussualung, the big penis.
Utiqimitung.
Utiqimitung.
APPENDIX.
After the preceding paper was in type some additional information was received from whalers who returned from Cumberland Sound in the autumn of 1887. In the following notes I give the substance of these reports:
After the previous paper was printed, some extra information was received from whalers who came back from Cumberland Sound in the fall of 1887. In the following notes, I’ll summarize these reports:
Note 1.
Page 467. Since 1883 the whalers have been more successful, and consequently more ships visit the sound. In the present winter—1887-’88—one American and two Scottish whaling stations are in operation in Cumberland Sound; a new station was established in Nugumiut two years ago, and the Scottish steamers which used to fish in Baffin Bay and the northern parts of Davis Strait are beginning to visit Cumberland Sound and Hudson Strait. The whaling in Baffin Bay shows a sudden falling off and it seems that the number of ships will be greatly reduced. This cannot be without influence upon the Eskimo, who will probably begin again to flock to Cumberland Sound and Nugumiut.
Page 467. Since 1883, whalers have been more successful, leading to an increase in the number of ships visiting the sound. During the winter of 1887-’88, one American and two Scottish whaling stations are operating in Cumberland Sound; a new station was set up in Nugumiut two years ago, and the Scottish steamers that used to fish in Baffin Bay and the northern parts of Davis Strait are starting to visit Cumberland Sound and Hudson Strait. Whaling in Baffin Bay has suddenly declined, and it seems the number of ships will be significantly reduced. This change will likely affect the Eskimo, who will probably start to gather again in Cumberland Sound and Nugumiut.
Note 2.
Page 538. In 1884 and 1885 a lively intercourse existed between Padli and Cumberland Sound, and in the spring of the latter year the dog’s disease broke out for the first time on the coast of Davis Strait, and spread, so far as is known, to the northern part of Home Bay.
Page 538. In 1884 and 1885, there was a lot of interaction between Padli and Cumberland Sound, and in the spring of 1885, a dog disease appeared for the first time along the coast of Davis Strait, spreading, as far as known, to the northern part of Home Bay.
Note 3.
Page 574. A peculiar game is sometimes played on the ice in spring. The men stand in a circle on the ice, and one of them walks, the toes turned inward, in a devious track. It is said that only a few are able to do this in the right way. Then the rest of the men have to follow him in exactly the same track.
Page 574. There's a strange game sometimes played on the ice in spring. The men form a circle on the ice, and one of them walks with his toes turned inward, creating a tricky path. It's said that only a few can do this correctly. Then the rest of the men have to follow him along the exact same path.
One of their gymnastic exercises requires considerable knack and strength. A pole is tied with one end to a stone or to a piece of wood that is firmly secured in the snow. A man then lies down on his back, embracing the pole, his feet turned toward the place where the pole is tied to the rock. Then he must rise without bending his body.
One of their gymnastic exercises takes a lot of skill and strength. A pole is tied at one end to a stone or a piece of wood that is securely embedded in the snow. A man then lies on his back, holding onto the pole, with his feet facing the spot where the pole is tied to the rock. Then he has to get up without bending his body.
In another of their gymnastic exercises they lie down on their stomachs, the arms bent so that the hands lie close together on the breast, palms turned downward. Then they have to jump forward without bending their body, using only their toes and hands. Some are said to be able to jump several feet in this manner.
In another of their gym exercises, they lie face down with their arms bent so that their hands are close together on their chest, palms facing down. Then, they have to jump forward without bending their bodies, using only their toes and hands. Some are said to be able to jump several feet this way.
Note 4.
Page 582. In the Report of the Hudson Bay Expedition of 1886, p. 16, Lieut. A. Gordon remarks that the same custom is reported from Port Burwell, near Cape Chidleigh, Labrador. He says: “There lived between the Cape and Aulatsivik a good Eskimo hunter whose native name is not given, but who was christened by our station men ’Old Wicked.’ He was a passionate man and was continually 668 threatening to do some bodily harm to the other more peaceably inclined natives. ***His arrogance and petty annoyances to the other natives became at length unbearable. It appears that these unfortunates held a meeting and decided that Old Wicked was a public nuisance which must be abated, and they therefore decreed that he should be shot, and shot he was accordingly one afternoon when he was busily engaged in repairing the ravages which a storm had made in his ‘igdlu’ or snow house. The executioner shot him in the back, killing him instantly. The murderer or executioner (one hardly knows to which title he is more justly entitled) then takes Old Wicked’s wives and all his children and agrees to keep them ***so that they shall be no burden on the company.”
Page 582. In the Report of the Hudson Bay Expedition of 1886, p. 16, Lieut. A. Gordon mentions that a similar custom is noted from Port Burwell, near Cape Chidleigh, Labrador. He states: “There lived between the Cape and Aulatsivik a skilled Eskimo hunter whose native name is not mentioned, but who was nicknamed by our station men ‘Old Wicked.’ He was a hot-tempered man and was always threatening to harm the other, more peaceful locals. 668 His arrogance and petty annoyances became intolerable. It seems these unfortunate people held a meeting and decided that Old Wicked was a public nuisance that needed to be dealt with, so they decided he should be shot, and he was shot one afternoon while he was busy fixing his ‘igdlu’ or snow house after a storm. The shooter shot him in the back, killing him instantly. The murderer or executioner (it’s hard to say which title fits better) then took Old Wicked’s wives and all his children and agreed to take care of them so they wouldn’t be a burden on the company.”
The fact that the custom is found among tribes so widely separated will justify a description of those events which came under my own observation. There was a native of Padli by the name of Padlu. He had induced the wife of a Cumberland Sound native to desert her husband and follow him. The deserted husband, meditating revenge, cut off the upper part of the barrel of his gun so that he could conceal it under his jacket. He crossed the land and visited his friends in Padli, but before he could accomplish his intention of killing Padlu the latter shot him. When this news was reported in Qeqerten, the brother of the murdered man went to Padli to avenge the death of his brother; but he also was killed by Padlu. A third native of Cumberland Sound, who wished to avenge the death of his relatives, was also murdered by him. On account of all these outrages the natives wanted to get rid of Padlu, but yet they did not dare to attack him. When the pimain of the Akudnirmiut in Niaqonaujang learned of these events he started southward and asked every man in Padli whether Padlu should be killed. All agreed; so he went with the latter deer hunting in the upper part of Pangnirtung, northwest of Padli, and near the head of the fjord he shot Padlu in the back.
The fact that this custom exists among tribes so far apart warrants a description of the events I witnessed. There was a guy from Padli named Padlu. He convinced the wife of a Cumberland Sound native to leave her husband and come with him. The abandoned husband, planning revenge, shortened the barrel of his gun so he could hide it under his jacket. He traveled across the land to visit friends in Padli, but before he could carry out his plan to kill Padlu, Padlu shot him instead. When this news reached Qeqerten, the murdered man's brother went to Padli to get revenge for his brother's death, but he was also killed by Padlu. A third native from Cumberland Sound, wanting to avenge his relatives, was also murdered by Padlu. Because of all these attacks, the locals wanted to get rid of Padlu, but they were too afraid to confront him. When the pimain of the Akudnirmiut in Niaqonaujang heard about these incidents, he traveled south and asked every man in Padli if Padlu should be killed. Everyone agreed, so he went deer hunting with Padlu in the upper area of Pangnirtung, northwest of Padli, and shot Padlu in the back near the head of the fjord.
In another instance a man in Qeqerten had made himself odious. After it was agreed that he was a bad man an old man of Qeqerten, Pakaq, attacked him on board a Scottish whaler, but was prevented from killing him.
In another case, a man in Qeqerten had become very disliked. Once it was decided that he was a bad person, an elderly man from Qeqerten, Pakaq, confronted him on a Scottish whaler, but he was stopped from killing him.
Note 5.
Page 594. The following performance was observed in Umanaqtuaq, on the southwestern coast of Cumberland Sound, in the winter of 1886-’87: An angakoq began his incantations in a hut after the lamps were lowered. Suddenly he jumped up and rushed out of the hut to where a mounted harpoon was standing. He threw himself upon the harpoon, which penetrated his breast and came out at the back. Three men followed him and holding the harpoon line led the angakoq, bleeding profusely, to all the huts of the village. When they arrived again at the first hut he pulled out the harpoon, lay down on the bed, and was put to sleep by the songs of another angakoq. When he awoke after a while he showed to the people that he was not hurt, although his clothing was torn and they had seen him bleeding.
Page 594. The following event happened in Umanaqtuaq, on the southwestern coast of Cumberland Sound, during the winter of 1886-’87: An angakoq started his chants in a hut after the lamps were dimmed. Suddenly, he jumped up and ran out of the hut to where a mounted harpoon was placed. He threw himself onto the harpoon, which pierced his chest and came out the back. Three men followed him, holding the harpoon line, and led the angakoq, who was bleeding heavily, to all the huts in the village. When they returned to the first hut, he pulled out the harpoon, lay down on the bed, and was lulled to sleep by the songs of another angakoq. When he eventually woke up, he showed everyone that he wasn’t injured, even though his clothes were torn and they had seen him bleeding.
Another angakoq performed a similar feat on the island Utussivik in the summer of 1887. He thrust a harpoon through his body and was led by about twenty-five men through the village. It is said that he imitated the movements and voice of a walrus while on the circuit.
Another angakoq performed a similar feat on the island Utussivik in the summer of 1887. He thrust a harpoon through his body and was led by about twenty-five men through the village. It is said that he imitated the movements and voice of a walrus while on the circuit.
Still another exhibition was witnessed by the whalers in the fall of 1886 in Umanaqtuaq. An angakoq stripped off his outer jacket and began his incantations while walking about in the village. When the men heard him, one after the other came out of his hut, each carrying his gun. After a while the angakoq descended to the beach; the men followed him, and suddenly fired a volley at him. The angakoq, of course, was not hurt, and then the women each gave him a cup of water, which he drank. Then he put on his jacket, and the performance was ended. The similarity of this performance with part of the festival which is described on pp. 605 et seq. is evident.
Still another event was seen by the whalers in the fall of 1886 in Umanaqtuaq. An angakoq took off his outer jacket and started his chants while walking around the village. When the men heard him, they each came out of their huts with their guns. Eventually, the angakoq went down to the beach; the men followed him and suddenly fired a shot at him. The angakoq, of course, wasn’t harmed, and then the women each gave him a cup of water, which he drank. After that, he put on his jacket, and the performance ended. The similarity of this performance to part of the festival described on pp. 605 et seq. is clear.
Note 6.
Page 606. The same feast was celebrated in 1886 in Umanaqtuaq, in Cumberland Sound, where all the Talirpingmiut had gathered. The witnesses of this festival describe it exactly in the same way as I described it above. One thing ought to be added, which I did not mention because it seemed to me accidental, but as it was repeated in the same way in 1886 it must have some meaning. I noticed that the Qailertetang, after having invoked the wind, hop about, making a grunting noise and accosting the people. When doing so they are attacked by the natives and killed. According to the description of the whalers they imitate sometimes deer, sometimes walrus. Perhaps this fact gave rise to Kumlien’s description of the “killing of the evil spirit of the deer.” It is remarkable that in 1883 in Qeqerten and in 1886 in Umanaqtuaq the festival was celebrated on exactly the same day, the 10th of November. This can hardly be accidental, and does not agree with the idea sometimes advanced, that the festival refers to the winter solstice. Unfortunately Hall (I, p. 528) does not give the dates of the festival in Nugumiut. On the western coast of Hudson Bay a festival in which masks were used was celebrated about the end of January, 1866 (Hall II, p. 219), but it is hardly possible to draw conclusions from Nourse’s superficial account of Hall’s observations.
Page 606. The same festival took place in 1886 in Umanaqtuaq, in Cumberland Sound, where all the Talirpingmiut came together. Witnesses of this celebration describe it exactly as I have above. One detail should be added, which I didn’t mention earlier because I thought it was just coincidental, but since it happened in the same way in 1886, it must have some significance. I noticed that the Qailertetang, after calling upon the wind, would hop around, making a grunting sound and approaching the people. During this, they get attacked by the locals and killed. According to the whalers’ accounts, they sometimes imitate deer, sometimes walrus. Perhaps this inspired Kumlien's description of the “killing of the evil spirit of the deer.” It’s noteworthy that in 1883 in Qeqerten and in 1886 in Umanaqtuaq, the festival was celebrated on the same day, November 10th. This likely isn’t a coincidence and contradicts the idea sometimes proposed that the festival is related to the winter solstice. Unfortunately, Hall (I, p. 528) does not provide the dates of the festival for Nugumiut. On the western coast of Hudson Bay, a festival featuring masks was celebrated around the end of January 1866 (Hall II, p. 219), but it’s hard to draw any conclusions from Nourse’s brief overview of Hall’s observations.
Note 7.
Page 615. It may be of interest to learn that in 1885 and 1886 two instances of this kind occurred in Cumberland Sound. There was a very old woman in Qeqerten by the name of Qaχodloaping. She was well provided for by her relatives, but it seems that one of the most influential men in Qeqerten, Pakaq, whom I mentioned above (p. 668) as the executioner of a murderer, deemed it right that she should die. So, although she resisted him, he took her out of her hut one day to a hill and buried her alive under stones. Another case was that of an old woman whose health had been failing for a number of years. She lived with her son, whose wife died late in the autumn of 1886. According to the religious ideas of the Eskimo, the young man had to throw away his clothing. When, later on, his mother felt as though she could not live through the winter, she insisted upon being killed, as she did not want to compel her son to cast away a second set of clothing. At last her son complied with her request. She stripped off her outside jacket and breeches, and was conveyed on a sledge to a near island, where she was left alone to die from cold and hunger. The son who took her there did not use his own sledge nor any other Eskimo sledge for this purpose, but borrowed that of the Scottish whaling station.
Page 615. It may be interesting to note that in 1885 and 1886, two similar situations occurred in Cumberland Sound. There was an elderly woman in Qeqerten named Qaχodloaping. Her relatives took good care of her, but it seems that one of the most powerful men in Qeqerten, Pakaq, whom I mentioned earlier (p. 668) as the executioner of a murderer, believed it was right for her to die. Despite her resistance, he took her out of her hut one day to a hill and buried her alive under stones. Another case involved an old woman whose health had been deteriorating for several years. She lived with her son, whose wife passed away late in the autumn of 1886. According to Eskimo religious beliefs, the young man had to dispose of his clothing. When his mother later felt that she wouldn’t survive the winter, she insisted on being killed, as she didn't want to force her son to throw away a second set of clothing. Eventually, her son agreed to her wish. She took off her outer jacket and trousers and was taken on a sled to a nearby island, where she was left alone to die from the cold and hunger. The son who brought her there did not use his own sled or any other Eskimo sled for this, but borrowed one from the Scottish whaling station.
Footnotes
The “foot-note on p. 616” is note 9, ending “.... The full text will be found in the Verhandlungen der Berliner Gesellschaft für Anthropologie, Ethnologie und Urgeschichte, Berlin, 1888.”
The “footnote on p. 616” is note 9, ending “.... The full text will be found in the Proceedings of the Berlin Society for Anthropology, Ethnology, and Prehistory, Berlin, 1888.”
1 Baffin-Land. Geographische Ergebnisse einer in den Jahren 1883 und 1884 ausgeführten Forschungsreise. Von Dr. Franz Boas. (Ergänzungsheft No. 80 zu »Petermanns Mitteilungen«.) Gotha: 1885.
1 Baffin Land. Geographic results of an expedition carried out in 1883 and 1884. By Dr. Franz Boas. (Supplement No. 80 to "Petermann's Communications.") Gotha: 1885.
3 From a rather ambiguous statement (p. 355) it would seem that Owutta belongs to the territory of the Ugjulirmiut; but in later passages ample proof is found that it is inhabited by the Netchillirmiut (pp. 423, 427). I myself was formerly misled by the above passage (Zeitschr. Gesell. Erdk., p. 171, Berlin, 1883).
3 From a somewhat unclear statement (p. 355), it seems that Owutta is part of the Ugjulirmiut territory; however, later sections provide clear evidence that it is actually inhabited by the Netchillirmiut (pp. 423, 427). I was also previously mistaken by the aforementioned passage (Zeitschr. Gesell. Erdk., p. 171, Berlin, 1883).
5 According to the Museum catalogue, the point represented in this figure is from Victoria Island, Boothia, from Hall’s collection; however, it is a typical western arrow.
5 According to the museum catalog, the point shown in this figure is from Victoria Island, Boothia, from Hall’s collection; however, it is a typical western arrow.
6 The fork first represented in this figure is evidently broken, a series of knobs having originally formed the handle.
6 The fork shown in this figure is clearly broken, as a series of knobs once made up the handle.
7 Uqsurelik, with blubber, signifies in the language of the angakut the white bear; lauk, large; -leqdjorpoq, he provides himself with.
7 Uqsurelik, with blubber, means "white bear" in the angakut language; lauk means "large"; -leqdjorpoq means "he takes care of himself."
8 Since the above was written I learn from a paper by Mr. Lucien M. Turner that a similar feast is celebrated in Ungava Bay. (American Naturalist, August, 1887.)
8 Since the above was written, I found out from a paper by Mr. Lucien M. Turner that a similar feast is celebrated in Ungava Bay. (American Naturalist, August, 1887.)
9 Ititaujang means “similar to the anus.” This tradition is curtailed, as some parts were considered inappropriate for this publication. The full text will be found in the Verhandlungen der Berliner Gesellschaft für Anthropologie, Ethnologie und Urgeschichte, Berlin, 1888.
9 Ititaujang means "similar to the anus." This tradition is shortened, as some parts were deemed unsuitable for this publication. The complete text will be found in the Verhandlungen der Berliner Gesellschaft für Anthropologie, Ethnologie und Urgeschichte, Berlin, 1888.
10 See foot-note on p. 616.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See footnote on page 616.
12 By a mistake of the Eskimo who made the drawings, four dogs are harnessed to the sledge. According to his own explanation the dappled one ought to be the only dog.
12 Due to an error by the Eskimo who created the drawings, four dogs are shown pulling the sledge. In his own words, the speckled one should be the only dog.
13 See foot-note on p. 616.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See footnote on page 616.
14 See foot-note on p. 616.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See footnote on page 616.
INDEX
Except for footnote references (“note”), all links lead to the top of the page.
Except for footnote references (“note”), all links go to the top of the page.
Adlet or Erqigdlit 640
Adlet or Erqigdlit __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Agutit Eskimo tribe, location of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Aivillirmiut Eskimo tribe, situation of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Akudnirmiut Eskimo tribe, situation of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Akuliarmiut Eskimo tribe, situation of 421
Akuliarmiut Inuit tribe, location of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
American Museum of Natural History, acknowledgments to 409
American Museum of Natural History, thanks to 409
figured specimens from __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Anderson and Stewart, cited __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Back, cited 485
Back, referenced __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Baffin Land, description of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
tribe distribution in __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
traditions of, with comparisons __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Bessels, Emil, cited __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__
Collinson, cited 503
Collinson, cited __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Cranz, D., cited __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__
Dease and Simpson, cited 458
Dease and Simpson, referenced __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Eenoolooapik, cited __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__
Egede, H., cited 412
Egede, H., cited __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Ellesmere Land, natives of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Emigration of the Sagdlirmiut __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Fishing, Inuit methods of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Frobisher, M., cited __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__
Geography, Inuit knowledge of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Gilder, W. H., cited __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__
Glossary of Inuit terms __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Hall, C. F., acknowledgments to 409
Hall, C. F., thanks to __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
cited 411, 422, 432, 442, 443, 444, 445, 446, 447, 448, 449, 450, 452, 456, 457, 459, 462, 463, 464, 486, 499, 503, 509, 547, 578, 583, 589, 594, 595, 596, 601, 602, 606, 607, 608, 611, 614, 615, 639
cited __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_8__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_9__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_10__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_11__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_12__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_13__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_14__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_15__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_16__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_17__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_18__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_19__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_20__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_21__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_22__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_23__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_24__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_25__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_26__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_27__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_28__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_29__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_30__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_31__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_32__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_33__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_34__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_35__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_36__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_37__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_38__
Hunting, Inuit methods of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Igdlumiut Eskimo tribe, situation of 463
Igdlumiut Eskimo tribe, situation of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Igdlungajung, fabulous tribe in Eskimo tradition 640
Igdlungajung, an amazing tribe in Eskimo tradition 640
Igimarasugdjuqdjuaq the cannibal __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Iglulirmiut Eskimo tribe, situation of 444
Iglulirmiut Eskimo tribe, situation of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Inuarudligang, fabulous tribe in Eskimo tradition 640
Inuarudligang, a fabulous tribe in Eskimo tradition 640
Inugpaqdjuqdjualung 638
Inugpaqdjuqdjualung __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Inuit race, divisions of 420
Inuit groups, divisions of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Itivimiut Eskimo tribe, situation of 463
Itivimiut Eskimo tribe, status of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Kadlu the thunderer 600
Kadlu the Thunderer __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Kangivamiut Eskimo tribe, situation of 463
Kangivamiut Eskimo tribe, situation of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Kingnaitmiut Eskimo tribe, situation of 424
Kingnaitmiut Eskimo tribe, location of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Kiviung 621
Kiviung __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Kleinschmidt, Eskimo orthography of 413
Kleinschmidt, Inuit spelling of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Klutschak, H. W., cited 411, 448, 449, 451, 457, 458, 459, 466, 502, 509, 510, 516, 552, 553, 570, 582, 595, 596, 614, 615
Klutschak, H. W., cited __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_8__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_9__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_10__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_11__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_12__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_13__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_14__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_15__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_16__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_17__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_18__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_19__
Kouksoarmiut Eskimo tribe, situation of 463
Kouksoarmiut Eskimo tribe, situation of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Kumlien, L., acknowledgments to 409
Kumlien, L., thanks to __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
cited __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_8__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_9__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_10__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_11__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_12__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_13__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_14__
Lepsius, cited 413
Lepsius, referenced __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Lyon, G. F., cited 410, 451, 463, 487, 497, 511, 579, 585, 586, 587, 588, 589, 590, 592, 593, 610, 612, 613, 614, 615
Lyon, G. F., cited __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_8__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_9__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_10__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_11__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_12__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_13__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_14__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_15__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_16__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_17__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_18__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_19__
M’Donald, A., cited 410
M’Donald, A., referenced __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
M’Clintock, Captain, cited __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__
Mason, O. T., acknowledgments to 409
Mason, O. T., thanks to __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Mintzer, W., acknowledgments to 409
Mintzer, W., thanks to __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Moravian missionaries, cited 463
Moravian missionaries, mentioned __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Museum für Völkerkunde, Berlin, acknowledgments to 409
Museum of Ethnology, Berlin, acknowledges __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
figured specimens from 472, 473, 474, 477, 479, 480, 481, 483, 486, 487, 488, 496, 508, 513, 514, 515, 518, 519, 520, 523, 531, 532, 554, 555, 556, 557, 565, 566, 567, 568, 569, 570, 571, 576, 613, 634, 644
figured specimens from __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_8__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_9__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_10__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_11__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_12__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_13__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_14__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_15__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_16__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_17__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_18__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_19__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_20__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_21__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_22__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_23__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_24__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_25__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_26__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_27__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_28__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_29__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_30__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_31__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_32__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_33__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_34__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_35__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_36__
Narwhal, source of the __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
National Museum, acknowledgments to 409
National Museum, thanks to __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
figured specimens from 474, 479, 480, 481, 487, 488, 489, 490, 492, 493, 494, 495, 496, 502, 503, 504, 505, 506, 507, 512, 513, 515, 516, 518, 521, 522, 523, 524, 525, 526, 530, 531, 532, 535, 539, 555, 556, 559, 560, 563, 565, 566, 576
figured specimens from __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_8__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_9__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_10__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_11__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_12__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_13__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_14__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_15__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_16__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_17__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_18__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_19__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_20__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_21__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_22__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_23__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_24__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_25__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_26__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_27__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_28__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_29__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_30__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_31__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_32__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_33__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_34__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_35__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_36__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_37__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_38__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_39__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_40__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_41__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_42__
Navigation, Eskimo proficiency in 643
Navigation, Inuit proficiency in __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Netchillirmiut Eskimo tribe, situation of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Northeastern U.S., geography of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
North Greenlanders 460
North Greenlanders __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Nourse, cited 452
Nourse, referenced __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Nugumiut Eskimo tribe, situation of 424
Nugumiut Eskimo tribe, status of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Padlimiut Eskimo tribe, situation of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Parry, W. E., cited 410, 443, 444, 447, 451, 458, 464, 474, 475, 478, 487, 492, 494, 502, 509, 510, 517, 523, 533, 544, 545, 547, 552, 556, 557, 558, 559, 572, 574, 603, 614
Parry, W. E., cited __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_8__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_9__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_10__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_11__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_12__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_13__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_14__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_15__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_16__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_17__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_18__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_19__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_20__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_21__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_22__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_23__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_24__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_25__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_26__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_27__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_28__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_29__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_30__
Penny, cited 425
Penny, referenced __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Petermanns Mitteilungen, cited 409 note
Petermann's Reports, cited __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Pilingmiut Eskimo tribe, situation of 444
Pilingmiut Eskimo tribe, situation of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Qailertétang, fabulous people in Eskimo tradition 640
Qailertétang, amazing people in Eskimo tradition 640
Qaumauangmiut Eskimo tribe, location of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Qingnamlut Eskimo tribe, situation of 424
Qingnamlut Eskimo tribe, status of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Rae, John, cited __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_8__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_9__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_10__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_11__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_12__
Religious beliefs of the Inuit __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Rink, H., cited __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_8__
acknowledgments to 412
thanks to __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Ross, J., cited __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_8__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_9__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_10__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_11__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_12__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_13__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_14__
Sagdlirmiut Eskimo tribe, situation of 444
Sagdlirmiut Eskimo tribe, situation of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Sagdlirmiut of Southampton Island 451
Sagdlirmiut of Southampton Island __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Saumingmiut Eskimo tribe, situation of 424
Saumingmiut Eskimo tribe, situation of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Schwatka, F., cited __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__
Sedna feast 594
Sedna feast __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Sikosuilarmiut Eskimo tribe, location of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Singing house of Inuit __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Sinimiut Eskimo tribe, situation of 451
Sinimiut Eskimo tribe, status of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Smith Sound, Inuit tribes of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
of Iglulik Eskimo tribe 544
of Iglulik Inuit tribe __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
of Hudson Bay Indians 547
of Hudson Bay First Nations __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Spicer, J. O., acknowledgments to 409
Spicer, J. O., thanks to __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
cited __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__
Sturgis, A., acknowledgments to 409
Sturgis, A., thanks to __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
cited 491
cited __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Talirpingmiut Eskimo tribe, situation of 424
Talirpingmiut Eskimo tribe, situation of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Tornit, the __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__
Tununirmiut Eskimo tribe, situation of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Tununirusirmiut Eskimo tribe, situation of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
Turner, L. M., cited __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__
Ugjulirmiut Eskimo tribe, situation of 458
Ugjulirmiut Eskimo tribe, situation of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Uissuit 621
Uissuit __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
fabulous people in Eskimo tradition 640
fabulous people in Inuit tradition __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Ukusiksalirmiut Eskimo tribe, situation of 458
Ukusiksalirmiut Eskimo tribe, situation of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
Ungavimiut Eskimo tribe, situation of 463
Ungavimiut Eskimo tribe, situation of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__
BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY SIXTH ANNUAL REPORT PL. III
BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY SIXTH ANNUAL REPORT PL. III
Transcriber’s Notes
A. The end of this paragraph was misprinted with “it-” and “seal.” at consecutive line ends:
A. The end of this paragraph was misprinted with “it-” and “seal.” at consecutive line ends:
B. Printed as shown. The correct subtitle of the cited book is:
B. Printed as shown. The correct subtitle of the cited book is:
‘Grönland geographisk og statistisk beskrevet,’ etc.
‘Grönland geographisk og statistisk beskrevet,’ etc.
Download ePUB
If you like this ebook, consider a donation!